Outback 2007 2.5, 2,5t 3.0

asieps_tobira.
book 1 ページ２０２０年９月２９日　火曜日　午前１１時３５分
2007 LEGACY SERVICE MANUAL QUICK REFERENCE INDEX
GENERAL INFORMATION
SECTION
FOREWORD FW
HOW TO USE THIS MANUALS HU
SPECIFICATIONS SPC
PRECAUTION PC
This service manual has been prepared
to provide SUBARU service personnel
with the necessary information and data NOTE NT
for the correct maintenance and repair
of SUBARU vehicles.
IDENTIFICATION ID
This manual includes the procedures
for maintenance, disassembling, reas-
sembling, inspection and adjustment of RECOMMENDED MATERIALS RM
components and diagnostics for guid-
ance of experienced mechanics.
Please peruse and utilize this manual PRE-DELIVERY INSPECTION PI
fully to ensure complete repair work for
satisfying our customers by keeping
their vehicle in optimum condition. PERIODIC MAINTENANCE SERVICES PM
When replacement of parts during
repair work is needed, be sure to use
SUBARU genuine parts.
All information, illustration and specifi-

cations contained in this manual are
based on the latest product information
available at the time of publication
approval.
FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD. G2420BE1

asieps_tobira.book 2 ページ２０２０年９月２９日　火曜日　午前１１時３５分
FOREWORD
FW
Page
1. Foreword ....................................................................................................2
Foreword
FOREWORD
1. Foreword
A: FOREWORD
These manuals are used when performing mainte-
nance, repair or diagnosis of Subaru LEGACY.
Applicable model:
2007MY BL*****, BP*****
The manuals contain the latest information at the

time of publication. Changes in the specifications,
methods, etc. may be made without notice.
FW-2
HOW TO USE THIS MANUALS
HU
Page
1. How to Use This Manuals ..........................................................................2
How to Use This Manuals

1. How to Use This Manuals

A: HOW TO USE THIS MANUALS
1. STRUCTURE
Each section consists of SCT that are broken down
into SC that are divided into sections for each com-
ponent. The specification, maintenance and other
information for the components are included, and
the diagnostic information has also been added
where necessary.
2. CONTENTS
The first page has an index with tabs.
HU-2

3. COMPONENT
Illustrations are provided for each component. The information necessary for repair work (tightening torque,
grease up points, etc.) is described on these illustrations. Information is described using symbol.
To order parts, refer to parts catalogue.
Example:
T2
(3) (6)
T3
(7)
(5) T3
(4)
(2)
(8)
T8 T1 (1) (20)
T2 (21) T3
T6 (5)
T10 T2
T5 (1) T3
(2)
(12) (22) (23) T3
(6) (9) (14) (16)
T4 (18)
(10)
(3) (11) T1
(4) (4) (11)
(13)
(10) (15)
(9) T2
(17)
(19)
T6
(4) (10) T4
(3)
(4)
(7) (15)
T2
T11 T6 (22) T5
(3) (12) (35)
T4 (34)
T5
(8) (27) T3
(10) T2
(26)
(23) (24)
T2 (14) (25)
T7
(24)
(36)
(25)
(13) (31)
(30)
T2 T5
(10) (29) (37) (33)
(17) (28) (32)
(16)
(18)
T4
T3 T1 : Selective part
T1 : Replacement part
(21)
: Sealing point
: Should be lubricated with oil.
(20) : Should be lubricated with grease.

T9 (19)
T1 , T2 .... : Tightening torque
HU-00017
HU-3

4. SPECIFICATION
If necessary, specifications are also included.
5. INSPECTION
Inspections to be carried out before and after maintenance are included.
6. MAINTENANCE
• Maintenance instructions for serviceable parts describe work area and detailed step with illustration. It also
describes the use of special tool, tightening torque, caution for each procedure.
• If many serviceable parts are included in one service procedure, appropriate reference is provided for each
parts.
Example:
15.Main Shaft Assembly for Sin- (A)
gle-Range
A: REMOVAL (B)
1) Remove the manual transmission assembly
from vehicie. <Ref. to MT-33, REMOVAL, Manual
Transmission Assembly.>
(C)
11) Tighten the lock nuts to the specified torque us-

ing ST1 and ST2.
NOTE: (D)
Secure the lock nuts in two places after tightening.
ST1 498937000 TRANSMISSION HOLDER
ST2 499987003 SOCKET WRENCH (35)
(E) (F)
Tightening torque:
118 N m (12.0 kgf-m, 86.8 ft-lb) (G)
(H)
ST2 ST1
HU-00020
(A) Component (D) Cautions (G) Tightening torque

(B) Process (E) Tool number of special tool (H) Illustration
(C) Reference (F) Name of special tool
7. DIAGNOSIS
Tables showing a step-by-step process make it easy to conduct diagnosis.
HU-4

8. SI UNITS
Measurements in these manuals are according to the SI units. Metric and yard/pound measurements are
also included.
Example:
Tightening torque:
44 N·m (4.5 kgf-m, 33 ft-lb)
Item SI units Conventional unit Remarks
Force N (Newton) kgf 1 kgf = 9.80655 N
Mass (Weight) kg, g kg, g
Capacity 2, m2 or cm3 2or cc 1 cc = 1 cm3 = 1 m2
Torque N·m kgf-m, kgf-cm 1 kgf-m = 9.80655 N·m
Rotating speed rpm rpm
Pressure kPa (kilopascal) kgf/cm2 1 kgf/cm2 = 98.0655 kPa
mmHg 1 mmHg = 0.133322 kPa
Power W PS 1 PS = 0.735499 kW
Calorie W·h cal 1 kcal = 1.16279 W·h
Fuel consumption rate g/kw·h g/PS·h 1 g/PS·h = 1.3596 g/kW·h
The figure used in these manuals are described in the SI units and conventional units are described in ( ).
9. EXPLANATION OF TERMINOLOGY
List
AAI : Air Assist Injection MD : Mini Disc
A/B : Airbag MFI : Multi Point Injection
ABS : Anti-lock Brake System MID : Multi Information Display
A/C : Air Conditioner MP-T : Multi-Plate Transfer
A/F : Air Fuel Ratio MT : Manual Transmission
ALT : Generator NA : Natural Aspiration
ASSY : Assembly NC : Normal Close (Relay)
AT : Automatic Transmission NO : Normal Open (Relay)
ATF : Automatic Transmission Fluid OP : Option Parts
BATT : Battery P/S : Power Steering
CD-R/RW : CD Recordable/Rewritable P/W : Power Window
CPU : Central Processing Unit PCD : Pitch Circle Diameter
DOHC : Double Overhead Camshaft PCV : Positive Crankcase Ventilation
DVD : Digital Versatile Disc RH : RH (Right Hand)
ECM : Engine Control Module Rr : Rear
EGR : Exhaust Gas Recirculation SOHC : Single Overhead Camshaft
ELR : Emergency Locking Retractor SRS : Supplemental Restraint System
EX : Exhaust SSM : Subaru Select Monitor
F/B : Fuse & Joint Box ST : Special Tool
FL : Fusible Link SW : Switch
Ft : Full-time (AWD) TCS : Traction Control System
FWD : Front Wheel Drive TGV : Tumble Generator Valve
GPS : Global Positioning System T/M : Transmission
H/U : Hydraulic Unit ViS-C : Viscous Coupling
IG : Ignition VSV : Vacuum Switching Valve
INT : Intermittent VTD : Variable Torque Distribution
ISC : Idle Speed Control W/H : Wiring Harness
LH : LH (Left Hand) Pr : Primary
LSD : Limited Slip Differential 2ndr : Secondary
M/B : Main Fuse & Relay Box
HU-5

HU-6
SPECIFICATIONS
SPC
Page
1. LEGACY .....................................................................................................2
2. OUTBACK ..................................................................................................9
LEGACY
SPECIFICATIONS
1. LEGACY
A: DIMENSION
1. SEDAN MODEL
Model 2.5 L SOHC 2.5 L DOHC turbo
Overall length mm (in) 4,730 (186.2)
Overall width mm (in) 1,730 (68.1)
Overall height (at C.W.) mm (in) 1,425 (56.1), 1,435 (56.5)*2
Length mm (in) 1,900 (74.8)
Compartment Width mm (in) 1,445 (56.9)
Height mm (in) 1,165 (45.9), 1,100 (43.3)*1
Wheelbase mm (in) 2,670 (105.1)
Front mm (in) 1,495 (58.9)
Tread
Rear mm (in) 1,485 (58.5)
Minimum road clearance mm (in) 150 (5.9), 160 (6.3)*2
*1:
With sunroof
*2:
2.5 GT spec. B model
2. WAGON MODEL
Overall length mm (in) 4,795 (188.8)
Overall width mm (in) 1,730 (68.1)
Overall height (at C.W.) mm (in) 1,475 (58.1)
Length mm (in) 1,840 (72.4)
Compartment Width mm (in) 1,445 (56.9)
Height mm (in) 1,190 (46.9), 1,145 (45.1)*1
Wheelbase mm (in) 2,670 (105.1)
Front mm (in) 1,495 (58.9)
Tread
Rear mm (in) 1,485 (58.5)
Minimum road clearance mm (in) 150 (5.9) 155 (6.1)
*1: With sunroof
B: ENGINE
Engine type Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled, 4-cylinder, 4-stroke gasoline engine
Valve arrangement Overhead camshaft
Bore × stroke mm (in) 99.5 × 79.0 (3.917 × 3.110)
Displacement cm3
(cu in) 2,457 (149.9)
Compression ratio 10.0 8.4
Ignition order 1—3—2—4
Idle speed at
650 (MT)
Park or Neutral rpm 750
700 (AT)
position
Maximum
kW (HP)/rpm 130 (175)/6,000 184 (243)/6,000
output
Maximum
N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)/rpm 229 (23.4, 169)/4,400 327 (33.3, 241)/3,600
torque
SPC-2
LEGACY
SPECIFICATIONS
C: ELECTRICAL
MT: 12°
Ignition timing (at idling) BTDC 13°
AT: 17°
Spark plug Type and manufacturer NGK: FR5AP-11 NGK: SILFR6A
Generator 12V — 110A
Type and capacity MT 12V — 48AH (55D23L)
Battery
(5HR) AT 12V — 52AH (75D23L)
D: TRANSMISSION
Transmission type 5MT 4AT 5MT 5AT 6MT
Clutch type DSPD TCC DSPD TCC DSPD
1st 3.454 2.785 3.166 3.540 3.636
2nd 2.062 1.545 1.882 2.264 2.235
3rd 1.448 1.000 1.296 1.471 1.521
Gear ratio 4th 1.088 0.694 0.972 1.000 1.137
5th 0.780 — 0.738 0.834 0.891
6th — — — — 0.707
Rev. 3.333 2.272 3.333 2.370 3.545
Type of gear — Helical — Helical —
1st reduction
Reduction gear Gear ratio — 1.000 — 1.000 —
(Front) Type of gear Hypoid Hypoid Hypoid Hypoid Hypoid
Final reduction
Gear ratio 3.900 4.111 3.900 3.083 3.900
Type of gear Helical — Helical — Helical
Transfer reduction
Reduction gear Gear ratio 1.000 — 1.000 — 1.100
(Rear) Type of gear Hypoid Hypoid Hypoid Hypoid Hypoid
Final reduction
Gear ratio 3.900 4.111 3.900 3.083 3.545
5MT: 5-forward speeds with synchromesh and 1-reverse

4AT: Electronically controlled fully-automatic, 4-forward speeds and 1-reverse
DSPD: Dry Single Plate Diaphragm
TCC: Torque Converter Clutch
E: STEERING
Type Rack & pinion
Turns, lock to lock 3.2 2.8, 2.6*1
Minimum Curb to curb 10.8 (35.4), 11.6 (38.0)*1
m (ft)
turning diameter Wall to wall 11.6 (38.1), 12.4 (40.7)*1
*1: 2.5 GT spec. B model
F: SUSPENSION
Front Macpherson strut type suspension
Rear Multi-link type suspension
SPC-3
LEGACY
SPECIFICATIONS
G: BRAKE
Service brake system Dual circuit hydraulic with vacuum suspended power unit
Front Ventilated disc brake
Rear Disc brake Ventilated disc brake
Parking brake Mechanical on rear brakes
H: TIRE
Wheel size 16 × 61/2JJ*2, 17 × 7JJ 17 × 7JJ, 18 × 7JJ*1
Tire size P205/55 R16 89H*2, P205/50R17 88V 215/45 ZR17, 215/45 R18 89Y*1
Type Tubeless, Steel belted radial
*1:
2.5 GT spec. B model
*2:
Model for Canada
I: CAPACITY
2.5 L SOHC 2.5 L DOHC turbo
Model
5MT 4AT 5MT 5AT 6MT
Fuel tank 2 (US gal, Imp gal) 64 (16.9, 14.1)
Total capacity
2 (US qt, Imp qt) 5.0 (5.3, 4.4)
(Overhaul)
When replacing
Engine oil Filling amount engine oil and oil 4.2 (4.4, 3.7) 4.3 (4.5, 3.8)
of engine oil filter
2 (US qt, Imp qt) When replacing
4.0 (4.2, 3.5)
engine oil only
Transmission gear oil 2 (US qt, Imp qt) 3.5 (3.7, 3.1) — 3.5 (3.7, 3.1) — 4.1 (4.3, 3.6)
ATF 2 (US qt, Imp qt) — 9.3 (9.8, 8.2) — 9.8 (10.4, 8.6) —
Front differential gear oil 2 (US qt, Imp qt) — 1.2 (1.3, 1.1) — 1.4 (1.5, 1.2) —
Rear differential gear oil 2 (US qt, Imp qt) 0.8 (0.8, 0.7) 1.0 (1.1, 0.9)
Power steering fluid 2 (US qt, Imp qt) 0.7 (0.7, 0.6)
Engine coolant 2 (US qt, Imp qt) 6.4 (6.8, 5.6) 6.3 (6.7, 5.5) 7.3 (7.7, 6.4) 7.2 (7.6, 6.3) 7.3 (7.7, 6.4)
SPC-4
LEGACY
SPECIFICATIONS
J: WEIGHT
1. US MODEL
Sedan
2.5 L SOHC
Model 2.5 i
2.5 i
Limited
5MT 4AT 4AT
814 821 835 841 846
Front kg (lb)
(1,795) (1,810) (1,840) (1,855) (1,865)
Curb weight 669 678 674 683 680
Rear kg (lb)
(C.W.) (1,475) (1,495) (1,485) (1,505) (1,500)
1,483 1,499 1,508 1,524 1,526
Total kg (lb)
(3,270) (3,305) (3,325) (3,360) (3,365)
1,040 1,040 1,040 1,040 1,040
Gross axle Front kg (lb)
(2,295) (2,295) (2,295) (2,295) (2,295)
weight ratio
(G.A.W.R.) 1,061 1,061 1,061 1,061 1,061
Rear kg (lb)
(2,340) (2,340) (2,340) (2,340) (2,340)
1,960 1,960 1,960 1,960 1,960
Gross vehicle weight (G.V.W.) kg (lb)
(4,325) (4,325) (4,325) (4,325) (4,325)
Vehicle dynamics
— — — — —
control
Power package — — — —
Option Side airbag
Curtain airbag
Sunroof — —
Navigation (DVD) — — — — —
Sedan Wagon
2.5 L DOHC turbo 2.5 L SOHC
Model 2.5 GT
2.5 GT Limited 2.5 i
spec. B
5MT 5AT 6MT 5MT 4AT
860 873 873 907 810 821 830 841
Front kg (lb)
(1,895) (1,925) (1,925) (2,000) (1,785) (1,810) (1,830) (1,855)
Curb weight 689 708 717 687 689 710 689 710
Rear kg (lb)
(C.W.) (1,520) (1,560) (1,580) (1,515) (1,520) (1,565) (1,520) (1,565)
1,549 1,581 1,590 1,594 1,499 1,531 1,520 1,551
Total kg (lb)
(3,415) (3,485) (3,505) (3,515) (3,305) (3,375) (3,350) (3,420)
1,040 1,040 1,040 1,040 1,040 1,040 1,040 1,040
(2,295) (2,295) (2,295) (2,295) (2,295) (2,295) (2,295) (2,295)
weight ratio
(G.A.W.R.) 1,061 1,061 1,061 1,061 1,061 1,061 1,061 1,061
Rear kg (lb)
(2,340) (2,340) (2,340) (2,340) (2,340) (2,340) (2,340) (2,340)
2,010 2,010 2,010 2,010 1,960 1,960 2,010 2,010
(4,435) (4,435) (4,435) (4,435) (4,325) (4,325) (4,435) (4,435)
Vehicle dynamics
— — — — — —
control
Option Side airbag
Curtain airbag
Sunroof — —
Navigation (DVD) — — — — — —
SPC-5
LEGACY
SPECIFICATIONS
Wagon
2.5 L
2.5 L DOHC turbo
SOHC
Model
2.5 i
2.5 GT Limited
Limited
4AT 5MT 5AT
841 857 873
Front kg (lb)
(1,855) (1,890) (1,925)
Curb weight 710 714 728
Rear kg (lb)
(C.W.) (1,565) (1,575) (1,605)
1,551 1,572 1,601
Total kg (lb)
(3,420) (3,465) (3,530)
1,040 1,040 1,040
(2,295) (2,295) (2,295)
weight ratio
(G.A.W.R.) 1,061 1,061 1,061
Rear kg (lb)
(2,340) (2,340) (2,340)
2,010 2,060 2,060
(4,435) (4,545) (4,545)
Vehicle dynamics
— — —
control
Power package
Option Side airbag
Curtain airbag
Sunroof
Navigation (DVD) — — —
2. CANADA MODEL
Sedan
2.5 L SOHC 2.5 L DOHC turbo
Model 2.5 i
2.5 i 2.5 GT
Limited
5MT 4AT 4AT 5MT 5AT
814 821 835 841 846 846 873
Front kg (lb)
(1,795) (1,810) (1,840) (1,855) (1,865) (1,865) (1,925)
Curb weight 669 678 674 683 680 674 676
Rear kg (lb)
(C.W.) (1,475) (1,495) (1,485) (1,505) (1,500) (1,485) (1,490)
1,483 1,499 1,508 1,524 1,526 1,520 1,549
Total kg (lb)
(3,270) (3,305) (3,325) (3,360) (3,365) (3,350) (3,415)
1,040 1,040 1,040 1,040 1,040 1,040 1,040
(2,295) (2,295) (2,295) (2,295) (2,295) (2,295) (2,295)
weight ratio
(G.A.W.R.) 1,060 1,060 1,060 1,060 1,060 1,060 1,060
Rear kg (lb)
(2,340) (2,340) (2,340) (2,340) (2,340) (2,340) (2,340)
1,960 1,960 1,960 1,960 1,960 2,010 2,010
(4,325) (4,325) (4,325) (4,325) (4,325) (4,435) (4,435)
Vehicle dynamics
— — — — — — —
control
Power package — — — — — —
Option Side airbag
Curtain airbag
Sunroof — — — —
Navigation (DVD) — — — — — — —
SPC-6
LEGACY
SPECIFICATIONS
Sedan Wagon
2.5 L DOHC turbo 2.5 L SOHC
Model 2.5 GT
2.5 GT Limited 2.5 i
spec. B
5MT 5AT 6MT 5MT 4AT
860 873 873 907 810 821 830 841
Front kg (lb)
(1,895) (1,925) (1,925) (2,000) (1,785) (1,810) (1,830) (1,855)
Curb weight 689 708 717 687 689 710 689 710
Rear kg (lb)
(C.W.) (1,520) (1,560) (1,580) (1,515) (1,520) (1,565) (1,520) (1,565)
1,549 1,581 1,590 1,594 1,499 1,531 1,520 1,551
Total kg (lb)
(3,415) (3,485) (3,505) (3,515) (3,305) (3,375) (3,350) (3,420)
1,040 1,040 1,040 1,040 1,040 1,040 1,040 1,040
(2,295) (2,295) (2,295) (2,295) (2,295) (2,295) (2,295) (2,295)
weight ratio
(G.A.W.R.) 1,060 1,060 1,060 1,060 1,060 1,060 1,060 1,060
Rear kg (lb)
(2,340) (2,340) (2,340) (2,340) (2,340) (2,340) (2,340) (2,340)
2,010 2,010 2,010 2,010 1,960 1,960 1,960 1,960
(4,435) (4,435) (4,435) (4,435) (4,325) (4,325) (4,325) (4,325)
Vehicle dynamics
— — — — — —
control
Option Side airbag
Curtain airbag
Sunroof — —
Wagon
2.5 L
2.5 L DOHC turbo
SOHC
Model
2.5 i
2.5 GT 2.5 GT Limited
Limited
4AT 5MT 5AT 5MT 5AT
841 844 873 857 873
Front kg (lb)
(1,855) (1,860) (1,925) (1,890) (1,925)
Curb weight 710 692 692 714 728
Rear kg (lb)
(C.W.) (1,565) (1,525) (1,525) (1,575) (1,605)
1,551 1,535 1,565 1,572 1,601
Total kg (lb)
(3,420) (3,385) (3,450) (3,465) (3,530)
1,040 1,040 1,040 1,040 1,040
(2,295) (2,295) (2,295) (2,295) (2,295)
weight ratio
(G.A.W.R.) 1,060 1,060 1,060 1,060 1,060
Rear kg (lb)
(2,340) (2,340) (2,340) (2,340) (2,340)
2,010 2,060 2,060 2,060 2,060
(4,435) (4,545) (4,545) (4,545) (4,545)
Vehicle dynamics
— — — — —
control
Power package — —
Option Side airbag
Curtain airbag
Sunroof — —
Navigation (DVD) — — — — —
SPC-7
LEGACY
SPECIFICATIONS
3. OPTION
Option Front kg (lb) Rear kg (lb) Total kg (lb)
Vehicle dynamics control 5.6 (12.4) 0.2 (0.4) 5.8 (12.7)
Audio 1.8 (4.0) 0.7 (1.5) 2.5 (5.5)
Power package 1.8 (4.0) 3.1 (6.8) 4.9 (10.8)
Side airbag 1.9 (4.2) 1.9 (4.2) 3.8 (8.4)
Curtain airbag (Sedan model) 0.4 (0.9) 5.3 (11.7) 5.7 (12.6)
Curtain airbag (Wagon model) 0.5 (1.1) 5.0 (11.0) 5.5 (12.1)
Sunroof (Sedan model) 8.1 (17.9) 8.9 (19.6) 17.0 (37.5)
Sunroof (Wagon model) 8.3 (18.3) 18.7 (41.3) 27.0 (59.6)
Navigation (DVD) 2.2 (4.9) 0.8 (1.8) 3.0 (6.6)
SPC-8
OUTBACK
SPECIFICATIONS
2. OUTBACK
A: DIMENSION
1. SEDAN MODEL
Model 2.5 L SOHC 3.0 L DOHC
mm
Overall length 4,730 (186.2)
(in)
mm
Overall width 1,770 (69.7)
(in)
mm
Overall height (at C.W.) 1,515 (59.6)
(in)
mm
Length 1,900 (74.8)
(in)
mm
Compartment Width 1,445 (56.9)
(in)
mm
Height 1,100 (43.3)
(in)
mm
Wheelbase 2,670 (105.1)
(in)
mm
Front 1,495 (58.9)
(in)
Tread
mm
Rear 1,490 (58.7)
(in)
mm
Minimum road clearance 215 (8.5)
(in)
2. WAGON MODEL
Model 2.5 L SOHC 2.5 L DOHC turbo 3.0 L DOHC
mm
Overall length 4,795 (188.8)
(in)
mm
Overall width 1,770 (69.7)
(in)
mm
Overall height (at C.W.) 1,605 (63.2)
(in)
mm
Length 1,840 (72.4)
(in)
mm
Compartment Width 1,445 (56.9)
(in)
mm
Height 1,190 (46.9), 1,145 (45.1)*1
(in)
mm
Wheelbase 2,670 (105.1)
(in)
mm
Front 1,495 (58.9)
(in)
Tread
mm
Rear 1,490 (58.7)
(in)
mm
Minimum road clearance 215 (8.5) 220 (8.7) 215 (8.5)
(in)
*1:
With sunroof
SPC-9
OUTBACK
SPECIFICATIONS
B: ENGINE
Horizontally opposed,
Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled,
Engine type liquid cooled, 6-cylinder,
4-cylinder, 4-stroke gasoline engine
4-stroke gasoline engine
Valve arrangement Overhead camshaft
Bore × stroke mm (in) 99.5 × 79.0 (3.917 × 3.110) 89.2 × 80.0 (3.512 × 3.150)
Displacement cm3 (cu in) 2,457 (149.9) 3,000 (183.06)
Compression ratio 10.0 8.4 10.7
Ignition order 1—3—2—4 1—6—3—2—5—4
Idle speed at Park 650 (MT)
rpm 750 650
or Neutral position 700 (AT)
Maximum output kW (HP)/rpm 130 (175)/6,000 184 (243)/6,000 185 (245)/6,600
Maximum torque N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)/rpm 229 (23.4, 169)/4,400 327 (33.3, 241)/3,600 291 (29.7, 215)/4,200
C: ELECTRICAL
MT: 10° MT: 12°
Ignition timing (at idling) BTDC 15°
AT: 15° AT: 17°
Spark plug Type and manufacturer NGK: FR5AP-11 NGK: SILFR6A NGK: ILFR6B
Generator 12V — 110A
Type and capacity MT 12V — 48AH (55D23L)
Battery
(5HR) AT 12V — 52AH (75D23L)
D: TRANSMISSION
Transmission type 5MT 4AT 5MT 5AT 5AT
Clutch type DSPD TCC DSPD TCC TCC
1st 3.454 2.785 3.166 3.540 3.540
2nd 2.062 1.545 1.882 2.264 2.264
3rd 1.448 1.000 1.296 1.471 1.471
Gear ratio
4th 1.088 0.694 0.972 1.000 1.000
5th 0.871 — 0.738 0.834 0.834
Rev. 3.333 2.272 3.333 2.370 2.370
1st Type of gear — Helical — Helical Helical
Reduction gear reduction Gear ratio — 1.000 — 1.000 1.000
(Front) Final Type of gear Hypoid Hypoid Hypoid Hypoid Hypoid
reduction Gear ratio 4.111 4.444 4.444 3.272 3.272
Transfer Type of gear Helical — Helical — —
Reduction gear reduction Gear ratio 1.000 — 1.000 — —
(Rear) Final Type of gear Hypoid Hypoid Hypoid Hypoid Hypoid
reduction Gear ratio 4.111 4.444 4.444 3.272 3.272
5MT: 5-forward speeds with synchromesh and 1-reverse

DSPD: Dry Single Plate Diaphragm
TCC: Torque Converter Clutch
SPC-10
OUTBACK
SPECIFICATIONS
E: STEERING
Type Rack & pinion
Turns, lock to lock 3.2
Minimum Curb to curb 10.8 (35.4)
m (ft)
turning diameter Wall to wall 11.6 (38.1)
F: SUSPENSION
Front Macpherson strut type suspension
Rear Multi-link type suspension
G: BRAKE
Model Except for 2.5 L DOHC turbo 2.5 L DOHC turbo
Service brake system Dual circuit hydraulic with vacuum suspended power unit
Front Ventilated disc brake
Rear Disc brake
Parking brake Mechanical on rear brakes
H: TIRE
Model 2.5L SOHC BASE 2.5 L SOHC 2.5 L DOHC turbo 3.0 L DOHC
Wheel size 16 × 61/2JJ 16 × 61/2JJ*1,17 × 7JJ 17 × 7JJ 17 × 7JJ
Tire size P225/60 R16 97H P225/60 R16 97H*1, P225/55 R17 95V
Type Tubeless, Steel belted radial
*1:
2.5 2 SOHC model for Canada
I: CAPACITY
2.5 L SOHC 2.5 L DOHC turbo 3.0 L DOHC
Model
5MT 4AT 5MT 5AT 5AT
Fuel tank 2 (US gal, Imp gal) 64 (16.9, 14.1)
Total capacity
2 (US qt, Imp qt) 5.0 (5.3, 4.4) 7.0 (7.4, 6.2)
(Overhaul)
When replacing
Engine oil Filling amount engine oil and oil 4.2 (4.4, 3.7) 4.3 (4.5, 3.8) 5.7 (6.0, 5.0)
of engine oil filter
2 (US qt, Imp qt) When replacing
4.0 (4.2, 3.5) 5.5 (5.8, 4.8)
engine oil only
Transmission gear oil 2 (US qt, Imp qt) 3.5 (3.7, 3.1) — 3.5 (3.7, 3.1) — —
ATF 2 (US qt, Imp qt) — 9.3 (9.8, 8.2) — 9.8 (10.4, 8.6) 9.8 (10.4, 8.6)
Front differential gear oil 2 (US qt, Imp qt) — 1.2 (1.3, 1.1) — 1.4 (1.5, 1.2) 1.4 (1.5, 1.2)
Rear differential gear oil 2 (US qt, Imp qt) 0.8 (0.8, 0.7)
Power steering fluid 2 (US qt, Imp qt) 0.7 (0.7, 0.6)
Engine coolant 2 (US qt, Imp qt) 6.4 (6.8, 5.6) 6.3 (6.7, 5.5) 7.3 (7.7, 6.4) 7.2 (7.6, 6.3) 7.2 (7.6, 6.3)
SPC-11
OUTBACK
SPECIFICATIONS
J: WEIGHT
1. US MODEL
Sedan Wagon
2.5 L
3.0 L DOHC 2.5 L SOHC
SOHC
Model
2.5 i
3.0 R 2.5 i 2.5 i Limited
Limited
4AT 5AT 5MT 4AT 5MT 4AT
839 925 928 810 830 832 819 839
Front kg (lb)
(1,850) (2,040) (2,045) (1,785) (1,830) (1,835) (1,805) (1,850)
Curb weight 689 694 694 701 701 701 717 717
Rear kg (lb)
(C.W.) (1,520) (1,530) (1,530) (1,545) (1,545) (1,545) (1,580) (1,580)
1,529 1,619 1,622 1,510 1,531 1,533 1,535 1,556
Total kg (lb)
(3,370) (3,570) (3,575) (3,330) (3,375) (3,380) (3,385) (3,430)
1,040 1,040 1,040 1,040 1,040 1,040 1,040 1,040
(2,295) (2,295) (2,295) (2,295) (2,295) (2,295) (2,295) (2,295)
weight ratio
(G.A.W.R.) 1,061 1,061 1,061 1,061 1,061 1,061 1,061 1,061
Rear kg (lb)
(2,340) (2,340) (2,340) (2,340) (2,340) (2,340) (2,340) (2,340)
1,960 2,060 2,060 2,010 2,010 2,010 2,010 2,010
(4,325) (4,545) (4,545) (4,435) (4,435) (4,435) (4,435) (4,435)
Vehicle dynamics
— — — — — —
control
Power package — —
Option Side airbag
Curtain airbag
Sunroof — — —
Wagon
2.5 L DOHC turbo
Model
2.5 XT 2.5 XT Limited
5MT 5AT 5MT 5AT
860 866 891 898 880 882 912 914
Front kg (lb)
(1,895) (1,910) (1,965) (1,980) (1,940) (1,945) (2,010) (2,015)
Curb weight 699 699 699 699 723 723 723 723
Rear kg (lb)
(C.W.) (1,540) (1,540) (1,540) (1,540) (1,595) (1,595) (1,595) (1,595)
1,558 1,565 1,590 1,597 1,603 1,606 1,635 1,637
Total kg (lb)
(3,435) (3,450) (3,505) (3,520) (3,535) (3,540) (3,605) (3,610)
1,040 1,040 1,040 1,040 1,040 1,040 1,040 1,040
(2,295) (2,295) (2,295) (2,295) (2,295) (2,295) (2,295) (2,295)
weight ratio
(G.A.W.R.) 1,061 1,061 1,061 1,061 1,061 1,061 1,061 1,061
Rear kg (lb)
(2,340) (2,340) (2,340) (2,340) (2,340) (2,340) (2,340) (2,340)
2,060 2,060 2,060 2,060 2,060 2,060 2,060 2,060
(4,545) (4,545) (4,545) (4,545) (4,545) (4,545) (4,545) (4,545)
Vehicle dynamics
— —
control
Option Side airbag
Curtain airbag
Sunroof — — — —
SPC-12
OUTBACK
SPECIFICATIONS
Wagon
3.0 L DOHC
Model 3.0 R 3.0 R
3.0 R
Limited LL Bean
5AT
898 916 914 916
Front kg (lb)
(1,980) (2,020) (2,015) (2,020)
Curb weight 703 730 723 723
Rear kg (lb)
(C.W.) (1,550) (1,610) (1,595) (1,595)
1,601 1,647 1,637 1,640
Total kg (lb)
(3,530) (3,630) (3,610) (3,615)
1,040 1,040 1,040 1,040
(2,295) (2,295) (2,295) (2,295)
weight ratio
(G.A.W.R.) 1,061 1,061 1,061 1,061
Rear kg (lb)
(2,340) (2,340) (2,340) (2,340)
2,100 2,100 2,100 2,100
(4,635) (4,635) (4,635) (4,635)
Vehicle dynamics
control
Power package —
Option Side airbag
Curtain airbag
Sunroof —
Navigation (DVD) — — —
2. CANADA MODEL
Wagon
2.5 L SOHC
Model
2.5 i 2.5 i Limited
5MT 4AT 5MT 4AT
810 819 830 832 839 819 839
Front kg (lb)
(1,785) (1,805) (1,830) (1,835) (1,850) (1,805) (1,850)
Curb weight 701 719 701 701 719 717 717
Rear kg (lb)
(C.W.) (1,545) (1,585) (1,545) (1,545) (1,585) (1,580) (1,580)
1,510 1,538 1,531 1,533 1,558 1,535 1,556
Total kg (lb)
(3,330) (3,390) (3,375) (3,380) (3,435) (3,385) (3,430)
1,040 1,040 1,040 1,040 1,040 1,040 1,040
(2,295) (2,295) (2,295) (2,295) (2,295) (2,295) (2,295)
weight ratio
(G.A.W.R.) 1,060 1,060 1,060 1,060 1,060 1,060 1,060
Rear kg (lb)
(2,340) (2,340) (2,340) (2,340) (2,340) (2,340) (2,340)
Gross vehicle weight 2,010 2,010 2,010 2,010 2,010 2,010 2,010
kg (lb)
(G.V.W.) (4,435) (4,435) (4,435) (4,435) (4,435) (4,435) (4,435)
Vehicle
— — — — — — —
dynamics control
Power package — — — — —
Side airbag
Option
Curtain airbag
Sunroof — — —
Navigation
— — — — — —
(DVD)
SPC-13
OUTBACK
SPECIFICATIONS
Wagon
2.5 L DOHC turbo
Model
2.5 XT 2.5 XT Limited
5MT 5AT 5MT 5AT
860 866 891 898 873 880 882 905 912 914
Front kg (lb)
(1,895) (1,910) (1,965) (1,980) (1,925) (1,940) (1,945) (1,995) (2,010) (2,015)
Curb
699 699 699 699 723 723 723 723 723 723
weight Rear kg (lb)
(1,540) (1,540) (1,540) (1,540) (1,595) (1,595) (1,595) (1,595) (1,595) (1,595)
(C.W.)
1,558 1,565 1,590 1,597 1,597 1,603 1,606 1,628 1,635 1,637
Total kg (lb)
(3,435) (3,450) (3,505) (3,520) (3,520) (3,535) (3,540) (3,590) (3,605) (3,610)
Gross axle 1,040 1,040 1,040 1,040 1,040 1,040 1,040 1,040 1,040 1,040
Front kg (lb)
weight (2,295) (2,295) (2,295) (2,295) (2,295) (2,295) (2,295) (2,295) (2,295) (2,295)
ratio 1,060 1,060 1,060 1,060 1,060 1,060 1,060 1,060 1,060 1,060
(G.A.W.R.) Rear kg (lb)
(2,340) (2,3340) (2,340) (2,340) (2,340) (2,3340) (2,340) (2,340) (2,340) (2,340)
Gross vehicle 2,060 2,060 2,060 2,060 2,060 2,060 2,060 2,060 2,060 2,060
kg (lb)
weight (G.V.W.) (4,545) (4,545) (4,545) (4,545) (4,545) (4,545) (4,545) (4,545) (4,545) (4,545)
Vehicle
— — — —
dynamics control
Side airbag
Option
Curtain airbag
Sunroof — — — — — —
Navigation
— — — — — — — —
(DVD)
Wagon
3.0 L DOHC
Model
3.0 R 3.0 R Limited
5AT
898 916 919
Front kg (lb)
(1,980) (2,020) (2,025)
Curb
703 730 730
weight Rear kg (lb)
(1,550) (1,610) (1,610)
(C.W.)
1,601 1,647 1,649
Total kg (lb)
(3,530) (3,630) (3,635)
Gross axle 1,040 1,040 1,040
Front kg (lb)
weight (2,295) (2,295) (2,295)
ratio 1,060 1,060 1,060
(G.A.W.R.) Rear kg (lb)
(2,340) (2,340) (2,340)
Gross vehicle 2,100 2,100 2,100
kg (lb)
weight (G.V.W.) (4,635) (4,635) (4,635)
Vehicle
—
dynamics control
Power package —
Side airbag
Option
Curtain airbag
Sunroof — — —
Navigation
— —
(DVD)
SPC-14
OUTBACK
SPECIFICATIONS
3. OPTION
Option Front kg (lb) Rear kg (lb) Total kg (lb)
Vehicle dynamics control 5.6 (12.4) 0.2 (0.4) 5.8 (12.7)
Audio 1.8 (4.0) 0.7 (1.5) 2.5 (5.5)
Power package 1.8 (4.0) 3.1 (6.8) 4.9 (10.8)
Side airbag 1.9 (4.2) 1.9 (4.2) 3.8 (8.4)
Curtain airbag (Sedan model) 0.4 (0.9) 5.3 (11.7) 5.7 (12.6)
Curtain airbag (Wagon model) 0.5 (1.1) 5.0 (11.0) 5.5 (12.1)
Sunroof (Sedan model) 8.1 (17.9) 8.9 (19.6) 17.0 (37.5)
Sunroof (Wagon model) 8.3 (18.3) 18.7 (41.3) 27.0 (59.6)
Navigation (DVD) 2.2 (4.9) 0.8 (1.8) 3.0 (6.6)
SPC-15
OUTBACK
SPECIFICATIONS
SPC-16
PRECAUTION
PC
Page
1. Precaution ..................................................................................................2
Precaution
PRECAUTION
1. Precaution 6. AIRBAG
To prevent bodily injury from unexpected deploy-
A: CAUTION ment of airbags and unnecessary maintenance, fol-
Please clearly understand and adhere to the follow- low the instructions in this manual when performing
ing general precautions. They must be strictly fol- maintenance on or near the airbag components,
lowed to avoid minor or serious injury to the person around front of the vehicle (radiator panel, front
doing the work or people in the area. wheel apron, front side frame, front bumper, front
hood, front fender), around side of the vehicle (front
1. ABS door, rear door, center pillar, rear fender, side sill,
Handle the ABS as a total system. Do not disas- rear wheel apron), and on or near the airbag wiring
semble or attempt to repair parts which are not in- harnesses.
structed in this manual. Follow the directions in this To prevent unexpected deployment, turn the igni-
manual when performing maintenance on the AB- tion switch to OFF and disconnect the ground cable
SCM&H/U When parts other than those specified from battery, then wait at least 20 seconds before
are disassembled, it is possible that the ABS sys- starting work.
tem will not operate when needed or cause it to op-
erate incorrectly and result in injury. 7. AIRBAG AND SEAT BELT
PRETENSIONER DISPOSAL
2. VEHICLE DYNAMICS CONTROL (VDC)
To prevent bodily injury from unexpected airbag
Handle the VDC as a total system. Do not disas- deployment, do not dispose the airbag modules
semble or attempt to repair individual parts. Follow and seat belt pretensioner in the same way as oth-
the directions in this manual when performing er waste. Follow all government regulations con-
maintenance on the VDCCM&H/U When parts oth- cerning disposal of refuse.
er than those specified are disassembled, it is pos-
sible that the VDC system will not operate when 8. AIRBAG MODULE
needed or cause it to operate incorrectly and result Adhere to the following when handing and storing
in injury. the airbag module to prevent bodily injury from un-
expected deployment:
3. BRAKE FLUID
• Do not hold the harnesses or connectors to carry
If brake fluid gets in your eyes or on your skin, do the module.
the following: • Do not face the bag in the direction that it opens
• Wash eyes and seek immediate medical atten- towards yourself or other people.
tion. • Do not face the bag in the direction that it opens
• Wash your skin with soap and then rinse thor- towards the floor or walls.
oughly with water.
9. AIRBAG SPECIAL TOOL
4. RADIATOR FAN
To prevent unexpected deployment, only use spe-
The radiator fan may rotate without warning, even cial tools.
when the engine is not ON. Do not place your hand,
cloth, tools or other items near the fan at any time. 10.WINDOW
5. ROAD TEST Always wear safety glasses when working around
any glass to prevent glass fragments from damag-
Always conduct road tests in accordance with traf- ing your eyes.
fic rules and regulations to avoid bodily injury and
interrupting traffic. 11.WINDOW ADHESIVE
Always use the recommended or equivalent adhe-
sive when attaching glass to prevent it from coming
fallzing, resulting in accidents and injury.
PC-2
Precaution
PRECAUTION
12.OIL 2. Hose Removal/Installation Procedures and

When handling oil, carefully observe the following Inspection
to prevent unexpected accidents. • Remove hoses according to the following in-
• Prepare container and waste cloths when per- structions.
forming work which oil could possibly spill. If oil • If using the hose remover (general tool), do
spills, wipe it off immediately to prevent from pene- not use the sharp-pointed hose remover (hose
trating into floor or flowing outside, for environmen- plucker) as it may damage pipe surfaces or hos-
tal protection. es.
• Follow all government regulations concerning
disposal of refuse when disposing.
13.FUEL
NG
NG
When handling and storing fuel, carefully observe
the following to prevent unexpected accidents.
• Be careful of fires.
• Prepare a container and cloth to prevent scatter-
ing of fuels when performing work where fuels can
be spilled. If the fuel spills, wipe it off immediately to
prevent it from penetrating the floor or flowing out, (1)
to protect the environment.
• Follow all government and local regulations con-
cerning disposal of refuse when disposing.
14.ENGINE COOLANT
When handling engine coolant, adhere to the fol-
lowing to prevent from unexpected accident.
• Never remove the radiator cap because of the
danger of engine coolant blowing out when the en-
gine coolant is hot.
• Prepare a container and cloth to prevent spray-
ing of engine coolant when performing work in
which engine coolant can be spilled. If the fuel
spills, wipe it off immediately to prevent from pene-
OKK
(1) Hose remover
(1)
PC-00065
trating into floor or flowing out for environmental • When using pliers to make hose removal eas-
protection. ier, always be sure to use a cloth to protect the
• Follow all government and local regulations con- hose, slightly rotate the hose, and then pull
cerning disposal of refuse when disposing. straight out by hand.
15.AIR CONDITIONER REFRIGERANT
In order to prevent from global warming, avoid re-
leasing air conditioner refrigerant into the atmo-
sphere. Using a refrigerant recovery system,
discharge and reuse it.
16.HOSE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
PROCEDURES
1. Hose Removal/Installation Pre-Procedures
• Be careful to inspect hoses so as not to use dam-
aged or deformed hoses. Using such hoses could
cause leakage or loss of oil, with leaked oil splash-
ing on exhaust pipes or other hot parts, resulting in
smoke or fire.
• Always remove hoses when performing work.
Not removing the hoses and moving parts out of the
way when performing procedures may damage the
inside of hoses and cause other negative affects.
PC-3
Precaution
PRECAUTION
• Inspect the following points in continuous

use, and replace any hoses that are damaged or
defective with new parts. (1)
• Replace any hoses that are riding over the
stay or spool with new parts.
(1)
PC-00070
(1) Contacting the spool. (Do not excessively insert

the hose to prevent the hose from becoming
wrinkled up.)
(2) Apply an equal clamping force all around the
PC-00067
hose periphery.
(1) Hose riding over a stay
• Check that the position and orientation of
hose clamps, and the hose layout are correct.
(Check that the position and orientation are
(1)
matching, they are not excessively short/long,
there are no differences with before performing
the procedures, and that there is clearance be-
tween hoses and surrounding parts.)
• After installing, check that there are no dis-
connection of hoses or leakage from hoses.
(Check that hoses are securely fixed by the
clamps.)
PC-00068 • Inspect the hose clips and clamps according
to the following points, and replace any parts
(1) Hose riding over a spool
that are damaged or defective with new parts.
• Check the inner and outer surfaces of the • Check for deformations, rust, damage, and
hose for damage, cracks, breakage, hardening/ adhering of foreign matter.
softening/swelling of rubber, internal peeling, • For clips, check that the spring functions and
and that there are no deformations caused by in- has clamping force.
filtration/adhesion of foreign matter, and no • For clamps, check that the screw can clinch,
twisted hoses. Replace any defective hoses the clamp has not become oval shaped, and the
with new parts. screw is not damaged.
• Install hoses according to the following in- • Inspect the pipes according to the following
structions. points, and replace any parts that are damaged
• Carefully check the installation positions. or defective with new parts.
• Do not use any lubricants. Check that the pipes do not have any damage,
• Securely insert until the specified positions rust, peeling (including peeling plating), foreign
(until contacting spool). matter adhering, twisting, crushing, bending, or
cracks.
• Replace the following parts with new parts if
(2) (1) the hoses have been removed or their installa-
tion positions have been changed.
ATF cooler hose, engine oil cooler hose, MT oil
cooler hose, power steering suction hose, and
power steering return hose.
PC-00069
PC-4
NOTE
NT
Page
1. Note ............................................................................................................2
Note
NOTE
1. Note 7. LIFT AND JACK

When using a lift or shop jack raise a vehicle or us-
A: NOTE ing rigid rack to support a vehicle, always follow in-
This is the information that can improve the effi- structions concerning jack-up points and weight
ciency of maintenance and assure the sound work. limits to prevent the vehicle from falling, which
could result in injury. Be especially careful that the
1. FASTENERS NOTICE vehicle is balanced before raising it. Be sure to set
Fasteners are used to prevent the parts from dam- the wheel stoppers when jacking-up only the front
age, dislocation and play due to looseness. Fasten- or rear side of the vehicle.
ers must be tightened to the specified torque.
NOTE:
Do not apply paint, lubricant, rust retardant or other
substance to the surface around bolts, nuts, etc. • When using a lift, follow its operation manual be-
Doing so will make it difficult to obtain the correct fore work.
torque and result in looseness and other problem. • Do not work or leave unattended while the vehi-
cle is supported with jack, support it with rigid
2. STATIC ELECTRICITY DAMAGE racks.
Do not touch the control modules, connectors, logic • Be sure to use the rigid racks with rubber at-
boards and other such parts when there is a possi- tached to cradle to support the vehicle.
bility of static electricity. Always use a static elec- • When using a plate lift, use a rubber attachment.
tricity prevention cord or touch grounded metal for
the elimination of static electricity before conduct-
ing work.
3. BATTERY
When removing the battery terminal, always be
sure to turn the ignition switch to OFF to prevent (A)
electrical damage of the control module from over- (C)
current. Be sure to remove the battery ground ca-
(B)
ble first.
NT-00070
4. SERVICE PARTS
(A) 80 mm (3.1 in) or more
Use genuine parts for maximum performance and
(B) 100 — 150 mm (3.94 — 5.91 in)
maintenance when conducting repairs. Subaru/FHI
will not be responsible for poor performance result- (C) 120 — 190 mm (4.72 — 7.48 in)
ing from the use of parts except for genuine parts.
• Align the cushion rubber end of plate lift with the
5. PROTECTING VEHICLE UNDER MAIN- end of rubber attachment. (Portion b) Also, align
TENANCE the protrusion portion of the supporting locations
Make sure to attach the fender cover, seat covers, with the end of attachment. (Portion a)
etc. before work.
6. ENSURING SECURITY DURING WORK
When working in a group of two or more, perform
the work with calling each other to ensure mutual
safety.
NT-2
Note
NOTE
• Do not use the plate lift whose attachment does not reach the supporting locations.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(6)
(4)
(6)
(5)
a (6)
(6) a
b
NT-00086
(1) Supporting locations (3) Swing arm lift (5) Plate lift
(2) Pantograph jack (4) Rigid rack (6) Attachment
NT-3
Note
NOTE
(A) (1)
(B) (2)
NT-00072
(A) Front (B) Rear
(1) Front crossmember (2) Rear differential
NT-4
Note
NOTE
8. TIE-DOWNS
Tie-downs are used when transporting vehicles and when using the chassis dynamo. Attach tie-down only
to the specified locations on the vehicle.
• Tie-down location
CAUTION:
Use the T-hook for rear tie-down. Do not use the hook other than T-hook, otherwise it can be removed
when transporting vehicles.
(1) (1)
(1)
NT-00149
(1) Hook for tie-down

• CHAIN DIRECTION AT TIE-DOWN CONDITION
NOTE:
Pull the chains LH and RH in the same direction,
but front and rear side in the counter direction. Pull
all the chains in a same moment.
NT-00117
NT-5
Note
NOTE
• CHAIN PULLING RANGE AT TIE-DOWN CON- • VEHICLE SINKING VOLUME AT TIE-DOWN

DITION CONDITION
(2)
Measure the distance between the highest tire
(2) (2) point and highest arch point before and after tie-
down. Difference of measured values (sinking vol-
(2) (2) ume) should be within 50 mm (1.97 in) and make
(2) sure to fix the vehicle securely.
(3) (3) (3) (3)

L
: (1) NT-00122 L
(1) Chain pulling range at tie-down condition

(2) 20°
(3) 45°
NT-00076
(2)
(1)
(2)
(1)
NT-00151
(F) Front side
(1) Tightening direction of chain

(2) 45°
NT-6
Note
NOTE
9. TOWING
Avoid towing vehicles except when the vehicle cannot be driven. For models with AWD, AT or VTD, use a
loader instead of towing. When towing other vehicles, pay attention to the following to prevent hook or vehicle
damage resulting from excessive weight.
• Do not tow other vehicles with a front tie-down hook.
• Make sure the vehicle towing is heavier than the vehicle being towed.
• FRONT
Remove the fog light cover (except for OUTBACK model) and hook cover, and then install the hook.
(A)
(B)
(B)
(C)
(C)
NT-00118
(A) Fog light cover (except for (B) Hook cover (C) Hook
OUTBACK model)
• REAR
NT-00078
NT-7
Note
NOTE
• NOTES
Towing Precautions MT AT
Lifting up four wheels (On a trailer) Towing the vehicle after lifting up all four wheels is a
basic rule for AWD model.
NT-00023
Rope • Check if both front and rear wheels are rotated nor-
mally.
• AT model driving conditions: Driving speed 50 km/h
(31 MPH) or less
Allow driving distance 30 km (19 miles) or less
NT-00024
Raising the front wheels Prohibited for full-time AWD model.
NT-00025
Lifting up the front wheels • Prohibited, due to damage on bumper, front grille, etc.
• Do not raise the vehicle with bumper.
NT-00026
Marked : OK, Marked : Prohibited, Marked : Conditionally OK.
NT-8
Note
NOTE
CAUTION:
• Check ATF, gear oil and rear differential oil before driving.
• Place the shift lever in “N” position during towing.
• Do not lift up the rear wheels to avoid unsteady rotation.
• Turn the ignition key to “ACC”, then check the steering wheel moves freely.
• Release the parking brake to avoid tire dragging.
• Since the power steering does not work, be careful for the heavy steering effort. (When engine
is stopped)
• Since the servo brake does not work, be careful that the brake is not applied effectively. (When
engine is stopped)
• In case of the malfunction of internal transmission or drive system, lift up four wheels (on a trail-
er) for towing.
10.FRONT HOOD STAY INSTALLATION
• AT THE CHECK AND GENERAL MAINTENANCE
NT-00079
• WHEN WIDER HOOD OPENING IS NECESSARY

Set the stay into the hole of lower hood as shown in the figure below.
NT-00080
NT-9
Note
NOTE
11.GENERAL SCAN TOOL (2) Let the vehicle ride on the tester and free
Using general scan tools will greatly improve the ef- roller gently.
ficiency of repairing engine electronic throttle con- CAUTION:
trols. Subaru Select Monitor can be used to Fix the vehicle using a pulling metal (chain or
diagnose the engine, ABS, air conditioner and oth- wire) to the front and rear towing hooks or tie-
er parts. down hook to prevent the lateral runout of front
wheels and springing out of vehicle.
12.AWD CIRCUIT MEASURES
1) Full-time AWD MT model
Since viscous coupling (limited slip differential) is
used in the center differential, cut-off of AWD circuit
cannot be carried out.
2) Full-time AWD 5AT model
Since VTD type is used in the center differential,
cut-off of AWD circuit cannot be carried out.
3) Full-time AWD 4AT model
Insert a spare fuse into FWD fuse holder in the fuse (A)
box located in the left side of engine room to select NT-00033
the FWD. Since electronically controlled MT-P hy-
(A) Free roller
draulic multi-plate clutch is adapted for center dif-
ferential, select FWD. When maintenance is (3) Set the speedometer tester.
performed with jack-up or on the free roller, check (4) Conduct the speedometer test work.
the illumination of AWD warning light in the combi-
nation meter. CAUTION:
Do not operate the clutch quickly and do not ac-
celerate or decelerate suddenly during work.
2) Rear wheel jack-up system
(1) Set the vehicle on speedometer tester.
CAUTION:
Fix the vehicle using a pulling metal (chain or
wire) to the front and rear towing hooks or tie-
down hook to prevent the lateral runout of front
(A)
wheels and springing out of vehicle.
(2) Jack up the rear wheels and set the rigid
racks to the specified locations of side sill.
(A)
(B)
NT-00081 NT-00034
(A) FWD fuse holder (A) Rigid rack

(B) AWD warning light
(3) Conduct the speedometer test work.
13.SPEEDOMETER TEST CAUTION:
1) Rear wheel free roller system Do not operate the clutch quickly and do not ac-
(1) Set the free roller on the floor of rear wheel celerate or decelerate suddenly during work.
side securely according to the wheel base and
rear tread of the vehicle.
NT-10
Note
NOTE
14.BRAKE TEST (2) When the brake dragging force is large.

1) Full-time AWD MT model • Check the dragging of brake pad or brake
(1) Perform this test after driving the vehicle 2 to shoe.
3 km (1.24 to 1.86 miles) on road in order to sta- Specifications:
bilize the viscous torque of viscous coupling.
Braking force
(2) Keep the front or rear wheels on the ground
for this test. Rear wheel total More than 10% of load on front or rear
wheels
NOTE: Difference between Less than 8% of load on front or rear
Effect of the viscous torque on braking force will be right and left wheels
added approx. 25 kg compared with FWD model. wheels
Grand total More than 50% of vehicle weight at
the time of test
• When measurement is difficult to carry out

because both of front wheels are locked, brake
force measurement in this condition conforms
to standard grand total.
(A) 15.ON THE CAR WHEEL BALANCING

(C) (B)
CAUTION:
NT-00029
• Carry out this procedures after measuring
(A) Brake tester the balance of each single tire.
(B) Position for measuring front wheel
• Set the vehicle so that the front and rear
wheels are the same height.
(C) Position for measuring rear wheel
• Release the parking brake during measure-
(3) When the brake dragging force is large. ment.
• Check the dragging of brake pad or brake • Rotate each wheel by hands, and make sure it
shoe. rotates without dragging.
• Since it may be affected by the viscosity of • Do not operate the clutch quickly and do not
viscous couping, jack up either of the front or accelerate or decelerate suddenly during work.
rear two wheels to check the each wheel rota- • When an error is indicated during engine
tion condition with the viscous coupling affec- drive, do not use the motor drive together.
tion removed. 1) Set the rigid rack to the specified locations of
2) Full-time AWD AT model side sill, jack up the front or rear two wheels of non-
(1) Keep the front or rear wheels on the ground measuring side and set the pickup stands to two
during measurement. wheels of measuring side.
(A)
(C) (A)
(B)
(B)
NT-00031
NT-00029
(A) Balancer body

(A) Brake tester
(B) Pickup stand
(B) Position for measuring front wheel
(C) Position for measuring rear wheel
2) For drive wheel, drive the tires with engine for
measurement.
3) For non-drive wheel, drive the tires from the on
the car wheel balancer for measurement.
NT-11
Note
NOTE
NT-12
IDENTIFICATION
ID
Page
1. Identification ...............................................................................................2
Identification
IDENTIFICATION
1. Identification
A: IDENTIFICATION
1. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER & LABEL LOCATIONS
The V.I.N. (Vehicle Identification Numbers) is used to classify the vehicle.
• POSITIONING OF THE PLATE LABEL FOR IDENTIFICATION
(1)
(2)
(4)
(5)
(3)
(2)
ID-00167
(1) Emission control label (3) Model number label (5) Emission control label FMVSS
(2) Vehicle identification number (4) Tire inflation pressure label label (U.S. model)
(V.I.N.) (Driver’s side) CMVSS label (Canada model)
• ENGINE • AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

4AT
(1)
(2)
(1)
(2)
ID-00059
ID-00135
(1) Engine serial number (Punch mark)
(2) Engine type (Crankcase upper side) (1) AT type label
(2) Transmission serial number label
ID-2
Identification
IDENTIFICATION
5AT • REAR DIFFERENTIAL

T-TYPE
(1)
(2)
(1)
ID-00067
ID-00056
(1) AT type label
(2) Transmission serial number label (1) Type (white paint)
• MANUAL TRANSMISSION VA1-TYPE

5MT
(1)
(1) (2)
DI-00396
ID-00136
(1) Type (label)
(1) Transmission serial No.
(2) MT type label VA2-TYPE
6MT
(1)
(2)
(1)
DI-00397
(1) Type (label)

ID-00137
(1) Transmission serial No.

(2) MT type label
ID-3
Identification
IDENTIFICATION
• Model number label
ID-00170
2. MEANING OF V.I.N.
The meaning of the V.I.N. is as follows:
]4S3BL616X76200001[
The starting and ending brackets ( ] [ ) are stop marks.
Digits Code Meaning Details
1—3 4S3 Manufacturer body area 4S3: Except for OUTBACK model
4S4: OUTBACK model
4 B Car line LEGACY
5 L Body type L: Sedan
P: Wagon
6 6 Displacement 6: 2.5 L AWD
8: 3.0 L AWD
7 1 Grade 0: XT
1: i
2: i Limited
3: XT Limited
4: R
5: R Limited
6: R L.L.Bean
7: GT Limited
8: GT
9: GT spec. B
8 6 Restraint or GVWR 6: Manual belts, Dual airbag, Side airbag
Class (Except for OUTBACK model)
C: Class C (GVWR 4001 — 5000 lb) (OUTBACK model)
9 X Check digit 0 — 9&X
10 7 Model year 7: 2007MY
11 6 Transmission type 3: Full-time AWD 6MT
4: Full-time AWD 5AT
6: Full-time AWD 5MT
7: Full-time AWD 4AT
12 — 17 200001 Serial number From 200001: Sedan
From 300001: Wagon
ID-4
Identification
IDENTIFICATION
3. MODEL NUMBER PLATE

The model number plate indicates the type, V.I.N. <Ref. to ID-4, MEANING OF V.I.N., IDENTIFICATION,
Identification.>, applied model, option code, trim code, engine type, transmission type and the exterior color
code. This information is helpful when placing orders for parts.
• BL9CYHJ
1 B Series LEGACY
2 L Body type L: Sedan
P: Wagon
3 9 Engine displacement 9: 2.5 L AWD
Drive system E: 3.0 L AWD
Suspension system
4 C Model year C: 2007MY
5 Y Destination Y: U.S., Canada
6 H Grade A: OUTBACK 2.5 XT
C: 2.5 GT Limited
D: OUTBACK 2.5 XT Limited
E: 2.5 GT
F: 2.5 GT spec. B
H: 2.5 i
K: 2.5 i Limited
S: OUTBACK 2.5 i
T: OUTBACK 2.5 i Limited
U: OUTBACK 3.0 R
V: OUTBACK 3.0 R Limited
X: OUTBACK 3.0 R L.L.Bean
7 J Transmission, fuel feed J: SOHC MFI 5MT
system D: DOHC MFI Turbo 5MT
H: DOHC MFI Turbo 6MT
L: SOHC MFI 4AT TIP
V: DOHC MFI Turbo 5AT TIP
U: DOHC MFI 5AT TIP
The engine and transmission type are as follows.

• ENGINE
EJ253BSDFB
1 and 2 EJ Engine type EJ: 4 cylinder
EZ: 6 cylinders
3 and 4 25 Displacement 25: 2.5 L
30: 3.0 L
5 3 Fuel feed system 3: MFI-NA (SOHC)
D: MFI-NA (DOHC, H6)
5: MFI turbo
6 B Emission control B: For USA
7 S Mounted transmission L: 5AT
S: 5MT (Flexible type flywheel)
E: 5MT
(Flexible type flywheel, Wide angle damper type disc wheel)
G: 6MT
P: 4AT
8 — 10 DFB Detailed specifications Used when ordering parts. See the parts catalog for details.
ID-5
Identification
IDENTIFICATION
• TRANSMISSION
TY757VCDAA
1 T Transmission T: Transmission
2 Y Transmission type Y: Full-time AWD MT center differential
B: Full-time AWD AT center differential
Z: Full-time AWD AT MPT
3 and 4 75 Identification 75: 5MT
85: 6MT
1B: 4AT
5C: 5AT
5 7 Series 7: LEGACY, OUTBACK
6: 6MT
6 V Transmission specifica- C: Full-time AWD VTD 5AT
tions L: Full-time AWD MPT 4AT
V: Full-time AWD 5MT single range with viscous coupling cen-
ter differential
W: Full-time AWD 6MT single range with viscous coupling cen-
ter differential
7 C Mounted vehicle C: 2.5 L SOHC
M: 3.0 L DOHC
W: 2.5 L DOHC Turbo
8 — 10 DAA Detailed specifications Used when ordering parts. See the parts catalog for details.
• REAR DIFFERENTIAL
XJ
Code Reduction gear ratio LSD
XJ 4.111 None
T1 3.900 None
XZ 3.083 Viscous
XU 3.272 Viscous
CF 4.444 Viscous
EW 3.900 Viscous
JE 4.111 Viscous
CD 4.444 Viscous
HY 3.545 Torsen
• Option
U5UC
1—2 U5 Destination U5: U.S. For states using California emission standards
U6: U.S. For states not using California emission standards
U4: U.S. For USA
C0: Canada
3 U Option equipment D: Vehicle dynamics control (VDC), Cruise control
E: Vehicle dynamics control (VDC), Cruise control, Power pack
U: Cruise control
3: Cruise control, Power pack
4 C Option equipment C: A/C, Side airbag, Curtain airbag
K: A/C, Side airbag, Curtain airbag, Sunroof, Navigation system
W: A/C, Side airbag, Curtain airbag, Sunroof
ID-6
RECOMMENDED MATERIALS
RM
Page
1. Recommended Materials ...........................................................................2
Recommended Materials
1. Recommended Materials
A: RECOMMENDED MATERIALS
1. GENERAL
To insure the best performance, always use the specified oil, gasoline, adhesive, sealant, etc. or a substitute
of equivalent quality.
2. FUEL
Always use gasoline of the same or higher octane value than specified in the owner’s manual. Ignoring the
specifications below will result in damage or poor performance of engine and fuel injection system. Use the
specified gasoline to correct performance.
Unleaded gasoline
In order to reduce air pollution, use unleaded gasoline for the vehicle equipped with catalytic converter. Using
leaded gasoline may damage the catalytic converter.
3. LUBRICANTS
Use either lubricants in the table below or equivalent. See the table below to choose the correct SAE viscos-
ity.
Lubricants Recommended materials
API standard ILSAC standard
Engine oil SM “Energy conserving” GF-4
SERVICE S TR OLEUM
PI PE
N
A
IN
M
FOR
AM ER I CA
ST I
SAE
GASOLINE
TUTE
5W-30
ENGINES
EN
NG
R
E
VI
GY R C
CONS E ER D
T I F IE
RM-00049 RM-00002
Manual Transmission Oil GL-5 —
AT front differential gear oil GL-5 —
Rear differential gear oil GL-5 —
RM-2
SAE viscosity No. and applicable temperature

Engine oil
(˚C) –30 –20 –10 0 10 20 30 40
(˚F) –22 –4 14 32 50 68 86 104
10W-30 or 10W-40
5W-30 Recommend
RM-00059
Manual transmission oil, rear differential gear oil and AT front differential gear oil
(˚C) –30 –20 –10 0 10 20 30 40
(˚F) –22 –4 14 32 50 68 86 104
90
85W
80W
75W-90
RM-00045
RM-3
4. FLUID
Use the fluids specified in the table below. Do not mix two different kinds or makes of fluid.
CAUTION:
Always use the recommended or equivalent ATF. Using material except recommended one or sub-
stitute would cause trouble.
Fluid Recommended materials Alternative Remarks
IDEMITSU: ATF HP
Automatic transmission fluid SUBARU ATF —
Castrol: Transmax J
Power steering fluid DEXRON III — —
Brake fluid FMVSS No. 116 DOT3 or DOT4 — —
Clutch fluid FMVSS No. 116 DOT3 — —
5. COOLANT
Use genuine coolant to protect the engine.
Coolant Recommended materials Item number Alternative
Phosphoric acid (non-amine)
Coolant SUBARU coolant 000016218
type
Water for dilution Distilled water — Tap water (Soft water)
Cooling system protective
Cooling system conditioner SOA345001 None
agent
6. REFRIGERANT
Standard air conditioners on Subaru vehicles use HFC134a refrigerant. Do not mix it with other refrigerants.
Also, do not use any compressor oil other than DENSO OIL 8.
Air conditioner Recommended materials Item number Alternative
Refrigerant HFC134a — None
Compressor oil DENSO OIL 8 — None
RM-4
7. GREASE
Use grease and supplementary lubricants shown in the table below.
Grease Application point Recommended materials Item number Alternative
Supplementary • Oxygen sensor
Spray type lubricant — —
lubricants • Bolts etc.
MT main shaft NICHIMOLY N-130 — —
Clutch master cylinder push rod SILICONE GREASE G-40M 004404003 —
• Gear shift lever
• Clutch activating cylinder
• Clutch pedal
SUNLIGHT 2 003602010 —
• Brake pedal
• Clutch bearing
• Clutch release lever
Multemp AC-D
Select lever — —
Multemp SH-W (Shift lock part)
• Door latch
SILICONE GREASE G-30M 004404002 —
Grease • Door striker
ONE LUBER
Steering gearbox VALIANT GREASE M2 003608001
SG or MO
Disc brake
NIGLUBE RX-2 K0779GA102 —
(lock pin, guide pin, piston boot)
Between brake pad and shim Molykote AS-880N K0777YA010 —
Brake pad clip Molykote M7439 003602001 —
Front axle PTJ NKG302 28395AG02A —
Rear axle BJ NTG2218-M 28395AG01A —
Rear axle EBJ NGK106 28395AG040A —
Rear axle DOJ NKG205 28495AG00A —
8. ADHESIVE
Use the adhesives shown in the table below, or equivalent.
Adhesive Application point Recommended materials Item number Alternative
Dow Automotive’s adhesive:
ESSEX U-400HV or the
Windshield, rear window
equivalent
glass, rear quarter
Glass primer: U-401 — —
glass, rear gate and
and U-402
body
Adhesive Painted surface primer:
U-413
Rearview mirror base REPAIR KIT IN MR 65029FC000 —
3M’s EC-776, EC-847 or EC-1022
Soft vinyl CEMEDINE 540 —
(Spray type)
Momentary sealant CEMEDINE 3000 — ARMSTRONG’s Eastman 910
RM-5
9. SEAL MATERIAL
Use the seal material shown in the table below, or equivalent.
Seal material Application point Recommended materials Item number Alternative
• MT transmission case
• Cylinder block
• Converter case
• DOHC camshaft cap
(Turbo model) THREE BOND 1215 004403007 DOW CORNING No. 7038
• Cylinder head plug
(Turbo model)
• Oil pump
(Except for 3.0 L model)
Transmission oil pan
THREE BOND 1217B K0877YA020 —
(AT model)
• Engine oil pan
THREE BOND 1207C 004403012 —
• Separator cover
Seal material (Except for 3.0 L model)
• Rear differential
• Engine oil pressure switch
• Connector (Oil hose)
(Turbo model)
• Connector (Heater hose)
THREE BOND 1324 004403042 —
(3.0 L model)
• Cylinder head (Nipple)
(3.0 L model)
• Camshaft bowl-shape plug
(3.0 L model)
• Rear differential
• Service hole plug
THREE BOND 1105 004403010 DOW CORNING No. 7038
• PCV valve
Steering adjusting screw THREE BOND 1141 004403006 —
• SOHC camshaft cap
• Cam cap
(3.0 L model)
• Cylinder head plug
(3.0 L model and turbo model)
• Rocker cover (3.0 L model
and turbo model)
THREE BOND 1280B K0877YA018 THREE BOND 1217G
Seal material • Oil pan (Pan upper)
(3.0 L model)
• Block (Pan upper)
(3.0 L model)
• Back cover (Front cover,
block head, pan upper)
(3.0 L model)
• Front sealing cover
3M Butyl Rubber 8626 — —
• Rear sealing cover
RM-6
PRE-DELIVERY INSPECTION
PI
Page
1. Pre-delivery Inspection ...............................................................................2
Pre-delivery Inspection
1. Pre-delivery Inspection
A: GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The purposes of the pre-delivery inspection (PDI) are as follows.
• Remove the additional parts used for ensuring the vehicle quality during transportation and restore the ve-
hicle to its normal condition.
• Check the vehicle before delivery is in normal condition.
• Check the vehicle or parts for any damage occurred during transportation or storage.
• Check the vehicle after repair is in normal condition.
• Make sure to provide a complete vehicle to customer.
For above reasons, all SUBARU dealers (dealerships) must carry out the PDIs before delivery of vehicle.
Refer to this manual unless otherwise specified.
B: PRE-DELIVERY INSPECTION (PDI) PROCEDURE
STATIC CHECKS JUST AFTER VEHICLE RECEIPT
Procedure Check point
1. Appearance check 1. If the vehicle is covered with protective coating, visually check the vehicle
body for damage and dents. If the protective coating has been removed,
visually check the body painted area for damage or stains in detail.
2. Visually check the glass and light lenses for any damage, cracks or exces-
sive gaps between body sheet metal.
3. Visually check the plated parts for any damage.
2. Tire check 1. Check the tires for damage, defective, and dents on wheels.
2. Check the tire air pressure.
3. Fuse installation If the vehicle is about to be delivered to customer, attach a back-up fuse.
4. Lock/unlock and open/close operation checks 1. Using the key, check the trunk lid can be locked or unlocked normally.
of doors. 2. Open and close all doors to check that there are no defective.
3. Operate the power door lock switch to check that the door (rear gate) is
locked and unlocked normally.
5. Operation check of child safety lock system Check the child safety lock system operates normally.
6. Open/close operation checks of trunk lid 1. Operate the trunk lock release lever to check that the trunk lid opens nor-
mally.
2. Check that main and sub keys can lock/unlock the release lever, and that
valet key can not lock/unlock the release lever.
3. Open and close the trunk lid to see that there are no abnormal conditions.
7. Operation check of trunk lid release lever Operate the trunk lid release lever to check that the trunk lock is unlocked
normally.
8. Check the rear gate for lock/unlock and open/ 1. Check if the rear gate can be unlocked normally through the emergency
close operations. hole.
2. Open and close the rear gate to see that there are no abnormal condi-
tions.
9. Operation check of fuel lid opener lock release Operate the fuel lid opener to check that the fuel lid is unlocked normally.
lever
10. Accessory check Check that the following accessories are provided.
• Owner’s manual
• Warranty booklet
• Maintenance note
• Spare key
• Jack
• Tool set
• Spare tire
11. Operation check of front hood lock release Operate the front hood lock release lever to check that the front hood is
system unlocked normally.
12. Battery Check the battery terminals for any abnormal conditions such as rust and
trace of battery fluid leaks.
13. Brake fluid Check that the fluid level is normal.
14. Engine oil Check that the oil level is normal.
PI-2

15. Transmission gear oil Check that the transmission gear oil level is normal.
16. AT front differential oil Check that the AT front differential oil level is normal.
17. Engine coolant Check that the engine coolant level is normal.
18. Clutch fluid Check that the clutch fluid level is normal.
19. Window washer fluid Check that the window washer fluid level is normal.
20. Front hood latch check Check that the hood is closed and latched securely.
21. Keyless entry system Check that the keyless entry system operates normally.
22. Alarm system Check that the alarm system operates normally.
23. Seat 1. Check the seat surfaces for stains or dirt.
2. Check the seat installation conditions and functionality.
3. Check that the occupant detection system for passenger’s seat operates
normally.
24. Seat belt 1. Check the seat belt installation conditions and functionality.
2. Check that the seat belt warning system operates normally.
CHECKS WITH THE ENGINE RUNNING
25. Test mode connector Test mode connector
26. Immobilizer system 1. Check that the engine starts with all keys that are equipped on vehicle.
2. 60 seconds after turning ignition switch from ON to ACC or OFF, or imme-
diately after removing the key, check that the security indicator light blinking.
27. Starting condition Start the engine and check that the engine starts smoothly.
28. Exhaust system Check that the exhaust noise is normal and no leaks are found.
29. Indicator and warning lights Check that all the indicator and warning lights are gone out.
30. Heater & ventilation Check that the heater & ventilation system operates normally.
31. Air conditioner Check that the air conditioner operates normally.
32. Clock Check that the clock operates normally.
33. Audio Check the radio, CD player for normal operation.
34. Navigation system 1. Check all display functions for normal operation.
2. Check the map disc (DVD) are provided on vehicle.
3. Check that the navigation system operates normally.
35. Front accessory power supply socket Check that the front accessory power supply socket operates normally.
36. Lighting system Check that the lighting system operates normally.
37. Wiper de-icer Check that the wiper de-icer operates normally.
38. Illumination control Check that the illumination control operates normally.
39. Window washer Check that the window washer system operates normally.
40. Wiper Check that the wiper system operates normally.
41. Power window operation check Check that the power window operations normally.
42. Sunroof Check that the sunroof operates normally.
43. Door mirror Check that the remote control mirror operates normally.
DYNAMIC TEST WITH THE VEHICLE RUNNING

44. Brake test Check the foot brake for normal operations.
45. Parking brake Check the parking brake for normal operations.
46. AT shift control Check that the AT shift patterns are correct.
47. Cruise control Check that the cruise control system operates normally.
PI-3
CHECKS AFTER DYNAMIC TEST

48. ATF level Check that the ATF level is correct.
49. Power steering fluid level Check that the power steering fluid level is normal.
50. Fluid leak check Check for fluid/oil leaks.
51. Water leak test Spray the vehicle with water and check for water leaks.
52. Appearance check 2 1. Remove the protective coating (if equipped).
2. Check the body paints for damage and stain.
3. Check the plated parts for damage and rust.
1. APPEARANCE CHECK 4. LOCK/UNLOCK AND OPEN/CLOSE OP-

• If the vehicle is covered with protective coating, ERATION CHECKS OF DOORS
visually check the vehicle body for damage and 1) Using the key, lock and unlock the door several
dents. times to check for normal operation. Open and
• When the protective coating is removed, visually close the door several times for smooth movement.
check the body paints for damage or stains in detail
and repair as necessary.
• Visually check the windshield glass, door glass-
es and light lenses for any damage, cracks or ex- (A)
cessive gaps to the body sheet metal and repair as (B)
necessary.
• Visually check the plated parts, such as the
grilles and door knobs, for damage or loss of gloss
and replace the parts as necessary.
2. TIRE CHECK PI-00246
• Check the tires for damage, defective, and dents
(A) Unlock
on wheels.
(B) Lock
• Check and adjust the tire size, spare tire and tire
air pressure described on the tire air pressure label
2) Completely close the driver’s door, and then
(driver’s side).
check the smooth movement with operating door
3. FUSE INSTALLATION lock knob from lock to unlock several times. Set the
Fuses for the back-up circuit have been removed to door lock knob (A) to lock position. Then pull the in-
prevent battery discharge. If the vehicle is about to ner remote (B) to ensure that doors will not open.
be delivered to the customer, attach a 20 A fuse (A) For other doors, place the door lock knob (A) to lock
as shown in the figure. position and then pull the inner remote (B) to en-
sure that doors will not open.
(A)
(A)
(B)
PI-00158
PI-00192
(A) Door lock knob

(B) Inner remote
PI-4
3) Close all the doors, and then press the lock on 5. CHECK THE OPERATION OF CHILD
power door lock switch at driver’s side. Check that SAFETY LOCK SYSTEM
all doors including rear gate are locked. 1) Set the child safety lock on both rear doors to the
lock position.
2) Close the rear doors completely.
3) Check that the lock levers of the rear doors are in
the unlock position. Then, pull inner remote of rear
doors to ensure that the doors will not open.
(A) (B)
PI-00193
4) Press the driver’s side power door lock switch to

unlock side. Check that all doors including rear
gate are unlocked.
PI-00164
(A) Lock
(B) Unlock
4) Pull the outer handles to ensure that doors will

open.
6. OPEN/CLOSE OPERATION CHECKS OF
PI-00194 TRUNK LID
5) Check that the power door lock switch on the 1) Operate the trunk lock release lever to check
passenger’s side also locks and unlocks. that the trunk lid opens normally.
2) Open and close the trunk lid several times for
smooth movement.
3) Lock the trunk lock release lever using main key
or sub key.
(A)
(B)
PI-00247
(A) Lock
(B) Unlock
PI-00258
6) Insert the key to ignition switch, and open the
4) Check that the trunk lock release lever does not
driver’s side door. Press lock on power door lock.
operate.
Check that the door is not locked.
5) Check if the trunk lock release lever is not locked
and unlocked using valet key.
PI-5
7. OPERATION CHECK OF TRUNK LID RE- (2) Operate the lever to check that the rear gate
LEASE HANDLE is locked and unlocked normally.
1) Use a flat tip screwdriver. Slide the screwdriver
blade from the slit aperture of the lock assembly ful-
ly to the end until you hear a click. This places the
latch in the locked position.
PI-00166
9. OPERATION CHECK OF FUEL LID

OPENER LOCK RELEASE LEVER
PI-00248
Operate the fuel lid opener to check that the fuel lid
is unlocked normally. Check that the filler cap is se-
2) Move the release handle from outside the vehi- curely closed.
cle in the direction of the arrow to check if the latch
is released. 10.ACCESSORY CHECK
Check that the following accessories are provided.
• Owner’s manual
• Warranty booklet
• Maintenance note
• Spare key
• Jack
• Tool set
• Spare tire
PI-00249 (B) (A)
8. LOCK/UNLOCK AND OPEN/CLOSE OP-

ERATION CHECKS OF REAR GATE
1) Open and close the rear gate several times for
smooth movement.
2) Operate the rear gate lever to check that the rear
gate is locked and unlocked normally.
(1) Remove the cover inside the rear gate. PI-00168
(B)
PI-00165 (A)
PI-00169
(A) Jack
(B) Jack handle
PI-6
11.OPERATION CHECK OF FRONT HOOD 13.BRAKE FLUID

LOCK RELEASE SYSTEM Check that the brake fluid level is normal. If the
Operate the front hood lock release lever (A) to amount is insufficient, carry out a brake line test to
check that the front hood is unlocked normally. identify brake fluid leaks and check the brake oper-
ation. After that, refill the brake fluid tank with the
specified type of fluid.
(A)
(A) MA
X
N
(B)
MI
PI-00195
Operate the lever (B) and check that the front hood
PI-00251
is opened normally. Support the front hood with
hood stay. (A) MAX. level
(B) MIN. level
14.ENGINE OIL
Check the engine oil amount. If the amount of oil is
insufficient, check that no leaks are found. Then,
add the necessary amount of the specified engine
oil.
• Except for 3.0 L model
(B)
(A) (F)
(C)
(E)
(D)
PM-00362
(B)
(A) Oil level gauge
PI-00202 (B) Engine oil filler cap
(C) Upper level
12.BATTERY
(D) Lower level
Check the battery terminals to make sure that there
(E) Approx. 1.0 2 (1.1 US qt, 0.9 Imp qt)
are no rust or corrosions due to fluid leaks.
(F) Notch mark
PI-00250
PI-7
• 3.0 L model 16.AT FRONT DIFFERENTIAL OIL

Check that the AT front differential oil level is nor-
(B)
mal. If the amount of oil is insufficient, check that no
(A) (C)
leaks are found. Then, add the necessary amount
F
(E) of the specified AT front differential oil.
L
(D) • 4AT model
(A)
(B) (A)
PM-00363 (C)
(A) Oil level gauge

(B) Engine oil filler cap
(C) Upper level
(D) Lower level PI-00183
(A) Oil level gauge
15.TRANSMISSION GEAR OIL (B) Upper level
Check that the transmission gear oil level is normal. (C) Lower level
If the amount of fluid is insufficient, check that no
leaks are found. Then add the necessary amount of • 5AT model
the specified transmission gear oil.
• 5MT model (A) (A)
(A)
F
(B)
(C)
L
(B)
(C)
PI-00184
(A) Oil level gauge

PM-00030
(B) Upper level
(A) Oil level gauge (C) Lower level
(B) Upper level
(C) Lower level 17.ENGINE COOLANT
Check that the engine coolant level on the reservoir
• 6MT model tank is normal. If the amount of engine coolant is in-
sufficient, check that no leaks are found. Then, add
(A) the necessary amount of coolant with the specified
concentration.
(A)
(B)
(C)
MT-00449
(A) Oil level gauge

(B) Upper level
(C) Lower level
PI-8
18.CLUTCH FLUID • Check if the rear gate is unlocked and the hazard
Check that the clutch fluid level is normal. If the light blinks twice and the buzzer sounds twice.
amount of fluid is insufficient, check that no leaks (Wagon model)
are found. Then, add the necessary amount of
specified fluid.
(A)
(C)
X
MA
N
MI
PI-00348
(B) 4) Press the “LOCK” button on the keyless trans-

PI-00253 mitter with one of the doors (including the rear gate
and trunk) opened. Check if all the doors are
(A) Reservoir tank locked, hazard light blinks five times and the buzzer
(B) MIN. level sounds five times and warning shows one of the
(C) MAX. level doors (including the rear gate and trunk) open.
5) Close all the doors including rear gate and trunk.
19.WINDOW WASHER FLUID Press the “LOCK” button momentarily on the key-
Check that the window washer fluid level is normal. less transmitter. Check that all the doors (including
If the amount is insufficient, check that no leaks are rear gate and trunk) are locked, hazard light blinks
found. Then, add the necessary amount of washer once and buzzer sounds once.
fluid.
20.FRONT HOOD LATCH CHECK
Retract the front hood stay and close the front
hood. Check that the front hood is securely latched.
21.KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
NOTE:
The following inspections show the initial settings.
When the settings are different from the initial set-
PI-00349
tings, use Subaru Select Monitor to check the de-
tails of each setting for inspections. <Ref. to 6) Press the “UNLOCK” button momentarily on the
LAN(diag)-27, OPERATION, Read Current Data.> keyless transmitter. Check that the driver’s door is
1) Fully open all the door windows. unlocked and hazard light blinks twice and the
2) Remove the key from the ignition switch and buzzer sounds twice.
close all the doors including rear gate. And press the “UNLOCK” button momentarily
3) Press the rear gate and trunk open button for at again in 5 seconds. Check that all the doors includ-
least one second. ing rear gate are unlocked.
• Check if the trunk is opened and the hazard light
blinks twice and the buzzer sounds twice. (Sedan
model)
PI-00350
PI-9
7) Within a distance of 10 m from a vehicle, press 2) Remove the key from the ignition switch and
keyless transmitter’s “LOCK” button three times close all the doors including rear gate.
within 5 seconds. Check that the horn honks once 3) Press the “LOCK” button momentarily on the
and that the hazard light blinks three times. keyless transmitter. All doors are locked, and buzz-
8) Move the power door lock switch to the lock po- er sounds once, hazard blinks once, security indi-
sition with one of doors (including the rear gate) cator light blinks faster (five times per two seconds)
opened. Next, close all the doors including rear for 30 seconds and goes slower (twice per two sec-
gate. Check if all the doors are locked and buzzer onds), then the alarm system is in set condition.
sounds once and the hazard light flashes once.
9) Check buzzer operation.
The buzzer sounds when the doors are locked or
unlocked. The buzzer can be turned off if desired.
Turn the buzzer off or on with following procedure.
(1) Close all the doors including rear gate, then
remove the key from ignition key lock.
(2) Press the power door lock switch to unlock
and hold it until the operation is finished.
(3) Insert the key into ignition key lock, and in-
PI-00349
sert and remove the key in ignition key lock 5
times in 10 seconds. 4) Press the “UNLOCK” button momentarily on the
(4) When finished step (3), open and close the keyless transmitter. When the door of the driver’s
driver’s door once within 10 seconds. seat is unlocked, the buzzer sounds twice, the haz-
ard light flashes twice, the room light turns on and
NOTE: the security indicator light flashes once in three
When opening and closing of the door is not avail- seconds, and the alarm system enters the release
able within 10 seconds, hazard light blinks once mode.
and the change over operation is cancelled. Retry
from the step (1).
(5) Hazard light blinks 3 times and the buzzer
sound turns ON or OFF.
10) Press the “Panic” button on the backside of the
keyless transmitter. Check if the alarm condition
happens (horn sounds continuously, hazard light
blinks, security indicator comes on). Check wheth-
er this condition lasts until any button on the key-
less transmitter is pressed or lasts for 30 seconds.
PI-00350
5) Close all the doors including rear gate. Press the

“LOCK” button momentarily on the keyless trans-
mitter. When all the doors are locked, buzzer
sounds once, hazard blinks once and the alarm
system is in set condition in 30 seconds.
6) Unlock a door using the inner lock knob and
open the door while the security system is in the set
mode. Check if the alarm condition happens (horn
PI-00257
sounds continuously, hazard light blinks, security
indicator illuminates). Check if this condition lasts
22.ALARM SYSTEM for a maximum of three minutes or until the “UN-
NOTE: LOCK” button of the keyless transmitter is pressed.
The following inspections show the initial settings. NOTE:
When the settings are different from the initial set- The alarm condition will cease in 30 seconds once
tings, use Subaru Select Monitor to check the de- the door is closed.
tails of each setting for inspections. <Ref. to 7) When none of above is applicable, check the
LAN(diag)-28, OPERATION, Function Setting troubleshooting of security system.
(Customize).>
1) Fully open all the door windows.
PI-10
23.SEAT 25.TEST MODE CONNECTOR

1) Check the seat surfaces for stains or dirt. Turn the ignition switch to ON and check that the
2) Check that each seat provides full functionality in malfunction indicator light starts blinking. If the light
sliding and reclining. Check that the seat position blinks, return the ignition key to LOCK. Pull out the
memory for driver’s power seat function properly. test mode connector from the back of glove box
Check all available functions of the rear seat such lower cover, and disconnect the test mode connec-
as a trunk-through center armrest. tor. Then, turn the ignition key to ON again. If the
3) Check the passenger’s seat occupant detection malfunction indicator light blinks at that time in spite
system. of the disconnected test mode connector, carry out
(1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. an engine diagnosis.
(2) Check that the ON and OFF of passenger’s
airbag indicator light come on simultaneously
for about 6 seconds and go off for 2 seconds,
and then only OFF illuminates again.
(A)
PI-00201
(A) Test mode connector (green)
26.IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
OD-00036
(3) With a person weighing approximately 70 kg 1) Check that the engine starts with all keys that
(155 lb) or more sitting in the passenger’s seat, are equipped on vehicle.
check whether the passenger’s airbag indicator 2) 60 seconds after turning ignition switch from ON
light illuminates or not. to ACC or OFF, or immediately after removing the
(4) Empty the passenger seat, then check key, check that the security indicator light blinking.
whether the passenger side airbag indicator NOTE:
light illuminate off. If malfunctions occur, refer to “IMMOBILIZER (DI-
AGNOSIS)”.
24.SEAT BELT
1) Check installation condition of seat belt. 27.STARTING CONDITION
2) Pull out the seat belt and then release it. Check Start the engine and check that the engine starts
that the belt retracts smoothly. smoothly. If the battery voltage is low, recharge or
3) Check that the ALR seat belt operates normally. replace the battery. If any noises are observed, im-
4) Check seat belt warning system mediately stop the engine and check and repair the
(1) Turn the ignition switch to ON without fas- abnormal components.
tening driver’s and passenger’s seat belts. 28.EXHAUST SYSTEM
(2) Check if the seat belt warning lights of driv-
er’s and passenger’s side blink for about six Listen to the exhaust noise to see if no noises are
seconds and the buzzer beeps intermittently. observed. Check for exhaust leaks.
(3) Then, check that the seat belt warning light 29.INDICATOR AND WARNING LIGHTS
comes on → blink → buzzer beeps in about 15
Check that all the indicator and warning lights are
second cycles. (If the passenger seat is empty,
off.
the seat belt warning light for passenger side
does not operate.) 30.HEATER & VENTILATION
Operate the heater & ventilation system to check
for normal airflow outlet control, air inlet control, air-
flow capacity and heating performance.
PI-11
31.AIR CONDITIONER 39.WINDOW WASHER

Operate the air conditioner. Check that the A/C Check that the window washer system injects
compressor operates normally and enough cooling washer fluid to the specified area of the windshield
is provided. shown in the figure.
NOTE: Front injection position:
To prevent the insufficient lubrication of air condi- A: 250 mm (9.84 in)
tioner, operate the air conditioner for 5 minutes at B: 535 mm (21.1 in)
idling.
A A
32.CLOCK (2)
Check the clock for normal operations and enough
accuracy.
33.AUDIO
B
Check the radio for full functionality and normal
noise level. Check the CD unit operations.
34.NAVIGATION SYSTEM (1) WW-00395
1) Check all display functions for normal operation.
2) Check the map disc (DVD) are provided on vehi- (1) Nozzle
cle. (2) Spray area (shaded area)
3) Check that the navigation system operates nor-
mally. Rear injection position:
Wagon model
35.FRONT ACCESSORY POWER SUPPLY A: 70 mm (2.8 in)
SOCKET B: 70°
1) Check the operation of the front accessory pow-
er supply socket.
2) Check operation of the accessory power supply
socket in console box. A
36.LIGHTING SYSTEM
1) Check the headlight operations.
2) Check the stop light operation. B
3) Check other lights for normal operations.
37.WIPER DE-ICER PI-00104
Check that the wiper de-icer operates normally.
40.WIPER
38.ILLUMINATION CONTROL Check the front and rear wipers for normal opera-
Check that the illumination control operates nor- tions.
mally.
41.POWER WINDOW OPERATION CHECK
Operate the power window switches one by one to
check that each of the power windows goes up and
down without noises.
42.SUNROOF
Check that the sunroof operates normally.
43.DOOR MIRROR
Check that the remote control mirror operates nor-
mally.
44.BRAKE TEST
Check the foot brake for normal operations.
PI-12
45.PARKING BRAKE • 4AT

Check the parking brake for normal operations. (A)
When pulling the parking brake lever with force of
200 N (20.4 kgf, 45.0 lb), check that the lever stroke
of parking brake lever is 5 to 6 notches.
F
46.AT SHIFT CONTROL (C)
HOT
(B)
L
(D)
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON.
2) While brake pedal is not depressed, check if the
F
(C)
select lever does not move from “P” range.
COLD
(E)
L
(D)
3) While brake pedal is depressed, check if the se- PI-00189
lect lever moves from “P” range.
4) Set the select lever to other than “P” range. (A) Level gauge
5) When the ignition switch is turned to OFF, check (B) ATF level range at “HOT”
if the ignition key switch cannot be removed. [70 — 80°C (158 — 176°F)]
6) Set the AT selector lever to each gear position (C) Upper level
and check the shifting while driving the vehicle. (D) Lower level
(E) ATF level range at “COLD”
[20 — 30°C (68 — 86°F)]
P • 5AT
R
N (A) (A)
F
D (C)
HOT
(B)
L
(D)
PI-00199
F
(C)
• 4AT
COLD
(E)
L
(D)
Gear position
Selector position
1st 2nd 3rd 4th
PI-00190
D OK OK OK OK
Manual mode OK OK OK OK (A) Level gauge
(B) ATF level range at “HOT”
• 5AT [70 — 80°C (158 — 176°F)]
Gear position (C) Upper level
Selector position (D) Lower level
1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th
D OK OK OK OK OK (E) ATF level range at “COLD”
[20 — 30°C (68 — 86°F)]
Manual mode OK OK OK OK OK
49.POWER STEERING FLUID LEVEL
47.CRUISE CONTROL
Check that the power steering fluid level is normal.
Operate the cruise control system. Check that the
If the amount is insufficient, check that no leaks are
system is activated and deactivated correctly.
found. Then add the necessary amount of the
48.ATF LEVEL specified power steering fluid.
After selecting all positions (P, R, N, D), set the se-
lect lever in “P” range. Idle the engine for 1 — 2
minutes, and measure the ATF level. If the amount
is insufficient, check that no leaks are found. Then,
add the necessary amount of the specified ATF.
HOT MAX
COLD MAX
HOT MIN
COLD MIN
PS-00463
PI-13
50.FLUID LEAK CHECK • Keep solvent from touching the resin or rubber
Check entire areas of the vehicle for any trace of parts. Do not use coating wax or solvent while the
coolant/oil/fluid leaks. component surface temperature is high due to hot
weather etc.
51.WATER LEAK TEST • If the coated surface is swollen out due to seams
Spray the vehicle with water using a hose and or moisture, expose the vehicle to the sunlight for a
check that no water enters the passenger compart- few hours or heat the seam and swollen portions
ment. using a dryer etc.
• Before performing the water leakage test, re- • Dispose of the peeled wrap guard as burnable
move anything that may obstruct the operation or industrial garbage.
which must be kept dry. 2) Check the whole vehicle body for flaking paint,
• Close all the windows and doors securely. Close damage by transportation, corrosion, dirt, cracks or
the hood and trunk lid before starting the test. blisters.
• Spray the vehicle with water using a hose. The NOTE:
rate of water spray must be approx. 20 — 25 2 (5.3 • It is better to determine an inspection pattern in
— 6.6 US gal, 4.4 — 5.5 Imp gal) per minute. order to avoid missing an area, since the total in-
When spraying water on areas adjacent to the floor spection area is wide.
and wheel house, increase the pressure. When • Do not repair the body paint unless absolutely
spraying water on areas other than the floor and necessary. Also, if the vehicle is in need of repair to
wheel house, decrease the pressure. But the force remove scratches or corroded paint, the repair area
of water must be made strong occasionally by must be limited to the minimum. Re-painting and
pressing the end of the hose. spray painting must be avoided as possible.
NOTE: 3) Check each window glass for scratches careful-
Be sure to keep the hose at least 10 cm (3.9 in) ly. Slight damage may be removed by polishing
away from vehicle. with cerium oxide. (Fill a cup half with cerium oxide,
Check the following areas. and add warm water to it. Then agitate the content
• Front window and body framework mating por- until it turns to wax. Apply this wax to a soft cloth,
tion and polish the glass with it.)
• Door mating portions 4) Check each portion of the vehicle body and un-
• Glass mating portions derside components for the formation of rust. If rust
• Rear quarter window mating portions is discovered, remove it with sandpaper of #80 to
• Rear window and body framework mating por- #180 and treat the surface with rust preventive. Af-
tion ter this treatment is completed, flush the portion
• Around roof drips thoroughly, and prepare the surface for repair
painting.
If any dampness in the compartments is discovered
after the water has been applied, carefully check all 5) Check each portion of body and all of the plated
the areas that may have possibly contributed to the parts for deformation or distortion. Also, check
leak. each light lens for cracks.
6) Peel the protective tape, vinyl wrapping and
52.APPEARANCE CHECK 2 identification seal attached to the following places.
1) When vehicle body is covered with protective • Seats
film, peel it off. • Door trim
• Floor carpet
NOTE:
• Side sill
• Use of steam facilitates peeling off the wrap
• Front hood lock release lever
guard.
• Edge rear
• For a vehicle left for a long time or at low temper-
ature, sprinkle some water heated to 50 — 60°C • Rear wiper
(122 — 140°F) over the vehicle to raise its surface • Sedan rear combination light (Trunk lid opening
temperature before peeling off the wrap guard. Do portion)
not use the water heated to over 60°C (140°F). • Roof rail
• If the adhesive remains exist on the coated sur- • Door mirror
face, soak a flannel rag, etc. with a small amount of
coating wax or solvent such as oil benzene and
IPA, put the soaked cloth on the remains lightly,
and then wipe them off with a flannel rag etc.
PI-14
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE SERVICES
PM
Page
1. General Description ...................................................................................2
2. Schedule ....................................................................................................3
3. Engine Oil ...................................................................................................8
4. Engine Oil Filter ........................................................................................10
5. Spark Plug ................................................................................................12
6. V-belt ........................................................................................................13
7. Timing Belt ...............................................................................................16
8. Fuel Line ..................................................................................................19
9. Air Cleaner Element .................................................................................20
10. Cooling System ........................................................................................21
11. Engine Coolant .........................................................................................23
12. Clutch System ..........................................................................................25
13. Transmission Gear Oil .............................................................................26
14. Automatic Transmission Fluid ..................................................................27
15. Front & Rear Differential Gear Oil ............................................................29
16. Brake Line ................................................................................................31
17. Brake Fluid ...............................................................................................33
18. Disc Brake Pad and Disc .........................................................................34
19. Parking Brake ...........................................................................................35
20. Suspension ..............................................................................................36
21. Wheel Bearing ..........................................................................................38
22. Axle Boots & Joints ..................................................................................39
23. Tire Rotation .............................................................................................40
24. Steering System (Power Steering) ...........................................................41
General Description
1. General Description
A: GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Be sure to perform periodic maintenance in order to
maintain vehicle performance and find problems
before they occur.
PM-2
Schedule
2. Schedule
A: MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE 1
1. U.S.
• Other than U5 model
Maintenance interval
[Number of months or km (miles), whichever occurs first]
Months 3 7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60 67.5 75 82.5 90 97.5 105 112.5 120
× 1,000 km 4.8 12 24 36 48 60 72 81.4 96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180 192 Remarks
× 1,000 miles 3 7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60 67.5 75 82.5 90 97.5 105 112.5 120
3.0 L R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R
1 Engine oil
2.5 L R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R
Engine oil 3.0 L R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R
2
filter 2.5 L R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R
2.5 L
R R R R non-turbo
model
3 Spark plug
For
R R 2.5 L turbo,
3.0 L model
4 Drive belt(s) I I I R
Camshaft drive
5 I I I R
belt
6 Fuel line (I) (I) (I) I Note 1.
Air cleaner
7 R R R R Note 2.
element
8 Cooling system I I I I
9 Engine coolant R R R R
10 Clutch system I I I I I I I I
11 Transmission oil I I I I
12 ATF I I I I Note 3.
Front and rear
13 I I I I
differential oil
14 Brake line I I I I I I I I
15 Brake fluid R R R R
Disc brake pad
16 I I I I I I I I
and disc
17 Parking brake I I I I I I I I
18 Suspension I I I I I I I I
19 Wheel bearing (I) (I)
Axle boots and
20 I I I I I I I I
joints
21 Tire rotation I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Note 4.
Steering system
22 I I I I I I I I
(Power steering)
23 A/C filter Replace every 12 months or 15,000 km (9,300 miles). Note 5.
Symbols used:
R: Replace
I: Inspection
(R) or (I): Recommended service for safe vehicle operation.
PM-3
Schedule
NOTE:
1. This inspection is not required to maintain emission warranty eligibility and it dose not affect the manufacturer’s obligations un-
der EPA’s in-use compliance program.
2. When the vehicle is used in extremely dusty conditions, the air cleaner element should be replaced more often.
3. ATF filter is maintenance free part. ATF filter needs replacement, when it has physically rust, damaged or ATF leaked.
4. A tire should be replaced when the tread wear indicator appears as a solid band across the tread. The indicators appear when
the remaining tread has been worn to 1.6 mm (0.063 in) or less.
5. When the A/C filter is installed.
• U5 model
To be continued
Months 3 7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60 67.5 75
to the next table
Remarks
× 1,000 km 4.8 12 24 36 48 60 72 81.4 96 108 120
× 1,000 miles 3 7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60 67.5 75
1 Engine oil R R R R R R R R R R
2 Engine oil filter R R R R R R R R R R
3 Spark plug R R
4 Drive belt(s) I I
5 Camshaft drive belt I I
6 Fuel line (I) (I) Note 1.
7 Air cleaner element R R Note 2.
8 Cooling system I I
9 Engine coolant R R
10 Clutch system I I I I I
11 Transmission oil I I
12 ATF I I Note 3.
13 Front and rear differential oil I I
14 Brake line I I I I I
15 Brake fluid R R
16 Disc brake pad and disc I I I I I
17 Parking brake I I I I I
18 Suspension I I I I I
19 Wheel bearing (I)
20 Axle boots and joints I I I I I
21 Tire rotation I I I I I I I I I I Note 4.
22 Steering system (Power steering) I I I I I
Symbols used:
R: Replace
I: Inspection
NOTE:
PM-4
Schedule
Continued from
Months 82.5 90 97.5 105 112.5 120 127.5 135 142.5 150
the previous table
Remarks
× 1,000 km 132 144 156 168 180 192 204 216 228 240
× 1,000 miles 82.5 90 97.5 105 112.5 120 127.5 135 142.5 150
1 Engine oil R R R R R R R R R R
2 Engine oil filter R R R R R R R R R R
3 Spark plug R R R
4 Drive belt(s) I R I
5 Camshaft drive belt I R I
6 Fuel line (I) I (I) Note 1.
7 Air cleaner element R R R Note 2.
8 Cooling system I I I
9 Engine coolant R R R
10 Clutch system I I I I
11 Transmission oil I I I
12 ATF I I I Note 3.
13 Front and rear differential oil I I I
14 Brake line I I I I I
15 Brake fluid R R R
16 Disc brake pad and disc I I I I I
17 Parking brake I I I I I
18 Suspension I I I I I
20 Axle boots and joints I I I I I
21 Tire rotation I I I I I I I I I I Note 4.
22 Steering system (Power steering) I I I I I
Symbols used:
R: Replace
I: Inspection
NOTE:
PM-5
Schedule
2. CANADA
Months 3 7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60 67.5 75 82.5 90 97.5 105 112.5 120
× 1,000 km 4.8 12 24 36 48 60 72 81.4 96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180 192 Remarks
× 1,000 miles 3 7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60 67.5 75 82.5 90 97.5 105 112.5 120
Engine 3.0 L R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R
1
oil 2.5 L R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R
Engine 3.0 L R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R
2
oil filter 2.5 L R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R
2.5 L
R R R R non-turbo
model
3 Spark plug
For
R R 2.5 L turbo,
3.0 L model
4 Drive belt(s) I I I R
Camshaft drive
5 I I I R
belt
6 Fuel line (I) (I) (I) I Note 1.
Air cleaner
7 R R R R Note 2.
element
8 Cooling system I I I I
9 Engine coolant R R R R
10 Clutch system I I I I I I I I
11 Transmission oil I I I I
12 ATF I I I I Note 3.
Front and rear
13 I I I I
differential oil
14 Brake line I I I I I I I I
15 Brake fluid R R R R
Disc brake pad
16 I I I I I I I I
and disc
17 Parking brake I I I I I I I I
18 Suspension I I I I I I I I
Axle boots and
20 I I I I I I I I
joints
21 Tire rotation I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Note 4.
Steering system
22 I I I I I I I I
(Power steering)
Symbols used:
R: Replace
I: Inspection
NOTE:
1. This inspection is not required to maintain emission warranty eligibility and it dose not affect the manufacturer’s obligations under
EPA’s in-use compliance program.
4. A tire should be replaced when the tread wear indicator appears as a solid band across the tread. The indicators appear when the
remaining tread has been worn to 1.6 mm (0.063 in) or less.
PM-6
Schedule
B: MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE 2
Repeat Extremely Salt or other High humidity
Maintenance Repeat short Repeat towing
Item rough/muddy cold weather corrosive used or mountain
interval distance drive trailer
road drive area or coastal area area
Engine oil 3.75 months R R R
6,000 km
3,750 miles
Engine oil filter 3.75 months R R R
6,000 km
3,750 miles
Fuel line 7.5 months I
12,000 km
7,500 miles
Transmission oil 15 months R
24,000 km
15,000 miles
ATF 15 months R
24,000 km
15,000 miles
Front and rear 15 months R
differential oil 24,000 km
15,000 miles
Brake line 7.5 months I
12,000 km
7,500 miles
Brake fluid 15 months R
24,000 km
15,000 miles
Disc brake pad 7.5 months I I I I
and disc 12,000 km
7,500 miles
Parking brake 7.5 months I I I I
12,000 km
7,500 miles
Suspension 7.5 months I I I
12,000 km
7,500 miles
Axle boots and 7.5 months I I I I I
joints 12,000 km
7,500 miles
Steering system 7.5 months I I I
(Power steering) 12,000 km
7,500 miles
PM-7
Engine Oil
3. Engine Oil • 3.0 L model
A: REPLACEMENT
1) Open the engine oil filter cap for quick draining of
the engine oil.
• 2.5 L model
(A) (B)
PM-00280
3) Tighten the engine oil drain plug after draining

the engine oil.
NOTE:
Use a new drain plug gasket.
PM-00161
Tightening torque:
(A) Oil level gauge 44 N·m (4.5 kgf-m, 33 ft-lb)
(B) Oil filler cap • 2.5 L model
• 3.0 L model
(B)
(A) (C)
LF
(D)
PM-00323
LU-00111
• 3.0 L model
(A) Oil level gauge

(B) Oil filler cap
(C) Upper level
(D) Lower level
2) Drain the engine oil by removing the engine oil

drain plug.
• 2.5 L model
PM-00280
PM-00323
PM-8
Engine Oil
4) Fill engine oil through the level gauge up to the 4) Remove the level gauge again and record the oil
upper level. Place the vehicle on a level surface level. If the engine oil level is below the “L” line, add
when checking oil level. Use engine oil of the prop- oil to bring the level up to the “F” line.
er quality and viscosity, selected in accordance • 2.5 L model
with the following.
(B)
(A)
Recommended oil: (F)
Refer to “RM” section. <Ref. to RM-2, LUBRI-
CANTS, RECOMMENDED MATERIALS, Rec- (C)
ommended Materials.>
(E)
Engine oil capacity
(D)
2.5 L model
Upper level:
Approx. 4.0 2 (4.2 US qt, 3.5 Imp qt) PM-00362
Lower level:
Approx. 3.0 2 (3.2 US qt, 2.6 Imp qt) (A) Oil level gauge
(B) Oil filler cap
3.0 L model
(C) Upper level
Upper level:
(D) Lower level
Approx. 5.5 2 (5.8 US qt, 4.8 Imp qt)
Lower level: (E) Approx. 1 2 (1.1 US qt, 0.9 Imp qt)
Approx. 4.5 2 (4.8 US qt, 4.0 Imp qt) (F) Notch mark
The proper viscosity oil helps the engine maintain
its ideal temperature, and cranking speed in- • 3.0 L model
creased by reducing viscosity friction in hot condi-
(B)
tion. (A) (C)
F
CAUTION: (E)
It is acceptable to fill an engine with oil of an-
L
(D)
other brand when replacing the oil, but make
sure to use an oil with an API standard and SAE
viscosity number specified by Subaru.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is used in regions of high temperature PM-00363
or in other severe environments, use oil with the
viscosities shown below. API Standard: SM SAE (A) Oil level gauge
Viscosity No.: 30, 40, 10W — 50, 20W — 40, 20W (B) Oil filler cap
— 50 (C) Upper level
5) Close the engine oil filler cap.
(D) Lower level
CAUTION: (E) Approx. 1 2 (1.1 US qt, 0.9 Imp qt)
If the engine oil is split over exhaust pipe or the
under cover, wipe it off with cloth to avoid emit- 5) After turning off the engine, wait a few minutes
ting smoke or causing a fire. for the oil to drain back into the oil pan before
6) Start the engine and warm it up for a time. checking the level.
7) Stop the engine to inspect the oil level again. 6) Just after driving or while the engine is warm, en-
<Ref. to PM-9, INSPECTION, Engine Oil.> gine oil level may show in the range between the
“F” line and the notch mark. This is caused by ther-
B: INSPECTION mal expansion of engine oil. (2.5L model)
1) Park the vehicle on a level surface. 7) To prevent overfilling the engine oil, do not add
2) Remove the oil level gauge and wipe it clean. oil above the “F” line when the engine is cold.
3) Reinsert the level gauge all the way. Be sure that
CAUTION:
the level gauge is correctly inserted and in the
If the engine oil is spilt over exhaust pipe or the
proper orientation.
under cover, wipe it off with cloth to avoid emit-
ting smoke or causing a fire.
PM-9
Engine Oil Filter

4. Engine Oil Filter 3) Remove the oil filter using the ST.
• 3.0 L model
A: REPLACEMENT ST 49857000 OIL FILTER WRENCH (outer
1) Remove the service hole cover clip. diameter: 80 mm (3.15 in))
• 2.5 L model • 2.5 L model
ST 18332AA000 OIL FILTER WRENCH (outer
diameter: 68 mm (2.68 in))
ST 18332AA010 OIL FILTER WRENCH (outer
NOTE:
However, in 2.5 model, SUBARU genuine oil filter
having outer diameter of 68 mm (2.68 in) or 65 mm
(2.6 in) can also be used.
• 2.5 L model
PM-00324
• 3.0 L model
PM-00326
• 3.0 L model
PM-00281
2) Rotate the service hole cover in the direction of

the arrow.
• 2.5 L model
PM-00283
4) Obtain a new oil filter and apply a thin coat of en-

gine oil to the seal rubber.
5) To install the oil filter, turn the filter by hand while
being careful not to damage the seal rubber. When
PM-00325
the seal rubber just touches the oil cooler, tighten
• 3.0 L model by using a torque wrench or turn the filter by the
specified amount.
CAUTION:
Do not tighten excessively, or oil may leak.
• 3.0 L model
Oil filter 80 mm (3.15 in) in outer diameter
14 N·m (1.4 kgf-m, 10.3 ft-lb) or tighten 3/4 rotation.
• 2.5 L model
Oil filter 68 mm (2.68 in) in outer diameter
14 N·m (1.4 kgf-m, 10.3 ft-lb) or tighten 1 rotation.
PM-00282 Oil filter 65 mm (2.56 in) in outer diameter
12 N·m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.7 ft-lb) or tighten 2/3 — 3/4 ro-
tation.
PM-10
Engine Oil Filter

CAUTION:
If the engine oil is spilt over exhaust pipe or the
under cover, wipe it off with cloth to avoid emit-
ting smoke or causing a fire.
6) After installing the oil filter, run the engine and
make sure that no oil is leaking around seal rubber.
NOTE:
The filter element and filter case are permanently
jointed; therefore, interior cleaning is not neces-
sary.
7) Check the engine oil level. <Ref. to PM-9, IN-
SPECTION, Engine Oil.>
PM-11
Spark Plug
5. Spark Plug • 3.0 L model
A: REPLACEMENT
(A)
1. 2.5 L NON-TURBO MODEL
1) Remove the intake duct and intake chamber.
2) Remove the battery.
3) Disconnect the spark plug cord.
4) Remove the spark plug with a spark plug socket.
(B)
IG-02004
(A) Bracket
(B) Connector
PM-00001
5) Tighten the new spark plug lightly with hand, and

then secure with a spark plug socket to the speci-
fied torque.
Recommended spark plug:
NGK: FR5AP-11
Tightening torque: PM-00112
21 N·m (2.1 kgf-m, 15.2 ft-lb) 6) Tighten the new spark plug lightly with hand, and
NOTE: then secure with a spark plug socket to the speci-
• Be sure to place the gasket between the cylinder fied torque.
head and spark plug. Recommended spark plug:
• If the torque wrench is not available, tighten the 2.5 L Turbo model
spark plug until gasket contacts cylinder head; then NGK: SILFR6A
tighten further 1/4 to 1/2 turns. 3.0 L model
2. 2.5 L TURBO AND 3.0 L MODEL NGK: ILFR6B
1) Remove the battery and battery carrier. Tightening torque:
2) Remove the air cleaner case. 21 N·m (2.1 kgf-m, 15.2 ft-lb)
3) Detach the connector from ignition coil. 7) Tighten the ignition coil.
4) Remove the ignition coil.
Tightening torque:
• 2.5 L turbo model
16 N·m (1.6 kgf-m, 11.7 ft-lb)
NOTE:
• Be sure to place the gasket between the cylinder
head and spark plug.
• If the torque wrench is not available, tighten the
spark plug until gasket contacts cylinder head; then
tighten further 1/4 to 1/2 turns.
PM-00145
PM-12
V-belt
6. V-belt Belt tension (with belt tension gauge):

(A)
A: INSPECTION When installing new part: 640 — 785 N
(65.3 — 80.0 kgf, 144 — 176 lbf)
1. 2.5 L NON-TURBO AND 2.5 L TURBO At inspection: 490 — 640 N
MODEL (50 — 65 kgf, 110 — 144 lbf)
1) Replace the belts if cracks, fraying or wear are (B)
found. When installing new part: 620 — 760 N
2) Check the V-belt tension and adjust it if neces- (63 — 77 kgf, 140 — 170 lbf)
sary by changing the generator installing position At inspection: 350 — 450 N
or idler pulley installing position. <Ref. to PM-14, (36 — 46 kgf, 79 — 101 lbf)
REPLACEMENT, V-belt.> (A)
Belt tension (without belt tension gauge):
(A) P/S GEN A/C
When installing new part: 7 — 9 mm (B)

(0.276 — 0.354 in)
At inspection: 9 — 11 mm
(0.354 — 0.433 in)
(B) I/P
When installing new part: 7.5 — 8.5 mm C/P
(0.295 — 0.335 in) PM-00154
At inspection: 9.0 — 10.0 mm
(0.354 — 0.394 in) (A) Front side belt
(B) Rear side belt
(C)
C/P Crank pulley
P/S GEN A/C GEN Generator
(A) (B)
P/S Power steering oil pump pulley
A/C A/C compressor pulley
I/P Idler pulley
I/P 2. 3.0 L MODEL

C/P
1) Replace the belts if cracks, fraying or wear are
PM-00002 found.
(A) Front side belt
(B) Rear side belt
C/P Crank pulley
GEN Generator
I/P Idler pulley
PM-13
V-belt
2) Check that the V-belt automatic belt tensioner in- • 2.5 L turbo model
dicator (A) is within the range (D).
(A)
(D)
(C) ME-00807
(B)
3) Loosen the lock bolt (A).
4) Loosen the slider bolt (B).
5) Remove the front side belt (C).
6) Install a new V-belt, and tighten the slider bolt so
as to obtain the specified belt tension.
7) Tighten the lock bolt (A).
8) Tighten the slider bolt (B).
Tightening torque:
Lock bolt
25 N·m (2.5 kgf-m, 18.1 ft-lb)
ME-00475
Slider bolt
8 N·m (0.8 kgf-m, 5.8 ft-lb)
(A) Indicator
(B) Generator
(C) Power steering oil pump
(D) Service limit (B)
(C)
B: REPLACEMENT
1. FRONT SIDE BELT (FOR POWER
STEERING OIL PUMP AND GENERATOR)
NOTE: (A) PM-00004
Wipe off any oil and water on the belt and pulley.
1) Remove the collector cover. (If equipped)
2) Remove the V-belt covers.
• 2.5 L non-turbo model
PM-00003
PM-14
V-belt
2. REAR SIDE BELT (FOR A/C) 4) Install in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
(6)
Wipe off any oil and water on the belt and pulley. (1)
1) Remove the front side belts.
2) Loosen the lock nut (A).
3) Loosen the slider bolt (B). (4)
4) Remove the rear side belt.
5) Install a new V-belt, and tighten the slider bolt so
as to obtain the specified belt tension. (2) (5)
6) Tighten the lock nut (A).

(3) ME-00474
Tightening torque:
23 N·m (2.3 kgf-m, 17.0 ft-lb) (1) Power steering oil pump
(2) Belt tension adjuster
(3) Crank pulley
(B) (4) A/C compressor
(5) Belt idler
(6) Generator
(A)
PM-00005
7) Install the front side belt.

• 2.5 L non-turbo model <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-37,
FRONT SIDE BELT, INSTALLATION, V-belt.>
• 2.5 L turbo model <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-38,
FRONT SIDE BELT, INSTALLATION, V-belt.>
3. 3.0 L MODEL
1) Fit the tool to the belt tensioner mounting bolt.
2) Turn the tool clockwise, and loosen the V-belt to
remove.
ME-00473
3) Remove the V-belt cover.
PM-15
Timing Belt
7. Timing Belt (1) Use the ST to turn crankshaft. Align the

mark (a) of sprocket to the cylinder block notch
A: REPLACEMENT (b), and then ensure the right side cam sprocket
mark (c), cam cap and cylinder head matching
1. 2.5 L NON-TURBO MODEL surface (d) or left side cam sprocket mark (e),
1) Protect the radiator with cardboard and blanket. timing belt cover notch (f) are properly adjusted.
2) Remove the V-belt covers. ST 499987500 CRANKSHAFT SOCKET
ST
PM-00003 ME-00231
3) Remove the V-belts. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-37, V-

belt.>
4) Remove the A/C compressor V-belt tensioner. (d)
5) Use the ST to lock the crankshaft, and remove
the pulley bolt.
ST 499977100 CRANK PULLEY WRENCH
(c)
ST
(b) (a)
(f)
PM-00007
6) Remove the crank pulley.

7) Remove the belt cover (LH).
8) Remove the front timing belt cover.
9) Remove the timing belt guide. (MT model) (e)
10) If the alignment mark (a) or arrow mark (which ME-02387
indicates rotation direction) on the timing belt has 11) Remove the belt idler.
faded away, put new marks on the belt before re- 12) Remove the belt idler (No. 2).
moving as shown in procedures below.
PM-00010
13) Remove the timing belt.
PM-16
Timing Belt
14) Remove the automatic belt tension adjuster as- 9) Remove the timing belt guide. (MT model)
sembly.
PM-00008
PM-00011
15) Install in the reverse order of removal. <Ref. to

ME(H4SO)-42, INSTALLATION, Timing Belt.>
2. 2.5 L TURBO MODEL
1) Protect the radiator with cardboard and blanket.
2) Remove the V-belts. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-37,
V-belt.>
3) Remove the A/C compressor V-belt tensioner.
4) Remove the pulley bolt. Using the ST, lock the
ME-03124
crankshaft.
ME-00728
ST
PM-00093
5) Remove the crank pulley.

6) Remove the belt cover (LH).
7) Remove the belt cover (RH).
8) Remove the front belt cover.
ME-00729
PM-17
Timing Belt
10) Turn the crankshaft and align the alignment CAUTION:

marks on crankshaft, and left and right cam sprock- When installing the timing belt, be sure to align
ets with notches of belt cover and cylinder block. all alignment marks on the belt with corre-
Use the ST to turn crankshaft. sponding marks on the sprockets. If incorrectly
ST 499987500 CRANKSHAFT SOCKET installed, interference between pistons and
valves may occur.
B: INSPECTION
1. 2.5 L NON-TURBO MODEL
1) Remove the front timing belt cover and timing
belt cover (LH).
2) While cranking engine at least four rotations,
check the timing belt back surface for cracks or
damage. Replace the faulty timing belt as needed.
ME-00070 3) When the side part of timing belt is abnormally
worn (fluff or jumping out of core) or damaged,
check the idlers, tensioner, water pump pulley and
cam sprocket to determine idler alignment (square-
ness). Replace the worn timing belt.
ME-03175
11) Remove the belt idler.
PM-00342
4) Install the front timing belt cover and timing belt

cover (LH).
2. 2.5 L TURBO MODEL
1) Remove the timing belt cover (LH).
2) While cranking engine at least four rotations,
check the timing belt back surface for cracks or
PM-00095 damage. Replace the faulty timing belt as needed.
3) When the side part of timing belt is abnormally
12) Remove the timing belt.
worn (fluff or jumping out of core) or damaged,
13) Remove the automatic belt tension adjuster as-
check the idlers, tensioner, water pump pulley and
sembly.
cam sprocket to determine idler alignment (square-
ness). Replace the worn timing belt.
PM-00096
14) Install in the reverse order of removal. <Ref. to PM-00343

ME(H4DOTC)-43, Timing Belt.>
4) Install the timing belt cover (LH).
PM-18
Fuel Line
8. Fuel Line
A: INSPECTION
The fuel line is located mostly internally, so check
pipes, areas near pipes, and engine compartment
piping for rust, hose damage, loose band, etc. If
faulty parts are found, repair or replace them.
<Ref. to FU(H4SO)-57, Fuel Delivery and Evapora-
tion Lines.>
<Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-67, Fuel Delivery, Return
and Evaporation Lines.>
• 3.0 L model
<Ref. to FU(H6DO)-55, Fuel Delivery, Return and
Evaporation Lines.>
PM-19
Air Cleaner Element

9. Air Cleaner Element • Turbo model
A: REPLACEMENT
(B) (B)
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery.
(A)
(A)
PM-00183
5) Remove the air cleaner case (rear).

6) Remove the air cleaner element.
IN-00203
2) Disconnect the connector from mass air flow

sensor.
• Non-turbo model
IN-00206
7) Install in the reverse order of removal.

CAUTION:
When replacing the air cleaner element, use
IN-00204
SUBARU Genuine air cleaner element accord-
• Turbo model ing to the engine type. Using other air cleaner
element may affect engine performance.
NOTE:
• Fasten with a clip after inserting the lower tab of
case.
PM-00181
3) Loosen the clamps (A) which connect the air

cleaner case to intake duct. (Turbo model)
4) Remove the clips (B) on air cleaner case.
• Non-turbo model IN-00207
• Refer to “COMPONENT” for tightening torque.

2.5 L non-turbo model
<Ref. to IN(H4SO)-2, COMPONENT, General
(B) Description.>
2.5 L turbo model
<Ref. to IN(H4DOTC)-2, COMPONENT, Gener-
al Description.>
3.0 L model
<Ref. to IN(H6DO)-2, COMPONENT, General
PM-00182 Description.>
PM-20
Cooling System
10.Cooling System NOTE:

Rust or dirt on the cap may prevent valve from func-
A: INSPECTION tioning normally: be sure to clean the cap before
1) To check the radiator for leakage, fill it with en- testing.
gine coolant, and attach the radiator cap tester (A) Raise the pressure until the needle of gauge stops
to the filler neck, and apply pressure. Check the fol- and see if the pressure can be retained for five to
lowing points: six seconds. Replace the radiator cap if it is opened
under a pressure less than the service limit value
Non-turbo model: for this period.
157 kPa (1.6 kg/cm2, 23 psi)
Radiator cap valve open pressure
Turbo model:
122 kPa (1.2 kg/cm2, 18 psi) Non-turbo model
• Each portion of radiator for leakage Standard:
• Hose joints and other connections for leakage 93 — 123 kPa(0.95 — 1.25 kg/cm2,
14 — 18 psi)
NOTE: Service limit:
• For turbo model, be sure to install the tester to 83 kPa (0.85 kg/cm2, 12 psi)
filler tank side.
• Be particularly careful not to deform the filler Turbo model
neck of radiator when installing and removing the Filler tank side
tester and after testing. Standard:
• Non-turbo model 93 — 123 kPa(0.95 — 1.25 kg/cm2,
14 — 18 psi)
Service limit:
83 kPa (0.85 kg/cm2, 12 psi)
Radiator side
Standard:
122 — 152 kPa (1.24 — 1.55 kg/cm2,
18 — 22 psi)
Service limit:
112 kPa (1.14 kg/cm2, 16 psi)
(A) PM-00128
• Turbo model
(A)
PM-00023
PM-00184
• When performing this check, be sure to keep the

engine stationary and fill radiator with coolant.
• Wipe off check points before applying pressure.
• Use care not to spill coolant when detaching (A)
tester from radiator.
• Do not remove the radiator side cap. (Turbo
model)
(B)
2) Check the radiator cap valve open pressure us- (A)
PM-00089
ing radiator cap tester.
(A) Check points for deformation
(B) Check points for deformation, damage, rust
PM-21
Cooling System
3) Start the engine, and then check it does not

overheat or it is cooled excessively. If it overheats
or it is cooled excessively, check the cooling sys-
tem.
CAUTION:
If the engine coolant is spilt over exhaust pipe,
wipe it off with cloth to avoid emitting smoke or
causing a fire.
<Ref. to CO(H4SO)-14, Water Pump.> <Ref. to
CO(H4SO)-17, Thermostat.> <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-
19, Radiator.> <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-23, Radiator
Cap.>
<Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-15, Water Pump.> <Ref. to
CO(H4DOTC)-17, Thermostat.> <Ref. to
CO(H4DOTC)-19, Radiator.> <Ref. to
CO(H4DOTC)-23, Radiator Cap.>
• 3.0 L model
<Ref. to CO(H6DO)-12, Water Pump.> <Ref. to
CO(H6DO)-13, Thermostat.> <Ref. to CO(H6DO)-
15, Radiator.> <Ref. to CO(H6DO)-18, Radiator
Cap.>
4) Check the radiator fan operates using Subaru
Select Monitor, when the coolant temperature ex-
ceeds 96°C (205°F). If it does not operate, check
the radiator fan system.
<Ref. to CO(H4SO)-8, INSPECTION, Radiator Fan
System.>
<Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-9, INSPECTION, Radiator
Fan System.>
• 3.0 L model
<Ref. to CO(H6DO)-8, INSPECTION, Radiator Fan
System.>
PM-22
Engine Coolant
11.Engine Coolant Coolant capacity (fill up to “FULL” level):

2.5 L non-turbo model
A: REPLACEMENT MT model
1. REPLACEMENT OF ENGINE COOLANT Approx. 6.4 2 (6.8 US qt, 5.61 Imp qt)
AT model
WARNING:
Approx. 6.3 2 (6.7 US qt, 5.5 Imp qt)
The radiator is of the pressurized type. Do not
attempt to open the radiator cap immediately 2.5 L turbo model
after the engine has been stopped. MT model
CAUTION: Approx. 7.2 2 (7.6 US qt, 6.3 Imp qt)
If the engine coolant is spilt over exhaust pipe, AT model
wipe it off with cloth to avoid emitting smoke or Approx. 7.3 2 (7.7 US qt, 6.4 Imp qt)
causing a fire. 3.0 L model
1) Lift the vehicle. Approx. 7.2 2 (7.6 US qt, 6.3 Imp qt)
2) Remove the under cover. 11) Close the radiator cap (or the coolant filler tank
3) Place a container under drain pipe. cap on turbo models), and start the engine. Race 5
4) Remove the drain plug to drain engine coolant to 6 times at 3,000 rpm or less, then stop the en-
into container. gine. (Complete this operation within 40 seconds.)
12) Wait for one minute after the engine stops, then
open the radiator cap (or the coolant filler tank cap
on turbo models). If the engine coolant level drops,
add engine coolant into the radiator (or the coolant
filler tank on turbo models) up to the filler neck po-
sition.
13) Perform the procedures 11) and 12) again.
14) Install the radiator cap (or the coolant filler tank
cap on turbo models) and reservoir tank cap prop-
CO-00248
erly.
15) Start the engine and operate the heater at max-
5) For quick draining, open the radiator cap. imum hot position and the blower speed setting to
NOTE: “LO”.
• For turbo model, be sure to open the radiator cap 16) Run the engine at 2,000 rpm or less until radia-
on the filler tank side. tor fan starts and stops.
• Be careful not to spill coolant on the floor. NOTE:
6) Drain the coolant from reservoir tank. • Be careful with the engine coolant temperature
7) Tighten the radiator drain plug securely after gauge to prevent overheating.
draining coolant. • If the radiator hose becomes harden with the
8) Pour cooling system conditioner through the fill- pressure of engine coolant, air bleeding operation
er neck. seems to be almost completed.
Cooling system protective agent: 17) Stop the engine and wait until the engine cool-
Cooling system conditioner ant temperature lowers to 30°C (86°F) or less.
(part No. SOA635071) 18) Open the radiator cap (or the coolant filler tank
9) Pour the engine coolant into the radiator (or the cap on turbo models). If the engine coolant level
coolant filler tank on turbo models) up to the filler drops, add engine coolant into the coolant filler tank
neck position. up to the filler neck position and the reservoir tank
10) Fill engine coolant into the reservoir tank up to to “FULL” level.
“FULL” level. 19) Install the radiator cap (or the coolant filler tank
cap on turbo models) and reservoir tank cap prop-
Recommended engine coolant: erly.
Refer to “RM” section. <Ref. to RM-4, COOL- 20) Set the heater setting to maximum hot position
ANT, RECOMMENDED MATERIALS, Recom- and the blower speed setting to “LO” and start the
mended Materials.> engine. Perform racing at 3,000 rpm or less. If the
flowing sound is heard from heater core, repeat the
procedures from step 16).
PM-23
Engine Coolant
2. RELATIONSHIP OF SUBARU COOLANT 3. PROCEDURE TO ADJUST THE CON-

CONCENTRATION AND FREEZING TEM- CENTRATION OF THE COOLANT
PERATURE To adjust the concentration of coolant according to
The concentration and safe operating temperature temperature, find the proper fluid concentration in
of SUBARU coolant is shown in the diagram. Mea- the above diagram and replace the necessary
suring the temperature and specific gravity of the amount of coolant with an undiluted solution of
coolant will provide this information. SUBARU Genuine Coolant (concentration 50%).
[Example] The amount of engine coolant that should be re-
If the coolant temperature is 25°C (77°F) and its placed can be determined using the diagram.
specific gravity is 1.054, the concentration is 35% [Example]
(point A), the safe operating temperature is –14°C Assume that the engine coolant concentration must
(7°F) (point B), and the freezing temperature is – be increased from 25% to 40%. Find point A, where
20°C (–4°F) (point C). the 25% line of engine coolant concentration inter-
sects with the 40% curve of the necessary engine
Specific gravity
Safe operating temperature coolant concentration, and read the scale on the
vertical axis of the graph at height A. The quantity
of coolant
Concentration
of coolant of coolant to be drained is 2.1 2 (2.2 US qt, 1.8 Imp
qt). Drain 2.1 2 (2.2 US qt, 1.8 Imp qt) of coolant
1.100 from the cooling system and add 2.1 2 (2.2 US qt,
1.8 Imp qt) of the undiluted solution of SUBARU
1.090
60%
coolant.
1.080 If a coolant concentration of 50% is needed, drain
1.070 B
all the coolant and refill with the undiluted solution
50%
C only.
1.060
(1.054)
A 40%
Quantity of coolant to be
1.050
drained (US qt, Imp qt)
1.040 30%
Freezing
1.030
temperature
20%
1.020
Necessary Concentration
(77 F)
10%
25 C
1.010 of coolant
1.000
-40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40
3
(-40) (-22) (-4) (14) (32) (50) (68) (86) (104) (3.2,
Coolant temperature C ( F) 45%
CO-02172 2.6) A
2 40%
35%
(2.1,
1.8) 30%
1 25%
(1.1, 20%
0.9)
10% 15%
0
10 20 30 40 50
Concentration of coolant in
the vehicie cooling system %
Concentration of coolant in vehicie

and quantity to be drained
CO-00012
PM-24
Clutch System
12.Clutch System CAUTION:

Prevent the clutch fluid from being splashed
A: INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT over vehicle body. If the clutch fluid is splashed
1) Push the release lever to retract the push rod of over vehicle body, flush it, and then wipe it up.
the operating cylinder and check if the fluid level in NOTE:
the clutch reservoir tank rises or not. • Avoid mixing different brands of brake fluid to
• 5MT model prevent degradation of the fluid.
• Be careful not to allow dirt or dust to get into the
reservoir tank.
(C)
(B) (A)
(A)
(C)
(B)
PM-00164
(A) Release lever

PM-00165
(B) Push rod
(C) Operating cylinder (A) Reservoir tank
(B) MIN. level
• 6MT model (C) MAX. level
(A)
(B) (C)
PM-00322
(A) Release lever

(B) Push rod
(C) Operating cylinder
2) If the fluid level rises, pedal free play is correct.

3) If the fluid level does not rise, or the push rod
cannot be retracted, adjust the clutch pedal. <Ref.
to CL-31, Clutch Pedal.>
4) Check the fluid level using the scale on the out-
side of the clutch reservoir tank (A). If the level is
below “MIN” (B), inspect the clutch master cylinder,
operating cylinder and hydraulic line for fluid leaks.
If fluid leaks are found, repair or replace. If fluid
leaks are not found, add clutch fluid to bring it up to
“MAX” (C) of clutch reservoir tank.
Recommended clutch fluid:
Refer to “RM” section. <Ref. to RM-4, FLUID,
RECOMMENDED MATERIALS, Recommend-
ed Materials.>
PM-25
Transmission Gear Oil

13.Transmission Gear Oil 3) Fill the transmission gear oil through the oil level
gauge hole up to the upper point of level gauge.
A: REPLACEMENT Recommended gear oil:
1. MANUAL TRANSMISSION Refer to “RM” section. <Ref. to RM-2, LUBRI-
1) Drain the gear oil by removing drain plug. CANTS, RECOMMENDED MATERIALS, Rec-
ommended Materials.>
CAUTION:
If the transmission gear oil is spilt over exhaust NOTE:
pipe, wipe it off with cloth to avoid emitting Each oil manufacturer has its base oil and addi-
smoke or causing a fire. tives. Thus, do not mix two or more brands.
NOTE: Gear oil capacity:

• Before starting work, cool off the transmission 5MT model:
gear oil well. 3.5 2 (3.7 US qt, 3.1 Imp qt)
• Drain the gear oil by removing drain plug using 6MT model:
TORX® bit T70. 4.1 2 (4.3 US qt, 3.6 Imp qt)
• 5MT • 5MT
(A)
(B)
(C)
MT-01548 PM-00030
• 6MT (A) Oil level gauge

(B) Upper level
(C) Lower level
(A) • 6MT
(A)
(B)
(A)
MT-01549 (B)
(A) Drain plug (Oil pan side) (C)

(B) Drain plug (Clutch housing side)
MT-00449
2) Replace the gasket with new part, and then tight-
en the drain plug to specified torque. (A) Oil level gauge
Tightening torque: (B) Upper level
5MT (Aluminum gasket) (C) Lower level
44 N·m (4.5 kgf-m, 32.5 ft-lb)
5MT (Copper gasket)
70 N·m (7.1 kgf-m, 51.6 ft-lb)
6MT (Oil pan side):
44 N·m (4.5 kgf-m, 32.5 ft-lb)
6MT (Clutch housing side):
70 N·m (7.1 kgf-m, 51.6 ft-lb)
PM-26
Automatic Transmission Fluid

14.Automatic Transmission Flu- • 5AT model

id (A)
(A)
A: INSPECTION
F
(C)
HOT
(B)
L
CAUTION: (D)
The level of ATF varies with fluid temperature.
Pay attention to the fluid temperature when
F
(C)
checking ATF level.
COLD
(E)
L
1) Raise the ATF temperature by driving a distance (D)
of 5 to 10 km (3 to 6 miles). Otherwise, idle the en-

gine to raise ATF temperature to 70 — 80°C (158 PI-00190
— 176°F) on Subaru Select Monitor. <Ref. to (A) Level gauge

4AT(diag)-16, READ CURRENT DATA, OPERA-
TION, Subaru Select Monitor.>
[70 — 80°C (158 — 176°F)]
2) Make sure the vehicle is level.
(C) Upper level
3) After selecting all positions (P, R, N, D), shift the
select lever in “P” range. Idle the engine for 1 — 2 (D) Lower level
minutes, and measure the ATF level. (E) ATF level range at “COLD”
• 4AT model [20 — 30°C (68 — 86°F)]
(A) 4) Make sure that ATF level is above the center of

upper and lower marks at “HOT” side.
5) If the ATF level is below the center between up-
per and lower marks, add the recommended ATF
until the fluid level is found above the center be-
F
(C)
HOT
(B)
tween upper and lower marks.
L
(D)
CAUTION:
F
(C)
• Use care not to exceed the upper limit level.
COLD
(E)
L
(D)
• Adding ATF to the upper limit mark on “HOT”
PI-00189
side when the ATF temperature is less than
(A) Level gauge 70°C (158°F) will overfilling of ATF, causing a
transmission failure.
[70 — 80°C (158 — 176°F)] 6) Check ATF level after raising ATF temperature
to 70 — 80°C (158 — 176°F) by running the vehicle
(C) Upper level
or by idling the engine again.
(D) Lower level
7) Check the ATF for leaks.
(E) ATF level range at “COLD” Check for leaks in the transmission. If there are
[20 — 30°C (68 — 86°F)]
leaks, it is necessary to repair or replace gasket, oil
seals, plugs or other parts.
B: REPLACEMENT
1. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID
CAUTION:
If the ATF is spilt over exhaust pipe, wipe it off
with cloth to avoid emitting smoke or causing a
fire.
1) Drain the ATF by removing drain plug.
NOTE:
Before starting work, cool off the ATF well.
PM-27
Automatic Transmission Fluid

• 4AT model • 4AT model

(A)
F
(C)
HOT
(B)
L
(D)
(B)
F
(C)
COLD
(E)
L
(D)
(A)
PM-00167 PI-00189
(A) Front differential gear oil drain plug (A) Level gauge
(B) ATF drain plug (B) ATF level range at “HOT”
[70 — 80°C (158 — 176°F)]
• 5AT model (C) Upper level
(D) Lower level
[20 — 30°C (68 — 86°F)]
(A) • 5AT model
(A) (A)
F
(C)
HOT
(B)
L
(D)
PM-00168
(A) ATF drain plug
F
(C)
COLD
(E)
L
(D)
en the drain plug to specified torque.
PI-00190
Tightening torque:
4AT model (A) Level gauge
25 N·m (2.5 kgf-m, 18.1 ft-lb) (B) ATF level range at “HOT”
5AT model [70 — 80°C (158 — 176°F)]
20 N·m (2.0 kgf-m, 14.8 ft-lb) (C) Upper level
3) Pour in the ATF using the oil charge pipe. (D) Lower level
Recommended ATF: [20 — 30°C (68 — 86°F)]
RECOMMENDED MATERIALS, Recommend- 2. ATF FILTER
ed Materials.>
CAUTION:
Capacity: If the ATF is spilt over exhaust pipe, wipe it off
Fill with the same amount of ATF as drained. with cloth to avoid emitting smoke or causing a
4) Check the ATF level. <Ref. to PM-27, INSPEC- fire.
TION, Automatic Transmission Fluid.>
NOTE:
Basically, the ATF filter is maintenance free, but
when it is rusted or physically damaged or leaking,
the ATF filter needs to be replaced.
For the replacement procedure of ATF filter, refer
to “ATF FILTER”.
• 4AT model
<Ref. to 4AT-59, ATF Filter.>
• 5AT model
<Ref. to 5AT-57, ATF Filter.>
PM-28
Front & Rear Differential Gear Oil

15.Front & Rear Differential Gear • 5AT model

Copper gasket
Oil 70 N·m (7.1 kgf-m, 51.6 ft-lb)
A: REPLACEMENT 3) Fill differential gear oil through the oil level
gauge hole up to the upper point of level gauge.
1. FRONT DIFFERENTIAL (MT MODEL)
Recommended gear oil:
Front differential gear oil for MT model lubricates Refer to “RM” section. <Ref. to RM-2, LUBRI-
the transmission and differential together. Refer to CANTS, RECOMMENDED MATERIALS, Rec-
“Transmission Oil” for replacement procedure. ommended Materials.>
<Ref. to PM-26, Transmission Gear Oil.>
NOTE:
2. FRONT DIFFERENTIAL (AT MODEL) Each oil manufacturer has its base oil and addi-
1) Drain the differential gear oil by removing drain tives. Thus, do not mix two or more brands.
plug using TORX® bit T70. Gear oil capacity:
CAUTION: 4AT model
If the front differential gear oil is spilt over ex- 1.1 — 1.3 2 (1.2 — 1.4 US qt, 1.0 — 1.1 Imp qt)
haust pipe, wipe it off with cloth to avoid emit-
ting smoke or causing a fire. (A)
NOTE:
(B) (A)
• Before starting work, cool off the differential gear
oil well. (C)
• 4AT model
PI-00183
(A) Oil level gauge

(B) Upper level
(C) Lower level
5AT model
PM-00169
1.3 — 1.5 2(1.4 — 1.6 US qt, 1.1 — 1.3 Imp qt)
• 5AT model
(A) (A)
F
(B)
(C)
L
PI-00184
PM-00170
(A) Oil level gauge
(B) Upper level
en the drain plug to specified torque.
(C) Lower level
Tightening torque:
• 4AT model
Copper gasket
70 N·m (7.1 kgf-m, 51.6 ft-lb)
Aluminum gasket
44 N·m (4.5 kgf-m, 32.5 ft-lb)
PM-29
Front & Rear Differential Gear Oil

3. REAR DIFFERENTIAL • VA2-type

1) Drain the oil by removing drain plug.
2) Remove the filler plug for quick draining oil.
3) Install the drain plug after draining oil.
NOTE:
• Apply liquid gasket to the drain plug threads for
T-type (except for turbo 6MT model).
• Use a new gasket for VA-type and T-type (turbo
6MT model). (A)
Liquid gasket: (B) DI-00355

THREE BOND 1105 (Part No. 004403010)
(A) Filler plug
Tightening torque:
(B) Drain plug
T-type (except for turbo 6MT model)
49.0 N·m (5.0 kgf-m, 36.2 ft-lb) Oil capacity:
T-type (turbo 6MT model) Except for turbo 6MT model
60 N·m (6.1 kgf-m, 44.3 ft-lb) 0.8 2 (0.8 US qt, 0.7 Imp qt)
VA1-type Turbo 6MT model
34 N·m (3.5 kgf-m, 25.3 ft-lb) 1.0 2 (1.1 US qt, 0.9 Imp qt)
VA2-type
29 N·m (3.0 kgf-m, 21.4 ft-lb) NOTE:
4) Pour oil to the bottom end of filler plug hole. Each oil manufacturer has its base oil and addi-
tives. Thus, do not mix two or more brands.
Recommended gear oil: 5) Install the filler plug.
Refer to “RM” section. <Ref. to RM-2, LUBRI-
CANTS, RECOMMENDED MATERIALS, Rec- NOTE:
ommended Materials.> • Apply liquid gasket to the drain plug threads for
• Except for VA2-type T-type (except for turbo 6MT model).
• Use a new gasket for VA-type and T-type (turbo
(A)
6MT model).
Liquid gasket:
Tightening torque:
T-type (except for turbo 6MT model)
49.0 N·m (5.0 kgf-m, 36.2 ft-lb)
T-type (turbo 6MT model)
(B) 60 N·m (6.1 kgf-m, 44.3 ft-lb)
PM-00037 VA1-type
(A) Filler plug
34 N·m (3.5 kgf-m, 25.3 ft-lb)
VA2-type
(B) Drain plug
29 N·m (3.0 kgf-m, 21.4 ft-lb)
PM-30
Brake Line
16.Brake Line 2. SERVICE BRAKE

1) Check the free play of brake pedal by pulling up
A: INSPECTION the pedal with a force of 10 N (1 kgf, 2 lb) or less.
1. BRAKE LINE Brake pedal free play
1) Check for scratches, swelling, corrosion, traces (Pulling up direction of pedal)
of fluid leakage on the brake hoses or pipe joints. 0.5 — 2.0 mm (0.02 — 0.08 in)
2) Check the possibility of adjacent parts interfering
with brake pipes/hoses during driving, and loose
connections/clamps.
3) Check any trace of fluid leakage, scratches, etc.
on master cylinder, wheel cylinder and pressure
control valve.
NOTE: (A)
• When the brake fluid level in the reservoir tank is
lower than specified limit, the brake warning light
on the combination meter will illuminate. PM-00185
• Visually check the brake hose for damage. (Use
a mirror where it is difficult to see) (A) Pedal free play
2) If the free play is out of specifications above, ad-

just the brake pedal as follows.
(1) Make sure the engine is off. (No vacuum is
applied to brake booster.)
(2) (2) There should be play between brake boost-
er clevis and pin at brake pedal installing por-
(1) tion. [Pulling up the brake pedal pad with a force
of 10 N (1 kgf, 2 lb) or less to a stroke of 0.5 to
2.0 mm (0.02 to 0.08 in).]
PM-00171 (3) If there is no free play between clevis pin
and clevis, turn brake switch adjusting nut until
(1) Front brake hose the clearance between stopper and screw of
(2) Front brake pipe brake switch becomes 0.3 mm (0.012 in).
(A)
(H) (B)
(2)
(C)
(D)
(1) (I) (E)
(F)
(J)
(G)
PM-00186
PM-00172
(A) Brake switch
(1) Rear brake pipe
(B) Adjusting nut
(2) Rear brake hose
(C) 0.3 mm (0.012 in)
(D) Stopper
(E) Clevis pin
(F) Clevis
(G) Pedal free play
(H) Lock nut
(I) Brake booster operating rod
(J) Play at pin
PM-31
Brake Line
3) Check the pedal stroke. 4) A check valve is incorporated into the brake
While the engine is idling, depress the brake pedal booster nipple part. Disconnect the vacuum hose to
with a 490 N (50 kgf, 110 lb) load and measure the inspect function of check valve.
distance between the brake pedal and steering Make sure air flows from the booster end to engine
wheel. With the brake pedal released, measure the end but does not flow in the opposite direction in
distance between pedal and steering wheel again. the check valve.
The pedal stroke is normal if the difference be-
tween two measured values is the specified value
or less. If the measured value is the specification or (C) (A)
more, there is possibility of entering air in hydraulic
unit.
Brake pedal stroke A: (D)
95 mm (3.7 in)/ 490 N (50 kgf, 110 lb) or less
1 2 =A
(B)
PM-00260
(A)
(A) Brake booster
1 (B) Check valve
2 (C) Engine side
(D) Brake booster side
(B) 5) Check the vacuum hose for cracks or other dam-

PM-00045
age.
(A) Steering wheel NOTE:
(B) Toe board When installing the vacuum hose on the engine
and brake booster, do not use soapy water or lubri-
4) Check to see if air is in the hydraulic brake line cating oil on their connections.
by the feel of pedal operation. If air appears to exist 6) Check the vacuum hose to make sure it is tightly
in the line, bleed it from the system. secured.
5) Check for even operation of all brakes, using a
brake tester or by driving the vehicle for a short dis-
tance on a straight road.
3. BRAKE SERVO SYSTEM
1) With the engine off, depress the brake pedal
several times applying the same pedal force. Make
sure the travel distance should not change.
2) With the brake pedal depressed, start the en-
gine. Make sure the pedal should move slightly to-
ward the floor.
3) With the brake pedal depressed, stop the engine
and keep the pedal depressed for 30 seconds.
Make sure the pedal height should not change.
PM-32
Brake Fluid
17.Brake Fluid 8) Repeat steps 6) and 7) until there are no air bub-
bles in drained brake fluid and new fluid flows
A: REPLACEMENT through vinyl tube.
1) Either jack-up the vehicle and place a rigid rack NOTE:
under it, or lift-up the vehicle. Add brake fluid as necessary while performing the
2) Remove all the wheels. air bleed operation, in order to prevent the tank
3) Drain the brake fluid from master cylinder. from running short of brake fluid.
4) Refill the reservoir tank with recommended 9) After completing the bleeding operation, hold the
brake fluid. brake pedal depressed and tighten the screw and
Recommended brake fluid: install bleeder cap.
Refer to “RM” section. <Ref. to RM-4, FLUID, Tightening torque:
RECOMMENDED MATERIALS, Recommend- 8 N·m (0.8 kgf-m, 5.8 ft-lb)
ed Materials.> 10) Bleed air from each wheel cylinder by following
NOTE: steps from 5) to 9).
• Avoid mixing different brands of brake fluid to 11) Depress the brake pedal with a force of approx.
prevent degrading the quality of fluid. 294 N (30 kgf, 66 lb) and hold it there for approx. 20
• Be careful not to allow dirt or dust to get into the seconds. At this time check the pedal to see if it
reservoir tank. makes any unusual movement. Visually inspect the
• Perform the operation in the order from farthest bleeder screws and brake pipe joints to confirm
wheel cylinder to the master cylinder. there is no fluid leakage.
5) Install one end of a vinyl tube onto the air bleeder 12) Install the wheels, and drive the vehicle for a
and insert the other end of the tube into a container distance of 2 to 3 km (1 to 2 miles) to confirm that
to collect the brake fluid. brakes are operating properly.
PM-00048
NOTE:
• Cover the bleeder with cloth, when loosening it,
to prevent brake fluid from being splashed over sur-
rounding parts.
• While bleeding air, keep the reservoir tank filled
with brake fluid to prevent entry of air.
• Operate the brake pedal slowly.
• For convenience and safety, two people should
do the work.
• The amount of brake fluid required is approx.
500 m2 (16.9 US fl oz, 17.6 Imp fl oz) for total
brake system.
6) Instruct your co-worker to depress the brake
pedal slowly two or three times and then hold it de-
pressed.
7) Loosen the bleeder screw approximately 1/4
turn until a small amount of brake fluid drains into
the container, and then quickly tighten the screw.
PM-33
Disc Brake Pad and Disc

18.Disc Brake Pad and Disc 3) Check the disc rotor, and correct or replace if it is
damaged or worn.
A: INSPECTION • Front
1) Jack-up the vehicle and support with rigid racks. Disc rotor thickness mm (in)
Then remove the wheels. 16-inch 24 (0.94)
2) Visually check the pad thickness through inspec- Standard
17-inch 30 (1.18)
tion hole of disc brake assembly. Replace the pad if
16-inch 22 (0.87)
necessary. Wear limit
17-inch 28 (1.10)
NOTE:
When replacing a pad, always replace the pads for • Rear
both the left and right wheels at the same time. Also
Disc rotor thickness mm (in)
replace the pad clips if they are twisted or worn.
Solid disc type 10 (0.39)
Standard
Ventilated disc type 18 (0.71)
Solid disc type 8.5 (0.34)
Wear limit
4) Remove the caliper body. <Ref. to BR-18, Front

Disc Brake Assembly.> <Ref. to BR-27, Rear Disc
Brake Assembly.>
(A) 5) Tighten the wheel nuts to secure disc rotor.
6) Set a dial gauge at a point less than 10 mm (0.39
PM-00049 in) from outer periphery of the rotor, and then mea-
sure the disc rotor runout.
(A) Inspection hole
Disc rotor runout limit:
• Front Front: 0.05 mm (0.002 in)
Pad thickness mm (in) Rear: 0.05 mm (0.002 in)
16-inch 11 (0.43)
Standard
17-inch 11 (0.43)
16-inch 1.5 (0.059)
Wear limit
17-inch 1.5 (0.059)
• Rear
Pad thickness mm (in)
Solid disc type 9 (0.35)
Standard
PM-00051
Solid disc type 1.5 (0.059)
Wear limit
Ventilated disc type 1.5 (0.059)
(A)
(C)
(B)
PM-00140
(A) Pad thickness

(B) Back metal
(C) Lining
PM-34
Parking Brake
19.Parking Brake 4) When the shoe return spring tension is exces-

sively weakened, replace it.
A: INSPECTION
B: ADJUSTMENT
Inspect the brake linings and disc rotor of both
sides of the rear brake at the same time by remov- For rear disc brake, adjust the parking brake after
ing disc rotor. bleeding air.
1) Inspect the brake shoes for damage or deforma- 1) Remove the rear cover (rubber) installed at back
tion and check the brake linings for wear. plate.
2) Turn the adjuster toward arrow mark (upward)
NOTE: until it is locked slightly, by using flat-tip screwdriver
Always replace both primary and secondary brake as shown in the figure.
shoes for the left and right wheels at the same time.
Thickness of brake lining (except for back met- (A)
al): (B)
Standard: 3.2 mm (0.126 in)
Wear limit: 1.5 mm (0.059 in)
(C)
PM-00056
(A)
(A) Adjuster
(B) Cover (rubber)
(B) (C) Back plate
(C)
PM-00054
3) Turn back (downward) the adjuster 3 to 4 notch-
(A) Forward es.
(B) Brake shoe (Primary side) 4) Install the cover (rubber) in original position cor-
rectly.
(C) Brake shoe (Secondary side)
2) Check the inside of disc rotor for wear, dents or

other damage. If the inside surface of dick rotor is
streaked, correct the surface with emery cloth
(#200 or more). If it is unevenly worn or tapered,
correct or replace it.
Brake drum inside diameter:
Standard: 170 mm (6.69 in)
Wear limit: 171 mm (6.73 in)
(B)
(A)
PM-00055
(A) Inside diameter

(B) Disc
3) If the deformation or wear of back plate, shoe,

etc. is noticeable, replace them.
PM-35
Suspension
20.Suspension (1) If the free play exceeds standard value, re-

place the ball joint.
A: INSPECTION (2) If the dust seal is damaged, replace with a
new ball joint.
1. SUSPENSION BALL JOINT
NOTE:
1) Jack-up the vehicle until front wheels are off
ground. When the front arm ball joint has been removed or
replaced, check the toe-in of front wheel. If the front
2) Grasp the bottom of tire and move it in and out
wheel toe-in is not at specified value, adjust the
along the shaft. If relative movement is observed
toe-in. <Ref. to FS-7, Wheel Alignment.>
between the brake disc cover (A) and the end of
front arm (D), ball joint (C) may be excessively
worn.
(A)
(A) PM-00059
(D)
(C) (B) (A) Dust seal
PM-00057
3) Grasp the end of front arm and move it up and 2. FRONT, REAR SUSPENSION BUSHING
down. Relative movement (A) between the housing Apply pressure with tire lever etc. to inspect the
(D) and front arm (C) boss indicates ball joint (B) bushing for abnormal fatigue or damage. Replace
may be excessively worn. the bushings if there is abnormal fatigue or dam-
age.
(D)
(A)
(C)
(B)
PM-00058
4) If relative movement is observed in the step 2), PM-00180

3), remove and inspect the ball joint. If the free play
3. WHEEL ARCH HEIGHT
exceeds standard value, replace the ball joint.
<Ref. to FS-16, Front Ball Joint.> 1) Unload the cargoes and set the vehicle in curb
5) Damage of dust seal weight (empty) condition.
Visually inspect the ball joint dust seal. If it is dam- 2) Check the wheel arch height of front and rear
aged, remove the front arm. <Ref. to FS-18, Front suspensions to ensure that they are within speci-
Arm.> Also, measure the free play of the ball joint. fied values. <Ref. to FS-7, Wheel Alignment.>
<Ref. to FS-16, Front Ball Joint.> 3) When the wheel arch height is out of standard,
visually inspect following components and replace
deformed parts.
• Suspension components [Front strut assembly
and rear damper assembly]
• Parts connecting suspension and body
4) When no components are deformed, adjust
wheel arch height by replacing coil spring in the
suspension whose wheel arch height is out of stan-
dard. <Ref. to FS-7, Wheel Alignment.> <Ref. to
RS-7, Wheel Alignment.>
PM-36
Suspension
4. WHEEL ALIGNMENT OF FRONT SUS- 7. TIGHTNESS OF BOLTS AND NUTS

PENSION Check the bolts and nuts for looseness. Retighten
1) Check the alignment of front suspension to en- the bolts and nuts to specified torque. If the self-
sure that following items conform to standard val- locking nuts and bolts are removed, replace them
ues. with new parts.
• Toe-in • Front suspension
• Camber <Ref. to FS-3, COMPONENT, General Descrip-
• Caster tion.>
• Steering angle • Rear suspension
<Ref. to FS-7, Wheel Alignment.> <Ref. to RS-3, COMPONENT, General Descrip-
2) When the caster angle does not conform to ref- tion.>
erence obviously, visually inspect the following 8. DAMAGE TO SUSPENSION PARTS
components and replace deformed parts.
• Suspension components [Strut assembly, cross- Check the following parts and the fastening portion
member, front arm, etc.] of the vehicle body for deformation or excessive
• Parts connecting suspension and body rusting which impairs the suspension. If necessary,
3) When the toe-in and camber are out of standard replace the damaged parts with new parts. If minor
value, adjust them so that they conform to standard rust formation, pitting, etc. are noted, remove the
value. rust and take rust prevention measure.
4) When the right-and-left turning angles of tire are • Front suspension
out of standard, adjust to standard value. • Front arm
• Crossmember
5. WHEEL ALIGNMENT OF REAR SUS- • Strut
PENSION • Rear suspension
1) Check the alignment of rear suspension to en- • Sub frame
sure that following items are within standard val- • Front link
ues. • Rear link
• Toe-in • Upper link
• Camber • Rear arm
• Thrust angle • Shock absorber
<Ref. to RS-7, Wheel Alignment.> • In the area where salt is sprayed to melt snow on
2) When the camber angle does not conform to a road in winter, check suspension parts for dam-
standard value, visually inspect the following com- age caused by rust every 12 months after lapse of
ponents. If the deformation is observed, replace the 60 months. Take rust prevention measures as re-
damaged parts. quired.
• Suspension components [Shock absorber, front
link, rear link, upper link, rear arm, sub frame, etc]
• Parts connecting suspension and body
3) When the toe-in and thrust angle are out of stan-
dard value, adjust them so that they conform to
standard value.
6. OIL LEAKAGE OF STRUT AND SHOCK
ABSORBER
Visually inspect the front strut and rear shock ab-
sorber for oil leakage. Replace the front strut and
rear shock absorber if oil leaks excessively.
PM-37
Wheel Bearing
21.Wheel Bearing 6) While supporting rear drive shaft horizontally

with one hand, turn the hub with the other hand to
A: INSPECTION check for noise or binding.
If the hub is noisy or binds, replace the rear axle.
1. FRONT WHEEL BEARING
NOTE:
Inspect the condition of front wheel bearing grease.
1) Jack-up the front side of vehicle.
2) While holding the front wheel by hand, swing it in
and out to check bearing free play.
3) Loosen the wheel nuts, and remove the front
wheel.
4) If the bearing free play exists in step 2) above,
attach a dial gauge to the hub and measure axial PM-00173
play in axial direction.
Service limit:
Straight-ahead position within 0.05 mm
(0.0020 in)
5) Remove the bolts and self-locking nuts, and ex-
tract the front arm from front crossmember.
6) Remove the PTJ of front drive shaft from trans-
mission. <Ref. to DS-13, Front Axle.>
7) While supporting the front drive shaft horizontal-
ly with one hand, turn the hub with the other hand to
check for noise or binding.
If the hub is noisy or binds, replace the front axle.
PM-00173
2. REAR WHEEL BEARING

1) Jack-up the rear side of vehicle.
2) While holding the rear wheel by hand, swing it in
and out to check bearing free play.
3) Loosen the wheel nuts, and remove the rear
wheel.
4) If the bearing free play exists in step 2) above,
attach a dial gauge to the hub and measure axial
play in axial direction.
Service limit:
Straight-ahead position within 0.05 mm
(0.0020 in)
5) Remove the DOJ of rear drive shaft from rear dif-
ferential. <Ref. to DS-26, Rear Drive Shaft.>
PM-38
Axle Boots & Joints

22.Axle Boots & Joints

A: INSPECTION
1. FRONT AND REAR AXLE BOOTS
Inspect the front axle boots (A) and rear axle boots
(B) for deformation, damage or failure. If faulty, re-
place with a new part. <Ref. to DS-22, Front Drive
Shaft.> <Ref. to DS-26, Rear Drive Shaft.>
• Front
(A)
PM-00174
• Rear
(B)
PM-00175
2. PROPELLER SHAFT
Inspect the propeller shaft for damage or failure. If
faulty, replace with a new part. <Ref. to DS-10, Pro-
peller Shaft.>
PM-39
Tire Rotation
23.Tire Rotation 4) Re-register the transmitter ID when rotation was

performed. (3.0 L U4 model) <Ref. to TPM(diag)-9,
A: INSPECTION REGISTER TRANSMITTER ID, OPERATION,
1) When the tread has worn down to less than 1.6 Subaru Select Monitor.>
mm (0.063 in) or the wear indicator appears across
the tread, replace the tire. (Replace the right and
left tire as a set.)
2) If the tire appears to be worn unevenly, adjust
the wheel alignment.
3) Next, make a tire rotation between front and rear
as shown in the figure, make sure tires are worn
evenly.
• When the direction of tire rotation is not specified
WT-00113
(1) Front
• With instruction for the direction of tire rotation
WT-00115
(1) Front
(A) (B)
(C)
PM-00080
(A) New tread

(B) Damaged tread
(C) Tread wear indicator
PM-40
Steering System (Power Steering)

24.Steering System 2. STEERING SHAFT JOINT

(Power Steering) When the steering wheel free play is excessive,
disconnect the universal joint of steering shaft and
A: INSPECTION check it for any play and yawing torque (at the point
of the crossing direction). Also inspect for any dam-
1. STEERING WHEEL age to sealing or worn serrations. If the joint is
1) Set the steering wheel in a straight-ahead posi- loose, retighten the mounting bolts to the specified
tion, and check the wheel spokes to make sure torque.
they are correctly set in their specified positions.
Tightening torque:
2) Lightly turn the steering wheel to the left and 24 N·m (2.4 kgf-m, 17.4 ft-lb)
right to determine the point where front wheels start
to move.
Measure the distance of the movement of steering
wheel at the outer periphery of wheel.
Steering wheel free play:
0 — 17 mm (0 — 0.67 in)
(1)
PS-00450
(1) Steering wheel free play
Move the steering wheel vertically toward the shaft

to ascertain if there is play in the direction.
PM-00176
Maximum permissible play:
0.5 mm (0.020 in) 3. GEARBOX
3) Drive the vehicle and check the following items 1) With the vehicle placed on a level surface, turn
during operation. the steering wheel 90° in both the left and right di-
(1) Steering force: rections.
The effort required for steering should be While the wheel is being rotated, reach under the
smooth and even at all points, and should not vehicle and check for looseness in gearbox.
vary.
(2) Pulled to one side: Tightening torque:
Steering wheel should not be pulled to either 60 N·m (6.1 kgf-m, 44.1 ft-lb)
side while driving on a level surface.
(3) Wheel runout:
Steering wheel should not show any sign of
runout.
(4) Return factor:
Steering wheel should return to its original posi-
tion after it has been turned and then released.
PM-00177
2) Check the boot for damage, cracks or deteriora-

tion.
PM-41

3) With the vehicle placed on a level surface, quick- 2) Check the connections of knuckle ball joints for
ly turn the steering wheel to the left and right. play, inspect for damage on dust seals, and check
While steering wheel is being rotated, check the free play of ball studs. If the castle nut is loose, re-
gear backlash. If any noise is noticed, adjust the tighten it to the specified torque, then tighten it fur-
gear backlash. ther up to 60°until the cotter pin hole is aligned.
4) Apply liquid gasket to at least 1/3 of entire perim- Tightening torque:
eter of adjusting screw thread.
27 N·m (2.75 kgf-m, 19.9 ft-lb)
5) Tighten the adjusting screw to 25 N·m (2.5 kgf-
3) Check the lock nut on the tie-rod for tightness. If
m, 18.1 ft-lb) and then loosen.
it is loose, retighten it to the specified torque.
6) Tighten the adjusting screw to 3.9 N·m (0.40 kgf-
m, 2.9 ft-lb) and then loosen 20°. Tightening torque:
85 N·m (8.7 kgf-m, 63 ft-lb)
5. POWER STEERING FLUID LEVEL
CAUTION:
(A)
If the power steering fluid is spilt over exhaust
pipe, wipe it off with cloth to avoid emitting
smoke or causing a fire.
NOTE:
• Check at power steering fluid temperature 20°C
PM-00068 (68°F); read the fluid level on the “COLD” side.
• Check at power steering fluid temperature 80°C
(A) Apply liquid gasket to at least 1/3 of entire (176°F); read the fluid level on the “HOT” side.
perimeter. 1) Place the vehicle with engine “OFF” on a level
surface.
7) Install the lock nut. While holding the adjusting 2) Check the fluid level using the scale on the out-
screw with wrench, tighten the lock nut using ST. side of the reservoir tank (A). If the level is below
ST 926230000 SPANNER “MIN” (B), add fluid to bring it up to “MAX” (C).
Tightening torque (lock nut):
25 N·m (2.5 kgf-m, 18.1 ft-lb)
Hold the adjusting screw with wrench to prevent it
from turning while tightening the lock nut.
(C)
4. TIE-ROD (A)
1) Check the tie-rod and tie-rod ends for bends,
scratches or other damage.
(B)
PM-00178
NOTE:
If fluid level is at MAX level or above, drain fluid to
keep the level in the specified range of indicator by
using a syringe or the like.
(A) Recommended fluid:
(B)
PM-00069 RECOMMENDED MATERIALS, Recommend-
ed Materials.>
(A) Tie-rod end
(B) Knuckle arm
Fluid capacity:
0.8 2 (0.8 US qt, 0.7 Imp qt)
PM-42

6. POWER STEERING FLUID FOR LEAKS 9. GEARBOX BOOTS

CAUTION: Inspect both sides of the gearbox boot as follows,
If the power steering fluid is spilt over exhaust and correct the defects if necessary.
pipe, wipe it off with cloth to avoid emitting 1) Positions (A) and (B) of the gearbox boot are fit-
smoke or causing a fire. ted correspondingly in grooves (A) and (B) of the
Inspect the underside of oil pump and gearbox of gearbox and rod (C).
power steering system, hoses, pipes and their cou- 2) Clips are fitted outside of positions (A) and (B) of
plings for fluid leaks. boot.
If the fluid leaks are found, retighten their fitting 3) Boot does not have crack or hole.
bolts (or nuts) and/or replace their parts. NOTE:
NOTE: Rotate (B) position of gearbox boot against the tor-
• Wipe the leaked fluid off after correcting fluid sion produced by the adjustment of toe-in etc. Ap-
leaks. ply grease to the groove (C).
• Also pay attention to clearances between hoses
(or pipes) and other parts when inspecting fluid
leaks. (C)
7. HOSES OF OIL PUMP FOR DAMAGES

CAUTION:
pipe, wipe it off with cloth to avoid emitting (B)
(A)
Check the pressure hose and return hose of oil PM-00090
pump for crack, swell or damage. Replace the hose
with a new part if necessary. 10.FITTING BOLTS AND NUTS
NOTE: Inspect the fitting bolts and nuts of oil pump and
Prevent hoses from turning and/or bending when bracket for looseness, and retighten them if neces-
installing hoses. sary.
Inspect and/or retighten them when engine is cold.
PM-00179
8. POWER STEERING PIPES FOR DAMAG-

ES
CAUTION:
pipe, wipe it off with cloth to avoid emitting
Check the power steering pipes for corrosion and
damage.
Replace the pipes with new parts if necessary.
PM-43

PM-44
ENGINE 1 SECTION
FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS) FU(H4SO)
EMISSION CONTROL
EC(H4SO)
(AUX. EMISSION CONTROL DEVICES)
INTAKE (INDUCTION) IN(H4SO)
MECHANICAL ME(H4SO)
with the necessary information and data EXHAUST EX(H4SO)
of SUBARU vehicles.
COOLING CO(H4SO)
sembling, inspection and adjustment of LUBRICATION LU(H4SO)
Please peruse and utilize this manual SPEED CONTROL SYSTEMS SP(H4SO)
their vehicle in optimum condition. IGNITION IG(H4SO)
SUBARU genuine parts. STARTING/CHARGING SYSTEMS SC(H4SO)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS) EN(H4SO)(diag)
GENERAL DESCRIPTION GD(H4SO)

approval.

FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)
FU(H4SO)
Page
2. Throttle Body ............................................................................................11
3. Intake Manifold .........................................................................................12
4. Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor .......................................................20
5. Crankshaft Position Sensor ......................................................................21
6. Camshaft Position Sensor ........................................................................22
7. Knock Sensor ...........................................................................................23
8. Throttle Position Sensor ...........................................................................24
9. Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor .........................................................25
10. Mass Air Flow and Intake Air Temperature Sensor .................................26
11. EGR Valve ...............................................................................................27
12. Fuel Injector .............................................................................................28
13. Variable Valve Lift Diagnosis Oil Pressure Switch ...................................31
14. Oil Temperature Sensor ...........................................................................32
15. Front Oxygen (A/F) Sensor ......................................................................33
16. Rear Oxygen Sensor ................................................................................34
17. Engine Control Module (ECM) .................................................................35
18. Main Relay ...............................................................................................36
19. Fuel Pump Relay ......................................................................................37
20. Electronic Throttle Control Relay .............................................................38
21. Fuel ..........................................................................................................39
22. Fuel Tank .................................................................................................41
23. Fuel Filler Pipe .........................................................................................47
24. Fuel Pump ................................................................................................50
25. Fuel Level Sensor ....................................................................................52
26. Fuel Sub Level Sensor .............................................................................53
27. Fuel Filter .................................................................................................55
28. Fuel Damper Valve ..................................................................................56
29. Fuel Delivery and Evaporation Lines .......................................................57
30. Fuel System Trouble in General ..............................................................60
General Description
A: SPECIFICATION
Contents Specification
Capacity 64 2 (16.9 US gal, 14.1 Imp gal)
Fuel tank
Install locations Under rear seat
Type Impeller
Shutoff discharge pressure 550 — 850 kPa (5.6 — 8.7 kg/cm2, 79.7 — 123.2 psi)
Fuel pump
125 2 (33 US gal, 27.5 Imp gal)/h or more.
Discharge rate
[12 V at 300 kPa (3.06 kg/cm2, 43.5 psi)]
Fuel filter Intank type
FU(H4SO)-2
General Description
B: COMPONENT
1. INTAKE MANIFOLD
T1
(7) (18)
T1
T4 T3
T1
T4
(18) T3 T4
(8) T4
T4
(17) (10)
(9) T2 (17)
T4 T1
(11) T4 T4
T2
T2
T3
(15) (21) (5)
(1) T4
(13)
(12) (2)
(15)
(14)
(13)
(16) T4
(12) (20)
T4 T5
(14)
T5
(2)
(3) (15) (15)
(13) (13)
(12)
(6) (12)
(14)
(3) (14)
(4)
(4)
(6)
T1
(19)
T1
FU-03199
FU(H4SO)-3
General Description
(1) Intake manifold (11) Fuel injector pipe RH (20) Fuel injector pipe LH
(2) Gasket (12) Fuel injector (21) Gasket
(3) Intake manifold (Lower) (13) O-ring
(4) Gasket (14) O-ring Tightening torque: N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(5) Nipple (15) O-ring T1: 6.4 (0.65, 4.7)
(6) Guide pin (16) Purge control solenoid valve T2: 8.75 (0.89, 6.5)
(7) PCV pipe (17) Plug cord holder T3: 17 (1.7, 12.5)
(8) EGR valve (18) Nipple T4: 19 (1.9, 14)
(9) Fuel pipe protector RH (19) Fuel pipe ASSY T5: 25 (2.5, 18)
(10) Fuel pipe protector LH
2. AIR INTAKE SYSTEM
T2
T1
(3)
(4)
(1)
(2)
FU-02560
(1) Gasket (4) O-ring Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)

(2) Throttle body T1: 2.0 (0.20, 1.5)
(3) Manifold absolute pressure sen- T2: 8 (0.8, 5.9)
sor
FU(H4SO)-4
General Description
3. CRANKSHAFT POSITION, CAMSHAFT POSITION AND KNOCK SENSORS
T1
T2
(1)
(2)
T1
(3)
(4) T1
FU-00414
(1) Crankshaft position sensor (4) Camshaft position sensor support Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(2) Knock sensor T1: 6.4 (0.65, 4.7)
(3) Camshaft position sensor T2: 24 (2.4, 17.4)
FU(H4SO)-5
General Description
4. FUEL TANK
(28)
T1
(29)
(17) (17)
(27)
(15)
(8) (16)
(17)
(17)
(7)
(14) (19)
(10)
(17)
T1
(9) (15)
(17) (26)
(25)
(17)
(1)
(18) (12)
(30) (17)
(11)
T4 (13)
(20)
(3)
(2) T4
(21) (6)
T4
(5)
T3
T3 (6)
T3
T3
(22)
(23)
(24) (4)
T3
T2
T2 T3
FU-02827
FU(H4SO)-6
General Description
(1) Fuel tank (13) Fuel sub level sensor gasket (25) Evaporation hose B
(2) Fuel tank band RH (14) Fuel filler hose (26) Connector
(3) Fuel tank band LH (15) Clamp (27) Evaporation hose C
(4) Delivery tube (16) Evaporation hose A (28) Evaporation hose D
(5) Jet pump tube (17) Clip (29) Evaporation pipe
(6) Retainer (18) Evaporation hose F (30) Evaporation hose E
(7) Fuel pump ASSY (19) Fuel tank protector LH (Rear)
(8) Fuel pump upper plate (20) Stopper RH Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(9) Fuel pump gasket (21) Stopper LH T1: 4.4 (0.45, 3.2)
(10) Fuel level sensor (22) Heat shield cover T2: 9 (0.9, 6.6)
(11) Fuel sub level sensor (23) Fuel tank protector RH (Front) T3: 17.5 (1.78, 12.9)
(12) Fuel sub level sensor upper plate (24) Fuel tank protector LH (Front) T4: 33 (3.4, 25)
FU(H4SO)-7
General Description
5. FUEL LINE
T2
(27) (25)
(28)
(26) (23) T1
T1
T6 (37) (36)
(30) (23)
(23) (23)
(37) (21)
(38)
T6 (23) (23) (35)
T2 (31)
T2
(22) (23)
T2 C
(29) T2
(24)
(19)
(18)
T2 T2
(17)
(11) (8)
(1) (34)
(23) (1)
(39) (20) (33)
(16)
(1)
(32)
(1) C
(1)
A (31) (33)
A
T4 T3
(14)
B (15)
(13)
(13)
(13)
(12)
(10)
(1) (3) (6) (1)

(5)
(13)
(4) (13) (2)
T5
T5 (7) (9)
FU-03120
FU(H4SO)-8
General Description
(1) Clip (17) Drain valve (33) Connector B

(2) Fuel damper valve (18) Drain filter (34) Canister hose B
(3) Evaporation hose A (19) Canister protector (35) Drain hose
(4) Fuel delivery hose A (20) Pressure control solenoid valve (36) Drain hose connector
(5) Fuel delivery hose B (21) Evaporation pipe A (37) Evaporation hose C
(6) Clip (22) Evaporation pipe B (38) Evaporation hose D
(7) Bracket (23) Clip (39) Evaporation hose E
(8) Evaporation tube (24) Fuel filler pipe
(9) Fuel pipe ASSY A (25) Shut valve Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(10) Fuel delivery hose C (26) Gasket T1: 4.4 (0.45, 3.2)
(11) Retainer (27) Filler ring T2: 7.5 (0.76, 5.5)
(12) Evaporation hose B (28) Fuel filler cap T3: 8 (0.8, 5.9)
(13) Clamp (29) Fuel tank pressure sensor T4: 17.6 (1.8, 13)
(14) Grommet (30) Evaporation pipe protector T5: 1.25 (0.13, 0.94)
(15) Fuel pipe ASSY B (31) Connector A T6: 1.0 (0.1, 0.7)
(16) Canister (32) Canister hose A
C: CAUTION
• Wear appropriate work clothing, including a cap,
protective goggles and protective shoes when per-
forming any work.
• Remove contamination including dirt and corro-
sion before removal, installation or disassembly.
• Keep the disassembled parts in order and pro-
tect them from dust and dirt.
• Before removal, installation or disassembly, be
sure to clarify the failure. Avoid unnecessary re-
moval, installation, disassembly and replacement.
• Vehicle components are extremely hot after driv-
ing. Be wary of receiving burns from heated parts.
• Be sure to tighten fasteners including bolts and
nuts to the specified torque.
• Place shop jacks or rigid racks at the specified
points.
• Before disconnecting connectors of sensors or
units, be sure to disconnect the ground cable from
the battery.
• Place “NO OPEN FLAMES” signs near the work-
ing area.
prevent from penetrating into floor or flowing out for
environmental protection.
cerning disposal of refuse when disposing fuel.
FU(H4SO)-9
General Description
D: PREPARATION TOOL
ILLUSTRATION TOOL NUMBER DESCRIPTION REMARKS
42099AE000 CONNECTOR Used for removing the quick connector.
REMOVER
ST42099AE000
18471AA000 FUEL PIPE Used for draining fuel.
ADAPTER
ST18471AA000
1B021XU0 SUBARU SELECT Used for draining fuel.
MONITOR III KIT
ST1B021XU0
FU(H4SO)-10
Throttle Body
2. Throttle Body
A: REMOVAL
1) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery.
IN-00203
2) Remove the air intake chamber. <Ref. to

IN(H4SO)-7, REMOVAL, Air Intake Chamber.>
3) Disconnect the connectors from throttle position
sensor and manifold absolute pressure sensor.
4) Disconnect the engine coolant hoses from the
throttle body.
5) Remove the bolts which secure the throttle body
to the intake manifold.
(B)
(C)
(C)
(A) FU-03049
(A) Throttle position sensor

(B) Manifold absolute pressure sensor
(C) Engine coolant hose
B: INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
Use a new gasket.
Tightening torque:
8 N·m (0.8 kgf-m, 5.9 ft-lb)
FU(H4SO)-11
Intake Manifold
3. Intake Manifold 9) Disconnect the PCV hose (A) from intake mani-
fold.
A: REMOVAL 10) Disconnect the engine harness connectors (B)
1) Release the fuel pressure. from bulkhead harness connectors.
<Ref. to FU(H4SO)-39, RELEASING OF FUEL (B)
PRESSURE, PROCEDURE, Fuel.>
(A)
FU-02712
11) Disconnect the connectors from the engine

coolant temperature sensor.
IN-00203
3) Open the fuel filler flap lid, and remove the fuel
filler cap.
4) Remove the air intake duct, air cleaner case and
air intake chamber. <Ref. to IN(H4SO)-8, REMOV-
AL, Air Intake Duct.> <Ref. to IN(H4SO)-5, RE-
MOVAL, Air Cleaner Case.> <Ref. to IN(H4SO)-7,
REMOVAL, Air Intake Chamber.>
5) Remove the generator. <Ref. to SC(H4SO)-20,
REMOVAL, Generator.> FU-00055
6) Remove the spark plug cords from the spark
plugs by pulling the plug caps. (Do not pull the 12) Disconnect the knock sensor connector.
cord.)
7) Disconnect the engine coolant hoses (A) from
throttle body.
(A)
FU-02713
13) Disconnect the connector from crankshaft posi-

tion sensor.
(A) FU-01085
8) Disconnect the brake booster hose (A).
FU-00056
(A)
14) Disconnect the connector from power steering
FU-02320 pump switch (A).
FU(H4SO)-12
Intake Manifold
15) Disconnect the connector from the oil pressure (2) Remove the clip and disconnect the evapo-
switch (B). ration hose from the pipe.
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to spill fuel.
• Catch the fuel from hoses using a container
(A) or cloth.
(B)
FU-02435
ST
16) Disconnect the connector from the camshaft
position sensor.
FU-02866
(A) Fuel delivery hose

(B) Evaporation hose
20) Remove the bolts which secure intake manifold

to cylinder head.
FU-02714
17) Remove the EGR pipe from intake manifold.
FU-02716
21) Remove the intake manifold.

B: INSTALLATION
FU-02974 1) Install the intake manifold onto cylinder heads.
18) Disconnect the following connector. NOTE:
(1) Front oxygen (A/F) sensor connector Use a new gasket.
(2) Rear oxygen sensor connector
(3) Engine harness connectors Tightening torque:
19) Disconnect the fuel hoses from fuel pipe. 25 N·m (2.5 kgf-m, 18.1 ft-lb)
(1) Disconnect the quick connector on the fuel
delivery line by pushing the ST in the direction
of the arrow.
ST 42099AE000 CONNECTOR REMOVER
FU-02716
FU(H4SO)-13
Intake Manifold
2) Connect the fuel hose and evaporation hose to 8) Connect the connector to crankshaft position
the fuel pipe. sensor.
NOTE:
If fuel hoses or clamps are damaged, replace them
with new parts.
Tightening torque:
1.25 N·m (0.13 kgf-m, 0.94 ft-lb)
3) Install the EGR pipe to intake manifold.
Tightening torque:
34 N·m (3.4 kgf-m, 24.6 ft-lb)
FU-00056
9) Connect the knock sensor connector.
FU-02974
4) Connect the following connectors.

(1) Front oxygen (A/F) sensor connector FU-02713
(2) Rear oxygen sensor connector 10) Connect the connector to engine coolant tem-
(3) Engine harness connectors perature sensor.
5) Connect the connectors to camshaft position
sensor.
FU-00055
FU-02714
11) Connect the PCV hose (A) to intake manifold.
12) Connect the engine harness connectors (B) to
6) Connect the connector to the power steering bulkhead harness connectors.
pump switch (A).
7) Connect the connector to the oil pressure switch (B)
(B).
(A)
(B)
(A)
FU-02712
FU-02435
FU(H4SO)-14
Intake Manifold
13) Connect the brake booster hose (A). C: DISASSEMBLY

1) Disconnect the engine ground terminal from in-
take manifold.
(A)
FU-02320
14) Connect the engine coolant hoses (A) to throt-

tle body. FU-01090
(A) 2) Remove the ignition coil and ignitor assembly.

<Ref. to IG(H4SO)-6, REMOVAL, Ignition Coil and
Ignitor Assembly.>
3) Remove the throttle body. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-
11, REMOVAL, Throttle Body.>
4) Remove the EGR valve. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-27,
REMOVAL, EGR Valve.>
5) Remove the PCV pipe.
(A) FU-01085
15) Connect the spark plug cords to spark plugs.

16) Install the generator. <Ref. to SC(H4SO)-20,
INSTALLATION, Generator.>
17) Install the air intake duct, air cleaner case and
air intake chamber. <Ref. to IN(H4SO)-8, INSTAL-
LATION, Air Intake Duct.> <Ref. to IN(H4SO)-6,
INSTALLATION, Air Cleaner Case.> <Ref. to
IN(H4SO)-7, INSTALLATION, Air Intake Cham- FU-01091
ber.>
6) Remove the fuel pipe protector LH.
18) Install the fuse of fuel pump relay to the main
fuse box.
19) Connect the battery ground cable to battery.
FU-02325
7) Remove the fuel pipe protector RH.

IN-00203
FU-02326
FU(H4SO)-15
Intake Manifold
8) Disconnect the connectors (A) from fuel injector. 14) Remove the bolts which install injector pipe on
9) Remove the harness band (B) which holds the the intake manifold as shown in the figure
engine harness to injector pipe. • RH side
(B)
(A) FU-02729 FU-02717
10) Remove the purge control solenoid valve. • LH side

<Ref. to EC(H4SO)-6, REMOVAL, Purge Control
Solenoid Valve.>
11) Remove the harness band clips which install
the engine harness.
FU-02718
FU-02329
12) Remove the bolts which hold engine harness to

intake manifold.
FU-02719
15) Remove the fuel injectors from injector pipe.

16) Disconnect the quick connector that fastens the
fuel injector pipe RH to the fuel pipe.
FU-01097
13) Remove the engine harness from intake mani-

fold.
FU-02720
FU(H4SO)-16
Intake Manifold
17) Disconnect the quick connector that fastens the D: ASSEMBLY

fuel injector pipe LH to the fuel pipe.
NOTE:
When assembling the nipple, apply liquid gasket.
Liquid gasket:
1) Install the intake manifold.
NOTE:
Use a new gasket.
Tightening torque:
FU-02721
8.75 N·m (0.89 kgf-m, 6.5 ft-lb)
18) Remove the fuel injector pipe RH and LH.
19) Remove the bolts which install fuel pipes on in-
take manifold.
FU-01104
2) Tighten the bolts which install fuel pipes on in-

take manifold.
FU-02722 Tightening torque:
20) Remove the fuel pipe from intake manifold. 6.4 N·m (0.65 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
FU-02722
FU-01104
FU(H4SO)-17
Intake Manifold
3) Connect the fuel injector pipe LH to the fuel pipe. • LH side

NOTE: Tightening torque:
Connect the quick connector securely. 19 N·m (1.9 kgf-m, 14.0 ft-lb)
FU-02721 FU-02718
4) Connect the fuel injector pipe RH to the fuel Tightening torque:
pipe. 6.4 N·m (0.65 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
NOTE:
Connect the quick connector securely.
FU-02719
7) Install the engine harness to the intake manifold.

FU-02720 8) Tighten the bolts which install engine harness on
5) Install the fuel injector. intake manifold.
6) Tighten the bolts which install injector pipe on in- Tightening torque:
take manifold. 19 N·m (1.9 kgf-m, 14.0 ft-lb)
• RH side
Tightening torque:
19 N·m (1.9 kgf-m, 14.0 ft-lb)
FU-01097
9) Hold the engine harness using the harness band

clips.
FU-02717
FU-02329
FU(H4SO)-18
Intake Manifold
10) Install the purge control solenoid valve. <Ref. 15) Install the PCV pipe.
to EC(H4SO)-6, INSTALLATION, Purge Control (1) Connect the hose (A) and (B) to intake man-
Solenoid Valve.> ifold.
11) Connect the connectors (A) to fuel injector. (2) Tighten the bolts (C) through (E) in alpha-
12) Hold the engine harness to injector pipe by har- betical sequence.
ness band (B).
Tightening torque:
6.4 N·m (0.65 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
(B) (C) (E)

(B)
(D)
(A)
(A) FU-02729
13) Install the fuel pipe protector RH. FU-02723

Tightening torque: 16) Install the EGR valve. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-27,
19 N·m (1.9 kgf-m, 14.0 ft-lb) INSTALLATION, EGR Valve.>
17) Install the throttle body to the intake manifold.
<Ref. to FU(H4SO)-11, INSTALLATION, Throttle
Body.>
18) Install the ignition coil and ignitor assembly.
<Ref. to IG(H4SO)-6, INSTALLATION, Ignition Coil
and Ignitor Assembly.>
19) Install the engine ground terminal to intake
manifold.
Tightening torque:
FU-02326 19 N·m (1.9 kgf-m, 14.0 ft-lb)
14) Install the fuel pipe protector LH.
Tightening torque:
19 N·m (1.9 kgf-m, 14.0 ft-lb)
FU-01090
E: INSPECTION
Make sure the fuel pipe and fuel hoses are not
FU-02325 damaged and the connections are tightened firmly.
FU(H4SO)-19
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor

4. Engine Coolant Temperature

Sensor
A: REMOVAL
IN-00203

REMOVAL, Generator.>
3) Disconnect the connectors from the engine cool-
ant temperature sensor.
FU-00055
4) Remove the engine coolant temperature sensor.

B: INSTALLATION
NOTE:
Use a new gasket.
Tightening torque:
18 N·m (1.8 kgf-m, 13.0 ft-lb)
FU(H4SO)-20
Crankshaft Position Sensor

5. Crankshaft Position Sensor B: INSTALLATION

A: REMOVAL
1) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. Tightening torque:
T: 6.4 N·m (0.65 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
IN-00203
FU-00058
3) Remove the bolt which installs crankshaft posi-
tion sensor to cylinder block.
FU-00056
4) Remove the crankshaft position sensor, and

then disconnect the connector from it.
FU-00057
FU(H4SO)-21
Camshaft Position Sensor

6. Camshaft Position Sensor 6) Remove the camshaft position sensor from the
camshaft position sensor support.
A: REMOVAL
FU-00179
B: INSTALLATION
IN-00203
2) Disconnect the connector from the camshaft po-
sition sensor. Tightening torque:
Camshaft position sensor support
6.4 N·m (0.65 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
Camshaft position sensor
6.4 N·m (0.65 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
FU-02714
3) Remove the bolt which installs camshaft position

sensor to support.
FU-02724
4) Remove the bolt which installs camshaft position

sensor support to camshaft cap LH.
FU-02725
5) Remove the camshaft position sensor and the

support as a unit.
FU(H4SO)-22
Knock Sensor
7. Knock Sensor B: INSTALLATION

1) Install the knock sensor to cylinder block.
A: REMOVAL
1) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. NOTE:
Extraction area of knock sensor cord must be posi-
tioned at a 60° angle relative to the engine rear.
Tightening torque:
24 N·m (2.4 kgf-m, 17.4 ft-lb)
(A)
IN-00203

IN(H4SO)-7, REMOVAL, Air Intake Chamber.> 60
3) Disconnect the knock sensor connector.

FU-02727
(A) Front side
FU-02713
4) Remove the knock sensor from cylinder block.
FU-02713
3) Install the air intake chamber.

<Ref. to IN(H4SO)-7, INSTALLATION, Air Intake
Chamber.>
FU-02726
FU-00009
FU(H4SO)-23
Throttle Position Sensor

8. Throttle Position Sensor

A: SPECIFICATION
Throttle body is a non-disassembled part, so do not
remove the throttle position sensor from throttle
body.
Refer to “Throttle Body” for removal and installation
procedure. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-11, REMOVAL,
Throttle Body.> <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-11, INSTAL-
LATION, Throttle Body.>
FU(H4SO)-24
Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor

9. Manifold Absolute Pressure

Sensor
A: REMOVAL
IN-00203
2) Disconnect the connector from manifold abso-

lute pressure sensor.
FU-03047
3) Remove the manifold absolute pressure sensor

from throttle body.
B: INSTALLATION
NOTE:
Use new O-rings.
Tightening torque:
2.0 N·m (0.20 kgf-m, 1.5 ft-lb)
FU(H4SO)-25
Mass Air Flow and Intake Air Temperature Sensor

10.Mass Air Flow and Intake Air

Temperature Sensor
A: REMOVAL
IN-00203
2) Disconnect the connectors from the mass air

flow and intake air temperature sensor.
3) Remove the mass air flow and intake air temper-
ature sensor.
FU-01106
B: INSTALLATION
Tightening torque:
1.0 N·m (0.10 kgf-m, 0.74 ft-lb)
FU(H4SO)-26
EGR Valve
11.EGR Valve
A: REMOVAL
IN-00203
2) Disconnect the connector from the EGR valve.
FU-01152
3) Remove the EGR valve from intake manifold.
FU-01153
B: INSTALLATION
NOTE:
Use a new gasket.
Tightening torque:
19 N·m (1.9 kgf-m, 14.0 ft-lb)
FU(H4SO)-27
Fuel Injector
12.Fuel Injector 9) Remove the bolt which holds fuel injector pipe
onto intake manifold.
A: REMOVAL
1. RH SIDE
1) Release the fuel pressure. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-
39, RELEASING OF FUEL PRESSURE, PROCE-
DURE, Fuel.>
FU-02717
10) Remove the fuel injector while lifting up the fuel

injector pipe.
2. LH SIDE
IN-00203 DURE, Fuel.>
3) Open the fuel filler flap lid, and remove the fuel 2) Remove the battery. <Ref. to SC(H4SO)-26,
filler cap. REMOVAL, Battery.>
4) Remove the air intake duct and air cleaner case. 3) Open the fuel filler flap lid, and remove the fuel
<Ref. to IN(H4SO)-8, REMOVAL, Air Intake Duct.> filler cap.
<Ref. to IN(H4SO)-5, REMOVAL, Air Cleaner 4) Remove the spark plug cords from spark plugs
Case.> (#2 and #4 cylinders).
5) Remove the spark plug cords from spark plugs 5) Remove the fuel pipe protector LH.
(#1 and #3 cylinders).
6) Remove the fuel pipe protector RH.
FU-02325
6) Disconnect the connectors (A) from fuel injector.

FU-02326
7) Remove the harness band (B) which holds the
7) Disconnect the connectors (A) from fuel injector. engine harness to injector pipe.
8) Remove the harness band (B) which holds the
engine harness to injector pipe.
(B)
(B)
(A) FU-02729
(A) FU-02730
FU(H4SO)-28
Fuel Injector
8) Remove the bolt which holds fuel injector pipe B: INSTALLATION

1. RH SIDE
NOTE:
Use new O-rings.
(A)
FU-02718
(B)
(C)
(D)
FU-02157
(A) O-ring
(B) O-ring
(C) Fuel injector
(D) O-ring
FU-02719
Tightening torque:
9) Remove the fuel injector while lifting up the fuel 19 N·m (1.9 kgf-m, 14.0 ft-lb)
injector pipe.
FU-02717
Tightening torque:
19 N·m (1.9 kgf-m, 14.0 ft-lb)
FU-02326
FU(H4SO)-29
Fuel Injector
2. LH SIDE Tightening torque:

Install in the reverse order of removal. 19 N·m (1.9 kgf-m, 14.0 ft-lb)
NOTE:
Use new O-rings.
(A)
(B)
(C) FU-02325
(D)
FU-02157
(A) O-ring
(B) O-ring
(C) Fuel injector
(D) O-ring
Tightening torque:
6.4 N·m (0.65 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
FU-02719
Tightening torque:
19 N·m (1.9 kgf-m, 14.0 ft-lb)
FU-02718
FU(H4SO)-30
Variable Valve Lift Diagnosis Oil Pressure Switch

13.Variable Valve Lift Diagnosis B: INSTALLATION

Oil Pressure Switch Install in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
A: REMOVAL Apply liquid gasket to the variable valve lift diagno-
1) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. sis oil pressure switch threads.
Liquid gasket:
THREE BOND 1324 (Part No. 004403042) or
equivalent
Tightening torque:
17 N·m (1.7 kgf-m, 12.5 ft-lb)
IN-00203

3) Remove the engine harness connector from the
bracket.
4) Disconnect the connector from the variable
valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch.
5) Remove the variable valve lift diagnosis oil pres-
sure switch.
• LH side
FU-02731
• RH side
FU-02732
FU(H4SO)-31
Oil Temperature Sensor

14.Oil Temperature Sensor

A: REMOVAL
IN-00203

3) Remove the engine harness connector from the
bracket.
4) Disconnect the connector from the oil tempera-
ture sensor.
5) Remove the oil temperature sensor.
FU-02733
B: INSTALLATION
Tightening torque:
18 N·m (1.8 kgf-m, 13.3 ft-lb)
FU(H4SO)-32
Front Oxygen (A/F) Sensor

15.Front Oxygen (A/F) Sensor B: INSTALLATION

1) Before installing front oxygen (A/F) sensor, ap-
A: REMOVAL ply anti-seize compound only to the threaded por-
1) Set the vehicle on a lift. tion of front oxygen (A/F) sensor to make the next
2) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. removal easier.
CAUTION:
Never apply anti-seize compound to the protec-
tor of front oxygen (A/F) sensor.
Anti-seize compound:
NEVER-SEEZ NSN, JET LUBE or equivalent
2) Install the front oxygen (A/F) sensor.
Tightening torque:
21 N·m (2.1 kgf-m, 15.2 ft-lb)
IN-00203
3) Remove the air intake duct. <Ref. to IN(H4SO)- (B)
8, REMOVAL, Air Intake Duct.>
4) Remove the clip fastening the harness and dis-
connect the front oxygen (A/F) sensor connector.
(A) (A)
FU-02735
(A) Front oxygen (A/F) sensor

(B) Rear oxygen sensor
(B)
3) Install the under cover.
4) Lower the vehicle.
FU-02734 5) Connect the connector of front oxygen (A/F)
sensor connector and fasten the harness with clips.
(A) Front oxygen (A/F) sensor connector
(B) Rear oxygen sensor connector
5) Lift up the vehicle. (A)

6) Remove the under cover.
7) Apply spray-type lubricant to the threaded por-
tion of front oxygen (A/F) sensor, and leave it for
one minute or more.
8) Remove the front oxygen (A/F) sensor.
CAUTION: (B)
When removing the front oxygen (A/F) sensor, FU-02734
wait until exhaust pipe cools, because it can
damage the exhaust pipe. (A) Front oxygen (A/F) sensor connector

(B)
(A)
FU-02735

(B) Rear oxygen sensor IN-00203
FU(H4SO)-33
Rear Oxygen Sensor

16.Rear Oxygen Sensor B: INSTALLATION

1) Before installing rear oxygen sensor, apply the
A: REMOVAL anti-seize compound only to the threaded portion of
1) Set the vehicle on a lift. rear oxygen sensor to make the next removal easier.
2) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. CAUTION:
tor of rear oxygen sensor.
NEVER-SEEZ NSN, JET LUBE SS-30 or
equivalent
2) Install the rear oxygen sensor.
Tightening torque:
21 N·m (2.1 kgf-m, 15.2 ft-lb)
IN-00203
3) Remove the air intake duct. <Ref. to IN(H4SO)- (B)
4) Remove the clip fastening the harness and dis-
connect the rear oxygen (A/F) sensor connector.
(A) (A)
FU-02735

(B) 4) Lower the vehicle.
FU-02734 5) Connect the connector to rear oxygen sensor and
mount the harness clips to the bracket for fastening.
(A)
5) Lift up the vehicle.
7) Apply spray-type lubricant to the threaded portion of
rear oxygen sensor, and leave it for one minute or more.
8) Remove the rear oxygen sensor.
CAUTION: (B)
When removing the rear oxygen (A/F) sensor, FU-02734

wait until exhaust pipe cools, because it can
damage the exhaust pipe. (A) Front oxygen (A/F) sensor connector

(B)
(A)
FU-02735

IN-00203
FU(H4SO)-34
b07usen105.fm 35 ページ２０２２年６月３日　金曜日　午後８時２８分
Engine Control Module (ECM)

17.Engine Control Module (ECM) B: INSTALLATION

A: REMOVAL
1) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. CAUTION:
When the ECM has been replaced, be sure to
perform the registration of VIN. <Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-42, V.I.N REGISTRATION, OP-
ERATION, Subaru Select Monitor.>
NOTE:
• When replacing the ECM, be careful not to use
the ECM for wrong specifications to avoid any dam-
age to fuel injection system.
• When replacing the ECM, be careful not to dam-
age the harnesses and connectors.
IN-00203
2) Remove the lower inner trim of passenger’s Tightening torque:

side. 7.5 N·m (0.76 kgf-m, 5.5 ft-lb)
<Ref. to EI-58, REMOVAL, Lower Inner Trim.>
3) Detach the floor mat of passenger’s seat.
4) Remove the protect cover.
FU-02090
5) Remove the bolts and nuts which hold the ECM

to the bracket.
6) Remove the clip (A) from bracket.
(A)
FU-02488
7) Disconnect the ECM connectors, and take out

the ECM.
FU(H4SO)-35
Main Relay
18.Main Relay
A: REMOVAL
IN-00203
2) Remove the glove box. <Ref. to EI-50, REMOV-

AL, Glove Box.>
3) Remove the harness cover (A).
(A)
FU-02092
4) Disconnect the connectors from main relay.
FU-02093
B: INSTALLATION
FU(H4SO)-36
Fuel Pump Relay

19.Fuel Pump Relay

A: REMOVAL
IN-00203

AL, Glove Box.>
(A)
FU-02092
4) Disconnect the connector from fuel pump relay.
FU-02094
B: INSTALLATION
FU(H4SO)-37
Electronic Throttle Control Relay

20.Electronic Throttle Control

Relay
A: REMOVAL
IN-00203

AL, Glove Box.>
(A)
FU-02092
4) Disconnect the connector from electric throttle

control relay.
FU-02095
B: INSTALLATION
FU(H4SO)-38
Fuel
21.Fuel 4) Lift up the vehicle.

5) Remove the fuel tank protector.
A: PROCEDURE 6) Set a container under the vehicle and remove
the fuel drain plug from fuel tank to drain fuel from
1. RELEASING OF FUEL PRESSURE fuel tank.
WARNING:
Place “NO OPEN FLAMES” signs near the
working area.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to spill fuel.
1) Remove the fuse of fuel pump from main fuse
box.
FU-02834
7) Tighten the fuel drain plugs.

NOTE:
Use a new gasket.
Tightening torque:
26 N·m (2.65 kgf-m, 19.2 ft-lb)
FU-01122 8) Install the fuel tank protector.
2) Start the engine and run it until it stalls. NOTE:
3) After the engine stalls, crank it for five more sec- Use a new nut.
onds. Tightening torque:
4) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. Nut
2. DRAINING FUEL 9 N·m (0.9 kgf-m, 6.6 ft-lb)
Bolt
WARNING: 17.5 N·m (1.78 kgf-m, 12.9 ft-lb)
Place “NO OPEN FLAMES” signs near the 9) Lower the vehicle.
working area.
CAUTION:
NOTE:
For the fuel tank without fuel drain plug, refer to
DRAINING FUEL (WITH SUBARU SELECT MON-
ITOR). <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-40, DRAINING FUEL
(WITH SUBARU SELECT MONITOR), PROCE-
DURE, Fuel.>
1) Set the vehicle on a lift.
IN-00203
filler cap.
FU(H4SO)-39
Fuel
3. DRAINING FUEL 4. DRAINING FUEL

(WITH SUBARU SELECT MONITOR) (THROUGH THE FUEL FILLER HOSE)
WARNING: WARNING:
Place “NO OPEN FLAMES” signs near the Place “NO OPEN FLAMES” signs near the
working area. working area.
CAUTION: CAUTION:
Be careful not to spill fuel. • Be careful not to spill fuel.
NOTE: • The fuel may remain in the fuel filler pipe.
• If the fuel pump is not driven, refer to DRAINING Drain the fuel from the fuel filler pipe through
FUEL (THROUGH THE FUEL FILLER HOSE). the fill opening using the gasoline proof pump
<Ref. to FU(H4SO)-40, DRAINING FUEL and the gasoline proof hose (ø10 or less) before
(THROUGH THE FUEL FILLER HOSE), PROCE- the operation.
DURE, Fuel.> 1) Set the vehicle on a lift.
• Be careful not to let the battery run out. 2) Lift up the vehicle.
1) Release the fuel pressure. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)- 3) Remove the rear exhaust pipe and muffler.
39, RELEASING OF FUEL PRESSURE, PROCE- <Ref. to EX(H4SO)-8, REMOVAL, Rear Exhaust
DURE, Fuel.> Pipe.> <Ref. to EX(H4SO)-10, REMOVAL, Muf-
2) Attach ST to the fuel delivery pipe and push ST fler.>
in the direction of arrow mark to disconnect the fuel 4) Open the fuel filler flap lid, and remove the fuel
delivery hose. filler cap.
ST 42099AE000 CONNECTOR REMOVER 5) Drain the fuel from the fuel filler pipe through the
fill opening using the gasoline proof pump and the
CAUTION: gasoline proof hose (ø10 or less).
• Be careful not to spill fuel. 6) Disconnect the fuel filler hose (A) from the fuel
• Catch the fuel from hoses using a container filler pipe.
or cloth.
CAUTION:
or cloth.
ST
(B)
FU-02866
3) Connect ST to the fuel delivery hose.

(A)
ST 18471AA000 FUEL PIPE ADAPTER
4) Connect the gasoline proof hose to ST and put FU-02394
the end of the hose in the container.
5) Drive the fuel pump and drain the fuel using Sub- (A) Fuel filler hose
aru Select Monitor. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-55, (B) Evaporation hose
FUEL PUMP CONTROL (ON/OFF OPERATION),
OPERATION, System Operation Check Mode.> 7) Set the container under the vehicle and insert
the gasoline proof hose (ø10 or less) into the fuel
CAUTION:
filler hose to drain the fuel.
CAUTION:
FU(H4SO)-40
Fuel Tank
22.Fuel Tank 8) Remove the service hole cover of fuel sub level
sensor.
A: REMOVAL (1) Remove the bolt (A).
WARNING: (2) Push the grommet (B) down and remove the
Place “NO OPEN FLAMES” signs near the service hole cover.
working area.
CAUTION: (A)
(A)
DURE, Fuel.>
3) Drain fuel from fuel tank.
<Ref. to FU(H4SO)-39, DRAINING FUEL, PRO- (B)
FU-01126
CEDURE, Fuel.>
4) Remove the rear seat. 9) Disconnect connector (A) from fuel sub level
5) Remove the service hole cover of fuel pump. sensor.
10) Disconnect the quick connector on the fuel de-
livery hose (B). <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-57, REMOVAL,
Fuel Delivery and Evaporation Lines.>
(A)
FU-02387
6) Disconnect the connector from fuel pump.

(B)
FU-02830
11) Remove the trunk room trim. (Sedan model)

<Ref. to EI-67, REMOVAL, Trunk Room Trim.>
12) Remove the rear quarter trim. (Wagon model)
<Ref. to EI-60, WAGON MODEL, REMOVAL, Rear
Quarter Trim.>
13) Remove the pipe protector.
FU-02829
7) Remove the connector (A) and clip (B).

(B)
(A)
FU-02390
FU-02389
FU(H4SO)-41
Fuel Tank
14) Remove the grommet and disconnect the quick 24) Disconnect the connector from the rear ABS
connector of the evaporation pipe. <Ref. to wheel speed sensor.
FU(H4SO)-57, REMOVAL, Fuel Delivery and
Evaporation Lines.>
FU-02894
25) Remove the bolts securing the parking brake

FU-02391
cable clamp.
15) Remove the rear wheels.
17) Remove the bolts which secure the rear brake
hose mounting bracket.
FU-02895
FU-01128
18) Remove the rear brake caliper and tie it to the

body side of the vehicle.
FU-02896
26) Remove the rear suspension assembly.

WARNING:
A helper is required to perform this work.
(1) Support the rear differential with the trans-
FU-00462
mission jack.
(2) Remove the bolts which hold the rear shock
19) Remove the parking brake cable from the park- absorber to the rear suspension arm.
ing brake assembly. <Ref. to PB-6, REMOVAL,
Parking Brake Assembly (Rear Disc Brake).>
21) Remove the rear exhaust pipe. <Ref. to
EX(H4SO)-8, REMOVAL, Rear Exhaust Pipe.>
22) Remove the propeller shaft. <Ref. to DS-10,
REMOVAL, Propeller Shaft.>
23) Remove the heat shield cover.
FU-01132
FU(H4SO)-42
Fuel Tank
(3) Remove the bolts which secure the rear 29) Disconnect the fuel filler hose (A) and evapora-
suspension assembly to the body. tion hose (B).
(B)
(A)
FU-01133 FU-02394
30) Support the fuel tank with a transmission jack,

remove the bolts from the fuel tank band, and re-
move the fuel tank from the vehicle.
WARNING:
FU-02891
(4) Remove the rear suspension assembly.

27) Disconnect the connector.
FU-02897
B: INSTALLATION
set the fuel tank in place, and temporarily tighten
the bolts of the fuel tank band.
WARNING:
FU-02392 A helper is required to perform this work.
28) Disconnect the evaporation hose.
FU-02897
FU-02393
FU(H4SO)-43
Fuel Tank
2) Securely insert the fuel filler hose (A) and evap- 6) Install the rear suspension assembly.
oration hose (B) to the specified position, then tight- WARNING:
en the clamp.
mission jack.
(2) Support the rear suspension assembly, and
tighten the bolts which secure the rear suspen-
sion assembly to the body.
(B)
Tightening torque:
T1: 125 N·m (12.7 kgf-m, 92.2 ft-lb)
(A) T2: 175 N·m (17.8 kgf-m, 129 ft-lb)
FU-02394
T1 T1
(2) (3)
(1)
T1
T1
L/2
FU-01150
L
FU-00104
(1) Hose
(2) Clip or clamp
(3) Pipe
3) Connect the evaporation hose.

T2
T2
FU-02892
(3) Tighten the bolts which hold the rear shock

absorber to the rear suspension arm. <Ref. to
RS-10, INSTALLATION, Rear Arm.>
Tightening torque:
62 N·m (6.3 kgf-m, 46 ft-lb)
FU-02393
4) Tighten the fuel tank band bolts.

Tightening torque:
33 N·m (3.4 kgf-m, 25 ft-lb)
5) Connect the connector.
FU-01132
FU-02392
FU(H4SO)-44
Fuel Tank
7) Tighten the bolts holding the parking brake cable 15) Tighten the bolts which secure the rear brake
clamp. hose mounting bracket.
Tightening torque: Tightening torque:
18 N·m (1.8 kgf-m, 13.3 ft-lb) 33 N·m (3.4 kgf-m, 25 ft-lb)
FU-02895 FU-01128
Tightening torque: 16) Lower the vehicle.

33 N·m (3.4 kgf-m, 24.3 ft-lb) 17) Install the rear wheels.
Tightening torque:
100 N·m (10.2 kgf-m, 73.8 ft-lb)
18) Connect the quick connector of the evaporation
pipe. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-58, INSTALLATION, Fuel
Delivery and Evaporation Lines.>
FU-02896
8) Connect the connector to the rear ABS wheel

speed sensor.
FU-02391
19) Install the pipe protector.

Tightening torque:
T1: 1.0 N·m (0.1 kgf-m, 0.7 ft-lb)
T2: 7.5 N·m (0.76 kgf-m, 5.5 ft-lb)
FU-02894
9) Install the heat shield cover. T2

10) Install the propeller shaft. <Ref. to DS-11, IN-
STALLATION, Propeller Shaft.>
11) Install the rear exhaust pipe. <Ref. to
EX(H4SO)-8, INSTALLATION, Rear Exhaust T1
Pipe.>
FU-02868
13) Connect the parking brake cable to the parking
brake assembly. <Ref. to PB-7, INSTALLATION, 20) Install the trunk room trim. (Sedan model)
Parking Brake Assembly (Rear Disc Brake).> <Ref. to EI-68, INSTALLATION, Trunk Room
14) Install the rear brake caliper. Trim.>
21) Install the rear quarter trim. (Wagon model)
<Ref. to EI-61, INSTALLATION, Rear Quarter
Trim.>
FU(H4SO)-45
Fuel Tank
22) Connect connector (A) to the fuel sub level sen- 27) Install the service hole cover of fuel pump.
sor.
23) Connect the quick connector (B) of the fuel de-
livery hose. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-58, INSTALLA-
TION, Fuel Delivery and Evaporation Lines.>
(A)
FU-02387
28) Install the rear seat.

29) Install the fuse of fuel pump to main fuse box.
(B)
FU-02830 C: INSPECTION
24) Install the service hole cover of fuel sub level 1) Check that the fuel tank does not have holes,
sensor. cracks or is damaged in any way.
2) Make sure that the fuel pipe and fuel hose are
not cracked and that the connections are tight.
(A)
(A)
(B)
FU-01126
(A) Bolt
(B) Grommet
25) Connect connector (A), and install clip (B).

(B)
(A)
FU-02389
26) Connect the connector to the fuel pump.
FU-02829
FU(H4SO)-46
Fuel Filler Pipe

23.Fuel Filler Pipe 11) Loosen the clamp, and disconnect the fuel filler
hose (A) and evaporation hose (B).
A: REMOVAL
WARNING:
working area.
CAUTION: (B)
2) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. (A)
FU-02396
(B)
IN-00203
3) Open the fuel filler flap lid, and remove the filler
FU-02397
cap.
4) Remove the screws which secure gasket. 12) Remove the fuel filler pipe to the underside of
the vehicle.
B: INSTALLATION
1) Open the fuel filler flap lid.
2) Set the fuel saucer (A) with rubber seal (C), and
insert the fuel filler pipe into hole from the inner side
of apron.
3) Align the holes in fuel filler pipe neck and set the
cup (B), and tighten the screws.
FU-00095
NOTE:
If the edges of rubber seal are folded toward inside,
5) Remove the rear wheel RH. straighten it with a flat tip screwdriver.
(A)
7) Drain fuel from fuel tank. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-39,
DRAINING FUEL, PROCEDURE, Fuel.>
8) Remove the mud guard. <Ref. to EI-29, RE-
MOVAL, Mud Guard.>
9) Remove the rear sub frame. <Ref. to RS-21, RE-
MOVAL, Rear Sub Frame.> (B)
10) Remove the bolts which hold fuel filler pipe
(C)
bracket on the body.
FU-00103
FU-02395
FU(H4SO)-47
Fuel Filler Pipe

4) Securely insert the fuel filler hose (A) and evap- 5) Tighten the bolts which hold fuel filler pipe brack-
oration hose (B) to the specified position, then tight- et on the body.
en the clamp.
Tightening torque:
Tightening torque: 7.5 N·m (0.76 kgf-m, 5.5 ft-lb)
2.5 N·m (0.3 kgf-m, 1.8 ft-lb)
(B)
(A)
FU-02395
FU-02396
6) Install the rear sub frame. <Ref. to RS-21, IN-
STALLATION, Rear Sub Frame.>
7) Install the mud guard. <Ref. to EI-29, INSTAL-
(B)
LATION, Mud Guard.>
9) Install the rear wheel RH.
Tightening torque:
100 N·m (10.2 kgf-m, 73.8 ft-lb)
FU-02397
(2) (3)
(1)
L/2 IN-00203
L
FU-00104
C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the fuel tank does not have holes,
(1) Hose cracks or is damaged in any way.
(2) Clip or clamp 2) Make sure that the fuel hose is not cracked and
(3) Pipe that the connections are tight.
FU(H4SO)-48
Fuel Filler Pipe

D: DISASSEMBLY E: ASSEMBLY
1) Move the clamp and disconnect the evaporation 1) Install the shut pipe to the fuel filler pipe. <Ref. to
hose from the shut valve. EC(H4SO)-14, INSTALLATION, Shut Valve.>
2) Tighten the nuts which secure the evaporation
pipe assembly to the fuel filler pipe.
Tightening torque:
7.5 N·m (0.76 kgf-m, 5.5 ft-lb)
FU-02398
2) Remove the nut which holds the evaporation

FU-02399
FU-02399
FU-02400
3) Connect the evaporation hose to the shut valve.
FU-02400
3) Remove the shut valve from the fuel filler pipe.

<Ref. to EC(H4SO)-14, REMOVAL, Shut Valve.>
FU-02398
FU(H4SO)-49
Fuel Pump
24.Fuel Pump 7) Disconnect the quick connector, and then dis-

connect the fuel delivery hose and jet pump hose.
A: REMOVAL <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-57, REMOVAL, Fuel Delivery
and Evaporation Lines.>
WARNING:
8) Remove the nuts which install fuel pump assem-
bly onto fuel tank.
working area.
CAUTION:
• Before starting work, be sure to reduce fuel in (B)
the fuel tank to 3/4 of the tank or less. If there is
more fuel in the tank, fuel may spill out.
NOTE:
Fuel pump assembly consists of fuel pump, fuel fil-
ter and fuel level sensor.
1) Release the fuel pressure. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)- (A)
FU-02670
DURE, Fuel.> (A) Delivery hose
2) Drain fuel. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-39, DRAINING (B) Jet pump hose
FUEL, PROCEDURE, Fuel.>
3) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. 9) Remove the fuel pump assembly from the fuel
tank.
IN-00203
4) Remove the rear seat.

5) Remove the service hole cover.
FU-02387
FU-02669
FU(H4SO)-50
Fuel Pump
B: INSTALLATION
NOTE:
• Use a new gasket.
• Make sure the sealing portion is free from fuel or
foreign matter before installation.
• When assembling, point the protrusion of the
gasket (A) towards the front of the vehicle.
• Insert the protrusion (B) of the gasket into the up-
per plate. (3 locations)
• Align the protrusion (C) of the fuel pump assem-
bly to the cut out in the upper plate.
• Tighten the nuts to the specified torque in the or-
der as shown in the figure.
Tightening torque:
4.4 N·m (0.45 kgf-m, 3.2 ft-lb)
(C)
1
4 8
(B) (B)
6 5
7 3
2 (A)
(B) FU-02835
C: INSPECTION
Connect the lead harness to the connector terminal
of fuel pump, and apply the battery power supply to
check whether the pump operates.
WARNING:
• Wipe off fuel completely.
• Keep the battery as far apart from fuel pump
as possible.
• Be sure to turn the battery supply to ON and
OFF on the battery side.
• Do not run the fuel pump for a long time un-
der non-load condition.
2 1
4 3
6 5
FU-01330
FU(H4SO)-51
Fuel Level Sensor

25.Fuel Level Sensor

A: REMOVAL
WARNING:
working area.
CAUTION:
NOTE:
The fuel level sensor is built in fuel pump assembly.
1) Remove the fuel pump assembly. <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-50, REMOVAL, Fuel Pump.>
2) Disconnect the connector from fuel pump brack-
et.
3) Remove the fuel level sensor and fuel tempera-
ture sensor.
(A)
(C)
(B)
FU-02671
(A) Connector
(B) Fuel temperature sensor
(C) Fuel level sensor
B: INSTALLATION
FU(H4SO)-52
Fuel Sub Level Sensor

26.Fuel Sub Level Sensor 6) Disconnect the connector from the fuel sub level
sensor.
A: REMOVAL
WARNING:
working area.
CAUTION:
• Before starting work, be sure to reduce fuel in
1) Release the fuel pressure. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)- FU-02672
39, RELEASING OF FUEL PRESSURE, PROCE- 7) Disconnect the quick connector, then disconnect
DURE, Fuel.> the fuel delivery hose and jet pump hose. <Ref. to
2) Drain fuel. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-39, DRAINING FU(H4SO)-57, REMOVAL, Fuel Delivery and
FUEL, PROCEDURE, Fuel.> Evaporation Lines.>
3) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. 8) Remove the nuts and bolts which install fuel sub
level sensor on fuel tank.
(A)
IN-00203 (B)
FU-02673
5) Remove the service hole cover. (A) Jet pump hose
(1) Remove bolt (A). (B) Delivery hose
(2) Push the grommet (B) down and remove the
service hole cover. 9) Remove the fuel sub level sensor.
(A)
(A)
(B)
FU-01126
FU(H4SO)-53

B: INSTALLATION
NOTE:
• Align protrusion (A) of the gasket to the position
shown in the following figure.
• Align protrusion (B) of the fuel sub level sensor to
the cut out in the fuel sublevel sensor upper plate.
• Tighten the nuts and bolts to the specified torque
in the order as shown in the figure.
Tightening torque:
4.4 N·m (0.45 kgf-m, 3.2 ft-lb)
3
1
2 (B)
4
(A) FU-02836
FU-02674
FU(H4SO)-54
Fuel Filter
27.Fuel Filter
A: SPECIFICATION
Fuel filter forms a single unit with fuel pump.
Refer to “Fuel Pump” for removal and installation.
<Ref. to FU(H4SO)-50, REMOVAL, Fuel Pump.>
<Ref. to FU(H4SO)-51, INSTALLATION, Fuel
Pump.>
FU(H4SO)-55
Fuel Damper Valve

28.Fuel Damper Valve

A: REMOVAL
CAUTION:
or cloth.
DURE, Fuel.>
2) Remove the fuel damper valve from the fuel de-
livery line.
FU-02870
B: INSTALLATION
Tightening torque:
1.25 N·m (0.13 kgf-m, 0.94 ft-lb)
FU(H4SO)-56
Fuel Delivery and Evaporation Lines

29.Fuel Delivery and Evaporation Lines

A: REMOVAL
WARNING:
Place “NO OPEN FLAMES” signs near the working area.
CAUTION:
2) Release the fuel pressure. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-39, RELEASING OF FUEL PRESSURE, PROCEDURE,
Fuel.>
3) Open the fuel filler flap lid, and remove the fuel filler cap.
4) Remove the floor mat. <Ref. to EI-69, REMOVAL, Floor Mat.>
5) Disconnect the fuel delivery pipes and hoses, and then disconnect the evaporation pipes and hoses.
FU-02831
FU(H4SO)-57

6) In the engine compartment, disconnect the fuel (4) Pull out the connector (A) from the retainer
delivery hoses and evaporation hose. (B).
(1) Disconnect the quick connector of the fuel
of the arrow.
(2) Remove the clip and disconnect the evapo- (B)
ration hose from the pipe.
(C)
CAUTION: (A)
or cloth. FU-00124
(A) Connector
(B) Retainer
(C) Pipe
B: INSTALLATION
ST
1) Connect the quick connector on fuel line.
CAUTION:
Make sure there is no damage or dust on the con-
FU-02866 nections. If necessary, clean seal surface of pipe.
(A) Fuel delivery hose NOTE:
(B) Evaporation hose Use a new retainer.

8) Remove the fuel tank. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-41,
REMOVAL, Fuel Tank.> (A)
9) Separate the quick connector of fuel line.

(1) Clean the pipe and connector, if they are (B)
covered with dust.
(2) To prevent from damaging or entering for-
eign matter, wrap the pipes and connectors with
plastic bag etc.
FU-00125
(A) Seal surface

(B) Pipe
(1) Set the new retainer (B) to connector (A).

(2) Push the pipe into the connector completely.
(A)
(B)
FU-01333
(3) Hold the connector (A) and push the retainer

(B) down. (C)
FU-00126
(A) Connector
(B) Retainer
(C) Pipe
FU(H4SO)-58

CAUTION: 3) Connect the evaporation hose to the pipe with

• Pull the connector to ensure it is connected an overlap of approx. 15 to 20 mm (0.59 to 0.79 in).
securely. Fuel evaporation hose:
• Make sure the two retainer claws are en- L = 17.5±2.5 mm (0.689±0.098 in)
gaged in their mating positions in the connec- CAUTION:
tor. Be sure to inspect the hoses and their connec-
• Be sure to inspect the hoses and their con- tions for fuel leakage.
nections for fuel leakage.
(2) (3)
(1)
(A)
L/2
L
(B) (C)
FU-00129
FU-00127
(1) Hose
(A) Connector
(2) Clip
(B) Retainer
(3) Pipe
(C) Pipe
2) Connect the fuel delivery hose to the pipe with C: INSPECTION

an overlap of 20 to 25 mm (0.79 to 0.98 in). 1) Make sure that there are no cracks on the fuel
Type A: When the amount to be inserted is speci- pipes and fuel hoses.
fied. 2) Make sure the fuel pipe and fuel hose connec-
Type B: When the amount to be inserted is not tions are tightened firmly.
specified.
2: 2.5±1.5 mm (0.098±0.059 in)
L: 22.5±2.5 mm (0.886±0.098 in)
CAUTION:
Be sure to inspect the hoses and their connec-
tions for fuel leakage.
(3) (4) (5)
(1)
(2)
FU-00128
(1) Type A
(2) Type B
(3) Pipe
(4) Clamp
(5) Hose
FU(H4SO)-59
Fuel System Trouble in General

30.Fuel System Trouble in General

A: INSPECTION
Trouble and possible cause Corrective action
1. Insufficient fuel supply to injector
1) Fuel pump does not operate.
Inspect contact, especially ground, and tighten it
Defective terminal contact
securely.
Trouble in electromagnetic or electronic circuit parts Replace the faulty parts.
2) Decline of fuel pump function Replace the fuel pump.
3) Clogged fuel filter Replace the fuel filter.
4) Clogged or bent fuel pipe or hose Clean, correct or replace the fuel pipe or hose.
5) Air is mixed in the fuel system. Inspect or retighten each connection part.
6) Clogged or bent air breather tube or pipe. Clean, correct or replace the air breather tube or pipe.
7) Damaged diaphragm of pressure regulator Replace.
2. Leakage or blow out of fuel
1) Loose joints of the fuel pipe Retighten.
2) Cracked fuel pipe, hose and fuel tank Replace.
3) Defective welding part on the fuel tank Replace.
4) Defective drain gasket of the fuel tank Replace.
Clean, correct or replace the air breather tube or air vent
5) Clogged or bent air breather tube or air vent tube
tube.
3. Gasoline smell inside of compartment
Loose joints at air breather tube, air vent tube and fuel filler
1) Retighten.
pipe
2) Fuel saucer gasket air tightness fault Correct or replace the gasket.
3) Inoperative fuel pump modulator or circuit Replace.
4. Defective fuel meter indicator
1) Defective operation of fuel level sensor Replace.
2) Defective operation of fuel meter Replace.
5. Noise
1) Large operation noise or vibration of fuel pump Replace.
NOTE:
• When the vehicle is left unattended for an extended period of time, water may accumulate in the fuel tank.
Fill the fuel tank fully to prevent this.
• In snow-covered areas, mountainous areas, skiing areas, etc. where ambient temperatures drop below
0°C (32°F) throughout the winter season, use a water removing agent in the fuel system to prevent freezing
fuel system and accumulating water.
• When water is accumulated in fuel filter, fill the water removing agent in the fuel tank.
• Before using water removing agent, follow the cautions noted on the bottle.
FU(H4SO)-60
EMISSION CONTROL
EC(H4SO)
Page
2. Front Catalytic Converter ...........................................................................3
3. Rear Catalytic Converter ............................................................................4
4. Canister ......................................................................................................5
5. Purge Control Solenoid Valve ....................................................................6
6. EGR Valve .................................................................................................7
7. Fuel Level Sensor ......................................................................................8
8. Fuel Temperature Sensor ..........................................................................9
10. Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor .....................................................................11
11. Pressure Control Solenoid Valve .............................................................12
12. Drain Filter ................................................................................................13
13. Shut Valve ................................................................................................14
14. Drain Valve ...............................................................................................15
15. PCV Hose Assembly ................................................................................16
General Description
EMISSION CONTROL (AUX. EMISSION CONTROL DEVICES)
A: CAUTION
forming any work.
points.
the battery.
B: PREPARATION TOOL
1. SPECIAL TOOL
18353AA000 CLAMP PLIERS • Used for removing and installing the PCV
hose.
• This is a general tool made by the French
company CAILLAU. (code) 54.0.000.205
To make this easier to obtain in the same way as
genuine Subaru parts, it has been provided with
a tool number as an ST.
ST18353AA000
EC(H4SO)-2
Front Catalytic Converter

2. Front Catalytic Converter

A: REMOVAL
The front catalytic converter is integrated into the
front exhaust pipe as a single unit; therefore, refer
to “Front Exhaust Pipe” for the removal procedures.
<Ref. to EX(H4SO)-4, REMOVAL, Front Exhaust
Pipe.>
B: INSTALLATION
The front catalytic converter is integrated into the
front exhaust pipe as a single unit; therefore, refer
to “Front Exhaust Pipe” for the installation proce-
dures. <Ref. to EX(H4SO)-5, INSTALLATION,
Front Exhaust Pipe.>
C: INSPECTION
1) Check the connections and welds for exhaust
leaks.
2) Check for hole or rust.
EC(H4SO)-3
Rear Catalytic Converter

3. Rear Catalytic Converter

A: REMOVAL
The rear catalytic converter is integrated into center
exhaust pipe as a single unit; therefore, refer to
“Center Exhaust Pipe” for removal procedures.
<Ref. to EX(H4SO)-7, REMOVAL, Center Exhaust
Pipe.>
B: INSTALLATION
The rear catalytic converter is integrated into center
exhaust pipe as a single unit; therefore, refer to
“Center Exhaust Pipe” for installation procedures.
<Ref. to EX(H4SO)-7, INSTALLATION, Center Ex-
haust Pipe.>
C: INSPECTION
leaks.
2) Check for hole or rust.
EC(H4SO)-4
Canister
4. Canister B: INSTALLATION
A: REMOVAL
1) Set the vehicle on a lift. NOTE:
2) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. Check that there is no damage or dust on the quick
connector. If necessary, clean the seal surface of
the pipe.
Tightening torque:
8 N·m (0.8 kgf-m, 5.9 ft-lb)
IN-00203
3) Lift-up the vehicle.

4) Remove the rear wheel LH.
5) Remove the rear mud guard LH.
6) Disconnect quick connector (A).
7) Disconnect the drain valve connector (B).
8) Remove clip (C).
(B)
(A)
(C) EC-02080
(A) EC-02079 C: INSPECTION

9) Remove the canister from body. Make sure the canister and canister hoses are not
cracked or loose.
EC-02080
EC(H4SO)-5
Purge Control Solenoid Valve

5. Purge Control Solenoid Valve B: INSTALLATION

A: REMOVAL
1) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. Tightening torque (Purge control solenoid
valve attachment bolt):
19 N·m (1.9 kgf-m, 14 ft-lb)
IN-00203
2) Disconnect the connector and evaporation hose EC-00223

of the purge control solenoid valve, then remove
the purge control solenoid valve. NOTE:
Connect the evaporation hose as shown in the fig-
ure.
(B)
EC-00223
(A)
EC-00224
(A) To fuel pipe (intake manifold)

(B) To fuel pipe (evaporation line)
C: INSPECTION
Make sure the hoses are not cracked or loose.
EC(H4SO)-6
EGR Valve
6. EGR Valve
A: REMOVAL
Refer to the “FU” section for the removal proce-
dures. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-27, REMOVAL, EGR
Valve.>
B: INSTALLATION
Refer to the “FU” section for the installation proce-
dures. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-27, INSTALLATION,
EGR Valve.>
EC(H4SO)-7
Fuel Level Sensor

7. Fuel Level Sensor

A: REMOVAL
dures. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-52, REMOVAL, Fuel
Level Sensor.>
B: INSTALLATION
Fuel Level Sensor.>
EC(H4SO)-8
Fuel Temperature Sensor

8. Fuel Temperature Sensor

A: REMOVAL
The fuel temperature sensor is integrated into the
fuel level sensor as a single unit; therefore, refer to
“Fuel Level Sensor” for removal procedures. <Ref.
to FU(H4SO)-52, REMOVAL, Fuel Level Sensor.>
B: INSTALLATION
The fuel temperature sensor and fuel level sensor
are integrated into a single unit; therefore, refer to
“Fuel Level Sensor” for installation procedures.
<Ref. to FU(H4SO)-52, INSTALLATION, Fuel Lev-
el Sensor.>
EC(H4SO)-9

9. Fuel Sub Level Sensor

A: REMOVAL
dures. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-53, REMOVAL, Fuel
Sub Level Sensor.>
B: INSTALLATION
Fuel Sub Level Sensor.>
EC(H4SO)-10
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor

10.Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor C: INSPECTION

A: REMOVAL
WARNING:
• Place “NO FIRE” signs near the working area.
filler cap.
IN-00203

5) Disconnect the connector from the fuel tank
pressure sensor.
6) Disconnect the pressure hose from the fuel tank
pressure sensor.
7) Remove the fuel tank pressure sensor along
with the bracket.
EC-02084
B: INSTALLATION
Tightening torque:
7.4 N·m (0.75 kgf-m, 5.4 ft-lb)
EC-02084
EC(H4SO)-11
Pressure Control Solenoid Valve

11.Pressure Control Solenoid C: INSPECTION

Valve Make sure the hoses are not cracked or loose.
A: REMOVAL
IN-00203

4) Disconnect connector (A) from the pressure con-
trol solenoid valve.
5) Disconnect the evaporation hose (B) from the
pressure control solenoid valve.
6) Remove the bolts (C) which secure the bracket
to the fuel tank.
(A)
(B)
(B)
(C)
EC-02086
7) Remove the pressure control solenoid valve

along with the bracket.
from the bracket.
EC-02087
B: INSTALLATION
Tightening torque:
7.35 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 5.4 ft-lb)
EC(H4SO)-12
Drain Filter
12.Drain Filter
A: SPECIFICATION
Canister is a non-disassembled part, so do not re-
move the drain filter from canister.
Refer to “Canister” for removal and installation pro-
cedures. <Ref. to EC(H4SO)-5, REMOVAL, Canis-
ter.> <Ref. to EC(H4SO)-5, INSTALLATION,
Canister.>
EC(H4SO)-13
Shut Valve
13.Shut Valve
A: REMOVAL
WARNING:
• Place “NO FIRE” signs near the working area.
1) Remove the fuel filler pipe.
<Ref. to FU(H4SO)-47, REMOVAL, Fuel Filler
Pipe.>
2) Disconnect the evaporation hose from the shut
valve.
EC-02088
EC-02089
B: INSTALLATION
Tightening torque:
4.5 N·m (0.46 kgf-m, 3.3 ft-lb)
EC-02089
C: INSPECTION
EC(H4SO)-14
Drain Valve
14.Drain Valve
A: SPECIFICATION
move the drain valve from canister.
cedures. <Ref. to EC(H4SO)-5, REMOVAL, Canis-
ter.> <Ref. to EC(H4SO)-5, INSTALLATION,
Canister.>
EC(H4SO)-15
PCV Hose Assembly

15.PCV Hose Assembly

A: REMOVAL
CAUTION:
Do not remove unless the PCV hose, diagnos-
tics connector and PCV valves are damaged.
2) Fit the depression in the ST with the protrusion
on the clamp to unlock.
3) Remove the PCV hose assembly.
ST 18353AA000 CLAMP PLIERS
EC-02151
B: INSTALLATION
NOTE:
Replace with a new clamp.
1) Install the PCV hose assembly, then lock by fit-
ting the ST on the clamp protrusion.
EC-02152
2) Install the air intake chamber. <Ref. to

IN(H4SO)-7, INSTALLATION, Air Intake Cham-
ber.>
EC(H4SO)-16
INTAKE (INDUCTION)
IN(H4SO)
Page
2. Air Cleaner Element ...................................................................................4
3. Air Cleaner Case ........................................................................................5
4. Air Intake Chamber ....................................................................................7
5. Air Intake Duct ............................................................................................8
6. Resonator Chamber ...................................................................................9
General Description
INTAKE (INDUCTION)
A: COMPONENT
T2
T2
(14) (15)
(14)
(12) (13)
(13)
(11)
(10)
T4
T4
T4 T3
(18)
(19) (16)
T3
T3
(17)
(9)
(9)
(21) T6
(8)
(7)
T5
(4)
(20)
(3)
T1
(2)
(6)
(5)
(1)
IN-02218
IN(H4SO)-2
General Description
INTAKE (INDUCTION)
(1) Air intake duct (11) Intake boot (21) Mass air flow and intake air tem-
(2) Clip (12) Clamp perature sensor
(3) Resonator chamber (13) Cushion
(4) Air cleaner case (front) (14) Spacer Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(5) Spacer (15) Air intake chamber T1: 6.0 (0.6, 4.4)
(6) Cushion (16) Stay LH (MT model) T2: 6.5 (0.66, 4.8)
(7) Air cleaner element (17) Stay LH (AT model) T3: 16 (1.6, 11.6)
(8) Air cleaner case (rear) (with HC (18) Clamp T4: 3.0 (0.3, 2.2)
absorption filter : U5 model) (19) Stay RH T5: 7.5 (0.76, 5.5)
(9) Clip (20) Cushion T6: 1.0 (0.10, 0.7)
(10) Clamp
B: CAUTION
forming any work.
points.
the battery.
IN(H4SO)-3
Air Cleaner Element

INTAKE (INDUCTION)
2. Air Cleaner Element B: INSTALLATION

A: REMOVAL
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. CAUTION:
Be sure to use SUBARU genuine air cleaner el-
ement depending on the engine type when re-
placing the air cleaner elements. Otherwise
engine performance may be damaged.
NOTE:
Fasten with a clip after inserting the lower tab of
case.
IN-00203
2) Disconnect the connector from mass air flow and

intake air temperature sensor.
IN-02191
C: INSPECTION
1) Replace if excessively damaged or dirty.
2) Replace the air cleaner case (rear) if the HC ab-
sorption filter is damaged. (U5 model)
IN-02079
3) Remove the clip (A) securing upper side of air

cleaner case.
(A)
IN-02080
4) Pull the air cleaner case (rear) backward of the

vehicle, and remove the air cleaner element.
NOTE:
Be careful of the power steering hose fixed to the
bottom of the air cleaner case (rear).
IN(H4SO)-4
Air Cleaner Case

INTAKE (INDUCTION)
3. Air Cleaner Case 6) Remove the air cleaner case (rear) and air
cleaner element.
A: REMOVAL
IN-02192
7) Remove the bolts (A) and nut (B) which secure

IN-00203 the air cleaner case to body.
2) Remove the air intake duct. <Ref. to IN(H4SO)-
(B)
3) Disconnect the connector from mass air flow and
(A)
IN-02216
8) Remove the air cleaner case (front).
IN-02079
4) Loosen the clamps (A) which connect the air

cleaner case and the intake boot.
5) Remove the clip (B) securing the upper side of
air cleaner case.
(A)
(B)
IN-02081
IN(H4SO)-5
Air Cleaner Case

INTAKE (INDUCTION)
B: INSTALLATION
Tightening torque:
Bolt (A): 6.0 N·m (0.6 kgf-m, 4.4 ft-lb)
Nut (B): 7.5 N·m (0.76 kgf-m, 5.5 ft-lb)
(B)
(A)
IN-02216
NOTE:
Fasten with a clip after inserting the lower tab of
case.
IN-02191
C: INSPECTION
Check for cracks or loose connections.
IN(H4SO)-6
Air Intake Chamber

INTAKE (INDUCTION)
4. Air Intake Chamber

A: REMOVAL
1) Loosen the clamp (A) which connects air intake
chamber to throttle body.
2) Loosen the clamp (B) which connects intake
boot to air intake chamber.
3) Remove the bolt (C) which secures air intake
chamber to the stay.
4) Disconnect the connector (D).
(C)
(B)
(C) (D) (A)
IN-02141
5) Disconnect the blow-by hoses, and then remove

air intake chamber.
B: INSTALLATION
Tightening torque:
Clamp (A), (B)
3.0 N·m (0.3 kgf-m, 2.2 ft-lb)
Bolt (C)
6.5 N·m (0.66 kgf-m, 4.8 ft-lb)
(C)
(B)
(C) (A)
IN-02142
C: INSPECTION
1) Check for cracks or loose connections.
2) Inspect that no foreign objects are mixed in the
air intake chamber.
IN(H4SO)-7
Air Intake Duct

INTAKE (INDUCTION)
5. Air Intake Duct

A: REMOVAL
1) Remove the clip which installs the air intake duct
on the front side of body.
2) Remove the air intake duct.
IN-02082
B: INSTALLATION
C: INSPECTION
2) Check that no foreign matter is mixed in air in-
take duct.
IN(H4SO)-8
Resonator Chamber
INTAKE (INDUCTION)
6. Resonator Chamber
A: REMOVAL
The resonator chamber and air cleaner case are in-
tegrated into one unit; therefore, refer to “Air Clean-
er Case” for the removal procedure. <Ref. to
IN(H4SO)-5, REMOVAL, Air Cleaner Case.>
B: INSTALLATION
er Case” for the installation procedure. <Ref. to
IN(H4SO)-6, INSTALLATION, Air Cleaner Case.>
C: INSPECTION
IN(H4SO)-9
Resonator Chamber
INTAKE (INDUCTION)
IN(H4SO)-10
MECHANICAL
ME(H4SO)
Page
2. Compression ............................................................................................21
3. Idle Speed ................................................................................................22
4. Ignition Timing ..........................................................................................23
5. Intake Manifold Vacuum ...........................................................................24
6. Engine Oil Pressure .................................................................................25
7. Fuel Pressure ...........................................................................................26
8. Valve Clearance .......................................................................................27
9. Engine Assembly .....................................................................................29
10. Engine Mounting ......................................................................................35
11. Preparation for Overhaul ..........................................................................36
12. V-belt ........................................................................................................37
13. Crank Pulley .............................................................................................39
14. Timing Belt Cover .....................................................................................40
15. Timing Belt ...............................................................................................41
16. Cam Sprocket ..........................................................................................46
17. Crank Sprocket ........................................................................................47
18. Valve Rocker Assembly ...........................................................................48
19. Camshaft ..................................................................................................51
20. Cylinder Head ..........................................................................................55
21. Cylinder Block ..........................................................................................62
22. Oil Switching Solenoid Valve ...................................................................83
23. Intake and Exhaust Valve ........................................................................85
24. Piston .......................................................................................................86
25. Connecting Rod .......................................................................................87
26. Crankshaft ................................................................................................88
27. Engine Trouble in General .......................................................................89
28. Engine Noise ............................................................................................95
General Description
MECHANICAL
A: SPECIFICATION
Model 2.5 L
Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled, 4-cylinder,
Cylinder arrangement
4-stroke gasoline engine
Belt driven
Valve system mechanism Single overhead camshaft
4 valve/4 cylinder
Bore × Stroke mm (in) 99.5 × 79.0 (3.917 × 3.110)
Piston displacement cm3 (cu in) 2,457 (150)
Compression ratio 10.0
Compression pressure (at 350 rpm) kPa (kg/cm2, psi) 1,020 — 1,275 (10.4 — 13.0, 148 — 185)
Number of piston rings Pressure ring: 2, Oil ring: 1
Open BTDC 0°
Constant
Close ABDC 58°
Low Open BTDC 0°
Intake valve timing
Engine speed Close ABDC –50°
High Open BTDC 14°
speed Close ABDC 62°
Open BBDC46°
Exhaust valve timing
Close ATDC14°
Intake 0.20±0.04 (0.0079±0.0016)
Valve clearance mm (in)
Exhaust 0.25±0.04 (0.0098±0.0016)
650±100 (No load)
MT
Idling speed [at neutral position on MT, 850±100 (A/C ON)
rpm
or “P” or “N” position on AT] 700±100 (No load)
AT
850±100 (A/C ON)
Ignition order 1→3→2→4
BTDC/ MT 10°±8°/650
Ignition timing
rpm AT 15°±8°/700
NOTE:
US: Undersize OS: Oversize
Belt tension
Protrusion of adjuster rod mm (in) 5.2 — 6.2 (0.205 — 0.244)
adjuster
Spacer O.D. mm (in) 17.955 — 17.975 (0.7069 — 0.7077)
Tensioner bushing I.D. mm (in) 18.00 — 18.08 (0.7087 — 0.7118)
Belt
tensioner Clearance between spacer and
mm (in) Standard 0.025 — 0.125 (0.0010 — 0.0049)
bushing
Side clearance of spacer mm (in) Standard 0.20 — 0.55 (0.0079 — 0.0217)
Valve rocker
Clearance between shaft and arm mm (in) Standard 0.020 — 0.054 (0.0008 — 0.0021)
arm
Bending limit mm (in) 0.025 (0.00098)
Thrust clearance mm (in) Standard 0.030 — 0.090 (0.0012 — 0.0035)
Constant Standard 40.075 — 40.175 (1.5778 — 1.5817)
Cam lobe mm Intake Low speed Standard 35.182 — 35.282 (1.3851 — 1.3891)
Camshaft height (in) High speed Standard 40.315 — 40.415 (1.5872 — 1.5911)
Exhaust Standard 40.088 — 40.188 (1.5783 — 1.5822)
Camshaft journal O.D. mm (in) 31.928 — 31.945 (1.2570 — 1.2577)
Camshaft journal hole I.D. mm (in) 32.000 — 32.018 (1.2598 — 1.2605)
Oil clearance mm (in) Standard 0.055 — 0.090 (0.0022 — 0.0035)
ME(H4SO)-2
General Description
MECHANICAL
Surface warpage limit

mm (in) 0.035 (0.0014)
Cylinder (Mating surface with cylinder block)
head Grinding limit mm (in) 0.1 (0.004)
Standard height mm (in) 97.5 (3.84)
Seating angle 90°
Valve seat Intake Standard 0.8 — 1.4 (0.03 — 0.055)
Contacting width mm (in)
Inside diameter mm (in) 6.000 — 6.012 (0.2362 — 0.2367)
Valve guide Intake 20.0 — 21.0 (0.787 — 0.827)
Protrusion above head mm (in)
Exhaust 16.5 — 17.5 (0.650 — 0.689)
Intake Standard 0.8 — 1.2 (0.03 — 0.047)
Head edge thickness mm (in)
Intake 5.950 — 5.965 (0.2343 — 0.2348)
Stem outer diameter mm (in)
Exhaust 5.945 — 5.960 (0.2341 — 0.2346)
Valve
Intake 0.035 — 0.062 (0.0014 — 0.0024)
Valve stem gap mm (in) Standard
Exhaust 0.040 — 0.067 (0.0016 — 0.0026)
Intake 120.6 (4.75)
Overall length mm (in)
Exhaust 121.7 (4.79)
Free length mm (in) 55.2 (2.173)
Squareness 2.5°, 2.4 (0.094) or less
Valve spring 235.3 — 270.7 (24 — 27.6, 52.9 — 60.8)
Set
Tension/ /45.0 (1.772)
N (kgf, lb)/mm (in)
spring height 578.9 — 639.9 (59.1 — 65.3, 130.3 — 143.9)
Lift
/34.7 (1.366)
Surface warpage limit (mating with cylinder head) mm (in) 0.025 (0.00098)
Grinding limit mm (in) 0.1 (0.004)
Cylinder inner A 99.505 — 99.515 (3.9175 — 3.9179)
Cylinder mm (in) Standard
diameter B 99.495 — 99.505 (3.9171 — 3.9175)
block
Taper mm (in) Standard 0.015 (0.0006)
Out-of-roundness mm (in) Standard 0.010 (0.0004)
Piston clearance mm (in) Standard –0.010 — 0.010 (–0.00039 — 0.00039)
Cylinder inner diameter boring limit (diameter) mm (in) To 100.005 (3.9372)
A 99.505 — 99.515 (3.9175 — 3.9179)
Standard
B 99.495 — 99.505 (3.9171 — 3.9175)
Outer diameter mm (in)
Piston 0.25 (0.0098) OS 99.745 — 99.765 (3.9270 — 3.9278)
0.50 (0.0197) OS 99.995 — 100.015 (3.9368 — 3.9376)
Piston pin specified diameter mm (in) 23.000 — 23.006 (0.9055 — 0.9057)
Outer diameter mm (in) 22.994 — 23.000 (0.9053 — 0.9055)
Clearance between piston and
mm (in) Standard 0.004 — 0.008 (0.0002 — 0.0003)
Piston pin piston pin:
Piston pin must be fitted into position with
Degree of fit
thumb at 20°C (68°F).
Top ring Standard 0.20 — 0.35 (0.0079 — 0.0138)
Ring closed gap mm (in) Second ring Standard 0.37 — 0.52 (0.0144 — 0.0203)
Piston ring Oil ring Standard 0.20 — 0.50 (0.0079 — 0.0197)
Ring groove gap mm (in)
Second ring Standard 0.030 — 0.070 (0.0012 — 0.0028)
Bend or twist per 100 mm (3.94 in)
Connecting mm (in) Limit 0.10 (0.0039)
in length
rod
ME(H4SO)-3
General Description
MECHANICAL

Standard 1.492 — 1.501 (0.0587 — 0.0591)
Bearing of
Bearing size 0.03 (0.0012) US 1.510 — 1.513 (0.0594 — 0.0596)
large end mm (in)
(Thickness at center) 0.05 (0.0020) US 1.520 — 1.523 (0.0598 — 0.0600)
0.25 (0.0098) US 1.620 — 1.623 (0.0638 — 0.0639)
Bushing of
Clearance between piston pin and bushing mm (in) Standard 0 — 0.022 (0 — 0.0009)
small end
Bend limit mm (in) 0.035 (0.0014)
Out-of-roundness mm (in) 0.003 (0.0001)
Crank pin Cylindricality mm (in) 0.004 (0.0002)
Grinding limit (dia.) mm (in) To 51.750 (2.0374)
Crank journal Cylindricality mm (in) 0.006 (0.0002)
Standard 51.984 — 52.000 (2.0466 — 2.0472)
Crankshaft Crank pin outer 0.03 (0.0012) US 51.954 — 51.970 (2.0454 — 2.0461)
mm (in)
diameter 0.05 (0.0020) US 51.934 — 51.950 (2.0446 — 2.0453)
0.25 (0.0098) US 51.734 — 51.750 (2.0368 — 2.0374)
Standard 59.992 — 60.008 (2.3619 — 2.3625)
Crank journal outer 0.03 (0.0012) US 59.962 — 59.978 (2.3607 — 2.3613)
mm (in)
diameter 0.05 (0.0020) US 59.942 — 59.958 (2.3599 — 2.3605)
0.25 (0.0098) US 59.742 — 59.758 (2.3520 — 2.3527)
Standard 1.998 — 2.011 (0.0787 — 0.0792)
0.03 (0.0012) US 2.017 — 2.020 (0.0794 — 0.0795)
#1, #3
0.05 (0.0020) US 2.027 — 2.030 (0.0798 — 0.0799)
Main mm 0.25 (0.0098) US 2.127 — 2.130 (0.0837 — 0.0839)
Main bearing
bearing (in) Standard 2.000 — 2.013 (0.0787 — 0.0793)
0.03 (0.0012) US 2.019 — 2.022 (0.0795 — 0.0796)
#2, #4, #5
0.05 (0.0020) US 2.029 — 2.032 (0.0799 — 0.0800)
0.25 (0.0098) US 2.129 — 2.132 (0.0838 — 0.0839)
ME(H4SO)-4
General Description
MECHANICAL
B: COMPONENT
1. TIMING BELT
(5) T1 (1)
(2)
T2
T5 (3)
(6)
(4)
T4 (7)
(8)
(12) T3
T1
(9) T1
T4
T4
(10)
(15) (13) (11)

T5
(14)
T6
T1
ME-03179
(1) Timing belt cover No. 2 (RH) (9) Automatic belt tension adjuster Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(2) Timing belt guide (MT model) ASSY T1: 5 (0.5, 3.6)
(3) Crank sprocket (10) Belt idler No. 2 T2: 9.75 (1.0, 7.2)
(4) Timing belt cover No. 2 (LH) (11) Cam sprocket No. 2 T3: 24.5 (2.5, 18.1)
(5) Cam sprocket No. 1 (12) Timing belt T4: 39 (4.0, 28.9)
(6) Belt idler (No. 1) (13) Front timing belt cover T5: 78 (8.0, 57.9)
(7) Tensioner bracket (14) Timing belt cover (LH) T6: <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-39, INSTAL-
(8) Belt idler (No. 2) (15) Crank pulley LATION, Crank Pulley.>
ME(H4SO)-5
General Description
MECHANICAL
2. CYLINDER HEAD AND CAMSHAFT

(1)
(20)
(2) T3
T2 T7
(26)
(4)
T4 (22) (25)
(7) T8
T5
(8)
(3)
T3 (23)
(24)
(6)
(8)
(5) T1
(9)
(10)
(30) (19)
(8)
(14)
(15)
T1 (16)
(7)
T6
(10) T4
(2)
T8 (17)
(29) T3
(21) (18)
(11)
(28) (27) T7 (19)
(12)
(5) (13) T2
T4
(31) T5
T2
T3
(3)
T5
ME-03113
ME(H4SO)-6
General Description
MECHANICAL
(1) Rocker cover (RH) (17) O-ring (30) Variable valve lift diagnosis oil
(2) Intake valve rocker assembly (18) Rocker cover (LH) pressure switch (LH)
(3) Exhaust valve rocker assembly (19) Stud bolt (31) Seal washer
(4) Camshaft cap (RH) (20) Rocker cover gasket (RH)
(5) Oil seal (21) Rocker cover gasket (LH) Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(6) Camshaft (RH) (22) Oil switching solenoid valve (RH) T1: <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-55, INSTAL-
(7) Plug (23) Oil switching solenoid valve holder LATION, Cylinder Head.>
(8) Spark plug pipe gasket (RH) T2: <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-48, INSTAL-
(9) Cylinder head (RH) (24) Gasket LATION, Valve Rocker Assem-
(10) Cylinder head gasket (25) Oil temperature sensor bly.>
(11) Cylinder head (LH) (26) Variable valve lift diagnosis oil T3: 9.75 (1.0, 7.2)
(12) Camshaft (LH) pressure switch (RH) T4: 18 (1.8, 13.0)
(13) Camshaft cap (LH) (27) Oil switching solenoid valve (LH) T5: 25 (2.5, 18.1)
(14) Oil filler cap (28) Oil switching solenoid valve holder T6: 6.4 (0.65, 4.7)
(15) Gasket (LH) T7: 8 (0.8, 5.9)
(16) Oil filler duct (29) Gasket T8: 10 (1.0, 7.4)
ME(H4SO)-7
General Description
MECHANICAL
3. VALVE ROCKER ASSY
T2
T3
(1)
(1)
T1
(5)
(2)
(2)
(4)
T2 (3)
(3)
T2
T3
ME-02691
(1) Intake valve rocker arm ASSY (4) Exhaust rocker shaft Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(2) Valve rocker nut (5) Exhaust valve rocker arm T1: 6 (0.6, 4.3)
(3) Valve rocker adjusting screw T2: 9.75 (1.0, 7.2)
T3: 25 (2.5, 18.1)
ME(H4SO)-8
General Description
MECHANICAL
4. CYLINDER HEAD AND VALVE ASSEMBLY
(1) (1)
(3) (4) (5) (6) (7)

(8)
(2)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(9)
(6)
(7)
(8)
ME-03112
(1) Exhaust valve (4) Valve spring seat (7) Retainer

(2) Intake valve (5) Intake valve oil seal (8) Retainer key
(3) Valve guide (6) Valve spring (9) Exhaust valve oil seal
ME(H4SO)-9
General Description
MECHANICAL
5. CYLINDER BLOCK
T6
T2
T4 T2
(1)
(5)
(7) T5 (28)
(29) (2) (3) (6)
T2 (4)
T4
(28)
T10 T2
(10)
(8) (11)
(9) T2
(10)
(4)
T2 (27) (3)
(14) T4
(15)
(10)
(4) (28)
T9
T10
(26)
T10
T2 (29)
(23)
(3)
(10) (22) (12)
(16) T5
T4
T2 T2
T3
(24)
(17) T7
T2
(13)
(25)
T1 (30)
(21)
(18)
(20) T8
(19)
ME-03180
ME(H4SO)-10
General Description
MECHANICAL
(1) Oil pressure switch (16) Oil strainer Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(2) Cylinder block (RH) (17) Gasket T1: 5 (0.5, 3.6)
(3) Service hole plug (18) Oil pan T2: 6.4 (0.65, 4.7)
(4) Gasket (19) Drain plug T3: 10 (1.0, 7.4)
(5) Oil separator cover (20) Metal gasket T4: 25 (2.5, 18.1)
(6) Water by-pass pipe (21) Oil level gauge guide T5: <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-66, INSTAL-
(7) Oil pump (22) Water pump sealing LATION, Cylinder Block.>
(8) Front oil seal (23) Oil filter T6: 16 (1.6, 11.6)
(9) Rear oil seal (24) Gasket T7: First 12 (1.2, 8.7)
(10) O-ring (25) Water pump hose Second 12 (1.2, 8.7)
(11) Service hole cover (26) Plug T8: 44 (4.5, 33)
(12) Cylinder block (LH) (27) Seal T9: 45 (4.6, 33.3)
(13) Water pump (28) Seal washer T10: 70 (7.1, 50.6)
(14) Baffle plate (29) Washer
(15) Oil filter connector (30) O-ring
ME(H4SO)-11
General Description
MECHANICAL
6. CRANKSHAFT AND PISTON
(1)
T2
(4)
(5) (6)
(9)
(8)
(10)
(3) T2
(11)
(9)
(7)
(13)
T1
(11) (2)
(12)
T1
(11) (9)
(7)
(14) (10)
(17)
(8)
(6) (4)
(9)
(5)
(16)
(15)
(16)
(15)
ME-02974
(1) Flywheel (MT model) (8) Piston pin (15) Crankshaft bearing #1, #3
(2) Reinforcement (AT model) (9) Snap ring (16) Crankshaft bearing #2, #4
(3) Drive plate (AT model) (10) Connecting rod (17) Crankshaft bearing #5
(4) Top ring (11) Connecting rod bearing
(5) Second ring (12) Connecting rod cap Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(6) Oil ring (13) Crankshaft T1: 45 (4.6, 33.3)
(7) Piston (14) Woodruff key T2: 72 (7.3, 52.8)
ME(H4SO)-12
General Description
MECHANICAL
7. ENGINE MOUNTING
(1)
T1
T2 T1
T2
ME-02090
(1) Front cushion rubber Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)

T1: 35 (3.6, 25.8)
T2: 75 (7.6, 55.3)
C: CAUTION • Rotating parts and sliding parts such as piston,

bearing and gear should be coated with oil prior to
assembly.
forming any work. • Be careful not to let oil, grease or coolant contact
the timing belt, clutch disc and flywheel.
sion before removal, installation or disassembly. • All removed parts, if to be reused, should be re-
installed in the original positions and directions.
tect them from dust and dirt. • Bolts, nuts and washers should be replaced with
new parts as required.
sure to clarify the failure. Avoid unnecessary re- • Even if necessary inspections have been made
moval, installation, disassembly and replacement. in advance, proceed with assembly work while
making rechecks.
ing. Be wary of receiving burns from heated parts. • Remove or install the engine in an area where
chain hoists, lifting devices, etc. are available for
ready use.
• Be sure not to damage coated surfaces of body
panels with tools, or not to stain seats and windows
points.
with coolant or oil. Place a cover over fender, as re-
quired, for protection.
• Prior to starting work, prepare the following:
the battery.
Service tools, clean cloth, containers to catch cool-
• All parts should be thoroughly cleaned, paying
ant and oil, wire ropes, chain hoist, transmission
special attention to engine oil passages, pistons
jacks, etc.
and bearings.
• Lift-up or lower the vehicle when necessary.
Make sure to support the correct positions.
ME(H4SO)-13
General Description
MECHANICAL
D: PREPARATION TOOL
1. SPECIAL TOOL
18231AA010 CAM SPROCKET • Used for removing and installing cam sprocket.
WRENCH • CAMSHAFT SPROCKET WRENCH
(499207100) can also be used.
ST18231AA010
1B020XU0 SUBARU SELECT Used for troubleshooting for electrical system.
MONITOR KIT
ST1B020XU0
498267800 CYLINDER HEAD • Used for replacing valve guides.
TABLE • Used for removing and installing valve spring.
ST-498267800
498277200 STOPPER SET Used for installing automatic transmission
assembly to engine.
ST-498277200
ME(H4SO)-14
General Description
MECHANICAL

498457000 ENGINE STAND Used together with the ENGINE STAND
ADAPTER RH (499817100).
ST-498457000
ADAPTER LH (499817100).
ST-498457100
498497100 CRANKSHAFT Used for removing and installing the flywheel
STOPPER and the drive plate.
ST-498497100
498747300 PISTON GUIDE Used for installing piston in cylinder.
ST-498747300
498857100 VALVE OIL SEAL Used for press-fitting of intake and exhaust valve
GUIDE guide oil seals.
ST-498857100
ME(H4SO)-15
General Description
MECHANICAL

499017100 PISTON PIN GUIDE Used for installing piston pin, piston and
connecting rod.
ST-499017100
499037100 CONNECTING ROD Used for removing and installing connecting rod
BUSHING bushing.
REMOVER &
INSTALLER
ST-499037100
499587200 CRANKSHAFT OIL • Used for installing crankshaft oil seal.
SEAL INSTALLER • Used together with the CRANKSHAFT OIL
SEAL GUIDE (499597100).
ST-499587200
499587500 OIL SEAL • Used for installing the camshaft oil seal.
INSTALLER • Used together with the OIL SEAL GUIDE
(499597000).
ST-499587500
499587700 CAMSHAFT OIL Used for installing cylinder head plug.
SEAL INSTALLER
ST-499587700
ME(H4SO)-16
General Description
MECHANICAL

499097700 PISTON PIN Used for removing piston pin.
REMOVER ASSY
ST-499097700
499497000 TORX® PLUS Used for removing and installing camshaft cap.
ST-499497000
499587100 OIL SEAL Used for installing oil pump oil seal.
INSTALLER
ST-499587100
499597000 OIL SEAL GUIDE • Used for installing the camshaft oil seal.
• Used together with the CAMSHAFT OIL SEAL
INSTALLER (499587500).
ST-499597000
SEAL GUIDE • Used together with the CRANKSHAFT OIL
SEAL INSTALLER (499587200).
ST-499597100
ME(H4SO)-17
General Description
MECHANICAL

499718000 VALVE SPRING Used for removing and installing valve spring.
REMOVER
ST-499718000
499767200 VALVE GUIDE Used for removing valve guides.
REMOVER
ST-499767200
499767400 VALVE GUIDE Used for reaming valve guides.
REAMER
ST-499767400
499767700 VALVE GUIDE Used for installing valve guides. (Intake side)
ADJUSTER
ST-499767700
499767800 VALVE GUIDE Used for installing valve guides. (Exhaust side)
ADJUSTER
ST-499767800
ME(H4SO)-18
General Description
MECHANICAL

499817100 ENGINE STAND • Stand used for engine disassembly and
assembly.
• Used together with the ENGINE STAND
ADAPTER RH (498457000) & LH (498457100).
ST-499817100
499977100 CRANK PULLEY Used for stopping rotation of crank pulley when
WRENCH loosening/tightening crank pulley bolt.
ST-499977100
499987500 CRANKSHAFT Used for rotating crankshaft.
SOCKET
ST-499987500
42099AE000 CONNECTOR Used for removing the quick connector.
REMOVER
ST42099AE000
18354AA000 VALVE ROCKER Used for installing the valve rocker assembly
HOLDER (intake). (2-piece set)
ST18354AA000
ME(H4SO)-19
General Description
MECHANICAL

18258AA000 SPRING Used for installing the valve rocker assembly
INSTALLER (intake).
ST18258AA000
2. GENERAL TOOL
TOOL NAME REMARKS
Compression gauge Used for measuring compression.
Vacuum gauge Used for vacuum measurement of the intake manifold.
Oil pressure gauge Used for measuring engine oil pressure.
Fuel pressure gauge Used for measuring fuel pressure.
Timing light Used for measuring ignition timing.
E: PROCEDURE
It is possible to conduct the following service proce-
dures with engine on vehicle, however, the proce-
dures described in this section are based on the
condition that the engine is removed from vehicle.
• V-belt
• Timing belt
• Valve rocker ASSY
• Camshaft
• Cylinder head
ME(H4SO)-20
Compression
MECHANICAL
2. Compression
A: INSPECTION
CAUTION:
After warming-up, engine becomes very hot. Be
careful not to burn yourself during measure-
ment.
1) After warming-up the engine, turn the ignition
switch to OFF.
2) Make sure that the battery is fully charged.
3) Release the fuel pressure.
<Ref. to FU(H4SO)-39, RELEASING OF FUEL
4) Remove all spark plugs. <Ref. to IG(H4SO)-4,
REMOVAL, Spark Plug.>
5) Fully open the throttle valve.
6) Check the starter motor for satisfactory perfor-
mance and operation.
7) Hold the compression gauge tightly against the
spark plug hole.
NOTE:
When using a screw-in type compression gauge,
the screw (put into cylinder head spark plug hole)
should be less than 18 mm (0.71 in) long.
8) Crank the engine by the starter motor, and read
the maximum value on the gauge when the needle
of gauge is steady.
ME-00192
9) Perform at least two measurements per cylinder,

and make sure that the values are correct.
Compression (350 rpm and fully open throttle):
Standard:
1,020 — 1,275 kPa (10.4 — 13.0 kgf/cm2,
148 — 185 psi)
Difference between cylinders:
49 kPa (0.5 kgf/cm2, 7 psi), or less
ME(H4SO)-21
Idle Speed
MECHANICAL
3. Idle Speed 12) Check the idle speed when loaded. (Turn the A/
C switch to “ON” and operate the compressor for at
A: INSPECTION least one minute before measurement.)
1) Before checking the idle speed, check the fol- Idle speed [A/C “ON” and gears in “N” or “P”
lowing item: range]:
(1) Check the air cleaner element is free from 850±100 rpm
clogging, ignition timing is correct, spark plugs
are in good condition, and hoses are connected NOTE:
properly. Idle speed cannot be adjusted manually, because
(2) Check the malfunction indicator light does the idle speed is automatically adjusted. If the pre-
not illuminate. scribed idle speed cannot be maintained, refer to
the General On-board Diagnosis Table under “En-
2) Warm-up the engine.
gine Control System”. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-2,
3) Stop the engine, and turn the ignition switch to
Basic Diagnostic Procedure.>
OFF.
4) Connect the Subaru Select Monitor to the data
link connector.
EN-02533
5) Turn the ignition switch to ON and run the Suba-

ru Select Monitor.
6) Select {Each System Check} in Main Menu.
7) Select {Engine Control System} in Selection
Menu.
8) Select {Current Data Display & Save} in Engine
Control System Diagnosis.
9) Select {Data Display} in Data Display Menu.
10) Start the engine, and read the engine idle
speed.
11) Check the idle speed when no-loaded. (Head-
light, heater fan, rear defroster, radiator fan, A/C
and etc. are OFF)
Idle speed [No load and gears in “N” or “P”
range]:
650±100 rpm (MT model)
700±100 rpm (AT model)
ME(H4SO)-22
Ignition Timing
MECHANICAL
4. Ignition Timing
A: INSPECTION
1) Before checking the ignition timing, check the
following item:
(1) Check the air cleaner element is free from
clogging, spark plugs are in good condition, and
hoses are connected properly.
(2) Check the malfunction indicator light does
not illuminate.
3) When checking the ignition timing, connect the
timing light to the #1 cylinder spark plug cord and il-
luminate the timing mark with the timing light.
4) Start the engine and check the ignition timing at
idle speed as shown below.
Ignition timing [BTDC/rpm]:
10°±8°/650 (MT Model)
15°±8°/700 (AT model)
20 10
ME-02676
If the timing is not correct, check the ignition control

system. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-2, Basic Diag-
nostic Procedure.>
ME(H4SO)-23
Intake Manifold Vacuum

MECHANICAL
5. Intake Manifold Vacuum

A: INSPECTION
2) Disconnect the brake vacuum hose from intake manifold, and then install the vacuum gauge.
3) Keep the engine at idle speed and read the vacuum gauge indication.
By observing the gauge needle movement, internal condition of the engine can be diagnosed as described
below.
ME-02694
Vacuum pressure (at idling, A/C “OFF”):

Less than –60.0 kPa (–450 mmHg, –17.72 inHg)
Diagnosis of engine condition by measurement of intake manifold vacuum
Vacuum gauge indication Possible engine condition
1. Needle is steady but lower than normal position. This Air leakage around intake manifold gasket, disconnection or
tendency becomes more evident as engine temperature rises. damage of vacuum hose
2. Needle intermittently drops to position lower than normal Leakage around cylinder
position.
3. Needle drops suddenly and intermittently from normal Sticky valve
position.
4. When engine speed is gradually increased, needle begins to Weak or broken valve springs
vibrate rapidly at certain speed, and then vibration increases as
engine speed increases.
5. Needle vibrates above and below normal position in narrow Defective ignition system
range.
ME(H4SO)-24
Engine Oil Pressure

MECHANICAL
6. Engine Oil Pressure

A: INSPECTION
1) Remove the oil pressure switch. <Ref. to
LU(H4SO)-18, REMOVAL, Oil Pressure Switch.>
2) Connect the oil pressure gauge to cylinder block.
3) Connect the ground cable to battery.
IN-00203
4) Start the engine, and measure the oil pressure.
ME-00196
Oil pressure:
Standard:
98 kPa (1.0 kg/cm2, 14 psi) or more at 600 rpm
294 kPa (3.0 kg/cm2, 43 psi) or more at 5,000
rpm
• If the oil pressure is out of specification, check
the oil pump, oil filter and lubrication line. <Ref. to
LU(H4SO)-20, INSPECTION, Engine Lubrication
System Trouble in General.>
• If the oil pressure warning light is ON and oil
pressure is within specification, check the oil pres-
sure switch. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-20, INSPECTION,
Engine Lubrication System Trouble in General.>
NOTE:
Standard value is based on an engine oil tempera-
ture of 80°C (176°F).
5) After measuring the oil pressure, install the oil
pressure switch. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-18, INSTAL-
LATION, Oil Pressure Switch.>
Tightening torque:
25 N·m (2.5 kgf-m, 18.1 ft-lb)
ME(H4SO)-25
Fuel Pressure
MECHANICAL
7. Fuel Pressure
A: INSPECTION
CAUTION:
Before removing the fuel pressure gauge, re-
lease the fuel pressure.
NOTE:
Check or replace the fuel pump and fuel delivery
line if the fuel pressure is out of the standard.
1) Release the fuel pressure.
<Ref. to FU(H4SO)-39, RELEASING OF FUEL
2) Disconnect the fuel delivery hose from the fuel
damper, and connect the fuel pressure gauge.
ME-03054

4) Start the engine.
5) Measure the fuel pressure after warming up the
engine.
Fuel pressure:
Standard:
339.5 — 360.5 kPa (3.5 — 3.7 kg/cm2, 49 — 52 psi)
NOTE:
The fuel pressure gauge registers 10 to 20 kPa (0.1
to 0.2 kg/cm2, 1 to 3 psi) higher than standard val-
ues during high-altitude operations.
ME(H4SO)-26
Valve Clearance
MECHANICAL
8. Valve Clearance 10) Set #1 cylinder piston to top dead center of

compression stroke by rotating the crank pulley
A: INSPECTION clockwise using the socket wrench.
NOTE: NOTE:
Inspection and adjustment of valve clearance When the arrow mark (A) on cam sprocket (LH)
should be performed while engine is cold. comes exactly to the top, #1 cylinder piston is
1) Set the vehicle on a lift. brought to the top dead center of compression
2) Lift up the vehicle. stroke.
(A)
ME-00200
11) Measure #1 cylinder valve clearance by using

thickness gauge.
IN-00203
NOTE:
6) Remove the timing belt cover (LH). • Insert the thickness gauge (A) in as horizontally
as possible with respect to the valve stem end face.
• Lift up the vehicle and measure the exhaust
valve clearances.
Valve clearance (standard):
Intake
0.20±0.04 mm (0.0079±0.0016 in)
Exhaust
0.25±0.04 mm (0.0098±0.0016 in)
(A)
ME-00199
7) Remove the fuel injector. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-

28, REMOVAL, Fuel Injector.>
8) When inspecting #1 and #3 cylinders:
(1) Disconnect the spark plug cords from spark
plugs RH side. <Ref. to IG(H4SO)-4, RH SIDE,
(2) Disconnect the PCV hose from the rocker
cover (RH).
ME-02696
(3) Remove the bolts, then remove the rocker
cover (RH). 12) If necessary, adjust the valve clearance. <Ref.
9) When inspecting #2 and #4 cylinders: to ME(H4SO)-28, ADJUSTMENT, Valve Clear-
(1) Disconnect the spark plug cords from spark ance.>
plugs (LH side). <Ref. to IG(H4SO)-4, LH SIDE,
cover (LH).
cover (LH).
ME(H4SO)-27
Valve Clearance
MECHANICAL
13) Measure the valve clearance in #3, #2 and #4 2) Adjust the #1 cylinder valve clearance.
cylinder in the same measurement procedure as #1 (1) Loosen the valve rocker nut and screw.
cylinder in this order. (2) Set a suitable thickness gauge.
NOTE: (3) While noting the valve clearance, tighten the
• Be sure to set the cylinder pistons to their re- valve rocker adjusting screw.
spective top dead centers on compression stroke (4) When the specified valve clearance is ob-
before measuring valve clearances. tained, tighten the valve rocker nut.
• By rotating the crank pulley clockwise every 180° Tightening torque:
from the state that #1 cylinder piston is on the top 9.75 N·m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 ft-lb)
dead center of compression stroke, #3, #2 and #4
cylinder pistons come to the top dead center of NOTE:
compression stroke in this order. • Insert a thickness gauge in a direction as hori-
14) After inspection, install the related parts in the zontal as possible with respect to the valve stem
reverse order of removal. end face.
• Lift up the vehicle and adjust the exhaust valve
B: ADJUSTMENT clearances.
NOTE: Valve clearance:
Adjustment of valve clearance should be per- Intake
formed while engine is cold. 0.20±0.04 mm (0.0079±0.0016 in)
1) Set #1 cylinder piston to top dead center of com- Exhaust
pression stroke by rotating the crank pulley clock- 0.25±0.04 mm (0.0098±0.0016 in)
wise using the socket wrench.
NOTE:
When the arrow mark (A) on cam sprocket (LH)
comes exactly to the top, #1 cylinder piston is
brought to the top dead center of compression
stroke.
(A)
ME-00203
3) Adjust the valve clearance in #3, #2 and #4 cyl-

inder in the same adjustment procedure as #1 cyl-
inder in this order.
NOTE:
• Be sure to set the cylinder pistons to their re-
ME-00200
spective top dead centers on compression stroke
before adjusting valve clearances.
• By rotating the crank pulley clockwise every 180°
from the state that #1 cylinder piston is on the top
dead center of compression stroke, #3, #2 and #4
cylinder pistons come to the top dead center of
compression stroke in this order.
4) Ensure the valve clearances of each cylinder are
within specifications. If necessary, readjust the
valve clearances.
ME(H4SO)-28
Engine Assembly
MECHANICAL
9. Engine Assembly (2) Rear oxygen sensor connector
A: REMOVAL
1) Set the vehicle on a lift. (A)
2) Open the front hood fully and support with the
front food stay.
3) Collect the refrigerant from the A/C system.
<Ref. to AC-19, PROCEDURE, Refrigerant Recov-
ery Procedure.>
4) Release the fuel pressure. (B)
<Ref. to FU(H4SO)-39, RELEASING OF FUEL FU-02734

5) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. (A) Front oxygen (A/F) sensor connector
(3) Engine ground cable
IN-00203
filler cap.
ME-00206
7) Remove the air intake duct, air cleaner case and
air intake chamber. (4) Engine harness connectors
<Ref. to IN(H4SO)-8, REMOVAL, Air Intake Duct.>
<Ref. to IN(H4SO)-5, REMOVAL, Air Cleaner
Case.> <Ref. to IN(H4SO)-7, REMOVAL, Air In-
take Chamber.>
9) Remove the radiator from the vehicle. <Ref. to
CO(H4SO)-19, REMOVAL, Radiator.>
10) Disconnect the A/C pressure hoses from A/C
compressor.
11) Remove the air intake chamber stay.
ME-02697
(5) Generator connector and terminal
(A)
ME-00816
12) Disconnect the following connectors and ca- (B)

ME-00818
bles.
(1) Front oxygen (A/F) sensor connector (A) Terminal
(B) Generator connector
ME(H4SO)-29
Engine Assembly
MECHANICAL
(6) A/C compressor connector 15) Remove the front and center exhaust pipes.
<Ref. to EX(H4SO)-4, REMOVAL, Front Exhaust
Pipe.>
16) Remove the bolts and nuts which hold lower
side of transmission to engine.
ME-00819
(7) Power steering switch connector
ME-00210
17) Remove the nuts which install front cushion

rubber onto front crossmember.
ME-03004
13) Disconnect the following hoses.

(1) Brake booster vacuum hose
ME-02650
18) Separate the torque converter clutch from drive

plate. (AT model)
(1) Lower the vehicle.
(2) Remove the service hole plug.
(3) Remove the bolts which hold torque con-
verter clutch to drive plate.
ME-02698
(4) Remove all bolts while turning the crank-
shaft with a socket wrench.
(2) Heater inlet and outlet hoses
14) Remove the power steering pump.
(1) Remove the front side V-belts. <Ref. to
ME(H4SO)-37, FRONT SIDE BELT, REMOV-
AL, V-belt.>
(2) Remove the bolts which secure the power
steering pump to the bracket.
ME-00212
FU-00139
(3) Place the power steering pump on the right

side wheel apron.
ME(H4SO)-30
Engine Assembly
MECHANICAL
19) Remove the pitching stopper. 22) Support the transmission with a garage jack.
CAUTION:
Be sure to perform this work to prevent the
transmission from lowering due to its own
weight.
(A)
ME-03187 (B)
20) Disconnect the fuel hoses from fuel pipe.

(1) Disconnect the quick connector on the fuel
of the arrow. ME-00215
(2) Remove the clip and disconnect the evapo- (A) Transmission
ration hose from the pipe. (B) Garage jack
CAUTION: CAUTION:
• Be careful not to spill fuel. Before removing the engine away from trans-
• Catch the fuel from hoses using a container mission, check to be sure no work has been
or cloth. overlooked.
23) Separation of engine and transmission.
(1) Remove the starter. <Ref. to SC(H4SO)-6,
REMOVAL, Starter.>
(A) (2) Remove the bolts which hold upper side of
transmission to engine.
(B)
FU-02715

(B) Evaporation hose
21) Support the engine with a lifting device and

ME-00216
wire ropes.
24) Attach the ST to the converter case. (AT mod-
el)
ST 498277200 STOPPER SET
LU-00222
ST
ME-00217
ME(H4SO)-31
Engine Assembly
MECHANICAL
25) Remove the engine from vehicle. 7) Install the pitching stopper.
(1) Slightly raise the engine.
Tightening torque:
(2) Raise the transmission with garage jack. T1: 50 N·m (5.1 kgf-m, 36.9 ft-lb)
(3) Move the engine horizontally until main
T2: 58 N·m (5.9 kgf-m, 42.8 ft-lb)
shaft is withdrawn from clutch cover.
(4) Slowly move the engine away from engine
compartment. T1
NOTE:
Be careful not to damage adjacent parts or body
panels with crank pulley, oil level gauge, etc.
26) Remove the front cushion rubbers.
B: INSTALLATION
1) Install the front cushion rubbers to engine. T2
ME-03181
Tightening torque:
8) Remove the ST from converter case. (AT model)
35 N·m (3.6 kgf-m, 25.8 ft-lb)
2) Position the engine in engine compartment and NOTE:
align it with transmission. Be careful not to drop the ST into the converter
case when removing the ST.
NOTE:
panels with crank pulley, oil level gauge, etc. 9) Install the starter. <Ref. to SC(H4SO)-6, IN-
STALLATION, Starter.>
10) Install the torque converter clutch to drive plate.
(AT model)
(1) Tighten the bolts which hold torque convert-
er clutch to drive plate.
(2) Tighten other bolts while rotating the crank-
shaft using socket wrench.
NOTE:
Be careful not to drop bolts into the torque convert-
er clutch housing.
LU-00222
3) Apply a small amount of grease to splines of Tightening torque:

main shaft. (MT model) 25 N·m (2.5 kgf-m, 18.1 ft-lb)
4) Tighten the bolts which hold upper side of trans-
mission to engine.
Tightening torque:
50 N·m (5.1 kgf-m, 36.9 ft-lb)
ME-00212
(3) Attach the service hole plug to prevent entry

of foreign objects.
ME-00216
5) Remove the lifting device and wire ropes.

6) Remove the garage jack.
ME(H4SO)-32
Engine Assembly
MECHANICAL
11) Install the power steering pump. 14) Tighten the nuts which install the front cushion
(1) Install the power steering pump to the brack- rubber onto crossmember.
et, and tighten the bolts.
Tightening torque:
Tightening torque: 75 N·m (7.6 kgf-m, 55.3 ft-lb)
22 N·m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 ft-lb) NOTE:
Make sure the front cushion rubber mounting bolts
(A) and locator (B) are securely installed.
FU-00139
(2) Connect the power steering switch connec-

(B) (A) (A) (B)
tor. ME-02651
15) Install the front and center exhaust pipe.

<Ref. to EX(H4SO)-5, INSTALLATION, Front Ex-
haust Pipe.>
17) Connect the following hoses.
(1) Fuel delivery hose and evaporation hose
ME-03004 (1) Front oxygen (A/F) sensor connector
(3) Install and adjust the front side belt. <Ref. to (2) Rear oxygen sensor connector
ME(H4SO)-37, FRONT SIDE BELT, INSTAL- (3) Engine harness connectors
LATION, V-belt.> (4) Generator connector and terminal
12) Lift up the vehicle. (5) A/C compressor connector
13) Tighten the bolts and nuts which hold lower 19) Install the air intake chamber stay.
side of the transmission to engine. Tightening torque:
Tightening torque: 16 N·m (1.6 kgf-m, 11.6 ft-lb)
50 N·m (5.1 kgf-m, 36.9 ft-lb) 20) Tighten the engine ground cable.
Tightening torque:
14 N·m (1.4 kgf-m, 10.1 ft-lb)
21) Install the A/C pressure hoses.
<Ref. to AC-37, INSTALLATION, Hose and Tube.>
22) Install the radiator to vehicle. <Ref. to
CO(H4SO)-20, INSTALLATION, Radiator.>
23) Install the air intake duct, air cleaner case and
air intake chamber. <Ref. to IN(H4SO)-8, INSTAL-
LATION, Air Intake Duct.> <Ref. to IN(H4SO)-6,
ME-00219 INSTALLATION, Air Cleaner Case.> <Ref. to
ber.>
25) Install the battery in the vehicle, and connect
cables.
ME(H4SO)-33
Engine Assembly
MECHANICAL
26) Fill engine coolant.

<Ref. to CO(H4SO)-12, FILLING OF ENGINE
COOLANT, REPLACEMENT, Engine Coolant.>
27) Check the ATF level and replenish it if neces-
sary.
<Ref. to 4AT-26, INSPECTION, Automatic Trans-
mission Fluid.>
28) Charge the A/C system with refrigerant. <Ref.
to AC-20, PROCEDURE, Refrigerant Charging
Procedure.>
29) Remove the front hood stay, and close the front
hood.
30) Lower the vehicle from the lift.
C: INSPECTION
1) Check that pipes, hoses, connectors and clamps
are installed firmly.
2) Check the engine coolant and ATF are at speci-
fied levels.
3) Start the engine and check for exhaust gas, en-
gine coolant, leaks of fuel, etc. Also check for noise
and vibrations.
ME(H4SO)-34
Engine Mounting
MECHANICAL
10.Engine Mounting
A: REMOVAL
1) Remove the engine unit. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-29,
REMOVAL, Engine Assembly.>
2) Remove the engine mounting from engine as-
sembly.
B: INSTALLATION
Tightening torque:
Engine mounting
35 N·m (3.6 kgf-m, 25.8 ft-lb)
C: INSPECTION
Make sure that no crack or other damages do not
exist.
ME(H4SO)-35
Preparation for Overhaul

MECHANICAL
11.Preparation for Overhaul

A: PROCEDURE
1) After removing the engine from body, secure it to
ST in the following procedure.
ST1 498457000 ENGINE STAND ADAPTER
RH
LH
ST3 499817100 ENGINE STAND
ST3 ST1
ST2
ME-00221
2) In this section the procedures described under

each index are all connected and stated in order.
The procedure for overhauling of the engine will be
completed when you go through all steps in the
process.
Therefore, in this section, to conduct the particular
procedure within the flow of a section, you need to
go back and conduct the procedure described pre-
viously in order to do that particular procedure.
ME(H4SO)-36
V-belt
MECHANICAL
12.V-belt 3) Remove the rear side belt.

4) Remove the belt tensioner.
A: REMOVAL
NOTE:
Perform the work with the engine installed to body
when replacing a single part.
1. FRONT SIDE BELT
ME-00225
B: INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Wipe off any oil and water on the belt and pul-
ley.
1. FRONT SIDE BELT
ME-03005
1) Install the front side belt (C), and tighten the slid-
2) Loosen the lock bolt (A). er bolt so as to obtain the specified belt tension.
3) Loosen the slider bolt (B). <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-38, INSPECTION, V-belt.>
4) Remove the front side belt (C). 2) Tighten the lock bolt (A).
3) Tighten the slider bolt (B).
Tightening torque:
(C)
(B) Lock bolt (A)
25 N·m (2.5 kgf-m, 18.1 ft-lb)
Slider bolt (B)
8 N·m (0.8 kgf-m, 5.8 ft-lb)
(A)
ME-02699 (B)
(C)
2. REAR SIDE BELT
(B)
(A)
ME-02699
2. REAR SIDE BELT

1) Install the belt tensioner.
(A)
2) Install the rear side belt, and tighten the slider
bolt (B) so as to obtain the specified belt tension.
<Ref. to ME(H4SO)-38, INSPECTION, V-belt.>
ME-00224
ME(H4SO)-37
V-belt
MECHANICAL
3) Tighten the lock nut (A). Belt tension (without belt tension gauge):
Tightening torque: (A)
Lock nut (A) When installing new parts:
23 N·m (2.3 kgf-m, 17.0 ft-lb) 7 — 9 mm (0.276 — 0.354 in)
At inspection
(B)
9 — 11 mm (0.354 — 0.433 in)
(B)
When installing new parts:
7.5 — 8.5 mm (0.295 — 0.335 in)
(A) At inspection
9.0 — 10.0 mm (0.354 — 0.394 in)
98 N (10 kg, 22 Ib)
ME-00224 A/C
P/S GEN (A) (B)
C: INSPECTION
1) Replace the belts, if crack, fraying or wear is
found.
2) Remove the V-belt cover and reservoir tank. I/P
(with belt tension gauge) C/P
3) Check the V-belt tension and adjust it if neces-
ME-00226
sary by changing the generator installing position
or idler pulley installing position. (A) Front side belt
Belt tension (with belt tension gauge): (B) Rear side belt
(A) C/P Crank pulley
When installing new parts: GEN Generator
640 — 780 N (65 — 80 kgf, 144 — 175 lb) P/S Power steering oil pump pulley
At inspection A/C Air conditioning compressor pulley
490 — 640 N (50 — 65 kgf, 110 — 144 lb) I/P Idler pulley
(B)
650 — 750 N (66 — 76 kgf, 146 — 169 lb)
At inspection
350 — 450 N (36 — 46 kgf, 78 — 101 lb)
(A)
P/S GEN A/C
(B)
I/P
C/P
PM-00154
(A) Front side belt

(B) Rear side belt
C/P Crank pulley
GEN Generator
A/C Air conditioning compressor pulley
I/P Idler pulley
ME(H4SO)-38
Crank Pulley
MECHANICAL
13.Crank Pulley 3) Check that the tightening angle of the crank pul-
ley bolt is 65° or more. Perform the following proce-
A: REMOVAL dures when less than 65°.
NOTE: CAUTION:
Perform the work with the engine installed to body If the tightening angle of crank pulley bolt is
when replacing a single part. less than 65°, the bolt is damaged. In this case,
1) Remove the V-belts. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-37, the bolt must be replaced.
REMOVAL, V-belt.> (1) Replace the crank pulley bolts and clean
2) Remove the crank pulley bolt. To lock the crank- them.
shaft, use ST. Crank pulley bolt:
ST 499977100 CRANK PULLEY WRENCH 12369AA011
(2) Clean the crankshaft thread using com-
pressed air.
(3) Apply engine oil to the crank pulley bolt seat
ST and thread.
(4) Tighten the bolts temporarily with tightening
torque of 44 N·m (4.5 kgf-m, 33 ft-lb).
(5) Tighten the crank pulley bolts 65° to 75°.
NOTE:
Conduct the tightening procedures by confirming
ME-00227 the turning angle of crank pulley bolt referring to the
3) Remove the crank pulley. gauge indicated on timing belt cover.
4) Install the belt tensioner.
B: INSTALLATION
1) Install the crank pulley.
2) Install the pulley bolt.
To lock the crankshaft, use ST.
(1) Clean the crankshaft thread using com-
pressed air.
(2) Apply engine oil to the crank pulley bolt seat
and thread.
(3) Tighten the bolts temporarily with tightening
ME-00225
torque of 44 N·m (4.5 kgf-m, 33 ft-lb).
(4) Tighten the crank pulley bolts. 5) Install the V-belts. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-37, IN-
STALLATION, V-belt.>
Tightening torque:
180 N·m (18.4 kgf-m, 132.8 ft-lb) C: INSPECTION
1) Make sure the V-belt is not worn or otherwise
damaged.
2) Check the tension of the belt. <Ref. to
ST ME(H4SO)-38, INSPECTION, V-belt.>
ME-00227
ME(H4SO)-39
Timing Belt Cover

MECHANICAL
14.Timing Belt Cover

A: REMOVAL
NOTE:
1) Remove the V-belts. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-37,
REMOVAL, V-belt.>
2) Remove the crank pulley. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-
39, REMOVAL, Crank Pulley.>
3) Remove the timing belt cover (LH).
4) Remove the front timing belt cover.
(B)
(A)
ME-00821
(A) Timing belt cover (LH)

(B) Front timing belt cover
B: INSTALLATION
1) Install the front timing belt cover.
Tightening torque:
5 N·m (0.5 kgf-m, 3.6 ft-lb)
2) Install the timing belt cover (LH).
Tightening torque:
5 N·m (0.5 kgf-m, 3.6 ft-lb)
(B)
(A)
ME-00821
(A) Timing belt cover (LH)

(B) Front timing belt cover
3) Install the crank pulley. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-39,

INSTALLATION, Crank Pulley.>
4) Install the V-belts. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-37, IN-
C: INSPECTION
Check the cover for damage.
ME(H4SO)-40
Timing Belt
MECHANICAL
15.Timing Belt
A: REMOVAL (d)
NOTE:
when replacing a single part. For operation proce- (c)
dures, refer to “Timing Belt” in the PM section.
<Ref. to PM-16, Timing Belt.> (b) (a)
1. TIMING BELT
REMOVAL, V-belt.>
3) Remove the timing belt cover. <Ref. to
(f)
ME(H4SO)-40, REMOVAL, Timing Belt Cover.>
4) Remove the timing belt guide. (MT model)
(e)
ME-02387
(2) Using white paint, put an alignment mark or

an arrow mark on timing belts in relation to the
crank sprocket and cam sprockets.
ME-00065
5) If the alignment mark (a) or arrow mark (which

indicates rotation direction) on the timing belt has
faded away, put new marks on the belt before re-
moving as shown in procedures below.
(1) Use the ST to turn crankshaft. Align the
mark (a) of sprocket to the cylinder block notch
(b), and then ensure the right side cam sprocket
ME-02967
mark (c), cam cap and cylinder head matching
surface (d) or left side cam sprocket mark (e), Specified data:
timing belt cover notch (f) are properly adjusted. Z1: 46.8 teeth
ST 499987500 CRANKSHAFT SOCKET Z2: 43.7 teeth
Z1 Z2
ST
ME-00231 ME-02430
6) Remove the belt idler (No. 2).
ME(H4SO)-41
Timing Belt
MECHANICAL
7) Remove the belt idler No. 2. B: INSTALLATION

1. AUTOMATIC BELT TENSION ADJUST-
ER ASSEMBLY AND BELT IDLER
1) Prepare for installation of automatic belt tension
adjuster assembly.
CAUTION:
• Always use a vertical type pressing tool to
move the adjuster rod down.
(A) • Do not use a lateral type vise.
(B) ME-02968 • Push the adjuster rod vertically.
• Press-in the push adjuster rod gradually tak-
(A) Belt idler (No. 2) ing three minutes or more.
(B) Belt idler No. 2 • Do not allow press pressure to exceed 9,807
N (1,000 kgf, 2,205 lb).
8) Remove the timing belt. • Push in the adjuster rod to the end face of the
cylinder. Do not press the adjuster rod into cyl-
inder. Doing so may damage the cylinder.
• Do not release the press pressure until stop-
per pin is completely inserted.
(1) Attach the automatic belt tension adjuster
assembly to vertical pressing tool.
(2) Slowly move the adjuster rod down with a
pressure of 165 N (16.8 kgf, 37.1 lb) or more un-
til the adjuster rod is aligned with the stopper
ME-02388 pin hole in the cylinder.
2. BELT IDLER AND AUTOMATIC BELT

TENSION ADJUSTER ASSEMBLY
1) Remove the belt idler (No. 1).
ME-00239
(3) With a 2 mm (0.08 in) dia. stopper pin or a 2

mm (0.08 in) (nominal) dia. hex wrench inserted
into the stopper pin hole in cylinder, secure the
ME-02404 adjuster rod.
sembly.
ME-00350
ME-00238
ME(H4SO)-42
Timing Belt
MECHANICAL
2) Install the automatic belt tension adjuster as- (2) While aligning the alignment mark (B) on
sembly. timing belt with the mark (A) on sprockets, posi-
tion the timing belt properly.
Tightening torque:
39 N·m (4.0 kgf-m, 28.9 ft-lb) (B)
(A)
(A) ME-02390
ME-00241 3) Install the belt idlers (A) and (B), with (B) first.
3) Install the belt idler (No. 1). Tightening torque:
39 N·m (4.0 kgf-m, 28.9 ft-lb)
Tightening torque:
39 N·m (4.0 kgf-m, 28.9 ft-lb)
(A)
(B) ME-02968
ME-02433 (A) Belt idler (No. 2)

2. TIMING BELT (B) Belt idler No. 2
1) Prepare for installation of the automatic belt ten- 4) After ensuring the marks on timing belt and cam-
sion adjuster assembly. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-42, shaft sprockets are aligned, remove the stopper pin
AUTOMATIC BELT TENSION ADJUSTER AS- from belt tension adjuster.
SEMBLY AND BELT IDLER, INSTALLATION,
Timing Belt.>
2) Installation of timing belt:
(1) Turn the cam sprocket No. 1 and No. 2 us-
ing an ST, and position the alignment marks (A)
on each at the highest positions.
ST1 18231AA010 CAM SPROCKET WRENCH
NOTE:
CAM SPROCKET WRENCH (499207100) can
also be used. ME-00245
(A)
ME-02389
ME(H4SO)-43
Timing Belt
MECHANICAL
5) Install the timing belt guide. (MT model)

(1) Temporarily tighten the bolts mounting the
timing belt guide.
ME-00230
(2) Check and adjust the clearance between

timing belt and timing belt guide by using thick-
ness gauge.
Clearance:
1.0±0.5 mm (0.039±0.020 in)
ME-00246
(3) Tighten the bolts mounting the timing belt

guide.
Tightening torque:
9.75 N·m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 ft-lb)
ME-00247
6) Install the timing belt cover.

<Ref. to ME(H4SO)-40, INSTALLATION, Timing
Belt Cover.>
ME(H4SO)-44
Timing Belt
MECHANICAL
C: INSPECTION (3) If the adjuster rod is not stiff and moves

down, replace the automatic belt tension adjust-
1. TIMING BELT er assembly with a new part.
1) Check the timing belt teeth for breaks, cracks or CAUTION:
wear. If any fault is found, replace the belt. • Always use a vertical type pressing tool to
2) Check the condition of the back surface of belt. If move the adjuster rod down.
cracks are found, replace the belt. • Do not use a lateral type vise.
CAUTION: • Push the adjuster rod vertically.
• Be careful not to let oil, grease or coolant • Press the adjuster rod gradually taking three
contact the belt. Remove quickly and thorough- minutes or more.
ly if this happens. • Do not allow press pressure to exceed 9,807
• Do not bend the timing belt sharply. N (1,000 kgf, 2,205 lb).
• Push in the adjuster rod to the end face of the
In radial diameter h:
cylinder. Do not press the adjuster rod into cyl-
60 mm (2.36 in) or more
inder. If this instruction is not followed, this
may damage the cylinder.
4) Measure the amount of rod protrusion beyond
the body. If it is not within specified range, replace
with new part.
h Amount of rod protrusion H:
5.2 — 6.2 mm (0.204 — 0.244 in)
H
ME-00248
2. AUTOMATIC BELT TENSION ADJUSTER

1) Visually check the oil seals for leaks, and rod
ends for abnormal wear and scratches. If neces-
sary, replace the automatic belt tension adjuster
assembly.
ME-00249
NOTE:
Slight traces of oil at rod’s oil seal does not indicate 3. BELT TENSION PULLEY
a problem.
2) Check that the adjuster rod does not move when 1) Check the mating surfaces of timing belt and
a pressure of 165 N (16.8 kgf, 37.1 lb) is applied to contact point of adjuster rod for abnormal wear or
it. This is to check adjuster rod stiffness. scratches. Replace the automatic belt tension ad-
juster assembly if faulty.
3) If the adjuster rod is not stiff and moves freely
2) Check the belt tension pulley for smooth rota-
when applying 165 N (16.8 kgf, 37.1 lb), check it us-
tion. Replace if noise or excessive play occurs.
ing the following procedures:
3) Check the belt tension pulley for grease leakage.
(1) Slowly press the adjuster rod down to the
end surface of cylinder. Repeat this operation 4. BELT IDLER
two to three times. 1) Check the belt idler for smooth rotation. Replace
(2) With the adjuster rod moved all the way up, if noise or excessive play occurs.
apply a pressure of 165 N (16.8 kgf, 37.1 lb) to 2) Check the outer contacting surfaces of idler pul-
it. Check the adjuster rod movement. ley for abnormal wear and scratches.
3) Check the belt idler for grease leakage.
ME(H4SO)-45
Cam Sprocket
MECHANICAL
16.Cam Sprocket B: INSTALLATION

1) Install the cam sprocket No. 1 and No. 2. To lock
A: REMOVAL the camshaft, use the ST.
NOTE: ST 18231AA010 CAM SPROCKET WRENCH
Perform the work with the engine installed to body NOTE:
1) Remove the V-belts. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-37, also be used.
REMOVAL, V-belt.>
2) Remove the crank pulley. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)- Tightening torque:
39, REMOVAL, Crank Pulley.> 78 N·m (8.0 kgf-m, 57.9 ft-lb)
3) Remove the timing belt cover. <Ref. to NOTE:
ME(H4SO)-40, REMOVAL, Timing Belt Cover.> Do not confuse left and right side cam sprockets
4) Remove the timing belt. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-41, during installation. They should be distinguished by
REMOVAL, Timing Belt.> the L or R indication.
5) Remove the camshaft position sensor. <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-22, REMOVAL, Camshaft Position
Sensor.>
6) Remove the cam sprockets No. 1 and No. 2. To
lock the camshaft, use the ST.
ST 18231AA010 CAM SPROCKET WRENCH
NOTE:
also be used.
ST
ME-00250
2) Install the camshaft position sensor. <Ref. to

FU(H4SO)-22, INSTALLATION, Camshaft Position
Sensor.>
3) Install the timing belt. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-42,
INSTALLATION, Timing Belt.>
ST Belt Cover.>
ME-00250 5) Install the crank pulley. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-39,
C: INSPECTION
1) Check the cam sprocket teeth for abnormal wear
and scratches.
2) Make sure there is no free play between cam
sprocket and key.
3) Check the cam sprocket protrusion used for sen-
sor for damage and contamination of foreign mat-
ter.
ME(H4SO)-46
Crank Sprocket
MECHANICAL
17.Crank Sprocket C: INSPECTION

1) Check the crank sprocket teeth for abnormal
A: REMOVAL wear and scratches.
NOTE: 2) Make sure there is no free play between crank
Perform the work with the engine installed to body sprocket and key.
when replacing a single part. 3) Check the crank sprocket protrusion used for
1) Remove the V-belts. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-37, sensor for damage and contamination of foreign
REMOVAL, V-belt.> matter.
4) Remove the timing belt. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-41,
REMOVAL, Timing Belt.>
5) Remove the crank sprocket.
ME-00103
B: INSTALLATION
1) Install the crank sprocket.
ME-00103

Belt Cover.>
ME(H4SO)-47
Valve Rocker Assembly

MECHANICAL
18.Valve Rocker Assembly (2) Remove the bolts (a) through (j) in alphabet-
ical sequence.
A: REMOVAL NOTE:
NOTE: Leave two or three threads of bolts (i) and (j) en-
Perform the work with the engine installed to body gaged in order to retain the valve rocker assembly.
when replacing a single part. Refer to “Valve Clear- (a) (j) (h)
(d)
ance” for preparation. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-27, (b)
Valve Clearance.>
(f)
REMOVAL, V-belt.>
3) Remove the timing belt cover. <Ref. to (c)
(e)
4) Remove the timing belt. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-41, (g) (i)
ME-02975
5) Remove the cam sprocket. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)- (3) Remove the valve rocker assembly.
46, REMOVAL, Cam Sprocket.> NOTE:
6) Disconnect the PCV hose and remove the rock- Set the ST in the position shown in the drawing to
er cover. remove the intake valve rocker assembly.
7) Remove the valve rocker assembly. ST 18354AA000 VALVE ROCKER HOLDER
(1) Use the ST to rotate the spring stopper in
the direction of the arrow to remove it from ad-
juster pin.
ST 18258AA000 SPRING INSTALLER
ST
ME-02794
B: INSTALLATION
ST 1) Install the valve rocker assembly.
ME-02704 (1) Temporarily tighten the bolts equally in al-
phabetical order as shown in the figure.
NOTE:
• Do not temporarily tighten the bolts (i) and (j).
• Set the ST in the position shown in the drawing to
mount the intake valve rocker assembly.
(A)
ST 18354AA000 VALVE ROCKER HOLDER
(B)
(C)
ME-02744
(A) Adjuster pin

(B) Spring stopper
(C) Spring
ST
ME-02794
ME(H4SO)-48

MECHANICAL
(2) Tighten the bolts (a) through (h) to specified 5) Install the rocker cover and rocker cover gasket,
torque. and then connect PCV hose.
Tightening torque: NOTE:
25 N·m (2.5 kgf-m, 18.1 ft-lb) • Use a new rocker cover gasket.
(3) Tighten the bolts (i) through (j) to specified • Tighten the bolts in two stages in alphabetical
torque. sequence as shown in figure.
6 N·m (0.6 kgf-m, 4.3 ft-lb) 1st
(i) (a)
6.4 N·m (0.65 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
(g) (c)
(j) 2nd (only (a) and (b) are tightened)
6.4 N·m (0.65 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
(e)
RH side
(f) (a) (c)
(h)
(f)
(d) (b) ME-02703
(4) Use the ST to rotate the spring stopper in

the direction of the arrow to fasten the adjuster
pin. (d) (b) (e)
ME-02715
ST 18258AA000 SPRING INSTALLER
LH side
(f) (a) (c)
ST
ME-02704 (d) (b) (e)
ME-02716

Belt Cover.>
(A) INSTALLATION, Crank Pulley.>
(B)
(C) C: DISASSEMBLY
ME-02705
NOTE:
(A) Adjuster pin Intake valve rocker assembly cannot be disassem-
(B) Spring stopper bled.
(C) Spring 1) Remove the exhaust valve rocker arm from the
rocker shaft.
2) Install the cam sprocket. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-46, NOTE:
INSTALLATION, Cam Sprocket.> Keep all the removed parts in order for re-installing
3) Install the timing belt. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-42, in their original positions.
INSTALLATION, Timing Belt.> 2) Remove the nut and adjusting screw from ex-
4) Adjust the valve clearance. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)- haust valve rocker.
28, ADJUSTMENT, Valve Clearance.>
ME(H4SO)-49

MECHANICAL
D: ASSEMBLY 2) If the oil clearance exceeds the limit, replace the

valve rocker arm or shaft, whichever shows the
NOTE: greater amount of wear.
Intake valve rocker assembly cannot be disassem-
bled. Rocker arm inside diameter:
1) Install the adjusting screw and nut to the exhaust 22.020 — 22.041 mm (0.8669 — 0.8678 in)
valve rocker. Rocker shaft diameter:
2) Insert the exhaust valve rocker arm to rocker 21.987 — 22.000 mm (0.8656 — 0.8661 in)
shaft. 3) If the roller or valve contact surface of valve
NOTE: rocker arm is worn or dented excessively, replace
Valve rocker arms, and rocker shaft have identifica- the valve rocker arm.
tion marks. Make sure the parts with same mark- 4) Check that the valve rocker arm roller rotates
ings are properly assembled. smoothly. If not, replace the valve rocker arm.
E: INSPECTION
1. INTAKE VALVE ROCKER ASSEMBLY
1) If the roller or valve contact surface of valve
rocker arm is worn or dented excessively, replace
the valve rocker assembly.
2) Check that the valve rocker arm roller rotates
smoothly. If not, replace the valve rocker assembly.
2. EXHAUST VALVE ROCKER ASSEMBLY
1) Measure the inner diameter of valve rocker arm
and outer diameter of valve rocker shaft, and con-
firm the difference (oil clearance) between the two
values.
Clearance between arm and shaft:
Standard:
0.020 — 0.054 mm (0.0008 — 0.0021 in)
ME-02706
ME-00257
ME(H4SO)-50
Camshaft
MECHANICAL
19.Camshaft 12) Remove the camshaft cap.

(1) Remove the bolts (a) and (b) in alphabetical
A: REMOVAL sequence.
NOTE:
when replacing a single part. Refer to “Valve Clear-
ance” for preparation. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-27, (a)
Valve Clearance.>
REMOVAL, V-belt.> (b)
3) Remove the timing belt cover. <Ref. to ME-02707
ME(H4SO)-40, REMOVAL, Timing Belt Cover.> (2) Equally loosen the bolts (c) through (j) all the
4) Remove the timing belt. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-41, way in alphabetical sequence.
(j) (h)
5) Remove the cam sprocket. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-
46, REMOVAL, Cam Sprocket.>
6) Remove the timing belt cover No. 2 (LH). (d) (f)
7) Remove the timing belt cover No. 2 (RH).
NOTE:
Do not damage or lose the seal rubber when re-
moving the timing belt covers. (e)
(c)
(g) (i) ME-02708
(3) Remove the bolts (k) through (p) in alpha-

betical sequence using ST.
ST 499497000 TORX® PLUS
(n) (p) (l)
ME-00258
8) Remove the tensioner bracket.
(m)
(k)
(o) ME-02709
(4) Remove the camshaft cap.

13) Remove the camshaft.
14) Remove the oil seal.
15) Remove the plug from rear side of camshaft.
ME-00259 CAUTION:
• Do not remove the oil seal unless necessary.
9) Remove the camshaft position sensor support.
• Do not scratch the journal surface when re-
(LH side only)
moving the oil seal.
10) Remove the oil level gauge guide. (LH side
only)
11) Remove the valve rocker assembly. <Ref. to
ME(H4SO)-48, REMOVAL, Valve Rocker Assem-
bly.>
ME(H4SO)-51
Camshaft
MECHANICAL
B: INSTALLATION (4) Tighten the TORX® bolts (e) through (j) in al-
phabetical sequence using the ST.
1) Apply a thin coat of engine oil to camshaft jour-
ST 499497000 TORX® PLUS
nals, and install the camshaft.
2) Install the camshaft cap. Tightening torque:
(1) Apply liquid gasket to the mating surfaces of 18 N·m (1.8 kgf-m, 13.0 ft-lb)
camshaft cap. (g) (e) (i)
Liquid gasket:
THREE BOND 1280B (Part No. K0877YA018)
(h)
(j)
(f) ME-02712
(5) Tighten the bolts (k) through (r) in alphabet-

ical sequence.
ME-02710
Tightening torque:
NOTE: 9.75 N·m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 ft-lb)
• Apply a coat of liquid gasket of 3 mm (0.12 in) in (k) (m)
diameter (A) along the edge (B) of camshaft cap
(C) mating surface. (q) (o)
• Install within 5 min. after applying liquid gasket.
(A)
(p)
(r)
(n) (l) ME-02713

(B)
(C) (6) Tighten the bolts (s) and (t) in alphabetical
sequence.
ME-00265
NOTE:
• Use a new seal washer.
(2) Temporarily tighten the bolts (a) through (d) • Install and tighten the seal washer.
in alphabetical sequence.
Tightening torque:
9.75 N·m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 ft-lb)
(c) (a)
(s)
(b)
(d)
(t)
ME-02711
(3) Install the valve rocker assembly.

ME-02714
<Ref. to ME(H4SO)-48, INSTALLATION, Valve
Rocker Assembly.>
ME(H4SO)-52
Camshaft
MECHANICAL
3) Apply a coat of engine oil to oil seal periphery 6) Install the rocker cover and rocker cover gasket,
and oil seal lips and install the oil seal (A) on cam- and then connect PCV hose.
shaft using ST1 and ST2. NOTE:
NOTE: • Use a new rocker cover gasket.
Use a new oil seal. • Tighten the bolts in two stages in alphabetical
ST1 499597000 OIL SEAL GUIDE sequence as shown in figure.
ST2 499587500 OIL SEAL INSTALLER Tightening torque:
1st
6.4 N·m (0.65 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
2nd (only (a) and (b) are tightened)
ST1
6.4 N·m (0.65 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
RH side
(f) (a) (c)
ST2
(A)
ME-02596
4) Install the plug (A) using ST.

ST 499587700 CAMSHAFT OIL SEAL IN-
STALLER
(d) (b) (e)
ME-02715
LH side
(A)
(f) (a) (c)
ST
ME-02717
5) Adjust the valve clearance. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-

(d) (b) (e)
ME-02716
7) Install the oil level gauge guide. (LH side only)

8) Install the camshaft position sensor support. (LH
side only)
9) Install the tensioner bracket.
Tightening torque:
24.5 N·m (2.5 kgf-m, 18.1 ft-lb)
ME-00273
ME(H4SO)-53
Camshaft
MECHANICAL
10) Install the timing belt cover No. 2 (RH). 3) Measure the outer diameter of camshaft journal
and inner diameter of cylinder head journal, and
Tightening torque:
confirm the difference (oil clearance) between the
5 N·m (0.5 kgf-m, 3.6 ft-lb)
two values. If the oil clearance exceeds the stan-
11) Install the timing belt cover No. 2 (LH). dard, replace the camshaft or cylinder head as nec-
Tightening torque: essary.
5 N·m (0.5 kgf-m, 3.6 ft-lb) Unit: mm (in)
Oil
Standard 0.055 — 0.090 (0.0022 — 0.0035)
clearance
Camshaft journal O.D. 31.928 — 31.945 (1.2570 — 1.2577)
Journal hole I.D. 32.000 — 32.018 (1.2598 — 1.2605)
4) Check the cam face condition, and remove the

minor faults by grinding with oil stone. Measure the
cam height H. If it exceeds the standard, replace it.
Cam height H:
ME-00274
Part Unit: mm (in)
12) Install the cam sprocket. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-
40.075 — 40.175
46, INSTALLATION, Cam Sprocket.> Constant Standard
(1.5778 — 1.5817)
35.182 — 35.282
INSTALLATION, Timing Belt.> Intake Low speed Standard
(1.3851 — 1.3891)
High 40.315 — 40.415
<Ref. to ME(H4SO)-40, INSTALLATION, Timing speed
Standard
(1.5872 — 1.5911)
Belt Cover.>
40.088 — 40.188
15) Install the crank pulley. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-39, Exhaust Standard
(1.5783 — 1.5822)
16) Install the V-belts. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-37, IN- Cam base circle diameter A:
STALLATION, V-belt.> Intake
C: INSPECTION 34.00 mm (1.3386 in)
Exhaust
1. CAMSHAFT 34.00 mm (1.3386 in)
1) Measure the bend, and repair or replace if nec- Base circle step of adjacent intake cams (low
essary. speed and high speed):
Service limit: 0.03 mm (0.001 in) or less
0.025 mm (0.00098 in)
A
ME-00276
ME-00275 5) Measure the thrust clearance of camshaft with
2) Check the journal for damage and wear. Re- setting the dial gauge at end of camshaft. If the
place if faulty. thrust clearance exceeds the limit, replace the
camshaft caps and cylinder head as a set. If neces-
sary, replace the camshaft.
Standard:
0.030 — 0.090 mm (0.0012 — 0.0035 in)
ME(H4SO)-54
Cylinder Head
MECHANICAL
20.Cylinder Head 12) Remove the bolts (a) and (c) to remove cylinder
head.
A: REMOVAL
NOTE: (e) (c)

when replacing a single part. Refer to “Valve Clear- (a)
ance” for preparation. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-27,
Valve Clearance.>
1) Remove the V-belts. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-37, (b)
REMOVAL, V-belt.>
2) Remove the crank pulley. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)- (f)
39, REMOVAL, Crank Pulley.> (d) ME-02745
3) Remove the timing belt cover. <Ref. to 13) Remove the cylinder head gasket.
4) Remove the timing belt. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-41, CAUTION:
REMOVAL, Timing Belt.> Be careful not to scratch the mating surface of
5) Remove the cam sprocket. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)- cylinder head and cylinder block.
46, REMOVAL, Cam Sprocket.> 14) Similarly, remove the right side cylinder head.
6) Remove the intake manifold. <Ref. to B: INSTALLATION
FU(H4SO)-12, REMOVAL, Intake Manifold.>
7) Remove the bolt which installs the A/C compres- 1) Install the cylinder head to the cylinder block.
sor bracket on cylinder head. CAUTION:
8) Remove the valve rocker assembly. <Ref. to Be careful not to scratch the mating surface of
ME(H4SO)-48, REMOVAL, Valve Rocker Assem- cylinder head and cylinder block.
bly.>
NOTE:
9) Remove the camshaft. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-51,
Use a new cylinder head gasket.
REMOVAL, Camshaft.>
(1) Clean the bolt threads and the bolt holes in
10) Remove the cylinder head bolts in alphabetical
the cylinder block.
sequence as shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
NOTE:
To avoid erroneous tightening of the bolts,
Leave bolts (a) and (c) engaged by three or four
clean out the bolt holes sufficiently by blowing
threads to prevent the cylinder head from falling.
with compressed air to eliminate engine cool-
ant etc.
(e) (c) (2) Apply a sufficient coat of engine oil to the
washer and bolt thread.
(a) (3) Tighten all bolts to 40 N·m (4.1 kgf-m, 29.5
ft-lb) in alphabetical order.
(4) Retighten all bolts to 95 N·m (9.7 kgf-m,
(b) 70.1 ft-lb) in alphabetical order.
(f)
CAUTION:
If the bolt makes stick-slip sound during tight-
(d) ME-02745 ening, repeat the procedure from step (1). In
11) While tapping the cylinder head with a plastic this case, the cylinder head gasket can be re-
hammer, separate it from cylinder block. used.
(5) Loosen all the bolts by 180° in the reverse
order of installing, and loosen them further by
180°.
(6) Tighten all bolts to 10 N·m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.4 ft-
lb) in alphabetical order.
22.1 ft-lb) in alphabetical order.
44.3 ft-lb) in alphabetical order.
(9) Retighten all bolts by 80 — 90° in alphabet-
ical order.
ME(H4SO)-55
Cylinder Head
MECHANICAL
(10) Retighten all bolts by 40 — 45° in alphabet- C: DISASSEMBLY

ical order.
1) Place the cylinder head on the ST.
CAUTION: ST 498267800 CYLINDER HEAD TABLE
The tightening angle of the bolt should not ex- 2) Set the ST on valve spring. Compress the valve
ceed 45°. spring and remove the valve spring retainer key.
(11) Retighten bolts (a) and (b) by 40 — 45°. Remove each valve and valve spring.
CAUTION: ST 499718000 VALVE SPRING REMOVER
Make sure the total “tightening angle” of steps NOTE:
(10) and (11) does not exceed 90°. • Keep all the removed parts in order for re-install-
ing in their original positions.
(a) (f) • Mark each valve to prevent confusion.
• Pay careful attention not to damage the lips of in-
take valve oil seals and exhaust valve oil seals.
(c)
(d) ST
(b)
(e) ME-02746
2) Install the camshaft. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-52, IN-

STALLATION, Camshaft.>
3) Install the valve rocker assembly. <Ref. to
ME(H4SO)-48, INSTALLATION, Valve Rocker As- ME-00280
sembly.>
4) Install the A/C compressor bracket on cylinder
head.
<Ref. to FU(H4SO)-13, INSTALLATION, Intake
Manifold.>
6) Install the cam sprocket. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-46,
INSTALLATION, Cam Sprocket.>
8) Adjust the valve clearance. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-
9) Install the rocker cover and rocker cover gasket,
and then connect PCV hose.
NOTE:
Use a new gasket.
Belt Cover.>
ME(H4SO)-56
Cylinder Head
MECHANICAL
D: ASSEMBLY
(1) (8)
(5) (7)
(3)
(11)
(2) (4) (6)
(9)
(12)
(10)
(13)
(14)
ME-03110
(1) Valve (6) Retainer (11) Plug

(2) Valve guide (7) Retainer key (12) Camshaft cap
(3) Valve spring seat (8) Spark plug gasket (13) Valve rocker ASSY
(4) Oil seal (9) Camshaft (14) Seal washer
(5) Valve spring (10) Oil seal
1) Installation of valve spring and valve: (4) Set the ST on valve spring.
(1) Place the cylinder head on the ST. ST 499718000 VALVE SPRING REMOVER
ST 498267800 CYLINDER HEAD TABLE
(2) Coat the stem of each valve with engine oil
and insert the valve into the valve guide. ST
NOTE:
When inserting the valve into valve guide, use spe-
cial care not to damage the oil seal lip.
(3) Install the valve spring and retainer.
NOTE:
Be sure to install the valve spring with its close-
ME-00280
coiled end facing the seat on cylinder head.
ME(H4SO)-57
Cylinder Head
MECHANICAL
(5) Compress the valve spring and fit the valve NOTE:
spring retainer key. Uneven torque for the cylinder head bolts can
cause warping. When reassembling, pay special
attention to the torque so as to tighten evenly.
(B) (C) (A)
(A)
(B) (C) (B)
ME-02816
ST
(A) Retainer key ME-00285
(B) Valve spring
(C) Retainer (A) Straight edge
(B) Thickness gauge
(6) After installing, tap the valve spring retainers
lightly with a plastic hammer for better seating. 2. VALVE SEAT
E: INSPECTION Inspect the intake and exhaust valve seats, and
correct the contact surfaces with a valve seat cutter
1. CYLINDER HEAD if they are defective or when valve guides are re-
1) Check for cracks or damage. Use liquid pene- placed.
trant tester on the important sections to check for Valve seat width W:
fissures. Check that there are no marks of gas leak-
ing or water leaking on gasket installing surface. Standard:
2) Place the cylinder head on the ST. Intake (A)
ST 498267800 CYLINDER HEAD TABLE 0.8 — 1.4 mm (0.03 — 0.055 in)
3) Measure the warping of the cylinder head sur- Exhaust (B)
face that mates with the cylinder block using a 1.2 — 1.8 mm (0.047 — 0.071 in)
straight edge and thickness gauge.
If the warping exceeds the limit, correct the surface
by grinding it with a surface grinder.
(A) (B)
Warping limit:
0.035 mm (0.0014 in)
Grinding limit: W
W
0.1 mm (0.004 in)
Standard height of cylinder head:
97.5 mm (3.839 in) ME-00397
ME-00287
ME(H4SO)-58
Cylinder Head
MECHANICAL
3. VALVE GUIDE (2) Insert the ST2 into valve guide and press it
1) Check the clearance between valve guide and down to remove the valve guide.
stem. The clearance can be checked by measuring ST1 498267800 CYLINDER HEAD TABLE
respectively the outer diameter of valve stem with a ST2 499767200 VALVE GUIDE REMOVER
micrometer and the inner diameter of valve guide
with a caliper gauge.
Clearance between the valve guide and valve
ST2
stem:
Standard:
Intake
0.035 — 0.062 mm (0.0014 — 0.0024 in)
Exhaust ST1
0.040 — 0.067 mm (0.0016 — 0.0026 in) ME-00290
(3) Turn the cylinder head upside down and

place the ST as shown in the figure.
Intake side
ST 499767700 VALVE GUIDE ADJUSTER
Exhaust side
ST 499767800 VALVE GUIDE ADJUSTER
(A)
ME-00763
(A) Valve guide

ST
X (A)
ME-00291
(A) Valve guide
(4) Before installing a new valve guide, make

sure that neither scratches nor damages exist
on the inner surface of valve guide holes in cyl-
ME-00289 inder head.
2) If the clearance between valve guide and stem
exceeds the limit, replace the valve guide or valve
itself whichever shows greater amount of wear.
See the following procedure for valve guide re-
placement.
Valve guide inner diameter:
6.000 — 6.012 mm (0.2362 — 0.2367 in)
Valve stem outer diameters:
Intake
5.950 — 5.965 mm (0.2343 — 0.2348 in)
Exhaust
5.945 — 5.960 mm (0.2341 — 0.2346 in)
(1) Place the cylinder head on ST1 with the
combustion chamber upward so that valve
guides fit the holes in ST1.
ME(H4SO)-59
Cylinder Head
MECHANICAL
(5) Put a new valve guide, coated with sufficient (9) Recheck the contact condition between
oil, in cylinder, and insert the ST1 into valve valve and valve seat after replacing the valve
guide. Press in until the valve guide upper end guide.
is flush with the upper surface of ST2. ST 499767400 VALVE GUIDE REAMER
ST1 499767200 VALVE GUIDE REMOVER
Intake side
ST2 499767700 VALVE GUIDE ADJUSTER
Exhaust side
ST2 499767800 VALVE GUIDE ADJUSTER
ST1
ST2
ME-00294
4. INTAKE AND EXHAUST VALVE

1) Inspect the flange and stem of valve, and re-
place if damaged, worn, or deformed, or if H is out-
ME-00292 side of the specified limit.
(6) Check the valve guide protrusion. H:
Valve guide protrusion L: Intake
Intake Standard:
20.0 — 21.0 mm (0.787 — 0.827 in) 0.8 — 1.2 mm (0.03 — 0.047 in)
Exhaust Exhaust
16.5 — 17.5 mm (0.650 — 0.689 in) Standard:
1.0 — 1.4 mm (0.039 — 0.055 in)
(A)
ME-00293
(A) Valve guide
(7) Ream the inside of valve guide using ST.

Put the ST in valve guide, and rotate the ST
slowly clockwise while pushing it lightly. Bring
the ST back while rotating it clockwise.
NOTE:
• Apply engine oil to the ST when reaming. H
• If the inner surface of valve guide is damaged,
the edge of ST should be slightly ground with oil
stone.
• If the inner surface of valve guide becomes lus- ME-00295
trous and the ST does not chip, use a new ST or
remedy the ST.
(8) After reaming, clean the valve guide to re-
move chips.
ME(H4SO)-60
Cylinder Head
MECHANICAL
2) Put a small amount of grinding compound on the 3) Using the ST2, press in the oil seal.
seat surface, and lap the valve and seat surface. ST1 498267800 CYLINDER HEAD TABLE
Replace with a new valve oil seal after lapping. ST2 498857100 VALVE OIL SEAL GUIDE
NOTE: NOTE:
It is possible to differentiate between the intake • Apply engine oil to oil seal before press-fitting.
valve and the exhaust valve by their overall length. • When press-fitting the oil seal, do not use a ham-
Valve overall length: mer or strike in.
Intake • The intake valve oil seal and exhaust valve oil
120.6 mm (4.75 in) seal can be distinguished by colors.
Exhaust Color of rubber part:
121.7 mm (4.79 in) Intake [Gray]
Exhaust [Green]
5. VALVE SPRING
1) Check the valve springs for damage, free length,
and tension. Replace the valve spring if it is not ST2
within the standard value presented in the table.
2) To measure the squareness of the valve spring,
stand the spring on a surface plate and measure its ST1
deflection at the top of spring using a try square.
Free length
55.2 (2.173)
mm (in)
235.3 — 270.7 (24 — 27.6,
Set ME-00284
Tension/spring 52.9 — 60.8)/45.0 (1.772)
height N 578.9 — 639.9
(kgf, lb)/mm (in) Lift (59.1 — 65.3, 130.3 — 143.9)/
34.7 (1.366)
Squareness 2.5°, 2.4 mm (0.094 in) or less
ME-00283
6. INTAKE AND EXHAUST VALVE OIL

SEAL
1) For the following, remove the oil seal from the
valve guide and replace it with a new part.
• When the lip is damaged.
• When the spring is out of the specified position.
• When readjusting the surfaces of valve and
valve seat.
• When replacing the valve guide.
2) Place the cylinder head on ST1.
ME(H4SO)-61
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
21.Cylinder Block 12) Remove the bolts (a) and (d) to remove cylin-
der head.
A: REMOVAL (d) (f)
(a)
NOTE:
Before conducting this procedure, drain the engine
oil completely. (A)
1) Remove the intake manifold. <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-12, REMOVAL, Intake Manifold.>
REMOVAL, V-belt.>
(c)
(b) (e)
39, REMOVAL, Crank Pulley.> ME-02720
ME(H4SO)-40, REMOVAL, Timing Belt Cover.> (A) Front side
REMOVAL, Timing Belt.> 13) Remove the cylinder head gasket.
6) Remove the cam sprocket. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)- NOTE:
46, REMOVAL, Cam Sprocket.> Do not scratch the mating surface of cylinder head
7) Remove the crank sprocket. <Ref. to and cylinder block.
ME(H4SO)-47, REMOVAL, Crank Sprocket.> 14) Similarly, remove the right side cylinder head.
8) Remove the generator and A/C compressor with 15) Remove the clutch cover. (MT model)
their brackets. 16) Remove the flywheel (MT model) or drive plate
9) Remove the rocker cover. (AT model).
10) Remove the cylinder head bolts in alphabetical Using the ST, lock the crankshaft.
order shown in the figure. ST 498497100 CRANKSHAFT STOPPER
NOTE: • MT model
Leave bolts (a) and (d) engaged by three or four
threads to prevent the cylinder head from falling.
(d) (f)
(a)
(A)
ST
ME-00297
(c)
• AT model
(b) (e)
ME-02720
(A) Front side
11) While tapping the cylinder head with a plastic

hammer, separate it from cylinder block.
ME-00298
17) Remove the oil separator cover.

18) Remove the water by-pass pipe for heater.
ME(H4SO)-62
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
19) Remove the water pump after loosening the 22) Remove the oil pan.
bolts in alphabetical sequence as shown in the fig- (1) Set the part so that the cylinder block (LH) is
ure. on the upper side.
(B)
(2) Remove the bolts which secure oil pan to
(C) cylinder block.
(A) (3) Insert an oil pan cutter blade between cylin-
(D) der block-to-oil pan clearance and remove the
oil pan.
(E) (F) CAUTION:
Do not use a screwdriver or similar tools in
place of oil pan cutter.
23) Remove the oil strainer stay.
ME-02463 24) Remove the oil strainer.
20) Remove the bolts which install oil pump onto 25) Remove the baffle plate.
cylinder block. 26) Remove the oil filter. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-19,
REMOVAL, Engine Oil Filter.>
NOTE:
When disassembling and checking the oil pump,
loosen the relief valve plug before removing the oil
pump.
LU-00015
21) Remove the oil pump from cylinder block using

a flat tip screwdriver.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch the mating surface of
cylinder block and oil pump.
ME-00138
ME(H4SO)-63
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
27) Remove the water pipe.
ME-00300
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(6)
(4)
(5)
(3)
(4)
(3)
(2)
(1)
(8)
(4)
(7)
(3)
(2)
(1)
ME-02889
(1) Service hole plug (4) Piston pin (7) Seal washer
(2) Gasket (5) Service hole cover (8) Washer
(3) Snap ring (6) O-ring
28) Remove the service hole plug using a hexagon 30) Rotate the crankshaft to bring #1 and #2 pis-
wrench (14 mm). tons to bottom dead center position, then remove
the piston snap ring through service hole of #1 and
#2 cylinders.
ME-00140

ME-00141
ME(H4SO)-64
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
31) Draw out the piston pin from #1 and #2 pistons 32) Similarly remove the piston pins from #3 and #4
using ST. pistons.
ST 499097700 PISTON PIN REMOVER 33) Remove the cylinder block connecting bolt on
NOTE: the RH side.
Be careful not to confuse the original combination 34) Loosen the cylinder block connecting bolt on
of piston, piston pin and cylinder. the LH side by 2-3 turns.
35) Set the part so that the cylinder block (LH) is on
the upper side, and remove the cylinder block con-
necting bolt.
ST 36) Separate the cylinder block (RH) and (LH).
NOTE:
When separating the cylinder block, do not allow
the connecting rod to fall or damage the cylinder
block.
ME-00142
(5)
(7)
(1)
(4)
(2)
(6) (4)
(3)
(1)
(5)
ME-02890
(1) Cylinder block (4) Crankshaft bearing (6) Seal washer

(2) Rear oil seal (5) Piston (7) Washer
(3) Crankshaft
37) Remove the rear oil seal. 40) Draw out each piston from cylinder block using
38) Remove the crankshaft along with the connect- wooden bar or hammer handle.
ing rods. NOTE:
39) Remove the crankshaft bearings from cylinder Do not confuse the combination of piston and cylin-
block using a hammer handle. der.
NOTE:
Do not confuse the combination of crankshaft bear-
ings. Press the bearing at the end opposite to lock-
ing lip.
ME(H4SO)-65
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
B: INSTALLATION
(6)
(5)
(4)
(1) (7)
(3)
(7) (3)
(2)
(6)
(7)
(6)
ME-03186
(1) Crankshaft bearing (4) Rear oil seal (6) Seal washer
(2) Crankshaft (5) O-ring (7) Washer
(3) Cylinder block
1) Remove oil on the mating surface of cylinder 3) Apply liquid gasket to the mating surfaces of cyl-
block before installation. Apply a coat of engine oil inder block (RH), and position the cylinder block
to the bearing and crankshaft journal. (LH).
2) Position the crankshaft and O-ring on the cylin- Liquid gasket:
der block (RH).
equivalent
NOTE:
Do not allow liquid gasket to jut into O-ring grooves,
oil passages, bearing grooves, etc.
ME-00145
ME(H4SO)-66
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
4) Apply a coat of engine oil to the washer and bolt 8) Tighten the RH side cylinder block connecting
thread. bolts (E — J) further in alphabetical order.
NOTE: Tightening torque:
Use a new seal washer. 18 N·m (1.8 kgf-m, 13 ft-lb)
5) Tighten the 10 mm cylinder block connecting
bolts on the LH side (A — D) in alphabetical order.
Tightening torque: (E) (J)
10 N·m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 ft-lb)
(G)
(A)
(H)
(D) (I) (F)
ME-02987
9) Tighten the LH side cylinder block connecting

(B) bolts (A — D) further in alphabetical order.
(C) • (A), (C): Angle tightening
ME-02988
Tightening angle:
6) Tighten the 10 mm cylinder block connecting 90°
bolts on the RH side (E — J) in alphabetical order. • (B), (D): Torque tightening
10 N·m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 ft-lb) 40 N·m (4.1 kgf-m, 29.6 ft-lb)
(E) (J) (A)
(G) (D)
(B)
(H)
(I) (F) (C)
ME-02987 ME-02988
7) Tighten the LH side cylinder block connecting 10) Tighten the RH side cylinder block connecting
bolts (A — D) further in alphabetical order. bolts (E — J) in alphabetical order.
Tightening torque: Tightening angle:
18 N·m (1.8 kgf-m, 13 ft-lb) 90°
(A) (E) (J)

(D) (G)
(B)
(C) (H)
(I) (F)
ME-02988 ME-02987
ME(H4SO)-67
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
11) Tighten the 8 mm and 6 mm cylinder block con- 14) Position the second ring gap at 180° on the re-
necting bolts on LH side (A — H) in alphabetical se- verse side the top ring gap.
quence. NOTE:
Tightening torque: Assemble so that the piston ring mark “R” faces the
(A) — (G): 25 N·m (2.5 kgf-m, 18.1 ft-lb) top side of the piston.
(H): 6.4 N·m (0.65 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
180 180
(G)
(C) (A) (B)

(E)
(B) (A) (A) (B)
RH LH
ME-02721
(D) (F)
(H) ME-00147 15) Position the upper rail gap at (C) in the figure.
12) Apply a coat of engine oil to the oil seal periph-
ery, then install the rear oil seal using ST1 and ST2.
(C)
NOTE:
Use new rear oil seal. 25
ST1 499597100 OIL SEAL GUIDE
ST2 499587200 OIL SEAL INSTALLER 25
(C)
(B) (A)
RH LH
ST2
ME-02722
16) Align the upper rail spin stopper (E) to the side
hole (D) on the piston.
(D) (E)
ST1
ME-00148
(A) Rear oil seal

(B) Flywheel attaching bolt
13) Position the top ring gap at (A) or (B) in the fig-
ure.
ME-02471
NOTE:
17) Position the expander gap at (F) in the figure.
Assemble so that the piston ring mark “R” faces the
top side of the piston.
180
(F) (C)
(C) (F)
180
RH LH
ME-02723
ME(H4SO)-68
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
18) Position the lower rail gap at (G) in the figure. 19) Install the snap ring.
Before installing the piston to the cylinder block, in-
120 stall the snap rings to the piston holes on the oppo-
(G) site side of the service holes on the cylinder block.
(C)
NOTE:
Use new snap rings.
#3
(C)
(G)
120
RH LH
#1
ME-02724
NOTE: #4
• Make sure ring gaps do not face the same direc-
tion.
• Make sure ring gaps are not within the piston
(A) #2
skirt area. ME-00306
(A) Front side
(5) T
(4)
(5)
(1)
(3) (4)
(3)
(2)
(2)
(1)
ME-02426
(1) Piston (4) Gasket Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)

(2) Piston pin (5) Service hole plug T: 70 (7.1, 50.6)
(3) Snap ring
20) Install the piston.
(1) Set the parts so that the #1 and #2 cylinders
are on the upper side.
(2) Using the ST1, turn the crankshaft so that
#1 and #2 connecting rods are set at bottom
dead center.
ST1 499987500 CRANKSHAFT SOCKET
ME(H4SO)-69
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
(3) Apply a coat of engine oil to the pistons and (4) Install the snap ring.
cylinders and insert pistons in their cylinders us- NOTE:
ing ST2.
Use new snap rings.
ST2 498747300 PISTON GUIDE
ST1
ST2
ME-00159
ME-00157
(5) Apply liquid gasket to the threaded portion
CAUTION: of the service hole plug.
Piston front mark faces towards the front of en-
gine. Liquid gasket:
equivalent
RH (A) LH
ME-02725
(A) Front mark ME-00160
21) Install the piston pin.

(1) Apply a coat of engine oil to ST3.
(2) Insert ST3 into the service hole to align pis-
ton pin hole with connecting rod small end.
ST3 499017100 PISTON PIN GUIDE
ST1
ST3
ME-00158
(3) Apply a coat of engine oil to piston pin, and

insert the piston pin into piston and connecting
rod through service hole.
ME(H4SO)-70
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
(6) Install the service hole plug and gasket.

NOTE:
Use a new gasket.
ME-00140
(5) T2 T1
(6)
(3) (4)
(2) (7)
(1)
(3)
(2)
(1)
ME-02394
(1) Piston (5) Service hole plug Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(2) Piston pin (6) Service hole cover T1: 6.4 (0.65, 4.7)
(3) Snap ring (7) O-ring T2: 70 (7.1, 50.6)
(4) Gasket
(7) Set the parts so that the #3 and #4 cylinders
are on the upper side. Following the same pro-
cedures as used for #1 and #2 cylinders, install
the pistons and piston pins.
ME(H4SO)-71
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
22) Install the water pipe. 27) Apply liquid gasket to the mating surfaces and
the threaded portion of bolt (A) shown in the figure
Tightening torque:
(when reusing the bolt), and then install the oil sep-
6.4 N·m (0.65 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
arator cover.
NOTE:
Install within 5 min. after applying liquid gasket.
Liquid gasket:
• Mating surface
THREE BOND 1217G or equivalent
• (A) bolt threads (when reusing bolts)
equivalent
ME-00300
Tightening torque:
23) Install the baffle plate. 6.4 N·m (0.65 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
Tightening torque: (A)
6.4 N·m (0.65 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
24) Install the O-ring to the oil strainer, then install it
to the cylinder block.
Tightening torque:
10 N·m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.4 ft-lb)
25) Install the oil strainer stay.
Tighten the oil strainer together with the baffle
plate.
ME-02452
Tightening torque: 28) Install the flywheel. (MT model)
6.4 N·m (0.65 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb) <Ref. to CL-16, INSTALLATION, Flywheel.>
26) Apply liquid gasket to the mating surfaces, and To lock the crankshaft, use the ST.
install the oil pan. ST 498497100 CRANKSHAFT STOPPER
NOTE:
Tightening torque:
72 N·m (7.3 kgf-m, 52.8 ft-lb)
Liquid gasket:
THREE BOND 1207C (Part No. 004403012) or
equivalent
Tightening torque:
5 N·m (0.5 kgf-m, 3.6 ft-lb)
ST
ME-00297
ME-00162
ME(H4SO)-72
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
29) Install the drive plate. (AT model) (3) Apply a coat of engine oil to the inside of oil
To lock the crankshaft, use the ST. seal.
ST 498497100 CRANKSHAFT STOPPER
Tightening torque:
72 N·m (7.3 kgf-m, 52.8 ft-lb)
ME-00312
(4) Install the oil pump to cylinder block. Be

careful not to damage the oil seal during instal-
ME-00298 lation.
30) Install the clutch cover. (MT model) NOTE:
31) Installation of oil pump: • Make sure the oil seal lip is not folded.
(1) Replace the front oil seal with a new part us- • Align the flat surface of oil pump’s inner rotor with
ing ST. crankshaft before installation.
ST 499587100 OIL SEAL INSTALLER • Use new O-rings and oil seals.
(5) Apply liquid gasket to the three bolts thread
shown in figure. (when reusing bolts)
Liquid gasket:
equivalent
Tightening torque:
T: 6.4 N·m (0.65 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
ME-00164
(2) Apply liquid gasket to the matching surface

of oil pump.
Liquid gasket:
equivalent
T
LU-02103
(A)
ME-00165
(A) O-ring
ME(H4SO)-73
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
32) Install the water pump and gasket.

Tightening torque:
First: 12 N·m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.7 ft-lb)
Second: 12 N·m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.7 ft-lb)
NOTE:
• When installing the water pump, tighten bolts in
two stages in alphabetical order as shown in the
figure.
(B)
(C)
(A)
(D)
(E) (F)
ME-02463
33) Install the water by-pass pipe for heater.

34) Install the oil filter.
<Ref. to LU(H4SO)-19, INSTALLATION, Engine
Oil Filter.>
35) Tighten the cylinder head bolts. <Ref. to
ME(H4SO)-55, INSTALLATION, Cylinder Head.>
36) Install the oil level gauge guide and tighten the
bolts. (LH side only)
<Ref. to ME(H4SO)-47, INSTALLATION, Crank
Sprocket.>
38) Install the cam sprocket. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-
46, INSTALLATION, Cam Sprocket.>
40) Adjust the valve clearance. <Ref. to
ME(H4SO)-28, ADJUSTMENT, Valve Clearance.>
41) Install the rocker cover gasket to the rocker
cover, install it to the cylinder head, and then con-
nect the PCV hose.
NOTE:
Use a new gasket.
Belt Cover.>
44) Install the generator and A/C compressor
brackets on cylinder head.
<Ref. to FU(H4SO)-13, INSTALLATION, Intake
Manifold.>
ME(H4SO)-74
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
C: DISASSEMBLY
(1)
(2)
(2)
(5)
(4)
(3)
(6)
ME-02411
(1) Connecting rod cap (3) Top ring (5) Oil ring
(2) Connecting rod bearing (4) Second ring (6) Snap ring
1) Remove the connecting rod cap.
2) Remove the connecting rod bearing.
NOTE:
Arrange the removed connecting rod, connecting
rod cap and bearing in order, to prevent confusion.
3) Remove the piston rings using piston ring ex-
pander.
4) Remove the oil ring by hand.
NOTE:
Arrange the removed piston rings in proper order,
to prevent confusion.
5) Remove the snap ring.
ME(H4SO)-75
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
D: ASSEMBLY
(3)
T (1)
(1)
(2)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(8)
(7)
ME-03154
(1) Connecting rod bearing (5) Second ring Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(2) Connecting rod (6) Top ring T: 45 (4.6, 33.3)
(3) Connecting rod cap (7) Snap ring
(4) Oil ring (8) Side mark
1) Apply oil to the surfaces of the connecting rod E: INSPECTION
bearings.
2) Install the connecting rod bearings on connect- 1. CYLINDER BLOCK
ing rods and connecting rod caps. 1) Check for cracks or damage. Use liquid pene-
3) Position each connecting rod with the marking trant tester on the important sections to check for
side facing forward, and install it. fissures. Check that there are no marks of gas leak-
4) Install the connecting rod cap with connecting ing or water leaking on gasket installing surface.
rod nut. 2) Check the oil passages for clogging.
Make sure the arrow on connecting rod cap faces 3) Inspect the cylinder block surface that mates
toward front during installation. with cylinder head for warping by using a straight
NOTE: edge, and correct by grinding if necessary.
• Each connecting rod has its own mating cap. Warping limit:
Make sure that they are assembled correctly by 0.025 mm (0.00098 in)
checking their matching number.
• When tightening the connecting rod nuts, apply Grinding limit:
oil on the threads. 0.1 mm (0.004 in)
5) Install the expander, lower rail and upper rail by Standard height of cylinder block:
hand. Install the second ring and top ring using pis- 201.0 mm (7.91 in)
ton ring expander.
ME(H4SO)-76
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
2. CYLINDER AND PISTON 2) How to measure the inner diameter of each cyl-
1) The cylinder bore size is stamped on the front inder
upper face of the cylinder block. Measure the inner diameter of each cylinder in both
the thrust and piston pin directions at the heights as
NOTE: shown in the figure, using a cylinder bore gauge.
• Measurement should be performed at a temper-
ature of 20°C (68°F). NOTE:
• Standard sized pistons are classified into two Measurement should be performed at a tempera-
grades, “A” and “B”. These grades should be used ture of 20°C (68°F).
as guide lines in selecting a standard piston. Taper:
Standard diameter: Standard:
A: 99.505 — 99.515 mm (3.9175 — 3.9179 in) 0.015 mm (0.0006 in)
B: 99.495 — 99.505 mm (3.9171 — 3.9175 in) Out-of-roundness:
Standard:
0.010 mm (0.0004 in)
(A) (B)
(A) (B)
#5
4
#4
5
#3 H1
#2 (F) H2
B
#1 (D) H3
A
H4
(E) (C)
ME-00170
(A) Main journal size mark

ME-00171
(B) Cylinder block (RH) —(LH) combination mark
(C) #1 cylinder bore size mark (A) Piston pin direction
(D) #2 cylinder bore size mark (B) Thrust direction
(E) #3 cylinder bore size mark H1 10 mm (0.39 in)
(F) #4 cylinder bore size mark H2 45 mm (1.77 in)
H3 80 mm (3.15 in)
H4 115 mm (4.53 in)
3) When the piston is to be replaced due to general

or cylinder wear, determine a suitable sized piston
by measuring the piston clearance.
ME(H4SO)-77
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
4) How to measure the outer diameter of each cyl- (2) If the cylinder inner diameter exceeds the
inder: limit after boring and honing, replace the cylin-
Measure the outer diameter of each piston at the der block.
height as shown in the figure. (Thrust direction) NOTE:
NOTE: Immediately after reboring, the cylinder diameter
Measurement should be performed at a tempera- may differ from its real diameter due to temperature
ture of 20°C (68°F). rise. Thus, pay attention when measuring the cylin-
der diameter.
Piston grade point H:
38.2 mm (1.504 in) Cylinder inner diameter boring limit (diameter):
100.005 mm (3.9372 in)
Standard:
A: 99.505 — 99.515 mm (3.9175 — 3.9179 in) 3. PISTON AND PISTON PIN
B: 99.495 — 99.505 mm (3.9171 — 3.9175 in) 1) Check the piston and piston pin for breaks,
0.25 mm (0.0098 in) oversize: cracks or wear. Replace if faulty.
99.745 — 99.765 mm (3.9270 — 3.9278 in) 2) Check the piston ring groove for wear and dam-
age. Replace if faulty.
0.50 mm (0.0197 in) oversize: 3) Make sure that the piston pin can be inserted
99.995 — 100.015 mm (3.9368 — 3.9376 in) into the piston pin hole with a finger at 20°C (68°F).
Replace if faulty.
Clearance between piston hole and piston pin:
Standard:
0.004 — 0.008 mm (0.0002 — 0.0003 in)
ME-00172
5) Calculate the clearance between cylinder and

piston.
NOTE:
Measurement should be performed at a tempera- ME-00173
ture of 20°C (68°F).
Cylinder to piston clearance at 20°C (68°F):
Standard:
–0.010 — 0.010 mm (–0.00039 — 0.00039 in)
6) Boring and honing
(1) If any of the measured value of taper, out-of-
roundness or cylinder-to-piston clearance is out
of standard or if there is any damage on the cyl-
inder wall, rebore it to replace with an oversize
piston. ME-00174
CAUTION:
• When any of the cylinders needs reboring,
other cylinders must be bored at the same time,
and replaced with oversize pistons.
• Do not perform boring on one cylinder only.
Do not replace only a single cylinder for an
oversize piston.
ME(H4SO)-78
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
4) Check the snap ring installation groove (A) on 2) Clean the piston ring groove and piston ring.
the piston for burr. If necessary, remove burr from 3) Squarely place the piston ring and oil ring in cyl-
the groove so that the piston pin can lightly move. inder, and measure the piston ring gap with a thick-
ness gauge.
mm (in)
Standard
(A)
0.20 — 0.35
Top ring
(0.0079 — 0.0138)
Piston ring Second 0.37 — 0.52
gap ring (0.0144 — 0.0203)
0.20 — 0.50
Oil ring rail
(0.0079 — 0.0197)
ME-00175
5) Check the piston pin snap ring for distortion,

cracks and wear.
4. PISTON RING
1) If the piston ring is broken, damaged or worn, or
if its tension is insufficient, or when the piston is re-
placed, replace the piston ring with a new part of
the same size as the piston.
NOTE:
• The top ring and second ring have the mark to ME-00177
determine the direction to install on them. When in- 4) Measure the clearance between piston ring and
stalling them to piston, face this mark to the top piston ring groove with a thickness gauge.
side.
• Oil ring consists of the upper rail, expander and NOTE:
lower rail. Be careful about the direction of rail Before measuring the clearance, clean the piston
when installing the oil ring to piston. ring groove and piston ring.
mm (in)
Standard
Clearance 0.040 — 0.080
Top ring
(A) between (0.0016 — 0.0031)
piston ring
and piston Second 0.030 — 0.070
(B)
ring groove ring (0.0012 — 0.0028)
(C)
(A)
(B)
(C)
ME-00178
ME-02472
(A) Upper rail

(B) Expander
(C) Lower rail
ME(H4SO)-79
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
5. CONNECTING ROD 5) Measure the oil clearance on each connecting

1) Replace the connecting rod, if the large or small rod bearing using plastigauge. If any oil clearance
end thrust surface is damaged. is not within the standard, replace the defective
2) Check for bend or twist using a connecting rod bearing with a new part of standard size or under-
aligner. Replace the connecting rod if the bend or size as necessary. (See the table below.)
twist exceeds the limit. Connecting rod oil clearance:
Limit of bend or twist per 100 mm (3.94 in) in Standard:
length: 0.016 — 0.044 mm (0.00063 — 0.0017 in)
0.10 mm (0.0039 in) Unit: mm (in)
Bearing size Outer diameter of
Bearing
(A) (Thickness at center) crank pin
1.492 — 1.501 51.984 — 52.000
Standard
(0.0587 — 0.0591) (2.0466 — 2.0472)
0.03
(B) 1.510 — 1.513 51.954 — 51.970
(0.0012)
(0.0594 — 0.0596) (2.0454 — 2.0461)
Undersize
0.05
1.520 — 1.523 51.934 — 51.950
(0.0020)
(0.0598 — 0.0600) (2.0446 — 2.0453)
Undersize
0.25
1.620 — 1.623 51.734 — 51.750
(0.0098)
(0.0638 — 0.0639) (2.0368 — 2.0374)
Undersize
6) Inspect the bushing at connecting rod small end,

(A) and replace if worn or damaged.
7) Measure the piston pin clearance at connecting
rod small end. If the measured value is not within
(B) the standard, replace it with a new part.
Clearance between piston pin and bushing:
Standard:
ME-00179 0 — 0.022 mm (0 — 0.0009 in)
(A) Thickness gauge
(B) Connecting rod
3) Install the connecting rod fitted with bearing to

crankshaft and measure the thrust clearance. Re-
place the connecting rod if the thrust clearance ex-
ceeds the standard.
Connecting rod thrust clearance:
Standard:
ME-00181
0.070 — 0.330 mm (0.0028 — 0.0130 in)
ME-00180 ME-00174
4) Inspect the connecting rod bearing for scar,

peeling, seizure, melting, wear, etc.
ME(H4SO)-80
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
8) The replacement procedure for the connecting 3) Inspect the crank journal and crank pin for wear.
rod small end bushing is as follows. If they are not within the standard, replace the bear-
(1) Remove the bushing from connecting rod ing with a suitable (undersize) one, and replace or
with ST and press. readjust crankshaft as necessary. When grinding
(2) Press the bushing with the ST after applying the crank journal or crank pin, finish them to the
oil on the periphery of new bushing. specified dimensions according to the undersize
ST 499037100 CONNECTING ROD BUSH- bearing to be used.
ING REMOVER AND IN- Crank pin
STALLER Out-of-roundness:
0.003 mm (0.0001 in)
Cylindricality:
ST 0.004 mm (0.0002 in)
Grinding limit:
To 51.750 mm (2.0374 in) dia.
Crank journal
Out-of-roundness:
0.005 mm (0.0002 in)
ME-00182
Cylindricality:
0.006 mm (0.0002 in)
(3) Make two 3 mm (0.12 in) holes in the Grinding limit:
pressed bushing by aligning with the pre-manu- To 59.758 mm (2.3527 in) dia.
factured holes on the connecting rod. Then,
ream the inside of bushing.
(4) After completion of reaming, clean the bush-
ing to remove chips.
6. CRANKSHAFT AND CRANKSHAFT
BEARING
1) Clean the crankshaft completely, and check it for
cracks using liquid penetrant tester. Replace if
faulty.
2) Measure the bend of crankshaft. If it exceeds the ME-00184
limit, correct or replace it.
NOTE:
If a suitable V-block is not available, install #1 and
#5 crankshaft bearing on cylinder block, position
the crankshaft on these bearings, and then mea-
sure the crankshaft bend using a dial gauge.
Crankshaft bend limit:
0.035 mm (0.0014 in)
ME-00183
ME(H4SO)-81
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
Unit: mm (in)
Crank journal outer diameter
Crank pin outer diameter
#1, #3 #2, #4, #5
59.992 — 60.008 59.992 — 60.008 51.984 — 52.000
Journal O.D.
(2.3619 — 2.3625) (2.3619 — 2.3625) (2.0466 — 2.0472)
Standard
Bearing size 1.998 — 2.011 2.000 — 2.013 1.492 — 1.501
(Thickness at center) (0.0787 — 0.0792) (0.0787 — 0.0793) (0.0587 — 0.0591)
59.962 — 59.978 59.962 — 59.978 51.954 — 51.970
Journal O.D.
0.03 (0.0012) (2.3607 — 2.3613) (2.3607 — 2.3613) (2.0454 — 2.0461)
Undersize Bearing size 2.017 — 2.020 2.019 — 2.022 1.510 — 1.513
59.942 — 59.958 59.942 — 59.958 51.934 — 51.950
Journal O.D.
0.05 (0.0020) (2.3599 — 2.3605) (2.3599 — 2.3605) (2.0446 — 2.0453)
59.742 — 59.758 59.742 — 59.758 51.734 — 51.750
Journal O.D.
0.25 (0.0098) (2.3520 — 2.3527) (2.3520 — 2.3527) (2.0368 — 2.0374)
4) Measure the thrust clearance of crankshaft at
center bearing by using thickness gauge. If the
thurst clearance is not within the standard, replace
the bearing.
Crankshaft thrust clearance:
Standard:
0.030 — 0.115 mm (0.0012 — 0.0045 in)
ME-00322
5) Inspect individual crankshaft bearings for signs

of flaking, seizure, melting and wear.
6) Measure the oil clearance on each crankshaft
bearing using plastigauge. If the measured value is
out of standard, replace the defective bearing with
an undersize one, and replace or grind to correct
the crankshaft as necessary.
Crankshaft oil clearance:
Standard:
0.010 — 0.030 mm (0.0004 — 0.0012 in)
ME(H4SO)-82
Oil Switching Solenoid Valve

MECHANICAL
22.Oil Switching Solenoid Valve 8) Remove the oil switching solenoid valve holder
from the cylinder head.
A: REMOVAL (A) (C)
(B)
1. RH SIDE
(D)
(E)
ME-02726
(A) Oil switching solenoid valve

(B) Variable valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch
IN-00203 (C) Oil temperature sensor
2) Remove the air intake chamber. (D) Oil switching solenoid valve holder
<Ref. to IN(H4SO)-7, REMOVAL, Air Intake Cham- (E) Gasket
ber.>
3) Remove the engine harness connector from the 2. LH SIDE
bracket. 1) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery.
ME-02697 IN-00203
4) Disconnect the connector from the oil switching 2) Remove the V-belts.
solenoid valve. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-37, REMOVAL, V-belt.>
5) Remove the oil switching solenoid valve. 3) Remove the crank pulley.
6) Remove the variable valve lift diagnosis oil pres- <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-39, REMOVAL, Crank Pul-
sure switch. ley.>
<Ref. to FU(H4SO)-31, REMOVAL, Variable Valve 4) Remove the timing belt cover.
Lift Diagnosis Oil Pressure Switch.> <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-40, REMOVAL, Timing Belt
7) Remove the oil temperature sensor. Cover.>
<Ref. to FU(H4SO)-32, REMOVAL, Oil Tempera- 5) Remove the timing belt.
ture Sensor.> <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-41, REMOVAL, Timing Belt.>
6) Remove the cam sprocket.
<Ref. to ME(H4SO)-46, REMOVAL, Cam Sprock-
et.>
7) Remove the timing belt cover No. 2 (LH).
8) Disconnect the connector from the oil switching
solenoid valve.
9) Remove the oil switching solenoid valve.
10) Remove the variable valve lift diagnosis oil
pressure switch.
<Ref. to FU(H4SO)-31, REMOVAL, Variable Valve
Lift Diagnosis Oil Pressure Switch.>
ME(H4SO)-83
Oil Switching Solenoid Valve

MECHANICAL
11) Remove the oil switching solenoid valve holder Liquid gasket
from the cylinder head. THREE BOND 1324 (Part No. 004403042)
(B) (A) (C)
T1
T4
(B)
T2
T3
(D)
(E)
(D)
(C) (A) ME-02727 ME-03002
(A) Oil switching solenoid valve (A) Oil switching solenoid valve
(B) Variable valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch (B) Variable valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch
(C) Oil switching solenoid valve holder (C) Oil temperature sensor
(D) Gasket (D) Oil switching solenoid valve holder
(E) Gasket
B: INSTALLATION
2. LH SIDE
1. RH SIDE
NOTE:
NOTE:
• Apply liquid gasket to variable valve lift diagnosis
• Apply liquid gasket to variable valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch threads.
oil pressure switch threads. • Install the oil switching solenoid valve to the
• Install the oil switching solenoid valve to the holder, then install it to the cylinder head.
holder, then install it to the cylinder head.
Tightening torque:
Tightening torque:
T1
T1
8 N·m (0.8 kgf-m, 5.9 ft-lb)
8 N·m (0.8 kgf-m, 5.9 ft-lb) T2
T2
10 N·m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.4 ft-lb)
10 N·m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.4 ft-lb)
T3
T3 17 N·m (1.7 kgf-m, 12.5 ft-lb)
17 N·m (1.7 kgf-m, 12.5 ft-lb)
T4 Liquid gasket
18 N·m (1.8 kgf-m, 13.3 ft-lb) THREE BOND 1324 (Part No. 004403042)
(B)
T3
T2
(D)
(C) (A) T1
ME-03003
(A) Oil switching solenoid valve

(B) Variable valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch
(C) Oil switching solenoid valve holder
(D) Gasket
ME(H4SO)-84
Intake and Exhaust Valve

MECHANICAL
23.Intake and Exhaust Valve

A: SPECIFICATION
Refer to “Cylinder Head” for removal and installa-
tion procedures of intake and exhaust valves. <Ref.
to ME(H4SO)-55, REMOVAL, Cylinder Head.>
<Ref. to ME(H4SO)-55, INSTALLATION, Cylinder
Head.>
ME(H4SO)-85
Piston
MECHANICAL
24.Piston
A: SPECIFICATION
Refer to “Cylinder Block” for removal and installa-
tion procedures of pistons. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-62,
REMOVAL, Cylinder Block.> <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-
66, INSTALLATION, Cylinder Block.>
ME(H4SO)-86
Connecting Rod
MECHANICAL
25.Connecting Rod
A: SPECIFICATION
tion procedures of connecting rod.
<Ref. to ME(H4SO)-62, REMOVAL, Cylinder
Block.> <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-66, INSTALLATION,
Cylinder Block.>
ME(H4SO)-87
Crankshaft
MECHANICAL
26.Crankshaft
A: SPECIFICATION
tion procedures of the crankshaft. <Ref. to
ME(H4SO)-62, REMOVAL, Cylinder Block.> <Ref.
to ME(H4SO)-66, INSTALLATION, Cylinder
Block.>
ME(H4SO)-88
Engine Trouble in General

MECHANICAL
27.Engine Trouble in General

A: INSPECTION
NOTE:
The “RANK” shown in the chart shows the possibilities of the cause of trouble in order from “Very often” to
“Rarely”.
A — Very often
B — Sometimes
C — Rarely
Symptoms Problem parts etc. Possible cause RANK
1. Engine does not start.
1) Starter does not turn. Starter Defective battery-to-starter harness B
Defective starter switch C
Defective inhibitor switch C
Defective starter B
Battery Improper connection of the terminal A
Run-down battery A
Defective charging system B
Friction Seizure of crankshaft and connecting rod bearing C
Seized camshaft C
Seized or stuck piston and cylinder C
2) Initial combustion does Starter Defective starter C
not occur. Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
Fuel line Defective fuel pump and relay A
Clogged fuel line B
Lack of or insufficient fuel B
Timing belt Degradation, etc. B
Defective timing B
Compression Incorrect valve clearance C
Loosened spark plug or defective gasket C
Loosened cylinder head bolt or defective gasket C
Improper valve sealing C
Defective valve stem C
Worn or broken valve spring B
Worn or stuck piston rings, cylinder and piston C
Incorrect valve timing B
Improper engine oil (low viscosity) B
ME(H4SO)-89

MECHANICAL

3) Initial combustion occurs. Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
Intake system Defective intake manifold gasket B
Defective throttle body gasket B
Fuel line Defective fuel pump and relay C
Clogged fuel line C
Defective timing B
4) Engine stalls after initial Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
combustion. Intake system Loosened or cracked intake duct B
Loosened or cracked PCV hose C
Loosened or cracked vacuum hose C
Defective intake manifold gasket B
Dirty air cleaner element C
Fuel line Clogged fuel line C
Defective timing B
ME(H4SO)-90

MECHANICAL

2. Rough idle and engine Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
stall Intake system Loosened or cracked intake duct A
Loosened or cracked PCV hose A
Loosened or cracked vacuum hose A
Defective PCV valve C
Loosened oil filler cap B
Clogged fuel line C
Timing belt Defective timing C
Compression Incorrect valve clearance B
Loosened spark plug or defective gasket B
Loosened cylinder head bolt or defective gasket B
Improper valve sealing B
Worn or stuck piston rings, cylinder and piston B
Incorrect valve timing A
Lubrication system Incorrect oil pressure B
Defective rocker cover gasket C
Cooling system Overheating C
Others Evaporative emission control system malfunction A
Stuck or damaged throttle valve B
ME(H4SO)-91

MECHANICAL

3. Low output, hesitation and Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
poor acceleration Intake system Loosened or cracked intake duct A
Loosened or cracked vacuum hose B
Defective PCV valve B
Dirty air cleaner element A
Fuel line Defective fuel pump and relay B
Clogged fuel line B
Lack of or insufficient fuel C
Timing belt Defective timing B
Over-cooling C
4. Surging Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
Intake system Loosened or cracked intake duct A
Dirty air cleaner element B
Clogged fuel line B
Worn or broken valve spring C
Cooling system Overheating B
Others Evaporative emission control system malfunction C
ME(H4SO)-92

MECHANICAL

5. Engine does not return to Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
idle. Intake system Loosened or cracked vacuum hose A
Others Stuck or damaged throttle valve A
6. Dieseling (Run-on) Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
Others Evaporative emission control system malfunction B
7. After burning in exhaust Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
system Intake system Loosened or cracked intake duct C
Loosened oil filler cap C
Lubrication system Incorrect oil pressure C
Cooling system Over-cooling C
8. Knocking Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
Intake system Loosened oil filler cap B
Cooling system Overheating A
9. Excessive engine oil c Intake system Loosened or cracked PCV hose A
onsumption Defective PCV valve B
Compression Defective valve stem A
Worn or stuck piston rings, cylinder and piston A
Lubrication system Loosened oil pump attaching bolts and defective gasket B
Defective oil filter seal B
Defective crankshaft oil seal B
Defective rocker cover gasket B
Loosened oil drain plug or defective gasket B
Loosened oil pan fitting bolts or defective oil pan B
ME(H4SO)-93

MECHANICAL

10. Excessive fuel Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
consumption Intake system Dirty air cleaner element A
ME(H4SO)-94
Engine Noise
MECHANICAL
28.Engine Noise
A: INSPECTION
Type of sound Condition Possible cause
• Valve mechanism is defective.
• Incorrect valve clearance
Sound increases as engine
Regular clicking sound • Worn valve rocker
speed increases.
• Worn camshaft
• Broken valve spring
• Worn crankshaft main bearing
Oil pressure is low.
Heavy and dull clank • Worn connecting rod bearing (large end)
Oil pressure is normal. Damaged engine mounting
• Ignition timing advanced
Sound is noticeable when
High-pitched clank • Accumulation of carbon inside combustion chamber
accelerating with an overload
(Spark knock) • Wrong spark plug
condition.
• Improper gasoline
Sound is reduced when fuel • Worn crankshaft main bearing
Clank when engine speed is injector connector of noisy • Worn connecting rod bearing (large end)
1,000 to 2,000 rpm cylinder is disconnected.
(NOTE*)
Sound is reduced when fuel • Worn cylinder liner and piston ring
injector connector of noisy • Broken or stuck piston ring
Knocking sound when engine cylinder is disconnected. • Worn piston pin and hole at piston end of connecting rod
is operating under idling speed (NOTE*)
and engine is warm Sound is not reduced if each • Worn cam sprocket
fuel injector connector is • Worn camshaft journal bore in cylinder head assembly
disconnected in turn. (NOTE*)
Squeaky sound — Insufficient generator lubrication
Rubbing sound — Poor contact of generator brush and rotor
Gear scream when starting • Defective ignition starter switch
—
engine • Worn gear and starter pinion
Sound like polishing glass with • Loose drive belt
—
a dry cloth • Defective water pump shaft
• Insufficient compression
Hissing sound —
• Air leakage in air intake system, hose, connection or manifold
• Loose timing belt
Timing belt noise —
• Belt contacting with case/adjacent part
Valve noise — Incorrect valve clearance
NOTE*)
When disconnecting the fuel injector connector, the malfunction indicator light illuminates and DTC is stored in ECM memory.
Therefore, perform the Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-53, OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.> and Inspection
Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-44, PROCEDURE, Inspection Mode.> after connecting the fuel injector connector.
ME(H4SO)-95
Engine Noise
MECHANICAL
ME(H4SO)-96
EXHAUST
EX(H4SO)
Page
2. Front Exhaust Pipe .....................................................................................4
3. Center Exhaust Pipe ..................................................................................7
4. Rear Exhaust Pipe .....................................................................................8
5. Muffler ......................................................................................................10
General Description
EXHAUST
A: COMPONENT
(5) (8)
(5) (9)
(7)
(5) (7)
T7
(5)
(6)
(2) (5)
(6)
(1)
T7
(4)
(3)
(12)
T1
T3
(20) (11)
T3
(26)
(30)
(18)
(10)
(25) (24) T2
T5
(13) T1
(14) (15)
(22) T1
(16)
(19) (17)
T1
(21) T6 T1
(22)
(27) T4
T4
T1
(23)
T1
(28)
(29)
T1
EX-02192
EX(H4SO)-2
General Description
EXHAUST
(1) Gasket (16) Rear catalytic converter lower (28) Front exhaust pipe lower cover
(2) Spring cover RH
(3) Chamber (17) Center exhaust pipe front lower (29) Front exhaust pipe lower cover LH
(4) Rear exhaust pipe cover (30) Clamp
(5) Cushion rubber (18) Front oxygen (A/F) sensor
(6) Self-locking nut (19) Front catalytic converter Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(7) Gasket (20) Rear oxygen sensor T1: 13 (1.3, 9.4)
(8) Muffler (RH) (21) Gasket T2: 18 (1.8, 13.0)
(9) Muffler (LH) (22) Gasket T3: 21 (2.1, 15.2)
(10) Center exhaust pipe front upper (23) Front exhaust pipe T4: 30 (3.1, 22.4)
cover (24) Front exhaust pipe upper cover T5: 35 (3.6, 26.0)
(11) Rear catalytic converter upper LH T6: 40 (4.1, 29.5)
cover (25) Front exhaust pipe upper cover T7: 48 (4.9, 35.4)
(12) Center exhaust pipe rear upper RH
cover (26) Front catalytic converter upper
(13) Center exhaust pipe cover
(14) Rear catalytic converter (27) Front catalytic converter lower
(15) Center exhaust pipe rear lower cover
cover
B: CAUTION
forming any work.
points.
the battery.
• If any fat adheres to the exhaust pipe, wipe it off.
Otherwise a fire may happen.
EX(H4SO)-3
Front Exhaust Pipe

EXHAUST
2. Front Exhaust Pipe 7) Remove the nuts which hold front exhaust pipe
onto cylinder heads.
A: REMOVAL CAUTION:
CAUTION: Be careful not to pull down the front and center
Be careful not to burn yourself, because the ex- exhaust pipe assembly.
haust pipe becomes extremely hot after run-
ning.
EX-02122
8) Remove the bolt which holds center exhaust

pipe to hanger bracket.
IN-00203
3) Unclip the clip fastening the harness and discon-

nect the following connectors.
(1) Front oxygen (A/F) sensor connector
(A)
EX-02123
9) Remove the front and center exhaust pipe as-

sembly from the vehicle.
CAUTION:
(B) • The front and center exhaust pipe assem-
FU-02734
blies are very heavy. Be careful not to drop the
exhaust pipes when removing.
(A) Front oxygen (A/F) sensor connector • After removing the front and center exhaust
(B) Rear oxygen sensor connector pipe assemblies, do not pull on the rear ex-
haust pipe with excessive force.
4) Lift up the vehicle. 10) Separate the front exhaust pipe from center ex-
5) Separate the center exhaust pipe from rear exhaust pipe.
haust pipe.
EX-02124
EX-02121 11) Remove the front oxygen (A/F) sensor and rear
6) Remove the under cover. oxygen sensor. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-33, REMOV-
AL, Front Oxygen (A/F) Sensor.> <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-34, REMOVAL, Rear Oxygen Sensor.>
EX(H4SO)-4
Front Exhaust Pipe

EXHAUST
B: INSTALLATION 5) Tighten the bolt which holds the center exhaust

pipe to exhaust pipe.
1) Install the front oxygen (A/F) sensor and rear ox-
ygen sensor to the front exhaust pipe. <Ref. to NOTE:
FU(H4SO)-33, INSTALLATION, Front Oxygen (A/ Use a new gasket.
F) Sensor.> <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-34, INSTALLA-
Tightening torque:
TION, Rear Oxygen Sensor.>
18 N·m (1.8 kgf-m, 13.0 ft-lb)
2) Install the front exhaust pipe to center exhaust
pipe.
NOTE:
Use a new gasket.
Tightening torque:
40 N·m (4.1 kgf-m, 29.5 ft-lb)
EX-02121
6) Tighten the bolt which holds center exhaust pipe

to hanger bracket.
Tightening torque:
35 N·m (3.6 kgf-m, 26.0 ft-lb)
EX-02124
3) Install the front and center exhaust pipe assem-

bly to the vehicle.
NOTE:
Use a new gasket.
4) Temporarily tighten the nuts which hold front ex-
haust pipe to cylinder heads.
EX-02123
7) Tighten the nuts which hold front exhaust pipe to

cylinder heads.
Tightening torque:
30 N·m (3.1 kgf-m, 22.4 ft-lb)
EX-02122
EX-02122

EX(H4SO)-5
Front Exhaust Pipe

EXHAUST

(1) Front oxygen (A/F) sensor connector
(A)
(B)
FU-02734

IN-00203
C: INSPECTION
leaks.
2) Make sure there are no holes or rusting.
EX(H4SO)-6
Center Exhaust Pipe

EXHAUST
3. Center Exhaust Pipe

A: REMOVAL
1) After removing the center and front exhaust
pipes as one unit, separate them. Refer to “Front
Exhaust Pipe” for the removal procedure. <Ref. to
EX(H4SO)-4, REMOVAL, Front Exhaust Pipe.>
2) Remove the front oxygen (A/F) sensor and rear
oxygen sensor. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-33, REMOV-
AL, Front Oxygen (A/F) Sensor.> <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-34, REMOVAL, Rear Oxygen Sensor.>
B: INSTALLATION
1) Install the front oxygen (A/F) sensor and rear ox-
ygen sensor. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-33, INSTALLA-
TION, Front Oxygen (A/F) Sensor.> <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-34, INSTALLATION, Rear Oxygen
Sensor.>
2) Install the center exhaust pipe and front exhaust
pipe as one unit. Refer to “Front Exhaust Pipe” for
the installation procedure. <Ref. to EX(H4SO)-5,
INSTALLATION, Front Exhaust Pipe.>
C: INSPECTION
leaks.
EX(H4SO)-7
Rear Exhaust Pipe

EXHAUST
4. Rear Exhaust Pipe 6) Remove the rear exhaust pipe bracket from
cushion rubber.
A: REMOVAL
CAUTION:
Be careful not to burn yourself, because the ex-
ning.
3) Separate the rear exhaust pipe from center ex-
haust pipe.
EX-00219
B: INSTALLATION
1) Apply a coat of spray type lubricant to the mating
area of cushion rubber.
2) Install the rear exhaust pipe bracket to cushion
rubber.
NOTE:
After assembling, degrease the lubricant which
EX-02140 was applied to the cushion rubber while removing/
installing.
4) Separate the rear exhaust pipe from muffler.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to pull down the rear exhaust
pipe.
• LH side
EX-00219
EX-00222
• RH side
EX-00218

EX(H4SO)-8
Rear Exhaust Pipe

EXHAUST
3) Install the rear exhaust pipe to muffler.

NOTE:
Use a new gasket and self-locking nut.
Tightening torque:
48 N·m (4.9 kgf-m, 35.4 ft-lb)
• LH side
EX-00222
• RH side
EX-00218
4) Install the rear exhaust pipe to center exhaust

pipe.
Tightening torque:
18 N·m (1.8 kgf-m, 13.0 ft-lb)
EX-02140
C: INSPECTION
leaks.
3) Check the cushion rubber for wear or crack.
EX(H4SO)-9
Muffler
EXHAUST
5. Muffler • RH side
A: REMOVAL
CAUTION:
ning.
3) Separate the muffler from rear exhaust pipe.
• LH side EX-00221
5) Remove the front and rear cushion rubber, and

then remove the muffler.
B: INSTALLATION
NOTE:
• Use a new gasket and self-locking nut.
• After assembling, degrease the lubricant which
was applied to the cushion rubber while removing/
EX-00222 installing.
• RH side Tightening torque:
48 N·m (4.9 kgf-m, 35.4 ft-lb)
• LH side
EX-00218

area of cushion rubber. EX-00222
• LH side • RH side
EX-00220 EX-00218
C: INSPECTION
leaks.
EX(H4SO)-10
COOLING
CO(H4SO)
Page
2. Radiator Fan System .................................................................................7
3. Engine Coolant .........................................................................................12
4. Water Pump .............................................................................................14
5. Thermostat ...............................................................................................17
6. Radiator ....................................................................................................19
7. Radiator Cap ............................................................................................23
8. Radiator Main Fan and Fan Motor ...........................................................24
9. Radiator Sub Fan and Fan Motor .............................................................26
10. Reservoir Tank .........................................................................................28
11. Engine Cooling System Trouble in General .............................................29
General Description
COOLING
A: SPECIFICATION
Cooling system Electric fan + Forced engine coolant circulation system
MT: approx. 6.4 (6.8, 5.6)
Total engine coolant capacity 2 (US qt, Imp qt)
AT: approx. 6.3 (6.7, 5.5)
Type Centrifugal impeller type
Discharge
2 (US gal, Imp gal) /min 20 (5.3, 4.4)
Discharge rate
performance I Pump speed — Discharge pressure 760 rpm — 2.9 kPa (0.3 mAq)
Engine coolant temperature 80°C (176°F)
Discharge
2 (US gal, Imp gal) /min 100 (26.4, 22.0)
Discharge rate
performance II Pump speed — Discharge pressure 3,000 rpm — 49 kPa (5.0 mAq)
Water pump
Discharge
2 (US gal, Imp gal) /min 200 (52.8, 44.0)
Discharge rate
performance III Pump speed — Discharge pressure 6,000 rpm — 225.4 kPa (23 mAq)
Impeller diameter mm (in) 76 (2.99)
Number of impeller vanes 8
Pump pulley diameter mm (in) 60 (2.36)
Clearance between
Standard mm (in) 0.5 — 1.5 (0.020 — 0.060)
impeller and case
Type Wax pellet type
Starting temperature to open 80 — 84°C (176 — 183°F)
Thermostat Fully opens 95°C (203°F)
Valve lift mm (in) 9.0 (0.354) or more
Valve bore mm (in) 35 (1.38)
Main fan 90 W
Motor input
Sub fan 90 W
Radiator fan
Fan diameter / Main fan 300 mm (11.81 in)/4
Blade Sub fan 300 mm (11.81 in)/5
Type Down flow, pressure type
Width × Height × 687.4 × 340 × 16
Core dimensions mm (in)
Thickness (27.06 × 13.39 × 0.63)
Radiator Above: 108±15 or more
Pressure range in which cap (1.1±0.15, 16±2)
kPa (kg/cm2, psi)
valve is open Below: –1.0 to –4.9 or less
(–0.01 — –0.05, –0.1 — –0.7)
Fins Corrugated fin type
Reservoir
Capacity 2 (US qt, Imp qt) 0.45 (0.48, 0.40)
tank

Phosphoric acid (non-amine)
Coolant SUBARU coolant 000016218
type
Water for dilution Distilled water — Soft water or tap water
Cooling system protective
Cooling system conditioner SOA345001 None
agent
CO(H4SO)-2
General Description
COOLING
Engine coolant temperature

Increase: 95°C (203°F) Increase: 96 — 99°C Increase: 100°C
or less (205 — 210°F) (212°F) or more
Vehicle speed A/C compressor load
Decrease: 92°C Decrease: 93 — 94°C Decrease: 95°C
(198°F) or less (199 — 201°F) (203°F) or more
Radiator fan operation Radiator fan operation Radiator fan operation
During acceleration: 19 OFF OFF Low-Speed High-Speed
km/h (12 MPH) or less Low Low-Speed Low-Speed High-Speed
During deceleration: 10
km/h (6 MPH) or less High High-Speed High-Speed High-Speed
During acceleration: OFF OFF Low-Speed High-Speed
20 — 69 km/h Low High-Speed High-Speed High-Speed
(12 — 43 MPH)
During deceleration:
11 — 64 km/h High High-Speed High-Speed High-Speed
(7 — 40 MPH)
70 — 105 km/h Low OFF Low-Speed High-Speed
(43 — 65 MPH)
65 — 103 km/h High Low-Speed High-Speed High-Speed
(40 — 64 MPH)
During acceleration: OFF OFF OFF High-Speed
106 km/h (66 MPH) or Low OFF Low-Speed High-Speed
more
104 km/h (65 MPH) or High OFF Low-Speed High-Speed
more
CO(H4SO)-3
General Description
COOLING
B: COMPONENT
1. WATER PUMP
(2)
(1)
T1
(3)
T1
(4)
T2 (5)
(6)
CO-00265
(1) Water pump ASSY (4) Thermostat Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(2) Gasket (5) Gasket T1: First 12 (1.2, 8.9)
(3) Heater by-pass hose (6) Thermostat cover Second 12 (1.2, 8.9)
T2: 12 (1.2, 8.9)
CO(H4SO)-4
General Description
COOLING
2. RADIATOR & RADIATOR FAN
T2
T1
(6) (5)
(5)
T3 T2
(8)
T1
(10)
T4
(4)
(7)
(11)
T5
(3)
T4
(12)
(24)
(13)
(9)
(14)
(25)
(2) (16)
B T2
T2
(5) (20) (15)
A
(22) (14)
(21) (17)
(14) T2
(1) (5)
B
(14)
(23) A (18)
(19)
CO-02314
(1) Radiator lower cushion (12) Radiator main fan shroud (22) O-ring
(2) Radiator (13) Radiator main fan, radiator main (23) Radiator lower bracket
(3) Radiator upper cushion fan motor ASSY (24) Radiator cap
(4) Radiator upper bracket (14) ATF hose clamp (AT model) (25) Heat shield cover
(5) Clamp (15) ATF hose A (AT model)
(6) Radiator hose A (16) ATF hose B (AT model) Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(7) Engine coolant reservoir tank cap (17) ATF pipe (AT model) T1: 5 (0.5, 3.6)
(8) Over flow hose (18) ATF hose C (AT model) T2: 7.5 (0.76, 5.5)
(9) Engine coolant reservoir tank (19) ATF hose D (AT model) T3: 12 (1.2, 8.9)
(10) Radiator sub fan shroud (20) Radiator hose B T4: 3.4 (0.35, 2.5)
(11) Radiator sub fan, radiator sub fan (21) Radiator drain plug T5: 3 (0.3, 2.2)
motor ASSY
CO(H4SO)-5
General Description
COOLING
C: CAUTION
• Wear appropriate work clothing, including a cap, protective goggles and protective shoes when performing
any work.
• Remove contamination including dirt and corrosion before removal, installation or disassembly.
• Keep the disassembled parts in order and protect them from dust and dirt.
• Before removal, installation or disassembly, be sure to clarify the failure. Avoid unnecessary removal, in-
stallation, disassembly and replacement.
• Vehicle components are extremely hot after driving. Be wary of receiving burns from heated parts.
• Be sure to tighten fasteners including bolts and nuts to the specified torque.
• Place shop jacks or rigid racks at the specified points.
• Before disconnecting connectors of sensors or units, be sure to disconnect the ground cable from the bat-
tery.
D: PREPARATION TOOL
1. SPECIAL TOOL
499977100 CRANK PULLEY Used for stopping the rotation of crank pulley
WRENCH when removing and tightening the crank pul-
ley bolt.
ST-499977100
18231AA010 CAM SPROCKET • Used for removing and installing cam
WRENCH sprocket.
• CAM SPROCKET WRENCH (499207100)
can also be used.
ST18231AA010
CO(H4SO)-6
Radiator Fan System

COOLING
2. Radiator Fan System

A: WIRING DIAGRAM
BATTERY
MAIN SBF SBF-6
No.3
IGNITION SWITCH
No.4
No.26
MAIN
FUSE BOX No.22
(M/B) MAIN FAN
RELAY 1
B: B143
C: F35
E: F36
C10
B7
E6
E5
THROUGH JOINT
CONNECTOR
10 1
F109 B360
20
21
10
13
RELAY
MAIN SUB
HOLDER
FAN
2
FAN
RELAY 2 RELAY F27
MAIN FAN
MOTOR
M
22
19
18
11
12
F17
1
THROUGH JOINT CONNECTOR
16 7
F16 F108 B361

2
1
18
29
E E
M B136
ECM
SUB FAN MOTOR
F16 B361 B360 F108 F109 F27
F17 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
2 1 1
3 4 5
6 2
B136 8 9 7
18
B: B143 C: F35 E: F36 1 2 3 4 5 6 12 16 19
10 11 14 15
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 13 17 20 21 22
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 4 5 6 7 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
CO-02319
CO(H4SO)-7
Radiator Fan System

COOLING
B: INSPECTION
DETECTING CONDITION:
• Engine coolant temperature is 96°C (205°F) or more.
• Vehicle speed is 19 km/h (12 MPH) or below.
TROUBLE SYMPTOMS:
Radiator main and sub fans do not rotate under the above conditions.
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK OPERATION OF RADIATOR FAN. Do the radiator main and sub Go to step 2. Go to step 3.
1) Connect the test mode connector. fans rotate at low speed?
3) Using the Subaru Select Monitor, check the
forced operation of the radiator fan relay.
NOTE:
• When performing a forced operation radiator
fan relay check using the Subaru Select Moni-
tor, the radiator main fan and sub fan will repeat
low speed revolution → high speed revolution
→ OFF in this order.
• Subaru Select Monitor
Refer to Compulsory Valve Operation Check
Mode for detailed procedures. <Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-54, Compulsory Valve Opera-
tion Check Mode.>
2 CHECK OPERATION OF RADIATOR FAN. Do the radiator main and sub Radiator main fan Go to step 27.
1) Connect the test mode connector. fans rotate at high speed? system is normal.
NOTE:
Mode for detailed procedures. <Ref. to
tion Check Mode.>
3 CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO SUB FAN RE- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 4. Go to step 5.
LAY.
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF.
2) Remove the sub fan relay from the relay
holder.
3) Measure the voltage between the sub fan
relay terminal and chassis ground.
Connector & terminal
(F27) No. 10 (+) — Chassis ground (–):
LAY.
5 CHECK FUSE. Is the fuse blown out? Replace the fuse. Repair the power
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. supply line.
2) Remove the fuse No. 3.
3) Check the condition of fuse.
CO(H4SO)-8
Radiator Fan System

COOLING
Step Check Yes No

7 CHECK SUB FAN RELAY. Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 8. Replace the sub
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. more? fan relay.
2) Measure the resistance between sub fan
relay terminals.
Terminal
No. 10 — No. 11:
8 CHECK SUB FAN RELAY. Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 9. Replace the sub
1) Connect the sub fan relay terminals No. 13 fan relay.
and No. 12 to the battery.
relay terminals.
Terminal
No. 10 — No. 11:
9 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN SUB FAN RE- Is resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 10. Repair the open
LAY TERMINAL AND SUB FAN MOTOR circuit of harness
CONNECTOR. between sub fan
1) Disconnect the connector from the sub fan relay terminal and
motor. sub fan motor con-
2) Measure the resistance of harness between nector.
the sub fan relay terminal and sub fan motor
connector.
(F16) No. 2 — (F27) No. 11:
10 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN SUB FAN MO- Is resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 11. Repair the open
TOR CONNECTOR AND MAIN FAN RELAY 2 circuit of the har-
CONNECTOR. ness between sub
1) Remove the main fan relay 2 from the relay fan motor connec-
holder. tor and main fan
2) Measure the resistance of harness between relay 2 connector.
sub fan motor connector and main fan relay 2
connector.
(F16) No. 1 — (F27) No. 18:
11 CHECK POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact in the sub Repair the poor Go to step 12.
Check poor contact of sub fan motor connector. fan motor connector? contact of sub fan
motor connector.
12 CHECK SUB FAN MOTOR. Does the sub fan rotate? Go to step 13. Replace the sub
Connect the battery positive (+) terminal to ter- fan motor.
minal No. 2 of the sub fan motor, and the ground
(–) terminal to terminal No. 1.
13 CHECK MAIN FAN RELAY 2. Is resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 14. Replace the main
Measure the resistance of main fan relay 2. fan relay 2.
Terminal
No. 21 — No. 18:
14 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN MAIN FAN Is resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 15. Repair the open
RELAY 2 TERMINAL AND MAIN FAN MO- circuit of the har-
TOR CONNECTOR. ness between
1) Disconnect the connector from the main fan main fan relay 2
motor. terminal and main
2) Measure the resistance of the harness fan motor connec-
between main fan relay 2 terminal and main fan tor.
motor connector.
(F17) No. 2 — (F27) No. 21:
CO(H4SO)-9
Radiator Fan System

COOLING
Step Check Yes No

15 CHECK MAIN FAN MOTOR AND GROUND Is resistance less than 5 Ω? Go to step 16. Repair the open
CIRCUIT. circuit of the har-
Measure the resistance between main fan ness between
motor connector and chassis ground. main fan motor
Connector & terminal connector and
(F17) No. 1 — Chassis ground: chassis ground.
16 CHECK POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact in the Repair the poor Go to step 17.
Check poor contact of main fan motor connec- main fan motor connector? contact of main fan
tor. motor connector.
17 CHECK MAIN FAN MOTOR. Does the main fan rotate? Go to step 18. Replace the main
minal No. 2 of the main fan motor, and the
ground (–) terminal to terminal No. 1.
LAY AND ECM. circuit of harness
1) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM. between sub fan
2) Measure the resistance between the sub relay terminal and
fan relay terminal and ECM connector. ECM.
(B136) No. 18 — (F27) No. 12:
19 CHECK POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact in ECM Repair poor con- Check the DTC.
Check for poor contact of the ECM connector. connector? tact in ECM con- Repair the trouble
nector. cause. <Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-
43, Read Diagnos-
tic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
20 CHECK MAIN FAN RELAY 1. Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 21. Replace the main
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. more? fan relay 1.
2) Remove main fan relay 1 from the main fuse
box.
3) Measure the resistance of terminal in main
fan relay 1 switch.
21 CHECK MAIN FAN RELAY 1. Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 22. Replace the main
1) Connect the main fan relay 1 coil side termi- fan relay 1.
nal to the battery.
2) Measure the resistance between terminals
of main fan relay 1 switch.
RELAY 1 TERMINAL AND MAIN FAN MO- circuit of the har-
TOR CONNECTOR. ness between
motor connector.
(F17) No. 2 — (F36) No. 6:
23 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN MAIN FAN Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 24. Repair the open
RELAY 1 AND ECM. circuit of the har-
1) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM. ness between
2) Measure the resistance between main fan main fan relay 1
relay 1 terminal and ECM connector. terminal and ECM.
(B136) No. 29 — (B143) No. 7:
CO(H4SO)-10
Radiator Fan System

COOLING
Step Check Yes No

Measure the resistance between main fan relay ness between
2 terminal and ECM connector. main fan relay 2
Connector & terminal terminal and ECM.
(B136) No. 29 — (F27) No. 22:
CHECK FUSE. Is the fuse blown out? Replace the fuse. Go to step 26.
5 1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF.
2) Remove the fuse No. 4 and 26.
26 CHECK POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact in ECM Repair the poor Repair the power
Check for poor contact of the ECM connector. connector? contact of the ECM supply circuit to the
connector. main fuse box.
27 CHECK OPERATION OF RADIATOR FAN. Does the sub fan rotate? Go to step 20. Go to step 28.
If the both fans do not rotate at high speed in the
condition of step 2, check whether the sub fan is
rotating.
28 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT OF MAIN FAN Is resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 29. Repair the open
RELAY 2. circuit of harness
1) Remove the main fan relay 2 from A/C relay between main fan
holder. relay 2 and chassis
2) Measure the resistance between main fan ground.
relay 2 terminal and chassis ground.
(F27) No. 19 — Chassis ground:
29 CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO MAIN FAN RE- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 30. Repair the power
LAY 2. supply line.
2) Measure the voltage between main fan relay
2 terminal and chassis ground.
2) Remove the main fan relay 2.
3) Measure the resistance of main fan relay 2.
Terminal
(F27) No. 18 — (F27) No. 19:
31 CHECK MAIN FAN RELAY 2. Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 23. Replace the main
1) Connect the battery to main fan relay 2 ter- fan relay 2.
minals No. 20 and No. 22.
Terminal
(F27) No. 18 — (F27) No. 19:
CO(H4SO)-11
Engine Coolant
COOLING
3. Engine Coolant 3) Fill engine coolant into the reservoir tank up to

“FULL” level.
A: REPLACEMENT
1. DRAINING OF ENGINE COOLANT
3) Remove the drain plug to drain engine coolant FULL
FULL
into container. LOW

LOW
NOTE:
Remove the radiator cap so that engine coolant will
drain faster. CO-00269
4) Close the radiator cap and start the engine.

Race 5 to 6 times at 3,000 rpm or less, then stop
the engine. (Complete this operation within 40 sec-
onds.)
5) Wait for one minute after the engine stops, open
the radiator cap. If the engine coolant level drops,
add engine coolant into radiator up to the filler neck
position.
6) Perform the procedures 4) and 5) again.
(A) CO-02096 7) Attach the radiator cap and reservoir tank cap
properly.
(A) Drain plug 8) Start the engine and operate the heater at max-
imum hot position and the blower speed setting at
4) Install the drain plug. “LO”
2. FILLING OF ENGINE COOLANT 9) Run the engine at 2,000 rpm or less until radiator
1) Pour cooling system conditioner through the fill- fan starts and stops.
er neck. NOTE:
Be careful with the engine coolant temperature
Cooling system protective agent:
gauge to prevent overheating.
Refer to “SPECIFICATION” for the cooling
10) Stop the engine and wait until the engine cool-
system protective agent. <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-
ant temperature drops to 30°C (86°F) or less.
2, SPECIFICATION, General Description.>
11) Open the radiator cap. If the engine coolant lev-
2) Pour engine coolant into the radiator up to the
el drops, add engine coolant into radiator up to the
filler neck position.
filler neck position and reservoir tank to the “FULL”
Recommended engine coolant: level.
Refer to “SPECIFICATION” for the recom- 12) Attach the radiator cap and reservoir tank cap
mended engine coolant. <Ref. to CO(H4SO)- properly.
2, SPECIFICATION, General Description.> 13) Set the heater setting to maximum hot position
Coolant level: and the blower speed setting to “LO” and start the
engine. Perform racing at 3,000 rpm or less. If the
Refer to “SPECIFICATION” for the recom-
flowing sound is heard at this time, perform the pro-
mended engine coolant. <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-
cedures from 9) again.
2, SPECIFICATION, General Description.>
CO(H4SO)-12
Engine Coolant
COOLING
B: INSPECTION 2. PROCEDURE TO ADJUST THE CON-

CENTRATION OF THE COOLANT
1. RELATIONSHIP OF ENGINE COOLANT
To adjust the concentration of coolant according to
CONCENTRATION AND FREEZING TEM- temperature, find the proper engine coolant con-
PERATURE centration in the diagram 1 and replace the neces-
The concentration and safe operating temperature sary amount of coolant with an undiluted solution of
of engine coolant is shown in the diagram 1. Mea- engine coolant (concentration 50%).
suring the temperature and specific gravity of the The amount of engine coolant that should be re-
coolant will provide this information. placed can be determined using the diagram 2.
[Example] [Example]
If the coolant temperature is 25°C (77°F) and its Assume that the engine coolant concentration must
specific gravity is 1.054, the concentration is 35% be increased from 25% to 40%. Find point A, where
(point A), the safe operating temperature is –14°C the 25% line of engine coolant concentration inter-
(7°F) (point B), and the freezing temperature is – sects with the 40% curve of the necessary engine
20°C (–4°F) (point C). coolant concentration, and read the scale on the
• Diagram 1 vertical axis of the graph at height A. The quantity
of coolant to be drained is 2.1 2 (2.2 US qt, 1.8 Imp
Specific gravity
Safe operating temperature qt). Drain 2.1 2 (2.2 US qt, 1.8 Imp qt) of coolant
from the cooling system and add 2.1 2 (2.2 US qt,
of coolant
Concentration
of coolant 1.8 Imp qt) undiluted engine coolant solution.
If a coolant concentration of 50% is needed, drain
1.100 all the coolant and refill with the undiluted solution
1.090
only.
60% • Diagram 2
1.080
1.070 B
50%
C
1.060
(1.054)
A 40%
1.050
1.040 30%
Freezing Necessary Concentration
1.030 of coolant
temperature
20%
1.020
3
(77 F)
10%
25 C
1.010 (3.2, 45%

2.6) A
1.000 40%
-40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 2 35%
(-40) (-22) (-4) (14) (32) (50) (68) (86) (104) (2.1,
1.8) 30%
Coolant temperature C ( F) CO-02172
1 25%
(1.1, 20%
0.9)
10% 15%
0
10 20 30 40 50

CO-00012
CO(H4SO)-13
Water Pump
COOLING
4. Water Pump 8) Remove the belt cover (LH) No. 2.
A: REMOVAL
1) Remove the radiator. <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-19,
REMOVAL, Radiator.>
REMOVAL, V-belt.>
TIMING BELT, REMOVAL, Timing Belt.> CO-00019
5) Remove the automatic belt tension adjuster.
CO-00016
CO-00020
6) Remove the belt idler No. 2.
10) Disconnect the hose from water pump.
11) Remove the water pump.
CO-00017
7) Remove the cam sprocket (LH) using ST. CO-00021

NOTE:
CAMSHAFT SPROCKET WRENCH (499207100)
can also be used.
ST
CO-00018
CO(H4SO)-14
Water Pump
COOLING
B: INSTALLATION 5) Install the cam sprocket (LH) using ST.

1) Install the water pump onto cylinder block (LH).
NOTE: NOTE:
CAMSHAFT SPROCKET WRENCH (499207100)
can also be used.
• When installing the water pump, tighten the bolts
in two stages in alphabetical sequence as shown in Tightening torque:
figure. 78 N·m (8.0 kgf-m, 57.9 ft-lb)
Tightening torque:
First:
ST
12 N·m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.9 ft-lb)
Second:
12 N·m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.9 ft-lb)
(B)
(C)
(A)
(D)
CO-00018
(E) (F) 6) Install the belt idler No. 2.

Tightening torque:
39 N·m (4.0 kgf-m, 28.9 ft-lb)
ME-02463
2) Install the hose to water pump.

Tightening torque:
24.5 N·m (2.5 kgf-m, 18.1 ft-lb)
CO-00017
7) Install an automatic belt tension adjuster with the

tension rod held by a pin. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-42,
AUTOMATIC BELT TENSION ADJUSTER AS-
SEMBLY AND BELT IDLER, INSTALLATION,
Timing Belt.>
CO-00020 8) Install the timing belt. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-43,
TIMING BELT, INSTALLATION, Timing Belt.>
4) Install the belt cover No. 2 (LH). 9) Install the crank pulley. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-39,
Tightening torque: INSTALLATION, Crank Pulley.>
5 N·m (0.5 kgf-m, 3.6 ft-lb) 10) Install the V-belts. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-37, IN-
11) Install the radiator. <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-20, IN-
STALLATION, Radiator.>
CO-00019
CO(H4SO)-15
Water Pump
COOLING
C: INSPECTION
1) Check the water pump bearing for smooth rota-
tion.
2) Check the water pump pulley for abnormalities.
3) Make sure the impeller is not deformed or dam-
aged.
4) Inspect the clearance between impeller and
pump case.
Clearance between impeller and pump case:
Standard
0.5 — 1.5 mm (0.020 — 0.060 in)
CO-00293
5) After water pump installation, check pulley shaft

for engine coolant leaks. If leaks are noted, replace
the water pump assembly.
CO(H4SO)-16
Thermostat
COOLING
5. Thermostat B: INSTALLATION
1) Install a gasket to thermostat, and install the
A: REMOVAL thermostat and gasket to water pump as a unit.
1) Set the vehicle on a lift. Then, install the thermostat cover.
NOTE:
4) Drain engine coolant completely. <Ref. to
• The thermostat must be installed with the jiggle
CO(H4SO)-12, DRAINING OF ENGINE COOL-
pin facing upward.
ANT, REPLACEMENT, Engine Coolant.>
5) Remove the front exhaust pipe. <Ref. to Tightening torque:
EX(H4SO)-4, REMOVAL, Front Exhaust Pipe.> 12 N·m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.9 ft-lb)
6) Disconnect the radiator outlet hose from thermo-
stat cover.
(D)
CO-00270
7) Remove the thermostat cover and gasket, then

remove the thermostat. T
(C)
(B)
(A)
CO-02153
(A) Thermostat cover

(B) Gasket
(C) Thermostat
(D) Jiggle pin
2) Connect the radiator outlet hose to thermostat

cover.
(C) 3) Install the front exhaust pipe. <Ref. to
EX(H4SO)-5, INSTALLATION, Front Exhaust
(B) Pipe.>
(A) 5) Lower the vehicle.
6) Fill engine coolant. <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-12,
CO-00154 FILLING OF ENGINE COOLANT, REPLACE-
MENT, Engine Coolant.>
(B) Gasket
(C) Thermostat
CO(H4SO)-17
Thermostat
COOLING
C: INSPECTION
Replace the thermostat if the valve does not close
completely at an ambient temperature or if the fol-
lowing test shows unsatisfactory results.
• Inspection method
Immerse the thermostat and a thermometer in wa-
ter. Raise water temperature gradually, and mea-
sure the temperature and valve lift when the valve
begins to open and when the valve is fully opened.
During the test, agitate the water for even temper-
ature distribution. The measured value should
meet the specification.
NOTE:
• Leave the thermostat in the boiling water for
five minutes or more before measuring valve lift.
• Hold the thermostat with a wire or the like to
avoid contacting with container bottom.
Opening start temperature:
80 — 84°C (176 — 183°F)
Full open temperature:
95°C (203°F)
Valve lift:
9.0 mm (0.354 in) or more
(A)
(B)
CO-00033
(A) Thermometer
(B) Thermostat
CO(H4SO)-18
Radiator
COOLING
6. Radiator 7) Disconnect the radiator main fan motor connec-

tor (A) and sub fan motor connector (B).
A: REMOVAL
CAUTION:
The radiator is pressurized. Wait until engine
cools down before working on the radiator.
(A)
CO-02097
IN-00203

(B)
5) Remove the heat shield cover from radiator. (AT
model) CO-00275
8) Disconnect the radiator outlet hose from thermo-

stat cover.
CO-02315
6) Drain engine coolant completely.

<Ref. to CO(H4SO)-12, DRAINING OF ENGINE CO-00270
COOLANT, REPLACEMENT, Engine Coolant.> 9) Disconnect the ATF cooler hoses from ATF
pipes. (AT model)
Plug the ATF pipe to prevent ATF from leaking.
CO-00253

11) Disconnect the over flow hose.
12) Remove the reservoir tank. <Ref. to
CO(H4SO)-28, REMOVAL, Reservoir Tank.>
CO(H4SO)-19
Radiator
COOLING
13) Remove the hood stay holder. B: INSTALLATION

1) Attach the radiator lower cushion to the hole on
the radiator lower bracket.
CO-00276

8, REMOVAL, Air Intake Duct.> CO-00041
15) Disconnect the radiator inlet hoses from the en-
2) Install the radiator to vehicle.
gine.
NOTE:
Make pins on the lower side of radiator be fitted into
the radiator lower cushions on body side.
3) Install the radiator upper brackets and tighten
the bolts.
Tightening torque:
12 N·m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.9 ft-lb)
CO-00277
16) Remove the radiator upper brackets.
CO-00278
4) Connect the radiator inlet hose.
CO-00278
17) Lift the radiator up and away from vehicle.
CO-00277
5) Install the air intake duct. <Ref. to IN(H4SO)-8,

INSTALLATION, Air Intake Duct.>
CO(H4SO)-20
Radiator
COOLING
6) Install the hood stay holder. 12) Connect the radiator main fan motor connector
(A) and sub fan motor connector (B).
(A)
CO-00276
CO-02097
7) Install the reservoir tank. <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-
28, INSTALLATION, Reservoir Tank.>
8) Connect the over flow hose.
10) Connect the ATF cooler hoses. (AT model)
(B)
CO-00275
13) Install the heat shield cover. (AT model)

Tightening torque:
CO-00253 3 N·m (0.3 kgf-m, 2.2 ft-lb)
11) Connect the radiator outlet hose.
CO-02315
CO-00270 14) Install the under cover.

CO(H4SO)-21
Radiator
COOLING
IN-00203
17) Fill engine coolant. <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-12,

FILLING OF ENGINE COOLANT, REPLACE-
18) Check the ATF level. <Ref. to 4AT-26, IN-
SPECTION, Automatic Transmission Fluid.>
C: INSPECTION
1) Remove the radiator cap, fill the radiator with en-
gine coolant, and then install the tester to the instal-
lation position of cap.
CO-00094
2) Apply a pressure of 157 kPa (1.6 kg/cm2, 23 psi)
to the radiator and check the following points:
• Leakage from the radiator or its vicinity
• Leakage from the hose or its connections
CAUTION:
• Engine should be turned off.
• Wipe engine coolant from check points in ad-
vance.
• Be careful of engine coolant from spurting
out when removing the tester.
• Be careful not to deform the filler neck of ra-
diator when installing and removing the tester.
CO(H4SO)-22
Radiator Cap
COOLING
7. Radiator Cap
A: INSPECTION
1) Attach the radiator cap to tester.
CO-00044
2) Increase pressure until the tester gauge pointer

stops. Radiator cap is functioning properly if it holds
the service limit pressure for five to six seconds.
Specified pressure:
93 — 123 kPa (0.95 — 1.25 kg/cm2, 14 — 18
psi)
Service limit pressure:
83 kPa (0.85 kg/cm2, 12 psi)
CAUTION:
Be sure to remove foreign matter and rust from
the cap in advance. Otherwise, results of pres-
sure test will be incorrect.
CO(H4SO)-23
Radiator Main Fan and Fan Motor

COOLING
8. Radiator Main Fan and Fan 11) Remove the bolts which hold the radiator main
fan shroud to the radiator.
Motor
A: REMOVAL
CO-00096
12) Remove the radiator main fan motor assembly.
B: INSTALLATION
IN-00203
NOTE:
4) Remove the under cover. If the installation of the radiator main fan motor as-
sembly is difficult, attempt installation after loosen-
5) Disconnect the connector (A) of the main fan
ing the bolts which hold the radiator sub fan motor
motor.
assembly.
Tightening torque:
7.5 N·m (0.76 kgf-m, 5.5 ft-lb)
(A)
CO-02097
6) Remove the heat shield cover. (AT model)

CO-00096
CO-02315
7) Remove the ATF hose from the clip of the radia-

tor main fan motor assembly. (AT model)
10) Remove the reservoir tank. <Ref. to
CO(H4SO)-28, REMOVAL, Reservoir Tank.>
CO(H4SO)-24

COOLING
C: DISASSEMBLY D: ASSEMBLY
1) Remove the clip which holds motor connector Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.
onto the shroud.
Tightening torque:
2) Remove the nuts which hold the fan to the fan
5 N·m (0.5 kgf-m, 3.6 ft-lb)
motor.
CO-00098
CO-00102
3) Remove the bolts which hold fan motor onto Tightening torque:
shroud. 3.4 N·m (0.35 kgf-m, 2.5 ft-lb)
CO-00098 CO-00102
CO(H4SO)-25
Radiator Sub Fan and Fan Motor

COOLING
9. Radiator Sub Fan and Fan 10) Remove the bolts which hold the radiator sub
fan shroud to the radiator.
Motor
A: REMOVAL
CO-00101
11) Remove the radiator sub fan motor assembly

from underneath the vehicle.
B: INSTALLATION
IN-00203
4) Remove the under cover. Tightening torque:
5) Remove the connector (B) of sub fan motor. 7.5 N·m (0.76 kgf-m, 5.5 ft-lb)
(B)
CO-00101
CO-00275
6) Remove the heat shield cover. (AT model)
CO-02315
7) Remove the ATF hose from the clip of the radia-

tor sub fan motor assembly. (AT model)
CO(H4SO)-26

COOLING
1) Remove the clip which holds the fan motor con- Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.
nector to the shroud.
Tightening torque:
5 N·m (0.5 kgf-m, 3.6 ft-lb)
motor.
CO-00098
CO-00097
CO-00098 CO-00097
CO(H4SO)-27
Reservoir Tank
COOLING
10.Reservoir Tank
A: REMOVAL
1) Disconnect the over flow hose connected to the
radiator filler neck.
2) Push in the hook (A), and pull the reserve tank in
the direction of the arrow to remove.
(A)
CO-00279
B: INSTALLATION
C: INSPECTION
Make sure the engine coolant level is between
“FULL” and “LOW”.
CO(H4SO)-28
Engine Cooling System Trouble in General

COOLING
11.Engine Cooling System Trouble in General

A: INSPECTION
Trouble Possible cause Corrective action
Replenish engine coolant, inspect for leakage, and
a. Insufficient engine coolant
repair it if necessary.
b. Loose timing belt Repair or replace timing belt tensioner.
c. Oil on timing belt Replace.
d. Malfunction of thermostat Replace.
e. Malfunction of water pump Replace.
f. Clogged engine coolant passage Clean.
Inspect and repair ignition control system.<Ref. to
g. Improper ignition timing
EN(H4SO)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.>
h. Clogged or leaking radiator Clean, repair or replace.
Overheat
Replace the engine coolant. If it is ineffective, inspect
i. Engine oil mixed in engine coolant
and repair the engine side.
Inspect and repair the fuel injection system. <Ref. to
j. Air/fuel mixture ratio too lean
EN(H4SO)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.>
k. Excessive back pressure in exhaust system Clean or replace.
l. Insufficient clearance between piston and cylinder Adjust or replace.
m. Slipping clutch Correct or replace.
n. Dragging brake Adjust.
Inspect the radiator fan relay, engine coolant tempera-
o. Defective radiator fan
ture sensor or fan motor and replace them.
a. Ambient temperature extremely low Partly cover radiator front area.
Over-cooling
b. Defective thermostat Replace.
a. Loosened or damaged connecting units on hoses Correct or replace.
b. Leakage from water pump Replace.
c. Leakage from water pipe Correct or replace.
Engine coolant
d. Leakage around cylinder head gasket Retighten the cylinder head bolts or replace the gasket.
leaks
e. Cylinder head and block damaged or cracked Correct or replace.
f. Damaged or cracked thermostat case Correct or replace.
g. Leakage from radiator Correct or replace.
a. Timing belt problem Replace.
b. Defective radiator fan Replace.
Abnormal noise
c. Defective water pump bearing Replace water pump.
d. Defective water pump mechanical seal Replace water pump.
CO(H4SO)-29

COOLING
CO(H4SO)-30
LUBRICATION
LU(H4SO)
Page
2. Oil Pressure System ..................................................................................7
3. Engine Oil ...................................................................................................9
4. Oil Pump ..................................................................................................11
5. Oil Pan and Strainer .................................................................................15
6. Oil Pressure Switch ..................................................................................18
8. Engine Lubrication System Trouble in General ........................................20
General Description
LUBRICATION
A: SPECIFICATION
Lubrication method Forced lubrication
Pump type Trochoid type
Inner rotor 9
Number of teeth
Outer rotor 10
Outer rotor diameter × thickness 78 × 10 mm (3.07 × 0.39 in)
Tip clearance between inner and outer rotors Standard 0.04 — 0.14 mm (0.0016 — 0.0055 in)
Side clearance between inner rotor and pump case Standard 0.02 — 0.07 mm (0.0008 — 0.0028 in)
Oil pump Case clearance between outer rotor and pump case Standard 0.10 — 0.175 mm (0.0039 — 0.0069 in)
Discharge
98 kPa (1.0 kgf/cm2, 14 psi)
600 rpm pressure
Performance Discharge rate 4.6 2 (4.9 US qt, 4.0 Imp qt)/min.
(Oil temperature 80°C (176°F)) Discharge
294 kPa (3.0 kgf/cm2, 43 psi)
5,000 rpm pressure
Discharge rate 47.0 2 (49.7 US qt, 41.4 Imp qt)/min.
Relief valve working pressure 588 kPa (6.0 kgf/cm2, 85 psi)
Filter type Full-flow filter type
Outer diameter: 68 mm (2.68 in) 800 cm2 (124 sq in)
Filtration area
Outer diameter: 65 mm (2.56 in) 470 cm2 (73 sq in)
Oil filter By-pass valve opening pressure 160 kPa (1.63 kgf/cm2, 23.2 psi)
Outer diameter: 68 mm (2.68 in) 68 × 65 mm (2.68 × 2.56 in)
Outer diameter × width
Outer diameter: 65 mm (2.56 in) 65 × 74.4 mm (2.56 × 2.93 in)
Installation screw specifications M 20 × 1.5
Type Immersed contact point type
Oil pressure Operating voltage — number of watts 12 V — 3.4 W or less
switch Warning light operating pressure 14.7 kPa (0.15 kgf/cm2, 2.1 psi)
Proof pressure 981 kPa (10 kgf/cm2, 142 psi) or more
Capacity
5.0 2 (5.4 US qt, 4.5 Imp qt)
(at overhaul)
Engine oil
When replacing engine oil and oil filter 4.2 2 (4.4 US qt, 3.7 Imp qt)
When replacing engine oil only 4.0 2 (4.2 US qt, 3.5 Imp qt)
LU(H4SO)-2
General Description
LUBRICATION
Recommended oil:
Those with an API standard SM “Energy Con-
serving” logo.
ILSAC standard GF-4 “starburst mark” dis-
played on container top.
SAE (1)
( C) -30 -20 -15 0 15 30 40
( F) -22 -4 5 32 59 86 104
10W-30, 10W-40 , 10W-50

5W-30 (2)
LU-02329
(1) SAE viscosity No. and applicable temperature

(2) Recommended
CAUTION:
NOTE:
If the vehicle is used in regions with high tempera-
tures or in other severe environments, use oil with
the viscosities shown below. API standard: SM or
SL
SAE Viscosity No.: 30, 40, 10W-50, 20W-40, 20W-
50
LU(H4SO)-3
General Description
LUBRICATION
B: COMPONENT
T4 (13)
(16)
(15)
(12) (14)
T2
(28) (17)
(11)
T2
(18) (29)
T2
(10) T7
T2
(9)
T6
(19)
T2 (30)
(8)
(7) (20)
(6) T2 (24)
T3
(5) (27)
(4) (2)
T1 (22)
(3) T5
(1) (21)
(23)
(26) T5
(25)
LU-02328
(1) Plug (15) Gasket (29) Rocker cover

(2) Gasket (16) Oil filler cap (30) O-ring
(3) Relief valve spring (17) O-ring
(4) Relief valve (18) Baffle plate Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(5) Oil seal (19) O-ring T1: 5 (0.5, 3.6)
(6) Oil pump case (20) Oil strainer T2: 6.4 (0.65, 4.7)
(7) Inner rotor (21) Oil level gauge guide T3: 10 (1.0, 7.2)
(8) Outer rotor (22) O-ring T4: 25 (2.5, 18.1)
(9) Oil pump cover (23) Oil pan T5: 44 (4.5, 32.5)
(10) Oil filter (24) Oil level gauge T6: 5.4 (0.55, 4.0)
(11) O-ring (25) Drain plug T7: <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-52, INSTAL-
(12) Oil pump ASSY (26) Metal gasket LATION, Camshaft.>
(13) Oil pressure switch (27) Gasket
(14) Oil filler duct (28) Seal
LU(H4SO)-4
General Description
LUBRICATION
C: CAUTION
forming any work.
• Be careful not to burn your hands, because each
part on the vehicle is hot after running.
points.
the battery.
LU(H4SO)-5
General Description
LUBRICATION
D: PREPARATION TOOL
WRENCH loosening and tightening the crank pulley bolt.
ST-499977100
18332AA000 OIL FILTER Used for removing and installing oil filter. (Outer
WRENCH diameter: 68 mm (2.68 in))
ST18332AA000
ST18332AA010
499587100 OIL SEAL Used for installing oil seal into oil pump.
INSTALLER
ST-499587100
LU(H4SO)-6
Oil Pressure System

LUBRICATION
2. Oil Pressure System

A: WIRING DIAGRAM
IGNITION
B72 SWITCH BATTERY
No.5 SBF-6 MAIN SBF
6 3
A3
WARNING LIGHT
COMBINATION
OIL PRESSURE
METER
A: i10
A15
i3
17
B38
B21
31
E2
E11
E
OIL PRESSURE
SWITCH
B21
B72 A: i10 B38
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
4 5 6 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
LU-02316
LU(H4SO)-7
Oil Pressure System

LUBRICATION
B: INSPECTION
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK COMBINATION METER. Does the warning light illumi- Go to step 2. Repair or replace
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON (engine OFF). nate? the combination
2) Check other warning lights. meter. <Ref. to IDI-
4, INSPECTION,
Combination Meter
System.>
2 CHECK THE HARNESS CONNECTOR BE- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Replace the oil Go to step 3.
TWEEN THE COMBINATION METER AND pressure switch.
THE OIL PRESSURE SWITCH.
2) Disconnect the connector from oil pressure
switch.
4) Measure the voltage of harness between oil
pressure switch connector and chassis ground.
(E11) No. 1 (+) — Chassis ground (–):
3 CHECK COMBINATION METER. Is the resistance less than 10 Repair the harness Repair or replace
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. Ω? and connector. the combination
2) Remove the combination meter. NOTE: meter. <Ref. to IDI-
3) Measure the resistance of combination In this case, repair 4, INSPECTION,
meter. the following item: Combination Meter
Terminal • Open circuit of System.>
(i10) No. 3 — (i10) No. 15: harness between
combination meter
and oil pressure
switch
• Poor contact in
combination meter
connector
• Poor contact in
oil pressure switch
connector
• Poor contact in
coupling connector
LU(H4SO)-8
Engine Oil
LUBRICATION
3. Engine Oil B: REPLACEMENT

A: INSPECTION 2) Open the engine oil filler cap for quick draining of
1) Park the vehicle on a level surface. engine oil.
2) Remove the oil level gauge and wipe away the 3) Lift up the vehicle.
oil. 4) Drain engine oil by loosening the engine oil drain
3) Reinsert the level gauge all the way. Be sure that plug.
the level gauge is correctly inserted and properly
orientated. NOTE:
4) Remove it again and note the reading. If the en- Prepare the container for draining of engine oil.
gine oil level is below “L” line, add oil to bring the
level up to “F” line.
5) After turning off the engine, wait a few minutes
for the oil to return to the oil pan before checking
the level.
6) Just after driving or while the engine is warm, en-
gine oil level shows in the range between “F” line
and cutout portion. This is caused by thermal ex-
(A)
pansion of engine oil.
NOTE: LU-02189
To prevent overfilling of engine oil, do not add oil
(A) Drain plug
above “F” line when the engine is cold.
(B) 5) Tighten the engine oil drain plug after draining
(A)
engine oil.
NOTE:
(C)
Use a new drain plug gasket.
(E) Tightening torque:
(D) 44 N·m (4.5 kgf-m, 32.5 ft-lb)
LU-00213
(A) Oil level gauge

(C) Upper level
(D) Lower level
(A)
LU-02189
(A) Drain plug
6) Using engine oil of proper quality and viscosity,

fill engine oil through the filler duct to the upper lev-
el on level gauge. Make sure that the vehicle is
parked on a level surface when checking oil level.
Recommended oil:
mended oil. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-2, SPECIFI-
CATION, General Description.>
Engine oil capacity:
Refer to “SPECIFICATION” for the engine oil
capacity. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-2, SPECIFICA-
TION, General Description.>
LU(H4SO)-9
Engine Oil
LUBRICATION

8) Start the engine and warm it up for a time.
9) After the engine stops, recheck the oil level. If
necessary, add engine oil up to the upper level on
level gauge.
(B)
(A)
(C)
(E)
(D)
LU-00213
(A) Oil level gauge

(C) Upper level
(D) Lower level
LU(H4SO)-10
Oil Pump
LUBRICATION
4. Oil Pump 12) Remove the timing belt guide. (MT model)
A: REMOVAL
LU-00013
IN-00203

6) Remove the radiator. <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-19,
REMOVAL, Radiator.>
REMOVAL, V-belt.> LU-02111
14) Remove the bolts which install oil pump onto
cylinder block.
NOTE:
pump.
LU-00011
9) Remove the crankshaft position sensor.<Ref. to

FU(H4SO)-21, REMOVAL, Crankshaft Position
Sensor.>
10) Remove the crank pulley using ST.
LU-00015
LU-00012
11) Remove the water pump. <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-

14, REMOVAL, Water Pump.>
LU(H4SO)-11
Oil Pump
LUBRICATION
15) Remove the oil pump by using flat tip screw- 3) Apply a coat of engine oil to the inside of oil seal.
driver.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch mating surfaces of
cylinder block and oil pump.
ME-00312
4) Install the oil pump to cylinder block. Be careful

not to damage the oil seal during installation.
NOTE:
LU-00016
• Make sure the oil seal lip is not folded.
B: INSTALLATION • Align the flat surface of oil pump’s inner rotor with
crankshaft before installation.
• Use a new O-ring and new oil seal when install-
Perform the following. ing the oil pump.
1) Using the ST, install the front oil seal. 5) Apply liquid gasket to the three bolts thread
ST 499587100 OIL SEAL INSTALLER shown in figure. (when reuse the bolts)
NOTE: Liquid gasket:
Use a new front oil seal.
equivalent
Tightening torque:
6.4 N·m (0.65 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
ME-00164
2) Apply liquid gasket to the mating surfaces of oil

pump.
T
Liquid gasket: LU-02103
equivalent C: DISASSEMBLY
Remove the screw which secures oil pump cover
and then disassemble oil pump. Inscribe alignment
marks on the inner and outer rotors so that they can
be replaced in their original positions during reas-
sembly.
(A)
ME-00165
(A) O-ring
LU(H4SO)-12
Oil Pump
LUBRICATION
CAUTION: 3) Assemble the inner and outer rotors in their orig-

Before disassembling the oil pump, remove the inal positions.
relief valve. 4) Assemble the oil relief valve and install relief
valve spring and plug.
NOTE:
(E)
Use a new gasket.
(D)
5) Assemble the oil pump cover.
Tightening torque:
(C) T1: 5.4 N·m (0.55 kgf-m, 4.0 ft-lb)
(B)
T2: 44 N·m (4.5 kgf-m, 32.5 ft-lb)
T1
(A)
(E)
(F) (I)
(D)
(C)
(B)
(G)
(H)
(A)
(F) (G)
LU-00020 (I)
(H)
(A) Oil seal

(B) Oil pump case
(C) Inner rotor
(D) Outer rotor T2
(E) Oil pump cover
(F) Relief valve
LU-02134
(G) Relief valve spring
(H) Plug (A) Oil seal
(I) Gasket (B) Pump case
(C) Inner rotor
D: ASSEMBLY (D) Outer rotor
1) Assemble the front oil seal by using ST. (E) Pump cover
ST 499587100 OIL SEAL INSTALLER (F) Relief valve
NOTE: (G) Relief valve spring
Use a new front oil seal. (H) Plug
(I) Gasket
ST
LU-00021
2) Apply a coat of engine oil to inner and outer ro-

tors.
LU(H4SO)-13
Oil Pump
LUBRICATION
E: INSPECTION 3. SIDE CLEARANCE

Measure the clearance between oil pump inner ro-
1. TIP CLEARANCE tor and oil pump cover. If the clearance exceeds
Measure the tip clearance of rotors. If the clearance the limit, replace rotor or oil pump case.
exceeds the limit, replace rotors as a matched set.
Side clearance:
Tip clearance: Standard:
Standard: 0.02 — 0.07 mm (0.0008 — 0.0028 in)
0.04 — 0.14 mm (0.0016 — 0.0055 in)
LU-00025
LU-00023
4. OIL RELIEF VALVE
2. CASE CLEARANCE Check the valve for assembly condition and dam-
Measure the clearance between outer rotor and oil age, and the relief valve spring for damage and de-
pump case. If the clearance exceeds the limit, re- terioration. Replace the parts if defective.
place the rotor.
Relief valve spring
Case clearance: Free length:
Standard: 73.7 mm (2.902 in)
0.10 — 0.175 mm (0.0039 — 0.0069 in) Installed length:
54.7 mm (2.154 in)
Load when installed:
93.1 N (9.49 kgf, 20.88 lb)
5. OIL PUMP CASE
Check the oil pump case for worn shaft hole,
clogged oil passage, worn rotor chamber, cracks
and other faults.
6. OIL SEAL
LU-00024
Check the oil seal lips for deformation, hardening,
wear, etc. and replace if defective.
LU(H4SO)-14
Oil Pan and Strainer

LUBRICATION
5. Oil Pan and Strainer 8) Support the engine with a lifting device and wire
ropes.
A: REMOVAL
2) Remove the front wheels.
LU-00222

CAUTION:
When lifting up the vehicle, raise up wire ropes
IN-00203
at the same time.
4) Remove the air intake duct and air cleaner case. 10) Remove the under cover.
<Ref. to IN(H4SO)-8, REMOVAL, Air Intake Duct.> 11) Drain the engine oil. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-9, RE-
<Ref. to IN(H4SO)-5, REMOVAL, Air Cleaner PLACEMENT, Engine Oil.>
Case.> 12) Remove the front and center exhaust pipes.
5) Remove the air intake chamber.<Ref. to <Ref. to EX(H4SO)-4, REMOVAL, Front Exhaust
IN(H4SO)-7, REMOVAL, Air Intake Chamber.> Pipe.>
6) Remove the pitching stopper. 13) Remove the nuts which install front cushion
rubber onto front crossmember.
ME-00213
7) Remove the hood stay holder (A) and radiator ME-02650
upper brackets (B). 14) Remove the bolts which install oil pan on cylin-
der block with the engine raised up.
15) Insert the oil pan cutter blade into the gap be-
tween cylinder block and oil pan.
CAUTION:
Do not use a screwdriver or similar tool in place
of oil pan cutter.
16) Remove the oil strainer.
(B) (B)
(A)
LU-00232
LU(H4SO)-15

LUBRICATION
17) Remove the baffle plate. 4) Tighten the oil strainer stay together with the baf-
fle plate.
(D) Tightening torque:
6.4 N·m (0.65 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
5) Apply liquid gasket to the mating surfaces, and
install the oil pan.
NOTE:
Liquid gasket:
(C) THREE BOND 1207C (Part No. 004403012) or
equivalent
(B)
(A)
LU-02262 LU-00034
(A) Oil pan

6) Tighten the bolts which install oil pan to engine
block.
(B) Oil strainer
(C) Baffle plate Tightening torque:
(D) Cylinder block T1: 5 N·m (0.5 kgf-m, 3.6 ft-lb)
T2: 6.4 N·m (0.65 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
B: INSTALLATION T3: 10 N·m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 ft-lb)
CAUTION:
Before installing the oil pan, clean the mating (D)
surface of oil pan and engine block.
1) Make sure that the seals (A) are installed se-
curely on the baffle plate in a direction as shown in
the figure below.
(A)
(C)
T2
(B)
T2
T3
(A)
LU-00052
2) Install the baffle plate.

T1
Tightening torque: T1
6.4 N·m (0.65 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
3) Install the oil strainer to the cylinder block. LU-02266
NOTE: (A) Oil pan

Use new O-rings. (B) Oil strainer
Tightening torque: (C) Baffle plate
10 N·m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 ft-lb) (D) Cylinder block
LU(H4SO)-16

LUBRICATION
7) Lower the engine onto front crossmember. 14) Install the hood stay holder (A) and radiator up-
8) Tighten the nuts which install front cushion rub- per brackets (B).
ber onto front crossmember.
NOTE:
Make sure the front cushion rubber mounting bolts
(A) and locator (B) are securely installed.
Tightening torque:
85 N·m (8.7 kgf-m, 63 ft-lb)
(B) (B)
(A)
LU-00232
15) Install the air intake chamber.<Ref. to

ber.>
16) Install the air intake duct and air cleaner case.
<Ref. to IN(H4SO)-8, INSTALLATION, Air Intake
(B) (A) (A) (B) Duct.> <Ref. to IN(H4SO)-6, INSTALLATION, Air
ME-02651
Cleaner Case.>
9) Install the front and center exhaust pipe. <Ref. to 17) Install the front wheels.
EX(H4SO)-5, INSTALLATION, Front Exhaust 18) Connect the battery ground cable to battery.
Pipe.>
CAUTION:
When lowering the vehicle, lower the lift-up de-
vice and wire ropes at the same time.
IN-00203
19) Refill the engine oil. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-9, IN-

SPECTION, Engine Oil.>
C: INSPECTION
Visually check that the oil pan, oil strainer, oil
strainer stay and baffle plate are not damaged.
LU-00222
13) Install the pitching stopper.

Tightening torque:
T1: 50 N·m (5.1 kgf-m, 36.9 ft-lb)
T2: 58 N·m (5.9 kgf-m, 42.8 ft-lb)
T1
T2
ME-03181
LU(H4SO)-17
Oil Pressure Switch

LUBRICATION
6. Oil Pressure Switch 2) Install the oil pressure switch onto engine block.
Tightening torque:
A: REMOVAL 25 N·m (2.5 kgf-m, 18.4 ft-lb)
1) Remove the generator from the bracket. <Ref. to
SC(H4SO)-20, REMOVAL, Generator.>
2) Disconnect the terminal from oil pressure switch.
LU-00037
3) Connect the terminal to the oil pressure switch.

LU-00036
3) Remove the oil pressure switch.
LU-00036
4) Install the generator to the bracket. <Ref. to

SC(H4SO)-20, INSTALLATION, Generator.>
LU-00037
B: INSTALLATION C: INSPECTION
Check the oil pressure switch installation portion for
1) Apply liquid gasket to the oil pressure switch
oil leakage and oil seepage.
threads.
Liquid gasket:
equivalent
LU-00038
LU(H4SO)-18
Engine Oil Filter

LUBRICATION
7. Engine Oil Filter B: INSTALLATION

A: REMOVAL CAUTION:
1) Set the vehicle on a lift. 1) Clean the oil filter installation surface on cylinder
2) Lift up the vehicle. block or oil cooler.
3) Remove the clip. 2) Obtain a new oil filter and apply a thin coat of en-
3) Install the oil filter turning it by hand, being care-
ful not to damage the seal rubber.
• Tighten the oil filter 65 mm (2.56 in) in diameter
(approx. 2/3 — 3/4 rotation) after the seal rubber of
the oil filter comes in contact with cylinder block or
oil cooler. When using a torque wrench, tighten to
12 N·m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.7 ft-lb).
• Tighten the oil filter 68 mm (2.68 in) in diameter
LU-02190 (approx. 1 rotation) after the seal rubber of the oil
filter comes in contact with cylinder block or oil
4) Rotate the service hole cover in the direction of cooler. When using a torque wrench, tighten to 14
the arrow. N·m (1.4 kgf-m, 10.3 ft-lb).
C: INSPECTION
make sure that no oil is leaking around seal rubber.
NOTE:
The filter element and filter case are permanently
sary.
LU-02191 2) Check the engine oil level. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-9,
5) Remove the oil filter using the ST. INSPECTION, Engine Oil.>
ST 18332AA000 OIL FILTER WRENCH (Outer
diameter: 68 mm (2.68 in) for
oil filter)
diameter: 65 mm (2.56 in) for
oil filter)
(A)
LU-02192
(A) Oil filter
LU(H4SO)-19
Engine Lubrication System Trouble in General

LUBRICATION
8. Engine Lubrication System Trouble in General

A: INSPECTION
Before performing diagnostics, make sure that the engine oil level is correct and no oil leakage exists.
1) Oil pressure switch Cracked diaphragm or oil leakage within switch Replace.
failure Broken spring or seized contacts Replace.
Clogging of oil filter Replace.
Malfunction of oil by-pass valve in oil filter Clean or replace.
Malfunction of oil relief valve in oil pump Clean or replace.
2) Low oil pressure Clogged oil passage Clean.
1. Warning light remains ON.
Excessive tip clearance and side clearance of oil
Replace.
pump rotor and gear
Clogged oil strainer or broken pipe Clean or replace.
Insufficient engine oil (degradation, etc.) Replace.
3) No oil pressure Broken pipe of oil strainer Replace.
Stuck oil pump rotor Replace.
1) Malfunction of combination meter Replace.
2. Warning light does not
2) Poor contact of switch contact points Replace.
illuminate.
3) Disconnection of wiring Repair.
1) Poor contact of terminals Repair.
2) Defective wiring harness Repair.
3. Warning light flickers
momentarily. Check for the same
3) Low oil pressure possible causes as
listed 1. — 2.
LU(H4SO)-20
SPEED CONTROL SYSTEMS
SP(H4SO)
Page
2. Accelerator Pedal .......................................................................................3
General Description
A: SPECIFICATION
Accelerator pedal Stroke At pedal pad 50 — 63 mm (1.97 — 2.48 in)
B: COMPONENT
(2)
(1)
T
(5)
T
T
(4)
(3)
SP-02049
(1) Accelerator pedal ASSY (4) Stopper Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(2) Accelerator plate (5) Accelerator pedal bracket T: 18 (1.8, 13.0)
(3) Clip
C: CAUTION
any work.
• Remove contamination including dirt and corrosion before removal or installation.
• Keep the parts in order and protect them from dust and dirt.
• Before removal or installation, be sure to clarify the failure. Avoid unnecessary removal, installation, dis-
assembly and replacement.
tery.
SP(H4SO)-2
Accelerator Pedal
2. Accelerator Pedal
A: REMOVAL
FU-00009
2) Disconnect the connector (A).
3) Remove the nut (B) securing accelerator pedal
assembly.
(A)
(B)
SP-02050
B: INSTALLATION
Tightening torque:
18 N·m (1.8 kgf-m, 13.0 ft-lb)
C: DISASSEMBLY
NOTE:
The accelerator pedal cannot be disassembled.
SP(H4SO)-3
Accelerator Pedal
SP(H4SO)-4
IGNITION
IG(H4SO)
Page
2. Spark Plug ..................................................................................................4
3. Ignition Coil and Ignitor Assembly ..............................................................6
4. Spark Plug Cord .........................................................................................7
General Description
IGNITION
A: SPECIFICATION
Item Specification
Engine Model 2.5 L SOHC Non-turbo
Type FH 0286
Ignition coil & ignitor
Manufacturer Diamond Electric
assembly
Secondary coil resistance 11.2 kΩ±15%
Manufacturer and type NGK: FR5AP-11
Thread size (diameter, pitch, length) mm 14, 1.25, 19
Spark plug
Spark plug gap mm (in) 1.0 — 1.1 (0.039 — 0.043)
Electrode Platinum
B: COMPONENT
(4)
(4)
(1)
(1)
T2
(3)
(1)
T1
(2)
(2)
T2
(1)
IG-02063
(1) Spark plug (4) Spark plug cord (#2, #4) Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(2) Spark plug cord (#1, #3) T1: 8 (0.82, 5.9)
(3) Ignition coil and ignitor ASSY T2: 21 (2.1, 15.2)
IG(H4SO)-2
General Description
IGNITION
C: CAUTION
forming any work.
points.
the battery.
IG(H4SO)-3
Spark Plug
IGNITION
2. Spark Plug 2. LH SIDE

1) Remove the battery. <Ref. to SC(H4SO)-26,
A: REMOVAL REMOVAL, Battery.>
Spark plug: 2) Remove the spark plug cords by pulling the boot.
Refer to “SPECIFICATION” for the recom- (Do not pull the cord itself.)
mended spark plug. <Ref. to IG(H4SO)-2,
SPECIFICATION, General Description.>
1. RH SIDE
IG-02049
IN-00203
2) Remove the air cleaner case. <Ref. to

IN(H4SO)-5, REMOVAL, Air Cleaner Case.>
3) Remove the spark plug cords by pulling the boot.
(Do not pull the cord itself.)
IG-00022
B: INSTALLATION
1. RH SIDE
Tightening torque:
21 N·m (2.1 kgf-m, 15.2 ft-lb)
IG-00017
2. LH SIDE
Tightening torque:
21 N·m (2.1 kgf-m, 15.2 ft-lb)
IG-00018
IG(H4SO)-4
Spark Plug
IGNITION
C: INSPECTION 3) Oil fouled:

Check the electrodes and inner and outer ceramic Wet black deposits show oil entrance into the com-
insulator of plugs, noting the type of deposits and bustion chamber through worn rings or pistons, or
excessive clearance between valve guides and
the degree of electrode erosion.
stems.
(A)
(B) (C)
(D)
(E)
IG-00010
IG-00013
(A) Spark plug gap 4) Overheating:
(B) Carbon accumulation or wear White or light gray insulator with black or brown
(C) Cracks spots and bluish burnt electrodes indicate engine
(D) Damage overheating, incorrect ignition timing, wrong selec-
(E) Damaged gasket tion of fuel, or loose spark plugs.
1) Normal:
Brown to grayish-tan deposits and slight electrode
wear indicate correct spark plug heat range.
IG-00014
D: ADJUSTMENT
Clean spark plugs with a nylon brush, etc.
IG-00011 Clean and remove the carbon or oxide deposits.
If deposits are too stubborn, replace the spark
2) Carbon fouled:
plugs.
Dry fluffy carbon deposits on insulator and elec-
After cleaning the spark plugs, measure the spark
trode are mostly caused by slow speed driving in
plug gap using a gap gauge.
the city, weak ignition, too rich fuel mixture and dirty
air cleaner. NOTE:
• Never use plug cleaner.
• Do not use metal brush or it will wear insulator.
Spark plug gap L:
1.0 — 1.1 mm (0.039 — 0.043 in)
IG-00012
IG-02035
IG(H4SO)-5
Ignition Coil and Ignitor Assembly

IGNITION
3. Ignition Coil and Ignitor C: INSPECTION

Assembly Check the secondary coil resistance using a tester.
Replace if defective.
A: REMOVAL CAUTION:
1) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. • If the resistance is extremely low, it indicates
the presence of a short-circuit.
• Ignitor is integrated with the coil. Therefore
the resistance of primary side coil cannot be
measured.
Specified resistance:
[Secondary side]
Between (A) and (B)
11.2 kΩ±15%
IN-00203
Between (C) and (D)
11.2 kΩ±15%
2) Disconnect the spark plug cords from ignition
coil and ignitor assembly.
(C) (D)
(A) (B)
IG-02066
IG-02064
3) Disconnect the connector from the ignition coil &

ignitor assembly.
4) Remove the bolt which secures the ignition coil
and ignitor assembly to the intake manifold.
(B)
(A)
(B)
IG-02065
B: INSTALLATION
Tightening torque:
8 N·m (0.82 kgf-m, 5.9 ft-lb)
CAUTION:
Connect the spark plug cords to correct posi-
tions. Failure to do so will damage the unit.
IG(H4SO)-6
Spark Plug Cord

IGNITION
4. Spark Plug Cord

A: INSPECTION
Check the following items.
• Damage to cords, deformation, burning or rust
formation of terminals
• Resistance value of cords
#1 cord: 7.1 — 12.1 kΩ
#2 cord: 12.1 — 19.9 kΩ
#3 cord: 7.7 — 13.0 kΩ
#4 cord: 12.3 — 20.2 kΩ
IG-00102
IG(H4SO)-7
Spark Plug Cord

IGNITION
IG(H4SO)-8
STARTING/CHARGING SYSTEMS
SC(H4SO)
Page
2. Starter ........................................................................................................6
3. Generator .................................................................................................20
4. Battery ......................................................................................................26
General Description
A: SPECIFICATION
Item Specification
Vehicle model MT AT
Type Reduction type
Model 428000-2300 428000-2291
Manufacturer DENSO
Voltage and output 12 V — 1.0 kW 12 V — 1.4 kW
Direction of rotation Counterclockwise (when observed from pinion)
Number of pinion teeth 9 9
Voltage 11 V 11 V
No-load characteris-
Current 90 A or less 90 A or less
tics
Starter Rotating speed 1,820 rpm or more 1,720 rpm or more
Voltage 8V 8V
Current 280 A 370 A
Load characteristics 7.76 N·m (0.79 kgf-m, 5.7 ft-lb) or 12.78 N·m (1.30 kgf-m, 9.4 ft-lb) or
Torque
more more
Rotating speed 900 rpm or more 850 rpm or more
Voltage 3V 3V
Current 900 A or less 900 A or less
Lock characteristics
13.62 N·m (1.39 kgf-m, 10.0 ft-lb) or 15.42 N·m (1.57 kgf-m, 11.3 ft-lb) or
Torque
more more
Rotating-field three-phase type, voltage regulator built-in type, with load
Type
response control system
2.5 L Non-turbo A003TG2391ZC
Model 3.0 L Non-turbo A003TB1891
2.5 L Turbo A003TG0491
Manufacturer Mitsubishi Electric
Voltage and output 12V — 110A
Generator
Polarity on ground side Negative
Direction of rotation Clockwise (when observed from pulley side)
Armature connection 3-phase Y-type
1,500 rpm — 50 A or more
Output current 2,500 rpm — 91 A or more
5,000 rpm — 105 A or more
Regulated voltage 14.1 — 14.8 V [20°C (68°F)]
Battery Type and capacity 12 V — 48 AH (55D23L) 12 V — 52 AH (75D23L)
SC(H4SO)-2
General Description
B: COMPONENT
1. STARTER
T4 (13) (14)
(12)
(9) (11)
(10)
(15)
(3)
(27)
(26)
(8)
T3
(7) T2
(5) (6)
(21) (25)
(4)
(2)
(1) (24)
(20) (23)
(22)
T1
(19)
(18)
(17)
(16) SC-02108
(1) Front bracket (12) Wave washer (23) Space ring

(2) Front bearing (13) Internal gear (24) Snap ring
(3) Plunger (14) Washer (25) End frame cover
(4) Snap ring (15) Shaft (26) Plunger spring
(5) Stopper (16) Planetary gear (27) Magnet switch
(6) Overrunning clutch (17) Armature plate
(7) Snap ring (18) Yoke Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(8) Washer (19) Armature T1: 1.4 (0.14, 1.03)
(9) Lever (20) Brush holder ASSY T2: 6 (0.6, 4.4)
(10) Oilless bearing (21) End frame T3: 7.5 (0.8, 5.5)
(11) Shock absorber bearing (22) Rear bearing T4: 10 (1.0, 7.4)
SC(H4SO)-3
General Description
2. GENERATOR
(6) (7)
(5)
(4)
(3)
T1
(2)
(1)
T1
T2
(13)
(12)
(11)
(10)
(9)
(8)
SC-02121
(1) Pulley nut (7) Bearing (13) Terminal

(2) Pulley (8) Stator coil
(3) Front cover (9) IC regulator with brush Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(4) Ball bearing (10) Brush T1: 4.7 (0.48, 3.5)
(5) Bearing retainer (11) Rectifier T2: 108 (11.0, 80)
(6) Rotor (12) Rear cover
SC(H4SO)-4
General Description
C: CAUTION
forming any work.
points.
the battery.
SC(H4SO)-5
Starter
2. Starter C: DISASSEMBLY
A: REMOVAL 1. STARTER ASSEMBLY
1) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. 1) Loosen the nut which holds terminal M of mag-
net switch assembly, and then disconnect the har-
ness from terminal.
(A)
IN-00203
2) Remove the air intake chamber. (Non-turbo

SC-02039
model) <Ref. to IN(H4SO)-7, REMOVAL, Air Intake
Chamber.> <Ref. to IN(H6DO)-6, REMOVAL, Air (A) Terminal M
Intake Chamber.>
3) Remove the intercooler. (Turbo model)<Ref. to 2) Remove the bolts which hold switch assembly,
IN(H4DOTC)-12, REMOVAL, Intercooler.> and then remove the switch assembly, plunger and
4) Remove the air intake chamber stay LH. (2.5 L plunger spring from starter.
non-turbo model)
5) Disconnect the connector and terminal from
starter.
(A)
(B)
SC-02040
3) Remove the nuts of both sides, and then remove

the rear cover.
SC-02038
(A) Terminal
(B) Connector
6) Remove the starter from transmission.

B: INSTALLATION
Tightening torque:
50 N·m (5.1 kgf-m, 37 ft-lb) SC-02041
SC(H4SO)-6
Starter
4) Remove the through-bolts of bolt side, and then 7) Remove the space ring.
detach the end frame and armature from yoke as a
unit.
SC-02045
SC-02042
(A)
(B)
(B)
(A)
SC-02046
(C)
SC-02043 (A) Snap ring

(B) Space ring
(A) Yoke
(B) Armature 8) Remove the armature from end frame.
(C) End frame 9) Remove the screws.
5) Remove the end frame cover.
(A)
SC-02047
10) Remove the brush holder assembly from end

SC-02044 frame.
(A) End frame cover
SC-02048
SC(H4SO)-7
Starter
11) Remove the yoke from front bracket. 15) Use the following procedures to remove the
overrunning clutch from the shaft assembly.
(1) Remove the stopper from snap ring by light-
ly tapping the stopper with an appropriate tool
(such as a fit socket wrench).
(2) Remove the snap ring, stopper and clutch
from shaft.
(A)
SC-02049
12) Remove the armature plate from the yoke. (B)

(D)
(C)
SC-02050
13) Remove the rubber seal and planetary gear.
(A)
SC-00014
(A) Socket wrench

(B) Snap ring
(C) Shaft
(B) (D) Stopper
SC-02051
(A) Rubber seal
(B) Planetary gear
14) Remove the shaft assembly, overrunning

clutch and lever from front bracket as a unit.
(B)
SC-02053
(A)
(C)
SC-02052
(A) Front bracket

(B) Lever
(C) Shaft ASSY
SC(H4SO)-8
Starter
17) Remove the shock absorber bearing, wave 20) Remove the rear bearing from end frame.
washer and internal gear from shaft. (1) Set an appropriate tool (φ16 mm) to rear
bearing.
(C)
(2) Using a press, remove the rear bearing.
(B)
(A)
SC-02054
(A) Shock absorber bearing

SC-02057
(B) Wave washer
(C) Internal gear D: ASSEMBLY
1) Press-fit the rear bearing into end frame.
18) Remove the front bearing from front bracket. (1) Set an appropriate tool (φ22 mm) to rear
(1) Set an appropriate tool (φ13 mm) to front bearing.
bearing. (2) Press-fit the rear bearing using a press.
(2) Using a press, remove the front bearing.
NOTE:
• Use a new bearing.
• Use a flat base.
• Press-fit the bearing outer ring until it contact to
the base bottom.
SC-02055
(A)
19) Remove the oilless bearing from shock absorb-
er bearing.
(1) Set an appropriate tool (φ20 mm) to oilless
bearing. SC-02058
(2) Using a press, remove the oilless bearing.
(A) Base
SC-02056
SC(H4SO)-9
Starter
2) Press-fit the oilless bearing into shock absorber 4) Assemble the internal gear and wave washer to
bearing. shock absorber bearing.
(1) Set an appropriate tool (φ20 mm) to oilless NOTE:
bearing. Align with the claw position of shock absorber bear-
(2) Press-fit the oilless bearing using a press. ing to install internal gear.
NOTE:
• Use a new bearing. (B)
(A)
• Use a flat base.
• Press-fit the bearing outer ring until it contact to
the base bottom.
(A)
(C)
SC-02061
(A) Shock absorber bearing

(B) Wave washer
(C) Internal gear
SC-02059
5) Assemble the washer and internal gear to shaft.
(A) Base
NOTE:
Apply grease to the both sides of the shaft spline
3) Press-fit the front bearing into front bracket.
and washer.
(1) Set the front bearing into front bracket.
(2) Set an appropriate tool (2.0-mm thickness Grease:
plate) to front bracket, and press-fit the front DENSO HL50
bearing using a press.
(C)
NOTE:
• Use a new bearing.
• Measure the protrusion of front bearing after
press-fitting, to check if it is within standard value.
Standard (B)
2.0 — 2.4 mm (0.0787 — 0.0945 in)
(A)
SC-02054
(B)
(A) (A) Shock absorber bearing
(C) (B) Wave washer
(C) Internal gear
6) Assemble the snap ring.
SC-02060
(A) Front bearing

(B) Plate
(C) Front bracket
SC-02053
SC(H4SO)-10
Starter
7) Assemble the overrunning clutch to shaft. 9) Install the shaft assembly to front bracket.
NOTE: (1) Apply grease to the sliding part (A) of lever
Apply grease to the stop ring entire perimeter. pin and the pole piece (B) of arm.
Grease: Grease:
DENSO HL50 DENSO HL50
(A)
(A) (B)
SC-02063
SC-02062
(2) Insert the lever arm into the position on over
(A) Stop ring running clutch as shown in the figure.
8) Install the stopper to shaft as follows:
(1) Insert the snap ring into the shaft groove by
lightly tapping it with an appropriate tool (such
as a fit socket wrench).
NOTE:
Use new snap rings.
(A)
SC-02064
(A) (A) Lever

(B)
(3) Align the shaft assembly to the position on
front bracket as shown in the figure.
SC-00067
(A) Snap ring

(B) Stopper
(2) Press-fit the stopper to snap ring using a

press.
(A) SC-02065
(B)
SC-00068
(A) Snap ring

(B) Stopper
SC(H4SO)-11
Starter
10) Install the rubber seal. 12) Assemble the brush assembly to end frame.
NOTE:
• Be careful not to allow grease to get on brush.
(A) • Align the rubber seal part with end frame groove.
SC-02066
(A) Rubber seal
11) Install the planetary gear. SC-02048

(1) Apply a grease to the pin (A) and bushing Tightening torque:
(B). 1.4 N·m (0.14 kgf-m, 1.03 ft-lb)
(B)
(A)
(A)
SC-02067
SC-02047
(2) Assemble the planetary gear to pin. 13) Install the armature to end frame.
(3) Apply grease to the planetary gear clear-
ance (A) and pin upper part (B). NOTE:
• Apply grease to the rear bearing inner circumfer-
NOTE: ence.
• Apply grease so that it contacts each gear. • Be careful not to allow grease to attach to com-
• be careful not to allow dirt to get in. mutator.
Grease: Grease:
DENSO HL50 DENSO HL50
(A)
(A)
(B)
SC-02068
SC(H4SO)-12
Starter
14) Set the space ring, then assemble the snap • Be careful of the assembly direction of armature
ring. plate.
NOTE:
• Use new snap rings. (A)
• Check the dimension of (A) in the figure after as-
sembling snap ring. If it exceeds 5.0 mm (0.20 in),
assemble a new snap ring again.
SC-02070
(A) Armature plate
17) Assemble the armature to yoke.

NOTE:
SC-02045
• Be careful not to allow armature plate to move. It
is recommendable to support with cylindrical pipe
as shown in the figure.
• Align the positions of cutout portion of yoke with
the rubber part of end frame.
• Be careful not to damage the magnet.
(A)
(A)
(B)
SC-02069 (C)
15) Install the end frame cover. (D)
(E)
(A)
(F)
SC-02071
(A) End frame

(B) Armature
(C) Yoke
(D) Armature plate
(E) Cloth
SC-02044
(F) Pipe
(A) End frame cover
16) Assemble the armature plate to yoke.

NOTE:
• Align the rotation stopper of armature plate with (B)
the drive out part of yoke inner circumference.
(A)
SC-02072
(A) Cutout portion of yoke

(B) Rubber part
SC(H4SO)-13
Starter
18) Assemble the yoke to front bracket. 21) Install the magnet switch assembly to front
NOTE: bracket.
• Apply grease to the end surface of yoke (mating (1) Assemble the plunger hook to lever.
surface with front bracket). NOTE:
• Align the drive out position of yoke outer perime- Apply grease to the plunger hook and sleeve inner
ter with the cutout portion of front bracket. circumference.
Grease:
(A) DENSO HL50
(B)
(A)
SC-02073
(A) Drive out (B)

(B) Cutout SC-02074
(A) Lever
19) Tighten the through bolts on both sides.
(B) Plunger hook
Tightening torque:
6 N·m (0.6 kgf-m, 4.4 ft-lb) (2) Assemble the plunger spring and magnet
switch to front bracket.
NOTE:
Apply grease to the end surface of magnet switch
Grease:
DENSO HL50
SC-02042
20) Install the rear cover.
(A)
SC-02075
(A) 5 mm
SC-02041
SC(H4SO)-14
Starter
E: INSPECTION
1. ARMATURE
1) Check the commutator for any sign of burns of
(C) rough surfaces or stepped wear. If it has minor
wear, correct it by using sand paper (#300).
2) Run-out test
Check for run-out on the commutator. If excessive,
replace it.
(A) (B)
SC-02076 Commutator run-out:
Standard
(A) Plunger
3.1 mm (0.1220 in)
(B) Plunger spring Service limit
(C) Magnet switch 3.8 mm (0.1496 in) or less
(3) Tighten the bolt. (A)
Tightening torque:
7.5 N·m (0.8 kgf-m, 5.5 ft-lb)
(C)
(B)
SC-02077
(A) Dial gauge

(B) Block
SC-02040 (C) Armature
22) Connect the harness to terminal M of magnet 3) Armature short-circuit test

switch assembly. Place the armature on the growler tester to check
Tightening torque: for short circuits. Hold an iron sheet (thickness
10 N·m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.4 ft-lb) gauge, etc.) against the armature core while slowly
rotating the armature. If the circuit of the armature
is shorted, the steel seat will vibrate, causing it to
move towards the core. When the steel seat has
moved or vibrated, replace or repair the armature
(A) with the shorted circuit.
(A)
(C)
SC-02039
(B)
(A) Terminal M
SC-02078
(A) Iron sheet (thickness gauge etc.)

(B) Growler tester
(C) Armature
SC(H4SO)-15
Starter
4) Armature discontinuity test 2) Brush movement

Using a circuit tester, touch one probe to the Arma- Check that the brush moves smoothly in the brush
ture and the other to commutator. If there is no con- holder.
tinuity, it is normal. If there is continuity, the 3) Brush holder discontinuity test
armature is grounded. Using a circuit tester, bring one probe into contact
If grounded, replace the armature. with positive side brush holder and the other with
(A) negative side brush holder.
(B)
If there is no continuity, it is normal.
(B)
(C)
(C)
SC-02079 (A)
(A) Armature
SC-02081
(B) Commutator
(C) Circuit tester (A) Positive side
(B) Negative side
2. OVERRUNNING CLUTCH (C) Circuit tester
Check that there is no wear or damage to the piston
teeth. Replace if it is damaged. If it rotates smooth- 4. SWITCH ASSEMBLY
ly when rotated in the correct direction (counter- 1) Return spring check
clockwise) and does not return to the other Make sure the plunger returns to its original posi-
direction, it is normal. tion immediately after pressed-in then released.
CAUTION: (A)
To prevent spilling of grease, do not clean the
overrunning clutch with oil.
3. BRUSH AND BRUSH HOLDER
1) Brush length
Measure the length of the brush. If it exceeds ser-
vice limits, replace it.
Replace if there is abnormal wear or cracks.
Brush length: SC-02082
Standard
(A) Plunger
9.0 mm (0.354 in)
Service limit
6.0 mm (0.236 in)
(A)
SC-02080
(A) Brush
SC(H4SO)-16
Starter
2) Magnet switch continuity test 6. SHOCK ABSORBER BEARING CLEAR-

Be sure there is continuity between the terminals S ANCE
and M, and between terminal S and ground. Use a Measure the outside (A) diameter of sliding part for
circuit tester. shaft shock absorber bearing.
Also check to be sure there is no continuity be- Then, measure the inside (B) diameter of shock ab-
tween terminal M and B. sorber bearing, and calculate the clearance.
Terminal/Resistance: If it exceeds the service limit, replace the oilless
S — M/1 Ω or less bearing or shaft.
S — Ground/1 Ω or less Shock absorber bearing sliding part:
M — B/1 MΩ or more Standard
18 mm (0.709 in)
Clearance:
B Standard
S 0.03 — 0.061 mm (0.001 — 0.0024 in)
M Service limit
0.1 mm (0.003 in)
SC-00075
(A)
5. FRONT BEARING
Check the front bearing to make sure there are no
damage or rust.
Also, insert the shaft into front bearing to make sure
the front bearing rotates smoothly when the shaft is
rotated.
Replace the front bearing if faulty.
(A)
(B)
(B)
SC-02083 SC-02084
(A) Front bracket 7. REAR BEARING

(B) Shaft Check the rear bearing, and replace the rear bear-
ing if there are damage, lock or rust.
(A)
(B) SC-02085
(A) Bearing
(B) End frame
SC(H4SO)-17
Starter
8. PLANETARY GEAR BUSHING 2) Hold test

Measure the outer diameter (A) of pin which is Make sure the pinion gear remains stick out even
press-fitted into shaft flange. after disconnecting terminal M in the above condi-
Then, measure the inner diameter (B) of planetary tion.
gear bushing, and calculate the clearance.
If it exceeds the service limit, replace the planetary (B)
gear or shaft.
Clearance:
Standard
0.035 — 0.065 mm (0.001 — 0.0025 in)
Service limit
0.1 mm (0.003 in) (A)
SC-02087
(A) Terminal S
(B) Terminal M
(A)
3) Return test
(B)
Connect the positive terminal to terminal S and the
negative terminal to terminal M and starter body to
pull the pinion gear at the main contact point. Make
SC-02097 sure the pinion gear returns to its original position
when the terminal S is disconnected.
9. SWITCH ASSEMBLY OPERATION
NOTE: (B)
Test period of each test must be within short time (3
— 5 seconds).
1) Vacuum test
Disconnect the harness from terminal M and con-
nect it as shown in the figure. Make sure the pinion
gear sticks out.
(A)
SC-02088
(B)
(A) Terminal S
(B) Terminal M
(A)
SC-02086
(A) Terminal S
(B) Terminal M
SC(H4SO)-18
Starter
10.PERFORMANCE TEST 2) Load test

The starter should be submitted to performance Apply the specified braking torque to starter. The
tests whenever it has been overhauled, to assure condition is satisfactory if the current draw and ro-
its satisfactory performance when installed on the tating speed are within specifications.
engine. Load test (standard):
Three performance tests, no-load test, load test,
and lock test, are presented here; however, if the Voltage/Load
load test and lock test cannot be performed, carry MT model
out at least the no-load test. 8 V/7.76 N·m (0.79 kgf-m, 5.7 ft-lb)
For these performance tests, use the circuit shown AT model
in figure. 8 V/12.78 N·m (1.30 kgf-m, 9.4 ft-lb)
Current/Speed
MT model
280 A/900 rpm or more
B
S (B) (A)
AT model
M 370 A/850 rpm or more
3) Lock test
+
(C)
12V
With the starter stalled, or not rotating, measure the
torque developed and current draw when the volt-
V A
age is adjusted to standard voltage.
SC-00077 Lock test (standard):
(A) Variable resistance Voltage/Current
(B) Starter body MT model
(C) Magnetic switch 3 V/900 A or less
AT model
1) No-load test 3 V/900 A or less
With switch on, adjust the variable resistance until
the voltage is 11 V, read the value of ammeter to Torque
measure rotating speed. Compare these values MT model
with the standard. 13.62 N·m (1.38 kgf-m, 10.0 ft-lb)
AT model
No-load test (standard): 15.42 N·m (1.57 kgf-m, 11.3 ft-lb)
Voltage/Current
MT model
Max. 11 V/90 A or less
AT model
Max. 11 V/90 A or less
Rotating speed
MT model
1,820 rpm or more
AT model
1,720 rpm or more
SC(H4SO)-19
Generator
3. Generator 4) Remove the V-belts.

<Ref. to ME(H4SO)-37, FRONT SIDE BELT, RE-
A: REMOVAL MOVAL, V-belt.> or <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-37,
1) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. FRONT SIDE BELT, REMOVAL, V-belt.> <Ref. to
ME(H6DO)-38, REMOVAL, V-belt.>
5) Remove the bolts which install the generator
onto bracket.
IN-00203
2) Disconnect the connector and terminal from

generator. SC-00179
• 2.5 L Non-turbo model
B: INSTALLATION
Tightening torque:
25 N·m (2.5 kgf-m, 18.1 ft-lb)
CAUTION:
Check and adjust the V-belt tension.
<Ref. to ME(H4SO)-38, INSPECTION, V-belt.>
<Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-39, INSPECTION, V-belt.>
SC-00178
<Ref. to ME(H6DO)-38, INSPECTION, V-belt.>
• 3.0 L Non-turbo model
SC-00179
SC-02003 C: DISASSEMBLY
• Turbo model 1) Remove the four through-bolts.
ME-00830 SC-00078
SC(H4SO)-20
Generator
2) Use a drier to heat the rear cover (A) portion to CAUTION:

50°C (122°F). When holding the rotor with a vise, place alumi-
num plates or wooden pieces on the vise jaws
(A) to prevent rotor from damage.
(A)
(B)
SC-00079
(C)
3) Insert the end of a flat tip screwdriver into the (D)
gap between stator core and front cover. Pry them SC-00036
apart to disassemble. (A) Front cover

(B) Pulley
(C) Nut
(D) Rotor
(A) 5) Use the following procedures to remove the ball

bearings.
(1) Remove the bolt, and then detach the bear-
(A) ing retainer.
SC-00080
(A) Screwdriver
4) Using a vise, support the rotor and remove the

pulley bolt.
SC-00081
(2) Firmly attach an appropriate tool (such as a

correct size socket wrench) to the bearing inner
race.
SC-00035
SC-00082
(3) Use the press to push the ball bearings out

from the front cover.
SC(H4SO)-21
Generator
6) Using the bearing puller, remove the bearings (2) Disconnect the connection between the IC
from the rotor. regulator and rectifier, then remove the IC reg-
ulator.
SC-00046
7) Disconnect the connection between the rectifier SC-00085
and stator coil, then remove the stator coil. 9) Use the following procedures to remove the
CAUTION: brush.
The rectifier is easily damaged by heat. Do not (1) Remove the cover A.
allow a 180 — 270 W soldering iron to contact
the terminals for 5 seconds or more at a time.
(A)
SC-00086
(A) Cover A
SC-00083
8) Use the following procedures to remove the IC (2) Remove the cover B.
regulator.
(A)
(1) Remove the screws which secure the IC
regulator to the rear cover.
SC-00087
(A) Cover B
SC-00084
(3) Disconnect the connection and remove the
brush.
SC-00088
SC(H4SO)-22
Generator
10) Remove the rectifier as follows. D: ASSEMBLY

(1) Remove the bolts which secure the rectifier.
Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.
1) Pull-out of the brush
Before assembling, press the brush down into the
brush holder, then fix the brush in that position by
inserting a [1 mm (0.08 in) dia., 40 to 50 mm (1.6 to
2.0 in) long] wire through the hole as shown in the
figure.
CAUTION:
After re-assembling, remove the wire.
SC-00089 (A)
(2) Remove the cover on terminal B.
SC-00092
(A) Wire
SC-00090
2) Install the ball bearings.
(3) Remove the nuts of terminal B, then remove (1) Set the ball bearings in the front cover, then
the rectifier. securely install an appropriate tool (such as a
socket wrench of proper size) to the bearing
outer race.
(2) Using a press to press the ball bearings into
the specified location.
(3) Install the bearing retainer.
3) Use a press to install the bearings (rear side) to
the rotor shaft.
4) Heat the bearing box in rear cover [50 to 60°C
(122 to 140°F)], and then press the rear bearing
SC-00091
into rear cover.
CAUTION:
Do not apply grease to the rear bearings. If
there is any oil on the bearing box, remove it
completely.
5) After re-assembling, manually turn the pulley to
check that the rotor rotates smoothly.
SC(H4SO)-23
Generator
E: INSPECTION 2. ROTOR
1) Slip ring surface
1. DIODE
Inspect the slip rings for contamination or any
CAUTION: roughness on the sliding surface. Repair the slip
There is the possibility of damaging the diodes ring surface using a lathe or sand paper.
if a mega-tester (used to measure high voltag- 2) Slip ring outer diameter
es) or a similar measuring instrument is used. Measure the slip ring outer diameter. Replace the
Never use a mega tester or equivalent for this rotor assembly if the slip ring is worn.
test.
1) Check the positive diode Slip ring outer diameter:
Check for continuity between the diode lead and Standard
positive side heat sink. If resistance is 1 Ω or less 22.7 mm (0.894 in)
only in the direction from the diode lead to the heat Limit
sink, the positive diode is OK. 22.1 mm (0.870 in)
3) Continuity test
(A) (B) Using a circuit tester, check the resistance between
slip rings.
If the resistance is not within the standard, replace
the rotor assembly.
Approximately 1.6 — 1.9 Ω
SC-00042
(A) Diode lead

(B) Heat sink (positive side)
2) Check negative diode

Check for continuity between the negative side
heat sink and diode lead. If resistance is 1 Ω or less
SC-00044
only in the direction from the heat sink to the diode
lead, the negative diode is OK. 4) Insulation test
Check the continuity between slip ring and rotor
(A) core or shaft. If the resistance is 1 Ω or less, re-
place the rotor assembly because the rotor coil is
grounded.
(B)
SC-00043
(A) Diode lead

(B) Heat sink (negative side)
SC-00045
5) Ball bearings (rear side)

Check the rear ball bearing. If there is any noise, or
the rotor does not rotate smoothly, replace the
bearings.
SC(H4SO)-24
Generator
3. STATOR 2) Check that there is appropriate pressure on the

1) Continuity test brush spring.
Inspect continuity between the stator coil lead wire Using a spring pressure indicator, push the brush
terminals. If the resistance is 1 MΩ or more, the into the brush holder until its tip protrudes 2 mm
lead wire is damaged. Replace the stator assem- (0.08 in). Then measure the pressure of brush
bly. spring. If the pressure is 2.2 N (0.224 kgf, 7.91 oz)
or less, replace the brush spring with a new one.
(A) 4.8 — 6.0 N (0.489 — 0.612 kgf, 17. 26 — 21.58
oz) pressure is required on the new spring.
SC-00047
(A) Stator
SC-00093
2) Insulation test
Inspect the continuity between the stator coil stator 5. BEARING (FRONT SIDE)
core and lead wire terminals. If the resistance is 1 Ω Check the front ball bearing. Replace the ball bear-
or less, the stator coil is grounded. Replace the sta- ings if there is resistance in the rotation, or if there
tor assembly. is any abnormal noise.
SC-00048
4. BRUSH
1) Measure the length of each brush. Replace the
brush if wear exceeds service limits. There is a ser-
vice limit mark (A) on each brush.
Brush length:
Service limit (1)
5.0 mm (0.197 in)
Standard (2)
18.5 mm (0.728 in)
(1)
(A)
(2)
SC-00162
SC(H4SO)-25
Battery
4. Battery • Never allow metal tools to contact the posi-

tive battery terminal and anything connected to
A: REMOVAL it while you are at the same time in contact with
1) Disconnect the positive (+) terminal after discon- any other metallic portion of the vehicle.
necting the negative (–) terminal of battery. 1. EXTERNAL PARTS
2) Remove the flange nut from battery rod and re-
Check the battery case, top cover, vent plugs, and
move battery holder.
terminal posts for dirt or cracks. If necessary, clean
with water and wipe with a dry cloth.
Apply a thin coat of grease on the terminal posts to
prevent corrosion.
2. ELECTROLYTE LEVEL
Check the electrolyte level in each cell. If the level
is below MIN level, bring the level to MAX level by
pouring distilled water into the battery cell. Do not
fill beyond MAX level.
SC-00180 3. SPECIFIC GRAVITY OF ELECTROLYTE
3) Remove the battery. 1) Measure specific gravity of electrolyte using a
B: INSTALLATION hydrometer and a thermometer.
Specific gravity varies with temperature of electro-
Install in the reverse order of removal. lyte so that it must be corrected at 20°C (68°F) us-
Tightening torque: ing the following equation:
3.4 N·m (0.35 kgf-m, 2.5 ft-lb) S20= St + 0.0007 × (t – 20)
NOTE: S 20: Specific gravity corrected at electrolyte
• Clean the battery cable terminals and apply temperature of 20°C (68°F)
grease to retard the formation of corrosion. St: Measured specific gravity
• Connect the battery positive (+) terminal, and t: Measured temperature (°C)
then connect the negative (–) terminal. Determine whether or not battery must be
• After the battery is installed, initial diagnosis of charged, according to corrected specific
the electronic throttle control is performed. For this gravity.
reason, start the engine 10 seconds or more after Standard specific gravity: 1.220 — 1.290
the ignition switch was turned to ON. [20°C (68°F)]
2) Measuring the specific gravity of the electrolyte
C: INSPECTION in the battery will disclose the state of charge of the
WARNING: battery. The relation between specific gravity and
• Electrolyte is corrosive acid, and has toxici- state of charge is as shown in the figure.
ty; be careful of handling the fluid. Battery with standard specific gravity 1,280 (20 C)
• Make sure the electrode does not come into 1.28
Good
contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Especially 1.24

Specific gravity 20 ( C)
1.22
at contact with eyes, flush with water for 15 1.20
minutes and get prompt medical attention.
Need to charge
1.16
• In addition, be careful not to let the electrode
contact with the coated parts. 1.12
• Be careful when handling the batteries be- 1.08
cause they produce explosive gases. 1.04

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
• Be sure to keep battery away from any fire. Amount of discharge (%) SC-00054
• For safety, in case an explosion does occur,
wear eye protection or shield your eyes when
working near any battery. In addition, never
lean over the battery.
• Ventilate sufficiently when using or charging
battery in enclosed space.
• Before starting work, remove rings, metal
watch-bands, and other metal jewelry.
SC(H4SO)-26
Battery
D: MEASUREMENT CAUTION:
• Observe the items in 3. NORMAL CHARGING.
WARNING: • Never use 10 A or more when charging the
Do not bring an open flame close to the battery battery because it will shorten the battery life.
when working.
CAUTION:
• Prior to charging, corroded terminals should
be cleaned with a brush and common caustic
soda solution.
• Be careful since battery electrolyte overflows
while charging the battery.
• Observe instructions when handling the bat-
tery charger.
• Before charging the battery on the vehicle,
disconnect the battery ground terminal to pre-
vent damage of generator diodes or other elec-
trical units.
1. JUDGMENT OF BATTERY IN CHARGED
CONDITION
1) Specific gravity of electrolyte should be held
within the specific range from 1.250 to 1.290 for
one hour or more.
2) Voltage per battery cell should be held at a spe-
cific value in a range from 2.5 to 2.8 V for one hour
or more.
2. CHECK CONDITION OF CHARGE WITH
HYDROMETER
Hydrometer State of
Corrective action
indicator charge
Green dot 65% or more Load test
Dark dot 65% or less Charge battery
Low Replace the battery.*
Clear dot
electrolyte (If cranking is difficult)
* Check electrical system before replacement.
3. NORMAL CHARGING
Charge the battery at the current value specified by
manufacturer or at approximately 1/10 of battery’s
ampere-hour rating.
4. QUICK CHARGING
Quick charging is a method that the battery is
charged in a short period of time with a relatively
large current by using a quick charger.
Since a large current flow raises electrolyte temper-
ature, the battery is subject to damage if the large
current is used for prolonged time. For this reason,
the quick charging must be carried out within a cur-
rent range that will not increase the electrolyte tem-
perature above 40°C (104°F).
Also the quick charging is a temporary mean to
bring battery voltage up to some level, and battery
should be charged slowly with low current as a rule.
SC(H4SO)-27
Battery
SC(H4SO)-28
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)
EN(H4SO)(diag)
Page
1. Basic Diagnostic Procedure .......................................................................2
2. Check List for Interview ..............................................................................3
4. Electrical Component Location ..................................................................9
5. Engine Control Module (ECM) I/O Signal ................................................18
6. Engine Condition Data .............................................................................28
7. Data Link Connector ................................................................................29
8. General Scan Tool ...................................................................................30
9. Subaru Select Monitor ..............................................................................34
10. Read Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) .....................................................43
11. Inspection Mode .......................................................................................44
12. Drive Cycle ...............................................................................................48
13. Clear Memory Mode .................................................................................53
14. Compulsory Valve Operation Check Mode ..............................................54
15. System Operation Check Mode ...............................................................55
16. Malfunction Indicator Light .......................................................................57
17. Diagnostics for Engine Starting Failure ....................................................66
18. List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) ....................................................80
19. Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) ....................87
20. General Diagnostic Table .......................................................................311
Basic Diagnostic Procedure

1. Basic Diagnostic Procedure

A: PROCEDURE
1. ENGINE
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK ENGINE START FAILURE. Does the engine start? Go to step 2. Inspection using
1) Ask the customer when and how the trouble “Diagnostics for
occurred using the interview check list. <Ref. to Engine Start Fail-
EN(H4SO)(diag)-3, CHECK, Check List for ure”. <Ref. to
Interview.> EN(H4SO)(diag)-
2) Start the engine. 66, Diagnostics for
Engine Starting
Failure.>
2 CHECK ILLUMINATION OF MALFUNCTION Does the malfunction indicator Go to step 3. Inspection using
INDICATOR LIGHT. light illuminate? “General Diagnos-
tic Table”. <Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-
311, INSPEC-
TION, General
Diagnostic Table.>
3 CHECK INDICATION OF DTC ON DISPLAY. Is DTC displayed on the Subaru Record the DTC. Repair the related
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. Select Monitor? Repair the trouble parts.
2) Connect the Subaru Select Monitor or gen- cause. <Ref. to NOTE:
eral scan tool to data link connector. EN(H4SO)(diag)- If DTC is not
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. 80, List of Diagnos- shown on display
4) Read DTC using Subaru Select Monitor or tic Trouble Code although the mal-
general scan tool. (DTC).> Go to step function indicator
NOTE: 4. light illuminates,
• Subaru Select Monitor perform the diag-
Refer to “Read Diagnostic Trouble Code” for nosis of malfunc-
detailed operation procedure. <Ref. to tion indicator light
EN(H4SO)(diag)-43, Read Diagnostic Trouble circuit or combina-
Code (DTC).> tion meter. <Ref. to
• For detailed operation procedures, refer to EN(H4SO)(diag)-
the general scan tool operation manual. 57, Malfunction In-
dicator Light.>
4 PERFORM DIAGNOSIS. Is DTC displayed on the Subaru Inspect using Finish the diagno-
1) Perform the Clear Memory Mode. <Ref. to Select Monitor? “Diagnostic Proce- sis.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-53, Clear Memory Mode.> dure with Diagnos-
2) Perform the Inspection Mode. <Ref. to tic Trouble Code
EN(H4SO)(diag)-44, Inspection Mode.> (DTC)”. <Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-
87, Diagnostic Pro-
cedure with Diag-
nostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-2
Check List for Interview

2. Check List for Interview

A: CHECK
1. CHECK LIST NO. 1
Check the following item when problem has occurred.
NOTE:
Use copies of this page for interviewing customers.
Customer’s name Engine No.
Date of purchase Fuel brand
Date of repair km
Odometer reading
V.I.N. miles
Weather Fine
Cloudy
Rainy
Snowy
Various/Others:
Ambient air temperature °C ( °F)
Hot
Warm
Cool
Cold
Place Highway
Suburbs
Inner city
Uphill
Downhill
Rough road
Others:
Engine temperature Cold
Warming-up
After warming-up
Any temperature
Others:
Engine speed rpm
Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)
Driving conditions Not affected
At starting
While idling
At racing
While accelerating
While cruising
While decelerating
While turning (RH/LH)
Headlight ON/ OFF Rear defogger ON/ OFF
Blower ON/ OFF Audio ON/ OFF
A/C compressor ON/ OFF Car phone ON/ OFF
Radiator fan ON/ OFF
Front wiper ON/ OFF
Rear wiper ON/ OFF
EN(H4SO)(diag)-3

2. CHECK LIST NO. 2

Check the following item about the vehicle’s state when malfunction indicator light illuminates.
NOTE:
a) Other warning lights or indicators illuminate. Yes / No
Low fuel warning light
Charge indicator light
AT diagnostic indicator light
ABS warning light
Oil pressure indicator light
b) Fuel level
• Lack of gasoline: Yes / No
• Indicator position of fuel gauge:
• Experienced running out of fuel: Yes / No
c) Intentional connecting or disconnecting of harness connectors or spark plug cords: Yes / No
• What:
d) Intentional connecting or disconnecting of hoses: Yes / No
• What:
e) Installing of parts other than genuine parts: Yes / No
• What:
• Where:
f) Occurrence of noise: Yes / No
• From where:
• What kind:
g) Occurrence of smell: Yes / No
• From where:
• What kind:
h) Intrusion of water into engine compartment or passenger compartment: Yes / No
i) Troubles occurred
Engine does not start.
Engine stalls during idling.
Engine stalls while driving.
Engine speed decreases.
Engine speed does not decrease.
Rough idling
Poor acceleration
Back fire
After fire
Does not shift.
Excessive shift shock
EN(H4SO)(diag)-4
General Description
3. General Description 7) Use ECM mounting stud bolts at the body side
grounding point when measuring voltage and resis-
A: CAUTION tance inside the passenger compartment.
1) Airbag system wiring harness is routed near the
ECM, main relay and fuel pump relay.
(A)
CAUTION:
• All airbag system wiring harnesses and con-
nectors are yellow. Do not use the electrical
test equipment on these circuits.
• Be careful not to damage the airbag system
wiring harness when servicing the ECM, TCM,
main relay and fuel pump relay.
2) Never connect the battery in reverse polarity. EN-00001
Failure to do so will damage the ECM instantly, and
(A) Stud bolt
the fuel injector and other parts will also be dam-
aged.
8) Use the engine ground terminal or engine as-
3) Do not disconnect the battery terminals while the sembly for the grounding point to chassis when
engine is running. A large counter electromotive measuring the voltage and resistance in engine
force will be generated in the generator, and this compartment.
voltage may damage electronic parts such as ECM
etc.
4) Before disconnecting the connectors of each
sensor and ECM, be sure to turn the ignition switch
to OFF. Perform the Clear Memory Mode after con-
necting the connectors. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-
53, Clear Memory Mode.>
5) Measure the voltage or resistance of individual
sensor or all electrical control modules using a ta-
pered pin with a diameter of less than 0.6 mm
(0.024 in). Do not insert the pin 4 mm (0.16 in) or FU-01090
more into the part. 9) Use TCM mounting stud bolts at the body side
CAUTION: grounding point when measuring voltage and resis-
When replacing the ECM, be careful not to use tance inside the passenger compartment.
the wrong spec. ECM to avoid any damage on
the fuel injection system.
NOTE:
When replacing the ECM of the models with Immo-
bilizer, immobilizer system must be registered. To
do so, all ignition keys and ID cards need to be pre-
pared. Refer to the “IMMOBILIZER TEACHING
OPERATION MANUAL”.
6) Connectors of each sensor in the engine com- (A)
partment and the harness connectors on the en- EN-00154
gine side and body side are all designed to be
waterproof. Even if the connectors are waterproof, (A) Stud bolt
take care not to allow water to get into them when
washing the vehicle, or when servicing the vehicle 10) Every MFI-related part is a precision part. Do
in rainy weather. not drop them.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-5
General Description
11) Observe the following cautions when installing B: INSPECTION

a radio in MFI equipped models.
Before performing diagnostics, check the following
CAUTION: item which might affect engine problems.
• The antenna must be kept as far apart as pos-
sible from control unit. (The ECM is located un- 1. BATTERY
der the steering column, inside of instrument 1) Measure the battery voltage and specific gravity
panel lower trim panel.) of the electrolyte.
• The antenna feeder must be placed as far Standard voltage: 12 V
apart as possible from the ECM and MFI har-
ness. Specific gravity: 1.260 or more
• Carefully adjust the antenna for correct 2) Check the condition of the main and other fuses,
matching. and harnesses and connectors. Also check for
• When mounting a large power type radio, pay proper grounding.
special attention to the three items mentioned 2. ENGINE GROUND
above.
• Incorrect installation of the radio may affect Check if the engine ground terminal is properly
the operation of ECM. connected to engine.
12) Before disconnecting the fuel hose, remove the
fuel pump fuse from the main fuse box and crank
the engine for five seconds or more to release pres-
sure in the fuel system. If engine starts during this
operation, run it until it stops.
13) Problems in the electronic-controlled automatic
transmission may be caused by failure of the en-
gine, the electronic throttle control system, the
transmission body, or by a combination of these.
These three causes (engine, electrical control sys- FU-01090
tem, transmission) must be distinguished clearly
when performing diagnostics.
14) When performing the diagnosis, start with sim-
ple and easy operations and proceed to more com-
plicated and harder operations. The most important
thing in diagnostics is to understand the customer’s
complaint, and distinguish between the three caus-
es (engine, electrical control system, transmis-
sion).
15) In AT models, do not continue the stall for five
seconds or more at a time. (Fully open the throttle
from closed throttle to decrease engine speed.)
16) For the model with ABS, the ABS warning light
may illuminate when performing driving test with
jacked-up or lifted-up condition, but this is not a
system malfunction. The reason for this is the
speed difference between the front and rear
wheels. After diagnosis of engine control system,
perform the ABS memory clear procedure of self-
diagnosis function.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-6
General Description
C: NOTE 2. ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL

SYSTEM
1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION
• The Multipoint Fuel Injection (MFI) system is a
• The on-board diagnostic (OBD) system detects system that supplies the optimum air-fuel mixture
and indicates a fault in various inputs and outputs to the engine for all the various operating condi-
of the complex electronic throttle control. Malfunc- tions through the use of the latest electronic tech-
tion indicator light in the combination meter indi- nology.
cates occurrence of a fault or trouble. With this system, the fuel which is pressurized at a
• Further, against such a failure or sensors as may constant pressure is injected into the intake air pas-
disable the drive, the fail-safe function is provided sage of the cylinder head. The injection quantity of
to ensure the minimal driveability. fuel is controlled by an intermittent injection sys-
• The OBD system incorporated with the vehicles tem, where the electro-magnetic injection valve (fu-
within this type of engine complies with OBD-II reg- el injector) opens for a short period of time
ulations. The OBD system monitors the compo- depending on the quantity of air required for one
nents and the system malfunction listed in “Engine cycle of operation. In actual operation, the injection
Section” which affects on emissions. quantity is determined by the duration of an electric
• When the system decides that a malfunction oc- pulse applied to the fuel injector and this permits
curs, malfunction indicator light illuminates. At the simple, yet highly precise metering of the fuel.
same time of the malfunction indicator light illumi- • Furthermore, all operating conditions of the en-
nation or blinking, a DTC and a freeze frame engine are converted into electronic signals, and this
gine conditions are stored into on-board computer. enables additional system features with greatly im-
• The OBD system stores freeze frame engine proved adaptability, making it easier to add com-
condition data (engine load, engine coolant tem- pensation features.
perature, fuel trim, engine speed and vehicle The MFI system also has the following features:
speed, etc.) into on-board computer first when it • Reduced emission of harmful exhaust gases.
detects a malfunction. • Reduction in fuel consumption
• If the OBD system detects malfunctions such as • Increased engine output.
the fault of fuel trim or misfire, the OBD system first • Superior acceleration and deceleration.
stores freeze frame engine conditions about the
• Superior startability and warm-up perfor-
fuel trim or misfire.
mance in cold weather since compensation is
• When the malfunction does not occur again for made for engine coolant and intake air tempera-
three consecutive driving cycles, malfunction indi- ture.
cator light is turned off, but DTC remains at on-
board computer.
• When troubleshooting the vehicle which com-
plies with OBD-II regulations, connect the Subaru
Select Monitor or general scan tool to the vehicle.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-7
General Description
D: PREPARATION TOOL
1B020XU0 SUBARU SELECT Used for troubleshooting the electrical system.
MONITOR KIT
ST1B020XU0
499987500 CRANKSHAFT Used for rotating the crankshaft.
SOCKET
ST-499987500
EN(H4SO)(diag)-8
Electrical Component Location

4. Electrical Component Location

A: LOCATION
1. ENGINE
• Control module
(3) (1)
(4) (2)
EN-03145
(1) Engine control module (ECM) (3) Test mode connector (4) Data link connector
(2) Malfunction indicator light
(1)
CHECK
ENGINE
EN-01147 (2) EN-03104
(4)
(3)
EN-02975 AT-01877
EN(H4SO)(diag)-9

• Sensor
(1) (8) (3) (4) (2)
(7) (5) (6)
EN-05032
(1) Mass air flow and intake air (4) Electronic throttle control (7) Crankshaft position sensor
temperature sensor (5) Knock sensor (8) Oil temperature sensor
(2) Manifold absolute pressure sensor (6) Camshaft position sensor
(3) Engine coolant temperature
sensor
EN(H4SO)(diag)-10

(2)
(1)
EN-02977 EN-01971
(3)
(4)
EN-02179 EN-01972
(5)
(6)
EN-00010 EN-00011
(7)
(8)
EN-00012 EN-04089
EN(H4SO)(diag)-11

(3) (2) (4)
(1)
EN-03847
(1) Front oxygen (A/F) sensor (3) Front catalytic converter (4) Rear catalytic converter
(2) Rear oxygen sensor
(1) (2) (3)
(4)
EN-03146
(1) Fuel level sensor (3) Fuel tank pressure sensor (4) Fuel sub level sensor
(2) Fuel temperature sensor
EN(H4SO)(diag)-12

(3)
(1)
(2)
EN-03147 EN-03003
(4)
EN-03132
EN(H4SO)(diag)-13

• Solenoid valve, actuator, emission control system parts and ignition system parts
(5) (6) (4) (3) (2) (4)
(1) (6) (5)
EN-05033
(1) Purge control solenoid valve (4) Fuel injector (6) Variable valve lift diagnosis oil
(2) EGR valve (5) Oil switching solenoid valve pressure switch
(3) Ignition coil and ignitor ASSY
EN(H4SO)(diag)-14

(1) (2)
EN-01975 EN-01976
(3)
EN-03105 (4) EN-03106
(6)
(5)
EN-04985
EN(H4SO)(diag)-15

(1)
(2) (3) (4)

EN-04017
(1) Pressure control solenoid valve (3) Drain valve (4) Drain filter
(2) Canister
(4)
(3)
(2)
(1)
EN-02980 EN-02981
EN(H4SO)(diag)-16

(5) (4) (3) (2)

(1)
(8) (7) (6) (9)

EN-03149
(1) Inhibitor switch (4) Fuel pump relay (7) Radiator sub fan relay
(2) Fuel pump (5) Electronic throttle control relay (8) Radiator main fan relay 2
(3) Main relay (6) Radiator main fan relay 1 (9) Starter
(2)
(1)
EN-00178 EN-02093
(6)
(4)
(8)
(3) (7)
(5)
EN-03150 EN-02095
(9)
EN-02096
EN(H4SO)(diag)-17
Engine Control Module (ECM) I/O Signal

5. Engine Control Module (ECM) I/O Signal

A: ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION
TO A: B134 TO B: B135 TO C: B136 TO D: B137
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18
34 33 32 31 30 29 28 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 31 30 29 28 27 26
EN-05288
Signal (V)
Connector Terminal
Contents Ignition SW ON Engine ON Note
No. No.
(engine OFF) (idling)
Crankshaft Signal (+) B134 13 0 –7 — +7 Waveform
position Signal (–) B134 14 0 0 —
sensor Shield B134 24 0 0 —
Camshaft Signal (+) B134 12 0 –7 — +7 Waveform
0.64 — 0.72
0.64 — 0.72 Fully closed: 0.6
Main B134 18 (After engine is
Fully opened: 3.96 Fully opened: 3.96
warmed-up.)
1.51 — 1.58
1.51 — 1.58 Fully closed: 1.48
Electronic Sub B134 28 (After engine is
throttle control warmed-up.)
Power
B134 19 5 5 —
supply
GND
B134 29 0 0 —
(sensor)
Electronic throttle control
B137 5 Duty waveform Duty waveform Drive frequency: 500 Hz
motor (+)
motor (–)
B136 1 10 — 13 12 — 14 —
motor power supply
Electronic throttle control ON: 0 ON: 0 When ignition switch is
B136 21
motor relay OFF: 10 — 13 OFF: 12 — 14 turned to ON: ON
EN(H4SO)(diag)-18

Signal (V)
Connector Terminal
No. No.
Main sensor Fully closed: 1.0 Fully closed: 1.0
B135 23 —
signal Fully opened: 3.5 Fully opened: 3.5
Main power
B135 21 5 5 —
supply
GND
Accelerator (Main B135 29 0 0 —
pedal position sensor)
sensor Sub sensor Fully closed: 1.0 Fully closed: 1.0
B135 31 —
Sub power
B135 f2 5 5 —
supply
GND
B135 30 0 0 —
(Subsensor)
Rear oxygen Signal B135 4 0 0 — 0.9 —
Front oxygen Signal 1 B136 3 10 — 13 1 — 14 Duty waveform
(A/F) sensor
heater Signal 2 B136 2 10 — 13 1 — 14 Duty waveform
Rear oxygen sensor heater
B136 4 10 — 13 1 — 14 Duty waveform
signal
Engine coolant temperature After engine is
B134 34 1.0 — 1.4 1.0 — 1.4
sensor warmed-up.
Starter switch B136 32 0 0 Cranking: 8 — 14
ON: 0.5 or less ON: 05 or less
Starter relay control B136 20 —
OFF: 10 — 13 OFF: 12 — 14
ON: 10 — 13 ON: 12 — 14
A/C switch B136 24 —
OFF: 0 OFF: 0
Ignition switch B135 19 10 — 13 12 — 14 —
For AT model, switch is
ON: 0 ON when select lever is
AT
Neutral OFF: 12±0.5 shifted into “P” or “N”
position B136 31 range.
switch For MT model, switch is
ON: 0
MT ON when select lever is
OFF: 12±0.5
shifted into “N” range.
Test mode connector B135 27 10 — 13 13 — 14 When connected: 0
Signal B134 15 2.5 2.5 —
Knock sensor
Shield B134 25 0 0 —
Ignition switch “OFF”:
Back-up power supply B135 5 10 — 13 12 — 14
10 — 13
Control module power B134 7 10 — 13 12 — 14 —
supply B135 2 10 — 13 12 — 14 —
Ignition #1, #2 B137 18 0 1 — 3.4 Waveform
control #3, #4 B137 19 0 1 — 3.4 Waveform
#1 B137 8 10 — 13 1 — 14 Waveform
#2 B137 9 10 — 13 1 — 14 Waveform
Fuel injector
#3 B137 10 10 — 13 1 — 14 Waveform
#4 B137 11 10 — 13 1 — 14 Waveform
ON: 0.5 or less ON: 0.5 or less
Fuel pump relay control B136 12 —
OFF: 10 — 13 OFF: 12 — 14
A/C relay control B136 9 —
OFF: 10 — 13 OFF: 12 — 14
EN(H4SO)(diag)-19

Signal (V)
Connector Terminal
No. No.
Radiator fan relay 1 control B136 18 —
OFF: 10 — 13 OFF: 12 — 14
OFF: 10 — 13 OFF: 12 — 14
Self-shutoff control B136 23 0.5 or less 0.5 or less —
Light “ON”: 1 or less
Malfunction indicator light B136 11 — —
Light “OFF”: 10 — 14
Engine speed output B136 22 — 0 — 13 or more Waveform
Oil temperature sensor After engine is
B134 23 1.0 — 1.4 1.0 — 1.4
signal warmed-up.
PCV diagnosis connector B134 30 0 0 —
ON: 1 or less ON: 1 or less
Purge control solenoid valve B137 29 Duty waveform
OFF: 10 — 13 OFF: 12 — 14
Signal 1 B134 8 0 or 10 — 13 0 or 12 — 14 Waveform
EGR solenoid Signal 2 B134 9 0 or 10 — 13 0 or 12 — 14 Waveform
valve Signal 3 B134 10 0 or 10 — 13 0 or 12 — 14 Waveform
Signal 4 B134 20 0 or 10 — 13 0 or 12 — 14 Waveform
Power steering oil pressure ON: 1 or less ON: 1 or less
B134 33 —
switch OFF: 10 — 13 OFF: 12 — 14
ON: 0 ON: 0
Blower fan switch B135 16 —
OFF: 10 — 13 OFF: 12 — 14
ON: 0 ON: 0
A/C middle pressure switch B136 33 —
OFF: 10 — 13 OFF: 12 — 14
Oil switching Signal (+) B137 25 0 Duty waveform Drive frequency: 300 Hz
solenoid valve
RH Signal (–) B137 24 0 0 —
Oil Signal (+) B137 31 0 Duty waveform Drive frequency: 300 Hz
switching
solenoid valve Signal (–) B137 30 0 0 —
LH
Variable valve lift diagnosis
B134 31 0 0 —
oil pressure switch RH
Variable valve lift diagnosis
B134 32 0 0 —
oil pressure switch LH
Front oxygen (A/F) sensor
B135 9 — 2.7 — 2.9 —
signal (+)
B135 8 — 2.35 — 2.25 —
signal (–)
B135 1 0 0 —
shield
Manifold absolute pressure
B134 6 3.4 — 3.8 1.4 — 1.8 —
sensor
Signal B135 26 — 0.3 — 4.5 —
Air flow
Shield B135 35 0 0 —
sensor
GND B135 34 0 0 —
Intake air temperature
B135 18 0.3 — 4.6 0.3 — 4.6 —
sensor signal
1 or less ←→ 4 or 1 or less ←→ 4 or
Immobilizer communication 1 B136 26 —
more more
Immobilizer communication 2 B136 34 —
more more
EN(H4SO)(diag)-20

Signal (V)
Connector Terminal
No. No.
SSM communication line B136 16 —
more more
B134 19 5 5 —
Sensor power supply
B135 22 5 5 —
B134 29 0 0 —
GND (sensor)
B135 30 0 0 —
(Engine 1) B134 5 0 0 —
(Engine 2) B137 7 0 0 —
(Engine 3) B137 2 0 0 —
(Engine 4) B137 1 0 0 —
GND
(Engine 5) B137 3 0 0 —
(Ignition 1) B137 26 0 0 —
(Ignition 2) B137 6 0 0 —
(Body) B136 6 0 0 —
When clutch pedal is When clutch pedal is
depressed: 0 depressed: 0
Clutch switch B136 25 —
When brake pedal is When brake pedal is
released: 10 — 13 released: 12 — 14
Brake switch 1 B135 20 —
depressed: 10 — 13 depressed: 12 — 14
released: 0 released: 0
ON: 0 ON: 0
Cruise control main switch B135 12 —
OFF: 5 OFF: 5
When operating noth- When operating noth-
ing: 3.5 — 4.5 ing: 3.5 — 4.5
When operating RES/ When operating RES/
Cruise control command ACC: 2.5 — 3.5 ACC: 2.5 — 3.5
B135 24 —
switch When operating SET/ When operating SET/
COAST: 0.5 — 1.5 COAST: 0.5 — 1.5
When operating can- When operating
cel: 0 — 0.5 cancel: 0 — 0.5
Ambient temperature:
Fuel temperature sensor B135 17 2.5 — 3.8 2.5 — 3.8
25°C (77°F)
Value after removing
Fuel tank pressure sensor B135 32 2.3 — 2.7 2.3 — 2.7 fuel filler cap and
installing again
Pressure control solenoid ON: 1 or less ON: 1 or less
B136 28 —
valve OFF: 10 — 13 OFF: 12 — 14
Drain valve B136 17 —
OFF: 10 — 13 OFF: 12 — 14
CAN communication line (+) B136 27 2.5 — 3.5 2.5 — 3.5 Waveform
CAN communication line (–) B136 35 1.5 — 2.5 1.5 — 2.5 Waveform
EN(H4SO)(diag)-21

Input/output name Measuring condition Waveform

1. Crankshaft position sensor During idling
10ms
5V
ONE CRANK ROTATION
EN-05322
2. Camshaft position sensor During idling

50ms
5V
ONE CAM ROTATION
EN-05323
EN(H4SO)(diag)-22

F/B FUSE No. 4
DATA LINK
CONNECTOR
MT
C25
MT
STARTER MOTOR
CLUTCH SWITCH
C16
IGNITION SWITCH
C20
F/B FUSE No. 21
CLUTCH SWITCH
STARTER
B27
RELAY
TEST MODE
MT
MT
CONNECTOR
C32 TEST MODE
AT
SUB CONNECTOR
B5 C6
M/B FUSE No. 13 JOINT
CONNECTOR
B19
F/B FUSE No. 12 1 MT
M/B FUSE No. 11

1
NEUTRAL
B23
MT
SWITCH
MT
FUEL
PUMP
RELAY B21
INHIBITOR C31
AT
SWITCH B31 ACCELERA
-TOR
PEDAL
POSITION
SENSOR
C12 B29
FUEL
B22
PUMP
FUEL
CONDENSER PUMP
POWER STEERING
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
A33 FUEL TANK

B32
PRESSURE SENSOR
JOINT
CONNECTOR
B30
14 9 3
EN-05034
EN(H4SO)(diag)-23

SBF No. 7
SBF No. 5
A/F &
MAIN RELAY
OXYGEN
RELAY HOLDER
RELAY
D18
ELECTRONIC
THROTTLE 4
CONTROL
RELAY
C1 IGNITION COIL
D19
& IGNITOR ASSY
C21
D26
D6
C23
A7
B2 F/B FUSE No. 7
F/B FUSE No. 5
PURGE CONTROL D29 COMBINATION METER

SOLENOID VALVE
MALFUNCTION
INDICATOR LIGHT
C11
A8
TRANSCEIVER
I/F
& RECEIVER
BODY
INTEGRATED POWER
UNIT SUPPLY CIRCUIT
(CAN
CAN
COMMUNICATION)
MICRO COMPUTER
TACHO-
A9 C22 METER
I/F
EGR VALVE ABS I/F SPEEDO-

METER
A10
ABS CONTROL MODULE
ENGINE
COOLANT
TEMPE-
RATURE
GAUGE
5
A20
JOINT GROUND
CONNECTOR
EN-05035
EN(H4SO)(diag)-24

5 3
FUEL INJECTOR D8
No. 1
A18
FUEL INJECTOR D9
No. 2 6
A28 ELECTRONIC
THROTTLE
CONTROL
D4
FUEL INJECTOR D10
No. 3
D5
A19
FUEL INJECTOR D11

No. 4
MANIFOLD
A6
ABSOLUTE
A29 PRESSURE
C17 SENSOR
DRAIN VALVE
A34
ENGINE
COOLANT
TEMPERATURE
PRESSURE CONTROL C28 SENSOR
SOLENOID VALVE
7 10
OIL
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
A23
14
FUEL
5 B17 TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
EN-05036
EN(H4SO)(diag)-25

5 9
B18
MASS AIR B34

FLOW & A32 VVL DIAGNOSIS OIL
INTAKE AIR PRESSURE SWITCH LH
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
B26
A31 VVL DIAGNOSIS OIL
B35 PRESSURE SWITCH RH
D30
OIL SWITCHING
D31 SOLENOID VALVE LH
B9 D24
FRONT OIL SWITCHING
OXYGEN D25 SOLENOID VALVE RH
B8
(A/F)
SENSOR
RH
C2
2 C3 A13
CRANKSHAFT
10 B1 A14 POSITION SENSOR
REAR
OXYGEN C4
SENSOR 12
LH
B4
A12
CAMSHAFT
11 A22 POSITION SENSOR
A24
13 7
A15 KNOCK SENSOR
A25
EN-05037
EN(H4SO)(diag)-26

B28
STOP LIGHT SWITCH
C24
AUTO A/C CONTROL MODULE
B20
BRAKE SWITCH
C33
A/C PRESSURE SWITCH
C9
A/C RELAY
B12
CRUISE CONTROL
SWITCH
B24
C26
B16
BODY INTEGRATED UNIT BLOWER FAN RELAY
(IMMOBILIZER)
C34
2 11 6 12 13 8
C27 D2
BODY INTEGRATED UNIT
(CAN COMMUNICATION) D1
C35
D7
D3
C18
SUB FAN RELAY
C15
MT
C29
MAIN FAN RELAY
A5
ENGINE GROUND
EN-05038
EN(H4SO)(diag)-27
Engine Condition Data

6. Engine Condition Data

17.6 — 40.5 (%): Idling
Engine load
14.7 — 29.8 (%): 2,500 rpm racing
Measuring condition:
• After engine is warmed-up.
• Gear position is in “N” or “P” range.
• Turn the A/C to OFF.
• Turn all the accessory switches to OFF.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-28
Data Link Connector

7. Data Link Connector

A: NOTE
This connector is used for Subaru Select Monitor.
CAUTION:
Do not connect any scan tools except Subaru Select Monitor or general scan tool because the circuit
for Subaru Select Monitor may be damaged.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
EN-04893
Terminal No. Contents Terminal No. Contents

1 Blank 9 Blank
2 Blank 10 Blank
3 Blank 11 Blank
4 Ground 12 Blank
5 Ground 13 Blank
6 CAN (+) 14 CAN (–)
7 Subaru Select Monitor signal 15 Blank
8 Blank 16 Power supply
EN(H4SO)(diag)-29
General Scan Tool

8. General Scan Tool

A: OPERATION
1. HOW TO USE GENERAL SCAN TOOL
1) Prepare a scan tool (general scan tool) required
by SAE J1978.
2) Open the cover and connect the general scan
tool to the data link connector located in the lower
portion of instrument panel (on the driver’s side).
EN-02533
3) Using the general scan tool, call up DTC and

freeze frame data.
General scan tool functions consist of:
(1) MODE $01: Current powertrain diagnostic
data
(2) MODE $02: Powertrain freeze frame data
(3) MODE $03: Emission-related powertrain
DTC
(4) MODE $04: Clear/Reset emission-related
diagnostic information
(5) MODE $06: Request on-board monitoring
test results for intermittently monitored systems
test results for continuously monitored systems
(7) MODE $09: Request vehicle information
Read out the data according to repair procedures.
(For detailed operation procedure, refer to the gen-
eral scan tool instruction manual.)
NOTE:
For details concerning DTC, refer to “List of Diag-
nostic Trouble Code (DTC)”. <Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-80, List of Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-30
General Scan Tool

2. MODE $01 (CURRENT POWERTRAIN DIAGNOSTIC DATA)

Refer to data denoting the current operating condition of analog input/output, digital input/output or the pow-
ertrain system.
A list of the support data and PID (Parameter Identification) codes are shown in the following table.
PID Data Unit of measure
Number of emission-related powertrain DTC, and malfunction indicator light status and diag-
$01 —
nosis support information
$03 Fuel system control status —
$04 Calculated engine load value %
$05 Engine coolant temperature °C
$06 Short term fuel trim %
$07 Long term fuel trim %
$0B Intake manifold absolute pressure kPa
$0C Engine speed rpm
$0D Vehicle speed km/h, MPH
$0E Ignition timing advance °
$0F Intake air temperature °C or °F
$10 Air flow rate from mass air flow sensor g/sec
$11 Throttle valve absolute opening angle %
$13 Check whether oxygen sensor is installed. —
Oxygen sensor output voltage and short term fuel trim associated with oxygen sensor
$15 V and %
(Bank 1 Sensor 2)
$1C Supporting OBD system —
$1F Elapsed time after starting the engine sec
$21 Travel distance after the malfunction indicator light illuminates km
$24 A/F value and A/F sensor output voltage (Bank 1 Sensor 1) — and V
$2C Target EGR %
$2D EGR deviation %
$2E Evaporative purge %
$2F Fuel level %
$30 Number of warm ups after DTC clear —
$31 Travel distance after DTC clear km
$32 Fuel tank pressure mmHg
$33 Atmospheric pressure mmHg
$34 A/F value and A/F sensor current (Bank 1 Sensor 1) — and mA
$3C Catalyst temperature #1 °C
$41 Diagnostic monitor of each drive cycle —
$42 ECM power voltage V
$43 Absolute load %
$44 A/F target lambda —
$45 Relative throttle opening angle %
$46 Ambient temperature °C
$47 Absolute throttle opening angle 2 %
$49 Absolute accelerator opening angle 1 %
$4A Absolute accelerator opening angle 2 %
$4C Target throttle opening angle %
$4D Engine operating time while malfunction indicator lit min
$4E Elapsed time after DTC clear min
$51 Fuel used —
$5A Relative accelerator opening angle %
NOTE:
Refer to general scan tool manufacturer’s instruction manual to access generic OBD-II PIDs (MODE $01).
EN(H4SO)(diag)-31
General Scan Tool

3. MODE $02 (POWERTRAIN FREEZE FRAME DATA)

Refer to data denoting the operating condition when trouble is detected by on-board diagnosis system.
$02 DTC that caused the freeze frame data storage required by CARB —
$06 Short term fuel trim (Bank 1 Sensor 1) %
$07 Long term fuel trim (Bank 1 Sensor 1) %
$0D Vehicle speed km/h, MPH
$0F Intake air temperature °C or °F
$10 Air flow rate from mass air flow sensor g/sec
Oxygen sensor output voltage and short term fuel trim associated with oxygen sensor
$15 V and %
(Bank 1 Sensor 2)
$2C Target EGR %
$2D EGR deviation %
$2F Fuel level %
$43 Absolute load %
NOTE:
Refer to general scan tool manufacturer’s instruction manual to access freeze frame data (MODE $02).
4. MODE $03 (EMISSION-RELATED POWERTRAIN DTC)
Refer to “List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)” for information about data denoting emission-related pow-
ertrain DTC. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-80, List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
5. MODE $04 (CLEAR/RESET EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION)
Refer to the mode used to clear or reset emission-related diagnostic information (OBD-II trouble diagnostic
information).
NOTE:
Refer to general scan tool manufacturer’s instruction manual to clear the emission-related diagnostic infor-
mation (MODE $04).
EN(H4SO)(diag)-32
General Scan Tool

6. MODE $06
Refer to test value of troubleshooting and data of test limit indicated on the support data bit sequence table.
A list of the support data is shown in the following table.
OBDMID TID SID Diagnostic item
$81 $0A
$82 $8D A/F sensor continuity abnormal (Bank 1 Sensor 1)
$83 $14
$01
$84 $1E
A/F sensor range abnormal (Bank 1 Sensor 1)
$85 $1E
$86 $20 A/F sensor response abnormal (Bank 1 Sensor 1)
$87 $0B
Oxygen sensor circuit abnormal (Bank 1 Sensor 2)
$88 $0B
$07 $0B
$02 $08 $0B Oxygen sensor drop abnormal (Bank 1 Sensor 2)
$A5 $0B
$05 $10
Oxygen sensor response abnormal (Bank 1 Sensor 2)
$06 $10
$21 $89 $20 Catalyst deterioration diagnosis (Bank 1)
$31 $8A $FD EGR system diagnosis
$39 $93 $FE Evaporative emission control system (Cap off)
$94 $FE
$3B Evaporative emission control system (0.04 inch leak)
$95 $FE
$96 $FE
$3C Evaporative emission control system (0.02 inch leak)
$97 $FE
$3D $98 $FE Evaporative emission control system (Purge flow)
$99 $24
A/F sensor heater abnormal (Bank 1 Sensor 1)
$41 $9A $24
$9B $14 A/F sensor heater characteristics abnormal (Bank 1 Sensor 1)
$9C $24
$42 Oxygen sensor heater abnormal (Bank 1 Sensor 1)
$9D $24
$0B $24
$A1 Misfire monitoring (All cylinders)
$0C $24
$0B $24
$A2 Misfire monitoring (#1 cylinder)
$0C $24
$0B $24
$0C $24
$0B $24
$0C $24
$0B $24
$0C $24
7. MODE $07
Refer to the data of DTC (pending code) for troubleshooting result about emission in the first time.
8. MODE $09
Refer to data of vehicle specification (V.I.N., calibration ID, diagnosis frequency etc.).
EN(H4SO)(diag)-33
Subaru Select Monitor

9. Subaru Select Monitor

A: OPERATION
1. HOW TO USE THE SUBARU SELECT
MONITOR
1) Prepare the Subaru Select Monitor kit. <Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-8, PREPARATION TOOL, Gen-
eral Description.>
2) Connect the diagnosis cable to the Subaru Se-
lect Monitor.
link connector.
(1) Data link connector is located in the lower
portion of instrument panel (on the driver’s
side).
EN-02533
(2) Connect the diagnosis cable to the data link

connector.
CAUTION:
Do not connect the scan tools except for the
Subaru Select Monitor or general scan tool.
4) Turn the ignition switch to ON (engine OFF) and
run the Subaru Select Monitor.
5) Using the Subaru Select Monitor, call up DTC
and data, then record them.
2. READ DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE
(DTC) FOR ENGINE (NORMAL MODE)
Refer to “Read Diagnostic Trouble Code” for infor-
mation about how to indicate DTC. <Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-43, Read Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
(DTC) FOR ENGINE (OBD MODE)
mation about how to indicate DTC. <Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-43, Read Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-34

4. READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE (NORMAL MODE)

1) On the «Main Menu» display screen, select {Each System Check}.
2) On the «System Selection Menu» display screen, select {Engine Control System}.
3) Select the [OK] after the information of engine type has been displayed.
4) On the «Engine Diagnosis» display screen, select the {Current Data Display/Save}.
5) On the «Data Display Menu» screen, select {Data Display}.
6) Using the scroll key, scroll the display screen up or down until the desired data is shown.
Unit of
Contents Display Note (at idling)
measure
Engine load Engine Load % 21.0%
85°C or 185°F or more
Engine coolant temperature signal Coolant Temp. °C or °F
(after warm-up)
A/F correction 1 A/F Correction #1 % –0.8%
A/F learning 1 A/F Learning #1 % 0.0%
200 — 300 mmHg, 26.7
mmHg, kPa,
Intake manifold absolute pressure Mani. Absolute Pressure — 40 kPa, 7.8 — 11.8
inHg or psig
inHg or 3.8 — 5.8 psig
700 rpm (Agree with the
Engine speed signal Engine speed rpm
tachometer indication)
km/h or 0 km/h or 0 MPH
Meter vehicle speed signal Vehicle Speed
MPH (at parking)
Ignition timing signal Ignition Timing deg 14 — 16 deg
Intake air temperature signal Intake Air Temp. °C or °F (Ambient air temperature)
Amount of intake air Mass Air Flow g/s or lb/m 2.5 g/s or 0.33 lb/m
Throttle opening angle signal Throttle Opening Angle % 2.0%
Rear oxygen sensor voltage Rear O2 Sensor V 0.1 — 0.7 V
Battery voltage Battery Voltage V 12 — 14 V
Mass air flow voltage Air Flow Sensor Voltage V 1.26 V
Injection 1 pulse width Fuel Injection #1 Pulse ms 2.82 ms
Knock sensor compensation Knocking Correction deg 0.0 deg
mmHg, kPa,
Atmospheric pressure signal Atmosphere Pressure (Atmosphere pressure)
inHg or psig
(Air intake absolute
mmHg, kPa,
Intake manifold relative pressure Mani. Relative Pressure pressure – atmosphere
inHg or psig
pressure)
mmHg, kPa, +7.7 mmHg, +1.1 kPa,
Fuel tank pressure signal Fuel Tank Pressure
inHg or psig +0.31 inHg or +0.15 psig
Ignition learning value Learned Ignition deg 0 deg
Timming
Acceleration opening angle signal Accel. Opening Angle % 0.0%
Fuel temperature signal Fuel Temp. °C or °F +20°C or +68°F
Purge control solenoid duty ratio CPC Valve Duty Ratio % 0 — 3%
No. of EGR steps No. of EGR Steps STEP 0 STEP
A/F sensor current value 1 A/F Sensor #1 Current mA –0.2 — 0.2 mA
A/F Sensor #1
A/F sensor resistance value 1 Ω 32 Ω
Resistance
A/F sensor output
A/F sensor output lambda 1 — 1.0
lambda 1
A/F correction 3 A/F Correction #3 % 0.3%
A/F learning 3 A/F Learning #3 % 0.00%
Throttle motor duty Throttle Motor Duty % –15%
Throttle power supply voltage Throttle Motor Voltage V (Battery voltage)
EN(H4SO)(diag)-35

Unit of
measure
Sub throttle sensor voltage Sub-throttle Sensor V 1.52 V
Main throttle sensor voltage Main-throttle Sensor V 0.66 V
Sub accelerator sensor voltage Sub-accelerator Sensor V 0.68 V
Main accelerator sensor voltage Main-accelerator Sensor V 0.68 V
Memorized Cruise km/h or
Memory vehicle speed 0 km/h or 0 MPH
Speed MPH
Fuel level sensor signal Fuel Level Resistance Ω 2 — 96 Ω
≥ 85°C (After engine is
Engine oil temperature Engine Oil Temperature °C
warmed-up.)
Oil switching solenoid valve duty R OSV Duty R % 16.9%
Oil switching solenoid valve duty L OSV Duty L % 16.9%
Oil switching solenoid valve current R OSV Current R mA 192 mA
Oil switching solenoid valve current L OSV Current L mA 192 mA
Variable valve lift mode VVL Lift Mode — 1
#1 cylinder roughness monitor Roughness Monitor #1 — 0
AT/MT identification terminal AT Vehicle ID Signal — AT vehicle/MT vehicle
Test mode terminal Test Mode Terminal — U check
D check request flag D Check Request — OFF
Delivery mode terminal Delivery Mode — OFF
Neutral position switch signal Neutral Position Switch — Neutral
Soft idle switch signal Idle Switch Signal — At idle
Ignition switch signal Ignition Switch — ON input
Power steering switch signal P/S Switch — OFF input (when OFF)
Air conditioning switch signal A/C Switch — OFF input (when OFF)
Starter switch signal Starter Switch — OFF input
Rear oxygen monitor Rear O2 Rich Signal — Rich/Lean
Knocking signal Knocking Signal — None
Crankshaft Position
Crankshaft position sensor signal — Provided
Signal
Camshaft Position
Camshaft position sensor signal — Provided
Signal
Rear defogger switch signal Rear Defogger Switch — OFF input (when OFF)
Blower fan switch signal Blower Fan Switch — OFF input (when OFF)
Light switch signal Light Switch — OFF input (when OFF)
A/C middle pressure switch signal A/C Mid Pressure Switch — OFF input (when OFF)
Air conditioner compressor relay output signal A/C Compressor Signal — OFF output (when OFF)
Radiator fan relay 1 signal Radiator Fan Relay #1 — OFF output (when OFF)
Radiator fan relay 2 signal Radiator Fan Relay #2 — OFF output (when OFF)
Fuel pump relay signal Fuel Pump Relay — ON output
Blow-by Leak Diagnosis
PCV hose assembly diagnosis signal — Connected
Connector
Pressure control solenoid valve signal PCV Solenoid Valve — OFF output
Drain valve signal Vent. Solenoid Valve — OFF output
Variable valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch signal 1 Eng. Oil Press. SW 1 — ON
Variable valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch signal 2 Eng. Oil Press. SW 2 — ON
AT coordinate retard angle demand signal Retard Signal from AT — None
AT coordinate fuel cut demand signal Fuel Cut Signal from AT — None
EN(H4SO)(diag)-36

Unit of
measure
Torque Control Allowed (prohibited on
AT coordinate permission signal —
Permission Signal MT vehicles)
Electronic throttle control motor relay signal ETC Motor Relay — ON
Clutch switch signal Clutch Switch — OFF (when OFF)
Stop light switch signal Stop Light Switch — OFF (when OFF)
SET/COAST switch signal SET/COAST Switch — OFF (when OFF)
RES/ACC switch signal RESUME/ACCEL Switch — OFF (when OFF)
Brake switch signal Brake Switch — OFF input (when OFF)
Main switch signal Main Switch — OFF input (when OFF)
Body integrated unit data reception Body Int. Unit Data — ON
Body integrated unit counter update Body Int. Unit Count — ON
Cruise Control Cancel
Cruise control cancel switch signal — OFF input (when OFF)
Switch
Malfunction indicator light signal MIL Lit Flag — Off (when unlit)
NOTE:
For detailed operation procedure, refer to the “SUBARU SELECT MONITOR OPERATION MANUAL”.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-37

5. READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE (OBD MODE)

4) On the «Engine Diagnosis» display screen, select the {OBD System}.
5) On the «OBD Menu» display screen, select the {Current Data Display/Save}.
Unit of
measure
Number of diagnosis code Number of DTC — 0
Condition of malfunction indicator light MI (MIL) — OFF
Monitoring test of misfire Misfire monitoring — Supp YES
Monitoring test of misfire Misfire monitoring — Rdy YES/Rdy NO
Monitoring test of fuel system Fuel system monitoring — Supp YES
Monitoring test of fuel system Fuel system monitoring — Rdy YES/Rdy NO
Monitoring test of comprehensive component Component monitoring — Supp YES
Monitoring test of comprehensive component Component monitoring — Rdy YES/Rdy NO
Test of catalyst Catalyst Diagnosis — Supp YES
Test of catalyst Catalyst Diagnosis — Rdy YES/Rdy NO
Test of heating-type catalyst Heated catalyst — Supp NO
Test of heating-type catalyst Heated catalyst — Rdy N/A
Evaporative purge
Test of evaporative emission purge control system — Supp YES
system
Evaporative purge
Test of evaporative emission purge control system — Rdy YES/Rdy NO
system
Secondary air system test Secondary air system — Supp NO
Secondary air system test Secondary air system — Rdy N/A
Test of air conditioning system A/C system refrigerant — Supp NO
Test of air conditioning system A/C system refrigerant — Rdy N/A
Test of oxygen sensor Oxygen sensor — Supp YES
Test of oxygen sensor Oxygen sensor — Rdy YES/Rdy NO
Test of oxygen sensor heater O2 Heater Diagnosis — Supp YES
Test of oxygen sensor heater O2 Heater Diagnosis — Rdy YES/Rdy NO
Test of EGR system EGR system — Supp YES
Test of EGR system EGR system — Rdy YES/Rdy NO
A/F control #1 Fuel system for BANK 1 — Normal CLOSE
Calculated load value Calculated load valve % 23.0%
Engine coolant temperature signal Coolant Temp. °C or °F +92°C
A/F correction value #1 A/F Correction Value #1 % –0.8%
A/F learning #1 A/F Learning Value #1 % +0.0%
mmHg, kPa, 211 mmHg, 28.1 kPa,
Intake manifold absolute pressure Mani. Absolute Pressure
inHg or psig 8.31 inHg or 4.08 psig
Engine speed signal Engine Speed rpm 700 rpm
km/h or
Vehicle speed signal Vehicle Speed 0 km/h or 0 MPH
MPH
Ignition timing adv. #1 Ignition timing adv.#1 ° +16.0°
Intake air temperature signal Intake Air Temp. °C or °F 36°C or 97°F
Amount of intake air Mass Air Flow g/s or lb/m 2.7 g/s or 0.36 lb/m
Throttle opening angle signal Throttle Opening Angle % 13%
Oxygen sensor (Bank 1 Sensor 2) Oxygen sensor #12 V 0.7 V
EN(H4SO)(diag)-38

Unit of
measure
A/F correction (Bank 1 Sensor 2) A/F Correction #12 % +0.0%
OBD system OBD system — CARB–OBD2
Front oxygen (A/F) sensor (Bank 1 Sensor 1) Oxygen sensor #11 — Support
Oxygen sensor (Bank 1 Sensor 2) Oxygen sensor #12 — Support
Time elapsed after engine start Time Since Engine Start sec —
Driving distance after the malfunction indicator light
Lighted MI lamp history km or miles —
illuminates
Front oxygen (A/F) sensor (Bank 1 Sensor 1) A/F sensor #11 — 1.001
Front oxygen (A/F) sensor (Bank 1 Sensor 1) A/F sensor #11 V 2.79 V
Target EGR Target EGR % —
EGR error EGR deviation % —
Commanded Evap
Evaporative purge % 0%
Purge
Fuel level signal Fuel Level % —
Warmup RPM after DTC clear Number of warm-ups — —
Driving distance after DTC clear Meter since DTC cleared km or miles —
mmHg, kPa, 8.8 mmHg, 1.2 kPa, 0.4
inHg or psig inHg or 0.2 psig
mmHg, kPa,
Atmospheric pressure signal Atmosphere Pressure Atmospheric pressure
inHg or psig
Front oxygen (A/F) sensor (Bank 1 Sensor 1) A/F sensor #11 — 1.001
Front oxygen (A/F) sensor (Bank 1 Sensor 1) A/F sensor #11 mA 0.00 mA
Catalyzer temperature Catalyst Temperature °C or °F —
Monitoring test of misfire Misfire monitoring — Enable YES/NO
Monitoring test of misfire Misfire monitoring — Comp YES/NO
Monitoring test of fuel system Fuel system monitoring — Enable YES/NO
Monitoring test of fuel system Fuel system monitoring — Comp YES/NO
Monitoring test of comprehensive component Component monitoring — Enable YES/NO
Monitoring test of comprehensive component Component monitoring — Comp YES/NO
Test of catalyst Catalyst Diagnosis — Enable YES/NO
Test of catalyst Catalyst Diagnosis — Comp YES/NO
Test of heating-type catalyst Heated catalyst — Enable N/A
Test of heating-type catalyst Heated catalyst — Comp N/A
Evaporative purge sys-
Test of evaporative emission purge control system — Enable YES/NO
tem
Evaporative purge sys-
Test of evaporative emission purge control system — Comp YES/NO
tem
Secondary air system test Secondary air system — Enable N/A
Secondary air system test Secondary air system — Comp N/A
Test of air conditioning system A/C system refrigerant — Enable N/A
Test of air conditioning system A/C system refrigerant — Comp N/A
Test of oxygen sensor Oxygen sensor — Enable YES/NO
Test of oxygen sensor Oxygen sensor — Comp YES/NO
Test of oxygen sensor heater O2 Heater Diagnosis — Enable YES/NO
Test of oxygen sensor heater O2 Heater Diagnosis — Comp YES/NO
Test of EGR system EGR system — Enable YES/NO
Test of EGR system EGR system — Comp YES/NO
ECM power voltage Control module voltage V 13.789 V
Absolute load Absolute Load Value % 22%
A/F ratio target lambda Target Equivalence Ratio — 0.976
EN(H4SO)(diag)-39

Unit of
measure
Relative throttle opening angle Relative Throttle Pos. % 2%
Ambient temperature Ambient Temperature °C or °F (Ambient air temperature)
Absolute throttle opening angle 2 Absolute Throttle Pos.#2 % 32%
Accelerator Pedal
Absolute accelerator opening angle 1 % 13%
Pos.#1
Accelerator Pedal
Absolute accelerator opening angle 2 % 13%
Pos.#2
Target throttle opening angle Target Throt. Act. Cont. % 0%
Engine operating time while malfunction indicator lit Time while MIL lighted min —
Time elapsed after DTC clear Time since DTC cleared min —
Fuel used Type of fuel — GAS
Relative accelerator opening angle Relative Accelera. Pos. % 0%
NOTE:
EN(H4SO)(diag)-40

6. READ FREEZE FRAME DATA FOR ENGINE (OBD MODE)

5) On the «OBD Menu» display screen, select {Freeze Frame Data}.
Contents Display Unit of measure
Freeze frame data DTC code Freeze frame data DTC
Normal CLOSE or OPEN
Air fuel ratio control system for bank 1 Fuel system for Bank1
early period
Engine load data Engine Load %
Short term fuel trim by front oxygen (A/F) sensor Short term fuel trim B1 %
Long term fuel trim by front oxygen (A/F) sensor Long term fuel trim B1 %
Intake manifold absolute pressure signal Mani. Absolute Pressure mmHg, kPa, inHg or psig
Engine speed signal Engine Speed rpm
Vehicle speed signal Vehicle Speed km/h or MPH
Ignition timing advance for #1 cylinder Ignition Timing °
Intake air temperature signal Intake Air Temp. °C or °F
Amount of intake air Mass Air Flow g/s or lb/m
Throttle position signal Throttle Opening Angle %
Front oxygen (A/F) sensor (Bank 1 Sensor 1) Oxygen sensor #11 Support
Oxygen sensor (Bank 1 Sensor 2) Oxygen sensor #12 Support
Oxygen sensor (Bank 1 Sensor 2) Oxygen sensor #12 V
A/F correction (Bank 1 Sensor 2) Short term fuel trim #11 %
On-board diagnostic system OBD system —
Time elapsed after engine start Time Since Engine Start sec
Target EGR Target EGR %
EGR deviation EGR deviation %
Evaporative purge Commanded Evap Purge %
Fuel level signal Fuel Level %
Fuel tank pressure signal Fuel Tank Pressure mmHg, kPa, inHg or psig
Atmospheric pressure Atmosphere Pressure mmHg, kPa, inHg or psig
ECM power voltage Control module voltage V
Absolute load Absolute Load Value %
A/F ratio target lambda Target Equivalence Ratio —
Relative throttle opening angle Relative Throttle Pos. %
Ambient temperature Ambient Temperature °C or °F
Absolute throttle opening angle 2 Absolute Throttle Pos.#2 %
Absolute accelerator opening angle 1 Accelerator Pedal Pos.#1 %
Absolute accelerator opening angle 2 Accelerator Pedal Pos.#2 %
Target throttle opening angle Target Throt. Act. Cont. %
NOTE:
EN(H4SO)(diag)-41

7. V.I.N REGISTRATION
4) On the «Engine Diagnosis» display screen, select {V.I.N. Registration}.
5) Perform the procedures shown on the display screen.
NOTE:
EN(H4SO)(diag)-42
Read Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)

10.Read Diagnostic Trouble 3. GENERAL SCAN TOOL

Code (DTC) Refer to data denoting emission-related powertrain
DTC.
A: OPERATION For details concerning DTC, refer to “List of Diag-
1. SUBARU SELECT MONITOR (NORMAL EN(H4SO)(diag)-80, List of Diagnostic Trouble
MODE) Code (DTC).>
1) On the «Main Menu» display screen, select NOTE:
{Each System Check}. Refer to general scan tool manufacturer’s instruc-
2) On the «System Selection Menu» display tion manual to access powertrain DTC (MODE
screen, select {Engine Control System}. $03).
3) Select the [OK] after the information of engine
type has been displayed.
4) On the «Engine Diagnosis» screen, select the
{DTC Display}.
5) On the «Diagnostic Code(s) Display» screen,
select the {Current Diagnostic Code(s)} or {History
Diagnostic Code(s)}.
NOTE:
• For detailed operation procedure, refer to the
“SUBARU SELECT MONITOR OPERATION
MANUAL”.
• For details concerning DTC, refer to “List of Diag-
Code (DTC).>
2. SUBARU SELECT MONITOR (OBD
MODE)
1) On the «Main Menu» display screen, select
{Each System Check}.
2) On the «System Selection Menu» display
screen, select {Engine Control System}.
4) On the «Engine Diagnosis» display screen, se-
lect the {OBD System}.
5) On the «OBD Menu» display screen, select {Di-
agnostic Code(s) Display}.
6) Make sure DTC is shown on the screen.
NOTE:
MANUAL”.
Code (DTC).>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-43
Inspection Mode
11.Inspection Mode
A: PROCEDURE
Perform the diagnosis shown in the following DTC table.
When performing the diagnosis not listed in “List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)”, refer the item on the
drive cycle. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-48, Drive Cycle.>
DTC Item Condition
P0031 HO2S Heater Control Circuit Low (Bank 1 Sensor 1) —
P0032 HO2S Heater Control Circuit High (Bank 1 Sensor 1) —
P0077 Intake Valve Control Solenoid Circuit High (Bank 1) —
P0083 Intake Valve Control Solenoid Circuit High (Bank 2) —
P0102 Mass or Volume Air Flow Circuit Low Input —
P0103 Mass or Volume Air Flow Circuit High Input —
P0107 Manifold Absolute Pressure/Barometric Pressure Circuit Low Input —
P0108 Manifold Absolute Pressure/Barometric Pressure Circuit High Input —
P0112 Intake Air Temperature Sensor 1 Circuit Low —
P0113 Intake Air Temperature Sensor 1 Circuit High —
P0117 Engine Coolant Temperature Circuit Low —
P0118 Engine Coolant Temperature Circuit High —
P0122 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch “A” Circuit Low —
P0123 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch “A” Circuit High —
P0131 O2 Sensor Circuit Low Voltage (Bank 1 Sensor 1) —
P0132 O2 Sensor Circuit High Voltage (Bank 1 Sensor 1) —
P0140 O2 Sensor Circuit No Activity Detected (Bank1 Sensor2) —
P0182 Fuel Temperature Sensor “A” Circuit Low Input —
P0183 Fuel Temperature Sensor “A” Circuit High Input —
P0197 Engine Oil Temperature Sensor Low —
P0198 Engine Oil Temperature Sensor High —
P0222 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch “B” Circuit Low —
P0223 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch “B” Circuit High —
P0327 Knock Sensor 1 Circuit Low (Bank 1 or Single Sensor) —
P0328 Knock Sensor 1 Circuit High (Bank 1 or Single Sensor) —
P0335 Crankshaft Position Sensor “A” Circuit —
P0336 Crankshaft Position Sensor “A” Circuit Range/Performance —
P0340 Camshaft Position Sensor “A” Circuit (Bank 1 or Single Sensor) —
P0341 Camshaft Position Sensor “A” Circuit Range/Performance
—
(Bank 1 or Single Sensor)
P0447 Evaporative Emission Control System Vent Control Circuit Open —
P0448 Evaporative Emission Control System Vent Control Circuit Shorted —
P0452 Evaporative Emission Control System Pressure Sensor Low Input —
P0453 Evaporative Emission Control System Pressure Sensor High Input —
P0458 Evaporative Emission System Purge Control Valve Circuit Low —
P0462 Fuel Level Sensor “A” Circuit Low —
P0463 Fuel Level Sensor “A” Circuit High —
P0500 Vehicle Speed Sensor “A” —
P0512 Starter Request Circuit —
P0519 Idle Air Control System Performance —
EN(H4SO)(diag)-44
Inspection Mode
DTC Item Condition

P0600 Serial Communication Link —
P0604 Internal Control Module Random Access Memory (RAM) Error —
P0605 Internal Control Module Read Only Memory (ROM) Error —
P0607 Control Module Performance —
P0638 Throttle Actuator Control Range/Performance (Bank 1) —
P0691 Fan 1 Control Circuit Low —
P0692 Fan 1 Control Circuit High —
P0700 Transmission Control System (MIL Request) —
P0851 Park/Neutral Switch Input Circuit Low —
P0852 Park/Neutral Switch Input Circuit High —
P1152 O2 Sensor Circuit Range/Performance (Low) (Bank1 Sensor1) —
P1153 O2 Sensor Circuit Range/Performance (High) (Bank1 Sensor1) —
P1160 Return Spring Failure —
P1400 Fuel Tank Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Circuit Low —
P1420 Fuel Tank Pressure Control Sol. Valve Circuit High —
P1491 Positive Crankcase Ventilation (Blow-by) Function Problem —
P1518 Starter Switch Circuit Low Input —
P1560 Back-Up Voltage Circuit Malfunction —
P2101 Throttle Actuator Control Motor Circuit Range/Performance —
P2102 Throttle Actuator Control Motor Circuit Low —
P2103 Throttle Actuator Control Motor Circuit High —
P2109 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor “A” Minimum Stop Performance —
P2122 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch “D” Circuit Low Input —
P2123 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch “D” Circuit High Input —
P2127 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch “E” Circuit Low Input —
P2128 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch “E” Circuit High Input —
P2135 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch “A”/“B” Voltage Correlation —
P2138 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch “D”/“E” Voltage Correlation —
P2227 Barometric Pressure Circuit Range/Performance —
P2228 Barometric Pressure Circuit Low —
P2229 Barometric Pressure Circuit High —
EN(H4SO)(diag)-45
Inspection Mode
1. PREPARATION FOR THE INSPECTION 2. SUBARU SELECT MONITOR

MODE 1) After clearing the memory, check for any remain-
1) Check that the battery voltage is 12 V or more ing unresolved trouble data. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(di-
and fuel remains approx. half [20 — 40 2 (5.3 — ag)-53, Clear Memory Mode.>
10.6 US gal, 4.4 — 8.8 Imp gal)]. 2) Warm-up the engine.
2) Lift-up the vehicle using a garage jack and place 3) Prepare the Subaru Select Monitor kit. <Ref. to
it on rigid racks, or drive the vehicle onto free roll- EN(H4SO)(diag)-8, PREPARATION TOOL, Gen-
ers. eral Description.>
WARNING: 4) Connect the diagnosis cable to the Subaru Se-
lect Monitor.
• Before lifting-up the vehicle, ensure parking
brakes are applied. 5) Connect the test mode connector (A) located un-
der the glove box.
• Do not use a pantograph jack in place of a rig-
id rack.
• Secure a rope or wire to the front or rear tow-
ing hooks to prevent the lateral runout of front
wheels.
• Do not abruptly depress/release clutch pedal (A)
or accelerator pedal during works even when
the engine is operating at low speeds since this
may cause vehicle to jump off free rollers.
• In order to prevent the vehicle from slipping
due to vibration, do not place any wooden PI-00201
blocks or similar items between the rigid racks
6) Connect the Subaru Select Monitor to data link
and vehicle.
connector located in the lower portion of the instru-
• Since the rear wheels will also rotate, do not ment panel (on the driver’s side).
place anything near them. Also, make sure that
nobody goes in front of the vehicle.
EN-02533
CAUTION:
(A)
(B)
EN-00041
lect the {D Check}.
(A) Rigid racks 12) When the “Perform Inspection (Dealer Check)
(B) Free rollers Mode” is shown on the screen, select the [OK].
EN(H4SO)(diag)-46
Inspection Mode
13) Perform subsequent procedures as instructed 5) Start the engine.

on the display screen. NOTE:
• If trouble still remains in the memory, the corre- • Ensure the selector lever is placed in “P” range
sponding DTC appears on the display screen. before starting. (AT model)
NOTE: • Depress the clutch pedal when starting engine.
• For detailed operation procedure, refer to the (MT model)
“SUBARU SELECT MONITOR OPERATION 6) Using the selector lever or shift lever, turn the P
MANUAL”. position switch and N position switch to ON.
• For details concerning DTC, refer to “List of Di- 7) Depress the brake pedal to turn the brake switch
agnostic Trouble Code (DTC)”. ON. (AT model)
<Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-80, List of Diagnostic 8) Keep the engine speed in 2,500 — 3,000 rpm
Trouble Code (DTC).> range for 40 seconds.
• Release the parking brake. 9) Place the select lever or shift lever in D position
• The speed difference between front and rear (AT model) or 1st gear (MT model) and drive the
wheels may illuminate the ABS warning light, but vehicle at 5 to 10 km/h (3 to 6 MPH).
this indicates no malfunctions. When engine NOTE:
control diagnosis is finished, perform the ABS • For AWD model, release the parking brake.
memory clearance procedure of self-diagnosis
• The speed difference between front and rear
function.
wheels may illuminate the ABS warning light, but
3. GENERAL SCAN TOOL this indicates no malfunctions. When engine con-
1) After performing the diagnostics and clearing the trol diagnosis is finished, perform the ABS memory
memory, check for any remaining unresolved trou- clearance procedure of self-diagnosis system.
ble data. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-53, Clear Mem- 10) Using the general scan tool, check DTC and
ory Mode.> record the result(s).
2) Warm-up the engine. NOTE:
3) Connect the test mode connector (A) located un- • For detailed operation procedures, refer to the
der the glove box. general scan tool operation manual.
nostic Trouble Code (DTC)”.
<Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-80, List of Diagnostic
Trouble Code (DTC).>
(A)
PI-00201
4) Connect the general scan tool to data link con-

nector located in the lower portion of the instrument
panel (on the driver’s side).
CAUTION:
EN-02533
EN(H4SO)(diag)-47
Drive Cycle
12.Drive Cycle
A: PROCEDURE
For the troubleshooting, there are five driving patterns of drive cycles A to E. Driving in the specified pattern
allows to diagnose malfunctioning items listed below. After the repair of the following trouble items, be sure
to drive the vehicle with the specified drive patterns to check whether the function is resumed correctly.
1. PREPARATION FOR DRIVE CYCLE
1) Check that the battery voltage is 12 V or more and fuel remains approx. half [20 — 40 2 (5.3 — 10.6 US
gal, 4.4 — 8.8 Imp gal)].
2) After performing the diagnostics and clearing the memory, check for any remaining unresolved trouble da-
ta. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-53, Clear Memory Mode.>
3) Disconnect the test mode connector.
NOTE:
• Perform the diagnosis after warming up the engine except when the engine coolant temperature at starting
is specified.
• Perform the diagnosis twice if the DTC marked with *. After completing the first diagnosis, stop the engine
and perform second diagnosis in same condition.
2. DRIVE CYCLE A (AFTER RUNNING 20 MINUTES AT 80 KM/H (50 MPH), IDLE THE ENGINE
FOR 1 MINUTE.)
DTC Item Condition
*P0125 Insufficient Coolant Temperature for Closed Loop Fuel Control Coolant temperature at start is
less than 20°C (68°F).
*P0128 Coolant Thermostat —
(Engine Coolant Temperature Below Thermostat Regulating Temperature)
*P0133 O2 Sensor Circuit Slow Response (Bank 1 Sensor 1) —
*P0171 System Too Lean (Bank 1) Diagnosis completes in drive
cycle B or C as well.
*P0172 System Too Rich (Bank 1) Diagnosis completes in drive
P0196 Engine Oil Temperature Sensor Circuit Range/Performance —
*P0301 Cylinder 1 Misfire Detected Diagnosis completes in drive
*P0420 Catalyst System Efficiency Below Threshold (Bank 1) —
*P0442 Evaporative Emission Control System Leak Detected (Small Leak) Engine coolant temperature at
engine start is less than 30°C
(86°F).
*P0451 Evaporative Emission Control System Pressure Sensor —
*P0456 Evaporative Emission Control System Leak Detected (Very Small Leak) Engine coolant temperature at
(86°F).
*P0457 Evaporative Emission Control System Leak Detected (Fuel Cap Loose/Off) Engine coolant temperature at
(86°F).
*P0459 Evaporative Emission System Purge Control Valve Circuit High —
P1443 Vent Control Solenoid Valve Function Problem —
*P2096 Post Catalyst Fuel Trim System Too Lean Bank 1 Diagnosis completes in drive
*P2097 Post Catalyst Fuel Trim System Too Rich Bank 1 Diagnosis completes in drive
EN(H4SO)(diag)-48
Drive Cycle
3. DRIVE CYCLE B — 10 MINUTES IDLING

NOTE:
Drive the vehicle at 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more before diagnosis.
DTC Item Condition
*P0126 Insufficient Coolant Temperature for Stable Operation —
cycle A or C as well.
*P0464 Fuel Level Sensor Circuit Intermittent —
*P0483 Fan Rationality Check —
*P0506 Idle Air Control System RPM Lower Than Expected —
*P0507 Idle Air Control System RPM Higher Than Expected —
EN(H4SO)(diag)-49
Drive Cycle
4. DRIVE CYCLE C — DRIVE THE VEHICLE WITH FOLLOWING DRIVE PATTERNS
(H)
(C)
96 (60)
(D) (F) (G)
65 (40)
(B) (E)
(A)
0
50 100 150 (I)
EN-00195
(A) Idle the engine for 1 minute. (E) Drive the vehicle at 65 km/h (40 (G) Stop vehicle with the throttle fully
(B) Accelerate to 96 km/h (60 MPH) MPH) for 10 seconds. closed.
within 20 seconds. (F) Accelerate to 96 km/h (60 MPH) (H) km/h (MPH)
(C) Drive the vehicle at 96 km/h (60 within 10 seconds. (I) Sec.
MPH) for 20 seconds.
(D) Decelerate with fully closed throt-
tle to 65 km/h (40 MPH).
EN(H4SO)(diag)-50
Drive Cycle
DTC Item Condition

P0026 Intake Valve Control Solenoid Circuit Range/Performance (Bank 1) —
P0028 Intake Valve Control Solenoid Circuit Range/Performance (Bank 2) —
*P0030 HO2S Heater Control Circuit (Bank 1 Sensor 1) —
*P0068 MAP/MAF - Throttle Position Correlation —
P0076 Intake Valve Control Solenoid Circuit Low (Bank 1) —
P0082 Intake Valve Control Solenoid Circuit Low (Bank 2) —
*P0101 Mass or Volume Air Flow Circuit Range/Performance —
*P0134 O2 Sensor Circuit No Activity Detected (Bank 1 Sensor 1) —
cycle A or B as well.
*P0400 Exhaust Gas Recirculation Flow —
P1492 EGR Solenoid Valve Signal #1 Circuit Malfunction (Low Input) —
P1493 EGR Solenoid Valve Signal #1 Circuit Malfunction (High Input) —
5. DRIVE CYCLE D
• DRIFT DIAGNOSIS
1) Check that the engine coolant temperature at engine start is less than 30°C (86°F).
2) Make sure that fuel remains 9.6 2 (2.5 US gal, 2.1 Imp gal) or more and the battery voltage is 10.9 V or
more.
3) Start the engine, and check that the engine coolant temperature increases by 10°C (50°F) or more, and
reaches 75°C (167°F) or more, when the engine is warmed up.
4) Idle the engine for 120 seconds or more in the condition of step 3.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-51
Drive Cycle
• STUCK DIAGNOSIS
1) Make sure that the battery voltage is 10.9 V or more.
2) Perform the Clear Memory Mode. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-53, Clear Memory Mode.>
3) Drive the vehicle for the distance equal to the fuel of 50 2 (13.2 US gal, 11 Imp gal).
NOTE:
• It is acceptable to drive the vehicle intermittently.
• Do not disconnect the battery terminals while diagnosing. (Data will be cleared by disconnecting the bat-
tery terminals.)
DTC Item Condition
P0181 Fuel Temperature Sensor “A” Circuit Range/Performance —
6. DRIVE CYCLE E
3) Drive the vehicle for the distance equal to the fuel of 30 2 (7.9 US gal, 6.6 Imp gal).
NOTE:
tery terminals.)
DTC Item Condition
P0461 Fuel Level Sensor “A” Circuit Range/Performance —
7. DRIVE CYCLE F
2) Start the engine, and warm it up until engine coolant temperature increases over 95°C (203°F).
3) After the engine has reached the state of procedure 2), idle the engine for 10 minutes or more.
NOTE:
Do not disconnect the battery terminals while diagnosing. (Data will be cleared by disconnecting the battery
terminals.)
DTC Item Condition
P0111 Intake Air Temperature Sensor 1 Circuit Range/Performance —
8. DRIVE CYCLE H
2) With the ignition switch ON, read the engine coolant temperature, intake air temperature and fuel temper-
ature. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-35, READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE (NORMAL MODE), OPERA-
TION, Subaru Select Monitor.>
3) If the values from step 2) satisfy the following two conditions, start the engine.
Condition:
|Engine coolant temperature — intake air temperature | ≤ 5°C (41°F)
|Engine coolant temperature — fuel temperature | ≤ 2°C (36°F)
NOTE:
• If the conditions are not satisfied, turn the ignition switch to OFF and wait until the parameters are satisfied.
• Start AT vehicles in the P range, and MT vehicles in the N position.
4) Idle the engine for 1 minute under the conditions in step 3).
DTC Item Condition
*P1602
Control Module Programming Error —
EN(H4SO)(diag)-52
Clear Memory Mode

13.Clear Memory Mode 3. GENERAL SCAN TOOL

For clear memory procedures using the general
A: OPERATION scan tool, refer to “General Scan Tool Instruction
1. SUBARU SELECT MONITOR (NORMAL Manual”.
MODE) NOTE:
1) On the «Main Menu» display screen, select Initial diagnosis of electronic throttle control is per-
{Each System Check}. formed after memory clearance. For this reason,
2) On the «System Selection Menu» display start the engine after 10 seconds or more have
screen, select {Engine Control System}. elapsed since the ignition switch was turned to ON.
lect the {Clear Memory}.
5) When the “Done” and “Turn Ignition Switch OFF”
are shown on the display screen, turn the ignition
switch to OFF and then close Subaru Select Moni-
tor.
NOTE:
• Initial diagnosis of electronic throttle control is
performed after memory clearance. For this rea-
son, start the engine after 10 seconds or more have
elapsed since the ignition switch was turned to ON.
MANUAL”.
MODE)
5) On the «OBD Menu» display screen, select
{DTC Clear}.
6) When the “Clear Diagnostic Code?” is shown on
the screen, select the [OK].
7) Turn the ignition switch to OFF and then close
the Subaru Select Monitor.
NOTE:
performed after memory clearance. For this rea-
son, start the engine after 10 seconds or more have
elapsed since the ignition switch was turned to ON.
MANUAL”.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-53
Compulsory Valve Operation Check Mode

14.Compulsory Valve Operation 12) Selecting the [NO] completes the compulsory
operation check mode. The display will then return
Check Mode to the «Actuator ON/OFF Operation» screen.
A: OPERATION A list of the support data is shown in the following
table.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-8, PREPARATION TOOL, Gen- Description Display
eral Description.> Compulsory fuel pump relay Fuel Pump
2) Connect the diagnosis cable to the Subaru Se- operation check
lect Monitor. Compulsory purge control CPC Solenoid
3) Connect the test mode connector (A) located un- solenoid valve operation check
der the glove box. Compulsory radiator fan relay Radiator Fan Relay
operation check
Compulsory air conditioning relay A/C Compressor Relay
operation check
Compulsory pressure control PCV Solenoid Valve
solenoid valve operation check
(A) Compulsory drain valve operation Vent Control Solenoid
check Valve
NOTE:
• The following parts will be displayed but not func-
PI-00201 tional.
4) Connect the Subaru Select Monitor to data link Display
connector located in the lower portion of the instru- EGR Solenoid Valve
ment panel (on the driver’s side). ASV Solenoid Valve
FICD Solenoid
Pressure Switching Sol. 1
Pressure Switching Sol. 2
AAI Solenoid
Fuel Tank Sensor Control Valve
Turbocharger Wastegate Solenoid
Exhaust Bypass Valve Control Permit Flag
Secondary Air Combination Valve 1
EN-02533
CAUTION: “SUBARU SELECT MONITOR OPERATION
Do not connect the scan tools except for the MANUAL”.
lect the {System Operation Check Mode}.
10) On the «System Operation Check Mode» dis-
play screen, select the {Actuator ON/OFF Opera-
tion}.
11) Select the desired compulsory actuator on the
«Actuator ON/OFF Operation» display screen and
select the [OK].
EN(H4SO)(diag)-54
System Operation Check Mode

15.System Operation Check 1. FUEL PUMP CONTROL (OFF OPERA-

TION)
Mode
CAUTION:
A: OPERATION After performing the Operation Check Mode,
1) Prepare the Subaru Select Monitor kit. <Ref. to perform the Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-8, PREPARATION TOOL, Gen- EN(H4SO)(diag)-53, OPERATION, Clear Memo-
eral Description.> ry Mode.>.
2) Connect the diagnosis cable to the Subaru Se- 1) On the «System Operation Check Mode» dis-
lect Monitor. play screen, select the {Fuel Pump Control}.
3) Connect the Subaru Select Monitor to data link 2) On the «Fuel Pump Control» display screen, se-
connector located in the lower portion of the instru- lect the {OFF Operation}.
ment panel (on the driver’s side). 3) On the «Start the Engine» display screen, start
the engine and select the [OK].
4) Select the [NO] to end the OFF operation. The
screen will return to the «Fuel Pump Control»
screen.
2. FUEL PUMP CONTROL (ON/OFF OPER-
ATION)
CAUTION:
After performing the Operation Check Mode,
perform the Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to
EN-02533
EN(H4SO)(diag)-53, OPERATION, Clear Memo-
CAUTION: ry Mode.>.
Do not connect the scan tools except for the 1) On the «System Operation Check Mode» dis-
Subaru Select Monitor or general scan tool. play screen, select the {Fuel Pump Control}.
4) Turn the ignition switch to ON (engine OFF) and 2) On the «Fuel Pump Control» display screen, se-
run the Subaru Select Monitor. lect the {ON/OFF Operation}.
5) On the «Main Menu» display screen, select 3) On the «Turn Ignition Switch ON with Engine
{Each System Check}. Stalled» display screen, select the [OK].
6) On the «System Selection Menu» display 4) Select the [NO] to end the ON/OFF operation.
screen, select {Engine Control System}. The screen will return to the «Fuel Pump Control»
7) Select the [OK] after the information of engine screen.
3. IDLING IGNITION TIMING FIXED
lect the {System Operation Check Mode}. CAUTION:
9) The following items will be displayed on screen. After performing the Operation Check Mode,
Display
Fuel Pump Control ry Mode.>.
Idling Ignition Timing Fixed 1) On the «System Operation Check Mode» dis-
Idle Speed Control play screen, select {Idling Ignition Timing Fixed}.
Injector Control 2) On the «Start the Engine» display screen, start
EGR Valve Control the engine and select the [OK].
3) Select the [NO] to end the idle ignition timing
fixed. The screen will return to the «System Opera-
tion Check Mode» screen.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-55

4. IDLE SPEED CONTROL 4) In the «Injection Quantity Control» screen, select

the [ ] or the [ ] to change the setting values,
CAUTION:
then select the [OK].
Setting is possible in a range between 0 — 20%, in
increments of 1%.
ry Mode.>. 5) Select the [NO] to end the injection quantity con-
trol. The screen will return to the «Injector Control»
screen.
play screen, select {Idle Speed Control}.
2) On the «Start the Engine» display screen, start NOTE:
the engine and select the [OK]. For detailed operation procedure, refer to the
3) In the «Idle Speed Control» screen, select the “SUBARU SELECT MONITOR OPERATION
[ ] or the [ ] to change the setting values, then MANUAL”.
select the [OK].
7. EGR VALVE CONTROL
Setting is possible in a range between 500 rpm —
2,000 rpm, in increments of 50 rpm. However, the CAUTION:
engine speed that can actually be controlled will After performing the Operation Check Mode,
vary depending on the vehicle. perform the Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to
4) Select the [NO] to end the idle engine speed EN(H4SO)(diag)-53, OPERATION, Clear Memo-
control. The screen will return to the «System Op- ry Mode.>.
eration Check Mode» screen. 1) On the «System Operation Check Mode» dis-
play screen, select {EGR Valve Control}.
5. INJECTOR CONTROL (INJECTION STOP 2) On the «Start the Engine» display screen, start
MODE) the engine and select the [OK].
CAUTION: 3) In the «EGR Valve Control» screen, select the
After performing the Operation Check Mode, [ ] or the [ ] to change the setting values, then
perform the Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to select the [OK].
EN(H4SO)(diag)-53, OPERATION, Clear Memo- Setting is possible in increments of 1 STEP. How-
ry Mode.>. ever, the number of STEPs that can actually be
1) On the «System Operation Check Mode» dis- controlled will vary depending on the vehicle.
play screen, select {Injector Control}. 4) Select the [NO] to end the EGR valve control.
2) On the «Injector Control» display screen, select The screen will return to the «System Operation
{Injection Stop Mode}. Check Mode» screen.
3) Select the desired injector number in the «Injec- NOTE:
tion Stop Mode» screen, and select the [OK]. For detailed operation procedure, refer to the
4) On the «Start the Engine» display screen, start “SUBARU SELECT MONITOR OPERATION
the engine and select the [OK]. MANUAL”.
5) Select the [NO] to end the injection stop mode.
The screen will return to the «Injector Control»
screen.
6. INJECTOR CONTROL (INJECTION
QUANTITY CONTROL)
CAUTION:
ry Mode.>.
play screen, select {Injector Control}.
2) On the «Injector Control» display screen, select
{Injection Quantity Control}.
3) On the «Start the Engine» display screen, start
EN(H4SO)(diag)-56
Malfunction Indicator Light

16.Malfunction Indicator Light

A: PROCEDURE
1. Activation of malfunction indicator light. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-58, ACTIVATION OF MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT,
Malfunction Indicator Light.>
↓
2. Malfunction indicator light does not come on. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-59, MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT
COME ON, Malfunction Indicator Light.>
↓
3. Malfunction indicator light does not go off. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-61, MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT GO
OFF, Malfunction Indicator Light.>
↓
4. Malfunction indicator light does not blink. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-62, MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT
BLINK, Malfunction Indicator Light.>
↓
5. Malfunction indicator light remains blinking. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-64, MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT REMAINS
BLINKING, Malfunction Indicator Light.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-57

B: ACTIVATION OF MALFUNCTION 3) If the diagnostic system detects a misfire which

INDICATOR LIGHT could damage the catalyst, the malfunction indica-
tor light will blink at a cycle of 1 Hz.
1) When the ignition switch is turned to ON (engine
OFF), the malfunction indicator light (A) in the com- (1)
bination meter illuminates.
(2)
NOTE:
If the engine malfunction indicator light does not il- (3)
luminate, perform diagnostics of malfunction indi- (4)
cator light circuit or the combination meter circuit. (6)
<Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-59, MALFUNCTION IN-
DICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT COME ON, Malfunc- (5)
tion Indicator Light.>
EN-01680
(1) ON
(2) OFF
(3) Ignition switch ON
(4) Engine start
(5) Misfire start
CHECK
ENGINE (6) 1 second
4) Turn the ignition switch to OFF and connect the

(A) EN-03112 test mode connector.
2) After starting the engine, the malfunction indica- (1) When the ignition switch is turned to ON
tor light goes out. If it does not go off, either the en- (engine OFF), the malfunction indicator light il-
gine or emission control system has malfunction. luminates.
(2) After the engine starts, malfunction indicator
(1) light blinks in a cycle of 0.5 Hz. (During diagno-
(3)
sis)
(4) (3) Malfunction indicator light blinks at a cycle of
(2) 3 Hz after diagnosis if there is no trouble. Mal-
(3) function indicator light illuminates if faulty.
(4)
(5) (1)
(6) (2)
EN-01679
(4)
(1) No faulty
(2) Trouble occurs
(3)
(3) ON
(4) OFF
EN-01681
(6) Engine start (1) ON
(2) OFF
(4) 1 second
EN(H4SO)(diag)-58

C: MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT COME ON

DIAGNOSIS:
The malfunction indicator light circuit is open or shorted.
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
When the ignition switch is turned to ON (engine OFF), malfunction indicator light does not come on.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
IGNITION
B72 SWITCH BATTERY
No.5 SBF-6 MAIN SBF
6 3
3
COMBINATION METER
i10
16
i3
8
B38
11
B136 ECM E
B72 B136 i10 B38
1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-05039
EN(H4SO)(diag)-59

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL OF ECM. Is the voltage less than 1 V? Go to step 4. Go to step 2.
2) Measure the voltage between ECM connec-
tor and chassis ground.
(B136) No. 11 (+) — Chassis ground (–):
2 CHECK POOR CONTACT. Does the malfunction indicator Repair poor con- Go to step 3.
Check for poor connection by shaking or pulling light illuminate? tact in ECM con-
ECM connector and harness. nector.
3 CHECK ECM CONNECTOR. Is the ECM connector correctly Replace the ECM. Repair the connec-
Check the connection of ECM connector. connected? <Ref. to tion of ECM con-
FU(H4SO)-35, nector.
Engine Control
Module (ECM).>
4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN COMBINA- Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 5. Repair the harness
TION METER AND ECM CONNECTOR. and connector.
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. NOTE:
2) Remove the combination meter. <Ref. to In this case, repair
IDI-19, Combination Meter.> the following item:
3) Disconnect the connector from ECM and • Open circuit of
combination meter. harness between
4) Measure the resistance of harness between ECM and combi-
ECM and combination meter connector. nation meter con-
Connector & terminal nector
(B136) No. 11 — (i10) No. 16: • Poor contact of
coupling connector
5 CHECK POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact in combi- Repair the poor Go to step 6.
Check poor contact of combination meter con- nation meter connector? contact of combi-
nector. nation meter con-
nector.
6 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN COMBINA- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Replace the com- Check the follow-
TION METER AND IGNITION SWITCH CON- bination meter cir- ing item and repair
NECTOR. cuit board. <Ref. to if necessary.
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. IDI-19, Combina- NOTE:
2) Measure the voltage between combination tion Meter.> • Blown out of fuse
meter connector and chassis ground. (No. 5)
Connector & terminal • Open or short
(i10) No. 3 (+) — Chassis ground (–): circuit in harness
between fuse (No.
5) and battery ter-
minal
• Poor contact of
ignition switch con-
nector
EN(H4SO)(diag)-60

D: MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT GO OFF

DIAGNOSIS:
The malfunction indicator light circuit is shorted.
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Although malfunction indicator light illuminates when the engine runs, DTC is not shown on the Subaru Se-
lect Monitor display.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
IGNITION
B72 SWITCH BATTERY
No.5 SBF-6 MAIN SBF
6 3
3
COMBINATION METER
i10
16
i3
8
B38
11
B136 ECM E
B72 B136 i10 B38
1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-05039
Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN COMBINA- Does the malfunction indicator Repair the short Replace the ECM.
TION METER AND ECM CONNECTOR. light illuminate? circuit of harness <Ref. to
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. between combina- FU(H4SO)-35,
2) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM. tion meter and Engine Control
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. ECM connector. Module (ECM).>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-61

E: MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT BLINK

DIAGNOSIS:
• The malfunction indicator light circuit is open or shorted.
• Test mode connector circuit is open.
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Malfunction indicator light does not blink during Inspection Mode.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
IGNITION
B72 SWITCH BATTERY
No.5 SBF-6 MAIN SBF
6 3
3
COMBINATION METER
i10
16
B122
1 1
*
i3
B75 B76 *
8
B38 : TERMINAL No. OPTIONAL

* ARRANGEMENT
C11
B27
C6
B: B135 C: B136 ECM E
B75 B72 i10 B38 B122
1 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4
2 4 5 6 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 5 6 7 8
B: B135 C: B136
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-05040
EN(H4SO)(diag)-62

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK STATUS OF MALFUNCTION INDI- Does the malfunction indicator Go to step 2. Repair the mal-
CATOR LIGHT. light illuminate? function indicator
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. light circuit. <Ref.
2) Disconnect the test mode connector. to
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. (engine OFF) EN(H4SO)(diag)-
59, MALFUNC-
TION INDICATOR
LIGHT DOES NOT
COME ON, Mal-
function Indicator
Light.>
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN COMBINA- Does the malfunction indicator Repair the short Go to step 3.
TION METER AND ECM CONNECTOR. light illuminate? circuit of harness
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. between combina-
2) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM. tion meter and
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. ECM connector.
3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TEST MODE Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 4. Repair the harness
CONNECTOR AND ECM. and connector.
2) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM. In this case, repair
3) Measure the resistance of harness between the following item:
test mode connector and ECM. • Open circuit of
Connector & terminal harness between
(B76) No. 1 — (B136) No. 6: test mode connec-
tor and chassis
ground
4 CHECK POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact in ECM Repair poor con- Go to step 5.
Check for poor contact of the ECM connector. connector? tact in ECM con-
nector.
5 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 6. Repair the open
TEST MODE CONNECTOR. circuit of harness
1) Connect the test mode connector. between ECM and
2) Measure the resistance of harness between test mode connec-
ECM and test mode connector. tor.
(B135) No. 27 — (B136) No. 6:
6 CHECK POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact in ECM Repair poor con- Replace the ECM.
Check for poor contact of the ECM connector. connector? tact in ECM con- <Ref. to
nector. FU(H4SO)-35,
Engine Control
Module (ECM).>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-63

F: MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT REMAINS BLINKING

DIAGNOSIS:
Test mode connector circuit is shorted.
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Malfunction indicator light blinks when test mode connector is not connected.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
IGNITION
B72 SWITCH BATTERY
No.5 SBF-6 MAIN SBF
6 3
3
COMBINATION METER
i10
16
B122
1 1
*
i3
B75 B76 *
8
B38 : TERMINAL No. OPTIONAL

* ARRANGEMENT
C11
B27
C6
B: B135 C: B136 ECM E
B75 B72 i10 B38 B122
1 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4
2 4 5 6 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 5 6 7 8
B: B135 C: B136
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-05040
EN(H4SO)(diag)-64

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK TEST MODE CONNECTOR. Does the malfunction indicator Go to step 2. System is normal.
1) Disconnect the test mode connector. light blink? NOTE:
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. Malfunction indica-
tor light blinks
when test mode
connector is con-
nected.
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM CON- Is the resistance less than 5 Ω? Repair the short Replace the ECM.
NECTOR AND TEST MODE CONNECTOR. circuit of harness <Ref. to
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. between ECM and FU(H4SO)-35,
2) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM. test mode connec- Engine Control
3) Measure the resistance of harness between tor. Module (ECM).>
ECM connector and chassis ground.
(B135) No. 27 — Chassis ground:
EN(H4SO)(diag)-65
Diagnostics for Engine Starting Failure

17.Diagnostics for Engine Starting Failure

A: PROCEDURE
1. Check of the fuel amount
↓
2. Inspection of starter motor circuit. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-67, STARTER MOTOR CIRCUIT, Diagnostics for Engine Starting
Failure.>
↓
3. Inspection of ECM power supply and ground line. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-70, CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND
LINE OF ENGINE CONTROL MODULE (ECM), Diagnostics for Engine Starting Failure.>
↓
4. Inspection of ignition control system. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-72, IGNITION CONTROL SYSTEM, Diagnostics for Engine
Starting Failure.>
↓
5. Inspection of fuel pump circuit. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-75, FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT, Diagnostics for Engine Starting Failure.>
↓
6. Inspection of fuel indicator circuit. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-78, FUEL INJECTOR CIRCUIT, Diagnostics for Engine Starting
Failure.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-66

B: STARTER MOTOR CIRCUIT

CAUTION:
After repair or replacement of faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-53,
Clear Memory Mode.> and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-44, Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
BATTERY
No.21 SBF-6 MAIN SBF
2 3
B72 IGNITION
SWITCH
15
13
STARTER RELAY
B225
16
14
INHIBITOR SWITCH
AT
P R N D 3 2 1
MT
AT 11 7
12 12
MT
B12 T3 T7
1
CLUTCH
SWITCH
(MT) STARTER MOTOR
MT
B106
AT
2
M
MT
AT B14
32
20
B136 ECM
E
B225 B106 B136 B72 B12 T7
1 2 9 13 17 21 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6
3 4 10 14 18 22 2 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 4 5 6 5 6 7 8 7 8 9 10 11 12
11 12 15 16 19 20 23 24 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 9 10 11 12
5 6
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
7 8 25 29 33 37
26 30 34 38
27 28 31 32 35 36 39 40
EN-05041
Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK BATTERY. Is the voltage 12 V or more? Go to step 2. Charge or replace
Check the battery voltage. the battery.
2 CHECK OPERATION OF STARTER MOTOR. Does the starter motor oper- Go to step 3. Go to step 4.
NOTE: ate?
Check the security alarm is not sounding.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-67

Step Check Yes No

3 CHECK DTC. Is DTC displayed? <Ref. to Check the appro- Repair poor con-
EN(H4SO)(diag)-43, OPERA- priate DTC using tact in ECM con-
TION, Read Diagnostic Trouble the List of Diagnos- nector.
Code (DTC).> tic Trouble Code
(DTC). <Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-
80, List of Diagnos-
tic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
4 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL FOR STARTER MO- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Check the starter Go to step 5.
TOR. motor. <Ref. to
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. SC(H4SO)-6,
2) Disconnect the connector from starter Starter.>
motor.
3) Turn the ignition switch to START.
4) Measure the power supply voltage between
starter motor connector terminal and engine
ground.
(B14) No. 1 (+) — Engine ground (–):
NOTE:
For AT model, place the select lever in P or N
range. For MT model, depress the clutch pedal.
5 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN BATTERY Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 6. Repair the open
AND IGNITION SWITCH CONNECTOR. circuit or ground
1) Disconnect the connector from ignition short of harness
switch. between ignition
2) Measure the power supply voltage between switch and battery,
ignition switch connector and chassis ground. and check fuse
Connector & terminal SBF No. 6 and
(B72) No. 3 (+) — Chassis ground (–): MAIN SBF.
6 CHECK IGNITION SWITCH. Is the resistance less than 5 Ω? Go to step 7. Replace the igni-
1) Disconnect the connector from ignition tion switch.
switch.
2) Measure the resistance between ignition
switch terminals after turning the ignition switch
to START position.
Terminals
No. 2 — No. 3:
7 CHECK INPUT VOLTAGE OF STARTER RE- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 8. Repair open or
LAY. ground short circuit
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. of harness
2) Disconnect the connector from starter relay. between starter
3) Connect the connector to ignition switch. relay and ignition
4) Measure the input voltage between starter switch.
relay connector and chassis ground after turn-
ing the ignition switch to START position.
8 CHECK STARTER RELAY. Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 9. Replace the starter
1) Connect the battery to starter relay termi- relay.
nals No. 15 and No. 16.
2) Measure the resistance between starter
relay terminals.
Terminals
No. 13 — No. 14:
EN(H4SO)(diag)-68

Step Check Yes No

9 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN STARTER RE- Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 10. Repair the open or
LAY AND ECM. ground short circuit
1) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM. of harness
2) Measure the resistance of harness between between starter
starter relay and ECM. relay and ECM.
(B225) No. 16 — (B136) No. 20:
10 CHECK TRANSMISSION TYPE. Is the transmission type AT? Go to step 11. Go to step 15.
11 CHECK ECM INPUT VOLTAGE. Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 12. Repair the open or
1) Turn the ignition switch to START. ground short circuit
2) Measure the input voltage between ECM of harness
connector and chassis ground. between ECM and
Connector & terminal ignition switch.
12 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN STARTER RE- Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 13. Repair open circuit
LAY AND INHIBITOR SWITCH. of harness
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. between starter
2) Disconnect the connector from inhibitor relay and inhibitor
switch. switch.
3) Measure the resistance of harness between
the starter relay and inhibitor switch.
(B225) No. 14 — (T7) No. 7:
13 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN INHIBITOR Is the resistance less than 5 Ω? Go to step 14. Repair open circuit
SWITCH AND STARTER MOTOR. of harness
Measure the resistance of harness between the between inhibitor
inhibitor switch and starter motor. switch and starter
Connector & terminal motor.
(T7) No. 12 — (B14) No. 1:
14 CHECK INHIBITOR SWITCH. Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Contact your SOA Replace the inhibi-
1) Place the select lever other than “N” and “P” more? service center. tor switch.
range.
2) Measure the resistance between inhibitor
switch connector terminals.
Terminals
No. 7 — No. 12:
15 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN IGNITION Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 16. Repair the open or
SWITCH AND CLUTCH SWITCH. ground short circuit
2) Disconnect the connector from clutch between clutch
switch. switch and ignition
3) Turn the ignition switch to START. switch.
4) Measure the voltage between the clutch
switch and chassis ground.
16 CHECK CLUTCH SWITCH. Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 17. Replace the clutch
Measure the resistance between clutch switch switch.
terminals while depressing the clutch.
Terminals
No. 1 — No. 2:
17 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Contact your SOA Repair the open
CLUTCH SWITCH. service center. circuit of harness
Measure the resistance of harness between between the ECM
ECM and clutch switch. and clutch switch.
(B136) No. 32 — (B106) No. 2:
EN(H4SO)(diag)-69

C: CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND LINE OF ENGINE CONTROL

MODULE (ECM)
CAUTION:
After repairing or replacing the defective part, perform the Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(di-
ag)-53, OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.> and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-44, PRO-
CEDURE, Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY
3 TO IGNITION COIL
5
SBF-7
6
4
No.13
2
1 IGNITION
B72 BATTERY
SWITCH
B47 No.12 SBF-6 MAIN SBF
6 3
C23
B19
B2
A7
B5
A: B134
B: B135
ECM
C: B136
D: B137
D2
D7
D3
D1
A5
B21
52
34
36
35
37
E2
E E
B72 B47 B21 A: B134 B: B135 C: B136
1 2 3 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
4 5 6 3 4 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
5 6 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-04021
EN(H4SO)(diag)-70

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK MAIN RELAY. Is the resistance less than 10 Go to step 2. Replace the main
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. Ω? relay.
2) Remove the main relay.
3) Connect the battery to main relay terminals
No. 1 and No. 2.
4) Measure the resistance between main relay
terminals.
Terminals
No. 3 — No. 5:
No. 4 — No. 6:
2 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR ECM. Is the resistance less than 5 Ω? Go to step 3. Repair the open
1) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM. circuit of harness
2) Measure the resistance of harness between between ECM con-
ECM and chassis ground. nector and engine
Connector & terminal grounding termi-
(B134) No. 5 — Chassis ground: nal.
3 CHECK INPUT VOLTAGE OF ECM. Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 4. Repair the open or
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. ground short circuit
2) Measure the voltage between ECM connec- of power supply
tor and chassis ground. circuit.
4 CHECK INPUT VOLTAGE OF MAIN RELAY. Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 5. Repair the open or
Measure the voltage between main relay con- ground short circuit
nector and chassis ground. of harness of
Connector & terminal power supply cir-
(B47) No. 1 (+) — Chassis ground (–): cuit.
5 CHECK INPUT VOLTAGE OF ECM. Is the voltage 10 V or more? Check ignition con- Repair the open or
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. trol system. <Ref. ground short circuit
2) Measure the voltage between ECM connec- to of harness
tor and chassis ground. EN(H4SO)(diag)- between ECM con-
Connector & terminal 72, IGNITION nector and main
(B134) No. 7 (+) — Chassis ground (–): CONTROL SYS- relay connector.
(B135) No. 2 (+) — Chassis ground (–): TEM, Diagnostics
(B136) No. 23 (+) — Chassis ground (–): for Engine Starting
Failure.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-71

D: IGNITION CONTROL SYSTEM

CAUTION:
After repair or replacement of faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-53,
Clear Memory Mode.> and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-44, Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B137 ECM
26
19
18
6
B225 RELAY HOLDER B47 MAIN RELAY

BATTERY
15A SBF-7
2 1 3 5
B21
47
33
32
49
E2
E12
3
1
2
4
3 4
1 2
IGNITION COIL
&
IGNITOR ASSY
E
E12 B47 B225 B21 B137
1 2 3 4 1 2
1 2 9 13 17 21 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
3 4
10 14 18 22 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
5 6 3 4
11 12 15 16 19 20 23 24 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
5 6 26 27 28 29 30 31
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
7 8 25 29 33 37
42 43 44 45 46 47
26 30 34 38
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
27 28 31 32 35 36 39 40
EN-04022
EN(H4SO)(diag)-72

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK IGNITION SYSTEM FOR SPARKS. Does spark occur at each cylin- Check fuel pump Go to step 2.
1) Remove the plug cord cap from each spark der? system. <Ref. to
plug. EN(H4SO)(diag)-
2) Install a new spark plug on plug cord cap. 75, FUEL PUMP
CAUTION: CIRCUIT, Diag-
Do not remove the spark plug from engine. nostics for Engine
3) Contact the spark plug thread portion to Starting Failure.>
engine.
4) While opening the throttle valve fully, crank
the engine to check that spark occurs at each
cylinder.
2 CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR IG- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 3. Repair the harness
NITION COIL AND IGNITOR ASSEMBLY. and connector.
2) Disconnect the connector from the ignition In this case, repair
coil and ignitor assembly. the following item:
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. • Open circuit of
4) Measure the power supply voltage between harness between
ignition coil and ignitor assembly connector and the ignition coil and
engine ground. ignitor assembly,
Connector & terminal and main relay
(E12) No. 2 (+) — Engine ground (–): connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
• Blown out of fuse
3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN IGNITION Is the resistance less than 5 Ω? Go to step 4. Repair the harness
COIL AND IGNITOR ASSEMBLY, AND ECM. and connector.
2) Measure the resistance between the igni- In this case, repair
tion coil and ignitor assembly connector, and the following item:
ECM. Open circuit in har-
Connector & terminal ness between igni-
(E12) No. 3 — (B137) No. 6: tion coil and ignitor
(E12) No. 3 — (B137) No. 26: assembly connec-
tor, and ECM
4 CHECK IGNITION COIL AND IGNITOR AS- Is the resistance between 10 Go to step 5. Replace the igni-
SEMBLY. and 15 kΩ? tion coil and ignitor
1) Remove the spark plug cords. assembly. <Ref. to
2) Measure the resistance between spark plug IG(H4SO)-6, Igni-
cord contact portions to check secondary coil. tion Coil and Ignitor
Terminals Assembly.>
No. 1 — No. 2:
No. 3 — No. 4:
5 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL FOR IGNITION COIL Does the voltage vary 10 V or Go to step 6. Replace the igni-
AND IGNITOR ASSEMBLY. more? tion coil and ignitor
1) Connect the connector to the Ignition coil assembly. <Ref. to
and ignitor assembly. IG(H4SO)-6, Igni-
2) Check if voltage varies synchronously with tion Coil and Ignitor
engine speed when cranking, while monitoring Assembly.>
voltage between ignition coil and ignitor assem-
bly connector and engine ground.
(E12) No. 1 (+) — Engine ground (–):
EN(H4SO)(diag)-73

Step Check Yes No

6 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND IG- Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 7. Repair the harness
NITION COIL AND IGNITOR ASSEMBLY and connector.
CONNECTOR. NOTE:
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. In this case, repair
2) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM. the following item:
3) Disconnect the connector from the ignition • Open circuit in
coil and ignitor assembly. harness between
4) Measure the resistance of harness between ECM and ignition
ECM and ignition coil and ignitor assembly con- coil and ignitor as-
nector. sembly connector
Connector & terminal • Poor contact of
(B137) No. 18 — (E12) No. 1: coupling connector
(B137) No. 19 — (E12) No. 4:
7 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND IG- Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 8. Repair the ground
NITION COIL AND IGNITOR ASSEMBLY more? short circuit of har-
CONNECTOR. ness between
Measure the resistance of harness between ECM and ignition
ECM and engine ground. coil and ignitor
Connector & terminal: assembly connec-
(B137) No. 18 — Engine ground: tor.
(B137) No. 19 — Engine ground:
8 CHECK POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact in ECM Repair poor con- Check fuel pump
Check for poor contact of the ECM connector. connector? tact in ECM con- circuit. <Ref. to
nector. EN(H4SO)(diag)-
75, FUEL PUMP
CIRCUIT, Diag-
nostics for Engine
Starting Failure.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-74

E: FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT

CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
No.11
IGNITION
B72 BATTERY
SWITCH
FUEL PUMP 6 3
RELAY
1
4
3 12 B136 ECM
2
B362
B97
20
R1
FUEL PUMP
FUEL PUMP CONDENSER
5 3 1
M 6 5 2
R58 R67 R46 R142
E E
B362 B72 R142 B97 R67 R58 B136
3 1 2 3 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 4 5 6 2 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 3 4 5 6 3 4 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
4
5 6 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
5
7 8 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
6
EN-04023
EN(H4SO)(diag)-75

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK OPERATING SOUND OF FUEL Does the fuel pump emit oper- Check the fuel Go to step 2.
PUMP. ating sound? injector circuit.
Make sure that the fuel pump operates for two <Ref. to
seconds when turning the ignition switch to ON. EN(H4SO)(diag)-
NOTE: 78, FUEL INJEC-
Fuel pump operation can also be executed us- TOR CIRCUIT,
ing Subaru Select Monitor. Diagnostics for
Regarding the procedures, refer to “Compulso- Engine Starting
ry Valve Operation Check Mode”. <Ref. to Failure.>
tion Check Mode.>
2 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT OF FUEL PUMP. Is the resistance less than 5 Ω? Go to step 3. Repair the harness
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. and connector.
2) Remove the fuel pump access hole lid. NOTE:
3) Disconnect the connector from fuel pump. In this case, repair
4) Measure the resistance of harness connec- the following item:
tor between fuel pump and chassis ground. Open circuit in har-
Connector & terminal ness between fuel
(R58) No. 6 — Chassis ground: pump connector
and chassis
grounding terminal
3 CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO FUEL PUMP. Is the voltage 10 V or more? Replace the fuel Go to step 4.
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. pump. <Ref. to
2) Measure the voltage of power supply circuit FU(H4SO)-50,
between fuel pump connector and chassis Fuel Pump.>
ground.
(R58) No. 5 (+) — Chassis ground (–):
4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN FUEL PUMP Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 5. Repair the harness
AND FUEL PUMP RELAY CONNECTOR. and connector.
2) Measure the resistance of harness connec- In this case, repair
tor between fuel pump and fuel pump relay. the following item:
Connector & terminal • Open circuit in
(R58) No. 5 — (B362) No. 2: harness between
fuel pump connec-
tor and chassis
grounding terminal
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
5 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN FUEL PUMP Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 6. Repair the short
AND FUEL PUMP RELAY CONNECTOR. more? circuit of harness
Measure the resistance of harness between between fuel pump
fuel pump and fuel pump relay connector. and fuel pump
Connector & terminal relay connector.
(R58) No. 5 — Chassis ground:
6 CHECK FUEL PUMP RELAY. Is the resistance less than 10 Go to step 7. Replace the fuel
1) Disconnect the connectors from fuel pump Ω? pump relay. <Ref.
relay and main relay. to FU(H4SO)-50,
2) Remove the fuel pump relay and main relay Fuel Pump.>
with bracket.
3) Connect the battery to fuel pump relay con-
nector terminals No. 3 and No. 4.
4) Measure the resistance between connector
terminals of fuel pump relay.
Terminals
No. 1 — No. 2:
EN(H4SO)(diag)-76

Step Check Yes No

FUEL PUMP RELAY CONNECTOR. circuit of harness
1) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM. between ECM and
2) Measure the resistance of harness between fuel pump relay
ECM and fuel pump relay connector. connector.
(B136) No. 12 — (B362) No. 3:
8 CHECK POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact in ECM Repair poor con- Check the fuel
Check for poor contact of the ECM connector. connector? tact in ECM con- injector circuit.
nector. <Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-
78, FUEL INJEC-
TOR CIRCUIT,
Diagnostics for
Engine Starting
Failure.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-77

F: FUEL INJECTOR CIRCUIT

CAUTION:
• Check or repair only faulty parts.
• After repairing or replacing the defective part, perform the Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-53, OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.> and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(di-
ag)-44, PROCEDURE, Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY
5 BATTERY
3
SBF-7
6
4
2
1
B47
B137 ECM
10
11
8
B21
48
42
43
44
45
E2
E5 E16 E6 E17
2
FUEL INJECTOR FUEL INJECTOR FUEL INJECTOR FUEL INJECTOR

No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4
E5 E16 B47 B21 B137
E6 E17 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
3 4 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
1 2 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
5 6 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
26 27 28 29 30 31
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
EN-04024
Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK OPERATION OF EACH FUEL INJEC- Does the fuel pump emit oper- Check the fuel Go to step 2.
TOR. ating sound? pressure. <Ref. to
While cranking the engine, check each fuel ME(H4SO)-26,
injector emits operating sound. Use a sound INSPECTION,
scope or attach a screwdriver to the injector for Fuel Pressure.>
this check.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-78

Step Check Yes No

2 CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO EACH FUEL IN- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 3. Repair the harness
JECTOR. and connector.
2) Disconnect the connector from fuel injector. In this case, repair
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. the following item:
4) Measure the power supply voltage between • Open circuit of
fuel injector terminal and engine ground. harness between
Connector & terminal main relay and fuel
#1 (E5) No. 2 (+) — Engine ground (–): injector connector
#2 (E16) No. 2 (+) — Engine ground (–): • Poor contact of
#3 (E6) No. 2 (+) — Engine ground (–): main relay connec-
#4 (E17) No. 2 (+) — Engine ground (–): tor
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
• Poor contact of
fuel injector con-
nector
3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 4. Repair the harness
FUEL INJECTOR CONNECTOR. and connector.
1) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM. NOTE:
2) Measure the resistance of harness between In this case, repair
ECM and fuel injector connector. the following item:
Connector & terminal • Open circuit of
#1 (B137) No. 8 — (E5) No. 1: harness between
#2 (B137) No. 9 — (E16) No. 1: ECM and fuel in-
#3 (B137) No. 10 — (E6) No. 1: jector connector
#4 (B137) No. 11 — (E17) No. 1: • Poor contact of
coupling connector
4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 5. Repair the ground
FUEL INJECTOR CONNECTOR. more? short circuit of har-
Measure the resistance of harness between ness between
ECM and fuel injector connector. ECM and fuel
Connector & terminal injector connector.
#1 (B137) No. 8 — Chassis ground:
5 CHECK EACH FUEL INJECTOR. Is the resistance between 5 — Go to step 6. Replace the faulty
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 20 Ω? fuel injector.
2) Measure the resistance between each fuel
injector terminals.
Terminals
No. 1 — No. 2:
6 CHECK POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact in ECM Repair poor con- Inspection using
Check for poor contact of the ECM connector. connector? tact in ECM con- “General Diagnos-
nector. tic Table” <Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-
311, INSPEC-
TION, General
Diagnostic Table.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-79
List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)

18.List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)

A: LIST
DTC Item Reference
P0026 Intake Valve Control Solenoid Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-87, DTC P0026 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLE-
Range/Performance (Bank 1) NOID CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE (BANK 1), Diagnostic Procedure
with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
Range/Performance (Bank 2) NOID CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE (BANK 2), Diagnostic Procedure
P0030 HO2S Heater Control Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-91, DTC P0030 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIR-
(Bank 1 Sensor 1) CUIT (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P0031 HO2S Heater Control Circuit Low <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-93, DTC P0031 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIR-
(Bank 1 Sensor 1) CUIT LOW (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
P0032 HO2S Heater Control Circuit High <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-95, DTC P0032 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIR-
(Bank 1 Sensor 1) CUIT HIGH (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
P0037 HO2S Heater Control Circuit Low <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-97, DTC P0037 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIR-
(Bank 1 Sensor 2) CUIT LOW (BANK 1 SENSOR 2), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
P0038 HO2S Heater Control Circuit High <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-99, DTC P0038 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIR-
(Bank 1 Sensor 2) CUIT HIGH (BANK 1 SENSOR 2), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
P0068 MAP/MAF - Throttle Position <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-101, DTC P0068 MAP/MAF - THROTTLE POSI-
Correlation TION CORRELATION, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
Low (Bank 1) NOID CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
High (Bank 1) NOID CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
Low (Bank 2) NOID CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 2), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
High (Bank 2) NOID CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 2), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
P0101 Mass or Volume Air Flow Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-111, DTC P0101 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW
Range/Performance CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
P0102 Mass or Volume Air Flow Circuit Low <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-113, DTC P0102 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW
Input CIRCUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
P0103 Mass or Volume Air Flow Circuit High <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-115, DTC P0103 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW
Input CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
P0107 Manifold Absolute Pressure/ <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-117, DTC P0107 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRES-
Barometric Pressure Circuit Low Input SURE/BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Proce-
dure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0108 Manifold Absolute Pressure/ <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-119, DTC P0108 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRES-
Barometric Pressure Circuit High SURE/BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Proce-
Input dure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-80

DTC Item Reference

P0111 Intake Air Temperature Sensor 1 <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-121, DTC P0111 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE
Circuit Range/Performance SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
Circuit Low SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
Circuit High SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P0117 Engine Coolant Temperature Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-127, DTC P0117 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERA-
Low TURE CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
P0118 Engine Coolant Temperature Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-129, DTC P0118 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERA-
High TURE CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
P0122 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-131, DTC P0122 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION
“A” Circuit Low SENSOR/SWITCH “A” CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
“A” Circuit High SENSOR/SWITCH “A” CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
P0125 Insufficient Coolant Temperature for <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-135, DTC P0125 INSUFFICIENT COOLANT TEM-
Closed Loop Fuel Control PERATURE FOR CLOSED LOOP FUEL CONTROL, Diagnostic Procedure
P0126 Insufficient Engine Coolant <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-136, DTC P0126 INSUFFICIENT ENGINE COOL-
Temperature for Stable Operation ANT TEMPERATURE FOR STABLE OPERATION, Diagnostic Procedure with
P0128 Coolant Thermostat (Engine Coolant <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-138, DTC P0128 COOLANT THERMOSTAT
Temperature Below Thermostat (ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE BELOW THERMOSTAT REGULATING
Regulating Temperature) TEMPERATURE), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
P0131 O2 Sensor Circuit Low Voltage <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-139, DTC P0131 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW
(Bank 1 Sensor 1) VOLTAGE (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
P0132 O2 Sensor Circuit High Voltage <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-141, DTC P0132 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH
ble Code (DTC).>
P0133 O2 Sensor Circuit Slow Response <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-143, DTC P0133 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT SLOW
(Bank 1 Sensor 1) RESPONSE (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
P0134 O2 Sensor Circuit No Activity <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-145, DTC P0134 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT NO ACTIV-
Detected (Bank 1 Sensor 1) ITY DETECTED (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
P0137 O2 Sensor Circuit Low Voltage <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-147, DTC P0137 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW
ble Code (DTC).>
P0138 O2 Sensor Circuit High Voltage <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-149, DTC P0138 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH
ble Code (DTC).>
P0139 O2 Sensor Circuit Slow Response <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-151, DTC P0139 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT SLOW
P0140 O2 Sensor Circuit No Activity <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-153, DTC P0140 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT NO ACTIV-
Detected (Bank1 Sensor2) ITY DETECTED (BANK 1 SENSOR 2), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
P0171 System Too Lean (Bank 1) <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-155, DTC P0171 SYSTEM TOO LEAN (BANK 1),
Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-81

DTC Item Reference

P0172 System Too Rich (Bank 1) <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-156, DTC P0172 SYSTEM TOO RICH (BANK 1),
P0181 Fuel Temperature Sensor “A” Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-158, DTC P0181 FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Range/Performance “A” CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnos-
tic Trouble Code (DTC).>
Low Input “A” CIRCUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
High Input “A” CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P0196 Engine Oil Temperature Sensor <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-164, DTC P0196 ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE
Circuit Range/Performance SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with
P0197 Engine Oil Temperature Sensor Low <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-166, DTC P0197 ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE
SENSOR LOW, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0198 Engine Oil Temperature Sensor High <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-168, DTC P0198 ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE
SENSOR HIGH, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
“B” Circuit Low SENSOR/SWITCH “B” CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
“B” Circuit High SENSOR/SWITCH “B” CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
P0301 Cylinder 1 Misfire Detected <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-173, DTC P0301 CYLINDER 1 MISFIRE
DETECTED, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0327 Knock Sensor 1 Circuit Low <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-180, DTC P0327 KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT
(Bank 1 or Single Sensor) LOW (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
P0328 Knock Sensor 1 Circuit High <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-182, DTC P0328 KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT
(Bank 1 or Single Sensor) HIGH (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
P0335 Crankshaft Position Sensor “A” Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-184, DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SEN-
SOR “A” CIRCUIT, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
P0336 Crankshaft Position Sensor “A” Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-186, DTC P0336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SEN-
Range/Performance SOR “A” CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with
P0340 Camshaft Position Sensor “A” Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-188, DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
(Bank 1 or Single Sensor) “A” CIRCUIT (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR), Diagnostic Procedure with
P0341 Camshaft Position Sensor “A” Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-190, DTC P0341 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
Range/Performance “A” CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR),
(Bank 1 or Single Sensor) Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0400 Exhaust Gas Recirculation Flow <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-192, DTC P0400 EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION
FLOW, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0420 Catalyst System Efficiency Below <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-194, DTC P0420 CATALYST SYSTEM EFFICIENCY
Threshold (Bank 1) BELOW THRESHOLD (BANK 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-82

DTC Item Reference

P0442 Evaporative Emission Control <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-198, DTC P0442 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CON-
System Leak Detected (Small Leak) TROL SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED (SMALL LEAK), Diagnostic Procedure
System Vent Control Circuit Open TROL SYSTEM VENT CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN, Diagnostic Procedure
System Vent Control Circuit Shorted TROL SYSTEM VENT CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED, Diagnostic Proce-
System Pressure Sensor TROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
System Pressure Sensor Low Input TROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Procedure
System Pressure Sensor High Input TROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Procedure
System Leak Detected TROL SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED (VERY SMALL LEAK), Diagnostic Proce-
(Very Small Leak) dure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
System Leak Detected TROL SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED (FUEL CAP LOOSE/OFF), Diagnostic
(Fuel Cap Loose/Off) Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0458 Evaporative Emission System Purge <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-217, DTC P0458 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYS-
Control Valve Circuit Low TEM PURGE CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Procedure with
P0459 Evaporative Emission System Purge <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-219, DTC P0459 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYS-
Control Valve Circuit High TEM PURGE CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Procedure with
P0461 Fuel Level Sensor “A” Circuit Range/ <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-220, DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR “A” CIR-
Performance CUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
P0462 Fuel Level Sensor “A” Circuit Low <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-220, DTC P0462 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR “A” CIR-
CUIT LOW, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0463 Fuel Level Sensor “A” Circuit High <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-221, DTC P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR “A” CIR-
CUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0464 Fuel Level Sensor Circuit Intermittent <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-221, DTC P0464 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT
INTERMITTENT, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0483 Fan Rationality Check <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-222, DTC P0483 FAN RATIONALITY CHECK, Diag-
nostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0500 Vehicle Speed Sensor “A” <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-222, DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR “A”,
P0506 Idle Air Control System RPM Lower <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-223, DTC P0506 IDLE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM
Than Expected RPM LOWER THAN EXPECTED, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
P0507 Idle Air Control System RPM Higher <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-225, DTC P0507 IDLE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM
Than Expected RPM HIGHER THAN EXPECTED, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
P0512 Starter Request Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-227, DTC P0512 STARTER REQUEST CIRCUIT,
P0513 Incorrect Immobilizer Key <Ref. to IM(diag)-16, DTC P0513 INCORRECT IMMOBILIZER KEY, Diagnos-
tic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0519 Idle Air Control System Performance <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-229, DTC P0519 IDLE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM
PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-83

DTC Item Reference

P0600 Serial Communication Link <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-229, DTC P0600 SERIAL COMMUNICATION LINK,
P0604 Internal Control Module Random <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-230, DTC P0604 INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE
Access Memory (RAM) Error RANDOM ACCESS MEMORY (RAM) ERROR, Diagnostic Procedure with
P0605 Internal Control Module Read Only <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-231, DTC P0605 INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE
Memory (ROM) Error READ ONLY MEMORY (ROM) ERROR, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
P0607 Control Module Performance <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-232, DTC P0607 CONTROL MODULE PERFOR-
MANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0638 Throttle Actuator Control Range/ <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-233, DTC P0638 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CON-
Performance (Bank 1) TROL RANGE/PERFORMANCE (BANK 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diag-
nostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0691 Fan 1 Control Circuit Low <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-234, DTC P0691 FAN 1 CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW,
P0692 Fan 1 Control Circuit High <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-234, DTC P0692 FAN 1 CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH,
P0700 Transmission Control System <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-234, DTC P0700 TRANSMISSION CONTROL SYS-
(MIL Request) TEM (MIL REQUEST), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
P0851 Park/Neutral Switch Input Circuit Low <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-235, DTC P0851 PARK/NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT
(AT Model) CIRCUIT LOW (AT MODEL), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P0851 Park/Neutral Switch Input Circuit High <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-237, DTC P0851 NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIR-
(MT Model) CUIT LOW (MT MODEL), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
P0852 Park/Neutral Switch Input Circuit High <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-239, DTC P0852 PARK/NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT
(AT Model) CIRCUIT HIGH (AT MODEL), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P0852 Neutral Switch Input Circuit High <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-241, DTC P0852 NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIR-
(MT Model) CUIT HIGH (MT MODEL), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
P1152 O2 Sensor Circuit Range/ <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-243, DTC P1152 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/
Performance (Low) (Bank1 Sensor1) PERFORMANCE (LOW) (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Procedure with
P1153 O2 Sensor Circuit Range/ <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-245, DTC P1153 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/
Performance (High) (Bank1 Sensor1) PERFORMANCE (HIGH) (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Procedure with
P1160 Return Spring Failure <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-246, DTC P1160 RETURN SPRING FAILURE,
P1400 Fuel Tank Pressure Control Solenoid <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-247, DTC P1400 FUEL TANK PRESSURE CON-
Valve Circuit Low TROL SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnos-
P1420 Fuel Tank Pressure Control Sol. Valve <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-249, DTC P1420 FUEL TANK PRESSURE CON-
Circuit High TROL SOL. VALVE CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
P1443 Vent Control Solenoid Valve Function <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-251, DTC P1443 VENT CONTROL SOLENOID
Problem VALVE FUNCTION PROBLEM, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P1491 Positive Crankcase Ventilation <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-253, DTC P1491 POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTI-
(Blow-by) Function Problem LATION (BLOW-BY) FUNCTION PROBLEM, Diagnostic Procedure with Diag-
P1492 EGR Solenoid Valve Signal #1 Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-255, DTC P1492 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL
Malfunction (Low Input) #1 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (LOW INPUT), Diagnostic Procedure with Diag-
EN(H4SO)(diag)-84

DTC Item Reference

Malfunction (High Input) #1 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (HIGH INPUT), Diagnostic Procedure with Diag-
P1518 Starter Switch Circuit Low Input <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-261, DTC P1518 STARTER SWITCH CIRCUIT
LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P1560 Back-up Voltage Circuit Malfunction <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-263, DTC P1560 BACK-UP VOLTAGE CIRCUIT
MALFUNCTION, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P1570 Antenna <Ref. to IM(diag)-17, DTC P1570 ANTENNA, Diagnostic Procedure with Diag-
P1571 Reference Code Incompatibility <Ref. to IM(diag)-19, DTC P1571 REFERENCE CODE INCOMPATIBILITY,
P1572 IMM Circuit Failure <Ref. to IM(diag)-20, DTC P1572 IMM CIRCUIT FAILURE (EXCEPT
(Except Antenna Circuit) ANTENNA CIRCUIT), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
P1574 KEY Communication Failure <Ref. to IM(diag)-22, DTC P1574 KEY COMMUNICATION FAILURE, Diag-
P1576 EGI Control Module Eeprom <Ref. to IM(diag)-23, DTC P1576 EGI CONTROL MODULE EEPROM, Diag-
P1577 IMM Control Module EEPROM <Ref. to IM(diag)-23, DTC P1577 IMM CONTROL MODULE EEPROM, Diag-
P1578 Meter Failure <Ref. to IM(diag)-24, DTC P1578 METER FAILURE, Diagnostic Procedure
P1602 Control Module Programming Error <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-265, DTC P1602 CONTROL MODULE PROGRAM-
MING ERROR, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P2096 Post Catalyst Fuel Trim System Too <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-275, DTC P2096 POST CATALYST FUEL TRIM
Lean Bank 1 SYSTEM TOO LEAN BANK 1, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P2097 Post Catalyst Fuel Trim System Too <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-281, DTC P2097 POST CATALYST FUEL TRIM
Rich Bank 1 SYSTEM TOO RICH BANK 1, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P2101 Throttle Actuator Control Motor Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-287, DTC P2101 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CON-
Range/Performance TROL MOTOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure
Low TROL MOTOR CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-85

DTC Item Reference

High TROL MOTOR CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P2109 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor “A” <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-295, DTC P2109 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION
Minimum Stop Performance SENSOR “A” MINIMUM STOP PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with
“D” Circuit Low Input SENSOR/SWITCH “D” CIRCUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Procedure with
“D” Circuit High Input SENSOR/SWITCH “D” CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Procedure with
“E” Circuit Low Input SENSOR/SWITCH “E” CIRCUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Procedure with
“E” Circuit High Input SENSOR/SWITCH “E” CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Procedure with
“A”/“B” Voltage Correlation SENSOR/SWITCH “A”/“B” VOLTAGE CORRELATION, Diagnostic Procedure
“D”/“E” Voltage Correlation SENSOR/SWITCH “D”/“E” VOLTAGE CORRELATION, Diagnostic Procedure
P2227 Barometric Pressure Circuit Range/ <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-309, DTC P2227 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIR-
Performance CUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
P2228 Barometric Pressure Circuit Low <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-309, DTC P2228 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIR-
CUIT LOW, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P2229 Barometric Pressure Circuit High <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-310, DTC P2229 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIR-
CUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-86
Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)

19.Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)

A: DTC P0026 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT RANGE/PER-
FORMANCE (BANK 1)
DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Immediately at fault recognition
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-9, DTC P0026 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID
CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
B134 ECM 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
31
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
B21
21
E2
E71
1
VVL DIAGNOSIS
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH RH
EN-04025
EN(H4SO)(diag)-87

Step Check Yes No

VARIABLE VALVE LIFT DIAGNOSIS OIL circuit of harness
PRESSURE SWITCH. between ECM and
1) Warm-up the engine. variable valve lift
2) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. diagnosis oil pres-
3) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM sure switch con-
and variable valve lift diagnosis oil pressure nector.
switch.
ECM and variable valve lift diagnosis oil pres-
sure switch connector.
(B134) No. 31 — (E71) No. 1:
VARIABLE VALVE LIFT DIAGNOSIS OIL more? short circuit of har-
PRESSURE SWITCH. ness between
Measure the resistance between the variable ECM and variable
valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch connec- valve lift diagnosis
tor and engine ground. oil pressure switch
Connector & terminal connector.
(E71) No. 1 — Engine ground:
3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the voltage 10 V or more? Repair the short Go to step 4.
VARIABLE VALVE LIFT DIAGNOSIS OIL circuit to power of
PRESSURE SWITCH. the harness
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. between the ECM
2) Measure the voltage between the variable and variable valve
valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch connec- lift diagnosis oil
tor and engine ground. pressure switch
4 CHECK DTC. Is DTC displayed? Replace the oil END
1) Perform the Clear Memory Mode. switching solenoid
2) After idling the engine, check the DTC. valve. <Ref. to
NOTE: ME(H4SO)-83, Oil
For detailed procedures, refer to “Clear Memory Switching Solenoid
Mode”. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-53, Clear Valve.> Go to step
Memory Mode.> 5.
5 CHECK DTC. Is DTC displayed? Check for oil rout- END.
1) Perform the Clear Memory Mode. ing.
2) After idling the engine, check the DTC.
NOTE:
For detailed procedures, refer to “Clear Memory
Mode”. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-53, Clear
Memory Mode.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-88

B: DTC P0028 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT

RANGE/PERFORMANCE (BANK 2)
CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE (BANK 2), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
B134 ECM 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
32
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
B21
22
E2
E72
1
VVL DIAGNOSIS
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH LH
EN-04026
EN(H4SO)(diag)-89

Step Check Yes No

VARIABLE VALVE LIFT DIAGNOSIS OIL circuit of harness
PRESSURE SWITCH. between ECM and
1) Warm-up the engine. variable valve lift
2) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. diagnosis oil pres-
3) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM sure switch con-
and variable valve lift diagnosis oil pressure nector.
switch.
ECM and variable valve lift diagnosis oil pres-
sure switch connector.
(B134) No. 32 — (E72) No. 1:
VARIABLE VALVE LIFT DIAGNOSIS OIL more? short circuit of har-
PRESSURE SWITCH. ness between
Measure the resistance between the variable ECM and variable
valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch connec- valve lift diagnosis
tor and engine ground. oil pressure switch
VARIABLE VALVE LIFT DIAGNOSIS OIL circuit to power of
PRESSURE SWITCH. the harness
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. between the ECM
2) Measure the voltage between the variable and variable valve
valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch connec- lift diagnosis oil
tor and engine ground. pressure switch
4 CHECK DTC. Is DTC displayed? Replace the oil END
1) Perform the Clear Memory Mode. switching solenoid
2) After idling the engine, check the DTC. valve. <Ref. to
NOTE: ME(H4SO)-83, Oil
For detailed procedures, refer to “Clear Memory Switching Solenoid
Mode”. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-53, Clear Valve.> Go to step
Memory Mode.> 5.
5 CHECK DTC. Is DTC displayed? Check for oil rout- END
1) Perform the Clear Memory Mode. ing.
2) After idling the engine, check the DTC.
NOTE:
Mode”. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-53, Clear
Memory Mode.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-90

C: DTC P0030 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

• Detected when two consecutive driving cycles with fault occur.
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-11, DTC P0030 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT
(BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B327
OXYGEN SENSOR RELAY BATTERY
1 2
SBF-5 3 4
6 5 6
4 50
5 B21 E2 E22 B138

3
6
2 FRONT 3 2 1 1 2 3 4
OXYGEN (A/F) 5 6 7 8
1 SENSOR
6 5 4
B327 E22
B21
4
3
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
E2 42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
51
4
3
B21
E
A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
* 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
* 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
B1
B8
B9
C2
C3
B138
B: B135
A: B134 E
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
B: B135
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
ECM
C: B136 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
D: B137
C: B136
A5
D1
D2
D3
D7
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
B21 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
36
34
35
37
52
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
E2
D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
E 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
: TERMINAL No. OPTIONAL
* ARRANGEMENT
26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-05042
EN(H4SO)(diag)-91

Step Check Yes No

FRONT OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR CONNEC- circuit of harness
TOR. between ECM and
1) Start and warm-up the engine. front oxygen (A/F)
2) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. sensor connector.
3) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM
and front oxygen (A/F) sensor.
ECM and front oxygen (A/F) sensor connector.
(B136) No. 2 — (E22) No. 4:
(B136) No. 3 — (E22) No. 4:
Measure the resistance of harness between front oxygen (A/F)
ECM and front oxygen (A/F) sensor connector. sensor connector.
(B135) No. 9 — (E22) No. 1:
(B135) No. 8 — (E22) No. 3:
3 CHECK FRONT OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR. Is the resistance less than 5 Ω? Go to step 4. Replace the front
Measure the resistance between front oxygen oxygen (A/F) sen-
(A/F) sensor connector terminals. sor. <Ref. to
Terminals FU(H4SO)-33,
No. 6 — No. 4: Front Oxygen (A/F)
Sensor.>
4 CHECK POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact in ECM or Repair the poor Replace the front
Check poor contact of ECM and front oxygen front oxygen (A/F) sensor con- contact of ECM or oxygen (A/F) sen-
(A/F) sensor connector. nector? front oxygen (A/F) sor. <Ref. to
sensor connector. FU(H4SO)-33,
Front Oxygen (A/F)
Sensor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-92

D: DTC P0031 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

LOW (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B327
1 2
SBF-5 3 4
6 5 6
4 50
5 B21 E2 E22 B138

3
6
2 FRONT 3 2 1 1 2 3 4
1 SENSOR
6 5 4
B327 E22
B21
4
3
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
E2 42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
51
4
3
B21
E
A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
* 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
* 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
B1
B8
B9
C2
C3
B138
B: B135
A: B134 E
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
B: B135
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
ECM
C: B136 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
D: B137
C: B136
A5
D1
D2
D3
D7
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
B21 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
36
34
35
37
52
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
E2
D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
E 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
* ARRANGEMENT
26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-05042
EN(H4SO)(diag)-93

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO FRONT OXY- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 2. Repair the power
GEN (A/F) SENSOR. supply line or
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. replace the main
2) Disconnect the connector from front oxygen relay.
(A/F) sensor. NOTE:
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. In this case, repair
4) Measure the voltage between front oxygen the following item:
(A/F) sensor connector and engine ground. • Open circuit in
(E22) No. 6 (+) — Engine ground (–): A/F and oxygen
sensor relay and
front oxygen (A/F)
sensor connector
• Poor contact in
A/F and oxygen
sensor relay con-
nector
• Poor contact in
coupling connector
FRONT OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR. circuit of harness
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. between ECM and
2) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM. front oxygen (A/F)
3) Measure the resistance between ECM and sensor.
front oxygen (A/F) sensor connector.
(B136) No. 2 — (E22) No. 4:
(B136) No. 3 — (E22) No. 4:
3 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR ECM. Is the resistance less than 5 Ω? Go to step 4. Repair the harness
Measure the resistance of harness between and connector.
ECM and chassis ground. NOTE:
Connector & terminal In this case, repair
(B134) No. 5 — Chassis ground: the following item:
(B137) No. 1 — Chassis ground: • Open circuit of
(B137) No. 2 — Chassis ground: harness between
(B137) No. 3 — Chassis ground: ECM and engine
(B137) No. 7 — Chassis ground: ground
• Poor contact in
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
4 CHECK FRONT OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR. Is the resistance between 2 — Repair poor con- Replace the front
Measure the resistance between front oxygen 3 Ω? tact in ECM con- oxygen (A/F) sen-
(A/F) sensor connector terminals. nector. sor. <Ref. to
Sensor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-94

E: DTC P0032 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

HIGH (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B327
1 2
SBF-5 3 4
6 5 6
4 50
5 B21 E2 E22 B138

3
6
2 FRONT 3 2 1 1 2 3 4
1 SENSOR
6 5 4
B327 E22
B21
4
3
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
E2 42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
51
4
3
B21
E
A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
* 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
* 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
B1
B8
B9
C2
C3
B138
B: B135
A: B134 E
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
B: B135
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
ECM
C: B136 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
D: B137
C: B136
A5
D1
D2
D3
D7
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
B21 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
36
34
35
37
52
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
E2
D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
E 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
* ARRANGEMENT
26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-05042
EN(H4SO)(diag)-95

Step Check Yes No

FRONT OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR. circuit to power in
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. the harness
2) Measure the voltage between ECM and between the ECM
chassis ground. and front oxygen
Connector & terminal (A/F) sensor con-
(B136) No. 2 (+) — Chassis ground (–): nector.
2 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR ECM. Is the resistance less than 5 Ω? Repair poor con- Repair the harness
1) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM. tact in ECM con- and connector.
2) Measure the resistance between ECM and nector. NOTE:
chassis ground. In this case, repair
Connector & terminal the following item:
(B137) No. 7 — Chassis ground: • Poor contact of
coupling connector
EN(H4SO)(diag)-96

F: DTC P0037 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1 SENSOR 2)

CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B327
1 2
SBF-5 3 4
6 5 6
4 50
5 B21 E2 E23 B138

3
2
2 1 2 1 2 3 4
REAR OXYGEN
1 3 4 5 6 7 8
SENSOR
B327 E23
B21
1
4
3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
E2 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
53
19
1
B21
E
A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
* 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
*
B138
A29
B4
B1
C4
B: B135
A: B134 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
B: B135 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
ECM 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
C: B136
D: B137 C: B136
A5
D1
D2
D3
D7
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
B21 E 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
36
34
35
37
52
E2
D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
: TERMINAL No. OPTIONAL ARRANGEMENT 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
E * AMONG 3, 4, 7 AND 8 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-05043
EN(H4SO)(diag)-97

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO REAR OXY- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 2. Repair the power
GEN SENSOR. supply line or
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. replace the main
2) Disconnect the connector from the rear oxy- relay.
gen sensor. NOTE:
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. In this case, repair
4) Measure the voltage between rear oxygen the following item:
sensor connector and engine ground. • Open circuit in
(E23) No. 2 (+) — Engine ground (–): A/F and oxygen
sensor relay and
rear oxygen sen-
sor
• Poor contact in
A/F and oxygen
sensor relay con-
nector
• Poor contact in
coupling connector
REAR OXYGEN SENSOR. circuit of the har-
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ness between
2) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM. ECM and rear oxy-
3) Measure the resistance between ECM and gen sensor.
oxygen sensor connector.
(B136) No. 4 — (E23) No. 1:
• Poor contact in
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
4 CHECK REAR OXYGEN SENSOR. Is the resistance between 5 — Repair poor con- Replace the rear
Measure the resistance between rear oxygen 7 Ω? tact in ECM con- oxygen sensor.
sensor connector terminals. nector. <Ref. to
No. 2 — No. 1: Rear Oxygen Sen-
sor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-98

G: DTC P0038 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 1 SENSOR 2)

CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B327
1 2
SBF-5 3 4
6 5 6
4 50
5 B21 E2 E23 B138

3
2
2 1 2 1 2 3 4
REAR OXYGEN
1 3 4 5 6 7 8
SENSOR
B327 E23
B21
1
4
3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
E2 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
53
19
1
B21
E
A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
* 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
*
B138
A29
B4
B1
C4
B: B135
A: B134 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
B: B135 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
ECM 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
C: B136
D: B137 C: B136
A5
D1
D2
D3
D7
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
B21 E 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
36
34
35
37
52
E2
D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
E * AMONG 3, 4, 7 AND 8 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-05043
EN(H4SO)(diag)-99

Step Check Yes No

REAR OXYGEN SENSOR. circuit to power in
2) Measure the voltage between ECM and between ECM and
chassis ground. rear oxygen sensor
2 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR ECM. Is the resistance less than 5 Ω? Repair poor con- Repair the harness
1) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM. tact in ECM con- and connector.
2) Measure the resistance between ECM and nector. NOTE:
coupling connector
EN(H4SO)(diag)-100

H: DTC P0068 MAP/MAF - THROTTLE POSITION CORRELATION

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-21, DTC P0068 MAP/MAF - THROTTLE POSITION
CORRELATION, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MANIFOLD E21
ABSOLUTE
PRESSURE 1 2 3
SENSOR
2
1
3
E21 B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B134
E2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
19
20
7
B21 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
29
19
6
B134 ECM
EN-04029
EN(H4SO)(diag)-101

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK AIR INTAKE SYSTEM. Are there holes, loose bolts or Repair the air Go to step 2.
disconnection of hose on air intake system.
intake system?
2 CHECK MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE Is the measured value 73.3 — Go to step 3. Replace the mani-
SENSOR. 106.6 kPa (550 — 800 mmHg, fold absolute pres-
1) Start the engine and warm-up engine until 21.65 — 31.50 inHg) when the sure sensor. <Ref.
coolant temperature is higher than 70°C ignition is turned ON, and 20.0 to FU(H4SO)-25,
(158°F). — 46.7 kPa (150 — 350 mmHg, Manifold Absolute
2) For AT models, set the select lever to the “P” 5.91 — 13.78 inHg) during Pressure Sensor.>
or “N” range, and for MT models, place the shift idling?
lever in the neutral position.
3) Turn the A/C switch to OFF.
4) Turn all the accessory switches to OFF.
5) Read the data of intake manifold pressure
sensor signal using Subaru Select Monitor or
general scan tool.
NOTE:
For detailed operation procedures, refer to
“READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE”. <Ref.
to EN(H4SO)(diag)-34, Subaru Select Moni-
tor.>
• General scan tool
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the
“General Scan Tool Instruction Manual”.
3 CHECK THROTTLE OPENING ANGLE. Is the measured value less than Go to step 4. Replace the elec-
Read the data of throttle position signal using 5% when throttle is fully tronic throttle con-
Subaru Select Monitor or general scan tool. closed? trol. <Ref. to
NOTE: FU(H4SO)-11,
• Subaru Select Monitor Throttle Body.>
tor.>
4 CHECK THROTTLE OPENING ANGLE. Is the measured value 85% or Replace the mani- Replace the elec-
more when throttle is fully fold absolute pres- tronic throttle con-
open? sure sensor. <Ref. trol. <Ref. to
to FU(H4SO)-25, FU(H4SO)-11,
Manifold Absolute Throttle Body.>
Pressure Sensor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-102

I: DTC P0076 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1)

CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Erroneous idling
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B137 ECM
B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
25
24
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B21
E69
23
24
E2
1 2
E69
1
OIL SWITCHING SOLENOID VALVE RH
EN-04913
EN(H4SO)(diag)-103

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND OIL Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 2. Repair the harness
SWITCHING SOLENOID VALVE. and connector.
2) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM In this case, repair
and oil switching solenoid valve. the following item:
3) Measure the resistance of harness between • Open circuit of
ECM and oil switching solenoid valve. harness between
Connector & terminal ECM and oil
(B137) No. 25 — (E69) No. 1: switching solenoid
(B137) No. 24 — (E69) No. 2: valve connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND OIL Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 3. Repair the ground
SWITCHING SOLENOID VALVE. more? short circuit of har-
Measure the resistance between ECM and ness between
chassis ground. ECM and oil
Connector & terminal switching solenoid
(B137) No. 25 — Chassis ground: valve connector.
3 CHECK OIL SWITCHING SOLENOID VALVE. Is the resistance between 6 — Repair the poor Replace the oil
Measure the resistance between oil switching 12 Ω? contact of ECM switching solenoid
solenoid valve terminals. and oil switching valve. <Ref. to
Terminals solenoid valve con- ME(H4SO)-83, Oil
No. 1 — No. 2: nector. Switching Solenoid
Valve.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-104

J: DTC P0077 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 1)

CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B137 ECM
B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
25
24
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B21
E69
23
24
E2
1 2
E69
1
OIL SWITCHING SOLENOID VALVE RH
EN-04913
EN(H4SO)(diag)-105

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND OIL Is the voltage less than 1 V? Go to step 2. Repair the short
SWITCHING SOLENOID VALVE. circuit to power in
2) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM between ECM and
and oil switching solenoid valve. oil switching sole-
3) Measure the voltage between ECM and noid valve connec-
chassis ground. tor.
Measure the resistance of harness between NOTE:
ECM and oil switching solenoid valve connec- In this case, repair
tor. the following item:
(B137) No. 25 — (E69) No. 1: harness between
(B137) No. 24 — (E69) No. 2: ECM and oil
switching solenoid
valve connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
Valve.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-106

K: DTC P0082 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 2)

CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B137 ECM
B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
31
30
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B21
E70
27
28
E2
1 2
E70
1
OIL SWITCHING SOLENOID VALVE LH
EN-04914
EN(H4SO)(diag)-107

Step Check Yes No

and oil switching solenoid valve. the following item:
3) Measure the resistance between ECM and • Open circuit of
oil switching solenoid valve. harness between
Connector & terminal ECM and oil
(B137) No. 31 — (E70) No. 1: switching solenoid
(B137) No. 30 — (E70) No. 2: valve connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND OIL Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 3. Repair the ground
SWITCHING SOLENOID VALVE. more? short circuit of har-
Measure the resistance between ECM and ness between
chassis ground. ECM and oil
Connector & terminal switching solenoid
(B137) No. 31 — Chassis ground: valve connector.
Valve.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-108

L: DTC P0083 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 2)

CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B137 ECM
B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
31
30
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B21
E70
27
28
E2
1 2
E70
1
OIL SWITCHING SOLENOID VALVE LH
EN-04914
EN(H4SO)(diag)-109

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND OIL Is the voltage less than 1 V? Go to step 2. Repair the short
SWITCHING SOLENOID VALVE. circuit to power in
and oil switching solenoid valve. oil switching sole-
3) Measure the voltage between ECM and noid valve connec-
chassis ground. tor.
Measure the resistance between the ECM and NOTE:
oil switching solenoid valve connector. In this case, repair
(B137) No. 31 — (E70) No. 1: • Open circuit of
ECM and oil
switching solenoid
valve connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
Valve.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-110

M: DTC P0101 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIRCUIT

RANGE/PERFORMANCE
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-26, DTC P0101 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIRCUIT
RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
• Engine stalls.
• Poor driving performance
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY
5 BATTERY
3
SBF-7
6
4
2
1
1
B47
MASS AIR FLOW &

INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
B3
5
*
*
B83

* ARRANGEMENT
AMONG 1, 2, 5 AND 6
34
35
26
30
18
E
B135 ECM
B3 B47 B135 B83
1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5 3 4 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
5 6 7 8
5 6 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-04915
EN(H4SO)(diag)-111

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK FOR ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY. Is any other DTC displayed? Check the appro- Replace the mass
priate DTC using air flow and intake
the “List of Diag- air temperature
nostic Trouble sensor. <Ref. to
Code (DTC)”. FU(H4SO)-26,
<Ref. to Mass Air Flow and
EN(H4SO)(diag)- Intake Air Temper-
80, List of Diagnos- ature Sensor.>
tic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-112

N: DTC P0102 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIRCUIT LOW INPUT

LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
• Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY
5 BATTERY
3
SBF-7
6
4
2
1
1
B47
MASS AIR FLOW &

SENSOR
B3
5
*
*
B83

* ARRANGEMENT
AMONG 1, 2, 5 AND 6
34
35
26
30
18
E
B135 ECM
B3 B47 B135 B83
1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5 3 4 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
5 6 7 8
5 6 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-04915
EN(H4SO)(diag)-113

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the voltage less than 0.2 V? Go to step 2. Even if the mal-
1) Start the engine. function indicator
2) Read the data of air flow sensor signal using light illuminates,
the Subaru Select Monitor or general scan tool. the circuit has
NOTE: returned to a nor-
• Subaru Select Monitor mal condition at
For detailed operation procedures, refer to this time. Repro-
“READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE”. <Ref. duce the failure,
to EN(H4SO)(diag)-34, Subaru Select Moni- and then perform
tor.> the diagnosis
• General scan tool again.
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the NOTE:
general scan tool operation manual. In this case, tem-
porary poor con-
tact of connector
may be the cause.
2 CHECK POWER SUPPLY OF MASS AIR Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 3. Repair the harness
FLOW AND INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE and connector.
SENSOR. NOTE:
2) Disconnect the connector from the mass air the following item:
flow and intake air temperature sensor. • Open circuit of
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. harness between
4) Measure the voltage between mass air flow ECM and the mass
and intake air temperature sensor connector air flow and intake
and engine ground. air temperature
Connector & terminal sensor connector.
(B3) No. 1 (+) — Engine ground (–): • Poor contact in
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
MASS AIR FLOW AND INTAKE AIR TEM- and connector.
PERATURE SENSOR CONNECTOR. NOTE:
ECM and the mass air flow and intake air tem- harness between
perature sensor connector. ECM and the mass
Connector & terminal air flow and intake
(B135) No. 26 — (B3) No. 3: air temperature
sensor connector.
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
MASS AIR FLOW AND INTAKE AIR TEM- more? short circuit of har-
PERATURE SENSOR CONNECTOR. ness between the
Measure the resistance between ECM and ECM and the mass
chassis ground. air flow and intake
Connector & terminal air temperature
(B135) No. 26 — Chassis ground: sensor connector.
5 CHECK POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact in the Repair any poor Replace the mass
Check for any poor contact in the ECM or the ECM or the mass air flow and contact in the ECM air flow and intake
mass air flow or intake air temperature sensor intake air temperature sensor or the mass air flow air temperature
connector. connector? and intake air tem- sensor. <Ref. to
perature sensor FU(H4SO)-26,
connector. Mass Air Flow and
Intake Air Temper-
ature Sensor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-114

O: DTC P0103 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT

HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
• Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY
5 BATTERY
3
SBF-7
6
4
2
1
1
B47
MASS AIR FLOW &

SENSOR
B3
5
*
*
B83

* ARRANGEMENT
AMONG 1, 2, 5 AND 6
34
35
26
30
18
E
B135 ECM
B3 B47 B135 B83
1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5 3 4 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
5 6 7 8
5 6 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-04915
EN(H4SO)(diag)-115

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the voltage 5 V or more? Go to step 2. Even if the mal-
to EN(H4SO)(diag)-34, Subaru Select Moni- and then perform
tor.> the diagnosis
porary poor con-
tact of connector
may be the cause.
MASS AIR FLOW AND INTAKE AIR TEM- circuit to power in
PERATURE SENSOR CONNECTOR. the harness
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. between the ECM
2) Disconnect the connector from the mass air and the mass air
flow and intake air temperature sensor. flow and intake air
3) Start the engine. temperature sen-
4) Read the data of air flow sensor signal using sor connector.
the Subaru Select Monitor or general scan tool.
NOTE:
tor.>
general scan tool operation manual.
3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 5 Ω? Go to step 4.Repair the harness
mass air flow and intake air temperature sensor • Open circuit of
connector and engine ground. harness between
Connector & terminal ECM and the mass
(B3) No. 2 — Engine ground: air flow and intake
air temperature
sensor connector.
• Poor contact in
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
Check for any poor contact in the mass air flow mass air flow and intake air contact of the air flow and intake
and intake air temperature sensor connector. temperature sensor connector? mass air flow and air temperature
intake air tempera- sensor. <Ref. to
ture sensor con- FU(H4SO)-26,
nector. Mass Air Flow and
Intake Air Temper-
ature Sensor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-116

P: DTC P0107 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE/BAROMETRIC PRESSURE

CIRCUIT LOW INPUT
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-33, DTC P0107 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE/
BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MANIFOLD E21
ABSOLUTE
PRESSURE 1 2 3
SENSOR
2
1
3
E21 B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B134
E2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
19
20
7
B21 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
29
19
6
B134 ECM
EN-04029
EN(H4SO)(diag)-117

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the measured value less than Go to step 2. Even if the mal-
1) Start the engine. 13.3 kPa (100 mmHg, 3.94 function indicator
2) Read the data of intake manifold absolute inHg) ? light illuminates,
pressure signal using Subaru Select Monitor or the circuit has
general scan tool. returned to a nor-
NOTE: mal condition at
• Subaru Select Monitor this time. Repro-
For detailed operation procedures, refer to duce the failure,
“READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE”. <Ref. and then perform
to EN(H4SO)(diag)-34, Subaru Select Moni- the diagnosis
tor.> again.
• General scan tool NOTE:
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the In this case, tem-
general scan tool operation manual. porary poor con-
tact of connector
may be the cause.
2 CHECK POWER SUPPLY OF THE MANI- Is the voltage 4.5 V or more? Go to step 3. Repair the harness
FOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR. and connector.
2) Disconnect the connector from manifold In this case, repair
absolute pressure sensor. the following item:
4) Measure the voltage between manifold harness between
absolute pressure sensor connector and ECM and manifold
engine ground. absolute pressure
(E21) No. 3 (+) — Engine ground (–): • Poor contact in
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SEN- and connector.
SOR CONNECTOR. NOTE:
ECM and manifold absolute pressure sensor harness between
connector. ECM and manifold
Connector & terminal absolute pressure
(B134) No. 6 — (E21) No. 1: sensor connector.
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 5. Repair ground
MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SEN- more? short circuit of har-
SOR CONNECTOR. ness between
Measure the resistance between ECM and ECM and manifold
chassis ground. absolute pressure
5 CHECK POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact in the Repair the poor Replace the mani-
Check for poor contact between the ECM and ECM or manifold absolute pres- contact in the ECM fold absolute pres-
manifold pressure sensor connector. sure sensor connector? or manifold abso- sure sensor. <Ref.
lute pressure sen- to FU(H4SO)-25,
sor connector. Manifold Absolute
Pressure Sensor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-118

Q: DTC P0108 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE/BAROMETRIC PRESSURE

CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-35, DTC P0108 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE/
BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MANIFOLD E21
ABSOLUTE
PRESSURE 1 2 3
SENSOR
2
1
3
E21 B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B134
E2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
19
20
7
B21 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
29
19
6
B134 ECM
EN-04029
EN(H4SO)(diag)-119

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the measured value 119.5 Go to step 2. Even if the mal-
1) Start the engine. kPa (896.5 mmHg, 35.29 inHg) function indicator
2) Read the data of intake manifold absolute or more? light illuminates,
tor.> again.
tact of connector
may be the cause.
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the measured value 119.5 Repair the short Go to step 3.
MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SEN- kPa (896.5 mmHg, 35.29 inHg) circuit to power in
SOR CONNECTOR. or more? the harness
2) Disconnect the connector from manifold manifold absolute
absolute pressure sensor. pressure sensor
3) Start the engine. connector.
4) Read the data of intake manifold absolute
pressure signal using Subaru Select Monitor or
general scan tool.
NOTE:
tor.>
manifold absolute pressure sensor connector • Open circuit of
and engine ground. harness between
Connector & terminal ECM and manifold
(E21) No. 2 — Engine ground: absolute pressure
sensor connector.
• Poor contact in
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
4 CHECK POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact in mani- Repair the poor Replace the mani-
Check for poor contact of the manifold absolute fold absolute pressure sensor contact of manifold absolute pres-
pressure sensor connector. connector? fold absolute pressure sensor. <Ref.
sure sensor to FU(H4SO)-25,
connector. Manifold Absolute
Pressure Sensor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-120

R: DTC P0111 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT

RANGE/PERFORMANCE
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-37, DTC P0111 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1 CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY
5 BATTERY
3
SBF-7
6
4
2
1
1
B47
MASS AIR FLOW &

SENSOR
B3
5
*
*
B83

* ARRANGEMENT
AMONG 1, 2, 5 AND 6
34
35
26
30
18
E
B135 ECM
B3 B47 B135 B83
1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5 3 4 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
5 6 7 8
5 6 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-04915
EN(H4SO)(diag)-121

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERA- Is the engine coolant tempera- Replace the mass Check DTC P0125
TURE. ture 70°C (158°F) or higher ? air flow and intake using “List of Diag-
1) Start the engine and warm-up completely. air temperature nostic Trouble
2) Measure the engine coolant temperature sensor. <Ref. to Code (DTC)”.
using the Subaru Select Monitor or general FU(H4SO)-26, <Ref. to
scan tool. Mass Air Flow and EN(H4SO)(diag)-
NOTE: Intake Air Temper- 80, List of Diagnos-
• Subaru Select Monitor ature Sensor.> tic Trouble Code
For detailed operation procedures, refer to (DTC).>
tor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-122

S: DTC P0112 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT LOW

1 CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY
5 BATTERY
3
SBF-7
6
4
2
1
1
B47
MASS AIR FLOW &

SENSOR
B3
5
*
*
B83

* ARRANGEMENT
AMONG 1, 2, 5 AND 6
34
35
26
30
18
E
B135 ECM
B3 B47 B135 B83
1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5 3 4 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
5 6 7 8
5 6 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-04915
EN(H4SO)(diag)-123

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the intake air temperature Go to step 2. Even if the mal-
1) Start the engine. 120°C (248°F) or higher? function indicator
2) Read the data of intake air temperature sen- light illuminates,
sor signal using Subaru Select Monitor or gen- the circuit has
eral scan tool. returned to a nor-
tor.> again.
tact of connector
may be the cause.
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Replace the mass Repair the ground
MASS AIR FLOW AND INTAKE AIR TEM- more? air flow and intake short circuit of har-
PERATURE SENSOR CONNECTOR. air temperature ness between the
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. sensor. <Ref. to ECM and the mass
2) Disconnect the connector from the ECM FU(H4SO)-26, air flow and intake
and the mass air flow and intake air temperature Mass Air Flow and air temperature
sensor. Intake Air Temper- sensor connector.
3) Measure the resistance between ECM and ature Sensor.>
chassis ground.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-124

T: DTC P0113 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT HIGH

1 CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY
5 BATTERY
3
SBF-7
6
4
2
1
1
B47
MASS AIR FLOW &

SENSOR
B3
5
*
*
B83

* ARRANGEMENT
AMONG 1, 2, 5 AND 6
34
35
26
30
18
E
B135 ECM
B3 B47 B135 B83
1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5 3 4 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
5 6 7 8
5 6 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-04915
EN(H4SO)(diag)-125

Step Check Yes No

1) Start the engine. less than –40°C (–40°F) ? function indicator
tor.> again.
tact of connector
may be the cause.
2 CHECK POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact in the Repair any poor Go to step 3.
Check for poor contact in the ECM or the mass ECM or the mass air flow and contact in the ECM
air flow and intake air temperature sensor con- intake air temperature sensor or the mass air flow
nector. connector? and intake air tem-
perature sensor
connector.
MASS AIR FLOW AND INTAKE AIR TEM- circuit of harness
PERATURE SENSOR CONNECTOR. between the ECM
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. and the mass air
2) Disconnect the connector from the ECM flow and intake air
and the mass air flow and intake air temperature temperature sen-
sensor. sor connector.
ECM and the mass air flow and intake air tem-
perature sensor connector.
(B135) No. 18 — (B3) No. 4:
(B135) No. 30 — (B3) No. 5:
4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the voltage 5 V or more? Repair the short Replace the mass
MASS AIR FLOW AND INTAKE AIR TEM- circuit to power in air flow and intake
PERATURE SENSOR CONNECTOR. the harness air temperature
1) Connect all connectors. between the ECM sensor. <Ref. to
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. and the mass air FU(H4SO)-26,
3) Measure the voltage between ECM and flow and intake air Mass Air Flow and
chassis ground. temperature sen- Intake Air Temper-
Connector & terminal sor connector. ature Sensor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-126

U: DTC P0117 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE CIRCUIT LOW

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-43, DTC P0117 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Hard to start
• Improper idling
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
ENGINE
COOLANT E8
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
1 2
2
1
E8
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
E2 B134
19
8
B21 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
34
29
B134 ECM
EN-04033
EN(H4SO)(diag)-127

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the engine coolant tempera- Go to step 2. Even if the mal-
1) Start the engine. ture 150°C (302°F) or higher ? function indicator
2) Read the data of engine coolant tempera- light illuminates,
ture sensor signal using Subaru Select Monitor the circuit has
or general scan tool. returned to a nor-
tor.> again.
tact of connector
may be the cause.
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND EN- Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Replace the Repair the ground
GINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR more? engine coolant short circuit of the
CONNECTOR. temperature sen- harness between
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. sor. <Ref. to the ECM and
2) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM FU(H4SO)-20, engine coolant
and engine coolant temperature sensor. Engine Coolant temperature sen-
3) Measure the resistance between ECM and Temperature Sen- sor.
chassis ground. sor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-128

V: DTC P0118 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE CIRCUIT HIGH

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-45, DTC P0118 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Hard to start
• Improper idling
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
ENGINE
COOLANT E8
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
1 2
2
1
E8
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
E2 B134
19
8
B21 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
34
29
B134 ECM
EN-04033
EN(H4SO)(diag)-129

Step Check Yes No

1) Start the engine. ture less than –40°C (–40°F) ? function indicator
tor.> again.
tact of connector
may be the cause.
Repair any poor contact between the ECM and ECM or engine coolant temper- contact between
engine coolant temperature sensor connectors. ature sensor connectors? the ECM and
engine coolant
temperature sen-
sor connectors.
3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND EN- Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 4. Repair the open
GINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR circuit of the har-
CONNECTOR. ness between the
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ECM and engine
2) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM coolant tempera-
and engine coolant temperature sensor. ture sensor con-
3) Measure the resistance of the harness nector.
between the ECM and engine coolant tempera-
ture sensor connector.
(B134) No. 34 — (E8) No. 2:
(B134) No. 29 — (E8) No. 1:
4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND EN- Is the voltage 5 V or more? Repair the short Replace the
GINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR circuit to power in engine coolant
CONNECTOR. the harness temperature sen-
1) Connect all connectors. between the ECM sor. <Ref. to
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. and engine coolant FU(H4SO)-20,
3) Measure the voltage between ECM and temperature sen- Engine Coolant
chassis ground. sor connector. Temperature Sen-
Connector & terminal sor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-130

W: DTC P0122 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH “A” CIRCUIT

LOW
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-47, DTC P0122 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SEN-
SOR/SWITCH “A” CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
• Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
BATTERY
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE SBF-7
CONTROL RELAY B362
8
5
6
7 MAIN RELAY
C21
C1
ECM
A: B134 C: B136 D: B137

E
A29
A19
A28
A18
D3
A5
D1
D4
D5
D2
D7
C6
*
*
B122
B21
37
36
34
35
52
20
39
38
17
18
19
E2
5
6
1
E : TERMINAL No. OPTIONAL

E57
ELECTRONIC * ARRANGEMENT
E THROTTLE CONTROL
B362 B122 B21 E57 A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
1 2 5 6 7 8
4 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
5
7 8
6
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54 C: B136 D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-05044
EN(H4SO)(diag)-131

Step Check Yes No

ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL. more? short circuit of har-
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and ECM and elec-
electronic throttle control. tronic throttle con-
3) Measure the resistance between ECM and trol connector.
chassis ground.
(B134) No. 18 — (B136) No. 6:
2 CHECK SHORT CIRCUIT INSIDE THE ECM. Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Replace the elec- Repair the ground
1) Connect the ECM. more? tronic throttle con- short circuit of har-
2) Measure the resistance between electronic trol. <Ref. to ness between
throttle control connector and engine ground. FU(H4SO)-11, ECM and elec-
Connector & terminal Throttle Body.> tronic throttle con-
(B134) No. 18 — Engine ground: trol connector.
Replace the ECM if
defective. <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-35,
Engine Control
Module (ECM).>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-132

X: DTC P0123 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH “A” CIRCUIT

HIGH
SOR/SWITCH “A” CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
• Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
BATTERY
CONTROL RELAY B362
8
5
6
7 MAIN RELAY
C21
C1
ECM
A: B134 C: B136 D: B137

E
A29
A19
A28
A18
D3
A5
D1
D4
D5
D2
D7
C6
*
*
B122
B21
37
36
34
35
52
20
39
38
17
18
19
E2
5
6
1

E57
E THROTTLE CONTROL
B362 B122 B21 E57 A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
1 2 5 6 7 8
4 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
5
7 8
6
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54 C: B136 D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-05044
EN(H4SO)(diag)-133

Step Check Yes No

ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL. circuit of harness
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and electronic throttle
electronic throttle control. control connector.
ECM and electronic throttle control connector.
(B134) No. 18 — (E57) No. 6:
(B134) No. 29 — (E57) No. 3:
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL. and connector.
1) Connect the ECM. NOTE:
2) Measure the resistance between electronic In this case, repair
throttle control connector and engine ground. the following item:
(E57) No. 3 — Engine ground: harness between
ECM and engine
ground
• Poor contact in
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the voltage 4.85 V or more? Repair the short Go to step 4.
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL. circuit to power in
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. the harness
2) Measure the voltage between electronic between ECM and
throttle control connector and engine ground. electronic throttle
Connector & terminal control connector.
4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Repair poor con- Repair the short
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL. more? tact of the elec- circuit to power in
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. tronic throttle the harness
2) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM. control connector. between ECM and
3) Measure the resistance between ECM con- Replace the elec- electronic throttle
nectors. tronic throttle con- control connector.
Connector & terminal trol if defective.
(B134) No. 19 — (B134) No. 18: <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-11,
Throttle Body.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-134

Y: DTC P0125 INSUFFICIENT COOLANT TEMPERATURE FOR CLOSED LOOP

FUEL CONTROL
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-51, DTC P0125 INSUFFICIENT COOLANT TEMPERA-
TURE FOR CLOSED LOOP FUEL CONTROL, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Engine does not return to idle.
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK TIRE SIZE. Is the tire size as specified? and Go to step 2. Replace the tire.
the same size as other three
wheels?
2 CHECK ENGINE COOLANT. Is the engine coolant normal? Go to step 3. Fill or replace the
Check the following items: engine coolant.
• Amount of engine coolant <Ref. to
• Engine coolant freeze CO(H4SO)-12,
• Contamination of engine coolant REPLACEMENT,
Engine Coolant.>
3 CHECK THERMOSTAT. Does the thermostat remain Replace the ther- Replace the
opened? mostat. <Ref. to engine coolant
CO(H4SO)-17, temperature sen-
Thermostat.> sor. <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-20,
Engine Coolant
Temperature Sen-
sor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-135

Z: DTC P0126 INSUFFICIENT ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE FOR STA-

BLE OPERATION
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-53, DTC P0126 INSUFFICIENT ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE FOR STABLE OPERATION, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Hard to start
• Improper idling
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
ENGINE
COOLANT E8
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
1 2
2
1
E8
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
E2 B134
19
8
B21 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
34
29
B134 ECM
EN-04033
EN(H4SO)(diag)-136

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Is the resistance of engine cool- Repair poor con- Replace the
SENSOR. ant temperature sensor differ- tact in ECM con- engine coolant
Measure the resistance between engine cool- ent between when engine nector. temperature sen-
ant temperature sensor terminals when the coolant is cold and after sor. <Ref. to
engine coolant is cold and after warmed-up. warmed-up? FU(H4SO)-20,
Terminals Engine Coolant
No. 1 — No. 2: Temperature Sen-
sor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-137

AA:DTC P0128 COOLANT THERMOSTAT (ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE

BELOW THERMOSTAT REGULATING TEMPERATURE)
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-55, DTC P0128 COOLANT THERMOSTAT (ENGINE
COOLANT TEMPERATURE BELOW THERMOSTAT REGULATING TEMPERATURE), Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Thermostat remains open.
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK ENGINE COOLANT. Are the coolant level and mix- Go to step 2. Replace the
ture ratio of engine coolant to engine coolant.
anti-freeze solution correct? <Ref. to
CO(H4SO)-12,
REPLACEMENT,
Engine Coolant.>
2 CHECK RADIATOR FAN. Does the radiator fan continu- Repair radiator fan Replace the ther-
1) Start the engine. ously rotate for 3 minutes or circuit. <Ref. to mostat. <Ref. to
2) Check the radiator fan operation. more during idling? CO(H4SO)-24, CO(H4SO)-17,
Radiator Main Fan Thermostat.>
and Fan Motor.>
and <Ref. to
CO(H4SO)-26,
Radiator Sub Fan
and Fan Motor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-138

AB:DTC P0131 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-57, DTC P0131 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B327
1 2
SBF-5 3 4
6 5 6
4 50
5 B21 E2 E22 B138

3
6
2 FRONT 3 2 1 1 2 3 4
1 SENSOR
6 5 4
B327 E22
B21
4
3
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
E2 42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
51
4
3
B21
E
A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
* 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
* 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
B1
B8
B9
C2
C3
B138
B: B135
A: B134 E
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
B: B135
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
ECM
C: B136 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
D: B137
C: B136
A5
D1
D2
D3
D7
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
B21 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
36
34
35
37
52
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
E2
D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
E 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
* ARRANGEMENT
26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-05042
EN(H4SO)(diag)-139

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK FRONT OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR Has water entered the connec- Completely Go to step 2.
CONNECTOR AND COUPLING CONNEC- tor? remove any water
TOR. inside.
FRONT OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR CONNEC- more? short circuit of har-
TOR. ness between
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ECM and front oxy-
2) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM gen (A/F) sensor
and front oxygen (A/F) sensor. connector.
3) Measure the resistance between ECM and
chassis ground.
3 CHECK POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact in front Repair the poor Replace the front
Check poor contact of front oxygen (A/F) sensor oxygen (A/F) sensor connec- contact of the front oxygen (A/F) sen-
connector. tor? oxygen (A/F) sensor. <Ref. to
sor connector. FU(H4SO)-33,
Front Oxygen (A/F)
Sensor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-140

AC:DTC P0132 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-59, DTC P0132 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B327
1 2
SBF-5 3 4
6 5 6
4 50
5 B21 E2 E22 B138

3
6
2 FRONT 3 2 1 1 2 3 4
1 SENSOR
6 5 4
B327 E22
B21
4
3
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
E2 42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
51
4
3
B21
E
A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
* 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
* 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
B1
B8
B9
C2
C3
B138
B: B135
A: B134 E
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
B: B135
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
ECM
C: B136 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
D: B137
C: B136
A5
D1
D2
D3
D7
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
B21 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
36
34
35
37
52
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
E2
D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
E 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
* ARRANGEMENT
26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-05042
EN(H4SO)(diag)-141

Step Check Yes No

TOR. inside.
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the voltage 8 V or more? Repair the short Replace the front
FRONT OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR CONNEC- circuit to power in oxygen (A/F) sen-
TOR. the harness sor. <Ref. to
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. between the ECM FU(H4SO)-33,
2) Disconnect the connector from front oxygen and front oxygen Front Oxygen (A/F)
(A/F) sensor. (A/F) sensor con- Sensor.>
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. nector.
4) Measure the voltage between ECM and
chassis ground.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-142

AD:DTC P0133 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT SLOW RESPONSE (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-61, DTC P0133 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT SLOW RE-
SPONSE (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B327
1 2
SBF-5 3 4
6 5 6
4 50
5 B21 E2 E22 B138

3
6
2 FRONT 3 2 1 1 2 3 4
1 SENSOR
6 5 4
B327 E22
B21
4
3
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
E2 42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
51
4
3
B21
E
A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
* 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
* 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
B1
B8
B9
C2
C3
B138
B: B135
A: B134 E
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
B: B135
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
ECM
C: B136 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
D: B137
C: B136
A5
D1
D2
D3
D7
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
B21 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
36
34
35
37
52
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
E2
D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
E 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
* ARRANGEMENT
26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-05042
EN(H4SO)(diag)-143

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM. Is there any fault in exhaust Repair the exhaust Replace the front
NOTE: system? system. oxygen (A/F) sen-
Check the following items. sor. <Ref. to
• Loose installation of front portion of exhaust FU(H4SO)-33,
pipe onto cylinder heads Front Oxygen (A/F)
• Loose connection between front exhaust pipe Sensor.>
and front catalytic converter
• Damage of exhaust pipe resulting in a hole
EN(H4SO)(diag)-144

AE:DTC P0134 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT NO ACTIVITY DETECTED

(BANK 1 SENSOR 1)
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-64, DTC P0134 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT NO ACTIVITY
DETECTED (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B327
1 2
SBF-5 3 4
6 5 6
4 50
5 B21 E2 E22 B138

3
6
2 FRONT 3 2 1 1 2 3 4
1 SENSOR
6 5 4
B327 E22
B21
4
3
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
E2 42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
51
4
3
B21
E
A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
* 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
* 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
B1
B8
B9
C2
C3
B138
B: B135
A: B134 E
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
B: B135
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
ECM
C: B136 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
D: B137
C: B136
A5
D1
D2
D3
D7
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
B21 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
36
34
35
37
52
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
E2
D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
E 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
* ARRANGEMENT
26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-05042
EN(H4SO)(diag)-145

Step Check Yes No

FRONT OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR CONNEC- and connector.
TOR. NOTE:
2) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM the following item:
and front oxygen (A/F) sensor. • Open circuit of
3) Measure the resistance of harness between harness between
ECM and front oxygen (A/F) sensor connector. ECM and front oxy-
Connector & terminal gen (A/F) sensor
(B135) No. 9 — (E22) No. 1: connector
(B135) No. 8 — (E22) No. 3: • Poor contact of
coupling connector
sensor connector. FU(H4SO)-33,
Front Oxygen (A/F)
Sensor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-146

AF:DTC P0137 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE (BANK 1 SENSOR 2)

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-66, DTC P0137 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B327
1 2
SBF-5 3 4
6 5 6
4 50
5 B21 E2 E23 B138

3
2
2 1 2 1 2 3 4
REAR OXYGEN
1 3 4 5 6 7 8
SENSOR
B327 E23
B21
1
4
3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
E2 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
53
19
1
B21
E
A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
* 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
*
B138
A29
B4
B1
C4
B: B135
A: B134 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
B: B135 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
ECM 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
C: B136
D: B137 C: B136
A5
D1
D2
D3
D7
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
B21 E 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
36
34
35
37
52
E2
D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
E * AMONG 3, 4, 7 AND 8 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-05043
EN(H4SO)(diag)-147

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK REAR OXYGEN SENSOR DATA. Is the voltage 490 mV or more? Go to step 5. Go to step 2.
1) Warm-up the engine until engine coolant
temperature is higher than 70°C (158°F), and
keep the engine speed at 3,000 rpm. (2 minutes
maximum)
2) Read the data of rear oxygen sensor signal
using Subaru Select Monitor or general scan
tool.
NOTE:
tor.>
2 CHECK REAR OXYGEN SENSOR CONNEC- Has water entered the connec- Completely Go to step 3.
TOR AND COUPLING CONNECTOR. tor? remove any water
inside.
REAR OXYGEN SENSOR CONNECTOR. circuit of harness
2) Disconnect the connector from ECM and rear oxygen sensor
rear oxygen sensor. connector.
ECM and rear oxygen sensor connector.
(B135) No. 4 — (E23) No. 3:
(B134) No. 29 — (E23) No. 4:
4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the voltage 0.2 — 0.5 V? Replace the rear Repair the harness
REAR OXYGEN SENSOR. oxygen sensor. and connector.
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. <Ref. to NOTE:
2) Disconnect the connector from the rear oxy- FU(H4SO)-34, In this case, repair
gen sensor. Rear Oxygen Sen- the following item:
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. sor.> • Open circuit of
4) Measure the voltage between rear oxygen harness between
sensor connector and chassis ground. the ECM and rear
Connector & terminal oxygen sensor
(E23) No. 3 (+) — Chassis ground (–): • Poor contact of
the rear oxygen
sensor connector
• Poor contact in
ECM connector
5 CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM. Is there any fault in exhaust Repair or replace Replace the rear
Check exhaust system parts. system? faulty parts. oxygen sensor.
NOTE: <Ref. to
Check the following items. FU(H4SO)-34,
• Loose part and incomplete installation of ex- Rear Oxygen Sen-
haust system sor.>
• Damage (crack, hole etc.) of parts
• Loose part and improper installation between
front oxygen (A/F) sensor and rear oxygen sen-
sor
EN(H4SO)(diag)-148

AG:DTC P0138 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE (BANK 1 SENSOR 2)

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-68, DTC P0138 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B327
1 2
SBF-5 3 4
6 5 6
4 50
5 B21 E2 E23 B138

3
2
2 1 2 1 2 3 4
REAR OXYGEN
1 3 4 5 6 7 8
SENSOR
B327 E23
B21
1
4
3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
E2 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
53
19
1
B21
E
A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
* 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
*
B138
A29
B4
B1
C4
B: B135
A: B134 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
B: B135 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
ECM 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
C: B136
D: B137 C: B136
A5
D1
D2
D3
D7
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
B21 E 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
36
34
35
37
52
E2
D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
E * AMONG 3, 4, 7 AND 8 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-05043
EN(H4SO)(diag)-149

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK REAR OXYGEN SENSOR DATA. Is the voltage 250 mV or less? Go to step 5. Go to step 2.
rapidly reduce the engine speed from 3,000
rpm.
tool.
NOTE:
tor.>
inside.
(B135) No. 4 — (E23) No. 3:
(B134) No. 29 — (E23) No. 4:
the rear oxygen
sensor connector
• Poor contact in
ECM connector
NOTE: <Ref. to
haust system sor.>
sor
EN(H4SO)(diag)-150

AH:DTC P0139 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT SLOW RESPONSE (BANK 1 SENSOR 2)

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-69, DTC P0139 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT SLOW RE-
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B327
1 2
SBF-5 3 4
6 5 6
4 50
5 B21 E2 E23 B138

3
2
2 1 2 1 2 3 4
REAR OXYGEN
1 3 4 5 6 7 8
SENSOR
B327 E23
B21
1
4
3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
E2 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
53
19
1
B21
E
A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
* 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
*
B138
A29
B4
B1
C4
B: B135
A: B134 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
B: B135 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
ECM 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
C: B136
D: B137 C: B136
A5
D1
D2
D3
D7
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
B21 E 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
36
34
35
37
52
E2
D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
E * AMONG 3, 4, 7 AND 8 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-05043
EN(H4SO)(diag)-151

Step Check Yes No

(B135) No. 4 — (E23) No. 3:
REAR OXYGEN SENSOR CONNECTOR. more? short circuit of har-
Measure the resistance between rear oxygen ness between
sensor connector and chassis ground. ECM and rear oxy-
Connector & terminal gen sensor con-
(E23) No. 3 — Chassis ground: nector.
3 CHECK REAR OXYGEN SENSOR. Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Replace the rear Even if the mal-
Measure the resistance between rear oxygen oxygen sensor. function indicator
sensor terminals. <Ref. to light illuminates,
Terminals FU(H4SO)-34, the circuit has
No. 3 — No. 4 Rear Oxygen Sen- returned to a nor-
sor.> mal condition at
this time. Repro-
duce the failure,
and then perform
the diagnosis
again.
NOTE:
In this case, tem-
porary poor con-
tact of connector
may be the cause.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-152

AI: DTC P0140 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT NO ACTIVITY DETECTED

(BANK 1 SENSOR 2)
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-76, DTC P0140 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT NO ACTIVITY
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B327
1 2
SBF-5 3 4
6 5 6
4 50
5 B21 E2 E23 B138

3
2
2 1 2 1 2 3 4
REAR OXYGEN
1 3 4 5 6 7 8
SENSOR
B327 E23
B21
1
4
3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
E2 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
53
19
1
B21
E
A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
* 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
*
B138
A29
B4
B1
C4
B: B135
A: B134 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
B: B135 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
ECM 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
C: B136
D: B137 C: B136
A5
D1
D2
D3
D7
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
B21 E 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
36
34
35
37
52
E2
D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
E * AMONG 3, 4, 7 AND 8 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-05043
EN(H4SO)(diag)-153

Step Check Yes No

maximum)
tool.
NOTE:
tor.>
rpm.
tool.
NOTE:
tor.>
inside.
(B135) No. 4 — (E23) No. 3:
(B134) No. 29 — (E23) No. 4:
EN(H4SO)(diag)-154

Step Check Yes No

the rear oxygen
sensor connector
• Poor contact in
ECM connector
NOTE: <Ref. to
haust system sor.>
sor
AJ:DTC P0171 SYSTEM TOO LEAN (BANK 1)

Refer to DTC P0172 for diagnostic procedure. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-156, DTC P0172 SYSTEM TOO
RICH (BANK 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-155

AK:DTC P0172 SYSTEM TOO RICH (BANK 1)

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-80, DTC P0172 SYSTEM TOO RICH (BANK 1), Diagnos-
tic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
• Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM. Are there holes or loose bolts Repair the exhaust Go to step 2.
on exhaust system? system.
intake system?
3 CHECK FUEL PRESSURE. Is the measured value 339.5 — Go to step 4. Repair the follow-
WARNING: 360.5 kPa (3.5 — 3.7 kg/cm2, ing item.
Place “NO OPEN FLAMES” signs near the 49 — 52 psi)? Fuel pressure is
working area. too high:
CAUTION: • Clogged fuel line
Be careful not to spill fuel. or bent hose
Measure the fuel pressure. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)- Fuel pressure is
26, INSPECTION, Fuel Pressure.> too low:
CAUTION: • Improper fuel
Release fuel pressure before removing the pump discharge
fuel pressure gauge. • Clogged fuel line
4 CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Is the engine coolant tempera- Go to step 5. Replace the
SENSOR. ture 70°C (158°F) or higher ? engine coolant
1) Start the engine and warm-up completely. temperature sen-
2) Read the data of engine coolant tempera- sor. <Ref. to
ture sensor signal using Subaru Select Monitor FU(H4SO)-20,
or general scan tool. Engine Coolant
NOTE: Temperature Sen-
• Subaru Select Monitor sor.>
tor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-156

Step Check Yes No

5 CHECK MASS AIR FLOW AND INTAKE AIR Is the measured value 2.0 — Go to step 6. Replace the mass
TEMPERATURE SENSOR. 5.0 g/s (0.26 — 0.66 lb/m)? air flow and intake
1) Start the engine and warm-up engine until air temperature
coolant temperature is higher than 70°C sensor. <Ref. to
(158°F). FU(H4SO)-26,
2) For AT models, set the select lever to the “P” Mass Air Flow and
or “N” range, and for MT models, place the shift Intake Air Temper-
lever in the neutral position. ature Sensor.>
5) Read the data of mass air flow and intake air
temperature sensor signal using Subaru Select
Monitor or general scan tool.
NOTE:
tor.>
6 CHECK MASS AIR FLOW AND INTAKE AIR Subtract ambient temperature Repair poor con- Check the mass air
TEMPERATURE SENSOR. from intake air temperature. Is tact in ECM con- flow and intake air
1) Start the engine and warm-up engine until the obtained value –10 — 50°C nector. temperature sen-
coolant temperature is higher than 70°C (–18 — 90°F)? sor. <Ref. to
(158°F). FU(H4SO)-26,
5) Open the front hood.
6) Measure the ambient temperature.
NOTE:
tor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-157

AL:DTC P0181 FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT

RANGE/PERFORMANCE
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-82, DTC P0181 FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR “A”
CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
FUEL TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
2
3
R58
R67
1
4
R46
R1
18
4
B97
* : TERMINAL No. OPTIONAL

* ARRANGEMENT
*
B83
30
17
B135 ECM
R67 R58 B83 B97 B135
1 2 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
3 4 5 6 3 4 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
5 6 7 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
5 6 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-04035
EN(H4SO)(diag)-158

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK FOR ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY. Is any other DTC displayed? Check the appro- Replace the fuel
priate DTC using temperature sen-
the “List of Diag- sor. <Ref. to
nostic Trouble EC(H4SO)-9, Fuel
Code (DTC)”. Temperature Sen-
<Ref. to sor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-
tic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-159

AM:DTC P0182 FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT LOW INPUT

CIRCUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
FUEL TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
2
3
R58
R67
1
4
R46
R1
18
4
B97

* ARRANGEMENT
*
B83
30
17
B135 ECM
R67 R58 B83 B97 B135
1 2 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
3 4 5 6 3 4 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
5 6 7 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
5 6 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-04035
EN(H4SO)(diag)-160

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the temperature 120°C Go to step 2. Even if the mal-
1) Start the engine. (248°F) or higher? function indicator
2) Read the data of fuel temperature sensor light illuminates,
signal using Subaru Select Monitor. the circuit has
For detailed operation procedures, refer to mal condition at
“READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE”. <Ref. this time. Repro-
to EN(H4SO)(diag)-34, Subaru Select Moni- duce the failure,
tor.> and then perform
the diagnosis
again.
NOTE:
In this case, tem-
porary poor con-
tact of connector
may be the cause.
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Replace the fuel Repair the ground
FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR CONNEC- more? temperature sen- short circuit of har-
TOR. sor. <Ref. to ness between
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. EC(H4SO)-9, Fuel ECM and fuel
2) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM Temperature Sen- pump.
and fuel temperature sensor. sor.>
chassis ground.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-161

AN:DTC P0183 FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT

CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
FUEL TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
2
3
R58
R67
1
4
R46
R1
18
4
B97

* ARRANGEMENT
*
B83
30
17
B135 ECM
R67 R58 B83 B97 B135
1 2 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
3 4 5 6 3 4 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
5 6 7 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
5 6 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-04035
EN(H4SO)(diag)-162

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the temperature less than – Go to step 2. Even if the mal-
1) Start the engine. 40°C (–40°F)? function indicator
to EN(H4SO)(diag)-34, Subaru Select Moni- duce the failure,
the diagnosis
again.
NOTE:
In this case, tem-
porary poor con-
tact of connector
may be the cause.
Repair any poor contact between the ECM and ECM or fuel temperature sen- contact between
fuel temperature sensor connectors. sor connectors? the ECM and fuel
temperature sen-
sor connectors.
FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR CONNEC- circuit of the har-
TOR. ness between the
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ECM and fuel tem-
2) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM perature sensor
and fuel temperature sensor. connector.
3) Measure the resistance of the harness
between the ECM and fuel temperature sensor
connector.
(B135) No. 17 — (R58) No. 2:
(B135) No. 30 — (R58) No. 3:
4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the voltage 5 V or more? Repair the short Replace the fuel
FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR CONNEC- circuit to power in temperature sen-
1) Connect all connectors. between the ECM EC(H4SO)-9, Fuel
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. and fuel tempera- Temperature Sen-
3) Measure the voltage between ECM and ture sensor con- sor.>
chassis ground. nector.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-163

AO:DTC P0196 ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PER-

FORMANCE
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-89, DTC P0196 ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Hard to start
• Improper idling
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
E75
OIL
TEMPERATURE 1 2
SENSOR
2
E75
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
E2 B134
19
6
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
23
29
B134 ECM
EN-04036
EN(H4SO)(diag)-164

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK FOR ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY. Is any other DTC displayed? Check the appro- Replace the oil
nostic Trouble FU(H4SO)-32, Oil
Code (DTC)”. Temperature Sen-
<Ref. to sor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-
tic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-165

AP:DTC P0197 ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR LOW

LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Hard to start
• Improper idling
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
E75
OIL
TEMPERATURE 1 2
SENSOR
2
E75
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
E2 B134
19
6
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
23
29
B134 ECM
EN-04036
EN(H4SO)(diag)-166

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the oil temperature 215°C Go to step 2. Even if the mal-
1) Start the engine. (419°F) or more? function indicator
2) Read the data of the oil temperature sensor light illuminates,
signal using the Subaru Select Monitor or gen- the circuit has
tor.> again.
tact of connector
may be the cause.
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND OIL Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Replace the oil Repair the ground
TEMPERATURE SENSOR CONNECTOR. more? temperature sen- short circuit of har-
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. sor. <Ref. to ness between
2) Disconnect the connector from the ECM FU(H4SO)-32, Oil ECM and oil tem-
and oil temperature sensor. Temperature Sen- perature sensor.
3) Measure the resistance between ECM and sor.>
chassis ground.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-167

AQ:DTC P0198 ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR HIGH

HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Hard to start
• Improper idling
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
E75
OIL
TEMPERATURE 1 2
SENSOR
2
E75
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
E2 B134
19
6
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
23
29
B134 ECM
EN-04036
EN(H4SO)(diag)-168

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the oil temperature less than Go to step 2. Even if the mal-
1) Start the engine. –40°C (–40°F)? function indicator
2) Read the data of the oil temperature sensor light illuminates,
tor.> again.
tact of connector
may be the cause.
Check for poor contact of the ECM and oil tem- ECM or oil temperature sensor contact in the ECM
perature sensor connector. connector? or the oil tempera-
ture sensor con-
nector.
3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND OIL Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 4. Repair the open
TEMPERATURE SENSOR CONNECTOR. circuit of harness
2) Disconnect the connector from the ECM oil temperature
and oil temperature sensor. sensor connector.
between the ECM and oil temperature sensor
connector.
(B134) No. 23 — (E75) No. 2:
(B134) No. 29 — (E75) No. 1:
4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND OIL Is the voltage 5 V or more? Repair the short Replace the oil
TEMPERATURE SENSOR CONNECTOR. circuit to power temperature sen-
1) Connect all connectors. supply in the har- sor. <Ref. to
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. ness between the FU(H4SO)-32, Oil
3) Measure the voltage between ECM and ECM and oil tem- Temperature Sen-
chassis ground. perature sensor sor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-169

AR:DTC P0222 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH “B” CIRCUIT

LOW
SOR/SWITCH “B” CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
• Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
BATTERY
CONTROL RELAY B362
8
5
6
7 MAIN RELAY
C21
C1
ECM
A: B134 C: B136 D: B137

E
A29
A19
A28
A18
D3
A5
D1
D4
D5
D2
D7
C6
*
*
B122
B21
37
36
34
35
52
20
39
38
17
18
19
E2
5
6
1

E57
E THROTTLE CONTROL
B362 B122 B21 E57 A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
1 2 5 6 7 8
4 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
5
7 8
6
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54 C: B136 D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-05044
EN(H4SO)(diag)-170

Step Check Yes No

chassis ground.
1) Connect the ECM. more? tronic throttle con- short circuit of har-
throttle control connector and engine ground. FU(H4SO)-11, ECM and elec-
(E57) No. 4 — Engine ground: trol connector.
Replace the ECM if
defective. <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-35,
Engine Control
Module (ECM).>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-171

AS:DTC P0223 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH “B” CIRCUIT

HIGH
SOR/SWITCH “B” CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
• Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
BATTERY
CONTROL RELAY B362
8
5
6
7 MAIN RELAY
C21
C1
ECM
A: B134 C: B136 D: B137

E
A29
A19
A28
A18
D3
A5
D1
D4
D5
D2
D7
C6
*
*
B122
B21
37
36
34
35
52
20
39
38
17
18
19
E2
5
6
1

E57
E THROTTLE CONTROL
B362 B122 B21 E57 A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
1 2 5 6 7 8
4 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
5
7 8
6
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54 C: B136 D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-05044
EN(H4SO)(diag)-172

Step Check Yes No

(B134) No. 28 — (E57) No. 4:
(B134) No. 29 — (E57) No. 3:
ECM and engine
ground
• Poor contact in
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
(B134) No. 19 — (B134) No. 28: <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-11,
Throttle Body.>
AT:DTC P0301 CYLINDER 1 MISFIRE DETECTED

NOTE:
For the diagnostic procedure, refer to DTC P0304. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-174, DTC P0304 CYLINDER 4
MISFIRE DETECTED, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
AU:DTC P0302 CYLINDER 2 MISFIRE DETECTED
NOTE:
AV:DTC P0303 CYLINDER 3 MISFIRE DETECTED
NOTE:
EN(H4SO)(diag)-173

AW:DTC P0304 CYLINDER 4 MISFIRE DETECTED

• Immediately at fault recognition (A misfire which could damage catalyst occurs.)
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-102, DTC P0304 CYLINDER 4 MISFIRE DETECTED, Di-
agnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Engine stalls.
• Improper idling
• Rough driving
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY
5 BATTERY
3
SBF-7
6
4
2
1
B47
B137 ECM
10
11
8
B21
48
42
43
44
45
E2
E5 E16 E6 E17
2

No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4
E5 E16 B47 B21 B137
E6 E17 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
3 4 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
1 2 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
5 6 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
26 27 28 29 30 31
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
EN-04024
EN(H4SO)(diag)-174

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL OF ECM. Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 6. Go to step 2.
2) Measure the voltage between the ECM and
chassis ground for faulty cylinders.
#1 (B137) No. 8 (+) — Chassis ground (–):
FUEL INJECTOR. more? short circuit of har-
2) Disconnect the connector from fuel injector ECM and fuel
on faulty cylinders. injector.
3) Measure the resistance between the fuel
injector connector and engine ground on faulty
cylinders.
#1 (E5) No. 1 — Engine ground:
FUEL INJECTOR. and connector.
Measure the resistance of harness between the NOTE:
ECM and fuel injector on faulty cylinders. In this case, repair
#1 (B137) No. 8 — (E5) No. 1: • Open circuit of
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
4 CHECK FUEL INJECTOR. Is the resistance between 5 — Go to step 5. Replace the faulty
Measure the resistance between fuel injector 20 Ω? fuel injector. <Ref.
terminals on faulty cylinder. to FU(H4SO)-28,
Terminals Fuel Injector.>
No. 1 — No. 2:
5 CHECK POWER SUPPLY LINE. Is the voltage 10 V or more? Repair the poor Repair the harness
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. contact of all con- and connector.
2) Measure the voltage between fuel injector nectors in fuel NOTE:
and engine ground on faulty cylinders. injector circuit. In this case, repair
#1 (E5) No. 2 (+) — Engine ground (–): • Open circuit of
#2 (E16) No. 2 (+) — Engine ground (–): harness between
#3 (E6) No. 2 (+) — Engine ground (–): the main relay and
#4 (E17) No. 2 (+) — Engine ground (–): fuel injector con-
nector on faulty
cylinders
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
• Poor contact of
main relay connec-
tor
• Poor contact of
fuel injector con-
nector on faulty
cylinders
EN(H4SO)(diag)-175

Step Check Yes No

FUEL INJECTOR. circuit to power in
2) Disconnect the connector from fuel injector between the ECM
on faulty cylinders. and fuel injector.
7 CHECK FUEL INJECTOR. Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Replace the faulty Go to step 8.
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. fuel injector. <Ref.
2) Measure the resistance between fuel injec- to FU(H4SO)-28,
tor terminals on faulty cylinder. Fuel Injector.>
Terminals
No. 1 — No. 2:
8 CHECK INSTALLATION CONDITION OF Is the camshaft position sensor Tighten the cam- Go to step 9.
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR/CRANK- or crankshaft position sensor shaft position sen-
SHAFT POSITION SENSOR. loosely installed? sor or crankshaft
position sensor.
9 CHECK CRANK SPROCKET. Is the crank sprocket rusted or Replace the crank Go to step 10.
Remove the timing belt cover. <Ref. to does it have damaged teeth? sprocket. <Ref. to
ME(H4SO)-40, REMOVAL, Timing Belt Cover.> ME(H4SO)-47,
Crank Sprocket.>
10 CHECK INSTALLATION CONDITION OF Is the timing belt dislocated Repair the installa- Go to step 11.
TIMING BELT. from its proper position? tion condition of
Turn the crankshaft using ST, and align align- timing belt. <Ref.
ment mark on crank sprocket with alignment to ME(H4SO)-41,
mark on cylinder block. Timing Belt.>
ST 499987500 CRANKSHAFT SOCKET
11 CHECK FUEL LEVEL. Is the fuel meter indication Go to step 12. Replenish fuel so
higher than the “Lower” level? that fuel meter indi-
cation is higher
than the “Lower”
level. After replen-
ishing fuel, Go to
step 12.
12 CHECK STATUS OF MALFUNCTION INDI- Does the malfunction indicator Go to step 14. Go to step 13.
CATOR LIGHT. light illuminate or blink?
1) Clear the memory using the Subaru Select
<Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-53, Clear Memory
Mode.>
NOTE:
<Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-34, Subaru Select
Monitor.>
Refer to operating manuals for the general scan
tool.
2) Start the engine, and drive the vehicle 10
minutes or more.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-176

Step Check Yes No

13 CHECK CAUSE OF MISFIRE. Has the cause of misfire been Finish diagnostics Repair the poor
detected while running the operation, if the contact of connec-
engine? engine has no tor.
abnormality. NOTE:
In this case, repair
the following item:
• Poor contact of
ignition coil con-
nector
• Poor contact of
fuel injector con-
nector on faulty
cylinders
• Poor contact in
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
14 CHECK AIR INTAKE SYSTEM. Is there any fault in air intake Repair the air Go to step 15.
system? intake system.
NOTE:
Check the follow-
ing items.
• Are there air
leaks or air suction
caused by loose or
dislocated nuts
and bolts?
• Are there cracks
or any disconnec-
tion of hoses?
15 CHECK MISFIRE SYMPTOM. Does the Subaru Select Moni- Go to step 20. Go to step 16.
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. tor or general scan tool indicate
2) Read DTC. only one DTC?
NOTE:
tor.>
16 CHECK DTC. Are DTCs P0301 and P0302 Go to step 21. Go to step 17.
displayed on the Subaru Select
Monitor or general scan tool?
EN(H4SO)(diag)-177

Step Check Yes No

20 ONLY ONE CYLINDER. Is there any fault in the cylin- Repair or replace Go to DTC P0171.
der? faulty parts. <Ref. to
NOTE: EN(H4SO)(diag)-
Check the follow- 155, DTC P0171
ing items. SYSTEM TOO
• Spark plug LEAN (BANK 1),
• Spark plug cord Diagnostic Proce-
• Fuel injector dure with Diagnos-
• Compression ra- tic Trouble Code
tio (DTC).>
21 GROUP OF #1 AND #2 CYLINDERS. Are there any faults in #1 and Repair or replace Go to DTC P0171.
#2 cylinders? faulty parts. <Ref. to
• Check the fol- 155, DTC P0171
lowing items. SYSTEM TOO
• Fuel injector Diagnostic Proce-
• Ignition coil dure with Diagnos-
• Compression tic Trouble Code
ratio (DTC).>
• If any fault are
not found, check
the “IGNITION
CONTROL SYS-
TEM” of #1 and #2
cylinders side.
<Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-
72, IGNITION
CONTROL SYS-
TEM, Diagnostics
for Engine Starting
Failure.>
• Check the fol- 155, DTC P0171
ratio (DTC).>
not found, check
the “IGNITION
CONTROL SYS-
TEM” of #3 and #4
cylinders side.
<Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-
72, IGNITION
CONTROL SYS-
TEM, Diagnostics
for Engine Starting
Failure.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-178

Step Check Yes No

• Compression ra- dure with Diagnos-
tio tic Trouble Code
• Skipping timing (DTC).>
belt teeth
belt teeth
25 CYLINDER AT RANDOM. Is the engine idle rough? Go to DTC P0171. Repair or replace
<Ref. to faulty parts.
EN(H4SO)(diag)- NOTE:
155, DTC P0171 Check the follow-
SYSTEM TOO ing items.
LEAN (BANK 1), • Spark plug
Diagnostic Proce- • Fuel injector
dure with Diagnos- • Compression ra-
tic Trouble Code tio
(DTC).>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-179

AX:DTC P0327 KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR)

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-103, DTC P0327 KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT LOW
(BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Knocking occurs.
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
KNOCK SENSOR
E14
1 2
2
E14
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
E2
19
16
B21
B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
29
25
15
B134 ECM
E
EN-04038
EN(H4SO)(diag)-180

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 600 kΩ or Go to step 2. Repair poor con-
KNOCK SENSOR. more? tact in ECM con-
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. nector.
2) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM.
3) Measure the resistance between ECM con-
nectors.
(B134) No. 15 — (B134) No. 29:
2 CHECK KNOCK SENSOR. Is the resistance 600 kΩ or Replace the knock Repair the harness
1) Disconnect the connector from knock sen- more? sensor. <Ref. to and connector.
sor. FU(H4SO)-23, NOTE:
2) Measure the resistance between knock Knock Sensor.> In this case, repair
sensor terminals. the following item:
Terminals • Open circuit of
No. 1 — No. 2: harness between
ECM and knock
sensor
• Poor contact of
the knock sensor
connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
EN(H4SO)(diag)-181

AY:DTC P0328 KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR)

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-105, DTC P0328 KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT HIGH
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
KNOCK SENSOR
E14
1 2
2
E14
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
E2
19
16
B21
B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
29
25
15
B134 ECM
E
EN-04038
EN(H4SO)(diag)-182

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 500 Go to step 2. Go to step 3.
KNOCK SENSOR. kΩ?
nectors.
(B134) No. 15 — (B134) No. 29:
2 CHECK KNOCK SENSOR. Is the resistance less than 500 Replace the knock Repair the ground
1) Disconnect the connector from knock sen- kΩ? sensor. <Ref. to short circuit of har-
sor. FU(H4SO)-23, ness between the
2) Measure the resistance between knock Knock Sensor.> ECM and knock
sensor terminals. sensor connector.
Terminals NOTE:
No. 1 — No. 2: The harness be-
tween both con-
nectors are
shielded. Remove
the shield and re-
pair the short cir-
cuit of the harness
circuit.
3 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF ECM. Is the voltage 2 V or more? Even if the mal- Repair poor con-
1) Connect the ECM. function indicator tact in ECM con-
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. light illuminates, nector.
3) Measure the voltage between ECM and the circuit has
chassis ground. returned to a nor-
Connector & terminal mal condition at
(B134) No. 15 (+) — Chassis ground (–): this time. Repro-
duce the failure,
and then perform
the diagnosis
again.
NOTE:
In this case, tem-
porary poor con-
tact of connector
may be the cause.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-183

AZ:DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-107, DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR “A”
CIRCUIT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Engine stalls.
• Failure of engine to start
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
CRANKSHAFT
POSITION
SENSOR E10
1 2
2
1
E10
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
E2 42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
15
14
B21
B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
14
24
13
B134 ECM
E
EN-04039
EN(H4SO)(diag)-184

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK INSTALLATION CONDITION OF Is the crankshaft position sen- Go to step 2. Tighten the crank-
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR. sor installation bolt tightened shaft position sen-
securely? sor installation bolt
securely.
2 CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR. Is the resistance between 1 and Go to step 3. Replace the crank-
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 4 kΩ? shaft position sen-
2) Remove the crankshaft position sensor. sor. <Ref. to
3) Measure the resistance between connector FU(H4SO)-21,
terminals of crankshaft position sensor. Crankshaft Posi-
Terminals tion Sensor.>
No. 1 — No. 2:
3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Repair the poor Repair the harness
CRANK SHAFT POSITION SENSOR. contact of the ECM and connector.
1) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM. and crankshaft NOTE:
2) Measure the resistance of harness between position sensor In this case, repair
the ECM and crankshaft position sensor con- connector. the following item:
nector. • Open circuit of
(B134) No. 13 — (E10) No. 1: ECM and crank-
(B134) No. 14 — (E10) No. 2: shaft position sen-
sor connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
EN(H4SO)(diag)-185

BA:DTC P0336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT

RANGE/PERFORMANCE
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-109, DTC P0336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR “A”
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
CRANKSHAFT
POSITION
SENSOR E10
1 2
2
1
E10
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
E2 42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
15
14
B21
B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
14
24
13
B134 ECM
E
EN-04039
EN(H4SO)(diag)-186

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK CONDITION OF CRANKSHAFT PO- Is the crankshaft position sen- Go to step 2. Tighten the crank-
SITION SENSOR. sor installation bolt tightened shaft position sen-
Turn the ignition switch to OFF. securely? sor installation bolt
securely.
2 CHECK CRANK SPROCKET. Are crank sprocket teeth Replace the crank Go to step 3.
Remove the timing belt cover. cracked or damaged? sprocket. <Ref. to
ME(H4SO)-47,
Crank Sprocket.>
3 CHECK INSTALLATION CONDITION OF Is the timing belt dislocated Repair the installa- Replace the crank-
TIMING BELT. from its proper position? tion condition of shaft position sen-
Turn the crankshaft, and align alignment mark timing belt. <Ref. sor. <Ref. to
on crank sprocket with alignment mark on cylin- to ME(H4SO)-41, FU(H4SO)-21,
der block. Timing Belt.> Crankshaft Posi-
tion Sensor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-187

BB:DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT

(BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR)
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-111, DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR “A”
CIRCUIT (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
CAMSHAFT
POSITION
SENSOR E15
1 2
2
1
E15
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
E2 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
13
12
B21
B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
22
12
24
B134 ECM
E
EN-04040
EN(H4SO)(diag)-188

Step Check Yes No

CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR. and connector.
and camshaft position sensor. the following item:
the ECM and camshaft position sensor connec- the harness be-
tor. tween the ECM
Connector & terminal and camshaft posi-
(B134) No. 12 — (E15) No. 1: tion sensor
(B134) No. 22 — (E15) No. 2: • Poor contact in
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 3. Repair the short
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR. more? circuit to ground of
Measure the resistance between camshaft harness between
position sensor connector and engine ground. the ECM and cam-
Connector & terminal shaft position sen-
(E15) No. 1 — Engine ground: sor.
NOTE:
The harness be-
tween both con-
nectors are
shielded. Repair
the ground short
circuit of harness
with shield.
3 CHECK INSTALLATION CONDITION OF Is the camshaft position sensor Go to step 4. Tighten the cam-
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR. installation bolt tightened shaft position sen-
securely.
4 CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR. Is the resistance between 1 and Repair the poor Replace the cam-
1) Remove the camshaft position sensor. 4 kΩ? contact of the ECM shaft position sen-
2) Measure the resistance between connector or camshaft posi- sor. <Ref. to
terminals of camshaft position sensor. tion sensor con- FU(H4SO)-22,
Terminals nector. Camshaft Position
No. 1 — No. 2: Sensor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-189

BC:DTC P0341 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT RANGE/

PERFORMANCE (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR)
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-113, DTC P0341 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR “A”
CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) De-
tecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
CAMSHAFT
POSITION
SENSOR E15
1 2
2
1
E15
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
E2 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
13
12
B21
B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
22
12
24
B134 ECM
E
EN-04040
EN(H4SO)(diag)-190

Step Check Yes No

CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR. and connector.
and camshaft position sensor. the following item:
the ECM and camshaft position sensor connec- the harness be-
tor. tween the ECM
Connector & terminal and camshaft posi-
(B134) No. 12 — (E15) No. 1: tion sensor
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR. more? circuit to ground of
Measure the resistance between camshaft harness between
position sensor connector and engine ground. the ECM and cam-
Connector & terminal shaft position sen-
(E15) No. 1 — Engine ground: sor.
NOTE:
The harness be-
tween both con-
nectors are
shielded. Repair
the ground short
circuit of harness
with shield.
3 CHECK INSTALLATION CONDITION OF Is the camshaft position sensor Go to step 4. Tighten the cam-
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR. installation bolt tightened shaft position sen-
securely.
4 CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR. Is the resistance between 1 and Go to step 5. Replace the cam-
1) Remove the camshaft position sensor. 4 kΩ? shaft position sen-
2) Measure the resistance between connector sor. <Ref. to
terminals of camshaft position sensor. FU(H4SO)-22,
Terminals Camshaft Position
No. 1 — No. 2: Sensor.>
5 CHECK CAM SPROCKET. Are cam sprocket teeth cracked Replace the cam Go to step 6.
Remove the timing belt cover. <Ref. to or damaged? sprocket. <Ref. to
ME(H4SO)-40, Timing Belt Cover.> ME(H4SO)-46,
Cam Sprocket.>
6 CHECK INSTALLATION CONDITION OF Is the timing belt dislocated Repair the installa- Replace the cam-
Turn the crankshaft using the ST, and align the timing belt. <Ref. sor. <Ref. to
alignment mark on the cam sprocket with the to ME(H4SO)-41, FU(H4SO)-22,
alignment mark on the timing belt cover LH. Timing Belt.> Camshaft Position
ST 499987500 CRANKSHAFT SOCKET Sensor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-191

BD:DTC P0400 EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION FLOW

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-115, DTC P0400 EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION
FLOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Movement performance problem when engine is low speed.
• Improper idling
• Movement performance problem
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY
E18
5 BATTERY
3 1 2 3
SBF-7 4 5 6
6
4
2
B47
1
B21
48
B47 1 2
E2 3 4
5 6
B21
5
2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
EGR VALVE
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
E18 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
1
3
4
6
B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
E2 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
30
26
25
29
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
B21 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
10
20
9
8
B134 ECM
EN-04041
EN(H4SO)(diag)-192

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the measured value 53.3 kPa Make sure that the Go to step 2.
1) Start the engine. (400 mmHg, 15.75 inHg) or EGR valve, mani-
2) Read data of intake manifold absolute pres- more? fold absolute pres-
sure signal using Subaru Select Monitor or gen- sure sensor and
eral scan tool. throttle body are
NOTE: installed securely.
tor.>
2 CHECK EGR SOLENOID VALVE. Are there holes, plugged piping Repair the EGR Replace the EGR
Remove the EGR valve. or foreign objects caught in the system. valve. <Ref. to
EGR system? FU(H4SO)-27,
EGR Valve.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-193

BE:DTC P0420 CATALYST SYSTEM EFFICIENCY BELOW THRESHOLD (BANK 1)

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-119, DTC P0420 CATALYST SYSTEM EFFICIENCY BE-
LOW THRESHOLD (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Engine stalls.
• Idle mixture is out of specifications.
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B327
1 2
SBF-5 3 4
6 5 6
4 50
5 B21 E2 E23 B138

3
2
2 1 2 1 2 3 4
REAR OXYGEN
1 3 4 5 6 7 8
SENSOR
B327 E23
B21
1
4
3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
E2 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
53
19
1
B21
E
A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
* 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
*
B138
A29
B4
B1
C4
B: B135
A: B134 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
B: B135 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
ECM 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
C: B136
D: B137 C: B136
A5
D1
D2
D3
D7
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
B21 E 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
36
34
35
37
52
E2
D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
E * AMONG 3, 4, 7 AND 8 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-05043
EN(H4SO)(diag)-194

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM. Is there any fault in exhaust Repair or replace Go to step 2.
Check for gas leaks or air suction caused by system? the exhaust sys-
loose or dislocated nuts and bolts, and open tem. <Ref. to
hole at exhaust pipes. EX(H4SO)-2, Gen-
NOTE: eral Description.>
Check the following positions.
• Between cylinder head and front exhaust
pipe
• Between front exhaust pipe and front catalytic
converter
• Between front catalytic converter and rear
catalytic converter
• Loose or improperly attached front oxygen
(A/F) sensor or rear oxygen sensor
2 CHECK WAVEFORM DATA ON THE SUBA- Is a normal waveform dis- Even if the mal- Go to step 3.
RU SELECT MONITOR (WHILE DRIVING). played? function indicator
1) Drive at a constant speed between 80 — light illuminates,
112 km/h (50 — 70 MPH). the circuit has
2) After 5 minutes have elapsed in the condi- returned to a nor-
tion of step 1), use the Subaru Select Monitor mal condition at
while still driving to read the waveform data. this time. Repro-
duce the failure,
and then perform
the diagnosis
again.
RrO2 SENSOR
NOTE:
In this case, tem-
porary poor con-
tact of connector
A/F LAMBDA 1 may be the cause.
RrO2 SENSOR
A/F LAMBDA 1
EN-04895
EN(H4SO)(diag)-195

Step Check Yes No

3 CHECK WAVEFORM DATA ON THE SUBA- Is a normal waveform dis- Go to step 4. Go to step 5.
RU SELECT MONITOR (WHILE IDLING). played?
1) Run the engine at idle.
2) In the condition of step 1), use the Subaru
Select Monitor to read the waveform data.
RrO2 SENSOR
RrO2 SENSOR
EN-04896
4 CHECK CATALYTIC CONVERTER. Is the catalytic converter dam- Replace the cata- Go to step 5.
aged? lytic converter.
<Ref. to
EC(H4SO)-3,
Front Catalytic
Converter.>
inside.
(B135) No. 4 — (E23) No. 3:
(B134) No. 29 — (E23) No. 4:
EN(H4SO)(diag)-196

Step Check Yes No

7 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the voltage 0.2 — 0.5 V? Go to step 8. Repair the harness
REAR OXYGEN SENSOR CONNECTOR. and connector.
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. NOTE:
2) Measure the voltage between rear oxygen Repair the follow-
sensor connector and chassis ground. ing locations.
(E23) No. 3 (+) — Chassis ground (–): harness between
the ECM and rear
oxygen sensor
• Poor contact of
the ECM and rear
oxygen sensor
• Poor contact in
ECM connector
8 CHECK REAR OXYGEN SENSOR SHIELD. Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Replace the rear Repair the open
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. oxygen sensor. circuit in the rear
2) Expose the rear oxygen sensor connector <Ref. to oxygen sensor har-
body side harness sensor shield. FU(H4SO)-34, ness.
3) Measure the resistance between the sensor Rear Oxygen Sen-
shield and chassis ground. sor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-197

BF:DTC P0442 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM LEAK

DETECTED (SMALL LEAK)
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-122, DTC P0442 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL
SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED (SMALL LEAK), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Fuel odor
• There is a hole of more than 1.0 mm (0.04 in) dia. in evaporation system or fuel tank.
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY
5
BATTERY
3
SBF-7
6
4
2
1
C: B136 D: B137 ECM
B47 E
D29
C17
C28
B97 B21
14
15
41
48
7
R1 E2
R46 R15
6
R67 R213
R144 R68 E4
1
DRAIN VALVE PRESSURE CONTROL PURGE CONTROL

SOLENOID VALVE SOLENOID VALVE
B21 B47 C: B136 D: B137 R213
1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 3 4 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 4 5 6 7 8
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
5 6 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54 B97 R68 R144 E4 R67
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 1 2
1 2 1 2
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 3 4 5 6
EN-05045
EN(H4SO)(diag)-198

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP. Is the fuel filler cap tightened Go to step 2. Tighten fuel filler
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. securely? cap securely.
2) Check the fuel filler cap.
NOTE:
The DTC is stored in memory if fuel filler cap is
or was loose or if the cap chain has caught while
tightening.
2 CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP. Is the fuel filler cap genuine? Go to step 3. Replace with a
genuine fuel filler
cap.
3 CHECK FUEL FILLER PIPE GASKET. Is there any damage to the seal Repair or replace Go to step 4.
between fuel filler cap and fuel the fuel filler cap
filler pipe? and fuel filler pipe.
<Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-47,
Fuel Filler Pipe.>
4 CHECK DRAIN VALVE. Does the drain valve operate? Go to step 5. Replace the drain
1) Connect the test mode connector. valve. <Ref. to
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. EC(H4SO)-15,
3) Operate the drain valve using the Subaru Drain Valve.>
Select Monitor.
NOTE:
Drain valve operation can be executed using
Subaru Select Monitor. Regarding the proce-
dures, refer to “Compulsory Valve Operation
Check Mode”. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-54,
Compulsory Valve Operation Check Mode.>
5 CHECK PURGE CONTROL SOLENOID Does the purge control sole- Go to step 6. Replace the purge
VALVE. noid valve operate? control solenoid
Operate the purge control solenoid valve using valve. <Ref. to
the Subaru Select Monitor. EC(H4SO)-6,
NOTE: Purge Control
Purge control solenoid valve operation can be Solenoid Valve.>
executed using Subaru Select Monitor. Regard-
ing the procedures, refer to “Compulsory Valve
Operation Check Mode”. <Ref. to
tion Check Mode.>
6 CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID Does the pressure control sole- Go to step 7. Replace the pres-
VALVE. noid valve operate? sure control sole-
Operate the pressure control solenoid valve noid valve. <Ref. to
using the Subaru Select Monitor. EC(H4SO)-12,
NOTE: Pressure Control
The pressure control solenoid valve operation Solenoid Valve.>
can be executed using the Subaru Select Mon-
itor. Regarding the procedures, refer to “Com-
pulsory Valve Operation Check Mode”. <Ref. to
tion Check Mode.>
7 CHECK EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CON- Is there any hole of more than Repair or replace Go to step 8.
TROL SYSTEM LINE. 1.0 mm (0.04 in) dia. on evapo- the evaporation
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ration line? line. <Ref. to
2) Disconnect the test mode connector. FU(H4SO)-57,
Fuel Delivery and
Evaporation
Lines.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-199

Step Check Yes No

8 CHECK CANISTER. Is the canister damaged or is Repair or replace Go to step 9.
there a hole of more than 1.0 the canister. <Ref.
mm (0.04 in) dia. in it? to EC(H4SO)-5,
Canister.>
9 CHECK FUEL TANK. Is the fuel tank damaged or is Repair or replace Go to step 10.
Remove the fuel tank. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-41, there any hole of more than 1.0 the fuel tank. <Ref.
Fuel Tank.> mm (0.04 in) dia. in it? to FU(H4SO)-41,
Fuel Tank.>
10 CHECK ANY OTHER MECHANICAL TROU- Is there any hole of more than Repair or replace Repair poor con-
BLE IN EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CON- 1.0 mm (0.04 in) dia., crack, the hoses or pipes. tact in ECM con-
TROL SYSTEM. clogging, or disconnections, nector.
bend, misconnection of hoses
or pipes in evaporative emis-
sion control system?
EN(H4SO)(diag)-200

BG:DTC P0447 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM VENT CONTROL

CIRCUIT OPEN
SYSTEM VENT CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY
5
BATTERY
3
SBF-7
6
4 R46 R67
2 7 6 1
1 DRAIN
14 1 2 VALVE
B47
B97 R1 R15 R213 R144
17
B136 ECM
B47 B97 B136 R67 R213
1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 1 2 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
3 4 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 3 4 5 6 4 5 6 7 8
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
5 6 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
R144
1 2
EN-05046
EN(H4SO)(diag)-201

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL OF ECM. Is the voltage 10 V or more? Repair poor con- Go to step 2.
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. tact in ECM con-
2) Measure the voltage between ECM and nector.
chassis ground.
DRAIN VALVE. more? short circuit of har-
2) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM ECM and drain
and drain valve. valve connector.
3) Measure the resistance between the drain
valve connector and chassis ground.
DRAIN VALVE. and connector.
ECM and drain valve connector. In this case, repair
(B136) No. 17 — (R144) No. 2: • Open circuit of
harness between
ECM and drain
valve connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
4 CHECK DRAIN VALVE. Is the resistance between 10 — Go to step 5. Replace the drain
Measure the resistance between drain valve 100 Ω? valve. <Ref. to
terminals. EC(H4SO)-15,
Terminals Drain Valve.>
No. 1 — No. 2:
5 CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO DRAIN VALVE. Is the voltage 10 V or more? Repair poor con- Repair the harness
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. tact of the drain and connector.
2) Measure the voltage between drain valve valve connector. NOTE:
and chassis ground. In this case, repair
(R144) No. 1 (+) — Chassis ground (–): • Open circuit of
harness between
main relay and
drain valve
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
• Poor contact of
main relay connec-
tor
EN(H4SO)(diag)-202

BH:DTC P0448 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM VENT CONTROL

CIRCUIT SHORTED
SYSTEM VENT CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY
5
BATTERY
3
SBF-7
6
4 R46 R67
2 7 6 1
1 DRAIN
14 1 2 VALVE
B47
B97 R1 R15 R213 R144
17
B136 ECM
B47 B97 B136 R67 R213
1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 1 2 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
3 4 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 3 4 5 6 4 5 6 7 8
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
5 6 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
R144
1 2
EN-05046
EN(H4SO)(diag)-203

Step Check Yes No

DRAIN VALVE. circuit to power in
and drain valve. drain valve con-
chassis ground.
2 CHECK DRAIN VALVE. Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Replace the drain Repair poor con-
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. valve. <Ref. to tact in ECM con-
2) Measure the resistance between drain valve EC(H4SO)-15, nector.
terminals. Drain Valve.>
Terminals
No. 1 — No. 2:
EN(H4SO)(diag)-204

BI: DTC P0451 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR

SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
FUEL TANK
PRESSURE
SENSOR
3
R47
R213
7
R15
R1
17
13
6
B97
*
*
B83
* ARRANGEMENT
22
32
30
B135 ECM
B83 B97 B135 R47 R213
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 1 2 3
5 6 7 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 4 5 6 7 8
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-05047
EN(H4SO)(diag)-205

Step Check Yes No

2) Open the fuel flap.
2 CHECK PRESSURE VACUUM LINE. Is there any fault in pressure/ Repair or replace Replace the fuel
NOTE: vacuum line? the hoses and tank pressure sen-
Check the following items. pipes. sor. <Ref. to
• Disconnection, leakage and clogging of the EC(H4SO)-11,
vacuum hoses and pipes between fuel tank Fuel Tank Pres-
pressure sensor and fuel tank sure Sensor.>
• Disconnection, leakage and clogging of air
ventilation hoses and pipes between fuel filler
pipe and fuel tank
EN(H4SO)(diag)-206

BJ:DTC P0452 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE

SENSOR LOW INPUT
SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
FUEL TANK
PRESSURE
SENSOR
3
R47
R213
7
R15
R1
17
13
6
B97
*
*
B83
* ARRANGEMENT
22
32
30
B135 ECM
B83 B97 B135 R47 R213
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 1 2 3
5 6 7 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 4 5 6 7 8
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-05047
EN(H4SO)(diag)-207

Step Check Yes No

1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. –7.45 kPa (–55.89 mmHg, – function indicator
2) Read the data of fuel tank pressure sensor 2.2003 inHg) ? light illuminates,
tor.> again.
tact of connector
may be the cause.
2 CHECK FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR Is the voltage 4.5 V or more? Go to step 3. Repair the harness
POWER SOURCE. and connector.
2) Disconnect the connector from the fuel tank In this case, repair
pressure sensor. the following item:
4) Measure the voltage between the fuel tank harness between
pressure sensor connector and chassis ground. ECM and fuel tank
Connector & terminal pressure sensor
(R47) No. 3 (+) — Chassis ground (–): connector
• Poor contact in
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR CONNEC- and connector.
TOR. NOTE:
the ECM and fuel tank pressure sensor connec- harness between
tor. ECM and fuel tank
(B135) No. 32 — (R47) No. 2: connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR CONNEC- more? short circuit of har-
TOR. ness between
Measure the resistance between ECM and ECM and fuel tank
chassis ground. pressure sensor
5 CHECK POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact in the Repair the poor Replace the fuel
Check for poor contact between the ECM and ECM or fuel tank pressure sen- contact in the ECM tank pressure sen-
fuel tank pressure sensor connector. sor connector? or fuel tank pres- sor. <Ref. to
sure sensor con- EC(H4SO)-11,
nector. Fuel Tank Pres-
sure Sensor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-208

BK:DTC P0453 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE

SENSOR HIGH INPUT
SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
FUEL TANK
PRESSURE
SENSOR
3
R47
R213
7
R15
R1
17
13
6
B97
*
*
B83
* ARRANGEMENT
22
32
30
B135 ECM
B83 B97 B135 R47 R213
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 1 2 3
5 6 7 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 4 5 6 7 8
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-05047
EN(H4SO)(diag)-209

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the measured value 7.98 kPa Go to step 2. Even if the mal-
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. (59.86 mmHg, 2.357 inHg) or function indicator
2) Read the data of fuel tank pressure sensor more? light illuminates,
tor.> again.
tact of connector
may be the cause.
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the measured value 7.98 kPa Repair the short Go to step 3.
FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR CONNEC- (59.86 mmHg, 2.357 inHg) or circuit to power in
TOR. more? the harness
2) Disconnect the connector from the fuel tank fuel tank pressure
pressure sensor. sensor connector.
4) Read the data of fuel tank pressure sensor
signal using the Subaru Select Monitor or gen-
eral scan tool.
NOTE:
tor.>
TOR. NOTE:
fuel tank pressure sensor connector and engine • Open circuit of
ground. harness between
Connector & terminal ECM and fuel tank
(R47) No. 1 — Engine ground: pressure sensor
connector
• Poor contact in
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
4 CHECK POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact in fuel tank Repair the poor Replace the fuel
Check for poor contact of the fuel tank pressure pressure sensor connector? contact in the fuel tank pressure sen-
sensor connector. tank pressure sensor. <Ref. to
sor connector. EC(H4SO)-11,
Fuel Tank Pres-
sure Sensor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-210

BL:DTC P0456 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM LEAK

DETECTED (VERY SMALL LEAK)
SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED (VERY SMALL LEAK), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Fuel odor
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY
5
BATTERY
3
SBF-7
6
4
2
1
C: B136 D: B137 ECM
B47 E
D29
C17
C28
B97 B21
14
15
41
48
7
R1 E2
R46 R15
6
R67 R213
R144 R68 E4
1

B21 B47 C: B136 D: B137 R213
1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 3 4 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 4 5 6 7 8
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
5 6 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54 B97 R68 R144 E4 R67
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 1 2
1 2 1 2
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 3 4 5 6
EN-05045
EN(H4SO)(diag)-211

Step Check Yes No

NOTE:
or was loose or if the cap chain was caught
while tightening.
genuine fuel filler
cap.
<Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-47,
Fuel Filler Pipe.>
Select Monitor.
NOTE:
the Subaru Select Monitor. Regarding the pro-
cedures, refer to “Compulsory Valve Operation
NOTE: Purge Control
tion Check Mode.>
tion Check Mode.>
TROL SYSTEM LINE. 0.5 mm (0.020 in) dia. on evap- the evaporation
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. oration line? line. <Ref. to
Fuel Delivery and
Evaporation
Lines.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-212

Step Check Yes No

mm (0.020 in) dia. in it? to EC(H4SO)-5,
Canister.>
Remove the fuel tank. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-41, there any hole of more than 0.5 the fuel tank. <Ref.
Fuel Tank.> mm (0.020 in) dia. in it? to FU(H4SO)-41,
Fuel Tank.>
10 CHECK ANY OTHER MECHANICAL TROU- Is there any hole of more than Repair or replace Repair poor con-
BLE IN EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CON- 0.5 mm (0.020 in) dia., crack, the hoses or pipes. tact in ECM con-
TROL SYSTEM. clogging, or disconnections, nector.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-213

BM:DTC P0457 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM LEAK

DETECTED (FUEL CAP LOOSE/OFF)
SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED (FUEL CAP LOOSE/OFF), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Fuel odor
• Fuel filler cap loose or lost
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY
5
BATTERY
3
SBF-7
6
4
2
1
C: B136 D: B137 ECM
B47 E
D29
C17
C28
B97 B21
14
15
41
48
7
R1 E2
R46 R15
6
R67 R213
R144 R68 E4
1

B21 B47 C: B136 D: B137 R213
1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 3 4 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 4 5 6 7 8
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
5 6 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54 B97 R68 R144 E4 R67
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 1 2
1 2 1 2
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 3 4 5 6
EN-05045
EN(H4SO)(diag)-214

Step Check Yes No

NOTE:
tightening.
genuine fuel filler
cap.
<Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-47,
Fuel Filler Pipe.>
Select Monitor.
NOTE:
NOTE: Purge Control
tion Check Mode.>
tion Check Mode.>
7 CHECK EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CON- Are there any disconnected, Repair or replace Go to step 8.
TROL SYSTEM LINE. broken or clogged evaporation the evaporation
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. lines? line. <Ref. to
Fuel Delivery and
Evaporation
Lines.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-215

Step Check Yes No

8 CHECK CANISTER. Is the canister damaged? Repair or replace Go to step 9.
the canister. <Ref.
to EC(H4SO)-5,
Canister.>
9 CHECK FUEL TANK. Is the fuel tank damaged? Repair or replace Go to step 10.
Remove the fuel tank. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-41, the fuel tank. <Ref.
Fuel Tank.> to FU(H4SO)-41,
Fuel Tank.>
10 CHECK ANY OTHER MECHANICAL TROU- Are there holes, cracks, clog- Repair or replace Repair poor con-
BLE IN EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CON- ging, or disconnections, mis- the hoses or pipes. tact in ECM con-
TROL SYSTEM. connection of hoses or pipes in nector.
evaporative emission control
system?
EN(H4SO)(diag)-216

BN:DTC P0458 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM PURGE CONTROL VALVE

CIRCUIT LOW
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-147, DTC P0458 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
PURGE CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY
5 BATTERY
3 E4
SBF-7
6
1 2
4
2
1
B47
B47
1 2
3 4
5 6
B137
B137 ECM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
29
26 27 28 29 30 31
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
B21
48
41
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
E2 42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
E4
2
1
E
PURGE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE
EN-04046
EN(H4SO)(diag)-217

Step Check Yes No

chassis ground.
PURGE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE. more? short circuit of har-
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and ECM and purge
purge control solenoid valve. control solenoid
3) Measure the resistance between the purge valve connector.
control solenoid solenoid valve connector and
engine ground.
PURGE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE. and connector.
ECM and purge control solenoid valve. In this case, repair
harness between
ECM and purge
control solenoid
valve connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
4 CHECK PURGE CONTROL SOLENOID Is the resistance between 10 — Go to step 5. Replace the purge
VALVE. 100 Ω? control solenoid
1) Remove the purge control solenoid valve. valve. <Ref. to
2) Measure the resistance between purge con- EC(H4SO)-6,
trol solenoid valve terminals. Purge Control
Terminals Solenoid Valve.>
No. 1 — No. 2:
5 CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO PURGE CON- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Repair the poor Repair the harness
TROL SOLENOID VALVE. contact of purge and connector.
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. control solenoid NOTE:
2) Measure the voltage between purge control valve connector. In this case, repair
solenoid valve and engine ground. the following item:
(E4) No. 2 (+) — Engine ground (–): harness between
the main relay and
purge control sole-
noid valve
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
• Poor contact of
main relay connec-
tor
EN(H4SO)(diag)-218

BO:DTC P0459 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM PURGE CONTROL VALVE

CIRCUIT HIGH
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-149, DTC P0459 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
PURGE CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY
5 BATTERY
3 E4
SBF-7
6
1 2
4
2
1
B47
B47
1 2
3 4
5 6
B137
B137 ECM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
29
26 27 28 29 30 31
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
B21
48
41
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
E2 42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
E4
2
1
E
PURGE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE
EN-04046
EN(H4SO)(diag)-219

Step Check Yes No

PURGE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE. circuit to power in
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and between the ECM
purge control solenoid valve. and purge control
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. solenoid valve con-
chassis ground.
2 CHECK PURGE CONTROL SOLENOID Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Replace the purge Repair poor con-
VALVE. control solenoid tact in ECM con-
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. valve. <Ref. to nector.
2) Measure the resistance between purge con- EC(H4SO)-6,
No. 1 — No. 2:
BP:DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-151, DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
priate DTC using level sensor and
the “List of Diag- fuel sub level sen-
nostic Trouble sor. <Ref. to
Code (DTC)”. FU(H4SO)-52,
<Ref. to Fuel Level Sen-
EN(H4SO)(diag)- sor.> <Ref. to
80, List of Diagnos- FU(H4SO)-53,
tic Trouble Code Fuel Sub Level
(DTC).> Sensor.>
BQ:DTC P0462 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT LOW

NOTE:
For the diagnostic procedure, refer to DTC P0463. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-221, DTC P0463 FUEL LEVEL
SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-220

BR:DTC P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT HIGH

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-155, DTC P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK FOR ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY. Is DTC P0462 or P0463 dis- Check the combi- Even if the mal-
played on the Subaru Select nation meter. <Ref. function indicator
Monitor? to IDI-13, CHECK light illuminates,
FUEL LEVEL the circuit has
SENSOR, returned to a nor-
INSPECTION, mal condition at
Combination Meter this time. Repro-
System.> duce the failure,
and then perform
the diagnosis
again.
NOTE:
In this case, tem-
porary poor con-
tact of connector
may be the cause.
BS:DTC P0464 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT INTERMITTENT

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-157, DTC P0464 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT IN-
TERMITTENT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK FOR ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY. Is DTC P0464 displayed on the Check the combi- Even if the mal-
display? nation meter. <Ref. function indicator
to IDI-13, CHECK light illuminates,
and then perform
the diagnosis
again.
NOTE:
In this case, tem-
porary poor con-
tact of connector
may be the cause.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-221

BT:DTC P0483 FAN RATIONALITY CHECK

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-160, DTC P0483 FAN RATIONALITY CHECK, Diagnostic
Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Occurrence of noise
• Overheat
CAUTION:
NOTE:
If the vehicle, with the engine idling, is placed very close to a wall or another vehicle, preventing normal cool-
ing function, the OBD system may detect malfunction.
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK FOR ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY. Is any other DTC displayed? Check the appro- Check radiator fan,
priate DTC using fan motor and ther-
the “List of Diag- mostat and if ther-
nostic Trouble mostat is stuck,
Code (DTC)”. replace thermo-
<Ref. to stat. <Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)- CO(H4SO)-24,
80, List of Diagnos- Radiator Main Fan
tic Trouble Code and Fan Motor.>
(DTC).> <Ref. to
CO(H4SO)-26,
Radiator Sub Fan
and Fan Motor.>
BU:DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR “A”

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-161, DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR “A”, Diag-
nostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK DTC OF ABS. Is DTC of ABS displayed? Perform the diag- Repair poor con-
Check DTC of ABS. nosis according to tact in ECM con-
DTC. <Ref. to nector.
ABS(diag)-33, List
of Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-222

BV:DTC P0506 IDLE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM RPM LOWER THAN EXPECTED
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-163, DTC P0506 IDLE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM RPM
LOWER THAN EXPECTED, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Hard to start the engine.
• Engine does not start.
• Improper idling
• Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
BATTERY
CONTROL RELAY B362
8
5
6
7 MAIN RELAY
C21
C1
ECM
A: B134 C: B136 D: B137

E
A29
A19
A28
A18
D3
A5
D1
D4
D5
D2
D7
C6
*
*
B122
B21
37
36
34
35
52
20
39
38
17
18
19
E2
5
6
1

E57
E THROTTLE CONTROL
B362 B122 B21 E57 A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
1 2 5 6 7 8
4 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
5
7 8
6
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54 C: B136 D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-05044
EN(H4SO)(diag)-223

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK FOR ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY. Is any other DTC displayed? Check the appro- Go to step 2.
priate DTC using
the “List of Diag-
nostic Trouble
Code (DTC)”.
<Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-
tic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
2 CHECK AIR CLEANER ELEMENT. Is there excessive clogging on Replace the air Go to step 3.
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. air cleaner element? cleaner element.
2) Check the air cleaner element. <Ref. to IN(H4SO)-
4, Air Cleaner Ele-
ment.>
3 CHECK ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CON- Are foreign matter found inside Remove foreign Perform the diag-
TROL. electronic throttle control? matter from elec- nosis of DTC
1) Remove the electronic throttle control. tronic throttle con- P2101. <Ref. to
2) Check the electronic throttle control. trol. EN(H4SO)(diag)-
287, DTC P2101
THROTTLE
ACTUATOR CON-
TROL MOTOR
CIRCUIT RANGE/
PERFORMANCE,
Diagnostic Proce-
dure with Diagnos-
tic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-224

BW:DTC P0507 IDLE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM RPM HIGHER THAN EXPECTED
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-165, DTC P0507 IDLE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM RPM
HIGHER THAN EXPECTED, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Engine keeps running at higher speed than specified idle speed.
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
BATTERY
CONTROL RELAY B362
8
5
6
7 MAIN RELAY
C21
C1
ECM
A: B134 C: B136 D: B137

E
A29
A19
A28
A18
D3
A5
D1
D4
D5
D2
D7
C6
*
*
B122
B21
37
36
34
35
52
20
39
38
17
18
19
E2
5
6
1

E57
E THROTTLE CONTROL
B362 B122 B21 E57 A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
1 2 5 6 7 8
4 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
5
7 8
6
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54 C: B136 D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-05044
EN(H4SO)(diag)-225

Step Check Yes No

priate DTC using
nostic Trouble
Code (DTC)”.
<Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-
tic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
2 CHECK AIR INTAKE SYSTEM. Is there any fault in air intake Repair air suction Go to step 3.
1) Start and idle the engine. system? and leaks.
2) Check the following items.
• Loose installation of intake manifold and
throttle body
• Cracks of intake manifold gasket and throttle
body gasket
• Disconnection of vacuum hoses
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. tronic throttle con- P2101. <Ref. to
2) Remove the electronic throttle control. trol. EN(H4SO)(diag)-
3) Check the electronic throttle control. 287, DTC P2101
THROTTLE
ACTUATOR CON-
TROL MOTOR
CIRCUIT RANGE/
PERFORMANCE,
Diagnostic Proce-
dure with Diagnos-
tic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-226

BX:DTC P0512 STARTER REQUEST CIRCUIT

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-167, DTC P0512 STARTER REQUEST CIRCUIT, Diag-
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Failure of engine to start
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
BATTERY
2 3
B72 IGNITION
SWITCH
15
13
STARTER RELAY
B225
16
14
INHIBITOR SWITCH
AT
P R N D 3 2 1
MT
AT 11 7
12 12
MT
B12 T3 T7
1
CLUTCH
SWITCH
(MT) STARTER MOTOR
MT
B106
AT
2
M
MT
AT B14
32
20
B136 ECM
E
B225 B106 B136 B72 B12 T7
1 2 9 13 17 21 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6
3 4 10 14 18 22 2 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 4 5 6 5 6 7 8 7 8 9 10 11 12
11 12 15 16 19 20 23 24 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 9 10 11 12
5 6
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
7 8 25 29 33 37
26 30 34 38
27 28 31 32 35 36 39 40
EN-05041
EN(H4SO)(diag)-227

Step Check Yes No

priate DTC using
nostic Trouble
Code (DTC)”.
<Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-
tic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND IG- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Repair the short Repair poor con-
NITION SWITCH. circuit to power in tact in ECM con-
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. the harness nector.
2) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM. between the ECM
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. and ignition switch.
chassis ground.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-228

BY:DTC P0519 IDLE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-169, DTC P0519 IDLE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM PER-
FORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
priate DTC using
nostic Trouble
Code (DTC)”.
<Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-
tic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
throttle body
body gasket
2) Remove the electronic throttle control. trol. EN(H4SO)(diag)-
3) Check the electronic throttle control. 287, DTC P2101
THROTTLE
ACTUATOR CON-
TROL MOTOR
CIRCUIT RANGE/
PERFORMANCE,
Diagnostic Proce-
dure with Diagnos-
tic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
BZ:DTC P0600 SERIAL COMMUNICATION LINK

NOTE:
For the diagnostic procedure, refer to LAN section. <Ref. to LAN(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-229

CA:DTC P0604 INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE RANDOM ACCESS MEMORY

(RAM) ERROR
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-171, DTC P0604 INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE RAN-
DOM ACCESS MEMORY (RAM) ERROR, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY
3 TO IGNITION COIL
5
SBF-7
6
4
No.13
2
1 IGNITION
B72 BATTERY
SWITCH
6 3
C23
B19
B2
A7
B5
A: B134
B: B135
ECM
C: B136
D: B137
D2
D7
D3
D1
A5
B21
52
34
36
35
37
E2
E E
B72 B47 B21 A: B134 B: B135 C: B136
1 2 3 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
4 5 6 3 4 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
5 6 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-04021
EN(H4SO)(diag)-230

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK FOR ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY. Is any other DTC displayed? Check the appro- Even if the mal-
priate DTC using function indicator
the “List of Diag- light illuminates,
nostic Trouble the circuit has
Code (DTC)”. returned to a nor-
<Ref. to mal condition at
EN(H4SO)(diag)- this time. Repro-
80, List of Diagnos- duce the failure,
tic Trouble Code and then perform
(DTC).> the diagnosis
again.
NOTE:
In this case, tem-
porary poor con-
tact of connector
may be the cause.
CB:DTC P0605 INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE READ ONLY MEMORY (ROM)

ERROR
NOTE:
For the diagnostic procedure, refer to DTC P0607. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-232, DTC P0607 CONTROL
MODULE PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-231

CC:DTC P0607 CONTROL MODULE PERFORMANCE

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-174, DTC P0607 CONTROL MODULE PERFORMANCE,
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY
3 TO IGNITION COIL
5
SBF-7
6
4
No.13
1
2 B72 IGNITION SWITCH BATTERY
1 3
C24
B27
A7
B2
B5
A: B134 B: B135
ECM
C: B136 D: B137 * ARRANGEMENT
A19
A29
A18
A28
D4
D5
A5
D2
D3
D7
D1
C6
B122
*
*
B21
18
17
20
38
19
39
36
35
52
34
37
E2
6
4
2
5
3
1
ELECTRONIC
E E57
THROTTLE CONTROL E E
A: B134 B: B135 C: B136

B122 B47 B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
3 4 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
5 6 7 8 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
5 6 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
D: B137
42 43 44 45 46 47
B72 E57
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 1 2 3 4 5 6
4 5 6 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-05048
EN(H4SO)(diag)-232

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK INPUT VOLTAGE OF ECM. Is the voltage 10 — 13 V? Go to step 2. Repair the open or
2) Measure the voltage between ECM and of power supply
chassis ground. circuit.
1) Start the engine. ground short circuit
(B134) No. 19 — (E57) No. 5:
(B134) No. 29 — (E57) No. 3:
4 CHECK ECM GROUND HARNESS. Is the voltage less than 1 V? Repair poor con- Repair the follow-
Measure the voltage between ECM and chassis tact in ECM con- ing item.
ground. nector. • Open circuit of
Connector & terminal the ground
(B134) No. 5 (+) — Chassis ground (–): • Retightening of
(B137) No. 1 (+) — Chassis ground (–): engine ground ter-
(B137) No. 2 (+) — Chassis ground (–): minals
(B137) No. 3 (+) — Chassis ground (–): • Poor contact in
(B137) No. 7 (+) — Chassis ground (–): ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
CD:DTC P0638 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL RANGE/PERFORMANCE

(BANK 1)
NOTE:
For the diagnostic procedure, refer to DTC P2101. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-287, DTC P2101 THROTTLE
ACTUATOR CONTROL MOTOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnos-
EN(H4SO)(diag)-233

CE:DTC P0691 FAN 1 CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-180, DTC P0691 FAN 1 CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW, Di-
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Radiator fan does not operate properly.
• Overheat
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK FOR ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY. Is any other DTC displayed? Check DTC using Check the radiator
“List of Diagnostic fan system. <Ref.
Trouble Code to CO(H4SO)-7,
(DTC)”. <Ref. to Radiator Fan Sys-
EN(H4SO)(diag)- tem.>
tic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
CF:DTC P0692 FAN 1 CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-181, DTC P0692 FAN 1 CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH, Di-
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Overheat
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
Trouble Code to CO(H4SO)-7,
(DTC)”. <Ref. to Radiator Fan Sys-
EN(H4SO)(diag)- tem.>
tic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
CG:DTC P0700 TRANSMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM (MIL REQUEST)

NOTE:
For the diagnostic procedure, refer to AT section. <Ref. to 4AT(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-234

CH:DTC P0851 PARK/NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT LOW (AT MODEL)

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-183, DTC P0851 PARK/NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIR-
CUIT LOW (AT MODEL), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
C: B136
C: B136 ECM
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
31
B122 B25
1 2
*
*
B25 T2 T2 B25
B12
MT 2 1
1 2 3 4
AT
NEUTRAL
5 6 7 8
POSITION : TERMINAL No. OPTIONAL
SWITCH * ARRANGEMENT
9 10 11 12
T7
INHIBITOR SWITCH
1 2 3 4 5 6
P R N D 3 2 1
7 8 9 10 11 12
11 7
12 12
B12 T3 T7 B122
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
STARTER MOTOR
M
B14
EN-05049
EN(H4SO)(diag)-235

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK SELECT CABLE. Are there any faults in the select Repair or adjust Go to step 2.
cable? the select cable.
<Ref. to CS-28,
Select Cable.>
2 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF ECM. Is the voltage 10 V or more? Repair poor con- Go to step 3.
2) Place the select lever other than “N” and “P” nector.
range.
chassis ground.
TRANSMISSION HARNESS CONNECTOR. more? short circuit of har-
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and ECM and transmis-
transmission harness connector (T3). sion harness con-
3) Measure the resistance between ECM and nector.
chassis ground.
4 CHECK TRANSMISSION HARNESS CON- Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Replace the inhibi- Repair the ground
NECTOR. more? tor switch. <Ref. to short circuit of har-
1) Disconnect the connector from inhibitor 4AT-45, Inhibitor ness between
switch. Switch.> transmission har-
2) Measure the resistance between the trans- ness connector
mission harness connector and engine ground. and inhibitor switch
(T3) No. 11 — Engine ground:
EN(H4SO)(diag)-236

CI: DTC P0851 NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT LOW (MT MODEL)
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-184, DTC P0851 NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT
LOW (MT MODEL), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
C: B136
C: B136 ECM
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
31
B122 B25
1 2
*
*
B25 T2 T2 B25
B12
MT 2 1
1 2 3 4
AT
NEUTRAL
5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12
T7
INHIBITOR SWITCH
1 2 3 4 5 6
P R N D 3 2 1
7 8 9 10 11 12
11 7
12 12
B12 T3 T7 B122
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
STARTER MOTOR
M
B14
EN-05049
EN(H4SO)(diag)-237

Step Check Yes No

2) Place the shift lever in a position except for nector.
neutral.
chassis ground.
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Repair the short Repair the ground
NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH CONNEC- more? circuit of transmis- short circuit of har-
TOR. sion harness, or ness between
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. replace the neutral ECM and transmis-
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and position switch. sion harness con-
transmission harness connector (T2). nector.
chassis ground.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-238

CJ:DTC P0852 PARK/NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH (AT MODEL)

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-185, DTC P0852 PARK/NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIR-
CUIT HIGH (AT MODEL), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
C: B136
C: B136 ECM
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
31
B122 B25
1 2
*
*
B25 T2 T2 B25
B12
MT 2 1
1 2 3 4
AT
NEUTRAL
5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12
T7
INHIBITOR SWITCH
1 2 3 4 5 6
P R N D 3 2 1
7 8 9 10 11 12
11 7
12 12
B12 T3 T7 B122
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
STARTER MOTOR
M
B14
EN-05049
EN(H4SO)(diag)-239

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK SELECT CABLE. Are there any faults in the select Repair or adjust Go to step 2.
cable? the select cable.
<Ref. to CS-28,
Select Cable.>
2 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF ECM. Is the voltage less than 1 V? Repair poor con- Go to step 3.
chassis ground with select lever at “N” and “P”
range.
3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND IN- Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 4. Repair the harness
HIBITOR SWITCH CONNECTOR. and connector.
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and In this case, repair
inhibitor switch. the following item:
3) Measure the resistance of harness between • Open circuit in
ECM and inhibitor switch connector. harness between
Connector & terminal ECM and inhibitor
(B136) No. 31 — (T7) No. 7: switch connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
4 CHECK INHIBITOR SWITCH GROUND LINE. Is the resistance less than 5 Ω? Replace the inhibi- Repair the harness
Measure the resistance of harness between tor switch. <Ref. to and connector.
inhibitor switch connector and engine ground. 4AT-45, Inhibitor NOTE:
Connector & terminal Switch.> In this case, repair
(T7) No. 12 — Engine ground: the following item:
• Open circuit in
harness between
inhibitor switch
connector and
starter motor
ground line
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
• Poor contact in
starter motor con-
nector
• Poor contact in
starter motor
ground
• Starter motor
EN(H4SO)(diag)-240

CK:DTC P0852 NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH (MT MODEL)

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-186, DTC P0852 NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT
HIGH (MT MODEL), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
C: B136
C: B136 ECM
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
31
B122 B25
1 2
*
*
B25 T2 T2 B25
B12
MT 2 1
1 2 3 4
AT
NEUTRAL
5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12
T7
INHIBITOR SWITCH
1 2 3 4 5 6
P R N D 3 2 1
7 8 9 10 11 12
11 7
12 12
B12 T3 T7 B122
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
STARTER MOTOR
M
B14
EN-05049
EN(H4SO)(diag)-241

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF ECM. Is the voltage less than 1 V? Repair poor con- Go to step 2.
2) Place the shift lever in neutral. nector.
chassis ground.
NEUTRAL SWITCH CONNECTOR. circuit of harness
2) Disconnect connectors from the ECM and transmission har-
transmission harness. ness connector.
ECM and transmission harness connector.
(B136) No. 31 — (T2) No. 2:
NEUTRAL SWITCH CONNECTOR. and connector.
ECM and transmission harness connector. In this case, repair
(B136) No. 6 — (T2) No. 1: • Open circuit of
harness between
transmission har-
ness connector
and engine ground
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
4 CHECK NEUTRAL SWITCH. Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Repair the poor Repair the open
1) Place the shift lever in neutral. contact of trans- circuit of transmis-
2) Measure the resistance between transmis- mission harness sion harness, or
sion harness connector terminals. connector. replace the neutral
Connector & terminal switch.
(T2) No. 1 — No. 2:
EN(H4SO)(diag)-242

CL:DTC P1152 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE (LOW)

(BANK 1 SENSOR 1)
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-187, DTC P1152 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PER-
FORMANCE (LOW) (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B327
1 2
SBF-5 3 4
6 5 6
4 50
5 B21 E2 E22 B138

3
6
2 FRONT 3 2 1 1 2 3 4
1 SENSOR
6 5 4
B327 E22
B21
4
3
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
E2 42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
51
4
3
B21
E
A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
* 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
* 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
B1
B8
B9
C2
C3
B138
B: B135
A: B134 E
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
B: B135
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
ECM
C: B136 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
D: B137
C: B136
A5
D1
D2
D3
D7
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
B21 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
36
34
35
37
52
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
E2
D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
E 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
* ARRANGEMENT
26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-05042
EN(H4SO)(diag)-243

Step Check Yes No

TOR. inside.
TOR. NOTE:
and front oxygen (A/F) sensor. • Open circuit in
front oxygen (A/F)
sensor connector
• Poor contact in
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
sor connector. FU(H4SO)-33,
Front Oxygen (A/F)
Sensor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-244

CM:DTC P1153 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE (HIGH)

(BANK 1 SENSOR 1)
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-190, DTC P1153 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PER-
FORMANCE (HIGH) (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B327
1 2
SBF-5 3 4
6 5 6
4 50
5 B21 E2 E22 B138

3
6
2 FRONT 3 2 1 1 2 3 4
1 SENSOR
6 5 4
B327 E22
B21
4
3
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
E2 42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
51
4
3
B21
E
A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
* 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
* 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
B1
B8
B9
C2
C3
B138
B: B135
A: B134 E
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
B: B135
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
ECM
C: B136 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
D: B137
C: B136
A5
D1
D2
D3
D7
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
B21 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
36
34
35
37
52
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
E2
D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
E 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
* ARRANGEMENT
26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-05042
EN(H4SO)(diag)-245

Step Check Yes No

TOR. inside.
TOR. ness between
2) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM. gen (A/F) sensor
3) Measure the resistance between ECM and connector.
chassis ground.
3 CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL FOR ECM. Is the voltage 4.5 V or more? Go to step 5. Go to step 4.
1) Connect the ECM.
chassis ground.
4 CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL FOR ECM. Is the voltage 4.95 V or more? Go to step 5. Replace the front
Measure the voltage between ECM and chassis oxygen (A/F) sen-
ground. sor. <Ref. to
Connector & terminal FU(H4SO)-33,
(B135) No. 8 (+) — Chassis ground (–): Front Oxygen (A/F)
Sensor.>
5 CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL FOR ECM. Is the voltage 8 V or more? Repair the short Repair poor con-
Measure the voltage between ECM and chassis circuit to power in tact in ECM con-
ground. the harness nector.
Connector & terminal between the ECM
(B135) No. 9 (+) — Chassis ground (–): and front oxygen
(B135) No. 8 (+) — Chassis ground (–): (A/F) sensor con-
nector. After repair,
replace the ECM.
<Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-35,
Engine Control
Module (ECM).>
CN:DTC P1160 RETURN SPRING FAILURE

NOTE:
EN(H4SO)(diag)-246

CO:DTC P1400 FUEL TANK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT

LOW
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-195, DTC P1400 FUEL TANK PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY
5 BATTERY
3
SBF-7
6
4
2
1
PRESSURE
CONTROL
B47
SOLENOID
VALVE
2
1
R68
R67 R213
6
R46 R15
R1
15
7
B97
28
B136 ECM
B47 B97 R213 R67 R68 B136
1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2
3 4 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 4 5 6 7 8 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
5 6 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-05050
EN(H4SO)(diag)-247

Step Check Yes No

chassis ground.
PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE. more? short circuit of har-
2) Disconnect the connector from the ECM ECM and pressure
and pressure control solenoid valve. control solenoid
3) Measure the resistance between pressure valve connector.
control solenoid valve and chassis ground.
PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE. and connector.
ECM and pressure control solenoid valve con- In this case, repair
nector. the following item:
(B136) No. 28 — (R68) No. 2: harness between
ECM and pressure
control solenoid
valve connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
4 CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID Is the resistance between 10 — Go to step 5. Replace the pres-
VALVE. 100 Ω? sure control sole-
Measure the resistance between pressure con- noid valve. <Ref. to
trol solenoid valve terminals. EC(H4SO)-12,
Terminals Pressure Control
No. 1 — No. 2: Solenoid Valve.>
5 CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO THE PRES- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Repair the poor Repair the harness
SURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE. contact of pressure and connector.
2) Measure the voltage between pressure con- valve connector. In this case, repair
trol solenoid valve and chassis ground. the following item:
(R68) No. 1 (+) — Chassis ground (–): harness between
main relay and
pressure control
solenoid valve
connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
• Poor contact of
main relay connec-
tor
EN(H4SO)(diag)-248

CP:DTC P1420 FUEL TANK PRESSURE CONTROL SOL. VALVE CIRCUIT HIGH
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-197, DTC P1420 FUEL TANK PRESSURE CONTROL
SOL. VALVE CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY
5 BATTERY
3
SBF-7
6
4
2
1
PRESSURE
CONTROL
B47
SOLENOID
VALVE
2
1
R68
R67 R213
6
R46 R15
R1
15
7
B97
28
B136 ECM
B47 B97 R213 R67 R68 B136
1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2
3 4 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 4 5 6 7 8 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
5 6 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-05050
EN(H4SO)(diag)-249

Step Check Yes No

PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE. circuit to power in
2) Disconnect the connector from the ECM between ECM and
and pressure control solenoid valve. pressure control
chassis ground.
2 CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Replace the pres- Repair poor con-
VALVE. sure control sole- tact in ECM con-
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. noid valve. <Ref. to nector.
2) Measure the resistance between pressure EC(H4SO)-12,
control solenoid valve terminals. Pressure Control
No. 1 — No. 2:
EN(H4SO)(diag)-250

CQ:DTC P1443 VENT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION PROBLEM

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-199, DTC P1443 VENT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
FUNCTION PROBLEM, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper fuel supply
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY
5
BATTERY
3
SBF-7
6
4 R46 R67
2 7 6 1
1 DRAIN
14 1 2 VALVE
B47
B97 R1 R15 R213 R144
17
B136 ECM
B47 B97 B136 R67 R213
1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 1 2 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
3 4 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 3 4 5 6 4 5 6 7 8
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
5 6 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
R144
1 2
EN-05046
EN(H4SO)(diag)-251

Step Check Yes No

priate DTC using
nostic Trouble
Code (DTC)”.
<Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-
tic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
2 CHECK DRAIN HOSE. Is there clogging in the drain Replace the drain Go to step 3.
Check the drain hose for clogging. hose? hose.
3 CHECK DRAIN VALVE OPERATION. Does the drain valve operate? Repair poor con- Replace the drain
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. tact in ECM con- valve. <Ref. to
2) Connect the test mode connector at the nector. EC(H4SO)-15,
lower portion of instrument panel (on the Drain Valve.>
driver’s side).
4) Operate the drain valve.
NOTE:
EN(H4SO)(diag)-252

CR:DTC P1491 POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION (BLOW-BY) FUNCTION

PROBLEM
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-201, DTC P1491 POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILA-
TION (BLOW-BY) FUNCTION PROBLEM, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B21
B134 ECM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
30
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
B21
10
E2
E61
1 2
1
2
E61
PCV E
DIAGNOSIS
CONNECTOR
EN-04049
EN(H4SO)(diag)-253

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK BLOW-BY HOSE. Is there any disconnection or Repair or replace Go to step 2.
Check the blow-by hose condition. crack in blow-by hose? the blow-by hose.
PCV HOSE ASSEMBLY. circuit of harness
2) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM PCV hose assem-
and PCV hose assembly. bly.
ECM and PCV hose assembly.
(B134) No. 30 — (E61) No. 2:
PCV HOSE ASSEMBLY. more? short circuit of har-
Measure the resistance between PCV hose ness between
assembly and chassis ground. ECM and PCV
Connector & terminal hose assembly.
4 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT OF PCV HOSE Is the resistance less than 5 Ω? Go to step 5. Repair the open
ASSEMBLY. circuit of harness
Measure the resistance of harness between between PCV hose
PCV hose assembly and engine ground. assembly and
Connector & terminal engine ground.
5 CHECK THE PCV HOSE ASSEMBLY. Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Repair the poor Replace the PCV
Measure the resistance between the PCV hose contact in ECM hose assembly.
assembly terminals. and PCV hose
Terminals assembly connec-
No. 1 — No. 2: tor.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-254

CS:DTC P1492 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #1 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION

(LOW INPUT)
NOTE:
For the diagnostic procedure, refer to DTC P1498. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-256, DTC P1498 EGR SOLE-
NOID VALVE SIGNAL #4 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (LOW INPUT), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
CT:DTC P1493 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #1 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION
(HIGH INPUT)
NOTE:
NOID VALVE SIGNAL #4 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (HIGH INPUT), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
CU:DTC P1494 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #2 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION
(LOW INPUT)
NOTE:
CV:DTC P1495 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #2 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION
(HIGH INPUT)
NOTE:
CW:DTC P1496 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #3 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION
(LOW INPUT)
NOTE:
CX:DTC P1497 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #3 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION
(HIGH INPUT)
NOTE:
EN(H4SO)(diag)-255

CY:DTC P1498 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #4 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION

(LOW INPUT)
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-203, DTC P1492 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #1
CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (LOW INPUT), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.> <Ref. to
GD(H4SO)-207, DTC P1494 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #2 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (LOW IN-
PUT), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.> <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-207, DTC P1496 EGR SO-
LENOID VALVE SIGNAL #3 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (LOW INPUT), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
Detecting Criteria.> <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-207, DTC P1498 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #4 CIRCUIT
MALFUNCTION (LOW INPUT), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
• Engine breathing
CAUTION:
EN(H4SO)(diag)-256

WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY
E18
5 BATTERY
3 1 2 3
SBF-7 4 5 6
6
4
2
B47
1
B21
48
B47 1 2
E2 3 4
5 6
B21
5
2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
EGR VALVE
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
E18 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
1
3
4
6
B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
E2 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
30
26
25
29
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
B21 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
10
20
9
8
B134 ECM
EN-04041
EN(H4SO)(diag)-257

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO EGR SOLE- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 2. Repair the harness
NOID VALVE. and connector.
2) Disconnect the connector from EGR sole- In this case, repair
noid valve. the following item:
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. • Open circuit in
4) Measure the voltage between EGR sole- harness between
noid valve connector and engine ground. EGR solenoid
Connector & terminal valve and main re-
(E18) No. 2 (+) — Engine ground (–): lay connector
(E18) No. 5 (+) — Engine ground (–): • Poor contact of
coupling connector
EGR SOLENOID VALVE CONNECTOR. and connector.
3) Measure the resistance between ECM and the following item:
EGR solenoid valve connector. • Open circuit in
DTC P1492; (B134) No. 8 — (E18) No. 3: ECM and EGR so-
DTC P1494; (B134) No. 9 — (E18) No. 1: lenoid valve con-
DTC P1496; (B134) No. 10 — (E18) No. 4: nector
DTC P1498; (B134) No. 20 — (E18) No. 6: • Poor contact of
coupling connector
EGR SOLENOID VALVE CONNECTOR. more? short in harness
2) Measure the resistance between ECM and EGR solenoid
chassis ground. valve connector.
DTC P1492; (B134) No. 8 — Chassis
ground:
ground:
ground:
ground:
4 CHECK POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact in ECM or Repair the poor Replace the EGR
Check poor contact in ECM and EGR solenoid EGR solenoid valve connector? contact in ECM or solenoid valve.
valve connector. EGR solenoid <Ref. to
valve connector. FU(H4SO)-27,
EGR Valve.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-258

CZ:DTC P1499 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #4 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION

(HIGH INPUT)
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-205, DTC P1493 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #1
CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (HIGH INPUT), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.> <Ref. to
GD(H4SO)-207, DTC P1495 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #2 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (HIGH IN-
PUT), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.> <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-207, DTC P1497 EGR SO-
LENOID VALVE SIGNAL #3 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (HIGH INPUT), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
Detecting Criteria.> <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-207, DTC P1499 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #4 CIRCUIT
MALFUNCTION (HIGH INPUT), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
• Engine breathing
CAUTION:
EN(H4SO)(diag)-259

WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY
E18
5 BATTERY
3 1 2 3
SBF-7 4 5 6
6
4
2
B47
1
B21
48
B47 1 2
E2 3 4
5 6
B21
5
2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
EGR VALVE
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
E18 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
1
3
4
6
B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
E2 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
30
26
25
29
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
B21 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
10
20
9
8
B134 ECM
EN-04041
Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the voltage 10 V or more? Repair the short Repair poor con-
EGR SOLENOID VALVE CONNECTOR. circuit to power in tact in ECM con-
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. the harness nector.
2) Disconnect the connector from EGR valve. between the ECM
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. and EGR solenoid
4) Measure the voltage between ECM and valve connectors.
chassis ground.
DTC P1493; (B134) No. 8 (+) — Chassis
ground (–):
DTC P1495; (B134) No. 9 (+) — Chassis
ground (–):
DTC P1497; (B134) No. 10 (+) — Chassis
ground (–):
DTC P1499; (B134) No. 20 (+) — Chassis
ground (–):
EN(H4SO)(diag)-260

DA:DTC P1518 STARTER SWITCH CIRCUIT LOW INPUT

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-208, DTC P1518 STARTER SWITCH CIRCUIT LOW IN-
PUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
BATTERY
2 3
B72 IGNITION
SWITCH
15
13
STARTER RELAY
B225
16
14
INHIBITOR SWITCH
AT
P R N D 3 2 1
MT
AT 11 7
12 12
MT
B12 T3 T7
1
CLUTCH
SWITCH
(MT) STARTER MOTOR
MT
B106
AT
2
M
MT
AT B14
32
20
B136 ECM
E
B225 B106 B136 B72 B12 T7
1 2 9 13 17 21 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6
3 4 10 14 18 22 2 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 4 5 6 5 6 7 8 7 8 9 10 11 12
11 12 15 16 19 20 23 24 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 9 10 11 12
5 6
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
7 8 25 29 33 37
26 30 34 38
27 28 31 32 35 36 39 40
EN-05041
EN(H4SO)(diag)-261

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK FOR ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY. Is any other DTC displayed? Check DTC using Go to step 2.
“List of Diagnostic
Trouble Code
(DTC)”. <Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-
tic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND IG- Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 3. NOTE:
NITION SWITCH. Check the follow-
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ing item and repair
2) Disconnect the connector from ECM and or replace if neces-
ignition switch. sary.
the ECM and ignition switch connector. harness between
Connector & terminal the ECM and igni-
(B136) No. 32 — (B72) No. 2: tion coil switch
NOTE: connector
For the MT model, measure while stepping on • Blown out of fuse
the clutch pedal. (No. 21)
• Poor contact of
the clutch switch
connector (MT
model)
• Poor contact of
the clutch switch
(MT model)
3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND IG- Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Repair the ground Repair poor con-
NITION SWITCH. more? short circuit of har- tact in ECM con-
Measure the resistance between ECM and ness between the nector.
chassis ground. ECM and ignition
Connector & terminal switch connector.
NOTE:
For the MT model, measure while stepping on
the clutch pedal.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-262

DB:DTC P1560 BACK-UP VOLTAGE CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-209, DTC P1560 BACK-UP VOLTAGE CIRCUIT MAL-
FUNCTION, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY
3 TO IGNITION COIL
5
SBF-7
6
4
No.13
2
1 IGNITION
B72 BATTERY
SWITCH
6 3
C23
B19
B2
A7
B5
A: B134
B: B135
ECM
C: B136
D: B137
D2
D7
D3
D1
A5
B21
52
34
36
35
37
E2
E E
B72 B47 B21 A: B134 B: B135 C: B136
1 2 3 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
4 5 6 3 4 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
5 6 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-04021
EN(H4SO)(diag)-263

Step Check Yes No

1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. tact in ECM con-
chassis ground.
MAIN FUSE BOX CONNECTOR. more? short circuit of har-
2) Measure the resistance between ECM and ECM and battery
chassis ground. terminal.
3 CHECK FUSE NO. 13 (IN MAIN FUSE BOX). Is the fuse blown out? Replace the fuse. Repair the harness
and connector.
NOTE:
the following item:
• Open circuit of
harness between
ECM and battery
• Poor contact in
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
battery terminal
EN(H4SO)(diag)-264

DC:DTC P1602 CONTROL MODULE PROGRAMMING ERROR

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-211, DTC P1602 CONTROL MODULE PROGRAMMING
ERROR, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Engine keeps running at higher speed than specified idle speed.
• Engine keeps running at a lower speed than the specified idle speed.
• Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
EN(H4SO)(diag)-265

WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY
5 BATTERY
3
SBF-7
6
4
2
1
B47
B137 ECM
10
11
8
B21
48
42
43
44
45
E2
E5 E16 E6 E17
2
1 E

No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4
E5 E16 B47 B21 B137
E6 E17 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
3 4 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
1 2 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
5 6 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
26 27 28 29 30 31
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
EN-04024
EN(H4SO)(diag)-266

BATTERY
CONTROL RELAY B362
8
5
6
7 MAIN RELAY
C21
C1
ECM
A: B134 C: B136 D: B137

A29 E
A19
A28
A18
D3
A5
D1
D4
D5
D2
D7
C6
*
*
B122
B21
37
36
34
35
52
20
39
38
17
18
19
E2
5
6
1

E57
E THROTTLE CONTROL
B362 B122 B21 E57 A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
1 2 5 6 7 8
4 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
5
7 8
6
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54 C: B136 D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-05044
EN(H4SO)(diag)-267

Step Check Yes No

priate DTC using
nostic Trouble
Code (DTC)”.
<Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-
tic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
2 CHECK ENGINE OIL. Is there a proper amount of Go to step 3. Replace engine oil.
engine oil? <Ref. to
LU(H4SO)-9,
REPLACEMENT,
Engine Oil.>
3 CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM. Are there holes or loose boltsRepair the exhaust Go to step 4.
4 CHECK AIR INTAKE SYSTEM. Repair the air
Are there holes, loose bolts or Go to step 5.
intake system?
Measure the fuel pressure. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)- Fuel pressure is
26, INSPECTION, Fuel Pressure.> too low:
CAUTION: • Improper fuel
Release fuel pressure before removing the pump discharge
fuel pressure gauge. • Clogged fuel line
tor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-268

Step Check Yes No

(158°F). FU(H4SO)-26,
NOTE:
tor.>
8 CHECK MASS AIR FLOW AND INTAKE AIR Subtract ambient temperature Go to step 9. Check the mass air
TEMPERATURE SENSOR. from intake air temperature. Is flow and intake air
1) Start the engine and warm-up engine until the obtained value –10 — 50°C temperature sen-
(158°F). FU(H4SO)-26,
NOTE:
tor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-269

Step Check Yes No

cylinders.
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
terminals on faulty cylinder. to FU(H4SO)-28,
Terminals Fuel Injector.>
No. 1 — No. 2:
nector on faulty
cylinders
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
• Poor contact of
main relay connec-
tor
• Poor contact of
fuel injector con-
nector on faulty
cylinders
EN(H4SO)(diag)-270

Step Check Yes No

2) Measure the resistance between fuel injec- to FU(H4SO)-28,
tor terminals on faulty cylinder. Fuel Injector.>
Terminals
No. 1 — No. 2:
16 CHECK INSTALLATION CONDITION OF Is the camshaft position sensor Tighten the cam- Go to step 17.
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR/CRANK- or crankshaft position sensor shaft position sen-
SHAFT POSITION SENSOR. loosely installed? sor or crankshaft
position sensor.
Remove the timing belt cover. <Ref. to does it have damaged teeth? sprocket. <Ref. to
ME(H4SO)-40, REMOVAL, Timing Belt Cover.> ME(H4SO)-47,
Crank Sprocket.>
Turn the crankshaft using ST, and align align- timing belt. <Ref.
ment mark on crank sprocket with alignment to ME(H4SO)-41,
mark on cylinder block. Timing Belt.>
19 CHECK ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CON- Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 20. Replace the elec-
TROL RELAY. tronic throttle con-
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. trol relay.
2) Remove the electronic throttle control relay.
3) Connect the battery to terminals No. 5 and
No. 6 of electronic throttle control relay.
4) Measure the resistance between electronic
throttle control relay terminals.
Terminals
No. 8 — No. 7:
20 CHECK POWER SUPPLY OF ELECTRONIC Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 21. Repair the open or
THROTTLE CONTROL RELAY. ground short circuit
Measure the voltage between electronic throttle of power supply
control relay connector and chassis ground. circuit.
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL RE- circuit to power in
LAY. the harness
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. electronic throttle
3) Measure the voltage between electronic control relay.
throttle control relay connector and chassis
ground.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-271

Step Check Yes No

ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL RE- more? short circuit of har-
LAY. ness between
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ECM and elec-
2) Measure the resistance between electronic tronic throttle con-
throttle control relay connector and chassis trol relay.
ground.
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL RE- circuit of harness
LAY. between ECM and
Measure the resistance between the ECM and electronic throttle
electronic throttle control relay connector. control relay.
(B136) No. 21 — (B362) No. 6:
(B136) No. 1 — (B362) No. 7:
chassis ground.
(B134) No. 18 — (B136) No. 6:
25 CHECK SHORT CIRCUIT INSIDE THE ECM. Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 26. Repair the ground
1) Connect the ECM. more? short circuit of har-
2) Measure the resistance between electronic ness between
throttle control connector and engine ground. ECM and elec-
Connector & terminal tronic throttle con-
(E57) No. 4 — Engine ground: Replace the ECM if
defective. <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-35,
Engine Control
Module (ECM).>
2) Measure the resistance of harness between electronic throttle
ECM and electronic throttle control connector. control connector.
(B134) No. 18 — (E57) No. 6:
(B134) No. 28 — (E57) No. 4:
(B134) No. 29 — (E57) No. 3:
EN(H4SO)(diag)-272

Step Check Yes No

ECM and engine
ground
• Poor contact in
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL. more? circuit to power in
3) Measure the resistance between ECM con- electronic throttle
nectors. control connector.
(B134) No. 19 — (B134) No. 18:
(B134) No. 19 — (B134) No. 28:
30 CHECK SENSOR OUTPUT. Is the voltage 0.81 — 0.87 V? Go to step 31. Repair poor con-
1) Connect all connectors. tact of the elec-
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. tronic throttle
3) Read the data of main throttle sensor signal control connector.
using Subaru Select Monitor. Replace the elec-
NOTE: tronic throttle con-
For detailed operation procedures, refer to trol if defective.
“READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE”. <Ref. <Ref. to
to EN(H4SO)(diag)-34, Subaru Select Moni- FU(H4SO)-11,
tor.> Throttle Body.>
Read the data of sub throttle sensor signal tact of the elec-
using Subaru Select Monitor. tronic throttle
NOTE: control connector.
Subaru Select Monitor Replace the elec-
For detailed operation procedures, refer to tronic throttle con-
“READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE”. <Ref. trol if defective.
to EN(H4SO)(diag)-34, Subaru Select Moni- <Ref. to
tor.> FU(H4SO)-11,
Throttle Body.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-273

Step Check Yes No

ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL MO- circuit of harness
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. electronic throttle
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and control.
electronic throttle control.
electronic throttle control connector.
(B137) No. 5 — (E57) No. 2:
(B137) No. 4 — (E57) No. 1:
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL MO- circuit to power in
TOR. the harness
1) Connect the ECM. between the ECM
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. and electronic
3) Measure the voltage between electronic throttle control.
throttle control connector and engine ground.
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL MO- more? short circuit of har-
2) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM. tronic throttle con-
3) Measure the resistance between electronic trol.
35 CHECK ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CON- Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 36. Repair the short
TROL MOTOR HARNESS. more? circuit of harness
Measure the resistance between the electronic between ECM and
throttle control connector terminals. electronic throttle
Connector & terminal control.
(E57) No. 2 — (E57) No. 1:
36 CHECK ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CON- Is the resistance less than 5 Ω? Go to step 37. Repair the open
TROL GROUND CIRCUIT. circuit of the har-
Measure the resistance between ECM and ness between the
chassis ground. ECM and engine
Connector & terminal ground.
37 CHECK ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CON- Is the resistance 50 Ω or less? Go to step 38. Replace the elec-
TROL. tronic throttle con-
Measure the resistance between electronic trol. <Ref. to
throttle control terminals. FU(H4SO)-11,
Terminals Throttle Body.>
No. 2 — No. 1:
38 CHECK ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CON- Does the valve return to the Repair poor con- Replace the elec-
TROL. specified position? Standard tact in ECM con- tronic throttle con-
Move the throttle valve to the fully open and fully value: 3 mm (0.12 in) from fully nector. trol. <Ref. to
closed positions with fingers. closed position FU(H4SO)-11,
Check that the valve returns to the specified Throttle Body.>
position when releasing fingers.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-274

DD:DTC P2096 POST CATALYST FUEL TRIM SYSTEM TOO LEAN BANK 1
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-216, DTC P2096 POST CATALYST FUEL TRIM SYS-
TEM TOO LEAN BANK 1, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
E23 E22
OXYGEN SENSOR RELAY BATTERY 1 2 3 2 1

SBF-5 3 4 6 5 4
6
4
B21 E2
2
1 50 B138 B327
B327
1 2 3 4 1 2
5 6 7 8 3 4
2
5 6
REAR OXYGEN FRONT OXYGEN

SENSOR (A/F) SENSOR
A: B134
E23 E22
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
4
3
1
4
3
1
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
B: B135
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
E E E 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
E2
53
51
19
4
3
B21 C: B136
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
JOINT
*
*
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
CON-
NECTOR
B138
*
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
A29
B1
B4
B8
B9
C4
C3
C2
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
: TERMINAL No. 42 43 44 45 46 47
* OPTIONAL
A: B134 B: B135 C: B136 ECM
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
ARRANGEMENT
EN-04042
EN(H4SO)(diag)-275

Step Check Yes No

Trouble Code
(DTC)”. <Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-
tic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
TOR. inside.
TOR. NOTE:
front oxygen (A/F)
sensor connector
• Poor contact in
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
TOR. ness between
Measure the resistance between ECM and ECM and front oxy-
chassis ground. gen (A/F) sensor
1) Connect the ECM.
3) Measure the voltage between front oxygen
(A/F) sensor connector and chassis ground.
Measure the voltage between front oxygen (A/
F) sensor connector and chassis ground.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-276

Step Check Yes No

Measure the voltage between front oxygen (A/ circuit to power in tact in ECM con-
F) sensor connector and chassis ground. the harness nector.
(E22) No. 1 (+) — Chassis ground (–): and front oxygen
(E22) No. 3 (+) — Chassis ground (–): (A/F) sensor con-
replace the ECM.
<Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-35,
Engine Control
Module (ECM).>
9 CHECK AIR INTAKE SYSTEM. Are there holes, loose bolts or
Repair the air Go to step 10.
intake system?
1) Connect the front oxygen (A/F) sensor con- Fuel pressure is
nector. too low:
2) Measure the fuel pressure. <Ref. to • Improper fuel
ME(H4SO)-26, INSPECTION, Fuel Pressure.> pump discharge
Release fuel pressure before removing the
fuel pressure gauge.
tor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-277

Step Check Yes No

(158°F). FU(H4SO)-26,
NOTE:
tor.>
(158°F). FU(H4SO)-26,
NOTE:
tor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-278

Step Check Yes No

maximum)
tool.
NOTE:
• Depress the clutch pedal. (MT model)
tor.>
rpm.
tool.
NOTE:
tor.>
inside.
17 CHECK FRONT OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR Is a voltage of 0.8 V or more Replace the front Go to step 18.
AND REAR OXYGEN SENSOR DATA. maintained for 5 minutes or oxygen (A/F) sen-
1) Warm-up the engine until engine coolant more? sor. <Ref. to
temperature is higher than 70°C (158°F), then FU(H4SO)-33,
keep the engine idling for 5 minutes or more. Front Oxygen (A/F)
2) Read the data of rear oxygen sensor signal Sensor.>
tool.
NOTE:
tor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-279

Step Check Yes No

(B135) No. 4 — (E23) No. 3:
(B134) No. 29 — (E23) No. 4:
REAR OXYGEN SENSOR CONNECTOR. oxygen sensor. and connector.
1) Connect the ECM. <Ref. to NOTE:
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. FU(H4SO)-34, In this case, repair
3) Measure the voltage between rear oxygen Rear Oxygen Sen- the following item:
sensor connector and chassis ground. sor.> • Open circuit of
(E23) No. 3 (+) — Chassis ground (–): the ECM and rear
oxygen sensor
• Poor contact in
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
EN(H4SO)(diag)-280

DE:DTC P2097 POST CATALYST FUEL TRIM SYSTEM TOO RICH BANK 1
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-218, DTC P2097 POST CATALYST FUEL TRIM SYS-
TEM TOO RICH BANK 1, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
E23 E22
OXYGEN SENSOR RELAY BATTERY 1 2 3 2 1

SBF-5 3 4 6 5 4
6
4
B21 E2
2
1 50 B138 B327
B327
1 2 3 4 1 2
5 6 7 8 3 4
2
5 6
REAR OXYGEN FRONT OXYGEN

SENSOR (A/F) SENSOR
A: B134
E23 E22
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
4
3
1
4
3
1
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
B: B135
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
E E E 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
E2
53
51
19
4
3
B21 C: B136
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
JOINT
*
*
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
CON-
NECTOR
B138
*
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
A29
B1
B4
B8
B9
C4
C3
C2
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
: TERMINAL No. 42 43 44 45 46 47
* OPTIONAL
A: B134 B: B135 C: B136 ECM
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
ARRANGEMENT
EN-04042
EN(H4SO)(diag)-281

Step Check Yes No

Trouble Code
(DTC)”. <Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-
tic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
TOR. inside.
TOR. NOTE:
front oxygen (A/F)
sensor connector
• Poor contact in
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
TOR. ness between
Measure the resistance between ECM and ECM and front oxy-
chassis ground. gen (A/F) sensor
1) Connect the ECM.
3) Measure the voltage between front oxygen
(A/F) sensor connector and chassis ground.
Measure the voltage between front oxygen (A/
F) sensor connector and chassis ground.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-282

Step Check Yes No

Measure the voltage between front oxygen (A/ circuit to power in tact in ECM con-
F) sensor connector and chassis ground. the harness nector.
(E22) No. 1 (+) — Chassis ground (–): and front oxygen
(E22) No. 3 (+) — Chassis ground (–): (A/F) sensor con-
replace the ECM.
<Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-35,
Engine Control
Module (ECM).>
9 CHECK AIR INTAKE SYSTEM. Are there holes, loose bolts or
Repair the air Go to step 10.
intake system?
1) Connect the front oxygen (A/F) sensor con- Fuel pressure is
nector. too low:
2) Measure the fuel pressure. <Ref. to • Improper fuel
ME(H4SO)-26, INSPECTION, Fuel Pressure.> pump discharge
Release fuel pressure before removing the
fuel pressure gauge.
tor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-283

Step Check Yes No

(158°F). FU(H4SO)-26,
NOTE:
tor.>
(158°F). FU(H4SO)-26,
NOTE:
tor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-284

Step Check Yes No

maximum)
tool.
NOTE:
tor.>
rpm.
tool.
NOTE:
tor.>
inside.
17 CHECK FRONT OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR Is a voltage of 0.8 V or more Replace the front Go to step 18.
AND REAR OXYGEN SENSOR DATA. maintained for 5 minutes or oxygen (A/F) sen-
1) Warm-up the engine until engine coolant more? sor. <Ref. to
temperature is higher than 70°C (158°F), then FU(H4SO)-33,
keep the engine idling for 5 minutes or more. Front Oxygen (A/F)
2) Read the data of rear oxygen sensor signal Sensor.>
tool.
NOTE:
tor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-285

Step Check Yes No

(B135) No. 4 — (E23) No. 3:
(B134) No. 29 — (E23) No. 4:
REAR OXYGEN SENSOR CONNECTOR. oxygen sensor. and connector.
1) Connect the ECM. <Ref. to NOTE:
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. FU(H4SO)-34, In this case, repair
3) Measure the voltage between rear oxygen Rear Oxygen Sen- the following item:
sensor connector and chassis ground. sor.> • Open circuit of
(E23) No. 3 (+) — Chassis ground (–): the ECM and rear
oxygen sensor
• Poor contact in
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
EN(H4SO)(diag)-286

DF:DTC P2101 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL MOTOR CIRCUIT RANGE/

PERFORMANCE
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-220, DTC P2101 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL
MOTOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
• Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
BATTERY
CONTROL RELAY B362
8
5
6
7 MAIN RELAY
C21
C1
ECM
A: B134 C: B136 D: B137

E
A29
A19
A28
A18
D3
A5
D1
D4
D5
D2
D7
C6
*
*
B122
B21
37
36
34
35
52
20
39
38
17
18
19
E2
5
6
1

E57
E THROTTLE CONTROL
B362 B122 B21 E57 A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
1 2 5 6 7 8
4 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
5
7 8
6
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54 C: B136 D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-05044
EN(H4SO)(diag)-287

Step Check Yes No

Terminals
No. 8 — No. 7:
LAY. the harness
ground.
LAY. ness between
ground.
(B136) No. 21 — (B362) No. 6:
(B136) No. 1 — (B362) No. 7:
2) Disconnect the connectors from electronic ECM and elec-
throttle control. tronic throttle con-
chassis ground.
(B134) No. 18 — (B136) No. 6:
EN(H4SO)(diag)-288

Step Check Yes No

defective. <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-35,
Engine Control
Module (ECM).>
(B134) No. 18 — (E57) No. 6:
(B134) No. 28 — (E57) No. 4:
(B134) No. 29 — (E57) No. 3:
ECM and engine
ground
• Poor contact in
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
(B134) No. 19 — (B134) No. 18:
(B134) No. 19 — (B134) No. 28:
EN(H4SO)(diag)-289

Step Check Yes No

1) Connect all connectors. tact of the elec-
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. tronic throttle
3) Read the data of main throttle sensor signal control connector.
using Subaru Select Monitor. Replace the elec-
NOTE: tronic throttle con-
For detailed operation procedures, refer to trol if defective.
“READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE”. <Ref. <Ref. to
to EN(H4SO)(diag)-34, Subaru Select Moni- FU(H4SO)-11,
tor.> Throttle Body.>
Read the data of sub throttle sensor signal tact of the elec-
using Subaru Select Monitor. tronic throttle
NOTE: control connector.
Subaru Select Monitor Replace the elec-
For detailed operation procedures, refer to tronic throttle con-
“READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE”. <Ref. trol if defective.
to EN(H4SO)(diag)-34, Subaru Select Moni- <Ref. to
tor.> FU(H4SO)-11,
Throttle Body.>
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL MO- circuit of harness
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. electronic throttle
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and control.
electronic throttle control.
electronic throttle control connector.
(B137) No. 5 — (E57) No. 2:
(B137) No. 4 — (E57) No. 1:
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL MO- circuit to power in
TOR. the harness
1) Connect the ECM. between the ECM
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. and electronic
3) Measure the voltage between electronic throttle control.
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL MO- more? short circuit of har-
3) Measure the resistance between electronic trol.
17 CHECK ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CON- Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 18. Repair the short
TROL MOTOR HARNESS. more? circuit of harness
Measure the resistance between the electronic between ECM and
throttle control connector terminals. electronic throttle
Connector & terminal control.
(E57) No. 2 — (E57) No. 1:
EN(H4SO)(diag)-290

Step Check Yes No

18 CHECK ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CON- Is the resistance less than 5 Ω? Go to step 19. Repair the open
TROL GROUND CIRCUIT. circuit of the har-
Measure the resistance between ECM and ness between the
chassis ground. ECM and engine
Connector & terminal ground.
19 CHECK ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CON- Is the resistance 50 Ω or less? Go to step 20. Replace the elec-
TROL. tronic throttle con-
Measure the resistance between electronic trol. <Ref. to
throttle control terminals. FU(H4SO)-11,
Terminals Throttle Body.>
No. 2 — No. 1:
20 CHECK ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CON- Does the valve return to the Repair poor con- Replace the elec-
TROL. specified position? Standard tact in ECM con- tronic throttle con-
Move the throttle valve to the fully open and fully value: 3 mm (0.12 in) from fully nector. trol. <Ref. to
closed positions with fingers. closed position FU(H4SO)-11,
Check that the valve returns to the specified Throttle Body.>
position when releasing fingers.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-291

DG:DTC P2102 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL MOTOR CIRCUIT LOW

MOTOR CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
• Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
BATTERY
CONTROL RELAY B362
8
5
6
7 MAIN RELAY
C21
C1
ECM
A: B134 C: B136 D: B137

E
A29
A19
A28
A18
D3
A5
D1
D4
D5
D2
D7
C6
*
*
B122
B21
37
36
34
35
52
20
39
38
17
18
19
E2
5
6
1

E57
E THROTTLE CONTROL
B362 B122 B21 E57 A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
1 2 5 6 7 8
4 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
5
7 8
6
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54 C: B136 D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-05044
EN(H4SO)(diag)-292

Step Check Yes No

Terminals
No. 8 — No. 7:
LAY. the harness
ground.
LAY. ness between
ground.
5 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Repair poor con- Repair the open
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL RE- tact in ECM con- circuit of harness
LAY. nector. between ECM and
(B136) No. 21 — (B362) No. 6:
(B136) No. 1 — (B362) No. 7:
EN(H4SO)(diag)-293

DH:DTC P2103 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL MOTOR CIRCUIT HIGH

MOTOR CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
BATTERY
CONTROL RELAY B362
8
5
6
7 MAIN RELAY
C21
C1
ECM
A: B134 C: B136 D: B137

E
A29
A19
A28
A18
D3
A5
D1
D4
D5
D2
D7
C6
*
*
B122
B21
37
36
34
35
52
20
39
38
17
18
19
E2
5
6
1

E57
E THROTTLE CONTROL
B362 B122 B21 E57 A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
1 2 5 6 7 8
4 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
5
7 8
6
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54 C: B136 D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-05044
EN(H4SO)(diag)-294

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CON- Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 2. Replace the elec-
TROL RELAY. more? tronic throttle con-
Terminals
No. 8 — No. 7:
2 CHECK SHORT CIRCUIT OF ELECTRONIC Is the voltage 10 V or more? Repair the short Go to step 3.
THROTTLE CONTROL RELAY POWER SUP- circuit to power in
PLY. the harness
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. between ECM and
2) Measure the voltage between electronic electronic throttle
throttle control relay connector and chassis control relay.
ground.
3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Repair poor con- Repair the ground
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL RE- more? tact in ECM con- short circuit of har-
LAY. nector. ness between
3) Measure the resistance between ECM and trol relay.
chassis ground.
DI: DTC P2109 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR “A” MINIMUM STOP

PERFORMANCE
NOTE:
EN(H4SO)(diag)-295

DJ:DTC P2122 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH “D” CIRCUIT

LOW INPUT
SOR/SWITCH “D” CIRCUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B315
ACCELERATOR 1 2 3 4 5 6
PEDAL POSITION
SENSOR B83
B122
4
B315
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
*
* 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
* B83
42 43 44 45 46 47
* 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B21
B23
B29
B22
B31
B30
C6
B122
A: B134
* ARRANGEMENT
A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
B: B135 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
ECM 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
C: B136 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
D: B137
B: B135
D2
D3
D1
D7
A5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
B21 C: B136
37
34
36
35
52
E2 1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
E 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-05051
EN(H4SO)(diag)-296

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND AC- Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 2. Repair the ground
CELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR. more? short of the har-
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ness between the
2) Disconnect the connector from the ECM ECM and accelera-
and accelerator pedal position sensor. tor pedal position
3) Measure the resistance between ECM and sensor connector.
chassis ground.
(B135) No. 23 — (B136) No. 6:
2 CHECK SHORT CIRCUIT INSIDE THE ECM. Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Replace the accel- Repair the ground
1) Connect the ECM. more? erator pedal. <Ref. short of the har-
2) Measure the resistance between accelera- to SP(H4SO)-3, ness between the
tor pedal position sensor connector and chassis Accelerator ECM and accelera-
ground. Pedal.> tor pedal position
(B315) No. 6 — Chassis ground: Replace the ECM if
defective. <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-35,
Engine Control
Module (ECM).>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-297

DK:DTC P2123 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH “D” CIRCUIT

HIGH INPUT
SOR/SWITCH “D” CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B315
PEDAL POSITION
SENSOR B83
B122
4
B315
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
*
* 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
* B83
42 43 44 45 46 47
* 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B21
B23
B29
B22
B31
B30
C6
B122
A: B134
* ARRANGEMENT
A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
B: B135 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
ECM 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
C: B136 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
D: B137
B: B135
D2
D3
D1
D7
A5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
B21 C: B136
37
34
36
35
52
E2 1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
E 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-05051
EN(H4SO)(diag)-298

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND AC- Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 2. Repair the open
CELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR. circuit of the har-
3) Measure the resistance of harness between sensor connector.
ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor
connector.
(B135) No. 23 — (B315) No. 6:
(B135) No. 29 — (B315) No. 5:
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND AC- Is the resistance less than 5 Ω? Go to step 3. Repair the harness
CELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR. and connector.
2) Measure the resistance between accelera- In this case, repair
tor pedal position sensor connector and chassis the following item:
ground. • Open circuit of
ground
• Poor contact in
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND AC- Is the voltage 4.85 V or more? Repair the short Go to step 4.
CELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR. circuit to power
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. source in the har-
2) Measure the voltage between accelerator ness between the
pedal position sensor connector and chassis ECM and accelera-
ground. tor pedal position
4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND AC- Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Repair the poor Repair the short
CELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR. more? contact of acceler- circuit to power
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ator pedal position source in the har-
2) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM. sensor connector. ness between the
3) Measure the resistance between ECM con- Replace the accel- ECM and accelera-
nectors. erator pedal if tor pedal position
Connector & terminal defective. <Ref. to sensor connector.
(B135) No. 21 — (B135) No. 23: SP(H4SO)-3,
Accelerator
Pedal.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-299

DL:DTC P2127 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH “E” CIRCUIT

LOW INPUT
SOR/SWITCH “E” CIRCUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B315
PEDAL POSITION
SENSOR B83
B122
4
B315
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
*
* 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
* B83
42 43 44 45 46 47
* 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B21
B23
B29
B22
B31
B30
C6
B122
A: B134
* ARRANGEMENT
A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
B: B135 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
ECM 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
C: B136 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
D: B137
B: B135
D2
D3
D1
D7
A5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
B21 C: B136
37
34
36
35
52
E2 1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
E 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-05051
EN(H4SO)(diag)-300

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND AC- Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 2. Repair the ground
CELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR. more? short of the har-
3) Measure the resistance between ECM and sensor connector.
chassis ground.
2 CHECK SHORT CIRCUIT INSIDE THE ECM. Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Replace the accel- Repair the ground
1) Connect the ECM. more? erator pedal. <Ref. short of the har-
2) Measure the resistance between accelera- to SP(H4SO)-3, ness between the
tor pedal position sensor connector and chassis Accelerator ECM and accelera-
ground. Pedal.> tor pedal position
(B315) No. 3 — Chassis ground: Replace the ECM if
defective. <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-35,
Engine Control
Module (ECM).>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-301

DM:DTC P2128 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH “E” CIRCUIT

HIGH INPUT
SOR/SWITCH “E” CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B315
PEDAL POSITION
SENSOR B83
B122
4
B315
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
*
* 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
* B83
42 43 44 45 46 47
* 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B21
B23
B29
B22
B31
B30
C6
B122
A: B134
* ARRANGEMENT
A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
B: B135 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
ECM 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
C: B136 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
D: B137
B: B135
D2
D3
D1
D7
A5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
B21 C: B136
37
34
36
35
52
E2 1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
E 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-05051
EN(H4SO)(diag)-302

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND AC- Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 2. Repair the open
CELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR. circuit of the har-
3) Measure the resistance of harness between sensor connector.
ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor
connector.
(B135) No. 31 — (B315) No. 3:
(B135) No. 30 — (B315) No. 2:
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND AC- Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 3. Repair the harness
CELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR. and connector.
2) Measure the resistance between accelera- In this case, repair
tor pedal position sensor connector and chassis the following item:
ground. • Open circuit of
ground
• Poor contact in
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND AC- Is the voltage 4.85 V or more? Repair the short Go to step 4.
CELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR. circuit to power
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. source in the har-
2) Measure the voltage between accelerator ness between the
pedal position sensor connector and chassis ECM and accelera-
ground. tor pedal position
4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND AC- Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Repair the poor Repair the short
CELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR. more? contact of acceler- circuit to power
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ator pedal position source in the har-
2) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM. sensor connector. ness between the
3) Measure the resistance between ECM con- Replace the accel- ECM and accelera-
nectors. erator pedal if tor pedal position
Connector & terminal defective. <Ref. to sensor connector.
(B135) No. 22 — (B135) No. 31: SP(H4SO)-3,
Accelerator
Pedal.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-303

DN:DTC P2135 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH “A”/“B”

VOLTAGE CORRELATION
SOR/SWITCH “A”/“B” VOLTAGE CORRELATION, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
BATTERY
CONTROL RELAY B362
8
5
6
7 MAIN RELAY
C21
C1
ECM
A: B134 C: B136 D: B137

E
A29
A19
A28
A18
D3
A5
D1
D4
D5
D2
D7
C6
*
*
B122
B21
37
36
34
35
52
20
39
38
17
18
19
E2
5
6
1

E57
E THROTTLE CONTROL
B362 B122 B21 E57 A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
1 2 5 6 7 8
4 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
5
7 8
6
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54 C: B136 D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-05044
EN(H4SO)(diag)-304

Step Check Yes No

chassis ground.
(B134) No. 18 — (B136) No. 6:
defective. <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-35,
Engine Control
Module (ECM).>
(B134) No. 18 — (E57) No. 6:
(B134) No. 28 — (E57) No. 4:
(B134) No. 29 — (E57) No. 3:
ECM and engine
ground
• Poor contact in
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
EN(H4SO)(diag)-305

Step Check Yes No

(B134) No. 19 — (B134) No. 18: <Ref. to
(B134) No. 19 — (B134) No. 28: FU(H4SO)-11,
Throttle Body.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-306

DO:DTC P2138 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH “D”/“E”

VOLTAGE CORRELATION
SOR/SWITCH “D”/“E” VOLTAGE CORRELATION, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B315
PEDAL POSITION
SENSOR B83
B122
4
B315
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
*
* 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
* B83
42 43 44 45 46 47
* 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B21
B23
B29
B22
B31
B30
C6
B122
A: B134
* ARRANGEMENT
A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
B: B135 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
ECM 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
C: B136 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
D: B137
B: B135
D2
D3
D1
D7
A5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
B21 C: B136
37
34
36
35
52
E2 1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
E 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-05051
EN(H4SO)(diag)-307

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Is the difference in measured Go to step 3. Go to step 2.
SENSOR OUTPUT. values for the main accelerator
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. pedal position sensor signal
2) Measure the voltage between ECM and and the sub accelrator pedal
chassis ground. position sensor signal 0 V?
Main accelerator pedal position sensor
signal
Sub accelerator pedal position sensor
signal
2 CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Is the difference in measured Replace the accel- Repair the harness
SENSOR OUTPUT. values for the main accelerator erator pedal. <Ref. and connector.
1) Measure the voltage between accelerator pedal position sensor signal to SP(H4SO)-3, NOTE:
pedal position sensor connector and chassis and the sub accelerator pedal Accelerator In this case, repair
ground. position sensor signal 0 V? Pedal.> the following item:
(B315) No. 6 (+) — Chassis ground (–): harness between
(B315) No. 3 (+) — Chassis ground (–): the ECM and ac-
celerator pedal po-
sition sensor
connector.
• Ground short cir-
cuit of harness be-
tween the ECM
and accelerator
pedal position sen-
sor connectors.
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND AC- Is the resistance less than 5 Ω? Repair poor con- Repair the harness
CELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR tact in ECM con- and connector.
CONNECTOR. nector. NOTE:
Check the resistance of harness between the In this case, repair
accelerator pedal position sensor connector the following item:
and chassis ground. • Open circuit of
(B315) No. 5 — Chassis ground: the ECM and ac-
(B315) No. 2 — Chassis ground: celerator pedal po-
sition sensor
connector.
• Open circuit of
harness between
ECM and engine
ground
• Poor contact in
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
EN(H4SO)(diag)-308

DP:DTC P2227 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-240, DTC P2227 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK FOR ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY. Is any other DTC displayed? Check DTC using Replace the ECM.
“List of Diagnostic <Ref. to
Trouble Code FU(H4SO)-35,
(DTC)”. <Ref. to Engine Control
EN(H4SO)(diag)- Module (ECM).>
80, List of Diagnos- NOTE:
tic Trouble Code The barometric
(DTC).> pressure sensor is
built into the ECM.
DQ:DTC P2228 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT LOW

CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
built into the ECM.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-309

DR:DTC P2229 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT HIGH

CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
built into the ECM.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-310
General Diagnostic Table

20.General Diagnostic Table

A: INSPECTION
1. ENGINE
NOTE:
Malfunction of parts other than those listed is also possible. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-89, Engine Trouble in Gen-
eral.>
Symptom Problem parts
1) Manifold absolute pressure sensor
2) Mass air flow and intake air temperature sensor
3) Ignition parts (*1)
1. Engine stalls during idling. 4) Engine coolant temperature sensor (*2)
5) Crankshaft position sensor (*3)
6) Camshaft position sensor (*3)
7) Fuel injection parts (*4)
3) Engine coolant temperature sensor (*2)
5) Air intake system (*5)
2. Rough idling
7) Electronic throttle control
10) Oxygen sensor
11) Fuel pump and fuel pump relay
12) EGR valve
1) Engine coolant temperature sensor
3. Engine does not return to idle. 3) Manifold absolute pressure sensor
5) EGR valve
4. Poor acceleration
9) A/C switch and A/C cut relay
10) Engine torque control signal circuit
12) EGR valve
5. Engine stalls, hesitates, or sputters at accelera- 5) Camshaft position sensor (*3)
tion. 6) Purge control solenoid valve
10) EGR valve
EN(H4SO)(diag)-311
General Diagnostic Table

Symptom Problem parts

6. Surging 5) Camshaft position sensor (*3)
9) EGR valve
3) Engine coolant temperature sensor
7. Spark knock 4) Knock sensor
7) EGR valve
8. After burning in exhaust system 3) Engine coolant temperature sensor (*2)
*1: Check ignition coil and ignitor assembly and spark plug.
*2: Indicate the symptom occurring only in cold temperatures.
*3: Ensure the secure installation.
*4: Check fuel injector, fuel pressure regulator and fuel filter.
*5: Inspect air leak in air intake system.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-312
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
GD(H4SO)
Page
1. List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) ......................................................2
2. Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria ....................................9

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1. List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)

A: LIST
DTC Item Index
P0026 Intake Valve Control Solenoid Cir- <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-9, DTC P0026 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID
cuit Range/Performance CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code
(Bank 1) (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
cuit Range/Performance (Bank 2) CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE (BANK 2), Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0030 HO2S Heater Control Circuit (Bank <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-11, DTC P0030 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT
1 Sensor 1) (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0031 HO2S Heater Control Circuit Low <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-13, DTC P0031 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT
(Bank 1 Sensor 1) LOW (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Crite-
ria.>
P0032 HO2S Heater Control Circuit High <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-15, DTC P0032 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT
(Bank 1 Sensor 1) HIGH (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Crite-
ria.>
P0037 HO2S Heater Control Circuit Low <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-17, DTC P0037 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT
(Bank 1 Sensor 2) LOW (BANK 1 SENSOR 2), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Crite-
ria.>
P0038 HO2S Heater Control Circuit High <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-19, DTC P0038 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT
(Bank 1 Sensor 2) HIGH (BANK 1 SENSOR 2), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Crite-
ria.>
P0068 MAP/MAF - Throttle Position Cor- <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-21, DTC P0068 MAP/MAF - THROTTLE POSITION
relation CORRELATION, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
cuit Low (Bank 1) CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Crite-
ria.>
cuit High (Bank 1) CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Crite-
ria.>
cuit Low (Bank 2) CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 2), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Crite-
ria.>
cuit High (Bank 2) CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 2), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Crite-
ria.>
P0101 Mass or Volume Air Flow Circuit <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-26, DTC P0101 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIR-
Range/Performance CUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting
Criteria.>
Low Input CUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
High Input CUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0107 Manifold Absolute Pressure/Baro- <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-33, DTC P0107 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE/
metric Pressure Circuit Low Input BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code
P0108 Manifold Absolute Pressure/Baro- <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-35, DTC P0108 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE/
metric Pressure Circuit High Input BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble
P0111 Intake Air Temperature Sensor 1 <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-37, DTC P0111 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Circuit Range/Performance 1 CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
Detecting Criteria.>
Circuit Low 1 CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
GD(H4SO)-2

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DTC Item Index

Circuit High 1 CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0117 Engine Coolant Temperature Cir- <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-43, DTC P0117 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
cuit Low CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0118 Engine Coolant Temperature Cir- <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-45, DTC P0118 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
cuit High CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0122 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/ <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-47, DTC P0122 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SEN-
Switch “A” Circuit Low SOR/SWITCH “A” CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting
Criteria.>
Switch “A” Circuit High SOR/SWITCH “A” CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detect-
ing Criteria.>
P0125 Insufficient Coolant Temperature <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-51, DTC P0125 INSUFFICIENT COOLANT TEMPERA-
for Closed Loop Fuel Control TURE FOR CLOSED LOOP FUEL CONTROL, Diagnostic Trouble Code
P0126 Insufficient Engine Coolant <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-53, DTC P0126 INSUFFICIENT ENGINE COOLANT
Temperature for Stable Operation TEMPERATURE FOR STABLE OPERATION, Diagnostic Trouble Code
P0128 Coolant Thermostat (Engine Cool- <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-55, DTC P0128 COOLANT THERMOSTAT (ENGINE
ant Temperature Below Thermo- COOLANT TEMPERATURE BELOW THERMOSTAT REGULATING TEM-
stat Regulating Temperature) PERATURE), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0131 O2 Sensor Circuit Low Voltage <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-57, DTC P0131 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE
(Bank 1 Sensor 1) (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0132 O2 Sensor Circuit High Voltage <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-59, DTC P0132 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE
P0133 O2 Sensor Circuit Slow Response <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-61, DTC P0133 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT SLOW
(Bank 1 Sensor 1) RESPONSE (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detect-
ing Criteria.>
P0134 O2 Sensor Circuit No Activity <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-64, DTC P0134 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT NO ACTIVITY
Detected (Bank 1 Sensor 1) DETECTED (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detect-
ing Criteria.>
P0137 O2 Sensor Circuit Low Voltage <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-66, DTC P0137 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE
P0138 O2 Sensor Circuit High Voltage <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-68, DTC P0138 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE
P0139 O2 Sensor Circuit Slow Response <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-69, DTC P0139 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT SLOW
(Bank 1 Sensor 2) RESPONSE (BANK 1 SENSOR 2), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detect-
ing Criteria.>
P0140 O2 Sensor Circuit No Activity <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-76, DTC P0140 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT NO ACTIVITY
Detected (Bank1 Sensor2) DETECTED (BANK 1 SENSOR 2), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detect-
ing Criteria.>
P0171 System Too Lean (Bank 1) <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-78, DTC P0171 SYSTEM TOO LEAN (BANK 1), Diag-
P0172 System Too Rich (Bank 1) <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-80, DTC P0172 SYSTEM TOO RICH (BANK 1), Diag-
P0181 Fuel Temperature Sensor “A” Cir- <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-82, DTC P0181 FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR “A”
cuit Range/Performance CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detect-
ing Criteria.>
cuit Low Input CIRCUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
cuit High Input CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0196 Engine Oil Temperature Sensor <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-89, DTC P0196 ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SEN-
Circuit Range/Performance SOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
GD(H4SO)-3

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DTC Item Index

Low SOR LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
High SOR HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
Switch “B” Circuit Low SOR/SWITCH “B” CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting
Criteria.>
Switch “B” Circuit High SOR/SWITCH “B” CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detect-
ing Criteria.>
P0301 Cylinder 1 Misfire Detected <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-97, DTC P0301 CYLINDER 1 MISFIRE DETECTED,
P0327 Knock Sensor 1 Circuit Low <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-103, DTC P0327 KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT LOW
(Bank 1 or Single Sensor) (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting
Criteria.>
P0328 Knock Sensor 1 Circuit High <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-105, DTC P0328 KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT HIGH
(Bank 1 or Single Sensor) (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting
Criteria.>
P0335 Crankshaft Position Sensor “A” <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-107, DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
Circuit “A” CIRCUIT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0336 Crankshaft Position Sensor “A” <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-109, DTC P0336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
Circuit Range/Performance “A” CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
P0340 Camshaft Position Sensor “A” <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-111, DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR “A”
Circuit (Bank 1 or Single Sensor) CIRCUIT (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
P0341 Camshaft Position Sensor “A” <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-113, DTC P0341 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR “A”
Circuit Range/Performance CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR), Diag-
(Bank 1 or Single Sensor) nostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0400 Exhaust Gas Recirculation Flow <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-115, DTC P0400 EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION
FLOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0420 Catalyst System Efficiency Below <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-119, DTC P0420 CATALYST SYSTEM EFFICIENCY
Threshold (Bank 1) BELOW THRESHOLD (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting
Criteria.>
P0442 Evaporative Emission Control <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-122, DTC P0442 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL
System Leak Detected (Small SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED (SMALL LEAK), Diagnostic Trouble Code
Leak) (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
System Vent Control Circuit Open SYSTEM VENT CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN, Diagnostic Trouble Code
System Vent Control Circuit SYSTEM VENT CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED, Diagnostic Trouble Code
Shorted (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
System Pressure Sensor SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting
Criteria.>
P0452 Evaporative Emission Control Sys- <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-143, DTC P0452 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL
tem Pressure Sensor Low Input SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code
GD(H4SO)-4

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DTC Item Index

tem Pressure Sensor High Input SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code
tem Leak Detected (Very Small SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED (VERY SMALL LEAK), Diagnostic Trouble
Leak) Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
tem Leak Detected SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED (FUEL CAP LOOSE/OFF), Diagnostic Trouble
(Fuel Cap Loose/Off) Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0458 Evaporative Emission System <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-147, DTC P0458 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
Purge Control Valve Circuit Low PURGE CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
P0459 Evaporative Emission System <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-149, DTC P0459 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
Purge Control Valve Circuit High PURGE CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
P0461 Fuel Level Sensor “A” Circuit <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-151, DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT
Range/Performance RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Crite-
ria.>
P0462 Fuel Level Sensor “A” Circuit Low <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-153, DTC P0462 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT
P0463 Fuel Level Sensor “A” Circuit High <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-155, DTC P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT
P0464 Fuel Level Sensor Circuit Intermit- <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-157, DTC P0464 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT
tent INTERMITTENT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0483 Fan Rationality Check <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-160, DTC P0483 FAN RATIONALITY CHECK, Diagnos-
P0500 Vehicle Speed Sensor “A” <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-161, DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR “A”, Diag-
P0506 Idle Air Control System RPM <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-163, DTC P0506 IDLE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM RPM
Lower Than Expected LOWER THAN EXPECTED, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Crite-
ria.>
P0507 Idle Air Control System RPM <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-165, DTC P0507 IDLE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM RPM
Higher Than Expected HIGHER THAN EXPECTED, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Cri-
teria.>
P0512 Starter Request Circuit <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-167, DTC P0512 STARTER REQUEST CIRCUIT, Diag-
P0513 Incorrect Immobilizer Key <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-168, DTC P0513 INCORRECT IMMOBILIZER KEY,
P0519 Idle Air Control System Perfor- <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-169, DTC P0519 IDLE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM PER-
mance FORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0600 Serial Communication Link <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-170, DTC P0600 SERIAL COMMUNICATION LINK,
P0604 Internal Control Module Random <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-171, DTC P0604 INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE
Access Memory (RAM) Error RANDOM ACCESS MEMORY (RAM) ERROR, Diagnostic Trouble Code
P0605 Internal Control Module Read Only <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-173, DTC P0605 INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE
Memory (ROM) Error READ ONLY MEMORY (ROM) ERROR, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
P0607 Control Module Performance <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-174, DTC P0607 CONTROL MODULE PERFOR-
MANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0638 Throttle Actuator Control Range/ <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-177, DTC P0638 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL
Performance (Bank 1) RANGE/PERFORMANCE (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
P0691 Fan 1 Control Circuit Low <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-180, DTC P0691 FAN 1 CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW,
GD(H4SO)-5

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DTC Item Index

P0692 Fan 1 Control Circuit High <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-181, DTC P0692 FAN 1 CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH,
P0700 Transmission Control System <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-182, DTC P0700 TRANSMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
(MIL Request) (MIL REQUEST), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0851 Park/Neutral Switch Input Circuit <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-183, DTC P0851 PARK/NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT
Low (AT Model) CIRCUIT LOW (AT MODEL), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Cri-
teria.>
P0851 Neutral Switch Input Circuit Low <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-184, DTC P0851 NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT
(MT Model) LOW (MT MODEL), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0852 Park/Neutral Switch Input Circuit <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-185, DTC P0852 PARK/NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT
High (AT Model) CIRCUIT HIGH (AT MODEL), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Cri-
teria.>
P0852 Neutral Switch Input Circuit High <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-186, DTC P0852 NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT
(MT Model) HIGH (MT MODEL), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P1152 O2 Sensor Circuit Range/Perfor- <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-187, DTC P1152 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PER-
mance (Low) FORMANCE (LOW) (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
(Bank1 Sensor1) Detecting Criteria.>
P1153 O2 Sensor Circuit Range/Perfor- <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-190, DTC P1153 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PER-
mance (High) FORMANCE (HIGH) (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
(Bank1 Sensor1) Detecting Criteria.>
P1160 Return Spring Failure <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-193, DTC P1160 RETURN SPRING FAILURE, Diag-
P1400 Fuel Tank Pressure Control Sole- <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-195, DTC P1400 FUEL TANK PRESSURE CONTROL
noid Valve Circuit Low SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detect-
ing Criteria.>
P1420 Fuel Tank Pressure Control Sol. <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-197, DTC P1420 FUEL TANK PRESSURE CONTROL
Valve Circuit High SOL. VALVE CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Cri-
teria.>
P1443 Vent Control Solenoid Valve Func- <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-199, DTC P1443 VENT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
tion Problem FUNCTION PROBLEM, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P1491 Positive Crankcase Ventilation <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-201, DTC P1491 POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILA-
(Blow-by) Function Problem TION (BLOW-BY) FUNCTION PROBLEM, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
P1492 EGR Solenoid Valve Signal #1 Cir- <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-203, DTC P1492 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #1
cuit Malfunction (Low Input) CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (LOW INPUT), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
cuit Malfunction (High Input) CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (HIGH INPUT), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
GD(H4SO)-6

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DTC Item Index

P1518 Starter Switch Circuit Low Input <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-208, DTC P1518 STARTER SWITCH CIRCUIT LOW
INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P1560 Back-up Voltage Circuit Malfunc- <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-209, DTC P1560 BACK-UP VOLTAGE CIRCUIT MAL-
tion FUNCTION, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P1570 Antenna <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-210, DTC P1570 ANTENNA, Diagnostic Trouble Code
P1571 Reference Code Incompatibility <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-210, DTC P1571 REFERENCE CODE INCOMPATIBIL-
ITY, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P1572 IMM Circuit Failure <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-210, DTC P1572 IMM CIRCUIT FAILURE (EXCEPT
(Except Antenna Circuit) ANTENNA CIRCUIT), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P1574 Key Communication Failure <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-210, DTC P1574 KEY COMMUNICATION FAILURE,
P1576 EGI Control Module EEPROM <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-210, DTC P1576 EGI CONTROL MODULE EEPROM,
P1577 IMM Control Module EEPROM <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-210, DTC P1577 IMM CONTROL MODULE EEPROM,
P1578 Meter Failure <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-210, DTC P1578 METER FAILURE, Diagnostic Trouble
P1602 Control Module Programming Error <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-211, DTC P1602 CONTROL MODULE PROGRAM-
MING ERROR, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P2096 Post Catalyst Fuel Trim System <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-216, DTC P2096 POST CATALYST FUEL TRIM SYS-
Too Lean Bank 1 TEM TOO LEAN BANK 1, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Crite-
ria.>
P2097 Post Catalyst Fuel Trim System <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-218, DTC P2097 POST CATALYST FUEL TRIM SYS-
Too Rich Bank 1 TEM TOO RICH BANK 1, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Crite-
ria.>
P2101 Throttle Actuator Control Motor Cir- <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-220, DTC P2101 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL
cuit Range/Performance MOTOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code
cuit Low MOTOR CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
cuit High MOTOR CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Crite-
ria.>
P2109 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor “A” <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-226, DTC P2109 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SEN-
Minimum Stop Performance SOR “A” MINIMUM STOP PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code
Switch “D” Circuit Low Input SOR/SWITCH “D” CIRCUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
Switch “D” Circuit High Input SOR/SWITCH “D” CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
Switch “E” Circuit Low Input SOR/SWITCH “E” CIRCUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
Switch “E” Circuit High Input SOR/SWITCH “E” CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
Switch “A”/“B” Voltage Correlation SOR/SWITCH “A”/“B” VOLTAGE CORRELATION, Diagnostic Trouble Code
GD(H4SO)-7

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DTC Item Index

Switch “D”/“E” Voltage Correlation SOR/SWITCH “D”/“E” VOLTAGE CORRELATION, Diagnostic Trouble Code
P2227 Barometric Pressure Circuit <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-240, DTC P2227 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT
Range/Performance RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Crite-
ria.>
P2228 Barometric Pressure Circuit Low <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-241, DTC P2228 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT
P2229 Barometric Pressure Circuit High <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-242, DTC P2229 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT
GD(H4SO)-8
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
2. Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

A: DTC P0026 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT RANGE/
PERFORMANCE (BANK 1)
1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detected as NG with either Low NG or High NG.
A variable valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch is installed for diagnosis. It is possible to determine whether
the intake valve is in high mode (increase the amount of lift) or in low mode (suppressing the amount of lift)
when the variable valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch is turned ON or OFF.
• Normal
Variable valve lift
Oil switching solenoid valve duty Intake valve diagnosis oil pressure
switch
Large High mode OFF
Minimum Low mode ON
• Low NG
When the variable valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch remains ON even though the intake valve tried to
enter high mode (oil switching solenoid valve duty is large), this is judged as a Low NG.
• High NG
When the variable valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch remains OFF even though the intake valve tried to
enter low mode (oil switching solenoid valve duty is small), this is judged as a High NG.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The variable valve lift system optimizes the intake valve lift by switching between the low lift cam and the high
lift cam according to the engine speed. The amount of intake valve lift is varied by controlling the oil switching
solenoid valve duty according to signals from the ECM.
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V
After engine starting ≥ 6 seconds
Engine oil temperature ≥ 15°C (59°F)
Variable valve lift control Operation
4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Perform the diagnosis continuously 6 seconds after engine start while variable valve lift is being controlled.
GD(H4SO)-9

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Low NG
Duty ratio ≥ 62%
Variable valve lift diagnosis oil pressure ON
switch
High NG
Duty ratio < 33%
Variable valve lift diagnosis oil pressure OFF
switch
Time Needed for Diagnosis:

Low side 0.784 seconds
High side 3.0 seconds
Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs.

Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the duration of time while the following criteria are met is 3 seconds or more.
Judgment Value
Low OK
Duty ratio ≥ 62%
Variable valve lift diagnosis oil pressure OFF
switch
High OK
Duty ratio < 33%
Variable valve lift diagnosis oil pressure ON
switch
6. DTC CLEAR CONDITION

• When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row
• When “Clear Memory” is performed
7. MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITIONS
• When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row
8. FAIL SAFE
None
9. ECM OPERATION AT DTC SETTING
Memorize the freeze frame data. (For test mode $02)
B: DTC P0028 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT RANGE/PER-
FORMANCE (BANK 2)
NOTE:
For diagnostic procedures, refer to DTC P0026. <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-9, DTC P0026 INTAKE VALVE CON-
TROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting
Criteria.>
GD(H4SO)-10

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
C: DTC P0030 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

Detect functional errors of the front oxygen (A/F) sensor heater.
Judge as NG when it is determined that the front oxygen (A/F) sensor impedance is large when looking at en-
gine status such as deceleration fuel cut.
(5)
(1) (2) (3) (4)
EN-01683
(1) Element cover (outer) (3) Sensor element (5) Sensor housing
(2) Element cover (inner) (4) Ceramic heater
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Continuous time where all of the follow- 42 seconds or more
ing conditions are met
Battery voltage > 10.9 V
After fuel cut 20 seconds or more
Heater current Operation
Front lambda sensor duty ≥ 35% Experienced

Perform the diagnosis continuously after 50 seconds or more have passed since the engine started.
Judge as NG if the duration of time while the following criteria are met is the time needed for diagnosis (10
seconds) or more. Judge as OK and clear NG when the continuous time of not completing the malfunction
criteria below becomes the time needed for diagnosis (10 seconds) or more.
Judgment Value
Front oxygen (A/F) sensor impedance > 50 Ω
Time Needed for Diagnosis: 10 seconds

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy-
cles.
GD(H4SO)-11

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

8. FAIL SAFE
• Front oxygen (A/F) sensor main learning compensation: Not allowed to calculate.
• Front oxygen (A/F) sensor sub learning compensation: Not allowed to calculate.
• Purge control: Not allowed to purge.
GD(H4SO)-12

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
D: DTC P0031 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

Detect the open or short circuit of heater.
The heater performs duty control, and the output terminal voltage at ON is 0 V and the output terminal voltage
at OFF is the battery voltage.
Judge as NG when the terminal voltage remains Low.
(A)
OFF
(B)
ON (D)
0V
(C)
EN-01792
(A) Battery voltage (C) 128 milliseconds (D) Low error

(B) Front oxygen (A/F) sensor heater
output voltage
3. ENABLE CONDITION

Always perform the diagnosis continuously.
GD(H4SO)-13

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judge as NG if the duration of time while the following criteria are met is 1 second (8 cycles) or more.
Judgment Value
Output voltage level Low
Front oxygen (A/F) sensor heater control < 87.5%
duty
Time Needed for Diagnosis: 1 second

Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are met.
Judgment Value
Output voltage level High

8. FAIL SAFE
• Front oxygen (A/F) sensor heater control: Not allowed to turn on the heater.
• A/F main learning: Not allowed to calculate the A/F main learning compensation factor.
• A/F sub learning: Not allowed to calculate the A/F sub learning compensation factor.
GD(H4SO)-14

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
E: DTC P0032 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

Detect the open or short circuit of heater.
The heater performs duty control, and the output terminal voltage at ON is 0 V and the output terminal voltage
at OFF is the battery voltage.
Judge as NG when the terminal voltage remains High.
(A)
(D) OFF
(B)
ON
0V
(C)
EN-01793
(A) Battery voltage (C) 128 milliseconds (D) High error

(B) Front oxygen (A/F) sensor heater
output voltage
3. ENABLE CONDITION

GD(H4SO)-15

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judge as NG if the duration of time while the following criteria are met is 1 second (8 cycles) or more.
Judgment Value
Output voltage level High
Front oxygen (A/F) sensor heater control ≥ 12.5%
duty

Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Output voltage level Low

8. FAIL SAFE
• Front oxygen (A/F) sensor heater control: Not allowed to turn on the heater.
GD(H4SO)-16

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Detect oxygen sensor heater open or short circuit.
The oxygen sensor heater performs duty control, and the output terminal voltage at ON is 0 V, and the output
terminal voltage at OFF is the battery voltage.
Judge as NG when the terminal voltage remains Low.
(A)
OFF
(B)
ON (D)
0V
(C)
EN-01792
(A) Battery voltage (C) 256 milliseconds (cycles) (D) Low error
(B) Output voltage of the rear oxygen
sensor heater
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Elapsed time after engine starting ≥ 1 second

Perform the diagnosis continuously after starting the engine.
GD(H4SO)-17

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judge as NG if the duration of time while the following criteria are met is 2560 milliseconds (10 cycles) or
more.
Judgment Value
Output voltage Low
Rear oxygen sensor heater control duty < 75%
Time Needed for Diagnosis: 2.56 seconds

cles.
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Output voltage High

8. FAIL SAFE
Sub feedback control: Not allowed
GD(H4SO)-18

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Detect oxygen sensor heater open or short circuit.
The oxygen sensor heater performs duty control, and the output terminal voltage at ON is 0 V, and the output
terminal voltage at OFF is the battery voltage.
Judge as NG when the terminal voltage remains High.
(A)
(D) OFF
(B)
ON
0V
(C)
EN-01793
(A) Battery voltage (C) 256 milliseconds (cycles) (D) High error
(B) Output voltage of the rear oxygen
sensor heater
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Elapsed time after engine starting ≥ 1 second

GD(H4SO)-19

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judge as NG if the duration of time while the following criteria are met is 2560 milliseconds (10 cycles) or
more.
Judgment Value
Output voltage High
Rear oxygen sensor heater control duty ≥ 20%

cles.
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Output voltage Low

8. FAIL SAFE
GD(H4SO)-20

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
H: DTC P0068 MAP/MAF - THROTTLE POSITION CORRELATION

Detect problems in the intake manifold pressure sensor output properties. Judge as NG when the intake air
pressure AD value is Low whereas it seemed to be High from the viewpoint of engine condition, or when it
is High whereas it seemed to be Low from the engine condition.
(1) (2)
(A)
(B)
(3)
EN-01765
(1) Connector (A) Output voltage

(2) Terminals (B) Absolute pressure
(3) O-ring
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Engine coolant temperature ≥ 75°C (167°F)

Perform the diagnosis continuously after idling.
GD(H4SO)-21

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judge as NG when either Low side or High side becomes NG.
Judge as NG if the continuous time while the following criteria are met exceeds the determined time.
Judgment Value
Low side
Engine speed < 2500 rpm
Throttle position ≥ 12°
Intake air amount every 0.5 engine revs. ≥ 0.55 g (0.019 oz)/rev
Output voltage < 1.4 V
High side
Engine speed 600 — 900 rpm
Throttle position ≤ 2.44°
Intake air amount every 0.5 engine revs. < 0.4 g (0.014 oz)/rev
Output voltage ≥ 3.4 V
Time Needed for Diagnosis: 3 seconds for low side, 7 seconds for high side
cles.
Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG when both Low side and High side become OK.
Judge as OK when the criteria below are met.
Judgment Value
Low side
Throttle position ≥ 12°
Intake air amount every 0.5 engine revs. ≥ 0.55 g (0.019 oz)/rev
High side
Throttle position ≤ 2.44°
Intake air amount every 0.5 engine revs. < 0.4 g (0.014 oz)/rev

8. FAIL SAFE
• Intake manifold pressure sensor process: Estimate the pressure from engine load.
• ISC feedback: Not allowed to calculate the amount of feedback.
GD(H4SO)-22

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
I: DTC P0076 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1)

Detect the open circuit of the oil switching solenoid valve.
Judge as NG when the current is small even though the output duty is large.
2. ENABLE CONDITION

Judge as NG when the continuous time of meeting the following conditions is 2 seconds or more.
Judgment Value
Duty ratio ≥ 30%
Control current < 0.026 A

Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG when the continuous time of meeting the following conditions is 2 seconds or
more.
Judgment Value
|Oil switching solenoid valve target cur- < 0.08 A
rent value – oil switching solenoid valve
current value|
Control current ≥ 0.11 A

7. FAIL SAFE
None
GD(H4SO)-23

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
J: DTC P0077 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 1)

Detect short circuits of the oil switching solenoid valve.
Judge as a short NG when the current is large even though the output duty is small.
2. ENABLE CONDITION

Judge as NG when the continuous time of meeting the following conditions is 2 seconds or more.
Judgment Value
Duty ratio < 7%
Control current ≥ 0.465 A

Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG when the continuous time of meeting the following conditions is 2 seconds or
more.
Judgment Value
|Oil switching solenoid valve target cur- < 0.08 A
rent value – oil switching solenoid valve
current value|

7. FAIL SAFE
None
GD(H4SO)-24

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
K: DTC P0082 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 2)

NOTE:
For the detection standard, refer to DTC P0076. <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-23, DTC P0076 INTAKE VALVE CON-
TROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
L: DTC P0083 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 2)
NOTE:
For the detection standard, refer to DTC P0077. <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-24, DTC P0077 INTAKE VALVE CON-
TROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
GD(H4SO)-25

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
M: DTC P0101 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE

Detect the malfunction of air flow sensor output properties.
Judge as a low side NG when the air flow voltage indicates a small value regardless of running in a state
where the air flow voltage increases. Judge as a high side NG when the air flow voltage indicates a large val-
ue regardless of running in a state where the air flow voltage decreases. Judge air flow sensor property NG
when the Low side or High side becomes NG.
(1)
(3)
(2)
(A)
(4)
EN-01766
(1) Air flow sensor (3) Voltage (V) (A) Air

(2) Intake air temperature sensor (4) Amount of intake air (kg/s)
3. ENABLE CONDITION

Perform the diagnosis continuously after idling.
GD(H4SO)-26

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
(Low side error)
Engine speed ≥ 2000 rpm
Throttle opening angle ≥ 13°
Intake manifold pressure ≥ 53.3 kPa (400
mmHg, 15.7 inHg)
High side error (1)
Throttle opening angle < 2.44°
Intake manifold pressure < 40.0 kPa (300
mmHg, 11.8 inHg)
High side error (2)
mmHg, 11.8 inHg)
Fuel system diagnosis Rich side malfunction

Low side 3 seconds
High side 10 seconds
cles.
Normality Judgment
Judge as OK if the criteria below are met.
Judgment Value
(Low side error)
Throttle opening angle ≥ 13°
Intake manifold pressure ≥ 53.3 kPa (400
mmHg, 15.7 inHg)
(High side error)
mmHg, 11.8 inHg)
GD(H4SO)-27

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

8. FAIL SAFE
None
GD(H4SO)-28

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
N: DTC P0102 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIRCUIT LOW INPUT

Detect open or short circuits of the air flow sensor.
Judge as NG if out of specification.
(1)
(3)
(2)
(A)
(4)
EN-01766

3. ENABLE CONDITION
None

Judge as NG when the continuous time of meeting the malfunction criteria below becomes 0.5 seconds or
more. Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are not met.
Judgment Value
Output voltage ≤ 0.2 V

GD(H4SO)-29

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
8. FAIL SAFE
None
GD(H4SO)-30

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
O: DTC P0103 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT

Detect open or short circuits of the air flow sensor.
(1)
(3)
(2)
(A)
(4)
EN-01766

3. ENABLE CONDITION
None

Judge as NG when the continuous time of completing the malfunction criteria below becomes 0.5 seconds
or more. Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are not met.
Judgment Value

GD(H4SO)-31

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
8. FAIL SAFE
None
GD(H4SO)-32

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
P: DTC P0107 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE/BAROMETRIC PRESSURE

CIRCUIT LOW INPUT
Detect the open or short circuit of intake manifold pressure sensor.
(1) (2)
(A)
(B)
(3)
EN-01765

(3) O-ring
3. ENABLE CONDITION
None

Judgment Value

GD(H4SO)-33

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
8. FAIL SAFE
ISC feedback: Not allowed to calculate the amount of feedback.
GD(H4SO)-34

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Q: DTC P0108 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE/BAROMETRIC PRESSURE

CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT
Detect the open or short circuit of intake manifold pressure sensor.
(1) (2)
(A)
(B)
(3)
EN-01765

(3) O-ring
3. ENABLE CONDITION
None

Judgment Value

GD(H4SO)-35

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
8. FAIL SAFE
ISC feedback: Not allowed to calculate the amount of feedback.
GD(H4SO)-36

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
R: DTC P0111 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT RANGE/

PERFORMANCE
Detect the malfunction of intake air temperature sensor output property.
Judge as NG when the intake air temperature is not varied whereas it seemed to be varied from the viewpoint
of engine condition.
(1) (3)
(2)
(A)
(4)
EN-01767
(1) Air flow sensor (3) Resistance value (Ω) (A) Air
(2) Intake air temperature sensor (4) Intake air temperature °C (°F)
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Coolant temp. before engine start < 30°C (86°F)
Engine coolant temperature > 100°C (212°F)
Continuous time when the vehicle speed 600 seconds or more
is less than 60 km/h (37 MPH)

Perform the diagnosis when the vehicle speed condition is met after warming up from a cold condition.
GD(H4SO)-37

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judge as NG when the continuous time of meeting the malfunction criteria below becomes 1 second or more.
Judgment Value
Output voltage difference between Max. < 20 mV (Equivalent to
and Min. approximately 0.5°C
(0.9°F) near 25°C)

cles.
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Output voltage difference between Max. ≥ 20 mV
and Min.

8. FAIL SAFE
Intake air temperature sensor process: Intake air temperature is fixed at 20°C (68°F).
GD(H4SO)-38

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
S: DTC P0112 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT LOW

Detect open or short circuit of the intake air temperature sensor.
(1) (3)
(2)
(A)
(4)
EN-01767
3. ENABLE CONDITION
None

GD(H4SO)-39

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
more.
Judgment Value
Ignition switch ON

Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Ignition switch ON

8. FAIL SAFE
GD(H4SO)-40

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
T: DTC P0113 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT HIGH

Detect open or short circuit of the intake air temperature sensor.
(1) (3)
(2)
(A)
(4)
EN-01767
3. ENABLE CONDITION
None

GD(H4SO)-41

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
more.
Judgment Value
Ignition switch ON

Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Ignition switch ON

8. FAIL SAFE
GD(H4SO)-42

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
U: DTC P0117 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE CIRCUIT LOW

Detect the open or short circuit of the engine coolant temperature sensor.
(1)
(A)
(B)
(2)
EN-02917
(1) Connector (A) Resistance value (kΩ)

(2) Thermistor element (B) Temperature °C (°F)
3. ENABLE CONDITION
None

Judgment Value

GD(H4SO)-43

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
8. FAIL SAFE
• Engine coolant temperature sensor process: Engine coolant temperature is fixed at 70°C (158°F)
• ISC Feedback: Calculate target engine speed as engine coolant temperature 70°C (158°F).
• ISC learning: Not allowed to learn.
• Air conditioner control: Not allowed to turn the air conditioner to ON.
• Radiator fan control: Both main and sub fan turn to ON.
GD(H4SO)-44

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
V: DTC P0118 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE CIRCUIT HIGH

Detect the open or short circuit of the engine coolant temperature sensor.
(1)
(A)
(B)
(2)
EN-02917

3. ENABLE CONDITION
None

Judgment Value

GD(H4SO)-45

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
8. FAIL SAFE
GD(H4SO)-46

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
W: DTC P0122 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH “A” CIRCUIT

LOW
Detect the open or short circuit of throttle position sensor 1.
(3)
(4)
(1)
(2)
EN-01859
(1) Throttle position sensor 1 signal (3) Throttle position sensor (4) Engine control module (ECM)
(2) Throttle position sensor 2 signal
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Ignition switch ON

Judgment Value
Sensor 1 input voltage ≥ 0.224 V
Time Needed for Diagnosis: 24 milliseconds

• When “Clear Memory” is performed (Only with engine stopped)
GD(H4SO)-47

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
8. FAIL SAFE
Stop the continuity to the electronic throttle control motor. (Throttle opening is fixed to 6°.)
GD(H4SO)-48

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
X: DTC P0123 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH “A” CIRCUIT

HIGH
(3)
(4)
(1)
(2)
EN-01859
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Ignition switch ON

Judgment Value
Sensor 1 input voltage ≤ 4.851 V

GD(H4SO)-49

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
8. FAIL SAFE
GD(H4SO)-50

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Y: DTC P0125 INSUFFICIENT COOLANT TEMPERATURE FOR CLOSED LOOP

FUEL CONTROL
Detect the malfunction of engine coolant temperature output property.
Judge as NG when the engine coolant temperature does not rise in driving conditions where it should.
(1)
(A)
(B)
(2)
EN-02917

3. ENABLE CONDITION

Perform the diagnosis only once after engine start.
GD(H4SO)-51

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judge as NG if the criteria below are met.
Judgment Value
Engine coolant temperature < 20°C (68°F)
Timer for diagnosis after engine start ≥ Judgment value of
timer after engine start
Timer for diagnosis after engine start

a. Timer stop at fuel cut
b. During the driving conditions except a) above, timer counts up as follows.
64 milliseconds + TWCNT milliseconds (the time of at 64 milliseconds)
TWCNT is defined as follows,
TWCNT = 0 at idle switch ON,
TWCNT show on the following table at idle switch OFF.
0 (0) 8 (4.97) 16 (9.94) 24 (14.9) 32 (19.9) 40 (24.9) 48 (29.8) 56 (34.8)
–20 (–4) 0 ms 32.076 ms 39.977 ms 47.879 ms 82.544 ms 117.209 ms 154.214 ms 185.260 ms
Temperature –10 (14) 0 ms 25.704 ms 33.606 ms 41.508 ms 68.520 ms 95.532 ms 125.667 ms 155.802 ms
°C (°F) 0 (32) 0 ms 17.646 ms 25.548 ms 33.450 ms 53.652 ms 73.855 ms 97.120 ms 120.386 ms
10 (50) 0 ms 7.901 ms 15.802 ms 23.704 ms 37.941 ms 52.177 ms 68.573 ms 82.538 ms
Judgment value of timer after engine starting

t = 574 – 33 × Ti (seconds)
Ti : The lowest coolant temperature after engine start
Time Needed for Diagnosis: To be determined. (It is varied by the Min. engine coolant temperature and en-
gine conditions such as vehicle speed and engine coolant temperature.)
cles.
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value

8. FAIL SAFE
GD(H4SO)-52

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Z: DTC P0126 INSUFFICIENT ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE FOR

STABLE OPERATION
Detect the malfunction of the engine coolant temperature sensor characteristics.
Memorize the engine coolant temperature and fuel temperature at the last engine stop, and use them to
judge as NG when the engine coolant temperature does not decrease when it should.
(1)
(A)
(B)
(2)
EN-02917

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Refueling from the last engine stop till None
the current engine start
Fuel level ≥ 15 2
Engine coolant temperature at the last ≥ 75°C (167°F)
engine stop and
< 100°C (212°F)

Perform the diagnosis only once after starting the engine.
GD(H4SO)-53

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judge as NG if the continuous time of meeting the following conditions is 2.5 seconds or more.
Judgment Value
Engine coolant temperature at the last < 2.5°C (4.5°F)
engine stop – Minimum engine coolant
temperature after the engine start
Fuel temperature at the last engine stop > 5°C (9°F)
– Fuel temperature
Intake air temperature – Fuel tempera- < 2.5°C (4.5°F)
ture
Fuel temperature < 35°C (54°F)
Normality Judgment
When the following conditions are established, judged as OK.
Judgment Value
Engine coolant temperature at the last ≥ 2.5°C (4.5°F)
engine stop – Minimum engine coolant
temperature after the engine start

cles.
8. FAIL SAFE
None
GD(H4SO)-54

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
AA:DTC P0128 COOLANT THERMOSTAT (ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE

Detect malfunctions of the thermostat function.
Judge as NG when the engine coolant temperature is lower than the estimated engine coolant temperature
and the difference between them is large. Judge as OK when the engine coolant temperature becomes to
70°C (158°F), and the difference is small, before judging NG.
(8) (2)
(2)
(7)
(6) (5)
(4) (1)
(9)
(3)
EN-01692
(1) Valve (4) Piston (7) Stop ring

(2) Spring (5) Guide (8) Wax element
(3) Stopper (6) Rubber seal (9) Jiggle valve
3. ENABLE CONDITION
None

GD(H4SO)-55

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Engine coolant temperature at engine < 55°C (131°F)
starting
(Estimated – measured) Engine coolant > 30°C (54°F)
temperature
Vehicle speed ≥ 30 km/h (18.6 MPH)
Estimated coolant temperature ≥ 75°C (167°F)
Estimate ambient temperature ≥ –7°C (19°F)
Time Needed for Diagnosis: Not fixed

cles.
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Engine coolant temperature at engine < 55°C (131°F)
starting
(Estimated – measured) Engine coolant ≤ 30°C (54°F)
temperature

8. FAIL SAFE
None
GD(H4SO)-56

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
AB:DTC P0131 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

Detect the open or short circuit of sensor.
Judge as NG when the element impressed voltage is out of range, or the element current is out of range.
(3)
(1)
(A)
(2) (2)
(C) (B) (D)
(4)
EN-01693
(1) Atmosphere (A) Electromotive force

(2) Exhaust gas (B) Air fuel ratio
(3) ZrO2 (C) Lean
(4) Ceramic heater (D) Rich
3. ENABLE CONDITION

Judge as NG when the continuous time of meeting any malfunction criteria below is 1 second or more.
Judgment Value
Input voltage < 1.8 V
Input current < –0.005 A

GD(H4SO)-57

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
8. FAIL SAFE
• Front oxygen (A/F) sensor heater control: Not allowed to turn on heater.
GD(H4SO)-58

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
AC:DTC P0132 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

Detect the open or short circuit of sensor.
Judge as NG when the element applied voltage is out of range, or the element current is out of range.
(3)
(1)
(A)
(2) (2)
(C) (B) (D)
(4)
EN-01693

(3) ZrO2 (C) Lean
3. ENABLE CONDITION

Judge as NG when the continuous time of meeting any malfunction criteria below is 1 second or more.
Judgment Value
Input voltage ≥ 3.8 V
Input current ≥ 0.005 A

GD(H4SO)-59

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
8. FAIL SAFE
GD(H4SO)-60

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
AD:DTC P0133 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT SLOW RESPONSE (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

Detect the slow response of front oxygen (A/F) sensor.
Front oxygen (A/F) sensor cover has some ventilation holes for exhaust gas. Clogged ventilation holes are
diagnosed.
When the holes are clogged, the A/F output variation becomes slow comparing with the actual A/F variation
because oxygen which reaches the zirconia layer is insufficient. Therefore, if the sensor cover holes are
clogged, the rich to lean judgment in the ECM is delayed when the actual change from rich to lean occurs.
Judge as NG when the actual movement in comparison to the ECM control amount is slow.
(2) (3)
(1)
EN-01694
(1) Cover (2) Zirconia (3) Clogging
(3)
(1)
(A)
(2) (2)
(C) (B) (D)
(4)
EN-01693

(3) ZrO2 (C) Lean
GD(H4SO)-61

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
3. ENABLE CONDITION
All secondary parameters enable condi- 1 second or more
tions
Barometric pressure > 75.1 kPa (563
mmHg, 22.2 inHg)
Closed loop control with main feedback Operation
Front oxygen (A/F) sensor impedance 0 — 50 Ω
After engine starting 120 seconds or more
Vehicle speed 10 — 120 km/h
(6.21 — 74.6 MPH)
Amount of intake air 10 — 40 g
(0.35 — 1.41 oz)/s
Engine load change during 0.5 engine ≤ 0.02 g (0.001 oz)/rev
revs.
Learning value of EVAP conc. during ≤ 0.2
purge
Total time of operating canister purge 20 seconds or more

Perform diagnosis only once at a constant speed of 10 to 120 km/h (6.21 to 74.6 MPH) 120 seconds or more
after starting the engine.
Calculate faf difference every 128 milliseconds, and the λvalue difference. Calculate the diagnostic value af-
ter calculating for 210 seconds.
Judge as NG if the criteria below are met. Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below
are not met.
Judgment Value
parafca = td2faf/td2lmd ≥ 0.44 (except for U5 model)
where, ≥ 0.3 (U5 model)
td2faf (N) = td2faf (n–1) + |d2faf (n)|
td2lmd (N) = td2lmd (n–1) + |d2lmd (n)|
add up to a total of 210 seconds
d2faf (n) = (faf (n) – faf (n–1)) – (faf (n–1)
– faf (n–2))
d2lmd (n) = (lmd (n) – lmd (n–1)) – (lmd
(n–1) – lmd (n–2))
faf = main feedback compensation coef-
ficient every 128 milliseconds
lmd = output lambda every 128 millisec-
onds

cles.
GD(H4SO)-62

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

8. FAIL SAFE
• A/F sensor sub learning compensation: Not allowed to calculate.
• Memorize the freeze frame data. (For test mode $02)
• Memorize the diagnostic value and trouble standard value. (For test mode $06)
GD(H4SO)-63

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
AE:DTC P0134 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT NO ACTIVITY DETECTED

(BANK 1 SENSOR 1)
Detect open circuits of the sensor.
Judge as NG when the impedance of the element is large.
(3)
(1)
(A)
(2) (2)
(C) (B) (D)
(4)
EN-01693

(3) ZrO2 (C) Lean
3. ENABLE CONDITION
None

Judge as NG when the continuous time of completing the malfunction criteria below becomes 5 seconds or
more.
Judgment Value
Time of heater duty ≥ 70% ≥ 36 seconds
Front oxygen (A/F) sensor impedance. ≥ 500 Ω

GD(H4SO)-64

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

8. FAIL SAFE
GD(H4SO)-65

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
AF:DTC P0137 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE (BANK 1 SENSOR 2)

Detect continuity NG of the oxygen sensor. If the oxygen sensor voltage reading is not within the probable
range considering the operating conditions, judge as NG.
(E)
(3)
V (1)
(A) (F)
(2) (2)
(C) (B) (D)
EN-01696
(A) Electromotive force (C) Rich (E) Theoretical air fuel ratio
(B) Air fuel ratio (D) Lean (F) Comparative voltage
(1) Atmosphere (2) Exhaust gas (3) Electromotive force
GD(H4SO)-66

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Used for Abnormality Judgment
High side
Closed loop control at the oxygen sensor In operation
Misfire detection every 200 rotations < 5 times
Front oxygen (A/F) sensor compensation Not in limit value
coefficient
Low side 1
coefficient
Amount of intake air ≥ 10 g/second
Low side 2
coefficient
Amount of intake air < 10 g/second
Current continuation time of the rear oxy- 30 seconds or more
gen sensor heater
Low side 3
coefficient
Amount of intake air < 10 g/second
Current continuation time of the rear oxy- 30 seconds or more
gen sensor heater
Fuel cut Experienced
Used for normality judgment

coefficient

After starting the engine, continuously perform the diagnosis with the same engine condition.
GD(H4SO)-67

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judge as NG if the continuous time during which the following conditions are established exceeds the pre-
determined time, and judge as OK if it does not.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value DTC
High side P0138
Maximum output voltage without continu- ≥ 1200 mV
ity
Low side P0137
Minimum output voltage without continu- < 30 mV
ity
Time Needed for Diagnosis

High side: 2.5 seconds
Low side 1: 20 seconds
Low side 2: 40 seconds
Low side 3: Value from Map
Map
Time needed for diag-
Fuel Cut Time (Second)
nosis (second)
0 40
2 40
10 60
cles.
8. FAIL SAFE
AG:DTC P0138 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE (BANK 1 SENSOR 2)
NOTE:
For the detection standard, refer to DTC P0137. <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-66, DTC P0137 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT
LOW VOLTAGE (BANK 1 SENSOR 2), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
GD(H4SO)-68

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
AH:DTC P0139 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT SLOW RESPONSE (BANK 1 SENSOR 2)

Detect the slow response of the oxygen sensor.
Judge as NG if either the rich to lean response diagnosis or lean to rich response diagnosis is NG, and Judge
as OK if both are OK.
[Rich → lean diagnosis response]
1. Measure the response time for oxygen sensor output changes when the A/F ratio changes to rich to lean.
If the measured response time is larger than the threshold value, it is NG. If it is smaller, it is OK.
2. Judge as NG when the oxygen sensor voltage is large (rich) when recovering from a deceleration fuel cut.
[Lean → rich diagnosis response]
1. Measure the response time for oxygen sensor output changes when the A/F ratio changes to lean to rich.
If the measured response time is larger than the threshold value, it is NG.
2. Judge as NG when the oxygen sensor voltage remains small when recovering from a deceleration fuel
cut.
DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
Measure the response time of the output change of the oxygen sensor when the A/F ratio changes to rich to
lean. And Judge as NG when the measured response time is larger than the threshold value.
(E)
(3)
V (1)
(A) (F)
(2) (2)
(C) (B) (D)
EN-01696
(1) Atmosphere (A) Electromotive force (D) Lean

(2) Exhaust gas (B) Air fuel ratio (E) Theoretical air fuel ratio
(3) Electromotive force (C) Rich (F) Comparative voltage
GD(H4SO)-69

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Rich → lean diagnosis response
A/F sub feedback control condition Completed
Deceleration fuel cut time is 6 seconds Experienced
or more.
After fuel cut ≥ 2 seconds
Rear oxygen heater current calculation ≥ 60 seconds
time
Rear oxygen heater current continuous ≥ 30 seconds
time
Catalyst warm up counter (except for U5 ≥ 9000
model)
Estimated catalyst temperature (U5 ≥ 400°C (752°F)
model)
Deceleration fuel cut count (U5 model) ≥ 1 time

Perform the diagnosis only once when deceleration fuel cut occurs after rapid acceleration. (Pay attention to
the oxygen sensor voltage for the timing of the deceleration.)
GD(H4SO)-70

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
When the oxygen sensor output voltage changes from 0.55 V (rich) to 0.15 V (lean), calculate the minimum
response time for output change between 0.5 V and 0.2 V for the judgment criteria.
Diagnosis execution condition
0.55V
0.5V
Measure the response time.

Rear oxygen sensor (V)
0.2V
0.15V
0V
Fuel cut on deceleration

More than 6 seconds
Execute the malfunction judgment

in 2 seconds from the recovery of
fuel cut on deceleration.
EN-05374
1. Judge as NG when the judgment value is larger than the threshold value after deceleration fuel cut.
Response time (diagnosis value) > threshold value → abnormal
NOTE:
Variation time of rear oxygen sensor output voltage is short during fuel cut in deceleration. NG judgment
should be performed after deceleration fuel cut. Even without deceleration fuel cut, judge as OK if the value
is below the threshold.
When the deceleration fuel cut time is 6 seconds or more, judge as NG if the following criteria are met 2 sec-
onds after recovering from the deceleration fuel cut.
GD(H4SO)-71

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
2. Judge as NG when the oxygen sensor voltage at recovery from a deceleration fuel cut, is large.
If the fuel cut time in a deceleration fuel cut is long (6 s or more), and even after recovering from a deceler-
ation fuel cut, the oxygen sensor voltage is high (0.55 V or more), judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Shortest time change from rich (500 mV > 491 milliseconds
O2 output) to lean (200 mV) when volt-
age reduces from 550 mV to 150 mV
Time at 550 mV or more > 2 seconds
Time Needed for Diagnosis: 1 time

cles.
Normality Judgment
1. Regardless of a deceleration fuel cut, if the response time (diagnosis value) when the oxygen sensor volt-
age has changed from rich to lean is shorter than the threshold value (judgment value), judge as a normal
condition.
Response time (diagnosis value) ≤ threshold value → normal
2. Do not judge as a normal condition.
Judgment Value
Shortest time change from rich (500 mV ≤ 491 milliseconds
O2 output) to lean (200 mV) when volt-
age reduces from 550 mV to 150 mV

8. FAIL SAFE
GD(H4SO)-72

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
10.ENABLE CONDITION
Lean → rich response diagnosis
A/F main feedback control condition Completed
Deceleration fuel cut ≥ 6 seconds Experienced
After fuel cut ≥ 2 seconds
Current calculation time of the rear oxy- 0 seconds
gen sensor heater (except for U5 model)
Current calculation time of the rear oxy- 60 seconds
gen sensor heater (U5 model)
Current continuation time of the rear oxy- 0 seconds
gen sensor heater (except for U5 model)
Current continuation time of the rear oxy- 30 seconds
gen sensor heater (U5 model)
11.GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Perform the diagnosis only once when deceleration fuel cut occurs after rapid acceleration. (Pay attention to
the oxygen sensor voltage for the timing of the deceleration.)
GD(H4SO)-73

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
12.DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
Calculate the minimum value of 0.3 V to 0.5 V output change response time as judgment value, when the ox-
ygen sensor output voltage changes from 0.25 V (lean) to 0.55 V (rich).
Diagnosis execution
condition
Measure the response time

(diagnostic value).
0.55V
0.5V
Rear O 2 sensor (V)
0.3V
0.25V
0V
Judge NG when the voltage of

rear oxgen sensor is 0.25 V or
less for 120 seconds or more
after recovery of fuel cut on
deceleration.
Fuel cut on deceleration >= 120s

>= 6s
Execute the malfunction judgement in 2 seconds

from recovery of fuel cut on deceleration.
EN-02210
GD(H4SO)-74

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1. Judge as NG when the judgment value is larger than the threshold value after deceleration fuel cut.
Response time (diagnosis value) > threshold value → abnormal
2. If the oxygen sensor voltage is small after recovering from a deceleration fuel cut, and remains small,
judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Shortest time change from lean (300 mV > 2 seconds
O2 output) to rich (500 mV) when voltage
changes from 250 mV to 500 mV
Time at less than 250 mv > 120 seconds

cles.
Normality Judgment
1. Regardless of a deceleration fuel cut, if the response time (diagnosis value) when the oxygen sensor volt-
age has changed from rich to lean is shorter than the threshold value (judgment value), judge as a normal
condition.
Response time (diagnosis value) ≤ threshold value → normal
2. Do not judge as a normal condition.
Judgment Value
Shortest time change from lean (300 mV ≤ 2 seconds
O2 output) to rich (500 mV) when voltage
changes from 250 mV to 500 mV
13.DTC CLEAR CONDITION

14.MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITIONS
15.FAIL SAFE
16.ECM OPERATION AT DTC SETTING
GD(H4SO)-75

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
AI: DTC P0140 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT NO ACTIVITY DETECTED (BANK 1 SENSOR 2)

Detect abnormalities in the rear oxygen sensor output characteristics.
By referring to the intake air amount, engine coolant temperature, main feedback control, deceleration fuel
cut and other operating conditions, if the rear oxygen sensor voltage should be moving under these condi-
tions but is showing a low voltage, this is judged as a Low side NG. If the voltage is showing a high voltage,
it is judged as a High side NG.
When either Low side or High side is NG, judged as rear oxygen sensor property NG.
2. ENABLE CONDITION
Target output voltage of rear oxygen sen- ≥ 0.6 V
sor
Air intake amount 10 g (0.35 oz)/seconds
or more
Closed loop at the oxygen sensor In operation
Misfire detection every 200 rotations 5 times or less
coefficient
Deceleration fuel cut of 6 seconds or Experienced
more.

Perform the diagnosis only once after engine warm-up.
If one of the following conditions are met, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Maximum output voltage < 0.55 V
Minimum output voltage > 0.15 V

cles.
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Maximum output voltage ≥ 0.55 V
Minimum output voltage ≤ 0.15 V

GD(H4SO)-76

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

7. FAIL SAFE
GD(H4SO)-77

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
AJ:DTC P0171 SYSTEM TOO LEAN (BANK 1)

Detect fuel system malfunction by the amount of main feedback control.
DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
Fuel system is diagnosed by comparing the target air fuel ratio calculated by ECM with the actual air fuel ratio
measured by sensor.
2. ENABLE CONDITION
• Lean side
A/F main learning system In operation
Amount of intake air ≥ Value from Map 5
Intake air change during 0.5 engine revs. ≤ 0.02 g (0.001 oz)/rev
Map 5
Engine speed (rpm) Idling 650 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500
Measured value 0.203 0.183 0.155 0.149 0.157 0.162 0.18 0.193 0.205
Non-turbo
(g(oz)/rev) (0.0072) (0.0065) (0.0055) (0.0053) (0.0055) (0.0057) (0.0063) (0.0068) (0.0072)

Perform the diagnosis continuously at idling or at a constant speed after warming up the engine.
Compare the diagnosed value (fsobd) with the threshold value, and if a condition meeting the malfunction cri-
teria below continues for 50 seconds or more, judge that there is a fault in the fuel system.
Judgment Value
fsobd = (sglmd – tglmda) + faf + flaf ≥ fsobdL1
where, See Map 4
sglmd = measured lambda
tglmda = target lambda fsobdL1 = lean side
threshold value of
fsobd
flaf = main feedback learning compensa-
tion coefficient
Map 4 Threshold value for fuel system malfunction criteria

3.2 6.4 9.6 12.8 16 19.2
Amount of air (g (oz)/s) 0 (0)
(0.113) (0.226) (0.339) (0.451) (0.564) (0.677)
fsobdL1 (%) 40 40 33.2 26.5 26.5 26.5 26.5
Time Needed for Diagnosis: 10 seconds × 5 times

cles.
GD(H4SO)-78

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Normality Judgment
Judge as OK when the malfunction criteria below are met for 10 seconds or more.
Judgment Value
fsobd = (sglmd – tglmda) + faf + flaf < 20%

• When similar driving conditions are repeated 3 times and the result is OK.
7. FAIL SAFE
None
GD(H4SO)-79

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
AK:DTC P0172 SYSTEM TOO RICH (BANK 1)

Detect fuel system malfunction by the amount of main feedback control.
DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
Fuel system is diagnosed by comparing the target air fuel ratio calculated by ECM with the actual air fuel ratio
measured by sensor.
2. ENABLE CONDITION
A/F main learning system In operation
Amount of intake air ≥ Value from Map 5
Intake air change during 0.5 engine revs. ≤ 0.02 g (0.001 oz)/rev
Learning value of EVAP conc. during < 0.15
purge
Cumulative time of canister purge after 20 seconds or more
engine start
Continuous period after canister purge 30 seconds or more
starting
Map 5
Engine speed (rpm) Idling 650 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500
Measured value 0.203 0.183 0.155 0.149 0.157 0.162 0.18 0.193 0.205
Non-turbo
(g(oz)/rev) (0.0072) (0.0065) (0.0055) (0.0053) (0.0055) (0.0057) (0.0063) (0.0068) (0.0072)

Perform the diagnosis continuously at idling or at a constant speed after warming up the engine.
Compare the diagnosed value (fsobd) with the threshold value, and if a condition where the malfunction cri-
teria are met continues for 50 seconds or more, judge that there is a fault in the fuel system.
Judgment Value
fsobd = (sglmd – tglmda) + faf + flaf ≤ fsobdR1
where, See Map 4
sglmd = measured lambda fsobdR1 = rich side
threshold value of
fsobd
tglmda = target lambda
flaf = main feedback learning compensa-
tion coefficient
Map 4 Threshold value for fuel system malfunction criteria

3.2 6.4 9.6 12.8 16 19.2
Amount of air (g(oz)/s) 0 (0)
(0.113) (0.226) (0.339) (0.451) (0.564) (0.677)
fsobdR1 (%) –40 –40 –33.2 –26.5 –26.5 –26.5 –26.5
GD(H4SO)-80

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

cles.
Normality Judgment
Judge as OK when the malfunction criteria below continues for 10 seconds.
Judgment Value
fsobd = (sglmd – tglmda) + faf + flaf ≥ –20%

7. FAIL SAFE
Purge control solenoid valve control: Not allowed to purge.
GD(H4SO)-81

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
AL:DTC P0181 FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFOR-

MANCE
Detect faults in the fuel temperature sensor output properties.
Diagnosis is performed in two methods (drift diagnosis and stuck diagnosis). If either is NG, judge as NG. If
both are OK, Judge as OK and clear the NG.
Drift Diagnosis
Normally fuel temperature is lower than engine coolant temperature. When the fuel temperature becomes
higher than the engine coolant temperature, the range is considered to be shifted, and judged as NG.
(A)
(B)
EN-01700
(A) Resistance value (Ω) (B) Fuel temperature °C (°F)
3. ENABLE CONDITION
None

GD(H4SO)-82

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judge as NG when the continuous time of meeting the malfunction criteria below becomes 120 seconds or
more.
Judgment Value
Fuel level ≥ 9.6 2 (2.54 US gal,
2.11 Imp gal)
Engine coolant temperature – Engine > 10°C (18°F)
coolant temperature at engine start
Fuel temperature – Engine coolant tem- ≥ 10°C (18°F)
perature

cles.
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
2.11 Imp gal)
Engine coolant temperature – Engine > 10°C (18°F)
coolant temperature at engine start
Fuel temperature – Engine coolant tem- < 10°C (18°F)
perature
Stuck Diagnosis
As the engine warms up (cumulative amount of intake air after starting is large), if the fuel temperature which
should rise does not, determine as being stuck and NG.
6. ENABLE CONDITION

Always perform diagnosis after 20 seconds have passed since the engine started.
GD(H4SO)-83

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Accumulated amount of intake air ≥ 551 kg (1215 lb)
Fuel temperature difference between < 2°C (3.6°F)
Max. and Min.
Time Needed for Diagnosis: Undetermined

cles.
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Accumulated amount of intake air ≥ 551 kg (1215 lb)
Fuel temperature difference between ≥ 2°C (3.6°F)
Max. and Min.

11.FAIL SAFE
None
GD(H4SO)-84

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
AM:DTC P0182 FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT LOW INPUT

Detect the open or short circuit of fuel temperature sensor.
(A)
(B)
EN-01700
3. ENABLE CONDITION
None

more.
Judgment Value

Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
GD(H4SO)-85

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

8. FAIL SAFE
None
GD(H4SO)-86

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
AN:DTC P0183 FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT

Detect the open or short circuit of fuel temperature sensor.
(A)
(B)
EN-01700
3. ENABLE CONDITION
None

more.
Judgment Value

Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
GD(H4SO)-87

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

8. FAIL SAFE
None
GD(H4SO)-88

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
AO:DTC P0196 ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/

PERFORMANCE
Detect for abnormal values in the oil temperature sensor output properties.
Judge as NG when the oil temperature does not rise even though the engine is running under a condition
where it should rise.
2. ENABLE CONDITION

If the following conditions are met, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Engine oil temperature < 15°C (59°F)
After engine start oil temperature sensor ≥ Judgment value for after engine
characteristic diagnosis timer. start oil temperature sensor char-
acteristic diagnosis timer
After engine start oil temperature sensor characteristic diagnosis timer (timer for diagnosis).
a. Timer stop at fuel cut
b. During the driving conditions except a) above, timer counts up as follows.
64 milliseconds + TOILCNT milliseconds (at the time of 64 milliseconds).
Where, TOILCNT is determined as follows,
TOILCNT = 0 at idle switch ON
For TOILCNT at Idle switch off, refer to the following table.
0 (0) 8 (5) 16 (10) 24 (15) 32 (20) 40 (25) 48 (30) 56 (35)
–30
64 ms 73.2 ms 83.9 ms 96.3 ms 113.2 ms 133.9 ms 160.2 ms 194.6 ms
(–22)
–20
64 ms 73.3 ms 84 ms 96.6 ms 113.7 ms 135 ms 162 ms 197.4 ms
(–4)
Temperature –10
64 ms 73.4 ms 84.2 ms 96.9 ms 114.5 ms 136.4 ms 164.4 ms 201.5 ms
°C (°F) (14)
0
64 ms 73.5 ms 84.5 ms 97.4 ms 115.6 ms 138.5 ms 168 ms 207.6 ms
(32)
10
102.2 ms 114.8 ms 129.4 ms 146.7 ms 171.7 ms 203.4 ms 245.1 ms 302.1 ms
(50)
After engine start oil temperature characteristic diagnosis timer judgment value (t).
t = 1882940 – 43302 × Ti (t ≥ 1882940)
Ti = The lowest coolant temperature after starting the engine.
cles.
GD(H4SO)-89

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Engine oil temperature ≥ 15°C (59°F)

7. FAIL SAFE
Oil temperature sensor process: Engine oil temperature is fixed at 70°C (158°F).
GD(H4SO)-90

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
AP:DTC P0197 ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR LOW

Detect the open or short circuit of the oil temperature sensor.
Judge as NG when out of the possible range.
2. ENABLE CONDITION
None

Judge as NG when the continuous time of meeting the following conditions is 0.5 seconds or more. Judge as
OK and clear the NG when the following conditions are not established.
Judgment Value

7. FAIL SAFE
GD(H4SO)-91

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
AQ:DTC P0198 ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR HIGH

Detect the open or short circuit of the oil temperature sensor.
Judge as NG when outside of the judgment value.
2. ENABLE CONDITION
None

Judge as NG when the continuous time of meeting the following conditions is 0.5 seconds or more. Judge as
OK and clear the NG when the following conditions are not established.
Judgment Value

7. FAIL SAFE
GD(H4SO)-92

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
AR:DTC P0222 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH “B” CIRCUIT

LOW
(3)
(4)
(1)
(2)
EN-01859
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Ignition switch ON

Judgment Value

GD(H4SO)-93

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
8. FAIL SAFE
GD(H4SO)-94

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
AS:DTC P0223 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH “B” CIRCUIT

HIGH
(3)
(4)
(1)
(2)
EN-01859
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Ignition switch ON

Judgment Value

GD(H4SO)-95

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
8. FAIL SAFE
GD(H4SO)-96

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Detect the presence of misfire occurrence. (Revolution fluctuation method)
Monitoring Misfire which influences exhaust deterioration (1.5 times of FTP) and catalyst damage is made
obligatory by the law. Misfire affecting these two has three patterns below. :
• Intermittent misfire (The same cylinder misfires in random, or different cylinders misfire in random.): FTP
1.5 times misfire
• Every time misfire (The same cylinder misfires every time.): FTP 1.5 times misfire, Catalyst damage mis-
fire
The following detecting methods are adopted for these detection.
1) Intermittent misfire: FTP 1.5 times misfire
• 180° Interval Difference Method (MT: 1,800 rpm or less; AT: None)
• 360° Interval Difference Method (whole range)
• 720° Interval Difference Method (3,000 rpm or more)
2) Misfire every time: FTP 1.5 times misfire, Catalyst damage misfire
• 360° Interval Difference Method
2. ENABLE CONDITION
All secondary parameters enable condi- 1 second or more
tions
Intake manifold pressure change during < 13.3 kPa (100
0.5 engine revs. mmHg, 3.94 inHg)
Throttle position change during 16 milli- < 21°
seconds
Fuel shut-off function Not in operation
Barometric pressure ≥ 75.0 kPa (563
mmHg, 22.2 inHg)
2.11 Imp gal)
AT torque control Not in operation
Evaporative system leak check Not in operation
Intake manifold pressure > Value from Map 3
Battery voltage ≥8V
GD(H4SO)-97

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Map 3
MT (Vehicle speed < 64.4 km/h (40 MPH))
rpm 650 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000 5500 6000 6400
kPa 25.6 22.5 20.0 20.0 20.0 21.6 26.4 28.0 29.5 32.4 36.4 39.9 44.5
(mmHg, (192, (169, (150, (150, (150, (162, (198, (210, (221, (243, (273, (299, (324,
inHg) 7.56) 6.65) 5.91) 5.91) 5.91) 6.38) 7.80) 8.27) 8.71) 9.57) 10.75) 11.78) 13.14)
MT (Vehicle speed ≥ 64.4 km/h (40 MPH))

rpm 650 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000 5500 6000 6400
kPa 31.6 31.6 31.6 31.1 31.3 33.1 33.9 28.8 30.1 33.3 36.9 40.1 44.5
(mmHg, (237, (237, (237, (233, (235, (248, (254, (216, (226, (250, (277, (301, (324,
inHg) 9.33) 9.33) 9.33) 9.19) 9.24) 9.78) 10.01) 8.51) 8.89) 9.84) 10.90) 11.84) 13.14)
AT (except for U5 model)

rpm 700 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000 5500 6000 6400
kPa 25.6 24.4 22.0 22.4 22.8 23.9 29.9 31.3 32.5 35.6 39.3 43.3 44.5
(mmHg, (192, (183, (165, (168, (171, (179, (224, (235, (244, (267, (295, (325, (334,
inHg) 7.56) 7.21) 6.50) 6.62) 6.73) 7.06) 8.83) 9.24) 9.6) 10.51) 11.61) 12.79) 13.14)
AT (U5 model)
rpm 700 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000 5500 6000 6400
kPa 26.0 23.9 22.4 22.3 22.5 23.1 29.9 31.3 32.5 35.6 39.3 43.3 45.9
(mmHg, (195, (179, (168, (167, (169, (173, (224, (235, (244, (267, (295, (325, (344,
inHg) 7.68) 7.06) 6.62) 6.59) 6.65) 6.82) 8.83) 9.24) 9.6) 10.51) 11.61) 12.79) 13.56)

• Detect misfires from idling to high rpm.
• Perform the diagnosis continuously.
When a misfire occurs, the engine speed will decreased and the crankshaft position speed will change. Cal-
culate the interval difference value (diagnostic value) from crankshaft position speed by the following formu-
la, and judge whether a misfire is occurring or not comparing the calculated result with judgment value.
Counting the number of misfires. If the misfire ratio is higher during 1000 revs. or 200 revs. Judge corre-
sponding cylinders as NG.
Diagnostic value Misfire detection every NG judgment (Misfire occurrence judg-
calculation single ignition ment required by the law) (Compare
(Calculate from (Compare diagnostic number of misfire with judgment)
→ →
angle speed) value with judgment
value)
• 180° Interval Differ- • FTP 1.5 times misfire NG judgment
ence Method • Catalyst damage misfire NG judgment
• 360° Interval Differ-
ence Method
• 720° Interval Differ-
ence Method
GD(H4SO)-98

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
As shown in the following figure, pick a cylinder as the standard and name it omg 0. And the former crank-
shaft position speed is named omg 1, the second former crankshaft position speed is named omg 2, the third
is named omg 3, etc.
(A) #3 #2 #4 #1 #3 #2 #4 #1 #3 #2
(B) omg7 omg6 omg5 omg4 omg3 omg2 omg1 omg0
EN-01774
(A) Ignition order (B) Crankshaft position speed
180° Interval Difference Method

Diagnostic domg 180 = (omg 1 – omg 0) – (omg 5 – omg 1)/
value 4
Judge as a misfire in the following cases.
• domg 180 > judgment value of positive side
• domg 180 ≤ judgment value of negative side
(Judgment value before 180° CA)
domg180
Threshold valve (positive number)
domg180
Threshold valve (negative number)
Judged as misfire.
EN-02877
GD(H4SO)-99

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Diagnostic domg 360 = (omg 1 – omg 0) – (omg 3 –
value omg 2)
Misfire judg- domg 360 > Judgment value → Judge as
ment misfire
domg360
Threshold valve
domg360
Judged as misfire.
EN-03273

Diagnostic domg 720 = (omg 1 – omg 0) – (omg 5 –
value omg 4)
Misfire judg- domg 720 > Judgment value → Judge as
ment misfire
domg720
Threshold valve
domg720
Judged as misfire.
EN-03274
FTP 1.5 times misfire (Misfire occurrence level which influences exhaust gas)
Judgment Value (Judge that malfunction occurs when the misfire ratio is high in 1000 engine revs.)
FTP emission judgment value > 1.0 % in 1000 revs.
GD(H4SO)-100

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Time Needed for Diagnosis: 1000 engine revs.

cles.
Catalyst damage misfire (Misfire occurrence level damaging catalyst)
Judgment Value (Judge that malfunction occurs when the misfire ratio is high in 200 engine revs.
(400 ignitions))
Catalyst damage misfire judgment value See Map 1
Map 1 Fault criteria threshold for misfire which would result in catalyst damage
U5 model
Intake air (g(oz)/rev)
Ignition count 0.16 0.28 0.52 0.64 0.76 0.92
0.4 (0.014) 1.1 (0.039)
(0.006) (0.010) (0.018) (0.023) (0.027) (0.032)
700 100 100 100 100 90 80 64 48
1000 100 100 100 100 90 80 52 24
1500 100 100 90 80 69 57 39 22
2000 80 80 80 80 62 44 33 21
Engine speed (rpm)
2500 67 67 58 50 40 31 25 20
3000 57 57 49 40 30 20 20 20
3500 44 44 34 24 20 20 20 20
4000 36 36 28 20 20 20 20 20
4500 27 27 20 20 20 20 20 20
5000 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
5500 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
6000 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
6400 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
Except for U5
Intake air (g(oz)/rev)
Ignition count 0.16 0.28 0.52 0.64 0.76 0.92
0.4 (0.014) 1.1 (0.039)
(0.006) (0.010) (0.018) (0.023) (0.027) (0.032)
700 100 100 100 100 90 80 64 48
1000 100 100 100 100 90 80 63 44
1500 100 100 90 80 73 67 54 40
2000 80 80 80 80 68 57 51 44
Engine speed (rpm)
2500 80 80 73 67 62 57 51 44
3000 67 67 62 57 51 44 44 44
3500 67 67 56 44 40 36 34 31
4000 57 57 44 31 24 20 20 20
4500 44 44 33 31 20 20 20 20
5000 44 44 38 31 20 20 20 20
5500 36 36 31 27 20 20 20 20
6000 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
6400 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20

GD(H4SO)-101

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

7. FAIL SAFE
None
NOTE:
For the diagnostic procedure, refer to DTC P0301. <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-97, DTC P0301 CYLINDER 1 MIS-
FIRE DETECTED, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
NOTE:
AW:DTC P0304 CYLINDER 4 MISFIRE DETECTED
NOTE:
GD(H4SO)-102

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
AX:DTC P0327 KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR)

Detect the open or short circuit of knock sensor.
(1) (4) (5)
(2)
(A)
(3)
EN-01707
(1) Case (4) Nut (A) To knock sensor harness

(2) Weight (5) Resistance
(3) Piezoelectric element
3. ENABLE CONDITION
None

GD(H4SO)-103

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Ignition switch ON

Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Ignition switch ON

8. FAIL SAFE
None
GD(H4SO)-104

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
AY:DTC P0328 KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR)

Detect the open or short circuit of knock sensor.
(1) (4) (5)
(2)
(A)
(3)
EN-01707
(1) Case (4) Nut (A) To knock sensor harness

(2) Weight (5) Resistance
(3) Piezoelectric element
3. ENABLE CONDITION
None

GD(H4SO)-105

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Ignition switch ON

Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Ignition switch ON

8. FAIL SAFE
None
GD(H4SO)-106

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
AZ:DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT

Detect the open or short circuit of the crankshaft position sensor.
Judge as NG when the crank signal is not input even though the starter was rotated.
(A)
#1BTDC10 CA #3BTDC10 CA #2BTDC10 CA #4BTDC10 CA #1BTDC10 CA
(B)
10 CA 30 CA 30 CA
EN-05538
(A) Camshaft signal (B) Crankshaft signal
(1)
(3)
(2)
EN-05539
(1) Crankshaft position sensor (2) Crank sprocket (3) Crankshaft half-turn
3. ENABLE CONDITION
None
GD(H4SO)-107

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

more.
Judgment Value
Starter switch ON
Crankshaft position sensor signal Not detected

Normality Judgment
Judge as OK when the malfunction criteria below are met.
Judgment Value
Crankshaft position sensor signal Input exists

8. FAIL SAFE
None
GD(H4SO)-108

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
BA:DTC P0336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT RANGE/

PERFORMANCE
Detect for faults in crankshaft position sensor output properties.
Judge as NG when there is a problem in the number of crankshaft signals for every revolution.
(A)
(B)
10 CA 30 CA 30 CA Number of crankshaft signal = 30 is normal.
EN-05540
(1)
(3)
(2)
EN-05539
(1) Crankshaft position sensor (2) Crank sprocket (3) Crankshaft half-turn
GD(H4SO)-109

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
3. ENABLE CONDITION

Perform the diagnosis continuously under 4000 rpm engine speed.
Judge as NG if the following criteria are met continuously 10 times or more in a row.
Judgment Value
Cylinder number identification Completed
Amount of crank sensor signal during 1 Not = 30
rev.

cles.
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Cylinder number distinction Completed
Amount of crank sensor signal during 1 = 30
rev.

8. FAIL SAFE
None
GD(H4SO)-110

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
BB:DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT

Detect the open or short circuit of the camshaft position sensor.
Judge as NG when the number of camshaft signals remains abnormal.
Number of camshaft signal = 2 is normal at two engine revolution.
(A)
(B)
10 CA 30 CA 30 CA
EN-05541
3. ENABLE CONDITION
None

GD(H4SO)-111

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judge as NG when the following malfunction criteria continues for 8 engine revolutions or more.
Judgment Value
Voltage ≥8V
Number of camshaft sensor signals dur- Not = 2
ing 2 revs.

Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG when the following criteria are established.
Judgment Value
Voltage ≥8V
Amount of camshaft sensor signal during 2
2 revs.

8. FAIL SAFE
None
GD(H4SO)-112

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
BC:DTC P0341 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT RANGE/

PERFORMANCE (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR)
Detect the malfunction of camshaft position sensor output property.
Judge as NG when the camshaft line signal input timing is shifted from the crankshaft signal because of tim-
ing belt tooth chip etc.
OK NG OK NG
(A)
(B)
10 CA 30 CA 30 CA
EN-05542
(1) (4)
(3)
(1)
(5)
(2)
EN-01782
(1) Boss (3) Air gap (5) Camshaft one revolution

(2) Cam sprocket (4) Camshaft position sensor (engine two revolutions)
GD(H4SO)-113

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Cylinder number identification Completed
Engine operation Idling
Misfire Not detected

Always perform the diagnosis continuously at idle speed.
Judge as NG when the engine speed continues 10 revolutions for the malfunction criteria below. Judge as
OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are not met.
Judgment Value
Position of camshaft position sensor sig- Not between BTDC
nal 10°CA and BTDC
80°CA

cles.
8. FAIL SAFE
None
GD(H4SO)-114

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
BD:DTC P0400 EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION FLOW

Detect EGR system malfunction.
Intake manifold pressure (negative pressure) is constant because the throttle valve is fully closed during de-
celeration fuel cut. At this time, when the EGR valve is opened/closed, the intake manifold pressure will
change. EGR System OK/NG is judged by the range of this change.
(7)
(1)
(6)
(5)
(2)
(4)
(3)
EN-02192
(1) ECM (4) CPU (6) Main relay

(2) Detecting circuit (5) EGR valve (7) Battery power supply
(3) Switching circuit
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Intake manifold pressure (absolute pressure) < 44.0 kPa
(330 mmHg, 13.0 inHg)
Ambient air temperature ≥ 5°C (41°F)
Throttle position < 0.25°
Barometric pressure ≥ 75.0 kPa
(563 mmHg, 22.17 inHg)
Vehicle speed ≥ 53 km/h (33 MPH)
Fuel shut-off function In operation
Neutral switch 1 second or more after changing
from OFF and ON to OFF.
Load (A/C, power steering, lighting, rear No change for 5 seconds or
defogger, heater fan and radiator fan) more.
GD(H4SO)-115

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

During deceleration fuel cut from 53 km/h (approx. 33 MPH) or more, perform diagnosis once.
Be careful of vehicle speed and engine speed. (Diagnosis will not be completed if the vehicle speed and en-
gine speed conditions become out of specification due to deceleration.)
Measure the pressure values when the enable conditions are established, and perform diagnosis by calcu-
lating those results.
1. Label the intake manifold pressure value as PMOF1, which is observed when enable conditions are es-
tablished, and set the EGR target step to 50 steps (nearly full open).
2. Label the intake manifold pressure value as PMON, which is observed after one second has passed since
EGR target step was set to 50 steps (when the enable conditions were established), and set the EGR target
step to 0.
3. Label the intake manifold pressure as PMOF2, which is observed after one second has passed since EGR
target step was set to 0 (after two seconds have passed since the enable conditions were established).
Judge as NG when the following conditions are established, and judge as OK when not.
Judgment Value
PMON – (PMOF1 + PMOF2)/2 < 2.48 kPa (18.63
mmHg, 0.733 inHg)
GD(H4SO)-116

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
cles.
(G)
2sec 1sec 1sec
ON
(A)
OFF
(B)
(H)
(C)
50step
(I)
(H)
(D)
(I)
PMON
(E)
PMOF2
PMOF1
(F)
EN-02168
(A) Deceleration fuel cut (E) Intake manifold pressure (G) Start diagnosis.
(B) Diagnosis enable condition (During normal condition) (H) Open
(C) EGR target step (F) Diagnostic mode timer (I) Close
(D) EGR actual step

GD(H4SO)-117

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
8. FAIL SAFE
A/F main learning = Not allowed.
Knock learning = Not allowed.
EGR control: Operation prohibited.
GD(H4SO)-118

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
BE:DTC P0420 CATALYST SYSTEM EFFICIENCY BELOW THRESHOLD

(BANK 1)
Detect the deterioration of the catalyst function.
Though the rear oxygen sensor output would change slowly with a new catalyst, the sensor output with a de-
teriorated catalyst becomes high and the inversion time is shortened.
For this reason, the catalyst diagnosis is carried out by monitoring the front oxygen sensor output and com-
paring it with the front oxygen (A/F) sensor output.
(1) (2)
(A) (3)
(B) (3)
(C) (D)
EN-01713
(1) Front oxygen (A/F) sensor (A) Normal (D) Output waveform from the rear
(2) Front oxygen sensor (B) Deterioration oxygen Sensor
(3) Catalytic converter (C) Output waveform from the front
oxygen (A/F) sensor
GD(H4SO)-119

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Barometric pressure > 75.1 kPa (563 mmHg, 22.2
inHg)
Catalyst warm-up counter (Map 2) (U5 ≥ 9000
model)
Estimated catalyst temperature (except for ≥ 650°C (1202°F)
U5 model)
Learning value of evaporation gas density ≤ 0.20
Sub feedback In operation
Evaporative system diagnosis Not in operation
Time of difference (< 0.10) between actual 1000 milliseconds or more
and target lambda
Vehicle speed > 70 km/h (43.5 MPH)
Amount of intake air 10 — 40 g (0.35 — 1.41 oz)/s
Engine load change every 0.5 engine revs. < 0.02 g/rev
Rear oxygen output change from 660 mV or Experienced after fuel cut
less to 660 mV or more
After engine starting ≥ 205 seconds
Purge execution calculated time 5 seconds or more
Map 2
Add the following value every 512 milliseconds.
Intake amount of 3.2 6.4 9.6 12.8 16 19.2 22.4 25.6 28.8 32 35.2
0 (0)
air (g(oz)/s) (0.113) (0.226) (0.339) (0.451) (0.564) (0.677) (0.790) (0.903) (1.016) (1.129) (1.242)
Total value for
–5 –5 15 31 46 62 77 92 108 123 127 127
warm-up counter

Perform the diagnosis only once at a constant speed of 70 km/h (43 MPH).
After establishing the execution conditions, calculate the front oxygen (A/F) sensor lambda deviation cumu-
lative value per 128 milliseconds (Σ |(sglmdn – sglmdn-1)|) and rear oxygen sensor output voltage deviation
cumulative value (Σ |(ro2sadn – ro2sadn-1)|), and when the front oxygen (A/F) sensor lambda deviation cu-
mulative value (Σ |(sglmdn – sglmdn-1)|) becomes the predetermined value or more, calculate the diagnostic
value.
Judge as NG if the criteria below are met. Judge as OK if the criteria below are not met.
Judgment Value
Σ |(ro2sadn – ro2sadn-1)| / Σ |(sglmdn – > 18.5
sglmdn-1)| (except for U5 model)
> 15.4 (U5 model)
Time Needed for Diagnosis: 30 — 55 seconds

cles.
GD(H4SO)-120

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

8. FAIL SAFE
None
GD(H4SO)-121

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
BF:DTC P0442 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM LEAK

Check if there is a leakage in fuel system or not, and perform the function diagnosis of valve.
(4)
(1) (3)
(2)
(5)
(15)
(14)
(16) (7)
(9)
(8)
(10)
(12) (11)
(13) (6)
EN-04151
(1) Fuel gauge (7) Pressure control valve (12) Fuel level sensor
(2) Intake manifold (8) Drain valve (13) Fuel tank
(3) Throttle body (9) Drain filter (14) Fuel cut valve
(4) Purge control solenoid valve (10) Shut-off valve (15) Fuel tank pressure sensor
(5) Engine control module (ECM) (11) Fuel temperature sensor (16) Vent valve
(6) Canister
In this system diagnosis, check for leakage and valve function is conducted by changing the fuel tank pres-
sure and monitoring the pressure change using the fuel tank pressure sensor. When in 0.04 inch diagnosis,
perform in the order of mode Z → mode A → mode B → mode C and mode D; When in 0.02 inch diagnosis,
perform in the order of mode A → mode B → mode C → mode D and mode E.
GD(H4SO)-122

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
0.04-inch Diagnosis
Mode OK Mode OK Mode OK Mode OK Mode OK

Z A B C D
NG
Early OK
Large leakage judgement END
Cancel
NG
Mode
NG
Z
Extend OK
EN-02872
Mode Mode Description Diagnosis Period

Mode Z Perform purge control solenoid valve opening failure diagnosis
(Purge control solenoid valve from the size of tank pressure variation from diagnosis start. 3 — 16 seconds
opening failure diagnosis)
Mode A
Calculate the tank pressure change amount (P1). 10 seconds
(Estimated evaporation amount)
Decrease the pressure in the tank to the target value by introduc-
Mode B
ing the intake manifold pressure to the fuel tank.
(Sealed negative pressure, large 5 — 25 seconds
If the tank pressure cannot be reduced, it is diagnosed as large
leakage judgment)
leak.
Mode C Wait until the tank pressure returns to the target (start level of P2
(Pressure increase check, calculation). If the tank pressure does not become the value, 1 — 15 seconds
advanced OK judgment) make advanced OK judgment.
Mode D Calculate the tank pressure variation (P2), and obtain the diag-
(Negative pressure variation nostic value using P1 found in Mode A.
10 seconds
measurement, evaporation Perform the evaporation diagnosis using the diagnostic value.
leakage diagnosis)
GD(H4SO)-123

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Mode Table for Evaporative Emission Control System Diagnosis

Behavior of tank internal pressure under
Mode Diagnostic item DTC
normal conditions
Roughly the same as barometric pres- Purge control solenoid valve is judged to
Mode Z P0457
sure (Same as 0 kPa (0 mmHg, 0 inHg)) be open.
Pressure is in proportion to amount of
Mode A
evaporative emission.
Negative pressure is formed due to Large leak
Mode B P0457
intake manifold negative pressure
Mode C Reaches target pressure None
EVAP system large leak determina-
Mode D Pressure change is small. P0442
tion.[1.0 mm (0.04 in)]
0.02-inch Diagnosis
Mode A OK Mode B OK Mode C OK Mode D OK Mode E
Cancel
Early OK 2
END
Cancel
Early OK 1
Cancel
Cancel
Cancel
EN-02871
Mode Mode Description Diagnosis Period

Mode A When the pressure in the tank is high, wait until it returns to 0
0 — 12 seconds
(0 point compensation) point (Near 0 mmHg,).
Mode B Decrease the pressure in the tank to the target value by introduc-
0 — 27 seconds
(Negative pressure introduced) ing the intake manifold pressure to the fuel tank.
Mode C Wait until the tank pressure returns to the target (start level of P2
0 — 20 seconds
(Negative pressure maintained) calculation).
Calculate the time it takes for the tank pressure to return to the P2
Mode D
calculation complete pressure. If the tank pressure does not
(Negative pressure change 0 — 200 seconds
return to the P2 calculation complete pressure, make advanced
calculated)
OK judgment.
Mode E Calculate the amount of evaporation (P1).
(Evaporation generated amount 0 — 280 seconds
calculation)
GD(H4SO)-124

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Pressure control solenoid valve
PCV controls the fuel tank pressure to be equal to the atmospheric air pressure. Normally, the solenoid is set
to OFF. The valve opens and closes mechanically in accordance with the pressure difference between tank
and atmospheric air, or tank and canister.
The valve is forcibly opened by setting the solenoid to ON at the time of diagnosis.
(a)
(1)
(4)
(b) (c)
(2) (3)
EN-01715
(1) Solenoid (3) Valve (a) Barometric pressure

(2) Diaphragm (4) Spring (b) Fuel tank
(c) Canister
GD(H4SO)-125

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Valve Operation and Air Flow

In the figure below, divided by the diaphragm, the part above X is charged with atmospheric air pressure, and
the part below X is charged with tank pressure. Also, the part above Y is charged with tank pressure, and the
part below Y is charged with canister pressure.
If the atmospheric air pressure port is A, tank pressure port is B, and canister pressure port is C, the air flows
according to pressure difference from each port as shown in the table below.
(a)
B C
(b) (c)
X Y X
EN-01716
(a) Barometric pressure (b) Fuel tank (c) Canister
Condition of pressure Flow

A < B (solenoid OFF) B→C
B < C (solenoid OFF) C→B
Solenoid ON B ←→ C
When A < B (solenoid OFF)
(a)
B C
(b) (c)
EN-01717
GD(H4SO)-126

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
When B < C (solenoid OFF)
(a)
B C
(b) (c)
(1)
EN-01718
(1) Valve (a) Barometric pressure (c) Canister

(b) Fuel tank
When Solenoid is ON
(a)
B C
(b) (c)
EN-01719
GD(H4SO)-127

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Drain valve
Drain valve controls the ambient air to be introduced to the canister.
EN-02293
3. ENABLE CONDITION
0.04-inch Diagnosis
Barometric pressure ≥ 75.1 kPa (563 mmHg, 22.17 inHg)
Total time of canister purge operation 120 seconds or more
Learning value of evaporation gas density ≤ 0.08
Fuel tank pressure ≥ –4.00 kPa (–30 mmHg, –1.18 inHg)
Intake manifold relative vacuum (relative pres- < –26.7 kPa (–200 mmHg, –7.87 inHg)
sure)
Fuel level 9.6 — 54.4 2
(2.54 — 14.37 US gal, 2.11 — 11.97 Imp gal)
Closed air/fuel ratio control In operation
Fuel temperature –10 — 45°C (14 — 113°F)
Intake air temperature ≥ –10°C (14°F)
Pressure change per second < 0.23 kPa (1.7 mmHg, 0.07 inHg)
Minimum pressure change value every one sec- < 0.23 kPa (1.7 mmHg, 0.07 inHg)
ond – Maximum pressure change value every
one second
Change of fuel level < 2 2/128 milliseconds
(0.53 US gal/128 milliseconds, 0.44 Imp gal/128 milli-
seconds)
Air fuel ratio 0.76 — 1.25
GD(H4SO)-128

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
0.02-inch Diagnosis
(At starting a diagnosis)
Evap. diagnosis Incomplete
Barometric pressure ≥ 75.1 kPa (563 mmHg, 22.2 inHg)
Time since last incomplete 0.02-inch leakage
diagnosis
When cancelling in mode A > 120 seconds
When cancelling in other than mode A > 600 seconds
Total time of canister purge operation 120 seconds or more
Fuel temperature –10 — 55°C (14 — 131°F)
Fuel level 9.6 — 54.4 2
(2.54 — 14.37 US gal, 2.11 — 11.97 Imp gal)
Intake manifold relative vacuum (relative pres- < –8.0 kPa (–60 mmHg, –2.36 inHg)
sure)
Fuel tank pressure –0.43 — 1.43 kPa
(–3.2 — 10.7 mmHg, –0.12 — 0.42 inHg)
Vehicle speed 50 km/h (31 MPH) continues for 125 seconds
Closed air/fuel ratio control In operation
(During diagnosis)
Change of fuel level ≤ Value from Map
Pressure change every one second < 0.06 kPa (0.44 mmHg, 0.02 inHg)
Minimum pressure change value every one sec- < 0.07 kPa (0.51 mmHg, 0.02 inHg)
ond – Maximum pressure change value every
one second
| Pressure change in tank every second | ≤ 0.1 kPa (0.75 mmHg, 0.03 inHg)
Barometric pressure change (Mode D) –0.48 — 0.32 kPa (–3.6 — 2.4 mmHg, –0.14 — 0.09
inHg)
Barometric pressure change (Mode E) –0.32 — 0.32 kPa (–2.4 — 2.4 mmHg, –0.09 — 0.09
inHg)
Map
Fuel level (2, US gal, Imp gal) 0 10, 2.64, 20, 5.28, 30, 7.93, 40, 10.57, 50, 13.21, 60, 15.85,
2.2 4.4 6.6 8.8 11 13.2
Change (2, US gal, Imp gal) 5, 1.3, 1.1 5, 1.3, 1.1 5, 1.3, 1.1 5, 1.3, 1.1 5, 1.3, 1.1 5, 1.3, 1.1 5, 1.3, 1.1

0.04-inch Diagnosis
• Perform the diagnosis only once in 856 seconds or more after starting the engine, at a constant speed of
32 km/h (20 MPH) or more.
• Pay attention to the fuel temperature and fuel level.
0.02-inch Diagnosis
• Perform the diagnosis 125 seconds or more after starting the engine at a constant engine speed of 50 km/
h (31 MPH) or higher to judge as NG or OK.
• If judgment cannot be made, repeat the diagnosis.
• Be careful of the remaining fuel level.
GD(H4SO)-129

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Purge control solenoid valve stuck open fault diagnosis
DTC
P0457 Evaporative Emission Control System Leak Detected (Fuel Cap Loose/Off)
Purpose of Mode Z
When performing the leakage diagnosis of EVAP system, the purge control solenoid valve must operate nor-
mally. Therefore, mode Z is used to diagnose the purge control solenoid valve stuck open condition. Note
that if a purge control solenoid valve stuck open fault is detected, the EVAP system leakage diagnosis is can-
celled.
Diagnostic method
Purge control solenoid valve functional diagnosis is performed by monitoring the tank pressure in mode Z.
Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and change to Mode A when the criteria below are completed in 3 seconds after Mode Z start-
ed.
Judgment Value
(Tank pressure when Mode Z started) – ≤ 0.4 kPa P0457
(Tank pressure when Mode Z finished) (3 mmHg, 0.12 inHg)
Normal
(1)
(2)
evptez
evptezha
evptezini
(3)
0 (4)
(5)
EN-02869
(1) Mode Z (3) Fuel tank pressure (5) OK judgment

(2) 3 seconds (4) 0.4 kPa (3.0 mmHg, 0.12 inHg)
evptez – evptezha ≤ 0.4 kPa (3.0 mmHg, 0.12 inHg)

Normal when above is established
GD(H4SO)-130

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
If OK judgment cannot be made, extend Mode Z 16 seconds more, and Judge as NG when the malfunction
criteria below are met.
Judgment Value
(Tank pressure when Mode Z started) – > 0.6 kPa P0457
(Tank pressure when Mode Z finished) (4.5 mmHg, 0.18 inHg)
Tank pressure when Mode Z started ≤ 1.43 kPa (10.7
mmHg, 0.42 inHg)
Time of 2 2 or more fuel no sloshing ≥ 40 seconds

cles.
When judgment for purge control solenoid valve stuck open NG is made, end the evaporative diagnosis.
Cancel the evaporative diagnosis when the OK/NG judgment for purge control solenoid valve stuck open
cannot be made in Mode Z.
GD(H4SO)-131

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Purge control solenoid valve Open Fixation
(1) (2)
(3)
(6)
evptez
(4) evptezini
0 (5)
evptezha
(7)
(8)
EN-02870
(1) Mode Z (4) Fuel tank pressure (7) No fuel sloshing for 40 seconds
(2) Extended mode Z (5) 0.6 kPa (4.5 mmHg, 0.18 inHg) (8) NG judgment
(3) 16 seconds (6) 1.43 kPa (10.7 mmHg, 0.42 inHg)
• evptezini, evptez ≤ 1.43 kPa (10.7 mmHg, 0.42 inHg)

• evptez – evptezha ≤ 0.6 kPa (4.5 mmHg, 0.18 inHg)
• No fuel sloshing of over 2 2 (0.53 US gal, 0.44 Imp gal) lasts for more than 40 seconds.
Judge as normal when all are established.
Leak Diagnosis
DTC
P0442 Evaporative Emission Control System Leak Detected (Small Leak)
P0457 Evaporative Emission Control System Leak Detected (Fuel Cap Loose/Off)
GD(H4SO)-132

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• The diagnostic method consists of creating a sealed vacuum in the fuel tank and then determining the
presence of leakage from the speed at which the tank internal pressure returns to barometric pressure.
• The diagnosis is divided into the following five phases.
Mode A: (Estimated evaporation gas amount)
Calculate the tank pressure change amount (P1) when using mode A. After calculating P1, switch to mode B.
Mode B: (Negative pressure sealed)
Introduce negative pressure in the intake manifold to the tank.
Approximately 0 → –1.4 kPa (0 → –10.5 mmHg, 0 → –0.41 inHg)
When the pressure above (desired negative pressure) is reached, enters Mode C.
In this case, if the tank pressure does not reach the target negative pressure, judge that there is a large leak-
age (10 seconds or 25 seconds) in the system and terminate the evaporative emission control system diag-
nosis.
Judge as NG (large leak) when the criteria below are met.
Judgment Value
Time to reach target negative pressure ≥ 35 seconds P0457
Or mode B time ≥ 10 seconds
(Min. pressure value in tank when in < –0.33 kPa
mode B) – (Tank pressure when mode B (–2.5 mmHg, –0.097
started) inHg)
Mode C: (Check pressure rise)

Stop the introduction of negative pressure. (Wait until the tank pressure returns to the start level of P2 cal-
culation.)
Change to Mode D when the tank pressure returns to the start level of P2 calculation.
Judge immediate OK and change to Mode E when it does not return in spite of spending the specified time.
Tank pressure when starting Time for advanced OK
calculation of P2 judgment
–1.3 kPa 18.5 seconds
(–9.75 mmHg, –0.38 inHg)
Mode D: (Measure amount of negative pressure change)

Monitor the tank pressure change amount when using mode D. In this case, the tank pressure increases,
(nears barometric pressure) because evaporation occurs. However, if any leakage exists, the pressure in-
creases additionally in proportion to this leakage. The pressure variation of this tank is P2.
After calculating P2, perform a small leak diagnosis according to the items below.
When Mode D is ended
Assign tank variations measured in Mode A and Mode D, P1 and P2, to the formula below, judge small leaks
in the system. If the measured judgment value exceeds the threshold value, it is judged to be a malfunction.
Judge as NG when the criteria below are met and judge as OK when not met, and clear NG.
Judgment Value
P2 – 1.5 × P1 > Value from Map 7 P0442
P2: Tank pressure that changes every 10 * Threshold value:
seconds in mode D Map (Remaining Fuel
P1: Tank pressure that changes every 10 vs Tank temperature)
seconds in mode A
* 1.5: Evaporation amount compensation value when below negative pressure (Amount of evaporation occurrence increases as
a vacuum condition increases.)
GD(H4SO)-133

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Map 7 Malfunction criteria limit for evaporation diagnosis

Fuel temperature vs. Fuel level 25°C (77°F) 30°C (86°F) 35°C (95°F) 40°C (104°F) 45°C (113°F)
0.28 kPa 0.29 kPa 0.31 kPa 0.313 kPa 0.32 kPa
10 L (2.6 US gal, 2.2 Imp gal) (2.1 mmHg, (2.2 mmHg, (2.3 mmHg, (2.35 mmHg, (2.4 mmHg,
0.083 inHg) 0.086 inHg) 0.092 inHg) 0.0924 inHg) 0.095 inHg)

cles.
Leak Diagnosis
DTC
P0456 Evaporative Emission Control System Leak Detected (very small leak)
DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• The diagnostic method consists of creating a sealed vacuum in the fuel tank and then determining the
presence of leakage from the speed at which the tank internal pressure returns to barometric pressure.
• The diagnosis is divided into the following five phases.
Mode A: (0 point compensation)
When the pressure in the tank is high, wait until it returns to 0 point (Near 0 mmHg). Shift to mode B when
returned to the 0 point. Cancel the diagnosis when 0 point does not return in the specified time.
Mode B: (Negative pressure introduced)
Introduce negative pressure in the intake manifold to the tank.
Approximately 0 → –2.0 kPa (0 → –15 mmHg, 0 → –0.59 inHg)
When the pressure above (desired negative pressure) is reached, enters Mode C.
When the tank internal pressure does not reach the target negative pressure, the diagnosis is cancelled.
Mode C: (Negative pressure maintained)
Stop the introduction of negative pressure. (Wait until the tank pressure returns to the start level of P2 cal-
culation.)
Change to Mode D either when the tank pressure returns to the start level of P2 calculation, or when the pre-
determined amount of time has passed.
GD(H4SO)-134

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Mode D: (Calculate the amount of negative pressure change)

Monitor the tank pressure in mode D, calculate (P2) the pressure change in the tank, and measure the time
(evpdset) for the tank pressure to return when calculation of P2 is completed. Change to Mode E when the
tank pressure returns to the end level of P2 calculation. If it does not return to the P2 calculation end tank in-
ternal pressure after the predetermined amount of time has passed, make advanced OK judgment or cancel
the diagnosis.
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Advanced OK judgment 1
Mode D time ≥ 20 seconds
Tank internal pressure ≤ –1.9 — –1.8 kPa (–13.9 — –13.5
mmHg, –0.56 — –0.53 inHg)
Advanced OK judgment 2
Mode D time ≥ 200 seconds
P2 ≤ 0.9 — 1.3 kPa (7 — 9.6 mmHg,
0.28 — 0.38 inHg)
Mode E: (Evaporation occurrence amount calculation)

Calculate the change of tank pressure with the time evpdset to judge as NG/OK according to the value of P1.
(ambiguous determination acceptable).
Judgment Value
P1 < Value from Map 7
* Threshold value: Map
(Fuel level vs. evpdset)

Time (evpdset) vs. Fuel level 0 seconds 30 seconds 50 seconds 100 seconds 160 seconds 200 seconds
0 kPa 0.07 kPa 0.23 kPa 0.36 kPa 0.36 kPa 0.36 kPa
10 L (2.6 US gal, 2.2 Imp gal) (0 mmHg, (0.5 mmHg, (1.7 mmHg, (2.7 mmHg, (2.7 mmHg, (2.7 mmHg,
0 inHg) 0.02 inHg) 0.068 inHg) 0.106 inHg) 0.106 inHg) 0.106 inHg)
0 kPa 0.07 kPa 0.27 kPa 0.31 kPa 0.31 kPa 0 kPa
50 L (13.2 US gal, 11.0 Imp gal) (0 mmHg, (0.5 mmHg, (2 mmHg, (2.3 mmHg, (2.3 mmHg, (0 mmHg,
0 inHg) 0.02 inHg) 0.09 inHg) 0.092 inHg) 0.092 inHg) 0 inHg)
GD(H4SO)-135

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
P1 > Value from Map 8
* Threshold value: Map
(Fuel level vs. evpdset)

Time (evpdset) vs. Fuel level 0 seconds 30 seconds 50 seconds 100 seconds 160 seconds 200 seconds
0.1 kPa 0.47 kPa 0.56 kPa 0.56 kPa 0.56 kPa 0.56 kPa
0.03 inHg) 0.139 inHg) 0.165 inHg) 0.165 inHg) 0.165 inHg) 0.165 inHg)
0.43 kPa
(3.25
20 L (5.3 US gal, 4.4 Imp gal) (1 mmHg, (4.1 mmHg, (4.1 mmHg, (4.1 mmHg, (4.1 mmHg,
mmHg,
0.127 inHg)
30 L (7.9 US gal, 6.6 Imp gal) (1 mmHg, (3 mmHg, (3.9 mmHg, (3.9 mmHg, (3.9 mmHg, (3.9 mmHg,

cles.
8. FAIL SAFE
None
GD(H4SO)-136

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
BG:DTC P0447 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM VENT CONTROL

CIRCUIT OPEN
Detect open or short circuit of the drain valve.
Judge as NG when the ECM output level differs from the actual terminal level.
(19) (14) (15) (16) (8) (7) (4) (5) (6) (19) (18)
(9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (17) (2) (1) (3)

EN-02294
(1) Bobbin (8) Magnetic plate (14) Retainer

(2) Coil (9) Shaft (15) Diaphragm
(3) Diode (10) Plate (16) Movable core
(4) Stator core (11) Valve (17) Spring
(5) End plate (12) Housing (18) Cover
(6) Body (13) Filter (19) O-ring
(7) Yoke
3. ENABLE CONDITION
None

GD(H4SO)-137

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
more.
Judgment Value
Ignition switch ON
After engine starting 1 second or more
Terminal output voltage when ECM out- Low
puts OFF signal

Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Ignition switch ON
Terminal output voltage when ECM out- High
puts OFF signal

8. FAIL SAFE
Pressure control solenoid valve control: Open the pressure control solenoid valve.
GD(H4SO)-138

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
BH:DTC P0448 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM VENT CONTROL

CIRCUIT SHORTED
Detect open or short circuit of the drain valve.
(19) (14) (15) (16) (8) (7) (4) (5) (6) (19) (18)
(9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (17) (2) (1) (3)

EN-02294

(7) Yoke
3. ENABLE CONDITION
None

GD(H4SO)-139

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
more.
Judgment Value
Ignition switch ON
puts ON signal

Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Ignition switch ON
puts ON signal

8. FAIL SAFE
GD(H4SO)-140

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
BI: DTC P0451 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR

Detect the tank pressure sensor output property abnormality.
Judge as NG when there is no pressure variation, which should exist in the tank, considering the engine sta-
tus.
(1)
(2)
(A)
(B)
(C)
EN-03875
(1) Connector (A) Output voltage (C) To fuel tank

(2) Terminals (B) Input voltage
3. ENABLE CONDITION
2.11 Imp gal)
mmHg, 22.2 inHg)

• Perform the diagnosis continuously after 60 seconds or more have passed since the engine started.
• Be sure to check the fuel level and fuel temperature.
GD(H4SO)-141

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Number of times that the difference ≥ 16 times
between the Max. fuel level and Min. fuel
level every 60 seconds is 2 2 (0.53 US
gal, 0.44 Imp gal) or more (with enable
condition established)
Maximum – Minimum tank pressure < 0.05 kPa (0.375
(with enable condition completed) mmHg, 0.01 inHg)
Maximum – Minimum fuel temperature ≥ 7°C (12.6°F)
(with enable condition completed)
If the maximum value – minimum value for the fuel level every seconds is less than 2 liters, extend 60 sec-
onds and make judgment with the maximum and minimum values for the fuel level in 120 seconds. If a dif-
ference does not appear though the time was extended 60 seconds, extend the time (180, 240, 300 seconds)
and continue the judgment. If the maximum value – minimum value for the fuel level is 2 2 or more, the di-
agnosis counter counts up.
Time Needed for Diagnosis: 1 minute × 16 times or more
cles.
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Maximum – Minimum tank pressure ≥ 0.05 kPa (0.375
mmHg, 0.01 inHg)

8. FAIL SAFE
Purge control solenoid valve control: Purge fixed mode is prohibited.
GD(H4SO)-142

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
BJ:DTC P0452 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE

SENSOR LOW INPUT
Detect the open or short circuit of the fuel tank pressure sensor.
(1)
(2)
(A)
(B)
(C)
EN-03875

3. ENABLE CONDITION

GD(H4SO)-143

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
more.
Judgment Value
Fuel tank pressure ≤ –7.44 kPa (–55.85
mmHg, –2.197 inHg)

Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Fuel tank pressure > –7.44 kPa (–55.85
mmHg, –2.197 inHg)

8. FAIL SAFE
GD(H4SO)-144

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
BK:DTC P0453 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE

SENSOR HIGH INPUT
Detect the open or short circuit of the fuel tank pressure sensor.
(1)
(2)
(A)
(B)
(C)
EN-03875

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Vehicle speed ≥ 2 km/h (1.24 MPH)
All conditions of EVAP canister purge Completed
Learning value of evaporation gas den- ≤ 0.08
sity
Main feedback compensation coefficient ≥ 0.9

Perform the diagnosis continually when purging.
GD(H4SO)-145

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
more.
Judgment Value
Fuel tank pressure > 7.98 kPa (59.85
mmHg, 2.36 inHg)
Barometric pressure ≥ 75.1 kPa
(563 mmHg, 22.2
inHg)

Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Fuel tank pressure ≤ 7.98 kPa (59.85
mmHg, 2.36 inHg)

8. FAIL SAFE
BL:DTC P0456 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM LEAK DETECT-
ED (VERY SMALL LEAK)
NOTE:
For the detection standard, refer to DTC P0442 Evaporative system (Small leak). <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-122,
DTC P0442 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED (SMALL LEAK), Diagnos-
BM:DTC P0457 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM LEAK DETECT-
ED (FUEL CAP LOOSE/OFF)
NOTE:
For the detection standard, refer to DTC P0442 Evaporative system (Small leak). <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-122,
DTC P0442 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED (SMALL LEAK), Diagnos-
GD(H4SO)-146

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
BN:DTC P0458 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM PURGE CONTROL VALVE

CIRCUIT LOW
Detect open or short circuit of the purge control solenoid valve.
(A)
(B)
EN-01733
(A) To canister (B) To intake manifold
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Ignition switch ON

Always perform the diagnosis after starting the engine.
GD(H4SO)-147

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Continuous time with the following condi- ≥ 2.5 seconds
tions established:
Duty ratio of “ON” < 75%
Terminal output voltage Low

cles.
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Terminal output voltage High

8. FAIL SAFE
None
GD(H4SO)-148

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
BO:DTC P0459 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM PURGE CONTROL VALVE

CIRCUIT HIGH
Detect open or short circuit of the purge control solenoid valve.
(A)
(B)
EN-01733
(A) To canister (B) To intake manifold
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Ignition switch ON

GD(H4SO)-149

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Continuous time with the following condi- ≥ 2.5 seconds
tions established:
Duty ratio of “ON” ≥ 25%
Terminal output voltage High

cles.
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Terminal output voltage Low

8. FAIL SAFE
None
GD(H4SO)-150

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
BP:DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE

Detect malfunctions of the fuel level sensor output property.
If the fuel level does not vary in a particular driving condition / engine condition where it should, judge as NG.
(A)
0 (B)
EN-01734
3. ENABLE CONDITION
None

GD(H4SO)-151

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Accumulated amount of intake air > 331 kg (729.9 lb)
Max. – min. values of fuel level output < 2.6 2 (0.69 US gal,
0.57 Imp gal)

cles.
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Accumulated amount of intake air > 331 kg (729.9 lb)
Max. – min. values of fuel level output ≥ 2.6 2 (0.69 US gal,
0.57 Imp gal)

8. FAIL SAFE
None
GD(H4SO)-152

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
BQ:DTC P0462 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT LOW

Detect the open or short circuit of fuel level sensor. Judge as NG if out of specification.
(1) (5)
(4)
(2) (3)
EN-05371
(1) Engine control module (ECM) (3) Fuel sub level sensor (5) Body integrated unit
(2) Fuel level sensor (4) Detecting circuit
3. ENABLE CONDITION
None

GD(H4SO)-153

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judge as NG when the continuous time of meeting the malfunction criteria below becomes time needed for
diagnosis (2.5 seconds) or more.
Judgment Value
Ignition switch ON

cles.
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Ignition switch ON
Output voltage > 0.173 V

8. FAIL SAFE
None
GD(H4SO)-154

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
BR:DTC P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT HIGH

Detect the open or short circuit of fuel level sensor. Judge as NG if out of specification.
(1) (5)
(4)
(2) (3)
EN-05371
(1) Engine control module (ECM) (3) Fuel sub level sensor (5) Body integrated unit
(2) Fuel level sensor (4) Detecting circuit
3. ENABLE CONDITION
None

GD(H4SO)-155

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judge as NG when the continuous time of completing the malfunction criteria below exceeds the time need-
ed for diagnosis (1 second).
Judgment Value
Ignition switch ON

cles.
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Ignition switch ON

8. FAIL SAFE
None
GD(H4SO)-156

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
BS:DTC P0464 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT INTERMITTENT

Detect the unstable output faults from the fuel level sensor caused by noise. Judge as NG when the max. val-
ue and cumulative value of output voltage variation of the fuel level sensor is larger than the threshold value.
2. ENABLE CONDITION
Ignition switch ON
Idle switch ON
Fuel level 9.6 — 54.4 2 (2.54 —
14.37 US gal, 2.11 —
11.97 Imp gal)
Vehicle speed = 0 km/h (0 MPH) 10 seconds or more

• Always perform the diagnosis continuously at idle speed.
• Pay attention to the fuel level.
GD(H4SO)-157

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Calculate the Max. value (delflmax) and cumulative value (sumfl) of output voltage variation of fuel level sen-
sor during 12.2 seconds. Judge it normal when both max. and cumulative values are not over the threshold
value. Otherwise, when either of them is over the threshold value, the diagnosis counter counts up. Judge as
NG if the counter indicated 4 counts.
Diagnosis condition
12.2S
Diagnosis timer
Malfunction
Fuel level sensor

A/D value
Normal
Amount of Fuel level
output voltage variation
Calculate the Max. value (delvflmx)

and the cumulative value (sumvfl).
6
5
4
3
2
1
Diagnosis counter 0
NG at 4 counts
EN-02216
GD(H4SO)-158

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Integrated times of the condition reach- ≥ 4 times
ing follows,
DELFLMAX ≥ 0.27 — 0.894 V or SUMFL
≥ 25.92 V
At that time, DELFLMAX: Maximum dif-
ference of sensor output for 12.2 sec-
onds; SUMFL: Integrated value of the
sensor output deviation for 12.2 seconds
The diagnosis counter does not count up when the following conditions are completed within 12.2 seconds.
Maximum value – minimum value of ≥ 0.05 kPa (0.375
change of tank pressure during 12.2 sec- mmHg, 0.02 inHg)
onds
Maximum value – minimum value of bat- ≥ 0.609 V
tery voltage during 12.2 seconds
Time Needed for Diagnosis: 12.2 seconds × 4 times

cles.
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
DELFLMAX < 0.27 — 0.894 V
SUMFL < 25.92 V
At that time, DELFLMAX: Maximum dif-
ference of sensor output for 12.2 sec-
onds; SUMFL: Integrated value of the
sensor output deviation for 12.2 seconds

7. FAIL SAFE
None
GD(H4SO)-159

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
BT:DTC P0483 FAN RATIONALITY CHECK

Detect the function abnormality of the radiator fan.
Judge as NG when the engine coolant temperature slowly decreases even when the radiator fan is rotating.
2. ENABLE CONDITION
Diagnostic enable condition is established if the radiator fan changes from OFF → ON when all of the con-
ditions below are met.
When one of the conditions below is not met, the diagnostic enable condition is not established.
Idle switch ON
Vehicle speed < 2 km/h (1.2 MPH)

Perform the diagnosis continuously when the radiator fan changes from OFF → ON when idling.
Judge as NG when the continuous time of meeting the malfunction criteria below becomes 5 minutes or
more.
Judgment Value
Radiator fan signal change OFF to ON
Engine coolant temperature Does not decrease
Time Needed for Diagnosis: 5 minutes

cles.
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Radiator fan signal change OFF to ON
Engine coolant temperature Decreased

7. FAIL SAFE
None
GD(H4SO)-160

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
BU:DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR “A”

Judge as NG when outside of standard value. Judge NG when the received data from ABSCM&H/U is ab-
normal, and the vehicle speed data is impossible.
Vehicle speed signals are taken in to the ABSCM&H/U, and OK/NG data of the vehicle speed, ABS wheel
speed sensor is received by CAN communication from the ABSCM&H/U.
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Elapsed time after engine starting ≥ 2 seconds

Perform the diagnosis continuously after 2 seconds or more have passed since the engine started.
more.
Judgment Value
Front ABS wheel speed sensor status Malfunction
When either of the following is estab-
lished
Front left wheel speed ≥ 300 km/h (186 MPH)
Front right wheel speed ≥ 300 km/h (186 MPH)

Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG when all of the following criteria are established.
Front left wheel speed > 0 km/h (0 MPH) and
< 300 km/h (186 MPH)
Front right wheel speed > 0 km/h (0 MPH) and
< 300 km/h (186 MPH)

• When Clear Memory is performed
• When Clear Memory is performed
GD(H4SO)-161

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
8. FAIL SAFE
• Accelerator sensor signal process: Not allowed fully closed point learning. (Hold previous value)
• Vehicle speed sensor signal process: Vehicle speed = 10 km/h (6 MPH)
• Fuel cut control: Not allowed vehicle speed 0 km/h (0 MPH) fuel cut. Normally the high vehicle speed fuel
cut performs on vehicle speed condition and engine speed, but perform the fuel cut only on engine speed
condition (4,400 rpm or more).
• ISC control: Open loop compensation is set to specified value (1 g (0.04 oz)/s). Not allowed ISC feedback
volume calculation.
• Air conditioner control: Not allowed air conditioner cut at accelerating.
• Radiator fan control: Both main and sub fan ON
• Gear ratio judgment: Control as fixed in sixth gear
GD(H4SO)-162

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
BV:DTC P0506 IDLE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM RPM LOWER THAN EXPECTED
Detect the malfunction that actual engine speed is not close to target engine speed during idling. Judge as
NG when actual engine speed is not close to target engine speed during idling.
2. ENABLE CONDITION
mmHg, 22.2 inHg)
2.11 Imp gal)
After engine starting ≥ 10.5 seconds
Feedback of ISC In operation
Lambda value 0.81 — 1.1
After switching air conditioner to ON/ > 5.1 seconds
OFF
After intake manifold pressure changes > 5.1 seconds
by 4 kPa (30 mmHg, 1.2 inHg) or more.
After neutral switch ON/OFF change > 5.1 seconds
Vehicle speed 0 km/h (0 MPH)

Perform the diagnosis continuously at idling after warming up engine.
Judge as NG when the continuous time of completing the malfunction criterion below is 10 seconds × 3
times.
Judgment Value
Actual – Target engine speed < –100 rpm
Feedback value for ISC Max.

cles.
Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG when the continuous time of meeting the malfunction criteria below becomes
the time needed for diagnosis (10 seconds) or more.
Judgment Value
Actual – Target engine speed ≥ –100 rpm

GD(H4SO)-163

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
7. FAIL SAFE
None
GD(H4SO)-164

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
BW:DTC P0507 IDLE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM RPM HIGHER THAN EXPECTED
Detect the malfunction that actual engine speed is not close to target engine speed during idling. Judge as
NG when actual engine speed is not close to target engine speed during idling.
2. ENABLE CONDITION
mmHg, 22.2 inHg)
1.98 Imp gal)
After engine starting ≥ 10.5 seconds
Lambda value 0.81 — 1.1
After switching air conditioner to ON/ > 5.1 seconds
OFF
After intake manifold pressure changes > 5.1 seconds
by 4 kPa (30 mmHg, 1.2 inHg) or more.
After neutral switch ON/OFF change > 5.1 seconds
Vehicle speed 0 km/h (0 MPH)

Perform the diagnosis continuously at idling after warming up engine.
Judge as NG when the continuous time of completing the malfunction criterion below is 10 seconds × 3
times.
Judgment Value
Actual – Target engine speed ≥ 200 rpm
Feedback value for ISC Min.

cles.
Normality Judgment
the time needed for diagnosis (10 seconds) or more.
Judgment Value
Actual – Target engine speed < 200 rpm

GD(H4SO)-165

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
7. FAIL SAFE
None
GD(H4SO)-166

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
BX:DTC P0512 STARTER REQUEST CIRCUIT

Detect the open or short circuit of starter SW.
Judge as ON NG when the starter SW signal remains ON.
2. ENABLE CONDITION
None

Judge as ON NG when the continuous time of meeting the malfunction criteria below becomes 3 minutes or
more.
Judgment Value
Engine speed > 500 rpm
Starter OFF signal Not detected
Battery voltage >8V

cles.
Normality Judgment
Judge as ON OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are met.
Judgment Value
Starter OFF signal Detected
Battery voltage >8V

7. FAIL SAFE
None
GD(H4SO)-167

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
BY:DTC P0513 INCORRECT IMMOBILIZER KEY

DTC Item Outline of diagnosis
P0513 Incorrect Immobilizer Key Incorrect immobilizer key (Use of unregistered key in body inte-
grated unit)
P1570 Antenna Faulty antenna
P1571 Reference Code Incompatibility Reference code incompatibility between body integrated unit and
ECM
P1572 IMM Circuit Failure (Except Communication failure between body integrated unit and ECM
Antenna Circuit)
P1574 Key Communication Failure Failure of body integrated unit to verify key (transponder) ID code
or transponder failure
P1576 EGI Control Module EEPROM ECM malfunctioning
P1577 IMM Control Module EEPROM Body integrated unit malfunctioning
P1578 Meter Failure Reference code incompatibility between body integrated unit and
combination meter
2. ENABLE CONDITION
When starting the engine.
Perform the diagnosis only after starting the engine.
Judge as NG when the conditions for the outline of the diagnosis of the top are established.
GD(H4SO)-168

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
BZ:DTC P0519 IDLE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

Detect malfunctions that the engine speed continues to rise during idling.
2. ENABLE CONDITION

Perform the diagnosis continuously if the vehicle speed is at less than 4 km/h (2.49 MPH).
Judge as NG when the continuous time of meeting the all malfunction criteria below becomes the time need-
ed for diagnosis (2 seconds) or more.
Judgment Value
Engine speed – Target engine speed > 2000 rpm
Feedback value for ISC ≤0
Engine speed change every 180 degree ≥ –5 rpm
engine rev.

Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG when the continuous time of meeting all the malfunction criteria below be-
comes the time needed for diagnosis (5 seconds) or more.
Judgment Value
Engine speed – Target engine speed < 200 rpm

7. FAIL SAFE
Fuel cut: Cuts off fuel only #1 and #2 cylinders, or for all cylinders according to vehicle speed, engine speed,
and throttle position.
GD(H4SO)-169

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CA:DTC P0600 SERIAL COMMUNICATION LINK

Detect malfunction of CAN communication.
When CAN communications is not possible, and CAN communications with AT is not possible, judge as NG
if data from the AT is not normal.
ECM and TCM are connected by high speed CAN.
(Common Specifications)
CAN Protocol 2.0 B (Active)
Frame Format: 11 Bit ID Frame (Standard Frame)
(High speed CAN)
Conforms to ISO11898
Communication Speed: 500 kbps
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Starter switch OFF
Engine run

When any one of the following conditions are established, judge as NG.
Judge as OK and clear the NG when the continuous time of meeting the following all criteria is the predeter-
mined time (1 s) or more.
Judgment Value
bus off flag or warning flag set
ID from TCM, ECM, VDC CM or ABS = 500 milliseconds
CM is not received.
Data from ECM is not updated. = 500 milliseconds

8. FAIL SAFE
None
GD(H4SO)-170

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CB:DTC P0604 INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE RANDOM ACCESS MEMORY

(RAM) ERROR
Detect the malfunction of microcomputer (RAM).
When there is a problem in the main CPU normal RAM, or the sub CPU normal RAM, judge as NG. Judge
as OK when both are operating properly.
If it is possible to write data to the whole area of RAM in the initial routine, and is possible to read the same
data, it is judged as OK, and if not, NG.
2. ENABLE CONDITION
None
Diagnosis with the initial routine.

Perform the diagnosis as soon as the ignition switch is turned to ON.
Judgment Value
Main CPU normal RAM abnormal
Write 5AA5A55A and then read. (Whole 5AA5A55A cannot be
area of RAM) read.
Write A55A5AA5 and then read. (Whole A55A5AA5 cannot be
area of RAM) read.
Sub CPU normal RAM abnormal
Write 5AA5 and then read. (Whole area 5AA5 cannot be read.
of RAM)
Write A55A and then read. (Whole area A55A cannot be read.
of RAM)

Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Main CPU normal RAM abnormal
Write 5AA5A55A and then read. (Whole 5AA5A55A can be
area of RAM) read.
And write A55A5AA5 and then read. A55A5AA5 can be
(Whole area of RAM) read.
Sub CPU normal RAM abnormal
Write 5AA5 and then read. (Whole area 5AA5 can be read.
of RAM)
And write A55A and then read. (Whole A55A can be read.
area of RAM)
GD(H4SO)-171

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

7. FAIL SAFE
None
GD(H4SO)-172

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CC:DTC P0605 INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE READ ONLY MEMORY (ROM)

ERROR
Judge as NG when SUM value of ROM is outside the standard value.
2. ENABLE CONDITION
Ignition switch ON

Judgment Value
SUM value of ROM Standard

7. FAIL SAFE
GD(H4SO)-173

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CD:DTC P0607 CONTROL MODULE PERFORMANCE

Judge as NG when any one of the followings is established.
1) When the read value of throttle position sensor 1 signal is mismatched between main CPU and sub CPU.
2) When the read value of accelerator pedal position sensor 1 signal is mismatched between main CPU and
sub CPU.
3) When the sub CPU operates abnormally.
4) When the communication between main CPU ←→ sub CPU is abnormal.
5) When the input amplifier circuit of throttle position sensor 1 is abnormal.
6) When the cruise control cannot be canceled correctly.
7) When the signal of brake SW1 and 2 is mismatched.
(12) (1)
(2)
(11) (10)
(13)
(10)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(10)
(14)
(6)
(10)
(7)
(8)
(9)
EN-01862
(1) Throttle position sensor (6) Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 (11) Amplifier circuit
(2) Throttle position sensor 1 (7) Battery (12) Engine control module (ECM)
(3) Throttle position sensor 2 (8) Stop light (13) Sub CPU
(4) Accelerator pedal position sensor (9) Brake switch (14) Main CPU
(5) Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 (10) I/F circuit
GD(H4SO)-174

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
3. ENABLE CONDITION
(3) None —
(4) None —
(5) Throttle opening angle
(6) Brake switch (only with cruise control) ON
(7) None —

(1) — (4): Always perform the diagnosis continuously.
(5): Always perform the diagnosis continuously when idling.
(6): Perform the diagnosis when the brake pedal is depressed.
(7): Always perform the diagnosis continuously.
(8): Always perform the diagnosis continuously when the cruise control pedal is not operating.
Judgment Value
(1) Difference of CPU reading value of ≤ 0.0858 V
the throttle position sensor signal
(2) Difference of CPU read value of the ≤ 0.35 V
accelerator pedal position sensor signal
(3) WD pulse from sub CPU WD pulse occur
(4) Communication between CPU Possible to communi-
cate
(5) |Throttle position sensor 1 opening < 3°
angle — (Throttle position sensor 1
opening angle after passing amplifier) 1/
4|
(6) Cruise control cancel signal at brake Cruise control cancel
ON signal ON
(7) Brake switch 1, 2 signal SW 1 and 2 are
matched

1. 600 milliseconds
2. 830 milliseconds
3. 200 milliseconds
4. 200 milliseconds
5. 24 milliseconds
6. 250 milliseconds
7. 200 milliseconds
GD(H4SO)-175

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
8. FAIL SAFE
GD(H4SO)-176

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CE:DTC P0638 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL RANGE/PERFORMANCE

(BANK 1)
Judge as NG when the target opening angle and actual opening angle is mismatched or the current to motor
is the specified duty or more for specified time continuously.
(3) (1)
(4)
(2)
EN-01863
(1) Motor (3) Engine control module (ECM) (4) Drive circuit
(2) Throttle position sensor
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Ignition switch ON
Normal operation of electronic throttle ON
control

Always perform the diagnosis continuously when the electronic throttle control is operating.
Judgment Value
Difference between target opening angle 3.5° or less
and actual opening angle
Output duty to drive circuit 95% or less

• Target opening angle and actual opening angle: 250 milliseconds (For NG) 2000 milliseconds (For OK)
• Output duty to drive circuit: 2000 milliseconds
GD(H4SO)-177

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Details of Judgment Value
30
(25.0)
20
(3)
(1)
(12.0)
10
(5.0)
(3.5)
0
0 5 (6.15) 10 15 20 25 (26.65) 30
(9.65) (14.65)
(2)
EN-03129
(1) Difference between target opening (2) Target throttle opening angle (°) (3) NG area
angle and actual opening angle (°)
Details of Judgment time (The actual opening angle ≤ target opening angle is always 1000 milliseconds)
1000
(1) 500
(3)
(400)
(300)
(250)
0
0 5 (5.5) (9.0) 10 (13.0) 15 20 (22.0) 25 30
(2)
EN-01865
(1) Judgment time (milliseconds) (2) Throttle position sensor 1 (3) NG area
opening angle

GD(H4SO)-178

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
8. FAIL SAFE
GD(H4SO)-179

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CF:DTC P0691 FAN 1 CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW

Detect the open/short circuit of radiator fan circuit.
2. ENABLE CONDITION
None

more.
Judgment Value
Ignition switch ON
Terminal voltage level when ECM out- Low level
puts OFF signal

cles.
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Ignition switch ON
Terminal voltage level when ECM out- High level
puts OFF signal

7. FAIL SAFE
None
GD(H4SO)-180

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CG:DTC P0692 FAN 1 CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH

Detect the open/short circuit of radiator fan circuit.
2. ENABLE CONDITION
None

more.
Judgment Value
Ignition switch ON
puts ON signal

cles.
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Ignition switch ON
puts ON signal

7. FAIL SAFE
None
GD(H4SO)-181

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CH:DTC P0700 TRANSMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM (MIL REQUEST)

Judge as NG when there is CAN communication with the AT and there is a MIL lighting request.
2. ENABLE CONDITION

Judge as NG when the continuous time with the following conditions established is the predetermined
amount of time (2.5 seconds) or more.
Judge as OK when the following conditions are not established, and clear the NG.
Judgment Value
MIL lighting request from TCM set

7. FAIL SAFE
None
GD(H4SO)-182

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CI: DTC P0851 PARK/NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT LOW (AT MODEL)
Judge the open or short circuit of the neutral SW.
Judge as NG when the ECM neutral terminal input differs from the reception data from TCM.
2. ENABLE CONDITION
Ignition switch ON
Starter switch OFF

Perform the diagnosis continuously in 2 seconds after starting the engine.
Judgment Value
Neutral switch signal when park/neutral LOW (ON)
= “OFF” and any other switches = “ON”
on AT

cles.
7. FAIL SAFE
Control of cruise control: Control prohibited
GD(H4SO)-183

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CJ:DTC P0851 NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT LOW (MT MODEL)

Judge as NG when there is no change in the neutral SW even if the driving shift was applied. (There is neutral
SW ON/OFF inversion from the vehicle speed and engine speed.)
2. ENABLE CONDITION
Ignition switch ON
Starter switch OFF

Judge as NG when the malfunction criteria below are completed 3 times or more after the neutral SW
change. Judge as OK and clear the NG when there is change in the neutral SW.
Judgment Value
Neutral switch signal (while changing LOW (ON)
from a to b below)
Driving condition change a) to b)
a) Vehicle speed = 0 km/h (0 MPH) &
engine speed 600 — 900 rpm
b) Vehicle speed ≥ 64 km/h (40 MPH) &
Time Needed for Diagnosis: 3 monitorings

cles.
7. FAIL SAFE
GD(H4SO)-184

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CK:DTC P0852 PARK/NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH (AT MODEL)

Judge as NG when the ECM neutral terminal input differs from the reception data from TCM.
2. ENABLE CONDITION
Ignition switch ON
Starter switch OFF

Judge as NG when the continuous time until meeting the malfunction criteria below becomes more than 6.4
seconds. Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are not met.
Judgment Value
Neutral switch signal when park/neutral HIGH (OFF)
= “ON” and any other switches = “OFF”
on AT

cles.
7. FAIL SAFE
GD(H4SO)-185

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CL:DTC P0852 NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH (MT MODEL)

Judge as NG when there is no change in the neutral SW even if the driving shift was applied. (There is neutral
SW ON/OFF inversion from the vehicle speed and engine speed.)
2. ENABLE CONDITION
Ignition switch ON
Starter switch OFF

Judge as NG when the malfunction criteria below are completed 3 times or more after the neutral SW
change. Judge as OK and clear the NG when there is change in the neutral SW.
Judgment Value
Neutral switch signal (while changing HIGH (OFF)
from a to b below)
Driving condition change a) to b)
a) Vehicle speed = 0 km/h (0 MPH) &
b) Vehicle speed ≥ 64 km/h (40 MPH) &
Time Needed for Diagnosis: 3 monitorings

cles.
7. FAIL SAFE
GD(H4SO)-186

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CM:DTC P1152 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE (LOW)

(BANK 1 SENSOR 1)
Detect that λ value remains low.
Judge as NG when lambda value is abnormal in accordance with λ value of front oxygen (A/F) sensor and
running conditions such as vehicle speed, amount of intake air, engine coolant temperature, sub feedback
control, etc.
λ value = Actual air fuel ratio/Theoretical
air fuel ratio
λ > 1: Lean
λ < 1: Rich
(3)
(1)
(A)
(2) (2)
(C) (B) (D)
(4)
EN-01693

(3) ZrO2 (C) Lean
GD(H4SO)-187

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
3. ENABLE CONDITION
All secondary parameters enable condi- 4 seconds or more
tions
mmHg, 22.2 inHg)
Rear oxygen sensor sub feedback Execution
Rear oxygen sensor output voltage – –0.2 V — 0.1 V
Feedback target voltage
or rear oxygen sensor sub feedback On Min.
compensation coefficient
or rear oxygen sensor sub feedback On Max.
Amount of intake air ≥ 6 g (0.21 oz)/s
Load change during 0.5 engine revs. ≤ 0.02 g (0.001 oz)/rev
sity
Target lambda load compensation coeffi- –0.03 — 0
cient

Perform diagnosis continuously at a constant speed of 20 km/h (12 MPH) or more after 60 seconds have
passed since the engine started.
seconds) or more. Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are not met.
Judgment Value
Output λ value when rear oxygen sensor ≤ 0.85
sub feedback compensation coefficient
is not at maximum limit

cles.
GD(H4SO)-188

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
8. FAIL SAFE
GD(H4SO)-189

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CN:DTC P1153 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE (HIGH)

(BANK 1 SENSOR 1)
Detect that λ value remains high.
Judge as NG when lambda value is abnormal in accordance with λ value of front oxygen (A/F) sensor and
running conditions such as vehicle speed, amount of intake air, engine coolant temperature, sub feedback
control, etc.
λ value = Actual air fuel ratio/Theoretical
air fuel ratio
λ > 1: Lean
λ < 1: Rich
(3)
(1)
(A)
(2) (2)
(C) (B) (D)
(4)
EN-01693

(3) ZrO2 (C) Lean
GD(H4SO)-190

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
3. ENABLE CONDITION
All secondary parameters enable condi- 4 seconds or more
tions
mmHg, 22.2 inHg)
Rear oxygen sensor sub feedback Execution
Rear oxygen sensor output voltage – –0.2 V — 0.1 V
Feedback target voltage
or rear oxygen sensor sub feedback On Min.
or rear oxygen sensor sub feedback On Max.
Amount of intake air ≥ 6 g (0.21 oz)/s
Load change during 0.5 engine revs. ≤ 0.02 g (0.001 oz)/rev
sity
Target lambda load compensation coeffi- –0.03 — 0
cient

Perform diagnosis continuously at a constant vehicle speed of 20 km/h (12 MPH) or more after 60 seconds
have passed since the engine started.
seconds) or more. Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are not met.
Judgment Value
Output λ value when rear oxygen sensor ≥ 1.15
sub feedback compensation coefficient
cannot be at minimum limit

cles.
GD(H4SO)-191

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
8. FAIL SAFE
GD(H4SO)-192

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CO:DTC P1160 RETURN SPRING FAILURE

Judge as NG when the valve is opened more than the default opening angle, but does not move to the close
direction with the motor power stopped.
(1) (8)
S S
(3) (7)
(6)
(2)
(4) (5)
EN-01866
(1) Opener spring (4) Full closed stopper (7) DC motor

(2) Return spring (5) Throttle valve (8) Main and sub throttle sensor
(3) Intermediate stopper (6) Gear
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Motor continuity OFF

• Ignition switch ON → OFF
• Ignition switch OFF → ON (Only after clearing memory)
Judgment Value
Opening variation after continuity is set ≥ 2°
to OFF

GD(H4SO)-193

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
8. FAIL SAFE
Throttle opening is fixed to 6°.
GD(H4SO)-194

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CP:DTC P1400 FUEL TANK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT

LOW
Detect the open/short circuit of pressure control solenoid valve.
Judge as NG when ECM output level is different from actual terminal level.
(1)
(A)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(B) (C)
(5)
EN-01759
(1) Filter (4) Diaphragm (A) Barometric pressure

(2) Coil (5) Valve (B) Shut-off valve
(3) Connector terminal (C) To fuel tank
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Ignition switch ON

diagnosis (2.5 seconds) or more. Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are not
met.
Judgment Value
puts OFF signal

cles.
GD(H4SO)-195

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

8. FAIL SAFE
None
GD(H4SO)-196

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CQ:DTC P1420 FUEL TANK PRESSURE CONTROL SOL. VALVE CIRCUIT HIGH
Detect the open/short circuit of pressure control solenoid valve.
Judge as NG when ECM output level is different from actual terminal level.
(1)
(A)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(B) (C)
(5)
EN-01759
(1) Filter (4) Diaphragm (A) Barometric pressure

(2) Coil (5) Valve (B) Shut-off valve
(3) Connector terminal (C) To fuel tank
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Ignition switch ON

diagnosis (2.5 seconds) or more. Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are not
met.
Judgment Value
puts ON signal

cles.
GD(H4SO)-197

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

8. FAIL SAFE
None
GD(H4SO)-198

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CR:DTC P1443 VENT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION PROBLEM

Detect the abnormal function (stuck closed) of the drain valve.
Judge as NG when fuel tank pressure is low.
(19) (14) (15) (16) (8) (7) (4) (5) (6) (19) (18)
(9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (17) (2) (1) (3)

EN-02294

(7) Yoke
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Drain valve Open
Barometric pressure ≥ 75.0 kPa (563
mmHg, 22.17 inHg)
Tank pressure when starter is OFF → –0.43 — 1.4 kPa (–3.2
ON — 10.7 mmHg, –0.13
— 0.42 inHg)

GD(H4SO)-199

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
more.
Judgment Value
Fuel tank pressure ≤ –4.0 kPa
(–30 mmHg, –1.18 inHg)

Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Fuel tank pressure > –4.0 kPa
(–30 mmHg, –1.18 inHg)
Cumulative time when all the malfunction ≥ 30 seconds
criteria below are met.
Purge control solenoid valve duty ratio Not = 0
Fuel temperature –10 — 70°C
(14 — 158°F)
Intake manifold relative pressure ≤ –26.7 kPa
(–200 mmHg, –7.87 inHg)

8. FAIL SAFE
GD(H4SO)-200

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CS:DTC P1491 POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION (BLOW-BY) FUNCTION

PROBLEM
Detect the blow-by hose release abnormality.
Judge as NG when the diagnosis terminal voltage is high.
(1) (4)
(2)
(3)
EN-01790
(1) Engine control module (ECM) (3) PCV diagnosis connector (4) 5V
(2) Detecting circuit
3. ENABLE CONDITION
None

GD(H4SO)-201

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
more.
Judgment Value
Positive crankcase ventilation diagnosis High
voltage

Normality Judgment
If the following conditions are established after predetermined amount of time has passed, judged as OK.
Judge as OK and clear the NG when the following criteria are
met.
Judgment Value
Positive crankcase ventilation diagnosis Low
voltage

8. FAIL SAFE
None
GD(H4SO)-202

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CT:DTC P1492 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #1 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION

(LOW INPUT)
• Detects open or short circuit of EGR.
• Judge as NG when the ECM output level differs from the actual terminal level.
(5)
(1)
(6)
(3)
(2)
(4)
EN-02051
(1) Engine control module (ECM) (3) Detecting circuit (5) Battery voltage
(2) Computer unit (CPU) (4) Switch circuit (6) Main relay
3. ENABLE CONDITION
EGR valve target position > 0 step

Perform diagnosis continuously during EGR operation.
GD(H4SO)-203

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
puts OFF signal

Malfunction Indicator Light: Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs.
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
puts OFF signal

8. FAIL SAFE
• Knock sensor learning compensation: Calculation prohibited.
• EGR control: Operation prohibited.
GD(H4SO)-204

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CU:DTC P1493 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #1 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION

(HIGH INPUT)
• Detects open or short circuit of EGR.
• Judge as NG when the ECM output level differs from the actual terminal level.
(5)
(1)
(6)
(3)
(2)
(4)
EN-02051
(1) Engine control module (ECM) (3) Detecting circuit (5) Battery voltage
(2) Computer unit (CPU) (4) Switch circuit (6) Main relay
3. ENABLE CONDITION
EGR valve target position > 0 step

GD(H4SO)-205

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
puts ON signal

Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
puts ON signal

8. FAIL SAFE
• Knock sensor learning compensation: Calculation prohibited.
• EGR control: Operation prohibited.
GD(H4SO)-206

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CV:DTC P1494 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #2 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION

(LOW INPUT)
NOTE:
For the detection standard, refer to DTC P1492. <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-203, DTC P1492 EGR SOLENOID
VALVE SIGNAL #1 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (LOW INPUT), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Cri-
teria.>
CW:DTC P1495 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #2 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION
(HIGH INPUT)
NOTE:
VALVE SIGNAL #1 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (HIGH INPUT), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting
Criteria.>
CX:DTC P1496 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #3 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION
(LOW INPUT)
NOTE:
teria.>
CY:DTC P1497 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #3 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION
(HIGH INPUT)
NOTE:
Criteria.>
CZ:DTC P1498 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #4 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION
(LOW INPUT)
NOTE:
teria.>
DA:DTC P1499 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #4 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION
(HIGH INPUT)
NOTE:
Criteria.>
GD(H4SO)-207

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DB:DTC P1518 STARTER SWITCH CIRCUIT LOW INPUT

Detect the open or short circuit of starter SW.
Judge as OFF NG when the engine starts without starter ON experience.
2. ENABLE CONDITION
None

Judge as OFF NG when the malfunction criteria below are met.
Judgment Value
Starter ON signal Not detected
Engine speed after engine speed of less ≥ 500 rpm
than 500 rpm continues for 0.8 seconds
or more.

cles.
Normality Judgment
Judge as OFF OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are met.
Judgment Value
Starter ON Experienced
Battery voltage >8V

7. FAIL SAFE
None
GD(H4SO)-208

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DC:DTC P1560 BACK-UP VOLTAGE CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION

Detect the open/short circuit of back-up power supply circuit.
Judge as NG when the backup voltage becomes smaller than the battery voltage.
2. ENABLE CONDITION
None

more.
Judgment Value
Voltage of back-up power supply Low

Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Voltage of back-up power supply High

7. FAIL SAFE
None
GD(H4SO)-209

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DD:DTC P1570 ANTENNA

For the detection standard, refer to DTC P0513 INCORRECT IMMOBILIZER KEY. <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-168,
DTC P0513 INCORRECT IMMOBILIZER KEY, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
DE:DTC P1571 REFERENCE CODE INCOMPATIBILITY
DF:DTC P1572 IMM CIRCUIT FAILURE (EXCEPT ANTENNA CIRCUIT)
DG:DTC P1574 KEY COMMUNICATION FAILURE
DH:DTC P1576 EGI CONTROL MODULE EEPROM
DI: DTC P1577 IMM CONTROL MODULE EEPROM
DJ:DTC P1578 METER FAILURE
GD(H4SO)-210

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DK:DTC P1602 CONTROL MODULE PROGRAMMING ERROR

Except for U5
Detect malfunctions of the catalyst advanced idling retard angle control.
Judge as NG when ECM is not controlling the angle properly during catalyst advanced idling retard angle
control.
Judge as NG if there is exhaust gas temperature diagnosis and idle speed diagnosis and if either of them is
NG.
• Exhaust gas temperature diagnosis
Judge as NG when the exhausted gas temperature in 14 seconds after the cold start is below the specified
value.
• Idle speed diagnosis
Judge as NG when actual engine speed is not close to target engine speed after terminating the retard angle
control.
2. ENABLE CONDITION
mmHg, 22.2 inHg)
Cold start diagnosis Incomplete
Engine Starting
Vehicle speed ≤ 2 km/h (1 MPH)
Misfire within 200 engine revs. <5
Time after starting = 14 seconds

Perform the diagnosis at cold start.
• Exhaust gas temperature diagnosis
Calculate the estimated exhaust gas temperature when the diagnostic enable condition is established. Judge
as NG when the following conditions are established in 14 seconds after starting the engine.
Judgment Value
Estimated exhaust gas temperature < Value from Map 1
Map 1
Engine coolant temper- –40 –30 –20 –10 0 10 20 30 40 50
ature at engine start °C (–40) (–22) (–4) (–14) (32) (50) (68) (86) (104) (122)
(°F)
Threshold value AT 200 200 200 200 127 130 127 114 111 117
model °C (°F) (392) (392) (392) (392) (261) (266) (261) (237) (232) (243)
Threshold value MT 200 200 200 200 155 156 152 142 140 140
model °C (°F) (392) (392) (392) (392) (311) (313) (306) (288) (284) (284)

cles.
Normality Judgment
Judge as OK when the following conditions are established after the specified amount of time has passed.
GD(H4SO)-211

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Estimated exhaust gas temperature ≥ Value from Map 1

Judge as NG when all of the following conditions are established, and judge as OK when the following con-
ditions are not met.
Continuous time of (Target engine speed ≥ 6000 ms
– Actual engine speed > 100 rpm)

cles.
7. FAIL SAFE
None
U5 model
Detect malfunctions of the catalyst advanced idling retard angle control.
Judge as NG when ECM is not controlling the angle properly during catalyst advanced idling retard angle
control.
Judge as NG if there is intake air amount diagnosis and idle speed diagnosis and if either of them is NG.
• Intake air amount diagnosis
Judge as NG when intake air amount, which should be larger, is small during catalyst advanced idling retard
angle control.
Judge as NG when actual engine speed is not close to target engine speed after terminating the retard angle
control.
GD(H4SO)-212

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
10.ENABLE CONDITION
mmHg, 22.2 inHg)
Engine Starting
After ISC control ≥ 1.5 seconds
Lower limit number of revolutions < 2000
counter
Nuetral switch ON/OFF operation > 3 seconds
Catalyst advanced idling retard angle Controlled
control 1
Catalyst warm up Under catalyst warm
up
After load (A/C, power steering, lighting, ≥ 3.5 seconds
rear defogger, heater fan and radiator
fan) operations
Cold start (with the following conditions
established)
|Engine coolant temperature — intake ≤ 5°C (41°F)
air temperature|
|Engine coolant temperature — Fuel ≤ 2°C (36°F)
temperature|
Warm up mode shift time ≥ 6 seconds
mmHg, 22.2 inHg)
Engine Starting
After ISC control ≥ 1.5 seconds
Lower limit number of revolutions < 2000
counter
Nuetral switch ON/OFF operation > 3 seconds
Catalyst advanced idling retard angle Controlled
control 1
Catalyst warm up Under catalyst warm
up
After load (A/C, power steering, lighting, ≥ 3.5 seconds
rear defogger, heater fan and radiator
fan) operations
Intake air amount diagnosis Undetermined
Cold start (with the following conditions
established)
|Engine coolant temperature — intake ≤ 5°C (41°F)
air temperature|
|Engine coolant temperature — Fuel ≤ 2°C (36°F)
temperature|
Warm up mode shift time ≥ 6 seconds
GD(H4SO)-213

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
11.GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Perform diagnosis during catalyst advance idling retard angle control.
12.DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
Calculate average of intake air amount and average of total retard angle amount when the diagnostic enable
condition is established. Judge as NG when the following conditions are established after the specified
amount of time has passed.
Judgment Value
Average of intake air amount < Value from Map 1
Average of total retard angle amount > Value from Map 2
Map 1
MT
Engine coolant temperature at 5°C 10°C 20°C 30°C 40°C
engine starting (41°F) (50°F) (68°F) (86°F) (104°F)
9.5 g/s 9.5 g/s 9.5 g/s 8.5 g/s 6 g/s
Average of intake air amount
(0.097 lb/m) (0.097 lb/m) (0.097 lb/m) (0.087 lb/m) (0.06 lb/m)
AT (N range)
10.8 g/s 10.8 g/s 9.8 g/s 9.2 g/s 6 g/s
AT (D range)
5 g/s 5 g/s 5 g/s 4 g/s 3 g/s
Map 2
Average of total retard angle amount (crank
ON/OFF Range
angle)
MT N 19°
AT N 19°
AT Other than N 19°

cles.
Normality Judgment
Judge as OK when the following conditions are established after the specified amount of time has passed.
Judgment Value
Average of intake air amount > Value from Map 1
GD(H4SO)-214

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

After the establishment of diagnostic enable conditions, judge as NG if the continuous time during which the
following conditions are established exceeds the predetermined time, and judge as OK if it does not.
Judgment Value
Target engine speed – Measured engine > Value from Map 3
speed
Map 3
Engine speed (rpm) 300 300 300 300 300

cles.
13.DTC CLEAR CONDITION
15.FAIL SAFE
None
GD(H4SO)-215

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DL:DTC P2096 POST CATALYST FUEL TRIM SYSTEM TOO LEAN BANK 1
Detect the malfunction of fuel system from the amount of sub feedback control.
Sub feedback learning control is being performed and when the learning value goes to the lean side, judge
as NG.
(E)
(3)
V (1)
(A) (F)
(2) (2)
(C) (B) (D)
EN-01696

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Continuous time when the following con- 1 second or more
ditions are established
Conditions for carrying out the sub feed- Completed
back learning

Perform the diagnosis continuously at a constant speed of 50 — 100 km/h (31 — 62 MPH).
Judge as NG when the continuous time with the following criteria established is 5 seconds or more. Judge
as OK when the continuous time with the following criteria not established is 5 seconds or more.
Judgment Value
Sub feedback learning value ≤ – 0.03 (except for U5
model)
≤ – 0.04 (U5 model)
Time Needed for Diagnosis: 5 seconds × 1 time

cles.
GD(H4SO)-216

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

8. FAIL SAFE
None
GD(H4SO)-217

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DM:DTC P2097 POST CATALYST FUEL TRIM SYSTEM TOO RICH BANK 1
Detect the malfunction of fuel system from the amount of sub feedback control.
Sub feedback learning control is being performed and when the learning value goes to the rich side, judge
as NG.
(E)
(3)
V (1)
(A) (F)
(2) (2)
(C) (B) (D)
EN-01696

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Continuous time when the following con- 1 second or more
ditions are established
Conditions for carrying out the sub feed- Completed
back learning

Perform the diagnosis continuously at a constant speed of 50 — 100 km/h (31 — 62 MPH).
Judge as NG when the continuous time with the following criteria established is 5 seconds or more. Judge
as OK when the continuous time with the following criteria not established is 5 seconds or more.
Judgment Value
Sub feedback learning value ≥ 0.07 (except for U5
model)
≥ 0.028 (U5 model)
Time Needed for Diagnosis: 5 seconds × 1 time

cles.
GD(H4SO)-218

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

8. FAIL SAFE
None
GD(H4SO)-219

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DN:DTC P2101 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL MOTOR CIRCUIT RANGE/

PERFORMANCE
Judge as NG when the motor current becomes large or drive circuit is heated.
12V 12V
(1)
(6)
(2) (3)
(4) (7)
(2) (5)
EN-01867
(1) Engine control module (ECM) (4) Drive circuit (6) Electronic throttle control relay
(2) Detecting circuit (5) Temperature detection circuit (7) Motor
(3) Overcurrent detection circuit
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Under control of electronic throttle con- ON
trol

GD(H4SO)-220

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Motor current ≤8A
Drive circuit inner temperature ≤ 175°C (347°F)

• 500 milliseconds (For NG)
• 2000 milliseconds (For OK)
8. FAIL SAFE
GD(H4SO)-221

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DO:DTC P2102 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL MOTOR CIRCUIT LOW

Judge as NG when the electronic throttle control power is not supplied even when ECM sets the electronic
throttle control relay to ON.
12V 12V
(1)
(4)
(2)
(3) (5)
EN-01868
(1) Engine control module (ECM) (3) Drive circuit (5) Motor
(2) Voltage detection circuit (4) Electronic throttle control relay
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Electronic throttle control relay output ON

Judgment Value
Motor power voltage ≥5V

GD(H4SO)-222

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

8. FAIL SAFE
GD(H4SO)-223

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DP:DTC P2103 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL MOTOR CIRCUIT HIGH

Judge as NG when the electronic throttle control power is supplied even when ECM sets the electronic throt-
tle control relay to OFF.
12V 12V
(1)
(4)
(2)
(3) (5)
EN-01868
(1) Engine control module (ECM) (3) Drive circuit (5) Motor
(2) Voltage detection circuit (4) Electronic throttle control relay
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Electronic throttle control relay output OFF

• When ignition switch ON → OFF
• Ignition switch OFF → ON (Only after clearing memory)
Judgment Value
Motor power voltage ≤5V

GD(H4SO)-224

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

8. FAIL SAFE
GD(H4SO)-225

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DQ:DTC P2109 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR “A” MINIMUM STOP

PERFORMANCE
Judge as NG when full close point learning cannot conducted or abnormal value is detected.
(1) (3)
(2)
(4)
EN-01869
(1) Engine control module (ECM) (3) Motor (4) Throttle position sensor
(2) Drive circuit
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Ignition switch ON → OFF
Ignition switch (only after clear memory) OFF → ON

Perform the diagnosis at full closed point learning.
Judgment Value
Throttle sensor opening angle at full 10.127° or more,
close point learning 19.872° or less
Throttle opening angle when the ignition ≥ 1.683°
switch is ON – Throttle minimum stop
position
Time Needed for Diagnosis: 8 — 80 milliseconds

GD(H4SO)-226

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

8. FAIL SAFE
GD(H4SO)-227

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DR:DTC P2122 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH “D” CIRCUIT

LOW INPUT
Detect the open or short circuit of accelerator pedal position sensor 1.
(4)
(1)
(2)
(3)
EN-01861
(1) Engine control module (ECM) (3) Accelerator pedal position sensor (4) Accelerator pedal position sensor
(2) Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal
1 signal
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Ignition switch ON

Judgment Value

GD(H4SO)-228

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
8. FAIL SAFE
• Single malfunction: Control with normal sensor
• Simultaneous failure: Throttle opening is fixed to 6°.
GD(H4SO)-229

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DS:DTC P2123 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH “D” CIRCUIT

HIGH INPUT
(4)
(1)
(2)
(3)
EN-01861
1 signal
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Ignition switch ON

Judgment Value

GD(H4SO)-230

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
8. FAIL SAFE
GD(H4SO)-231

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DT:DTC P2127 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH “E” CIRCUIT

LOW INPUT
(4)
(1)
(2)
(3)
EN-01861
1 signal
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Ignition switch ON

Judgment Value

GD(H4SO)-232

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
8. FAIL SAFE
GD(H4SO)-233

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DU:DTC P2128 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH “E” CIRCUIT

HIGH INPUT
(4)
(1)
(2)
(3)
EN-01861
1 signal
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Ignition switch ON

Judgment Value

GD(H4SO)-234

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
8. FAIL SAFE
GD(H4SO)-235

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DV:DTC P2135 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH “A”/“B”

VOLTAGE CORRELATION
Judge as NG when the signal level of throttle position sensor 1 is different from the throttle position sensor 2.
(3)
(4)
(1)
(2)
EN-01859
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Ignition switch ON

GD(H4SO)-236

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Signal difference between two sensors ≤ 4.5°
12
(11.75)
(3)
10
(9.75)
8
(7.625)
(1) 6
(5.5)
(4.5)
4
0
0(2.125)(4.25) (9.0) 10 20 30(31.625)
(2)
EN-04694
(1) Sensor output difference (°) (2) Throttle position sensor 1 (3) NG area
opening angle (°)
Time Needed for Diagnosis: 212 milliseconds (For NG)

8. FAIL SAFE
GD(H4SO)-237

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DW:DTC P2138 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH “D”/“E”

VOLTAGE CORRELATION
Judge as NG when the signal level of throttle position sensor 1 is different from the throttle position sensor 2.
(4)
(1)
(2)
(3)
EN-01861
1 signal
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Ignition switch ON
Battery voltage ≥ 6 (V)

Judgment Value
Signal difference between two sensors ≤ 1.465°
GD(H4SO)-238

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
(3.116)
(3)
(2.455)
(1.663)
(1)
(1.597)
(1.465)
0
0 (0.6) (1.2) (2.0) (4.0)
(2)
EN-05375
(1) Sensor output difference (°) (2) Throttle position sensor 2 open- (3) NG area
ing angle (°)

8. FAIL SAFE
Throttle opening is fixed to 6°.
GD(H4SO)-239

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DX:DTC P2227 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE

Detect the malfunction of barometric pressure sensor output property.
Judge as NG when the barometric pressure sensor output is largely different from the intake manifold pres-
sure at engine start.
The barometric pressure sensor is built into the ECM.
3. ENABLE CONDITION

Perform the diagnosis before engine starts with the ignition switch ON.
more.
Judgment Value
|Atmospheric pressure – Manifold pres- ≥ 26.7 kPa (200
sure| mmHg, 7.88 inHg)
|Intake manifold pressure at engine start < 1.33 kPa (10 mmHg,
– Manifold pressure| 2.95 inHg)

cles.
Normality Judgment
0.3 seconds or more.
Judgment Value
Barometric pressure – Manifold pressure < 26.7 kPa (200
mmHg, 7.88 inHg)

8. FAIL SAFE
Barometric pressure sensor process: Fix the barometric pressure to 101 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.8 inHg).
GD(H4SO)-240

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DY:DTC P2228 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT LOW

Detect the open/short circuit of the barometric pressure sensor.
3. ENABLE CONDITION
None

more.
Judgment Value
Ignition switch ON

Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Ignition switch ON

8. FAIL SAFE
GD(H4SO)-241

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DZ:DTC P2229 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT HIGH

Detect the open/short circuit of the barometric pressure sensor.
3. ENABLE CONDITION
None

more.
Judgment Value
Ignition switch ON

Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Ignition switch ON

8. FAIL SAFE
GD(H4SO)-242
ENGINE 2 SECTION
FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS) FU(H4DOTC)
EMISSION CONTROL
EC(H4DOTC)
INTAKE (INDUCTION) IN(H4DOTC)
MECHANICAL ME(H4DOTC)
with the necessary information and data EXHAUST EX(H4DOTC)
of SUBARU vehicles.
COOLING CO(H4DOTC)
sembling, inspection and adjustment of LUBRICATION LU(H4DOTC)
Please peruse and utilize this manual SPEED CONTROL SYSTEMS SP(H4DOTC)
their vehicle in optimum condition. IGNITION IG(H4DOTC)
SUBARU genuine parts. STARTING/CHARGING SYSTEMS SC(H4DOTC)
EN(H4DOTC)
(diag)
GENERAL DESCRIPTION GD(H4DOTC)

approval.

FU(H4DOTC)
Page
2. Throttle Body ............................................................................................12
3. Intake Manifold .........................................................................................13
4. Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor .......................................................26
5. Crankshaft Position Sensor ......................................................................27
6. Camshaft Position Sensor ........................................................................28
7. Knock Sensor ...........................................................................................29
8. Throttle Position Sensor ...........................................................................30
9. Mass Air Flow and Intake Air Temperature Sensor .................................31
10. Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor .........................................................32
11. Fuel Injector .............................................................................................33
12. Tumble Generator Valve Assembly .........................................................35
13. Tumble Generator Valve Actuator ............................................................36
14. Tumble Generator Valve Position Sensor ................................................37
15. Oil Flow Control Solenoid Valve ...............................................................38
16. Wastegate Control Solenoid Valve ..........................................................39
17. Front Oxygen (A/F) Sensor ......................................................................40
18. Rear Oxygen Sensor ................................................................................42
19. SI-DRIVE Selector ...................................................................................43
20. Engine Control Module (ECM) .................................................................44
21. Main Relay ...............................................................................................45
22. Fuel Pump Relay ......................................................................................46
23. Electronic Throttle Control Relay .............................................................47
24. Fuel Pump Control Unit ............................................................................48
25. Fuel ..........................................................................................................49
26. Fuel Tank .................................................................................................51
27. Fuel Filler Pipe .........................................................................................57
28. Fuel Pump ................................................................................................60
31. Fuel Filter .................................................................................................65
32. Fuel Damper Valve ..................................................................................66
33. Fuel Delivery, Return and Evaporation Lines ...........................................67
34. Fuel System Trouble in General ..............................................................71
General Description
A: SPECIFICATION
Capacity 64 2 (16.9 US gal, 14.1 Imp gal)
Fuel tank
Location Under rear seat
Type Impeller
Shutoff discharge pressure 550 — 850 kPa (5.61 — 8.67 kg/cm2, 79.8 — 123.3 psi)
Fuel pump
155 2 (40.9 US gal, 34.1 Imp gal)/h or more.
Discharge rate
[12 V at 300 kPa (3.06 kg/cm2, 43.5 psi)]
Fuel filter In-tank type
FU(H4DOTC)-2
General Description
B: COMPONENT
1. INTAKE MANIFOLD
T3
(18)
T3
(15)
T2
(23)
T2 T2
(24)
(16) (4)
(19) T2
(17)
(23)
T2
(27) B
(20) (5)
(12)
(26) (6)
(25)
T4
(14) A
T2
(10)
T4 T1
(3)
T2
(2)
(22)
T4 T4 (11) T1 T4
A
(11)
(3) (1)
T5
B T2 (13)
T5
(9)
(10)
(11)
(9)
(8)
(10)
(11)
T4
(7)
(21)
(7) (8)
T4
T4 FU-03082
FU(H4DOTC)-3
General Description
(1) Pressure regulator (13) Fuel injector pipe LH (24) Solenoid valve bracket
(2) Fuel hose (14) Fuel injector pipe RH (25) Vacuum hose B
(3) Clamp (15) Solenoid valve bracket (26) Vacuum hose A
(4) Purge control solenoid valve 1 (16) Manifold absolute pressure sensor (27) Air control hose
(5) Vacuum hose D (17) Filter
(6) Vacuum hose C (18) Intake manifold Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(7) Intake manifold gasket (19) Wastegate control solenoid valve T1: 1.25 (0.13, 0.94)
(8) Guide pin ASSY T2: 3.5 (0.36, 2.6)
(9) Intake manifold (lower) (20) Vacuum hose T3: 6.4 (0.65, 4.7)
(10) Fuel injector (21) Fuel pipe protector LH T4: 8.3 (0.85, 6.1)
(11) Seal ring (22) Fuel pipe protector RH T5: 19 (1.9, 14)
(12) Purge control solenoid valve 2 (23) O-ring T6: 25 (2.5, 18)
2. AIR INTAKE SYSTEM
(2)
(1)
FU-03017
(1) O-ring (2) Throttle body Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)

T: 8 (0.8, 5.9)
FU(H4DOTC)-4
General Description
3. CRANKSHAFT POSITION, CAMSHAFT POSITION AND KNOCK SENSORS
T1
(4)
T2
T1
T1
(1)
(3)
(2)
FU-03083
(1) Crankshaft position sensor (3) Camshaft position sensor LH Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(2) Knock sensor (4) Camshaft position sensor RH T1: 6.4 (0.65, 4.7)
T2: 24 (2.4, 17.4)
FU(H4DOTC)-5
General Description
4. FUEL TANK
(28)
T1
(29)
(17) (17)
(27)
(15)
(8) (16)
(17)
(17)
(7)
(14) (18)
T1
(10)
(17)
(9) (15)
(17) (26)
(25)
(1)
(17) (31) (12)
(30)
(11)
(32)
T4 (13)
(19)
(3)
(2) T4
(20) (21)
T4
T3 (6)
T3 (5) (21)
T3
T3
(22)
(23)
(24) (4)
T3
T2
T2 T3
FU-02861
FU(H4DOTC)-6
General Description
(1) Fuel tank (14) Fuel filler hose (27) Evaporation hose C
(2) Fuel tank band RH (15) Clamp (28) Evaporation hose D
(3) Fuel tank band LH (16) Evaporation hose A (29) Evaporation pipe
(4) Delivery tube (17) Clip (30) Evaporation hose E
(5) Return tube (18) Fuel tank protector LH (Rear) (31) Evaporation hose F
(6) Jet pump tube (19) Stopper RH (32) Fuel sub level sensor filter
(7) Fuel pump ASSY (20) Stopper LH (33) Fuel sub level sensor protector
(8) Fuel pump upper plate (21) Retainer
(9) Fuel pump gasket (22) Heat shield cover Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(10) Fuel level sensor (23) Fuel tank protector RH (Front) T1: 4.4 (0.45, 3.2)
(11) Fuel sub level sensor (24) Fuel tank protector LH (Front) T2: 9 (0.9, 6.6)
(12) Fuel sub level sensor upper plate (25) Evaporation hose B T3: 17.5 (1.78, 12.9)
(13) Fuel sub level sensor gasket (26) Connector T4: 33 (3.4, 25)
FU(H4DOTC)-7
General Description
5. FUEL LINE
T2
(27) (25)
(28)
(26) (23) T1
T1
T6 (38) (37)
(30) (23)
(23) (23)
(38) (21)
(39)
T6 (23) (23) (36)
T2 (31)
T2
(22) (23)
T2 C
(29) T2
(24)
(19)
(18)
T2 T2
(17)
(40) (41)
(1) (34)
(23) (1)
(42) (20) (33)
(16)
(1)
(32)
(1) C
(1)
A (31) (33)
A
T4 T3
B
(14)
B (15)
T5 (1)
(1)
(12) (1)
T5
(13) (13)
T5 (8) (43)
(2) (35)
(13)
(11)
(10)
(1)
(5)
(3)
(1)
(13)
D
(4) T5
(13) (35)
T2
T5 (9)
(6) (7)
D FU-03104
FU(H4DOTC)-8
General Description
(1) Clip (18) Drain filter (35) Fuel damper valve

(2) Fuel delivery hose A (19) Canister protector (36) Drain hose
(3) Evaporation hose A (20) Pressure control solenoid valve (37) Drain hose connector
(4) Fuel return hose A (21) Evaporation pipe A (38) Evaporation hose C
(5) Fuel return hose B (22) Evaporation pipe B (39) Evaporation hose D
(6) Fuel damper valve holder (23) Clip (40) Retainer
(7) Fuel damper valve bracket (24) Fuel filler pipe (41) Evaporation tube
(8) Fuel delivery hose B (25) Shut valve (42) Evaporation hose E
(9) Fuel pipe ASSY A (26) Gasket (43) Quick connector check cover
(10) Fuel delivery hose C (27) Filler ring
(11) Fuel return hose C (28) Fuel filler cap Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(12) Evaporation hose B (29) Fuel tank pressure sensor T1: 4.4 (0.45, 3.2)
(13) Clamp (30) Evaporation pipe protector T2: 7.5 (0.76, 5.5)
(14) Grommet (31) Connector A T3: 8 (0.8, 5.9)
(15) Fuel pipe ASSY B (32) Canister hose A T4: 17.6 (1.8, 13)
(16) Canister (33) Connector B T5: 1.25 (0.13, 0.94)
(17) Drain valve (34) Canister hose B T6: 1.0 (0.1, 0.7)
C: CAUTION
forming any work.
points.
the battery.
• Place “NO OPEN FLAMES” signs near the work-
ing area.
prevent from penetrating into floor or flowing out for
environmental protection.
cerning disposal of refuse when disposing fuel.
FU(H4DOTC)-9
General Description
D: PREPARATION TOOL
42099AE000 CONNECTOR Used for disconnecting quick connector on the
REMOVER fuel delivery hose side of the engine compart-
ment.
ST42099AE000
18371AA000 CONNECTOR Used for disconnecting the quick connector on
(Newly adopted tool) REMOVER the fuel return hose of the engine compartment.
ST18371AA000
hose.
• This is a general tool made by the French com-
pany CAILLAU. (code) 54.0.000.205
ST18353AA000
18471AA000 FUEL PIPE Used for draining fuel.
ADAPTER
ST18471AA000
FU(H4DOTC)-10
General Description

1B021XU0 SUBARU SELECT Used for draining fuel.
MONITOR III KIT
ST1B021XU0
FU(H4DOTC)-11
Throttle Body
2. Throttle Body 7) Disconnect the engine coolant hoses from the

throttle body.
A: REMOVAL
1) Remove the collector cover.
FU-01158
8) Remove the bolts which secure the throttle body

to the intake manifold.
IN-00203
B: INSTALLATION
3) Remove the intercooler. <Ref. to IN(H4DOTC)-
12, REMOVAL, Intercooler.> Install in the reverse order of removal.
4) Disconnect the connectors from the throttle posi- NOTE:
tion sensor. Use new O-rings.
Tightening torque:
8 N·m (0.8 kgf-m, 5.9 ft-lb)
FU-01157
5) Remove the bolts which secure the air by-pass

pipe and PCV pipe to the intake manifold, and loos- FU-01159
en the clamp which connects the throttle body and
duct.
FU-03020
6) Remove the duct from the throttle body.
FU(H4DOTC)-12
Intake Manifold
3. Intake Manifold 13) Disconnect the emission hose (A) and the con-
nector (B) from the PCV hose assembly.
A: REMOVAL
2) Release the fuel pressure.<Ref. to
FU(H4DOTC)-49, RELEASING OF FUEL PRES-
SURE, PROCEDURE, Fuel.>
(A) FU-02340
(B)
IN-00203
filler cap.
6) Lift the vehicle. FU-02339
8) Drain approximately 3.0 2 (3.2 US qt, 2.6 Imp 14) Remove the bolts which secure the air by-pass
qt) of coolant. pipe and PCV pipe to the intake manifold, and loos-
9) Remove the intake duct from the air cleaner en the clamp which connects the throttle body and
case. duct.
12, REMOVAL, Intercooler.>
12) Remove the coolant filler tank. <Ref. to
CO(H4DOTC)-31, REMOVAL, Coolant Filler
Tank.>
FU-03020
15) Remove the duct from the throttle body.

16) Disconnect the engine coolant hoses from the
throttle body.
FU-01158
FU(H4DOTC)-13
Intake Manifold
17) Disconnect the brake booster hose. 21) Disconnect the connector from power steering
pump switch.
FU-02341
FU-03022
18) Fit the cut out in the ST with the protrusion on
the clamp to unlock, and disconnect the PCV hose 22) Disconnect the knock sensor connector.
from the rocker cover.
FU-01164
23) Disconnect the connector from the secondary

FU-03116 air combination valve.
19) Disconnect the engine harness connectors
from the bulk head harness connector.
FU-02436
20) Disconnect the connectors from the engine

coolant temperature sensor (A), oil pressure switch
(B) and crankshaft position sensor (C).
(A)
(B)
(C) FU-03023
FU-00027
FU(H4DOTC)-14
Intake Manifold
24) Disconnect the connector from the camshaft 28) Attach ST to the fuel delivery pipe and push ST
position sensor. in the direction of arrow mark to disconnect the fuel
delivery hose.
CAUTION:
or cloth.
(A)
FU-01165
25) Disconnect the connector from the oil flow con-

trol solenoid valve. ST
(C)
(B) FU-03095

(B) Fuel return hose
(C) Evaporation hose
29) Disconnect the fuel return hose using the ST.

ME-03094
ST 18371AA000 CONNECTOR REMOVER
26) Disconnect the connector from ignition coil.
CAUTION:
or cloth.
(1) Attach the ST to the fuel return pipe as
shown in the figure.
IG-00092
27) Remove the engine harness fixed by clip (A)

from the rocker cover.
ST
FU-03092
(A)
(2) Insert the front side of ST into the quick con-
nector.
FU-03025
ST
FU-03113
FU(H4DOTC)-15
Intake Manifold
(3) Insert the back side of ST into the quick con- B: INSTALLATION
nector and push ST in the direction of arrow
1) Install the intake manifold onto cylinder heads.
mark to disconnect the fuel return hose.
NOTE:
Use a new gasket.
Tightening torque:
25 N·m (2.5 kgf-m, 18 ft-lb)
ST
FU-03114
30) Remove the clip and disconnect the evapora-

tion hose from the fuel pipe.
FU-03085
2) Connect the fuel delivery hose, return hose, and

evaporation hose.<Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-69, IN-
STALLATION, Fuel Delivery, Return and Evapora-
tion Lines.>
NOTE:
If fuel hoses or clamps are damaged, replace them
with new parts.
FU-03105
31) Remove the bolts which hold the tumble gener- (A)
ator valve assembly onto the cylinder head.
(C)
(B) FU-03106

FU-03085
3) Tighten the hose clamp screw.
Tightening torque:
1.25 N·m (0.13 kgf-m, 0.94 ft-lb)
FU(H4DOTC)-16
Intake Manifold
4) Connect the connector to the oil flow control so- 8) Connect the connectors to camshaft position
lenoid valve. sensor.
ME-03094 FU-01165
5) Connect the connector to the engine coolant 9) Connect the connector to the secondary air com-
temperature sensor (A), oil pressure switch (B) and bination valve.
crankshaft position sensor (C).
(A)
(B)
(C)
FU-00027
6) Connect the connector to the knock sensor.
FU-03023
FU-01164 10) Connect the connector to the ignition coil.

7) Connect the connector to the power steering
pump switch.
IG-00092
FU-03022
FU(H4DOTC)-17
Intake Manifold
11) Install the engine harness with clip (A) to the 15) Connect the engine coolant hoses to throttle
rocker cover. body.
(A)
FU-03025 FU-01158
12) Connect the engine harness connectors to the 16) Install the duct to the throttle body.
bulkhead harness connectors. 17) Attach the bolts which secure the air by-pass
pipe and PCV pipe to the intake manifold.
Tightening torque:
6.5 N·m (0.66 kgf-m, 4.8 ft-lb)
FU-02436
13) Connect the brake booster hose.
FU-03028
18) Connect the emission hose (A) and the con-

nector (B) to the PCV hose assembly.
(B)
FU-02341
14) Connect the PCV hose to the rocker cover and

lock it by fitting the clamp protrusion using ST.
FU-02339
NOTE:
Use a new clamp.
(A) FU-02340
FU-03116
19) Install the coolant filler tank.<Ref. to
CO(H4DOTC)-31, INSTALLATION, Coolant Filler
Tank.>
FU(H4DOTC)-18
Intake Manifold
20) Install the intercooler. <Ref. to IN(H4DOTC)- 4) Disconnect the filter assembly.
12, INSTALLATION, Intercooler.>
21) Install the intake duct to the air cleaner case.
22) Install the fuse of fuel pump to the main fuse
box.
23) Connect the battery ground cable to the bat-
tery.
24) Lift the vehicle.
26) Fill engine coolant. <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-13,
FU-03030
27) Install the collector cover. 5) Remove the solenoid valve bracket assembly
from the intake manifold, and disconnect the con-
C: DISASSEMBLY nector from the wastegate control solenoid valve,
1) Remove the engine ground terminal from the manifold absolute pressure sensor and purge con-
fuel pipe protector LH and remove the fuel pipe pro- trol solenoid valve 2.
tector LH from the intake manifold.
EC-00219
FU-03086
6) Disconnect the evaporation hose of the purge
2) Remove the fuel pipe protector RH from the in- control solenoid valve 2 from the intake duct and
take manifold. fuel pipe assembly.
7) Disconnect the connectors from the throttle posi-
tion sensor.
FU-03087
3) Disconnect the evaporation hose and the con-

FU-01157
nector from the purge control solenoid valve 1, and
remove the purge control solenoid valve 1 from the 8) Remove the throttle body from the intake mani-
intake manifold. fold.
FU-03031 FU-01159
FU(H4DOTC)-19
Intake Manifold
9) Disconnect the connector from the fuel injector 12) Remove the bolt which holds fuel injector pipe
and the tumble generator valve assembly. onto intake manifold.
• RH side
FU-03088
FU-03089
10) Remove the PCV pipe (A), harness assembly
(B) and intake duct (C) from the intake manifold. • LH side
(B)
(A)
(C)
FU-03033 FU-03090
11) Remove the bolt which secures the fuel injector 13) Remove the fuel injector.
pipe LH onto the front side of intake manifold, and • RH side
disconnect the pressure regulator vacuum hose
from the intake manifold.
FU-03094
FU-03108
• LH side
FU-03091
FU(H4DOTC)-20
Intake Manifold
14) Remove the bolt which secures the fuel pipe to D: ASSEMBLY
the intake manifold.
1) Install the tumble generator valve assembly onto
intake manifold.
NOTE:
Use new O-rings.
Tightening torque:
8.3 N·m (0.85 kgf-m, 6.1 ft-lb)
FU-03109
15) Remove the bolt which secures fuel injector

pipe RH onto the lower side of the intake manifold.
FU-03039
2) Install the fuel injector pipe.

3) Connect fuel hoses to fuel injector pipes on both
sides, and secure them with the clamps.
Tightening torque:
1.25 N·m (0.13 kgf-m, 0.94 ft-lb)
FU-03110
16) Loosen the clamp which holds the fuel hose to

the fuel injector pipe, and then disconnect the fuel
hose from pipe.
FU-03111
4) Tighten the bolts which secure the fuel injector

pipe RH to the lower side of the intake manifold.
FU-03111 Tightening torque:
6.4 N·m (0.65 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
17) Remove the fuel injector pipe.
18) Remove the tumble generator valve assembly
from the intake manifold.
FU-03110
FU-03039
FU(H4DOTC)-21
Intake Manifold
5) Tighten the bolts which secure the fuel pipe to 7) Tighten the bolts which secure fuel injector pipe
the intake manifold. onto intake manifold.
6.4 N·m (0.65 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb) 19 N·m (1.9 kgf-m, 14 ft-lb)
• LH side
FU-03109
FU-03090
6) Install the fuel injector.
• RH side • RH side
FU-03094 FU-03089
• LH side 8) Tighten the bolt which holds the fuel injector pipe
LH to the front side of the intake manifold, and con-
nect the pressure regulator vacuum hose to the in-
take manifold.
Tightening torque:
6.4 N·m (0.65 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
FU-03091
FU-03108
FU(H4DOTC)-22
Intake Manifold
9) Install PCV pipe (A), harness assembly (B) and 12) Connect the connector to the throttle position
intake duct (C) to the intake manifold. sensor.
Tightening torque:
6.5 N·m (0.66 kgf-m, 4.8 ft-lb)
(B)
(A)
FU-01157
(C) 13) Connect the evaporation hose to the purge

FU-03033 control solenoid valve 2.
10) Connect the connector to the fuel injector and NOTE:
the tumble generator valve assembly. Connect the evaporation hose as shown in the fig-
ure.
(A)
FU-03088
11) Install the throttle body to the intake manifold.

NOTE:
Use new O-rings.
(c) (a)
Tightening torque: (B)
8 N·m (0.8 kgf-m, 5.9 ft-lb)
(b)
(c) EC-02201
(A) Purge control solenoid valve 1

(B) Purge control solenoid valve 2
(a) To intake manifold
FU-01159
(b) To intake duct
(c) To fuel pipe
FU(H4DOTC)-23
Intake Manifold
14) Connect the connectors to the wastegate con- 16) Connect the evaporation hose and the connec-
trol solenoid valve, manifold absolute pressure tor to the purge control solenoid valve 1, and install
sensor and purge control solenoid valve 2, and in- the purge control solenoid valve 1 to the intake
stall the solenoid valve bracket assembly to the in- manifold.
take manifold.
Tightening torque:
Tightening torque: 6.4 N·m (0.65 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
19 N·m (1.9 kgf-m, 14 ft-lb)
FU-03031
EC-00219
NOTE:
15) Connect the filter assembly. Connect the evaporation hose as shown in the fig-
ure.
(A)
FU-03030
(c) (a)
(B)
(b)
(c) EC-02201
(A) Purge control solenoid valve 1

(B) Purge control solenoid valve 2
(b) To intake duct
(c) To fuel pipe
FU(H4DOTC)-24
Intake Manifold
17) Install the fuel pipe protector RH to the intake

manifold.
Tightening torque:
19 N·m (1.9 kgf-m, 14 ft-lb)
FU-03087
18) Install the fuel pipe protector LH to the intake

manifold, and install the engine ground terminal to
the fuel pipe protector LH.
Tightening torque:
19 N·m (1.9 kgf-m, 14 ft-lb)
FU-03086
E: INSPECTION
Make sure that the fuel pipe and fuel hose are not
cracked and that the connections are tight.
FU(H4DOTC)-25
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor

4. Engine Coolant Temperature

Sensor
A: REMOVAL
IN-00203

4) Drain engine coolant. <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-
13, DRAINING OF ENGINE COOLANT, RE-
PLACEMENT, Engine Coolant.>
5) Disconnect the connectors from the engine cool-
ant temperature sensor.
FU-00055
6) Remove the engine coolant temperature sensor.

B: INSTALLATION
NOTE:
Use a new gasket.
Tightening torque:
18 N·m (1.8 kgf-m, 13.3 ft-lb)
FU(H4DOTC)-26
Crankshaft Position Sensor

5. Crankshaft Position Sensor B: INSTALLATION

A: REMOVAL
1) Remove the collector cover. Tightening torque:
2) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. T: 6.4 N·m (0.65 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
FU-00058
IN-00203

4) Remove the bolt which installs crankshaft posi-
tion sensor to cylinder block.
FU-00056
5) Remove the crankshaft position sensor, and

then disconnect the connector from it.
FU-00057
FU(H4DOTC)-27
Camshaft Position Sensor

6. Camshaft Position Sensor

A: REMOVAL
IN-00203
3) Disconnect the connector from camshaft posi-

tion sensor RH.
4) Remove the camshaft position sensor RH from
the rear side of the cylinder head.
FU-01185
5) Remove the cam shaft position sensor LH in the

same way as RH.
B: INSTALLATION
Tightening torque:
6.4 N·m (0.65 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
FU(H4DOTC)-28
Knock Sensor
7. Knock Sensor B: INSTALLATION

1) Install the knock sensor to the cylinder block.
A: REMOVAL
1) Remove the collector cover. NOTE:
2) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. The portion of the knock sensor cord that is pulled
out must be positioned at a 60° angle relative to the
engine rear.
Tightening torque:
24 N·m (2.4 kgf-m, 17.4 ft-lb)
(A)
IN-00203

60
4) Disconnect the knock sensor connector.
FU-00413
(A) Front side
FU-01164
5) Remove the knock sensor from the cylinder

block.
FU-01164
3) Install the intercooler.<Ref. to IN(H4DOTC)-12,

INSTALLATION, Intercooler.>
4) Connect the battery ground cable to the battery.
FU-00519
IN-00203
5) Install the collector cover.
FU(H4DOTC)-29
Throttle Position Sensor

8. Throttle Position Sensor

A: SPECIFICATION
Throttle body is a non-disassembled part, so do not
remove the throttle position sensor from throttle
body.
Refer to “Throttle Body” for removal and installation
procedure. <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-12, REMOVAL,
Throttle Body.> <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-12, IN-
STALLATION, Throttle Body.>
FU(H4DOTC)-30
Mass Air Flow and Intake Air Temperature Sensor

9. Mass Air Flow and Intake Air

Temperature Sensor
A: REMOVAL
IN-00203
2) Disconnect the connector from the mass air flow

and intake air temperature sensor.
3) Remove the mass air flow and intake air temper-
ature sensor.
FU-01187
B: INSTALLATION
Tightening torque:
1 N·m (0.1 kgf-m, 0.7 ft-lb)
FU(H4DOTC)-31
Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor

10.Manifold Absolute Pressure

Sensor
A: REMOVAL
IN-00203
3) Disconnect the connector from manifold abso-

lute pressure sensor (A), and remove the filter as-
sembly (B) from intake manifold.
4) Remove the manifold absolute pressure sensor
from the solenoid valve bracket.
(A)
(B)
FU-01188
B: INSTALLATION
Tightening torque:
6.4 N·m (0.65 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
FU(H4DOTC)-32
Fuel Injector
11.Fuel Injector 9) Remove the fuel injector.
A: REMOVAL
1. RH SIDE
FU-03094
2. LH SIDE
IN-00203
filler cap.
FU(H4DOTC)-13, REMOVAL, Intake Manifold.>
6) Remove the fuel pipe protector RH from the in-
take manifold.
IN-00203
filler cap.
6) Remove the engine ground terminal from the
fuel pipe protector LH and remove the fuel pipe pro-
tector LH from the intake manifold.
FU-03087
7) Disconnect the connector from fuel injector.

8) Remove the bolt which holds fuel injector pipe
FU-03086
7) Disconnect the connector from fuel injector.
FU-03089
FU(H4DOTC)-33
Fuel Injector
8) Remove the bolt which holds fuel injector pipe Tightening torque:
onto intake manifold. 19 N·m (1.9 kgf-m, 14 ft-lb)
FU-03034 FU-03087
2. LH SIDE
NOTE:
Use new O-rings.
Tightening torque:
19 N·m (1.9 kgf-m, 14 ft-lb)
FU-03090
9) Remove the fuel injector.
FU-03090
Tightening torque:
6.4 N·m (0.65 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
FU-03091
B: INSTALLATION
1. RH SIDE
NOTE:
Use new O-rings.
FU-03034
Tightening torque:
19 N·m (1.9 kgf-m, 14 ft-lb) Tightening torque:
19 N·m (1.9 kgf-m, 14 ft-lb)
FU-03089
FU-03086
FU(H4DOTC)-34
Tumble Generator Valve Assembly

12.Tumble Generator Valve As- B: INSTALLATION

sembly Install in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
A: REMOVAL Use a new gasket.
1) Release the fuel pressure. <Ref. to
FU(H4DOTC)-49, RELEASING OF FUEL PRES- Tightening torque:
SURE, PROCEDURE, Fuel.> 8.3 N·m (0.85 kgf-m, 6.1 ft-lb)
FU-03039
IN-00203
filler cap.
5) Remove the intake manifold.<Ref. to
6) Disconnect the connector from the tumble gen-
erator valve assembly.
FU-03093
7) Remove the fuel injector.<Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-

33, REMOVAL, Fuel Injector.>
8) Remove the tumble generator valve body from
intake manifold.
FU-03039
FU(H4DOTC)-35
Tumble Generator Valve Actuator

13.Tumble Generator Valve Ac-

tuator
A: SPECIFICATION
The tumble generator valve assembly cannot be
disassembled.
Refer to “Tumble Generator Valve Assembly” for
removal and installation procedure. <Ref. to
FU(H4DOTC)-35, REMOVAL, Tumble Generator
Valve Assembly.> <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-35, IN-
STALLATION, Tumble Generator Valve Assem-
bly.>
FU(H4DOTC)-36
Tumble Generator Valve Position Sensor

14.Tumble Generator Valve Po-

sition Sensor
A: SPECIFICATION
The tumble generator valve assembly cannot be
disassembled.
Refer to “Tumble Generator Valve Assembly” for
removal and installation procedure. <Ref. to
FU(H4DOTC)-35, REMOVAL, Tumble Generator
Valve Assembly.> <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-35, IN-
STALLATION, Tumble Generator Valve Assem-
bly.>
FU(H4DOTC)-37
Oil Flow Control Solenoid Valve

15.Oil Flow Control Solenoid D: ASSEMBLY

Valve 1) Install the oil flow control solenoid valve.
A: REMOVAL Tightening torque:

8 N·m (0.8 kgf-m, 5.9 ft-lb)
Oil flow control solenoid valve is a unit with cam- 2) Apply liquid gasket to the two bolts which secure
shaft cap. the oil return cover.
Refer to “Camshaft” for removal procedure. <Ref.
to ME(H4DOTC)-53, REMOVAL, Camshaft.> Liquid gasket:
B: INSTALLATION equivalent
Refer to “Camshaft” for installation procedure. 3) Attach the oil return cover and gasket.
<Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-54, INSTALLATION, Cam-
Tightening torque:
shaft.>
8 N·m (0.8 kgf-m, 5.9 ft-lb)
C: DISASSEMBLY NOTE:
1) Remove the 2 mounting bolts and remove the oil Use a new gasket.
return cover and gasket.
2) Remove the mounting bolt and remove the oil
flow control solenoid valve. (D)
(C)
(B) (A)
(D)
(C)
(B) (A)
FU-03158
(A) Oil flow control solenoid valve

FU-03158 (B) Oil return cover
(C) Gasket
(A) Oil flow control solenoid valve (D) Camshaft cap
(B) Oil return cover
(C) Gasket
(D) Camshaft cap
FU(H4DOTC)-38
Wastegate Control Solenoid Valve

16.Wastegate Control Solenoid

Valve
A: REMOVAL
IN-00203
3) Disconnect the connector from the wastegate

control solenoid valve (A).
4) Disconnect pressure hose (B) from the waste-
gate control solenoid valve.
5) Remove the wastegate control solenoid valve
from the bracket
(B)
(A)
FU-01192
B: INSTALLATION
Tightening torque:
6.4 N·m (0.65 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
FU(H4DOTC)-39

17.Front Oxygen (A/F) Sensor 9) Remove the front oxygen (A/F) sensor.
CAUTION:
A: REMOVAL When removing the oxygen (A/F) sensor, wait
1) Set the vehicle on a lift. until exhaust pipe cools, otherwise it will dam-
2) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. age the exhaust pipe.
IN-00203 FU-00080
3) Disconnect the connector from front oxygen (A/
F) sensor.
4) Disconnect the engine harness fixed by a clip,
from the bracket.
(A)
(B)
FU-03096

(B) Clip
5) Remove the front right side wheel.

FU-00783
8) Apply spray-type lubricant or equivalent to the

threaded portion of front oxygen (A/F) sensor, and
leave it for one minute or more.
FU(H4DOTC)-40

B: INSTALLATION 7) Connect the connector of front oxygen (A/F)

sensor.
1) Before installing front oxygen (A/F) sensor, ap-
ply the anti-seize compound only to the threaded (A)
portion of front oxygen (A/F) sensor. This facilitates
the next removal.
CAUTION:
tor of front oxygen (A/F) sensor.
NEVER-SEEZ NSN, JET LUBE SS-30 or (B)
equivalent FU-03096
2) Install the front oxygen (A/F) sensor.
Tightening torque:
(B) Clip
30 N·m (3.1 kgf-m, 22.1 ft-lb)
FU-00080
3) Install the service hole cover. IN-00203
FU-00783

5) Install the front right side wheel.
Tightening torque:
120 N·m (12.2 kgf-m, 88.5 ft-lb)
6) Connect the engine harness to the bracket using
a clip.
FU(H4DOTC)-41
Rear Oxygen Sensor

18.Rear Oxygen Sensor B: INSTALLATION

1) Before installing rear oxygen (A/F) sensor, apply
A: REMOVAL the anti-seize compound only to the threaded por-
1) Set the vehicle on a lift. tion of rear oxygen (A/F) sensor. This facilitates the
2) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. next removal.
CAUTION:
tor of rear oxygen sensor.
NEVER-SEEZ NSN, JET LUBE SS-30 or
equivalent
2) Install the rear oxygen sensor.
Tightening torque:
IN-00203 21 N·m (2.1 kgf-m, 15.2 ft-lb)
4) Disconnect the connector from the rear oxygen
sensor.
5) Apply spray-type lubricant or equivalent to the
threaded portion of rear oxygen sensor, and leave
it for one minute or more.
6) Remove the rear oxygen sensor.
CAUTION:
When removing the rear oxygen sensor, wait
until exhaust pipe cools, otherwise it may dam- FU-01194
age the exhaust pipe. 3) Connect the connector to rear oxygen sensor.
FU-01194
IN-00203
FU(H4DOTC)-42
SI-DRIVE Selector
19.SI-DRIVE Selector C: INSPECTION

Measure the resistance between SI-DRIVE selec-
A: REMOVAL tor terminals.
5 4 3 2 1
FU-03123
IN-00203
Switch position Terminal No. Standard
2) Remove the console box. <Ref. to EI-50, RE-
MOVAL, Glove Box.> Sport (when turning the SI-
Less than 1 Ω
DRIVE selector to the left)
3) Disconnect the connectors from the SI-DRIVE
selector. Intelligent (when pushing
0.95 — 1.05 kΩ
the SI-DRIVE selector) 2 and 3
Sport Sharp (when turning
the SI-DRIVE selector to 3.48 — 3.85 kΩ
the right)
AT-03718
4) Remove the screws securing the upper side of

the SI-DRIVE selector to the console box.
AT-03719
5) Remove the screws which secure the cup holder

to the console box, then remove the SI-DRIVE se-
lector.
B: INSTALLATION
FU(H4DOTC)-43
b07usen145.fm 44 ページ２０２２年６月３日　金曜日　午後８時３０分
Engine Control Module (ECM)

20.Engine Control Module (ECM) B: INSTALLATION

A: REMOVAL
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. CAUTION:
When the ECM has been replaced, be sure to
perform the registration of VIN. <Ref. to
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-43, V.I.N. REGISTRATION,
OPERATION, Subaru Select Monitor.>
NOTE:
When replacing the ECM, be careful not to use the
wrong spec. ECM to avoid any damage on the fuel
injection system.
Tightening torque:
IN-00203 7.5 N·m (0.8 kgf-m, 5.5 ft-lb)
2) Remove the lower inner trim of passenger’s
side.<Ref. to EI-58, REMOVAL, Lower Inner Trim.>
3) Detach the floor mat of passenger’s seat.
4) Remove the protect cover.
FU-00896
5) Remove the bolts and nuts which hold the ECM

to the bracket.
6) Remove the clip (A) from bracket.
(A)
FU-02612
7) Disconnect the ECM connectors, and take out

the ECM.
FU(H4DOTC)-44
Main Relay
21.Main Relay
A: REMOVAL
IN-00203

AL, Glove Box.>
(A)
FU-02092
4) Disconnect the connectors from main relay.
FU-02093
B: INSTALLATION
FU(H4DOTC)-45
Fuel Pump Relay

22.Fuel Pump Relay

A: REMOVAL
IN-00203

AL, Glove Box.>
(A)
FU-02092
4) Disconnect the connector from fuel pump relay.
FU-02094
B: INSTALLATION
FU(H4DOTC)-46
Electronic Throttle Control Relay

23.Electronic Throttle Control

Relay
A: REMOVAL
IN-00203

AL, Glove Box.>
(A)
FU-02092
4) Disconnect the connector from electric throttle

control relay.
FU-02095
B: INSTALLATION
FU(H4DOTC)-47
Fuel Pump Control Unit

24.Fuel Pump Control Unit

A: REMOVAL
IN-00203
2) Remove the rear quarter trim. <Ref. to EI-60,

REMOVAL, Rear Quarter Trim.>
3) Remove the fuel pump control unit.
FU-01195
4) Disconnect the connector from fuel pump control

unit.
B: INSTALLATION
Tightening torque:
5 N·m (0.5 kgf-m, 3.7 ft-lb)
FU(H4DOTC)-48
Fuel
25.Fuel 4) Lift the vehicle.

5) Remove the fuel tank protector.
A: PROCEDURE 6) Set a container under the vehicle and remove
the fuel drain plug from fuel tank to drain fuel from
1. RELEASING OF FUEL PRESSURE fuel tank.
WARNING:
working area.
CAUTION:
1) Remove the fuse of fuel pump from main fuse
box.
FU-02834
7) Tighten the fuel drain plugs.

NOTE:
Use a new gasket.
Tightening torque:
26 N·m (2.65 kgf-m, 19.2 ft-lb)
FU-01122 8) Install the fuel tank protector.
2) Start the engine and run it until it stalls. NOTE:
3) After the engine stalls, crank it for five more sec- Use new nuts.
onds. Tightening torque:
4) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. Nut
2. DRAINING FUEL 9 N·m (0.9 kgf-m, 6.6 ft-lb)
Bolt
WARNING: 17.5 N·m (1.78 kgf-m, 12.9 ft-lb)
Place “NO OPEN FLAMES” signs near the 9) Lower the vehicle.
working area.
CAUTION:
NOTE:
For the fuel tank without fuel drain plug, refer to
DRAINING FUEL (WITH SUBARU SELECT MON-
ITOR). <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-50, DRAINING
FUEL (WITH SUBARU SELECT MONITOR),
PROCEDURE, Fuel.>
IN-00203
filler cap.
FU(H4DOTC)-49
Fuel
3. DRAINING FUEL 4. DRAINING FUEL

(WITH SUBARU SELECT MONITOR) (THROUGH THE FUEL FILLER HOSE)
WARNING: WARNING:
Place “NO OPEN FLAMES” signs near the Place “NO OPEN FLAMES” signs near the
working area. working area.
CAUTION: CAUTION:
Be careful not to spill fuel. • Be careful not to spill fuel.
NOTE: • Fuel may remain in the fuel filler pipe. Per-
• If the fuel pump cannot be actuated, refer to form the work after draining the fuel from the
DRAINING FUEL (THROUGH THE FUEL FILLER fuel filler pipe through the fill opening using the
HOSE) <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-50, DRAINING gasoline proof pump and the gasoline proof
FUEL (THROUGH THE FUEL FILLER HOSE), hose (ø10 or less).
PROCEDURE, Fuel.>. 1) Set the vehicle on a lift.
• Be careful not to allow the battery to go flat. 2) Lift up the vehicle.
1) Release the fuel pressure. <Ref. to 3) Remove the rear exhaust pipe and muffler.
FU(H4DOTC)-49, RELEASING OF FUEL PRES- <Ref. to EX(H4DOTC)-12, REMOVAL, Rear Ex-
SURE, PROCEDURE, Fuel.> haust Pipe.> <Ref. to EX(H4DOTC)-14, REMOV-
2) Attach ST to the fuel delivery pipe and push ST AL, Muffler.>
in the direction of arrow mark to disconnect the fuel 4) Open the fuel filler flap lid, and remove the fuel
delivery hose. filler cap.
ST 42099AE000 CONNECTOR REMOVER 5) Drain the fuel from the fuel filler pipe through the
fill opening using the gasoline proof pump and the
CAUTION: gasoline proof hose (ø10 or less).
• Be careful not to spill fuel. 6) Disconnect the fuel filler hose (A) from the fuel
• Catch the fuel from hoses using a container filler pipe.
or cloth.
CAUTION:
(A) • Catch the fuel from hoses using a container
or cloth.
ST
(C)
(B)
(B) FU-03095
3) Connect ST to the fuel delivery hose.

(A)
ST 18471AA000 FUEL PIPE ADAPTER
4) Connect the gasoline proof hose to ST, and put FU-02394
the hose end into the container.
5) Actuate the fuel pump and drain the fuel using (A) Fuel filler hose
Subaru Select Monitor <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(di- (B) Evaporation hose
ag)-58, FUEL PUMP CONTROL (ON/OFF OPER-
ATION), OPERATION, System Operation Check 7) Set a container under the vehicle and insert the
Mode.>. gasoline proof hose (ø10 or less) into the fuel filler
hose to drain the fuel.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to spill fuel. CAUTION:
FU(H4DOTC)-50
Fuel Tank
26.Fuel Tank 8) Remove the service hole cover of fuel sub level
sensor.
A: REMOVAL (1) Remove the bolt (A).
WARNING: (2) Push the grommet (B) down and remove the
Place “NO OPEN FLAMES” signs near the service hole cover.
working area.
CAUTION: (A)
(A)
3) Drain fuel from fuel tank.<Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-
49, DRAINING FUEL, PROCEDURE, Fuel.> (B)
FU-01126
5) Remove the service hole cover of fuel pump. 9) Disconnect connector (A) from fuel sub level
sensor.
10) Disconnect the quick connector of fuel delivery
(B) and return hose (C). <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-67,
REMOVAL, Fuel Delivery, Return and Evaporation
Lines.>
(A)
(C)
FU-02387
(B)
FU-01127
11) Remove the trunk room trim. (Sedan mod-

el)<Ref. to EI-67, REMOVAL, Trunk Room Trim.>
12) Remove the rear quarter trim. (Wagon mod-
el)<Ref. to EI-60, WAGON MODEL, REMOVAL,
Rear Quarter Trim.>
13) Remove the pipe protector.
FU-02388
7) Remove the connector (A) and clip (B).

(B)
(A)
FU-02390
FU-02389
FU(H4DOTC)-51
Fuel Tank
14) Remove the grommet and disconnect the quick 23) Disconnect the connector from the rear ABS
connector of the evaporation pipe. <Ref. to wheel speed sensor.
FU(H4DOTC)-67, REMOVAL, Fuel Delivery, Re-
turn and Evaporation Lines.>
FU-02894
24) Remove the bolts securing the parking brake

FU-02391
cable clamp.
15) Remove the rear wheels.
16) Remove the bolts which secure the rear brake
hose mounting bracket.
FU-02895
FU-01128
17) Remove the rear brake caliper and tie it to the

body side of the vehicle.
FU-02896
25) Remove the rear suspension assembly.

WARNING:
FU-00462 (1) Support the rear differential with the trans-
mission jack.
18) Remove the parking brake cable from the park- (2) Remove the bolts which hold the rear shock
ing brake assembly. <Ref. to PB-6, REMOVAL, absorber to the rear suspension arm.
Parking Brake Assembly (Rear Disc Brake).>
20) Remove the rear exhaust pipe.<Ref. to
EX(H4DOTC)-12, REMOVAL, Rear Exhaust
Pipe.>
21) Remove the propeller shaft. <Ref. to DS-10,
REMOVAL, Propeller Shaft.>
22) Remove the heat shield cover.
FU-01132
FU(H4DOTC)-52
Fuel Tank
(3) Remove the bolts which secure the rear 28) Disconnect the fuel filler hose (A) and evapora-
suspension assembly to the body. tion hose (B).
(B)
(A)
FU-01133 FU-02394

remove the bolts from the fuel tank band, and re-
move the fuel tank from the vehicle.
WARNING:
FU-03100
(4) Remove the rear suspension assembly.

26) Disconnect the connector.
FU-02897
B: INSTALLATION
set the fuel tank in place, and temporarily tighten
the bolts of the fuel tank band.
WARNING:
FU-02392 A helper is required to perform this work.
27) Disconnect the evaporation hose.
FU-02897
FU-02393
FU(H4DOTC)-53
Fuel Tank
2) Securely insert the fuel filler hose (A) and evap- 6) Install the rear suspension assembly.
oration hose (B) to the specified position, then tight- CAUTION:
en the clamp.
mission jack.
(2) Support the rear suspension assembly, and
tighten the bolts which secure the rear suspen-
sion assembly to the body.
(B)
Tightening torque:
T1: 125 N·m (12.7 kgf-m, 92.2 ft-lb)
(A) T2: 175 N·m (17.8 kgf-m, 129 ft-lb)
FU-02394
T1 T1
(2) (3)
(1)
T1
T1
L/2
FU-01150
L
FU-00104
(1) Hose
(2) Clip or clamp
(3) Pipe
3) Connect the evaporation hose.

T2
T2
FU-03101
(3) Tighten the bolts which hold the rear shock

absorber to the rear suspension arm. <Ref. to
RS-10, INSTALLATION, Rear Arm.>
Tightening torque:
62 N·m (6.3 kgf-m, 46 ft-lb)
FU-02393
4) Tighten the fuel tank band bolts.

Tightening torque:
33 N·m (3.4 kgf-m, 25 ft-lb)
5) Connect the connector.
FU-01132
FU-02392
FU(H4DOTC)-54
Fuel Tank
7) Tighten the bolts holding the parking brake cable 15) Tighten the bolts which secure the rear brake
clamp. hose mounting bracket.
18 N·m (1.8 kgf-m, 13.3 ft-lb) 33 N·m (3.4 kgf-m, 25 ft-lb)
FU-02895 FU-01128
Tightening torque: 16) Install the rear wheels.

32 N·m (3.3 kgf-m, 23.9 ft-lb) Tightening torque:
120 N·m (12.2 kgf-m, 88.5 ft-lb)
17) Connect the quick connector of the evaporation
pipe. <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-69, INSTALLATION,
Fuel Delivery, Return and Evaporation Lines.>
FU-02896
8) Connect the connector to the rear ABS wheel

speed sensor.
FU-02391
18) Install the pipe protector.

Tightening torque:
T1: 1.0 N·m (0.1 kgf-m, 0.7 ft-lb)
T2: 7.5 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 5.5 ft-lb)
FU-02894 T2
9) Install the heat shield cover.
10) Install the propeller shaft. <Ref. to DS-11, IN-
STALLATION, Propeller Shaft.>
11) Install the rear exhaust pipe. <Ref. to T1
EX(H4DOTC)-12, INSTALLATION, Rear Exhaust

Pipe.>
FU-02868
13) Connect the parking brake cable to the parking 19) Install the trunk room trim. (Sedan model)
brake assembly. <Ref. to PB-7, INSTALLATION, <Ref. to EI-68, INSTALLATION, Trunk Room
Parking Brake Assembly (Rear Disc Brake).> Trim.>
14) Install the rear brake caliper. 20) Install the rear quarter trim. (Wagon model)
<Ref. to EI-61, INSTALLATION, Rear Quarter
Trim.>
21) Connect connector (A) to the fuel sub level sen-
sor.
FU(H4DOTC)-55
Fuel Tank
22) Connect the quick connector of fuel delivery (B) 25) Connect the connector to the fuel pump.
and return hose (C). <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-69, IN-
STALLATION, Fuel Delivery, Return and Evapora-
tion Lines.>
NOTE:
When connecting, be careful not to reverse the de-
livery side and return side.
(A) FU-02388
(C) 26) Install the service hole cover of fuel pump.
(B)
FU-01127
23) Install the service hole cover of fuel sub level

sensor.
(A) FU-02387
27) Install the rear seat.

(A)
C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the fuel tank does not have holes,
cracks or is damaged in any other way.
(B)
FU-01126 2) Make sure that the fuel pipe and fuel hose are
not cracked and that the connections are tight.
(A) Bolt
(B) Grommet
24) Connect connector (A), and install clip (B).

(B)
(A)
FU-02389
FU(H4DOTC)-56
Fuel Filler Pipe

27.Fuel Filler Pipe 11) Loosen the clamp, and disconnect the fuel filler
hose (A) and evaporation hose (B).
A: REMOVAL
WARNING:
working area.
CAUTION: (B)
2) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. (A)
FU-02396
(B)
IN-00203
FU-02397
filler cap.
4) Remove the screws which secure gasket. 12) Remove the fuel filler pipe to the underside of
the vehicle.
B: INSTALLATION
1) Open the fuel filler flap lid.
2) Set the fuel saucer (A) with rubber seal (C), and
insert the fuel filler pipe into hole from the inner side
of apron.
3) Align the holes in fuel filler pipe neck and set the
cup (B), and tighten the screws.
FU-00095
NOTE:
If the edges of rubber seal are folded toward inside,
5) Remove the rear wheel RH. straighten it with a flat tip screwdriver.
(A)
7) Drain fuel from fuel tank. <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-
49, DRAINING FUEL, PROCEDURE, Fuel.>
8) Remove the mud guard. <Ref. to EI-29, RE-
MOVAL, Mud Guard.>
9) Remove the rear sub frame. <Ref. to RS-21, RE-
MOVAL, Rear Sub Frame.> (B)
10) Remove the bolts which hold fuel filler pipe
(C)
bracket on the body.
FU-00103
FU-02395
FU(H4DOTC)-57
Fuel Filler Pipe

4) Securely insert the fuel filler hose (A) and evap- 6) Install the rear sub frame. <Ref. to RS-21, IN-
oration hose (B) to the specified position, then tight- STALLATION, Rear Sub Frame.>
en the clamp. 7) Install the mud guard. <Ref. to EI-29, INSTAL-
LATION, Mud Guard.>
9) Install the rear wheel RH.
Tightening torque:
120 N·m (12.2 kgf-m, 88.5 ft-lb)
(B)
10) Connect the battery ground cable to the bat-
tery.
(A)
FU-02396
(B)
IN-00203
C: INSPECTION
FU-02397 1) Check that the fuel filler pipe does not have
holes, cracks or is damaged in any other way.
(2) (3)
2) Make sure that the fuel hose is not cracked and
(1) that the connections are tight.
L/2
L
FU-00104
(1) Hose
(2) Clip or clamp
(3) Pipe
5) Tighten the bolts which hold fuel filler pipe brack-

et on the body.
Tightening torque:
7.5 N·m (0.76 kgf-m, 5.5 ft-lb)
FU-02395
FU(H4DOTC)-58
Fuel Filler Pipe

D: DISASSEMBLY E: ASSEMBLY
1) Move the clamp and disconnect the evaporation 1) Install the shut pipe to the fuel filler pipe. <Ref. to
hose from the shut valve. EC(H4DOTC)-17, INSTALLATION, Shut Valve.>
2) Tighten the nuts which secure the evaporation
FU-02398
2) Remove the nut which holds the evaporation

FU-02399
FU-02399 FU-02400
Tightening torque:
7.5 N·m (0.8 kgf-m, 5.5 ft-lb)
3) Connect the evaporation hose to the shut valve.
FU-02400

<Ref. to EC(H4DOTC)-17, REMOVAL, Shut
Valve.> FU-02398
FU(H4DOTC)-59
Fuel Pump
28.Fuel Pump 7) Disconnect the quick connector, then disconnect

the fuel delivery hose, return hose and jet pump
A: REMOVAL hose. <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-67, REMOVAL, Fuel
Delivery, Return and Evaporation Lines.>
WARNING:
8) Remove the nuts which install fuel pump assem-
bly onto fuel tank.
working area.
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to spill fuel. (B)
• Before starting work, be sure to reduce fuel in (C)
NOTE:
Fuel pump assembly consists of fuel pump, fuel fil-
ter and fuel level sensor.
1) Release the fuel pressure. <Ref. to (A) FU-01140
SURE, PROCEDURE, Fuel.> (A) Delivery hose
2) Drain fuel. <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-49, DRAIN- (B) Return hose
ING FUEL, PROCEDURE, Fuel.> (C) Jet pump hose
9) Remove the fuel pump assembly from the fuel
tank.
B: INSTALLATION
NOTE:
IN-00203 • Install with the protrusion (A) of gasket aimed at
the front side of the vehicle.
• Insert the protrusion (B) of gasket to the upper
5) Remove the service hole cover. plate. (3 places)
• Align the protrusion (C) of fuel pump assembly
with the cutout on the upper plate.
• Tighten the nuts to the specified torque in the or-
der as shown in the figure.
Tightening torque:
4.4 N·m (0.45 kgf-m, 3.2 ft-lb)
(C)
1
4 8
FU-02387 (B)
(B)
6 5
7 3
2 (A)
(B) FU-02835
FU-02388
FU(H4DOTC)-60
Fuel Pump
C: INSPECTION
Connect the lead harness to the connector terminal
of fuel pump, and apply the battery power supply to
check whether the pump operates.
WARNING:
• Wipe off fuel completely.
• Keep the battery as far apart from fuel pump
as possible.
• Be sure to turn the battery supply to ON and
OFF on the battery side.
• Do not run the fuel pump for a long time un-
der non-load condition.
2 1
4 3
6 5
FU-01330
FU(H4DOTC)-61
Fuel Level Sensor

29.Fuel Level Sensor

A: REMOVAL
WARNING:
working area.
CAUTION:
NOTE:
The fuel level sensor is built in fuel pump assembly.
1) Remove the fuel pump assembly. <Ref. to
FU(H4DOTC)-60, REMOVAL, Fuel Pump.>
2) Disconnect the connector from fuel pump brack-
et.
3) Remove the fuel temperature sensor.
4) Remove the fuel level sensor.
(A)
(C)
(B)
FU-02401
(A) Connector
(B) Fuel temperature sensor
(C) Fuel level sensor
B: INSTALLATION
NOTE:
Use a new gasket.
Tightening torque:
4.4 N·m (0.45 kgf-m, 3.2 ft-lb)
FU(H4DOTC)-62

30.Fuel Sub Level Sensor 6) Disconnect the connector from the fuel sub level
sensor.
A: REMOVAL
WARNING:
working area.
CAUTION:
• Before starting work, be sure to reduce fuel in
FU-01143
1) Release the fuel pressure. <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-
49, RELEASING OF FUEL PRESSURE, PROCE- 7) Disconnect the quick connector, then disconnect
DURE, Fuel.> the fuel delivery hose, return hose and jet pump
2) Drain fuel. <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-49, DRAIN- hose. <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-67, REMOVAL, Fuel
ING FUEL, PROCEDURE, Fuel.> Delivery, Return and Evaporation Lines.>
3) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. 8) Remove the nuts and bolts which install fuel sub
level sensor on fuel tank.
(C)
(A)
IN-00203 (B)
FU-01144
5) Remove the service hole cover. (A) Jet pump hose
(1) Remove bolt (A). (B) Delivery hose
(2) Push the grommet (B) down and remove the (C) Return hose
service hole cover.
9) Remove the fuel sub level sensor.
(A)
(A)
(B)
FU-01126
FU(H4DOTC)-63

B: INSTALLATION
NOTE:
• Align the protrusion (A) of gasket to the position
shown in the following figure.
• Align the protrusion (B) of fuel sub level sensor
with the cutout portion of fuel sub level sensor up-
per plate.
• Tighten the nuts and bolts to the specified torque
in the order as shown in the figure.
Tightening torque:
4.4 N·m (0.45 kgf-m, 3.2 ft-lb)
3
1
2 (B)
4
(A) FU-02836
FU-01146
FU(H4DOTC)-64
Fuel Filter
31.Fuel Filter
A: SPECIFICATION
Fuel filter forms a single unit with fuel pump.
Refer to “Fuel Pump” for removal and installation.
<Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-60, REMOVAL, Fuel
Pump.> <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-60, INSTALLA-
TION, Fuel Pump.>
FU(H4DOTC)-65
Fuel Damper Valve

32.Fuel Damper Valve

A: REMOVAL
CAUTION:
or cloth.
2) Remove the fuel damper valve from the fuel de-
livery line (A) and the fuel return line (B).
(A)
(B)
FU-03115
B: INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
If fuel hoses or clamps are damaged, replace
them with new parts.
Tightening torque:
1.25 N·m (0.13 kgf-m, 0.94 ft-lb)
FU(H4DOTC)-66
Fuel Delivery, Return and Evaporation Lines

33.Fuel Delivery, Return and Evaporation Lines

A: REMOVAL
WARNING:
Place “NO OPEN FLAMES” signs near the working area.
CAUTION:
2) Release the fuel pressure. <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-49, RELEASING OF FUEL PRESSURE, PROCE-
DURE, Fuel.>
3) Open the fuel filler flap lid, and remove the fuel filler cap.
4) Remove the floor mat. <Ref. to EI-69, REMOVAL, Floor Mat.>
5) Disconnect the fuel delivery pipes and hoses, and then disconnect the fuel return pipes and hoses, evap-
oration pipes and hoses.
FU-03107
FU(H4DOTC)-67

6) Attach ST to the fuel delivery pipe and push ST (3) Insert the back side of ST into the quick con-
in the direction of arrow mark to disconnect the fuel nector and push ST in the direction of arrow
delivery hose. mark to disconnect the fuel return hose.
CAUTION:
or cloth.
(A)
ST
FU-03114
ST 8) Remove the clip and disconnect the evaporation
hose from the fuel pipe.
(C)
(B) FU-03095


FU-03105
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to spill fuel. 9) Lift the vehicle.
• Catch the fuel from hoses using a container 10) Remove the fuel tank. <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-
or cloth. 51, REMOVAL, Fuel Tank.>
(1) Attach the ST to the fuel return pipe as 11) Separate the quick connector of fuel line.
shown in the figure. (1) Clean the pipe and connector, if they are
covered with dust.
(2) To prevent from damaging or entering for-
eign matter, wrap the pipes and connectors with
plastic bag etc.
ST
FU-03092

nector.
FU-01333
(3) Hold the connector (A) and push the retainer

(B) down.
ST
FU-03113
FU(H4DOTC)-68

(4) Pull out the connector (A) from the retainer CAUTION:
(B). • Pull the connector to ensure it is connected
securely.
• Make sure the two retainer claws are en-
gaged in their mating positions in the connec-
tor.
(B) • Be sure to inspect hoses and their connec-
tions for any leakage of fuel.
(A) (C)
FU-00124
(A) Connector
(A)
(B) Retainer
(C) Pipe
(B) (C)
B: INSTALLATION FU-00127
1) Connect the quick connector on fuel line.
(A) Connector
CAUTION: (B) Retainer
Make sure there are no damage or dust on con- (C) Pipe
nections. If necessary, clean seal surface of pipe.
NOTE: 2) Connect the fuel delivery hose and return hose
Use a new retainer. to the pipe with an overlap of 20 to 25 mm (0.79 to
0.98 in).
Type A: When the amount to be inserted is speci-
fied.
(A) Type B: When the amount to be inserted is not
specified.
(B) 2: 2.5±1.5 mm (0.098±0.059 in)
L: 22.5±2.5 mm (0.886±0.098 in)
CAUTION:
Be sure to inspect hoses and their connections
FU-00125
for any leakage of fuel.
(A) Seal surface (3) (4) (5)
(B) Pipe
(1)
(1) Set the new retainer (B) to connector (A).
(2) Push the pipe into the connector completely.
(A) L
(B) (2)
FU-00128
(C)
(1) Type A
(2) Type B
(3) Pipe
FU-00126 (4) Clamp
(5) Hose
(A) Connector
(B) Retainer
(C) Pipe
FU(H4DOTC)-69

3) Connect the evaporation hose to the pipe with

an overlap of 15 to 20 mm (0.59 to 0.79 in).
Fuel evaporation hose:
L = 17.5±2.5 mm (0.689±0.098 in)
(2) (3)
(1)
L/2
L
FU-00129
(1) Hose
(2) Clip
(3) Pipe
C: INSPECTION
1) Make sure that there are no cracks on the fuel
pipes and fuel hoses.
2) Make sure the fuel pipe and fuel hose connec-
tions are tightened firmly.
FU(H4DOTC)-70

34.Fuel System Trouble in General

A: INSPECTION
Trouble and possible cause Corrective action
1. Insufficient fuel supply to injector
1) Fuel pump does not operate.
Inspect contact, especially ground, and tighten it
Defective terminal contact
securely.
Trouble in electromagnetic or electronic circuit parts Replace the faulty parts.
2) Decline of fuel pump function Replace the fuel pump.
3) Clogged fuel filter Replace the fuel pump.
4) Clogged or bent fuel pipe or hose Clean, correct or replace the fuel pipe or hose.
5) Air is mixed in the fuel system. Inspect or retighten each connection part.
6) Clogged or bent air breather tube or pipe. Clean, correct or replace the air breather tube or pipe.
7) Damaged diaphragm of pressure regulator Replace.
2. Leakage or blow out of fuel
1) Loose joints of the fuel pipe Retighten.
2) Cracked fuel pipe, hose and fuel tank Replace.
3) Defective welding part on the fuel tank Replace.
4) Defective drain gasket of the fuel tank Replace.
Clean, correct or replace the air breather tube or air vent
5) Clogged or bent air breather tube or air vent tube
tube.
3. Gasoline smell inside of compartment
Loose joints at air breather tube, air vent tube and fuel filler
1) Retighten.
pipe
2) Problem in tightness of the fuel saucer gasket air Correct or replace the gasket.
3) Inoperative fuel pump modulator or circuit Replace.
4. Defective fuel meter indicator
1) Defective operation of fuel level sensor Replace.
2) Defective operation of fuel meter Replace.
5. Noise
1) Large operation noise or vibration of fuel pump Replace.
NOTE:
• When the vehicle is left unattended for an extended period of time, water may accumulate in the fuel tank.
Fill fuel fully to prevent the problem.
• In snow-covered areas, mountainous areas, skiing areas, etc. where ambient temperatures drop below
0°C (32°F) throughout the winter season, use a water removing agent in the fuel system to prevent freezing
fuel system and accumulating water.
• When water is accumulated in fuel filter, fill the water removing agent in the fuel tank.
• Before using water removing agent, follow the cautions noted on the bottle.
FU(H4DOTC)-71

FU(H4DOTC)-72
EMISSION CONTROL
EC(H4DOTC)
Page
2. Front Catalytic Converter ...........................................................................5
3. Rear Catalytic Converter ............................................................................6
4. Canister ......................................................................................................7
5. Purge Control Solenoid Valve ....................................................................8
7. Fuel Temperature Sensor ........................................................................12
9. Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor .....................................................................14
10. Pressure Control Solenoid Valve .............................................................15
11. Drain Filter ................................................................................................16
12. Shut Valve ................................................................................................17
13. Drain Valve ...............................................................................................18
14. PCV Hose Assembly ................................................................................19
15. Secondary Air Pump ................................................................................20
16. Secondary Air Combi Valve .....................................................................21
General Description
A: COMPONENT
1. SECONDARY AIR PUMP
(3)
(4)
(1)
T2
T1
(4)
T1
(4)
(2)
T1
(5)
EC-02191
(1) Secondary air pump (4) Bushing Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(2) Clip (5) Secondary air pump cover T1: 6.4 (0.65, 4.7)
(3) Secondary air pump bracket T2: 19 (1.9, 14)
EC(H4DOTC)-2
General Description
2. SECONDARY AIR COMBINATION VALVE
T1
(4)
T2
(9)
T2
(10)
(2)
a
(5)
(8)
(6) (1)
(13)
T2 (12) (3)
(11)
(14)
T2
T3
(7)
a
EC-02204
(1) Gasket (9) Secondary air combination valve Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(2) Gasket RH T1: 6.4 (0.65, 4.7)
(3) Gasket (10) Air duct A T2: 9 (0.9, 6.6)
(4) Clamp (11) Air duct B T3: 19 (1.9, 14)
(5) Clamp (12) Secondary air combination valve
(6) Clamp LH
(7) Clamp (13) Secondary air pipe LH
(8) Secondary air pipe RH (14) Gasket
B: CAUTION
any work.
• Remove contamination including dirt and corrosion before removal, installation or disassembly.
• Keep the disassembled parts in order and protect them from dust and dirt.
• Before removal, installation or disassembly, be sure to clarify the failure. Avoid unnecessary removal, in-
stallation, disassembly and replacement.
tery.
EC(H4DOTC)-3
General Description
C: PREPARATION TOOL
1. SPECIAL TOOL
hose.
• This is a general tool made by the French
company CAILLAU. (code) 54.0.000.205
ST18353AA000
EC(H4DOTC)-4
Front Catalytic Converter

2. Front Catalytic Converter

A: REMOVAL
1) Remove the center exhaust pipe.<Ref. to
EX(H4DOTC)-8, REMOVAL, Center Exhaust
Pipe.>
2) Disconnect the front catalytic converter (A) from
the rear catalytic converter (B).
(A)
(B)
EC-00076
B: INSTALLATION
NOTE:
Use a new gasket.
C: INSPECTION
leaks.
EC(H4DOTC)-5
Rear Catalytic Converter

3. Rear Catalytic Converter

A: REMOVAL
Pipe.>
2) Disconnect the rear catalytic converter (B) from
the front catalytic converter (A).
(A)
(B)
EC-00076
B: INSTALLATION
NOTE:
Use a new gasket.
C: INSPECTION
leaks.
EC(H4DOTC)-6
Canister
4. Canister B: INSTALLATION
A: REMOVAL
2) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. Check that there is no damage or dust on the quick
connector. If necessary, clean the seal surface of
the pipe.
Tightening torque:
8 N·m (0.8 kgf-m, 5.9 ft-lb)
IN-00203

4) Remove the rear wheel LH.
5) Remove the rear mud guard LH.
6) Disconnect quick connector (A).
7) Disconnect the drain valve connector (B).
8) Remove clip (C).
(B)
(A)
(C) EC-02080
(A) EC-02079 C: INSPECTION

9) Remove the canister from body. Make sure the canister and canister hoses are not
cracked or loose.
EC-02080
EC(H4DOTC)-7

5. Purge Control Solenoid Valve 3) Remove the solenoid valve bracket assembly
from intake manifold.
A: REMOVAL
1. PURGE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE 1
EC-00219
4) Disconnect the connector from purge control so-

lenoid valve 2.
5) Disconnect the evaporation hose from the intake
duct and fuel pipe assembly.
IN-00203
6) Remove the purge control solenoid valve 2 from
3) Remove the bolts that attach the purge control the solenoid valve bracket assembly.
solenoid valve 1 to the intake manifold. Then dis-
connect the connector from the purge control sole-
noid valve 1.
EC-00220
EC-02200
4) Disconnect the evaporation hose from the intake

manifold and fuel pipe assembly.
IN-00203
EC(H4DOTC)-8

B: INSTALLATION 2. PURGE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE 2

Install in the reverse order of removal. Tightening torque:
19 N·m (1.94 kgf-m, 13.7 ft-lb)
NOTE:
ure.
(A)
EC-00220
NOTE:
ure.
(A)
(c) (a)
(B)
(b)
(c) EC-02201
(A) Purge Control Solenoid Valve 1

(B) Purge Control Solenoid Valve 2
(a) To intake manifold (c) (a)
(B)
(b) To intake duct
(c) To fuel pipe
(b)
Tightening torque:
6.4 N·m (0.65 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
(c) EC-02201
(A) Purge Control Solenoid Valve 1

(B) Purge Control Solenoid Valve 2
(b) To intake duct
(c) To fuel pipe
EC-02200
EC(H4DOTC)-9

Tightening torque:
19 N·m (1.94 kgf-m, 13.7 ft-lb)
EC-00219
C: INSPECTION
EC(H4DOTC)-10
Fuel Level Sensor

6. Fuel Level Sensor

A: REMOVAL
For removal procedure, refer to “FU(H4DOTC)”
section. <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-62, REMOVAL,
Fuel Level Sensor.>
B: INSTALLATION
For installation procedure, refer to “FU(H4DOTC)”
section. <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-62, INSTALLA-
TION, Fuel Level Sensor.>
EC(H4DOTC)-11
Fuel Temperature Sensor

7. Fuel Temperature Sensor

A: REMOVAL
are integrated into one unit; therefore, refer to “Fuel
Level Sensor” for removal procedure. <Ref. to
FU(H4DOTC)-62, REMOVAL, Fuel Level Sensor.>
(A)
EC-02083
(A) Fuel temperature sensor
B: INSTALLATION
are integrated into one unit; therefore, refer to “Fuel
Level Sensor” for installation procedure. <Ref. to
FU(H4DOTC)-62, INSTALLATION, Fuel Level
Sensor.>
(A)
EC-02083
(A) Fuel temperature sensor
EC(H4DOTC)-12

8. Fuel Sub Level Sensor

A: REMOVAL
For removal procedure, refer to “FU(H4DOTC)”
section. <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-63, REMOVAL,
Fuel Sub Level Sensor.>
B: INSTALLATION
For installation procedure, refer to “FU(F4DOTC)”
section. <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-64, INSTALLA-
TION, Fuel Sub Level Sensor.>
EC(H4DOTC)-13
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor

9. Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor

A: REMOVAL
IN-00203
3) Open the fuel flap lid, and remove the fuel filler
cap.
5) Disconnect the connector from the fuel tank
pressure sensor.
6) Disconnect the pressure hose from the fuel tank
pressure sensor.
7) Remove the fuel tank pressure sensor along
with the bracket.
EC-02084
B: INSTALLATION
Tightening torque:
7.4 N·m (0.75 kgf-m, 5.4 ft-lb)
EC-02084
C: INSPECTION
EC(H4DOTC)-14
Pressure Control Solenoid Valve

10.Pressure Control Solenoid

Valve
A: REMOVAL
IN-00203

4) Disconnect connector (A) from the pressure con-
trol solenoid valve.
5) Disconnect the evaporation hose (B) from the
pressure control solenoid valve.
6) Remove the bolts (C) which secure the bracket
to the fuel tank.
(A)
(B)
(B)
(C)
EC-02086

from the bracket.
EC-02087
B: INSTALLATION
Tightening torque:
7.35 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 5.4 ft-lb)
C: INSPECTION
EC(H4DOTC)-15
Drain Filter
11.Drain Filter
A: SPECIFICATION
move the drain filter from canister. Refer to “Canis-
ter” for removal and installation procedure. <Ref. to
EC(H4DOTC)-7, REMOVAL, Canister.> <Ref. to
EC(H4DOTC)-7, INSTALLATION, Canister.>
EC(H4DOTC)-16
Shut Valve
12.Shut Valve
A: REMOVAL
1) Remove the fuel filler pipe.<Ref. to
FU(H4DOTC)-57, REMOVAL, Fuel Filler Pipe.>
2) Disconnect the evaporation hose from the shut
valve.
EC-02088
EC-02089
B: INSTALLATION
Tightening torque:
4.5 N·m (0.46 kgf-m, 3.3 ft-lb)
EC-02089
C: INSPECTION
EC(H4DOTC)-17
Drain Valve
13.Drain Valve
A: SPECIFICATION
move the drain valve from canister.
cedure. <Ref. to EC(H4DOTC)-7, REMOVAL, Can-
ister.> <Ref. to EC(H4DOTC)-7, INSTALLATION,
Canister.>
EC(H4DOTC)-18
PCV Hose Assembly

14.PCV Hose Assembly

A: REMOVAL
CAUTION:
Do not remove unless the PCV hose, diagnos-
tics connector and PCV valve are damaged.
2) Fit the depression in the ST with the protrusion
on the clamp to unlock.
3) Remove the PCV hose assembly.
EC-02090
B: INSTALLATION
NOTE:
Use a new clamp.
1) Install the PCV hose assembly, then lock by fit-
ting the ST on the clamp protrusion.
EC-02090
2) Install the intake manifold.<Ref. to

FU(H4DOTC)-16, INSTALLATION, Intake Mani-
fold.>
EC(H4DOTC)-19
Secondary Air Pump

15.Secondary Air Pump B: INSTALLATION

A: REMOVAL
2) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. 19 N·m (1.94 kgf-m, 13.7 ft-lb)
EC-02195
IN-00203
3) Disconnect the connector (A) from secondary air C: INSPECTION

pump, and remove the harness. Make sure the hoses are not cracked or loose.
4) Disconnect the hose (B) from secondary air
pump.
(A)
(B)
EC-02193
5) Remove the bolt (C) which secures the second-

ary air pump to the body.
(C)
EC-02194
EC(H4DOTC)-20
Secondary Air Combi Valve

16.Secondary Air Combi Valve 2. SECONDARY AIR COMBINATION

VALVE RH
A: REMOVAL 1) Remove the collector cover.
1. SECONDARY AIR COMBINATION 2) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery.
VALVE LH
IN-00203

IN-00203 4) Remove the intake manifold. <Ref. to
5) Disconnect the connector from the secondary air
combination valve RH.
4) Disconnect the connector from the secondary air
6) Disconnect the air duct A.
combination valve LH.
7) Remove the secondary air pipe RH.
5) Disconnect the air duct A.
8) Remove the secondary air combination valve
6) Remove the secondary air pipe LH.
RH.
7) Remove the secondary air combination valve
LH. (B) (A)
(C)
(C) (D)
a
(E)
(E)
b
(D)
(G)
b
(F) (H) (F)
EC-02213
(A)
(B) a
EC-02209 (A) Secondary air combination valve RH
(B) Clamp
(A) Secondary air combination valve LH
(C) Air duct A
(B) Clamp
(D) Gasket
(C) Air duct A
(E) Secondary air pipe RH
(D) Gasket
(F) Gasket
(E) Clamp
(F) Air duct B
(G) Secondary air pipe LH
(H) Gasket
EC(H4DOTC)-21
Secondary Air Combi Valve

B: INSTALLATION 2. SECONDARY AIR COMBINATION

VALVE RH
1. SECONDARY AIR COMBINATION
VALVE LH
Install in the reverse order of removal. NOTE:
Use a new gasket.
NOTE:
Use a new gasket. Tightening torque:
T1: 6.4 N·m (0.65 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
Tightening torque: T2: 9 N·m (0.9 kgf-m, 6.6 ft-lb)
T1: 9 N·m (0.9 kgf-m, 6.6 ft-lb)
T2: 19 N·m (1.9 kgf-m, 14 ft-lb) (B) T1 T2
(A)
(C)
(D)
a (C)
(E) T2
(E)
b
(D)
(G)
b
T1 (F)
(F) (H) EC-02214
(A) T2
T1 (B) a
EC-02210 (A) Secondary air combination valve RH
(B) Clamp
(A) Secondary air combination valve LH
(C) Air duct A
(B) Clamp
(D) Gasket
(C) Air duct A
(E) Secondary air pipe RH
(D) Gasket
(F) Gasket
(E) Clamp
(F) Air duct B C: INSPECTION
(G) Secondary air pipe LH
Check the air duct and pipe for looseness.
(H) Gasket
EC(H4DOTC)-22
INTAKE (INDUCTION)
IN(H4DOTC)
Page
2. Air Cleaner Element ...................................................................................7
3. Air Cleaner Case ........................................................................................8
4. Air Intake Duct ............................................................................................9
5. Resonator Chamber .................................................................................10
6. Intake Duct ...............................................................................................11
7. Intercooler ................................................................................................12
8. Turbocharger ............................................................................................14
9. Air By-pass Valve .....................................................................................17
General Description
INTAKE (INDUCTION)
A: COMPONENT
1. AIR CLEANER
T1
(3)
(1)
(3)
(2)
(5) T2
(6)
(4)
T4
(5)
(7) T2
(13)
(10)
T3
(9)
(11)
(12)
(8)
IN-02209
(1) Mass air flow and intake air tem- (7) Air cleaner case (front) Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
perature sensor (8) Air intake duct T1: 1.0 (0.10, 0.74)
(2) Air cleaner case (rear) (9) Clip T2: 2.5 (0.25, 1.8)
(3) Clip (10) Resonator chamber T3: 6.0 (0.61, 4.4)
(4) Air intake boot (11) Cushion T4: 7.5 (0.76, 5.5)
(5) Clamp (12) Spacer
(6) Air cleaner element (13) Cushion
IN(H4DOTC)-2
General Description
INTAKE (INDUCTION)
2. INTAKE DUCT
(14)
(14)
(1)
(2)
(15)
T2
(4) (16)
T2 T1
(3)
(2)
(5)
(9)
T2
(8)
T1 (6)
(12)
T1
(11)
(7)
(13) (10)
IN-02224
(1) PCV hose ASSY A (8) PCV pipe (15) PCV hose ASSY B
(2) Intake manifold (9) Vacuum hose (16) Solenoid valve bracket
(3) Solenoid valve bracket ASSY (10) Air by-pass pipe
(4) Intake duct (11) Clamp Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(5) Engine harness ASSY (12) Vacuum hose T1: 6.4 (0.65, 4.7)
(6) Vacuum hose (13) Brake booster hose T2: 19 (1.9, 13.7)
(7) Vacuum hose (14) Clamp
IN(H4DOTC)-3
General Description
INTAKE (INDUCTION)
3. INTERCOOLER
(3)
T2
(2) T1
(1)
IN-02075
(1) Intercooler (3) Air by-pass valve Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(2) O-ring T1: 6.5 (0.66, 4.8)
T2: 16 (1.6, 11.6)
IN(H4DOTC)-4
General Description
INTAKE (INDUCTION)
4. TURBOCHARGER
T2
(1)
T4
(2)
T5
(3)
(7) (6)
(2)
(8) (2)
T1 (2)
T6
(9)
(5)
(10) T3
(11) (4)
(2)
(9)
(12)
T7
IN-02234
(1) Oil inlet pipe (8) Oil outlet pipe Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(2) Metal gasket (9) Clip T1: 4.9 (0.5, 3.6)
(3) Turbocharger (10) Oil outlet hose T2: 5.0 (0.51, 3.7)
(4) Water pipe (11) Turbocharger bracket RH T3: 7.8 (0.8, 5.8)
(5) Clamp (12) Turbocharger bracket LH T4: 16 (1.6, 11.6)
(6) Engine coolant hose T5: 20 (2.0, 14.8)
(7) Gasket T6: 23 (2.3, 17.0)
T7: 33 (3.4, 24.6)
IN(H4DOTC)-5
General Description
INTAKE (INDUCTION)
B: CAUTION
forming any work.
points.
the battery.
IN(H4DOTC)-6
Air Cleaner Element

INTAKE (INDUCTION)
2. Air Cleaner Element B: INSTALLATION

A: REMOVAL
1) Remove the collector cover. CAUTION:
2) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. Be sure to use SUBARU genuine air cleaner el-
ement depending on the engine type when re-
placing the air cleaner elements. Otherwise
engine performance may be damaged.
NOTE:
When installing the air cleaner case (rear), align the
protrusion of the air cleaner case (rear) to the hole
on the air cleaner case (front) to install.
IN-00203
3) Disconnect the connector (A) from the mass air

flow sensor.
4) Loosen the clamp (B) which connects the air in-
take boot and intake duct.
5) Remove the clip (C) from the air cleaner case.
IN-00220
(A) (C)
(C) C: INSPECTION
(B)
Replace if excessively damaged or dirty.
(B)
IN-02210
6) Remove the air cleaner case (rear) and air in-

take boot.
7) Remove the air cleaner element.
IN(H4DOTC)-7
Air Cleaner Case

INTAKE (INDUCTION)
3. Air Cleaner Case

A: REMOVAL
1) Remove the air intake duct. <Ref. to
IN(H4DOTC)-9, REMOVAL, Air Intake Duct.>
2) Remove the air cleaner element.<Ref. to
IN(H4DOTC)-7, REMOVAL, Air Cleaner Element.>
3) Remove the bolts (A) and nuts (B) which secure
the air cleaner case (front) to the body.
(B)
(A)
IN-02211
4) Remove the air cleaner case (front).

B: INSTALLATION
Tightening torque:
Bolt: 6.0 N·m (0.61 kgf-m, 4.4 ft-lb)
Nut: 7.5 N·m (0.76 kgf-m, 5.5 ft-lb)
C: INSPECTION
IN(H4DOTC)-8
Air Intake Duct

INTAKE (INDUCTION)
4. Air Intake Duct

A: REMOVAL
Remove the clip which installs the air intake duct on
the front side of body.
IN-00217
B: INSTALLATION
C: INSPECTION
2) Inspect that no foreign objects in the air intake
duct.
IN(H4DOTC)-9
Resonator Chamber
INTAKE (INDUCTION)
5. Resonator Chamber
A: REMOVAL
er Case” for removal procedure. <Ref. to
IN(H4DOTC)-8, REMOVAL, Air Cleaner Case.>
B: INSTALLATION
er Case” for installation procedure. <Ref. to
IN(H4DOTC)-8, INSTALLATION, Air Cleaner
Case.>
C: INSPECTION
IN(H4DOTC)-10
Intake Duct
INTAKE (INDUCTION)
6. Intake Duct
A: REMOVAL
IN-00203

4) Remove the sensor, engine harness and fuel
pipe attached to the intake manifold. <Ref. to
FU(H4DOTC)-19, DISASSEMBLY, Intake Mani-
fold.>
5) Remove the intake duct from intake manifold.
IN-02222
B: INSTALLATION
Tightening torque:
19 N·m (1.9 kgf-m, 13.7 ft-lb)
IN-02222
IN(H4DOTC)-11
Intercooler
INTAKE (INDUCTION)
7. Intercooler B: INSTALLATION
A: REMOVAL
2) Loosen the clamp and remove the air by-pass 16 N·m (1.6 kgf-m, 11.6 ft-lb)
pipe (A) from the air by-pass valve.
3) Loosen the clamp, and then remove the intake
duct (B) from the intercooler.
(A)
(B)
IN-02238
IN-00222
4) Remove the bolts which secure the intake duct

to the turbocharger.
5) Remove the bolts which secure the intercooler to
the bracket, and remove the intercooler.
IN-02077
C: DISASSEMBLY
1) Remove the intake duct from the intercooler.
2) Remove the air by-pass valve from intercooler.
IN-02238
IN-02094
IN-02077
IN(H4DOTC)-12
Intercooler
INTAKE (INDUCTION)
D: ASSEMBLY
NOTE:
• Use new O-rings.
• Be careful not to pinch the O-ring.
Tightening torque:
6.5 N·m (0.66 kgf-m, 4.8 ft-lb)
IN-02094
IN(H4DOTC)-13
Turbocharger
INTAKE (INDUCTION)
8. Turbocharger 11) Remove the oil inlet pipe from the turbocharg-
er.
A: REMOVAL CAUTION:
1) Set the vehicle on a lift. In order to prevent damaging the oil pipe on the
2) Remove the collector cover. cylinder head side, fix the section (a) shown in
3) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. the figure when loosing the oil inlet pipe flare
nut, and avoid the part from rotating together
while loosening the nut.
(a)
IN-00203

IN-02627
5) Remove the center exhaust pipe. <Ref. to
Pipe.>
7) Separate the turbocharger joint pipe from turbo-
charger.
LU-02521
12) Disconnect the engine coolant hose from the

pipe, and remove the turbocharger bracket RH.
IN-00019
8) Disconnect the engine coolant hose which is

connected to coolant filler tank.
9) Loosen the clamp which secures turbocharger to
intake duct.
IN-02225
13) Disconnect the oil outlet hose from pipe.
IN-00074
10) Remove the bolts which secure oil pipe bracket

to turbocharger.
IN-00024
14) Take out the turbocharger from engine com-

partment.
IN(H4DOTC)-14
Turbocharger
INTAKE (INDUCTION)
B: INSTALLATION 4) Tighten the union screws and flare nuts which

secure the oil inlet pipe to the turbocharger.
CAUTION:
When replacing the turbocharger, check the fil- CAUTION:
ter part of union screw for clogging. <Ref. to In order to prevent damaging the oil pipe on the
LU(H4DOTC)-24, INSPECTING UNION SCREW cylinder head side, fix the section (a) shown in
WITH FILTER, INSPECTION, Oil Pipe.> the figure when tightening the oil inlet pipe flare
1) Connect the oil outlet hose to outlet pipe. nut, and avoid the part from rotating together
while tightening the nut.
(a)
IN-00024
IN-02627
2) Install the turbocharger to intake duct.
Tightening torque:
Tightening torque: T1: 16 N·m (1.6 kgf-m, 11.8 ft-lb)
3 N·m (0.3 kgf-m, 2.2 ft-lb) T2: 20 N·m (2.0 kgf-m, 14.8 ft-lb)
T1
T2
IN-00074
LU-02522
3) Temporarily tighten the bolts and flare nuts 5) Tighten the bolts which hold the oil inlet pipe stay
which secure the oil inlet pipe to the turbocharger. to the turbocharger.
NOTE:
Tightening torque:
Use a new gasket.
5 N·m (0.5 kgf-m, 3.7 ft-lb)
LU-02521
LU-02523
IN(H4DOTC)-15
Turbocharger
INTAKE (INDUCTION)
6) Install the turbocharger bracket RH, and connect

the engine coolant hose to the pipe.
Tightening torque:
33 N·m (3.4 kgf-m, 24.6 ft-lb)
IN-02225
7) Install the joint pipe to turbocharger.

NOTE:
Replace the gasket with a new part.
Tightening torque:
35 N·m (3.6 kgf-m, 26.0 ft-lb)
IN-00019
8) Connect the engine coolant hose which is con-

nected to the coolant filler tank.
10) Install the center exhaust pipe. <Ref. to
EX(H4DOTC)-9, INSTALLATION, Center Exhaust
Pipe.>
11) Install the intercooler. <Ref. to IN(H4DOTC)-
IN(H4DOTC)-16
Air By-pass Valve

INTAKE (INDUCTION)
9. Air By-pass Valve

A: REMOVAL
2) Disconnect the air by-pass hose (A) from the air
by-pass valve.
3) Remove the air by-pass valve (B) from the inter-
cooler.
(B)
(A)
IN-00231
B: INSTALLATION
Tightening torque:
6.5 N·m (0.66 kgf-m, 4.8 ft-lb)
(B)
(A)
IN-00231
(A) Air by-pass hose

(B) Air by-pass valve
IN(H4DOTC)-17
Air By-pass Valve

INTAKE (INDUCTION)
IN(H4DOTC)-18
MECHANICAL
ME(H4DOTC)
Page
2. Compression ............................................................................................20
3. Idle Speed ................................................................................................21
4. Ignition Timing ..........................................................................................22
5. Intake Manifold Vacuum ...........................................................................23
6. Engine Oil Pressure .................................................................................24
7. Fuel Pressure ...........................................................................................25
8. Valve Clearance .......................................................................................26
9. Engine Assembly .....................................................................................29
10. Engine Mounting ......................................................................................35
11. Preparation for Overhaul ..........................................................................36
12. V-belt ........................................................................................................37
13. Crank Pulley .............................................................................................40
14. Timing Belt Cover .....................................................................................42
15. Timing Belt ...............................................................................................43
16. Cam Sprocket ..........................................................................................51
17. Crank Sprocket ........................................................................................52
18. Camshaft ..................................................................................................53
19. Cylinder Head ..........................................................................................58
20. Cylinder Block ..........................................................................................65
21. Intake and Exhaust Valve ........................................................................83
22. Piston .......................................................................................................84
23. Connecting Rod .......................................................................................85
24. Crankshaft ................................................................................................86
25. Engine Trouble in General .......................................................................87
26. Engine Noise ............................................................................................93
General Description
MECHANICAL
A: SPECIFICATION
Model 2.5 L
Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled,
Cylinder arrangement
4-cylinder, 4-stroke gasoline engine
Belt driven, double overhead camshaft,
Valve system mechanism
4-valve/cylinder
Bore × Stroke mm (in) 99.5 × 79.0 (3.92 × 3.11)
Piston displacement cm3 (cu in) 2,457 (149.94)
Compression ratio 8.4
Compression presure
kPa (kg/cm2, psi) 981 — 1,177 (10 — 12, 142 — 171)
(at 200 —300rpm)
Number of piston rings Pressure ring: 2, Oil ring: 1
Max. retard ATDC 5°
Open
Engine Min. advance BTDC 35°
Intake valve timing
Max. retard ABDC 65°
Close
Min. advance ABDC 25°
Open BBDC 55°
Exhaust valve timing
Close ATDC 5°
Intake 0.20±0.02 (0.0079±0.0008)
Valve clearance mm (in)
Exhaust 0.35±0.02 (0.0138±0.0008)
No load 750±100
Idling speed [at neutral position on MT, or
rpm 800±100 (MT model)
“P” or “N” position on AT] A/C ON
825±100 (AT model)
Ignition order 1→3→2→4
MT model 12°±10°/750
Ignition timing BTDC/rpm
AT model 17°±10°/750
ME(H4DOTC)-2
General Description
MECHANICAL
NOTE:
OS: Oversize US: Undersize
Belt tension
Protrusion of adjuster rod mm (in) 5.2 — 6.2 (0.205 — 0.244)
adjuster
Spacer O.D. mm (in) 17.955 — 17.975 (0.7069 — 0.7077)
Tensioner bushing I.D. mm (in) 18.0 — 18.08 (0.7087 — 0.7118)
Belt tensioner Clearance between spacer and
mm (in) Standard 0.025 — 0.125 (0.0010 — 0.0049)
bushing
Side clearance of spacer mm (in) Standard 0.2 — 0.55 (0.0079 — 0.0217)
Intake Standard 46.55 — 46.65 (1.833 — 1.837)
Cam lobe height mm (in)
Camshaft Exhaust Standard 46.75 — 46.85 (1.841 — 1.844)
Front 37.946 — 37.963 (1.4939 — 1.4946)
Journal O.D. mm (in) Standard
Center rear 29.946 — 29.963 (1.1790 — 1.1796)
Journal clearance mm (in) Standard 0.037 — 0.072 (0.0015 — 0.0028)
Surface warpage limit mm (in) 0.035 (0.0014)
Cylinder head Grinding limit mm (in) 0.3 (0.012)
Seating angle 90°
Valve seat Intake Standard 0.6 — 1.4 (0.024 — 0.055)
Contacting width mm (in)
Inside diameter mm (in) 6.000 — 6.012 (0.2362 — 0.2367)
Valve guide
Protrusion above head mm (in) 15.8 — 16.2 (0.622 — 0.638)
Intake Standard 1.0 — 1.4 (0.039 — 0.055)
Head edge thickness mm (in)
Intake 5.955 — 5.970 (0.2344 — 0.2350)
Stem outer diameter mm (in)
Exhaust 5.945 — 5.960 (0.2341 — 0.2346)
Valve
Intake 0.030 — 0.057 (0.0012 — 0.0022)
Valve stem gap mm (in) Standard
Exhaust 0.040 — 0.067 (0.0016 — 0.0026)
Intake 104.4 (4.110)
Overall length mm (in)
Exhaust 104.65 (4.1201)
Free length mm (in) 47.32 (1.863)
Squareness 2.5°, 2.1 mm (0.083 in) or less
Valve spring 205 — 235
Set
Tension/spring (20.9 — 24.0, 46.1 — 52.8)/36.0 (1.417)
N (kgf, lb)/mm (in)
height 426 — 490
Lift
(43.4 — 50.0, 95.8 — 110)/26.50 (1.043)
Outer diameter mm (in) Standard 34.959 — 34.975 (1.3763 — 1.3770)
Valve lifter Inner diameter (cylinder head) mm (in) Standard 34.990 — 35.016 (1.3777 — 1.3786)
Valve lifter clearance mm (in) Standard 0.019 — 0.057 (0.0007 — 0.0022)
Surface warpage limit
mm (in) 0.025 (0.0098)
(Mating surface with cylinder head)
Grinding limit mm (in) 0.1 (0.004)
Cylinder Cylinder inner diam- A 99.505 — 99.515 (3.9175 — 3.9179)
mm (in) Standard
block eter B 99.495 — 99.505 (3.9171 — 3.9175)
Taper mm (in) Standard 0.015 (0.0006)
Out-of-roundness mm (in) Standard 0.010 (0.0004)
Piston clearance mm (in) Standard –0.010 — 0.010 (–0.00039 — 0.00039)
Cylinder inner diameter boring limit (diameter) mm (in) To 100.005 (3.9372)
ME(H4DOTC)-3
General Description
MECHANICAL
A 99.505 — 99.515 (3.9175 — 3.9179)

Standard
B 99.495 — 99.505 (3.9171 — 3.9175)
Piston Outer diameter mm (in)
0.25 (0.0098) OS 99.745 — 99.765 (3.9270 — 3.9278)
0.50 (0.0197) OS 99.995 — 100.015 (3.9368 — 3.9376)
Standard clearance between piston
mm (in) Standard 0.004 — 0.008 (0.0002 — 0.0003)
and piston pin
Piston pin
Piston pin must be fitted into position with
Degree of fit
thumb at 20°C (68°F).
Ring closed gap mm (in) Second ring Standard 0.37 — 0.52 (0.015 — 0.0203)
Piston ring Oil ring Standard 0.20 — 0.50 (0.0079 — 0.0197)
Ring groove gap mm (in)
Second ring Standard 0.030 — 0.070 (0.0012 — 0.0028)
Bend or twist per 100 mm
Connecting mm (in) Limit 0.10 (0.0039)
(3.94 in) in length
rod
Standard 1.490 — 1.502 (0.0587 — 0.0591)
Bearing of
Bearing size 0.03 (0.0012) US 1.504 — 1.512 (0.0592 — 0.0595)
large end mm (in)
(Thickness at center) 0.05 (0.0020) US 1.514 — 1.522 (0.0596 — 0.0599)
0.25 (0.0098) US 1.614 — 1.622 (0.0635 — 0.0639)
Bushing of Clearance between piston pin and
mm (in) Standard 0 — 0.022 (0 — 0.0009)
small end bushing
Crank pin Cylindricality mm (in) 0.004 (0.0002)
Crank journal Cylindricality mm (in) 0.006 (0.0002)
Standard 51.984 — 52.000 (2.0466 — 2.0472)
Crankshaft Crank pin outer 0.03 (0.0012) US 51.954 — 51.970 (2.0454 — 2.0461)
mm (in)
diameter 0.05 (0.0020) US 51.934 — 51.950 (2.0447 — 2.0453)
0.25 (0.0098) US 51.734 — 51.750 (2.0368 — 2.0374)
Standard 59.992 — 60.008 (2.3619 — 2.3625)
Crank journal outer 0.03 (0.0012) US 59.962 — 59.978 (2.3607 — 2.3613)
mm (in)
diameter 0.05 (0.0020) US 59.942 — 59.958 (2.3599 — 2.3605)
0.25 (0.0098) US 59.742 — 59.758 (2.3520 — 2.3527)
Oil clearance mm (in) 0.010 — 0.030 (0.0004 — 0.0012)
Standard 1.998 — 2.011 (0.0787 — 0.0792)
0.03 (0.0012) US 2.017 — 2.020 (0.0794 — 0.0795)
#1, #3
0.05 (0.0020) US 2.027 — 2.030 (0.0798 — 0.0799)
Bearing size (Thick- 0.25 (0.0098) US 2.127 — 2.130 (0.0837 — 0.0839)
Main
ness at center)
bearing Standard 2.000 — 2.013 (0.0787 — 0.0793)
mm (in)
0.03 (0.0012) US 2.019 — 2.022 (0.0795 — 0.0796)
#2, #4, #5
0.05 (0.0020) US 2.029 — 2.032 (0.0799 — 0.0800)
0.25 (0.0098) US 2.129 — 2.132 (0.0838 — 0.0839)
ME(H4DOTC)-4
General Description
MECHANICAL
B: COMPONENT
1. TIMING BELT
(19) (1)
(2)
T7 T2
(3)
T1
(19)
(4)
T7
(20) (5)
T1
T3
(9)
T5 (6)
(12) T8
(21)
(7)
T1
(8)
T4 T3 (14)
T1 T1
T8
T5 T5
T4
(10) (19)
(14)
(21) (20) T7
T4
(17)
(11)
(13)
T5
T1
(15)
(16)
T1
T6 (18)
T1
ME-03089
(1) Timing belt cover No. 2 (RH) (12) Timing belt Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(2) Timing belt guide (MT model) (13) Belt idler No. 2 T1: 5 (0.5, 3.6)
(3) Crank sprocket (14) Belt idler T2: 9.75 (1.0, 7.2)
(4) Timing belt cover No. 2 (LH) (15) Timing belt cover (LH) T3: 24.5 (2.5, 18.1)
(5) Tensioner bracket (16) Front belt cover T4: 39 (4.0, 28.9)
(6) Automatic belt tension adjuster (17) Timing belt cover (RH) T5: <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-51,
ASSY (18) Crank pulley INSTALLATION, Cam
Sprocket.>
(7) Belt idler (19) Timing belt guide (MT model)
(8) Exhaust cam sprocket (RH) (20) O-ring T6: <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-40,
(9) Intake cam sprocket (RH) (21) Actuator cover INSTALLATION, Crank Pulley.>
(10) Intake cam sprocket (LH) T7: 6.4 (0.65, 4.7)
(11) Exhaust cam sprocket (LH) T8: 3.4 (0.3, 2.5)
ME(H4DOTC)-5
General Description
MECHANICAL
2. CYLINDER HEAD AND CAMSHAFT
T7 (1)
T2
(2)
(6) T2
T5
T6
(27)
T6
(8) (31)
(9) (30)
T2
T5
(28)
(13)
T3 (4)
(7)
(5) (14)
(10)
(12)
(3)
T1
(29)
(11)
(23)
T2
(9)
(8)
(32) (24)
(15) T2 T4
(31) (16)
T6 (6)
(14)
(19)
T5
(27)
(25)
(26)
(21)
T6
(17)
(30)
(27) (12) (20)
(18)
(29)
T3 T5
(22)
(11) T7
T1 T7
ME-03090
ME(H4DOTC)-6
General Description
MECHANICAL
(1) Rocker cover (RH) (18) Camshaft cap (Front LH) (32) Gasket
(2) Rocker cover gasket (RH) (19) Intake camshaft cap (Rear LH)
(3) Camshaft cap (Front RH) (20) Exhaust camshaft cap (Rear LH) Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(4) Intake camshaft cap (Rear RH) (21) Rocker cover gasket (LH) T1: <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-58,
(5) Intake camshaft (RH) (22) Rocker cover (LH) INSTALLATION, Cylinder
Head.>
(6) Oil flow control solenoid valve (23) Oil filler cap
(7) Exhaust camshaft cap (Rear RH) (24) Oil filler duct T2: 8 (0.8, 5.9)
(8) Gasket (25) O-ring T3: <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-54,
(9) Oil return cover (26) Oil pipe (LH) INSTALLATION, Camshaft.>
(10) Exhaust camshaft (RH) (27) Gasket T4: 6.4 (0.65, 4.7)
(11) Cylinder head bolt (28) Oil pipe (RH) T5: <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-54,
(12) Oil seal (29) Stud bolt INSTALLATION, Camshaft.>
(13) Cylinder head (RH) (30) Union screw with filter (with protru- T6: 29 (3.0, 21.4)
(14) Cylinder head gasket sion) T7: <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-54,
(15) Cylinder head (LH) (31) Union screw without filter (without INSTALLATION, Camshaft.>
(16) Intake camshaft (LH) protrusion)
(17) Exhaust camshaft (LH)
ME(H4DOTC)-7
General Description
MECHANICAL
3. CLINDER HEAD AND VALVE ASSEMBLY
(1) (11) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)
(3)
(2)
(13)
(11) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)
(13)
(12)
(4)
(10)
(6)
(12) (7)
(4) (8)
(10) (9)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
ME-03157
(1) Exhaust valve (6) Valve spring (11) Intake valve guide
(2) Intake valve (7) Retainer (12) Exhaust valve guide
(3) Cylinder head (8) Retainer key (13) Plug
(4) Valve spring seat (9) Valve lifter
(5) Intake valve oil seal (10) Exhaust valve oil seal
ME(H4DOTC)-8
General Description
MECHANICAL
4. CYLINDER BLOCK
T2
T2
(5)
T5
T4
(29)
T2 (1) T6
(7)
(6)
(8)
(30) T2 T4
(10)
(2) (3) T2
(4)
T2 (10)
(9)
(28)
T6 (10)
(14) (4) (11)

(3) (10)
T4
(4)
(27) (3)
T2 (19) (30)
T6 (29) (12)
(10) T10 T4
(15)
T2 T5
(18) (25) T2
T3 T2
(19)
(17) T7 (16) (13)
(26)
T9
(23)
T1
(31) T2
(20)
(24)
(22) T8
(21)
ME-03091
ME(H4DOTC)-9
General Description
MECHANICAL
(1) Oil pressure switch (17) Connector Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(2) Cylinder block (RH) (18) Oil strainer T1: 5 (0.5, 3.6)
(3) Service hole plug (19) Gasket T2: 6.4 (0.65, 4.7)
(4) Gasket (20) Oil pan T3: 10 (1.0, 7.2)
(5) Oil separator cover (21) Drain plug T4: 25 (2.5, 18.1)
(6) Water by-pass pipe (22) Metal gasket T5: <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-68,
(7) Oil pump (23) Oil level gauge guide INSTALLATION, Cylinder
Block.>
(8) Front oil seal (24) Oil filter
(9) Rear oil seal (25) Gasket T6: 70 (7.1, 51.6)
(10) O-ring (26) Water pump hose T7: First 12 (1.2, 8.9)
(11) Service hole cover (27) Plug Second 12 (1.2, 8.9)
(12) Cylinder block (LH) (28) Seal T8: 44 (4.5, 33)
(13) Water pump (29) Washer T9: 54 (5.5, 40)
(14) Baffle plate (30) Seal washer T10: 69 (7.0, 50.9)
(15) Oil cooler (31) O-ring
(16) Water by-pass pipe
ME(H4DOTC)-10
General Description
MECHANICAL
5. CRANKSHAFT AND PISTION
(2)
T2
(1)
(3)
T3
(10)
(4)
(9)
(5)
(6) (12)
(7)
(10) (8) (13)
T1 (11) (15)
(13)
(14) (14)
(11)
(13)
T1
(13) (8) (10)

(16)
(12) (7)
(6)
(5)
(10)
(9)
(19)
(18)
(17)
(18)
(17)
ME-04167
(1) Reinforcement (AT model) (10) Snap ring (19) Crankshaft bearing #5
(2) Drive plate (AT model) (11) Connecting rod bolt
(3) Flywheel (MT model) (12) Connecting rod Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(4) Ball bearing (MT model) (13) Connecting rod bearing T1: 52 (5.3, 38.4)
(5) Top ring (14) Connecting rod cap T2: <Ref. to 5AT-65, INSTALLA-
(6) Second ring (15) Crankshaft TION, Drive Plate.>
(7) Oil ring (16) Woodruff key T3: <Ref. to CL-16, INSTALLATION,
(8) Piston (17) Crankshaft bearing #1, #3 Flywheel.>
(9) Piston pin (18) Crankshaft bearing #2, #4
ME(H4DOTC)-11
General Description
MECHANICAL
6. ENGINE MOUNTING
(1)
T1
T2 T1
T2
ME-02090
(1) Front cushion rubber Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)

T1: 35 (3.6, 25.8)
T2: 85 (8.7, 62.7)
C: CAUTION • Rotating parts and sliding parts such as piston,

bearing and gear should be coated with oil prior to
assembly.
forming any work. • Be careful not to let oil, grease or coolant contact
the timing belt, clutch disc and flywheel.
sion before removal, installation or disassembly. • All removed parts, if to be reused, should be re-
installed in the original positions and directions.
tect them from dust and dirt. • Bolts, nuts and washers should be replaced with
new parts as required.
sure to clarify the failure. Avoid unnecessary re- • Even if necessary inspections have been made
moval, installation, disassembly and replacement. in advance, proceed with assembly work while
making rechecks.
ing. Be wary of receiving burns from heated parts. • Remove or install the engine in an area where
chain hoists, lifting devices, etc. are available for
ready use.
• Be sure not to damage coated surfaces of body
panels with tools, or not to stain seats and windows
points.
with coolant or oil. Place a cover over fender, as re-
quired, for protection.
• Prior to starting work, prepare the following:
the battery.
Service tools, clean cloth, containers to catch cool-
• All parts should be thoroughly cleaned, paying
ant and oil, wire ropes, chain hoist, transmission
special attention to engine oil passages, pistons
jacks, etc.
and bearings.
• Lift-up or lower the vehicle when necessary.
Make sure to support the correct positions.
ME(H4DOTC)-12
General Description
MECHANICAL
D: PREPARATION TOOL
1. SPECIAL TOOL
498267600 CYLINDER HEAD • Used for replacing valve guides.
TABLE • Used for removing and installing valve spring.
ST-498267600
ADAPTER RH (499817100).
ST-498457000
ADAPTER LH (499817100).
ST-498457100
498497100 CRANKSHAFT Used for removing and installing the flywheel
STOPPER and the drive plate.
ST-498497100
ME(H4DOTC)-13
General Description
MECHANICAL

498747300 PISTON GUIDE Used for installing the cup to the wheel cylinder
piston. (2.5 L model)
ST-498747300
498857100 VALVE OIL SEAL Used for press-fitting of intake and exhaust
GUIDE valve guide oil seals.
ST-498857100
499017100 PISTON PIN GUIDE Used for installing piston pin, piston and con-
necting rod.
ST-499017100
499037100 CONNECTING ROD Used for removing and installing connecting rod
BUSHING bushing.
REMOVER AND
INSTALLER
ST-499037100
499097700 PISTON PIN Used for removing piston pin.
REMOVER ASSY
ST-499097700
ME(H4DOTC)-14
General Description
MECHANICAL

499207400 CAM SPROCKET Used for removing and installing exhaust cam
WRENCH sprocket.
ST-499207400
499977500 CAM SPROCKET Used for removing and installing intake cam
WRENCH sprocket.
ST-499977500
SEAL INSTALLER • Used together with the CRANKSHAFT OIL
SEAL GUIDE (499597100).
ST-499587200
SEAL GUIDE • Used together with the CRANKSHAFT OIL
SEAL INSTALLER (499587200).
ST-499597100
499718000 VALVE SPRING Used for removing and installing valve spring.
REMOVER
ST-499718000
ME(H4DOTC)-15
General Description
MECHANICAL

18251AA020 VALVE GUIDE Used for installing intake and exhaust valve
ADJUSTER guides.
ST18251AA020
499767200 VALVE GUIDE Used for removing valve guides.
REMOVER
ST-499767200
499767400 VALVE GUIDE Used for reaming valve guides.
REAMER
ST-499767400
499817100 ENGINE STAND • Stand used for engine disassembly and
assembly.
• Used together with the ENGINE STAND
ADAPTER RH (498457000) & LH (498457100).
ST-499817100
WRENCH loosening/tightening crank pulley bolt.
ST-499977100
ME(H4DOTC)-16
General Description
MECHANICAL

499987500 CRANKSHAFT Used for rotating crankshaft.
SOCKET
ST-499987500
499587100 OIL SEAL Used for installing oil pump oil seal.
INSTALLER
ST-499587100
499587600 OIL SEAL Used for installing camshaft oil seal for DOHC
INSTALLER engine.
ST-499587600
499597200 OIL SEAL GUIDE • Used for installing camshaft oil seal for DOHC
engine.
• Used together with the OIL SEAL INSTALLER
(499587600).
ST-499597200
498277200 STOPPER SET Used for installing automatic transmission
assembly to engine.
ST-498277200
ME(H4DOTC)-17
General Description
MECHANICAL

42099AE000 CONNECTOR Used for disconnecting quick connector of the
REMOVER engine compartment.
ST42099AE000
18371AA000 CONNECTOR Used for disconnecting the quick connector on
(Newly adopted tool) REMOVER the fuel return hose of the engine compartment.
ST18371AA000
18854AA000 ANGLE GAUGE Used for installing the crank pulley.
ST18854AA000
MONITOR KIT
ST1B020XU0
2. GENERAL TOOL
TOOL NAME REMARKS
Compression gauge Used for measuring compression.
Timing light Used for measuring ignition timing.
Vacuum gauge Used for measuring intake manifold vacuum.
Oil pressure gauge Used for measuring engine oil pressure.
Fuel pressure gauge Used for measuring fuel pressure.
ME(H4DOTC)-18
General Description
MECHANICAL
E: PROCEDURE
It is possible to conduct the following service procedures with engine on vehicle, however, the procedures
described in this section are based on the condition that the engine is removed from vehicle.
• V-belt
• Timing belt
• Camshaft
• Cylinder head
ME(H4DOTC)-19
Compression
MECHANICAL
2. Compression
A: INSPECTION
CAUTION:
After warming-up, engine becomes very hot. Be
careful not to burn yourself during measure-
ment.
2) After warming-up the engine, turn the ignition
switch to OFF.
3) Make sure that the battery is fully charged.
5) Remove all the spark plugs.<Ref. to
IG(H4DOTC)-4, REMOVAL, Spark Plug.>
6) Fully open the throttle valve.
7) Check the starter motor for satisfactory perfor-
mance and operation.
8) Hold the compression gauge tightly against the
spark plug hole.
NOTE:
When using a screw-in type compression gauge,
the screw should be less than 18 mm (0.71 in) long.
9) Crank the engine by the starter motor, and read
the maximum value on the gauge when the needle
of gauge is steady.
ME-03009
10) Perform at least two measurements per cylin-

der, and make sure that the values are correct.
Compression (200 — 300 rpm and fully open
throttle):
Standard:
981 — 1,177 kPa (10 — 12 kgf/cm2,
142 — 171 psi)
Difference between cylinders:
49 kPa (0.5 kgf/cm2, 7 psi), or less
ME(H4DOTC)-20
Idle Speed
MECHANICAL
3. Idle Speed
A: INSPECTION
1) Before checking the idle speed, check the fol-
lowing item:
(1) Check the air cleaner element is free from
clogging, ignition timing is correct, spark plugs
are in good condition, and hoses are connected
properly.
not illuminate.
3) Stop the engine, and turn the ignition switch to
OFF.
link connector.
5) Turn the ignition switch to ON and run the Suba-
ru Select Monitor.
Menu.
9) Select {Data Display} in Data Display Menu.
10) Start the engine, and read the engine idle
speed.
11) Check the idle speed when no-loaded. (Head-
light, heater fan, rear defroster, radiator fan, A/C,
etc. are OFF.)
Idle speed [No load and gears in neutral, “P” or
“N” range]:
750±100 rpm
12) Check the idle speed when loaded. (Turn the A/
C switch to ON and operate the compressor for at
least one minute before measurement.)
Idle speed [A/C ON and gears in neutral, “P” or
“N” range]:
NOTE:
Idle speed cannot be adjusted manually, because
the idle speed is automatically adjusted. If the pre-
scribed idle speed cannot be maintained, refer to
General On-board Diagnosis Table under “Engine
Control System”. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-2,
Basic Diagnostic Procedure.>
ME(H4DOTC)-21
Ignition Timing
MECHANICAL
4. Ignition Timing 2. METHOD WITH TIMING LIGHT

1) Before checking the ignition timing, check the
A: INSPECTION following item:
CAUTION: (1) Check the air cleaner element is free from
After warming-up, engine becomes very hot. Be clogging, spark plugs are in good condition, and
careful not to burn yourself at measurement. hoses are connected properly.
1. METHOD WITH SUBARU SELECT MON- not illuminate.
ITOR 2) Warm-up the engine.
1) Before checking the ignition timing, check the 3) Stop the engine, and turn the ignition switch to
following item: OFF.
(1) Check the air cleaner element is free from 4) Remove the air intake duct.
clogging, spark plugs are in good condition, and 5) Disconnect the mass air flow and intake air tem-
hoses are connected properly. perature sensor connector.
(2) Check the malfunction indicator light does 6) Remove the air cleaner cover and element.
not illuminate. 7) Connect the timing light to the power wire of #1
2) Warm-up the engine. ignition coil.
3) Stop the engine, and turn the ignition switch to 8) Install the air cleaner cover, element and mass
OFF. air flow and intake air temperature sensor.
4) Connect the Subaru Select Monitor to the data 9) Start the engine, turn the timing light to the crank
link connector. pully, and check the ignition timing by means of
5) Turn the ignition switch to ON and run the Suba- crank pully indicator.
ru Select Monitor.
12°±10°/750 (MT Model)
17°±10°/750 (AT Model)
Menu.
system. Refer to “Engine Control System”. <Ref. to
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Proce-
9) Select {Data Display} in Data Display Menu. dure.>
10) Start the engine and check the ignition timing at
idle speed.
12°±10°/750 (MT Model)
17°±10°/750 (AT Model)
system. Refer to “Engine Control System”. <Ref. to
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Proce-
dure.>
ME(H4DOTC)-22
Intake Manifold Vacuum

MECHANICAL
5. Intake Manifold Vacuum

A: INSPECTION
3) Disconnect the brake vacuum hose from intake
manifold, and then install the vacuum gauge.
4) Keep the engine at idle speed and read the vac-
uum gauge indication.
By observing the gauge needle movement, the in-
ternal condition of the engine can be diagnosed as
described below.
ME-00801
Vacuum pressure (at idling, A/C OFF):

Less than –70.6 kPa (–530 mmHg,
–20.85 inHg) (MT model)
Less than –68.0 kPa (–510 mmHg,
–20.08 inHg) (AT model)
Diagnosis of engine condition by measurement of intake manifold vacuum
Vacuum gauge indication Possible engine condition
1. Needle is steady but lower than normal position. This ten- Leakage around intake manifold gasket, or disconnected or
dency becomes more evident as engine temperature rises. damaged vacuum hose
2. Needle intermittently drops to position lower than normal Leakage around cylinder
position.
3. Needle drops suddenly and intermittently from normal posi- Sticky valve
tion.
4. When engine speed is gradually increased, needle begins to Weak or broken valve springs
vibrate rapidly at certain speed, and then vibration increases as
engine speed increases.
5. Needle vibrates above and below normal position in narrow Defective ignition system or throttle chamber idle adjustment
range.
ME(H4DOTC)-23
Engine Oil Pressure

MECHANICAL
6. Engine Oil Pressure 6) Start the engine, and measure the oil pressure.
A: INSPECTION
ME-00009
Oil pressure:
Standard:
IN-00203 98 kPa (1.0 kgf/cm2, 14 psi) or more
(at 600 rpm)
3) Remove the oil pressure switch. <Ref. to 294 kPa (3.0 kgf/cm2, 43 psi) or more
LU(H4DOTC)-20, REMOVAL, Oil Pressure (at 5,000 rpm)
Switch.> • If the oil pressure is out of specification, check oil
4) Connect the oil pressure gauge hose to cylinder pump, oil filter and lubrication line. <Ref. to
block. LU(H4DOTC)-27, INSPECTION, Engine Lubrica-
5) Connect the battery ground cable to the battery. tion System Trouble in General.>
• If the oil pressure warning light is ON and oil
pressure is within specification, check the oil pres-
sure switch. <Ref. to LU(H4DOTC)-27, INSPEC-
TION, Engine Lubrication System Trouble in
General.>
NOTE:
Standard value is based on an engine oil tempera-
ture of 80°C (176°F).
7) After measuring the oil pressure, install the oil
IN-00203 pressure switch. <Ref. to LU(H4DOTC)-20, IN-
STALLATION, Oil Pressure Switch.>
Tightening torque:
25 N·m (2.5 kgf-m, 18.1 ft-lb)
ME(H4DOTC)-24
Fuel Pressure
MECHANICAL
7. Fuel Pressure 8) After connecting the pressure regulator vacuum

hose, measure the fuel pressure.
A: INSPECTION Fuel pressure:
CAUTION: Standard: 230 — 260 kPa
• Before removing the fuel pressure gauge, re- (2.35 — 2.65 kgf/cm2, 33 — 38 psi)
lease the fuel pressure.
or cloth.
NOTE:
If the fuel pressure is out of specification, check or
replace the pressure regulator and pressure regu-
lator vacuum hose.
2) Release the fuel pressure. <Ref. to ME-03092
SURE, PROCEDURE, Fuel.> NOTE:
3) Open the fuel filler flap lid, and remove the fuel The fuel pressure gauge registers 10 to 20 kPa (0.1
filler cap. to 0.2 kgf/cm2, 1 to 3 psi) higher than standard val-
ues during high-altitude operations.
4) Disconnect the fuel delivery hose from fuel
damper valve, and connect fuel pressure gauge.
5) Install the fuse of fuel pump to the main fuse box.
FU-01122
6) Start the engine.

7) Measure the fuel pressure while disconnecting
pressure regulator vacuum hose from intake mani-
fold.
Fuel pressure:
Standard: 284 — 314 kPa
(2.9 — 3.2 kgf/cm2, 41 — 46 psi)
ME-03092
ME(H4DOTC)-25
Valve Clearance
MECHANICAL
8. Valve Clearance 12) Turn the crank pulley clockwise until the round
mark and arrow mark on the camshaft sprocket are
A: INSPECTION set to position shown in the figure.
NOTE: NOTE:
Inspection and adjustment of valve clearance Turn the crankshaft using socket wrench.
should be performed while engine is cold.
ME-03171
13) Measure the #1 cylinder intake valve and #3

cylinder exhaust valve clearance by using thick-
ness gauge (A).
IN-00203
NOTE:
4) Remove the air intake duct. <Ref. to • Insert a thickness gauge in a direction as hori-
IN(H4DOTC)-9, REMOVAL, Air Intake Duct.> zontal as possible with respect to the valve lifter.
5) Remove a bolt which secures timing belt cover • Measure the exhaust valve clearances while lift-
(RH). ing-up the vehicle.
7) Remove the under cover. Valve clearance
8) Loosen the remaining bolts which secure timing Intake:
belt cover (RH), then remove the timing belt cover. 0.20±0.02 mm (0.0079±0.0008 in)
9) Lower the vehicle. Exhaust:
10) When inspecting #1 and #3 cylinders 0.35±0.02 mm (0.0138±0.0008 in)
(1) Remove the air cleaner case. <Ref. to • If the measured value is not within specification,
IN(H4DOTC)-8, REMOVAL, Air Cleaner take notes of the value in order to adjust the valve
Case.> clearance later on.
(2) Disconnect the connector of ignition coil.
(3) Remove the ignition coil.
(4) Place a suitable container under the vehicle.
(5) Disconnect the PCV hose from the rocker (A)
cover (RH).
cover (RH).
11) When inspecting #2 and #4 cylinders
(1) Disconnect the battery cable, and then re-
move the battery and battery carrier. ME-00019
(2) Remove the secondary air pump. <Ref. to 14) If necessary, adjust the valve clearance. <Ref.
EC(H4DOTC)-20, REMOVAL, Secondary Air to ME(H4DOTC)-27, ADJUSTMENT, Valve Clear-
Pump.> ance.>
(3) Disconnect the connector of ignition coil. 15) Further turn the crank pulley clockwise and
(4) Remove the ignition coil. then measure the valve clearances again.
(5) Place a suitable container under the vehicle.
cover (LH).
cover (LH).
ME(H4DOTC)-26
Valve Clearance
MECHANICAL
(1) Set the round mark and arrow mark on cam B: ADJUSTMENT
sprocket to the position shown in the figure, and
measure the #2 cylinder exhaust valve and #3 NOTE:
cylinder intake valve clearances. Adjustment of valve clearance should be per-
formed while engine is cold.
1) Measure all the valve clearances. <Ref. to
ME(H4DOTC)-26, INSPECTION, Valve Clear-
ance.>
NOTE:
Record each valve clearance after measurement.
ME-03172
(2) Set the round mark and arrow mark on cam

measure the #2 cylinder intake valve and #4
cylinder exhaust valve clearances.
ME-00024
2) Remove the camshaft. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-

53, REMOVAL, Camshaft.>
3) Remove the valve lifter.
4) Measure the thickness of valve lifter using mi-
crometer.
ME-03173
(3) Set the round mark and arrow mark on cam

measure the #1 cylinder exhaust valve and #4
cylinder intake valve clearances.
ME-00025
5) Select a valve lifter of suitable thickness from the

following table using the measured valve clearance
and valve lifter thickness.
Unit: (mm)
Intake valve: S = (V + T) – 0.20
Exhaust valve: S= (V + T) – 0.35
ME-03174 S: Valve lifter thickness required
16) After inspection, install the related parts in the V: Measured valve clearance
reverse order of removal. T: Valve lifter thickness to be used
ME(H4DOTC)-27
Valve Clearance
MECHANICAL
Part No. Thickness mm (in) Part No. Thickness mm (in)

13228 AB102 4.68 (0.1843) 13228 AB602 5.18 (0.2039)
13228 AB112 4.69 (0.1846) 13228 AB612 5.19 (0.2043)
13228 AB122 4.70 (0.1850) 13228 AB622 5.20 (0.2047)
13228 AB132 4.71 (0.1854) 13228 AB632 5.21 (0.2051)
13228 AB142 4.72 (0.1858) 13228 AB642 5.22 (0.2055)
13228 AB152 4.73 (0.1862) 13228 AB652 5.23 (0.2059)
13228 AB162 4.74 (0.1866) 13228 AB662 5.24 (0.2063)
13228 AB172 4.75 (0.1870) 13228 AB672 5.25 (0.2067)
13228 AB182 4.76 (0.1874) 13228 AB682 5.26 (0.2071)
13228 AB192 4.77 (0.1878) 13228 AB692 5.27 (0.2075)
13228 AB202 4.78 (0.1882) 13228 AB702 4.38 (0.1724)
13228 AB212 4.79 (0.1886) 13228 AB712 4.40 (0.1732)
13228 AB222 4.80 (0.1890) 13228 AB722 4.42 (0.1740)
13228 AB232 4.81 (0.1894) 13228 AB732 4.44 (0.1748)
13228 AB242 4.82 (0.1898) 13228 AB742 4.46 (0.1756)
13228 AB252 4.83 (0.1902) 13228 AB752 4.48 (0.1764)
13228 AB262 4.84 (0.1906) 13228 AB762 4.50 (0.1771)
13228 AB272 4.85 (0.1909) 13228 AB772 4.52 (0.1780)
13228 AB282 4.86 (0.1913) 13228 AB782 4.54 (0.1787)
13228 AB292 4.87 (0.1917) 13228 AB792 4.56 (0.1795)
13228 AB302 4.88 (0.1921) 13228 AB802 4.58 (0.1803)
13228 AB312 4.89 (0.1925) 13228 AB812 4.60 (0.1811)
13228 AB322 4.90 (0.1929) 13228 AB822 4.62 (0.1819)
13228 AB332 4.91 (0.1933) 13228 AB832 4.64 (0.1827)
13228 AB342 4.92 (0.1937) 13228 AB842 4.66 (0.1835)
13228 AB352 4.93 (0.1941) 13228 AB852 5.29 (0.2083)
13228 AB362 4.94 (0.1945) 13228 AB862 5.31 (0.2091)
13228 AB372 4.95 (0.1949) 13228 AB872 5.33 (0.2098)
13228 AB382 4.96 (0.1953) 13228 AB882 5.35 (0.2106)
13228 AB392 4.97 (0.1957) 13228 AB892 5.37 (0.2114)
13228 AB402 4.98 (0.1961) 13228 AB902 5.39 (0.2122)
13228 AB412 4.99 (0.1965) 13228 AB912 5.41 (0.2123)
13228 AB422 5.00 (0.1969) 13228 AB922 5.43 (0.2138)
13228 AB432 5.01 (0.1972) 13228 AB932 5.45 (0.2146)
13228 AB442 5.02 (0.1976) 13228 AB942 5.47 (0.2154)
13228 AB452 5.03 (0.1980) 13228 AB952 5.49 (0.2161)
13228 AB462 5.04 (0.1984) 13228 AB962 5.51 (0.2169)
13228 AB472 5.05 (0.1988) 13228 AB972 5.53 (0.2177)
13228 AB482 5.06 (0.1992) 13228 AB982 5.55 (0.2185)
13228 AB492 5.07 (0.1996) 13228 AB992 5.57 (0.2193)
13228 AB502 5.08 (0.2000) 13228 AC002 5.59 (0.2201)
13228 AB512 5.09 (0.2004) 13228 AC012 5.61 (0.2209)
13228 AB522 5.10 (0.2008) 13228 AC022 5.63 (0.2217)
13228 AB532 5.11 (0.2012) 13228 AC032 5.65 (0.2224)
13228 AB542 5.12 (0.2016) 6) Inspect all valves for valve clearance again at
13228 AB552 5.13 (0.2020) this time. If the valve clearance is not correct, re-
13228 AB562 5.14 (0.2024) peat the procedure over again from the first step.
13228 AB572 5.15 (0.2028) 7) After inspection, install the related parts in the
13228 AB582 5.16 (0.2031) reverse order of removal.
13228 AB592 5.17 (0.2035)
ME(H4DOTC)-28
Engine Assembly
MECHANICAL
9. Engine Assembly (2) Engine ground terminal
A: REMOVAL
2) Open the front hood fully and support with the
front food stay.
4) Collect the refrigerant from A/C system. <Ref. to
AC-19, Refrigerant Recovery Procedure.>
FU(H4DOTC)-49, RELEASING OF FUEL PRES- ME-00028
ME-03081
IN-00203
(4) A/C compressor connector
filler cap.
8) Remove the air intake duct and air cleaner case.
<Ref. to IN(H4DOTC)-9, REMOVAL, Air Intake
Duct.> <Ref. to IN(H4DOTC)-8, REMOVAL, Air
Cleaner Case.>
10) Remove the radiator from vehicle. <Ref. to
CO(H4DOTC)-19, REMOVAL, Radiator.>
11) Remove the coolant filler tank.<Ref. to ME-03082
CO(H4DOTC)-31, REMOVAL, Coolant Filler 14) Disconnect the following hoses.
Tank.> (1) Brake booster vacuum hose
12) Disconnect the A/C pressure hoses from A/C
compressor. <Ref. to AC-37, REMOVAL, Hose and
Tube.>
13) Disconnect the following connectors and ca-
bles.
(1) Engine harness connectors
FU-02341
FU-02436
ME(H4DOTC)-29
Engine Assembly
MECHANICAL
15) Remove the power steering pump from the 19) Remove the nuts which install front cushion
bracket. rubber onto front crossmember.
(1) Loosen the lock bolt and slider bolt, and re-
move the front side belt. <Ref. to
ME(H4DOTC)-37, FRONT SIDE BELT, RE-
MOVAL, V-belt.>
(2) Disconnect the power steering pump switch
connector.
LU-00223
20) Separate the torque converter clutch from drive

plate. (AT model)
(1) Lower the vehicle.
(2) Remove the service hole plug.
(3) Remove the bolts which hold torque con-
ME-00035
verter clutch to drive plate.
(3) Remove the power steering pump from the (4) Remove other bolts while rotating the crank-
engine. <Ref. to PS-45, REMOVAL, Oil Pump.> shaft using socket wrench.
ME-03083 ME-00044
(4) Place the power steering pump on the right 21) Remove the pitching stopper.
side wheel apron.
Pipe.>
18) Remove the bolts and nuts which hold the low-
er side of transmission to the engine.
LU-00221
ME-00040
ME(H4DOTC)-30
Engine Assembly
MECHANICAL
22) Attach ST to the fuel delivery pipe and push ST (3) Insert the back side of ST into the quick con-
in the direction of arrow mark to disconnect the fuel nector and push ST in the direction of arrow
delivery hose. mark to disconnect the fuel return hose.
CAUTION:
or cloth.
(A)
ST
FU-03114
ST 24) Remove the clip and disconnect the evapora-
tion hose from the fuel pipe.
(C)
(B) FU-03095


FU-03105
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to spill fuel. 25) Support the engine with a lifting device and
• Catch the fuel from hoses using a container wire ropes.
or cloth.
(1) Attach the ST to the fuel return pipe as
shown in the figure.
LU-00222
ST
FU-03092

nector.
ST
FU-03113
ME(H4DOTC)-31
Engine Assembly
MECHANICAL
26) Support the transmission with a garage jack. (3) Move the engine horizontally until main
CAUTION: shaft is withdrawn from clutch cover.
Doing this is very important to prevent the (4) Slowly move the engine away from engine
transmission from lowering due to its own compartment.
weight. NOTE:
panels with crank pulley, oil level gauge, etc.
29) Remove the front cushion rubbers.
(A) B: INSTALLATION
(B) 1) Install the front cushion rubbers to engine.
Tightening torque:
35 N·m (3.6 kgf-m, 25.8 ft-lb)
2) Apply a small amount of grease to splines of
ME-00215 main shaft. (MT model)
3) Position the engine in engine compartment and
(A) Transmission align it with transmission.
(B) Garage jack
NOTE:
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage adjacent parts or body
Before removing the engine away from trans- panels with crank pulley, oil level gauge, etc.
mission, check to be sure no work has been 4) Tighten the bolts which hold upper side of trans-
overlooked. mission to engine.
27) Separation of engine and transmission. Tightening torque:
(1) Remove the starter. <Ref. to SC(H4SO)-6, 50 N·m (5.1 kgf-m, 36.9 ft-lb)
REMOVAL, Starter.>
(2) Set the ST to torque converter clutch case.
(AT model)
ME-00050

ST
ME-00049
(3) Remove the bolts which hold the upper side

of the transmission to the engine.
LU-00222
6) Remove the garage jack.
ME-00050
28) Remove the engine from vehicle.

(1) Slightly raise the engine.
(2) Raise the transmission with garage jack.
ME(H4DOTC)-32
Engine Assembly
MECHANICAL
7) Install the pitching stopper. 12) Install the power steering pump.
(1) Install the power steering pump.
Tightening torque:
T1: 50 N·m (5.1 kgf-m, 36.9 ft-lb) Tightening torque:
T2: 58 N·m (5.9 kgf-m, 43 ft-lb) 20.1 N·m (2.05 kgf-m, 14.8 ft-lb)
T2
T1
LU-00224 ME-00037
8) Remove the ST from the torque converter clutch (2) Connect the power steering pump switch
case. (AT model) connector.
NOTE:
Be careful not to drop the ST into the torque con-
verter clutch case when removing the ST.
9) Install the starter. <Ref. to SC(H4SO)-6, IN-
STALLATION, Starter.>
10) Install the torque converter clutch to drive plate.
(AT model)
(1) Tighten the bolts which hold torque convert-
er clutch to drive plate. ME-00035
(2) Tighten other bolts while rotating the crank- (3) Install and adjust the front side belt. <Ref. to
shaft using socket wrench. ME(H4DOTC)-38, FRONT SIDE BELT, IN-
NOTE: STALLATION, V-belt.>
Be careful not to drop bolts into the torque convert- 13) Lift the vehicle.
er clutch housing. 14) Tighten the bolts and nuts which hold lower
side of the transmission to engine.
Tightening torque:
50 N·m (5.1 kgf-m, 36.9 ft-lb)
ME-00044
ME-00040
11) Fit the plug to service hole.
ME(H4DOTC)-33
Engine Assembly
MECHANICAL
15) Tighten the nuts which install the front cushion 28) Check the ATF level and replenish it if neces-
rubber onto crossmember. sary. <Ref. to 5AT-28, INSPECTION, Automatic
Transmission Fluid.>
Tightening torque:
85 N·m (8.7 kgf-m, 62.7 ft-lb)
30) Remove the front hood stay, and close the front
NOTE: hood.
Make sure that the front cushion rubber mounting 31) Lower the vehicle from the lift.
bolts and locator are securely installed.
C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the pipes and hoses are connected
securely.
2) Check the engine coolant and ATF are at speci-
fied levels.
LU-00223
16) Install the center exhaust pipe.<Ref. to

EX(H4DOTC)-9, INSTALLATION, Center Exhaust
Pipe.>
18) Connect the following hoses.
(1) Fuel delivery hose, return hose and evapo-
ration hose
(4) Pressure regulator hose
19) Connect the following connectors and termi-
nals.
(1) Engine ground terminal
(2) Engine harness connectors
(4) A/C compressor connector
21) Install the air cleaner case and air intake duct.
<Ref. to IN(H4DOTC)-8, INSTALLATION, Air
Cleaner Case.> <Ref. to IN(H4DOTC)-9, INSTAL-
LATION, Air Intake Duct.>
22) Install the A/C pressure hoses. <Ref. to AC-37,
INSTALLATION, Hose and Tube.>
23) Install the radiator. <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-20,
INSTALLATION, Radiator.>
24) Install the coolant filler tank. <Ref. to
CO(H4DOTC)-31, INSTALLATION, Coolant Filler
Tank.>
25) Install the battery to the vehicle, and connect
the battery ground terminal.
27) Charge the A/C system with refrigerant. <Ref.
to AC-20, PROCEDURE, Refrigerant Charging
Procedure.>
ME(H4DOTC)-34
Engine Mounting
MECHANICAL
10.Engine Mounting
A: REMOVAL
1) Remove the engine unit. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-
29, REMOVAL, Engine Assembly.>
2) Remove the engine mounting from engine as-
sembly.
B: INSTALLATION
NOTE:
Make sure the engine mounting cover of the RH
side is securely installed.
Tightening torque:
Engine mounting:
35 N·m (3.6 kgf-m, 25.8 ft-lb)
C: INSPECTION
Make sure that no crack or other damages do not
exist.
ME(H4DOTC)-35
Preparation for Overhaul

MECHANICAL
11.Preparation for Overhaul

A: PROCEDURE
1) After removing the engine from body, secure it to
ST in the following procedure.
RH
LH
ST3 499817100 ENGINE STAND
ST2
ST1
ST3 ME-00057
2) In this section the procedures described under

each index are all connected and stated in order.
The procedure for overhauling of the engine will be
completed when you go through all steps in the
process.
Therefore, in this section, to conduct the particular
procedure within the flow of a section, you need to
go back and conduct the procedure described pre-
viously in order to do that particular procedure.
ME(H4DOTC)-36
V-belt
MECHANICAL
12.V-belt 5) Remove the belt tensioner.
A: REMOVAL
NOTE:
1. FRONT SIDE BELT
IN(H4DOTC)-9, REMOVAL, Air Intake Duct.>. ME-00061
3) Remove the collector cover bracket.
ME-03084
4) Loosen the lock bolt (A).

6) Remove the front side belt (C).
(B)
(C)
(A)
ME-00059
2. REAR SIDE BELT

1) Remove the front side belts. <Ref. to
ME(H4DOTC)-37, FRONT SIDE BELT, REMOV-
AL, V-belt.>
(B)
(A)
ME-00060
4) Remove the rear side belt.
ME(H4DOTC)-37
V-belt
MECHANICAL
B: INSTALLATION 2. REAR SIDE BELT

NOTE: 1) Install the belt tensioner.
Wipe off any oil or water on the belt and pulley. 2) Install the rear side belt, and tighten the slider
bolt (B) so as to obtain the specified belt ten-
1. FRONT SIDE BELT sion.<Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-39, INSPECTION, V-
1) Install the front side belt (C), and tighten the slid- belt.>
er bolt so as to obtain the specified belt tension. 3) Tighten the lock nut (A).
<Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-39, INSPECTION, V-belt.> Tightening torque:
2) Tighten the lock bolt (A). Lock nut (A):
3) Tighten the slider bolt (B). 22.6 N·m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.6 ft-lb)
Tightening torque:
Lock bolt (A):
25 N·m (2.5 kgf-m, 18.1 ft-lb)
Slider bolt (B): (B)
8 N·m (0.8 kgf-m, 5.9 ft-lb)
(B) (A)
(C)
ME-00060
4) Install the front side belt. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-

38, FRONT SIDE BELT, INSTALLATION, V-belt.>
(A)
ME-00059
4) Install the collector cover bracket.

Tightening torque:
6.4 N·m (0.65 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
ME-03084
5) Install the air intake duct. <Ref. to IN(H4DOTC)-

9, INSTALLATION, Air Intake Duct.>
ME(H4DOTC)-38
V-belt
MECHANICAL
C: INSPECTION (B)
1) Replace the belts, if crack, fraying or wear is When installing new parts:
found. 7.5 — 8.5 mm (0.295 — 0.335 in)
2) Check the V-belt tension and adjust it if neces- At inspection:
sary by changing the generator installing position 9.0 — 10.0 mm (0.354 — 0.394 in)
or idler pulley installing position. (C)
Belt tension (with belt tension gauge): GEN A/C

P/S (A) (B)
(A)
640 — 780 N (65 — 80 kgf, 144 — 175 lb)
At inspection:
490 — 640 N (50 — 65 kgf, 110 — 144 lb) I/P
C/P
(B)
PM-00002
650 — 750 N (66 — 76 kgf, 146 — 169 lb) (A) Front side belt
At inspection: (B) Rear side belt
350 — 450 N (36 — 46 kgf, 78 — 101 lb)
(C) 98 N (10 kgf, 22 lbf)
(A)
C/P Crank pulley
GEN Generator
P/S GEN A/C
(B)
A/C Air conditioning compressor pulley
I/P Idler pulley
I/P
C/P
PM-00154
(A) Front side belt

(B) Rear side belt
C/P Crank pulley
GEN Generator
I/P Idler pulley
Belt tension (when not using a belt tension

gauge)
(A)
7 — 9 mm (0.276 — 0.354 in)
At inspection:
9 — 11 mm (0.354 — 0.433 in)
ME(H4DOTC)-39
Crank Pulley
MECHANICAL
13.Crank Pulley NOTE:

Set the socket onto the crank pulley bolt so that ref-
A: REMOVAL erence lines (A) and (B) is visible.
NOTE:
When replacing the single part, perform the work
with the engine installed to vehicle body.
REMOVAL, V-belt.>
2) Use the ST to lock the crank pulley, and remove
the crank pulley bolt.
(A) (B) (A) (B)
(a) (b)
ST
ST
ME-04141
3) Remove the crank pulley. (A)

(B)
B: INSTALLATION ME-04753
1. METHOD WITHOUT ANGLE GAUGE (a) When using 6-point socket

1) Clean the crankshaft thread using compressed (b) When using 12-point socket
air.
2) Install the crank pulley. (3) Draw end line (C) on ST using a marker at
3) Apply engine oil to the crank pulley bolt seat and the same position as reference line (B) was
thread. drawn on the socket in step (2).
4) Tighten the crank pulley bolts. ST 499977100 CRANK PULLEY WRENCH
(1) Use the ST to lock the crank pulley, and
temporarily tighten the crank pulley bolt.
Tightening torque: (C)
47 N·m (4.8 kgf-m, 34.7 ft-lb)
ST
(B)
ME-04144
(4) Use the ST to lock the crank pulley, and

ST tighten the crank pulley bolt to the angle where
reference line (A) and end line (C) are aligned.
ME-04142 NOTE:
(2) Draw reference lines (A) and (B) using a It should be approx. 60° when reference line (A)
marker to set the socket to the crank pulley bolt and end line (C) are aligned.
ME(H4DOTC)-40
Crank Pulley
MECHANICAL
Tightening angle: Tightening angle:

60°±5° 60°±5°
(C)
ST1
ST
ST2
(A)
ME-04145 ME-04147
5) Install the V-belts. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-38, (4) Install the radiator main fan motor assembly
INSTALLATION, V-belt.> and radiator sub motor assembly. <Ref. to
CO(H4DOTC)-25, INSTALLATION, Radiator
2. METHOD WITH ANGLE GAUGE Main Fan and Fan Motor.> <Ref. to
1) Clean the crankshaft thread using compressed CO(H4DOTC)-27, INSTALLATION, Radiator
air. Sub Fan and Fan Motor.>
2) Install the crank pulley. 5) Install the V-belts. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-38,
3) Apply engine oil to the crank pulley bolt seat and INSTALLATION, V-belt.>
thread.
4) Tighten the crank pulley bolts. C: INSPECTION
(1) Remove the radiator main fan motor assem- 1) Make sure the V-belt is not worn or damaged.
bly and radiator sub motor assembly. <Ref. to 2) Check the tension of the front side belt. <Ref. to
CO(H4DOTC)-24, REMOVAL, Radiator Main ME(H4DOTC)-39, INSPECTION, V-belt.>
Fan and Fan Motor.> <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-
27, REMOVAL, Radiator Sub Fan and Fan Mo-
tor.>
(2) Use the ST1 to lock the crank pulley, and
temporarily tighten the crank pulley bolt.
ST1 499977100 CRANK PULLEY WRENCH
Tightening torque:
47 N·m (4.8 kgf-m, 34.7 ft-lb)
ST1
ME-04146
(3) Set the ST2, use the ST1 to lock the crank
pulley, and tighten the crank pulley bolt to the
specified angle.
ST1 499977100 CRANK PULLEY WRENCH
ST2 18854AA000 ANGLE GAUGE
NOTE:
Attach the magnet used for securing the ST2 (AN-
GLE GAUGE) to ST1.
ME(H4DOTC)-41
Timing Belt Cover

MECHANICAL
14.Timing Belt Cover B: INSTALLATION

1) Install the front timing belt cover (C).
A: REMOVAL
Tightening torque:
NOTE:
5 N·m (0.5 kgf-m, 3.6 ft-lb)
when replacing a single part. 2) Install the timing belt cover (RH) (B).
1) Remove the secondary air pump. <Ref. to Tightening torque:
EC(H4DOTC)-20, REMOVAL, Secondary Air 5 N·m (0.5 kgf-m, 3.6 ft-lb)
Pump.> 3) Install the timing belt cover (LH) (A).
REMOVAL, V-belt.> Tightening torque:
5 N·m (0.5 kgf-m, 3.6 ft-lb)
3) Remove the crank pulley.<Ref. to
ME(H4DOTC)-40, REMOVAL, Crank Pulley.>
4) Remove the timing belt cover (LH) (A).
5) Remove the timing belt cover (RH) (B).
6) Remove the front timing belt cover (C).
(A)
(B) (C)
ME-00064
4) Install the crank pulley. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-

40, INSTALLATION, Crank Pulley.>
(A) 5) Install the V-belts. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-38,
(B) (C)
ME-00064 INSTALLATION, V-belt.>
6) Install the secondary air pump. <Ref. to
EC(H4DOTC)-20, INSTALLATION, Secondary Air
Pump.>
C: INSPECTION
Check the cover for damage.
ME(H4DOTC)-42
Timing Belt
MECHANICAL
15.Timing Belt
A: REMOVAL
1. TIMING BELT
NOTE:
when replacing a single part. For operation proce-
dures, refer to “Timing Belt” in the PM section.
<Ref. to PM-16, Timing Belt.> ME-00729
REMOVAL, V-belt.> 5) If the alignment mark or arrow mark (which indi-
2) Remove the crank pulley. <Ref. to cates the direction of rotation) on timing belt fade
ME(H4DOTC)-40, REMOVAL, Crank Pulley.> away, put new marks before removing the timing
3) Remove the timing belt cover.<Ref. to belt as shown in procedures below.
ME(H4DOTC)-42, REMOVAL, Timing Belt Cover.> (1) Turn the crankshaft using ST, and align the
4) Remove the timing belt guide. (MT model) alignment marks on crank sprocket, intake cam
sprocket (LH), exhaust cam sprocket (LH), in-
take cam sprocket (RH) and exhaust cam
sprocket (RH) with notches of timing belt cover
and cylinder block.
ME-00065
ST
ME-00069
ME-03124
ME-00728
ME(H4DOTC)-43
Timing Belt
MECHANICAL
(2) Using white paint, put alignment and/or ar- 7) Remove the timing belt.
row marks on timing belts in relation to the cam CAUTION:
sprockets.
After the timing belt has been removed, never
rotate the intake and exhaust sprocket. If the
cam sprocket is rotated, the intake and exhaust
valve heads strike together and valve stems are
bent.
ER ASSEMBLY AND BELT IDLER
1) Remove the belt idler (B) and (C).
ME-00070 (C)
(B)
(A) ME-03129
2) Remove the belt idler No. 2.

ME-03175
Z1: 54.5 teeth

Z2: 51 teeth
Z3: 28 teeth
Z1 Z2
Z3 Z3
ME-00075

sembly.
ME-03176
6) Remove the belt idler (A).
(C)
(B)
ME-03130
(A) ME-03129
ME(H4DOTC)-44
Timing Belt
MECHANICAL
B: INSTALLATION 2) Install the automatic belt tension adjuster as-

sembly.
ER ASSEMBLY AND BELT IDLER Tightening torque:
39 N·m (4.0 kgf-m, 28.9 ft-lb)
1) Prepare for installation of automatic belt tension
adjuster assembly.
CAUTION:
• Always use a vertical type pressing tool to
move the adjuster rod down.
• Do not use a lateral type vise.
• Push the adjuster rod vertically.
ing three minutes or more.
• Do not allow press pressure to exceed 9,807 ME-03131
N (1,000 kgf, 2,205 lb).
• Press the adjuster rod as far as the end sur- 3) Install the belt idler No. 2.
face of the cylinder. Do not press the adjuster Tightening torque:
rod into the cylinder. Doing so may damage the 39 N·m (4.0 kgf-m, 28.9 ft-lb)
cylinder.
• Do not release the press pressure until stop-
per pin is completely inserted.
(1) Attach the automatic belt tension adjuster
assembly to vertical pressing tool.
(2) Slowly move the adjuster rod down with a
pressure of 165 N (16.8 kgf, 37.1 lb) or more un-
til the adjuster rod is aligned with the stopper
pin hole in the cylinder.
ME-00075
4) Install the belt idlers.

Tightening torque:
39 N·m (4.0 kgf-m, 28.9 ft-lb)
ME-00077
(3) With a 2 mm (0.08 in) dia. stopper pin or a 2

mm (nominal) dia. hex bar wrench inserted into
the stopper pin hole in the cylinder, secure the
adjuster rod.
ME-00080
ME-00078
ME(H4DOTC)-45
Timing Belt
MECHANICAL
2. TIMING BELT 5) Align the single line mark (A) on exhaust cam
1) Prepare for installation of automatic belt tension sprocket (LH) with notch (B) on timing belt cover by
adjuster assembly. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-45, AU- turning the sprocket counterclockwise (as viewed
TOMATIC BELT TENSION ADJUSTER ASSEM- from front of engine).
BLY AND BELT IDLER, INSTALLATION, Timing
Belt.>
2) Align the mark (A) on crank sprocket with the
mark on oil pump cover at cylinder block. (B)
(A)
(A)
ME-00084
6) Align the single line mark (A) on intake cam

sprocket (LH) with notch (B) on timing belt cover by
turning the sprocket clockwise (as viewed from
ME-00081 front of engine). Make sure the double line marks
3) Align single line mark (A) on the exhaust cam (C) on the intake and exhaust cam sprockets are
sprocket (RH) with notch (B) on timing belt cover. aligned.
(B) (A)
(A)
(B)
(C)
ME-03135
ME-00082
4) Align single line mark (A) on the intake cam

sprocket (RH) with notch (B) on timing belt cover.
(Make sure that the double lines (C) on intake and
exhaust camshaft sprockets are aligned.)
(B)
(A)
(C)
ME-03133
ME(H4DOTC)-46
Timing Belt
MECHANICAL
7) Make sure that the cam and crank sprockets are • Do not allow the camshafts to rotate in the di-
positioned properly. rection shown in the upper figure. Doing this
CAUTION: may cause both the intake and exhaust valves
• Intake and exhaust camshafts for this DOHC to lift simultaneously, resulting in mutual inter-
engine can be independently rotated with the ference of heads.
timing belts removed. As can be seen from the
figure, if the intake and exhaust valves are lifted (A)
NG
NG
simultaneously, the valve heads will interfere
with each other, resulting in bent valves.
(A)
(A)
(B)
(A)
OK
OK (B)
(A) Direction of rotation

(A)
ME-03177
(B) Timing belt installation position

(B)
ME-00086 8) Install the timing belt.
(A) Intake camshaft
Align the alignment mark on the timing belt with
marks on the sprockets in the alphabetical order
(B) Exhaust camshaft
shown in the figure. While aligning marks, position
• When the timing belts are not installed, four the timing belt properly.
camshafts are held at the “zero-lift” position, CAUTION:
where all cams on camshafts do not push the • If the timing belt slips by 3 or more teeth, the
intake and exhaust valves down. (Under this valve and piston may hit each other.
condition, all valves remain unlifted.)
• When the camshafts are rotated to install the
timing belts, #2 intake and #4 exhaust cam of
camshafts (LH) are held to push their corre-
sponding valves down. (Under this condition,
these valves are held lifted.) Right-side cam-
shafts are held so that their cams do not push
valves down.
• Camshafts (LH) must be rotated from the
zero-lift position to the position where the tim-
ing belt is to be installed with the smallest pos-
sible angle, in order to prevent mutual
interference of intake and exhaust valve heads.
ME(H4DOTC)-47
Timing Belt
MECHANICAL
• Make sure that the direction of belt rotation is correct.

(1) (2)
(4) (5)
(3) (6)
(D) (B)
(A)
RH-IN LH-IN
RH-EX LH-EX
(E) (7) (C)

ME-03137
(1) Arrow mark (4) 54.5 tooth length (7) Install it in the end
(2) Timing belt (5) 51 tooth length
(3) 28 tooth length (6) 28 tooth length
9) Install the belt idlers.
Tightening torque:
39 N·m (4.0 kgf-m, 28.9 ft-lb)
NOTE:
Make sure that the marks on the timing belt and
sprockets are aligned.
ME-00090
10) After ensuring that the marks on the timing belt

and sprockets are aligned, remove the stopper pin
from tensioner adjuster.
11) Install the timing belt guide. (MT model)
NOTE:
• Clean the threaded portion of timing belt cover
before attaching bolts.
• Apply liquid gasket to the threaded portion of
cam sprocket. (when reusing bolts)
Liquid gasket:
equivalent
(1) Temporarily tighten the bolts mounting the
timing belt guide.
ME(H4DOTC)-48
Timing Belt
MECHANICAL
(2) Check and adjust the clearance between (3) Tighten the bolts mounting the timing belt
timing belt and timing belt guide. guide.
Clearance: Tightening torque:
1.0±0.5 mm (0.039±0.020 in) 9.75 N·m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 ft-lb)
ME-00091 ME-00095
Tightening torque:
6.4 N·m (0.65 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
ME-03138
ME-03124
Tightening torque:
6.4 N·m (0.65 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
ME-00731
ME-00728
Tightening torque:
6.4 N·m (0.65 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
ME-00732
ME-00729
ME(H4DOTC)-49
Timing Belt
MECHANICAL
12) Install the timing belt cover.<Ref. to (3) If the adjuster rod is not stiff and moves
ME(H4DOTC)-42, INSTALLATION, Timing Belt down, replace the automatic belt tension adjust-
Cover.> er assembly with a new part.
13) Install the crank pulley.<Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)- CAUTION:
40, INSTALLATION, Crank Pulley.> • Always use a vertical type pressing tool to
14) Install the V-belts. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-38, move the adjuster rod down.
INSTALLATION, V-belt.> • Do not use a lateral type vise.
C: INSPECTION • Push the adjuster rod vertically.
1. TIMING BELT ing three minutes or more.
1) Check the timing belt teeth for breaks, cracks or • Do not allow press pressure to exceed 9,807
wear. If any fault is found, replace the timing belt. N (1,000 kgf, 2,205 lb).
2) Check the condition on the back surface of the • Press the adjuster rod as far as the end sur-
timing belt. If cracks are found, replace the timing face of the cylinder. Do not press the adjuster
belt. rod into cylinder. Doing so may damage the cyl-
CAUTION: inder.
• Be careful not to let oil, grease or coolant 4) Measure the amount of rod protrusion “H” be-
contact the timing belt. Remove quickly and yond the body. If it is not within specified range, re-
thoroughly if this happens. place with new part.
• Do not bend the timing belt sharply. Amount of rod protrusion H:
In radial diameter h: 5.2 — 6.2 mm (0.205 — 0.244 in)
60 mm (2.36 in) or more
H
ME-00100
ME-00099 3. BELT TENSION PULLEY

2. AUTOMATIC BELT TENSION ADJUSTER 1) Check the mating surfaces of timing belt and
1) Visually check the oil seals for leaks, and rod contact point of adjuster rod for abnormal wear or
ends for abnormal wear and scratches. If neces- scratches. If defective, replace the belt tension pul-
sary, replace the automatic belt tension adjuster ley.
assembly. 2) Check the belt tension pulley for smooth rota-
tion. Replace if noise or excessive play occurs.
NOTE: 3) Check the belt tension pulley for grease leakage.
Slight traces of oil on the oil seal of the rod does not
indicate a problem. 4. BELT IDLER
2) Check that the adjuster rod does not move when 1) Check the belt idler for smooth rotation. Replace
a pressure of 165 N (16.8 kgf, 37.1 lb) is applied to if noise or excessive play occurs.
it. This is to check adjuster rod stiffness. 2) Check the outer contacting surfaces of idler pul-
3) If the adjuster rod is not stiff and moves freely ley for abnormal wear and scratches.
when applying 165 N (16.8 kgf, 37.1 lb), check it us- 3) Check the belt idler for grease leakage.
ing the following procedures:
(1) Slowly press the adjuster rod down to the
end surface of cylinder. Repeat this operation
two to three times.
(2) With the adjuster rod moved all the way up,
apply a pressure of 165 N (16.8 kgf, 37.1 lb) to
it. Check the adjuster rod stiffness.
ME(H4DOTC)-50
Cam Sprocket
MECHANICAL
16.Cam Sprocket Tightening torque:

Tighten to 30 N·m (3.1 kgf-m, 22.1 ft-lb) of
A: REMOVAL torque, and then tighten further by 45°.
NOTE:
REMOVAL, V-belt.>
3) Remove the timing belt cover.<Ref. to
ME(H4DOTC)-42, REMOVAL, Timing Belt Cover.>
4) Remove the timing belt.<Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)- ME-00709
43, REMOVAL, Timing Belt.> ST 499977500 CAM SPROCKET WRENCH
5) Remove the actuator cover of the intake cam
sprocket. Tightening torque:
6) Fasten the cam sprocket and remove from the Tighten to 30 N·m (3.1 kgf-m, 22.1 ft-lb) of
cam shaft using ST. torque, and then tighten further by 45°.
ST 499207400 CAM SPROCKET WRENCH
ME-00710
ME-00709 2) Attach the actuator cover of the intake cam
ST 499977500 CAM SPROCKET WRENCH sprocket.
NOTE:
Use new O-rings.
Tightening torque:
3.4 N·m (0.3 kgf-m, 2.5 ft-lb)
3) Install the timing belt. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-45,
4) Install the timing belt cover. <Ref. to
ME(H4DOTC)-42, INSTALLATION, Timing Belt
Cover.>
ME-00710 5) Install the crank pulley. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-
B: INSTALLATION 40, INSTALLATION, Crank Pulley.>
6) Install the V-belts. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-38,
1) Fasten the cam sprocket and install to the cam INSTALLATION, V-belt.>
shaft using ST.
NOTE:
C: INSPECTION
Do not confuse the cam sprockets (LH) and (RH) 1) Check the cam sprocket teeth for abnormal wear
during installation. and scratches.
ST 499207400 CAM SPROCKET WRENCH 2) Make sure there is no free play between cam
sprocket and key.
ME(H4DOTC)-51
Crank Sprocket
MECHANICAL
17.Crank Sprocket C: INSPECTION

1) Check the crank sprocket teeth for abnormal
A: REMOVAL wear and scratches.
NOTE: 2) Make sure there is no free play between crank
Perform the work with the engine installed to body sprocket and key.
when replacing a single part. 3) Check the crank sprocket protrusion used for
1) Remove the V-belts. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-37, sensor for damage and contamination of foreign
REMOVAL, V-belt.> matter.
4) Remove the timing belt.<Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-
43, REMOVAL, Timing Belt.>
ME-00103
B: INSTALLATION
ME-00103
2) Install the timing belt.<Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-45,

3) Install the timing belt cover. <Ref. to
Cover.>
INSTALLATION, V-belt.>
ME(H4DOTC)-52
Camshaft
MECHANICAL
18.Camshaft 9) Remove the timing belt cover No. 2 (RH).
A: REMOVAL
NOTE:
ance” for preparation. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-26,
INSPECTION, Valve Clearance.>
REMOVAL, V-belt.>
2) Remove the crank pulley. <Ref. to ME-00107
ME(H4DOTC)-40, REMOVAL, Crank Pulley.> 10) Remove the ignition coil.
3) Remove the timing belt cover.<Ref. to 11) Disconnect the PCV hose from the rocker cov-
ME(H4DOTC)-42, REMOVAL, Timing Belt Cover.> er.
4) Remove the timing belt. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)- 12) Remove the oil level gauge guide. (LH side)
13) Remove the rocker cover and gasket.
5) Remove the cam sprocket. <Ref. to
14) Remove the oil pipe.
ME(H4DOTC)-51, REMOVAL, Cam Sprocket.>
6) Disconnect the oil flow control solenoid valve as- (B)
sembly connector.
(A)
ME-03085
(A) Union screw with filter (with protrusion)

ME-03094 (B) Union screw without filter (without protrusion)
15) Loosen the oil flow control solenoid valve as-
sembly and intake camshaft cap bolts equally, a lit-
tle at a time in alphabetical order shown in the
figure.
(A)
(E) (C)
(F) (D)
(B)
ME-00105
8) Remove the timing belt cover No. 2 (LH).
ME-00771
ME-00106
ME(H4DOTC)-53
Camshaft
MECHANICAL
16) Loosen the exhaust camshaft cap bolts equal- Exhaust camshaft (LH):
ly, a little at a time in alphabetical order shown in Rotate 45° counterclockwise.
the figure.
A
77.5 (b)
(a)
11
(A)
(E) (C)
(F) (D)
(B)
ME-00772
17) Remove the oil flow control solenoid valve as- B

sembly, intake camshaft cap and camshaft. (b)
77.5
18) Remove the exhaust camshaft caps and cam- 11 (a)
shaft.
NOTE:
Arrange camshaft caps in order so that they can be
installed in their original positions.
19) Similarly, remove the camshafts (RH) and re-
lated parts.
ME-00111
B: INSTALLATION
A Cylinder head (LH)
1) Install the camshaft.
Apply engine oil to the cylinder head at camshaft B Cylinder head (RH)
bearing installation location before installing the (a) Intake camshaft
camshaft. Install the camshaft so that each valve is (b) Exhaust camshaft
close to or in contact with base circle of the cam
lobe. 2) Install the camshaft cap and oil flow control sole-
noid valve assembly.
NOTE: (1) Apply small amount of liquid gasket to the
• Set the camshaft to the position shown in the fig- mating surface of cap.
ure. It is necessary to rotate the camshaft (LH)
slightly when installing the timing belt. NOTE:
• Camshaft (RH) need not be rotated when set at Do not apply liquid gasket excessively. Applying
the position shown in the figure. excessively may cause excess gasket to come out
and flow toward oil seal, resulting in oil leak.
Intake camshaft (LH):
Rotate 80° clockwise. Liquid gasket:
equivalent
ME-00773
(2) Apply a thin coat of engine oil to the cap

bearing surface, and install the cap to the cam-
shaft according to the identification mark.
ME(H4DOTC)-54
Camshaft
MECHANICAL
(3) Gradually tighten the camshaft cap and oil NOTE:

control valve assembly in at least two stages in Apply extra amount of liquid gasket around semicir-
alphabetical order shown in the figure, and then cular plugs 5 mm or more.
tighten to specified torque.
Liquid gasket:
Tightening torque: THREE BOND 1215 (Part No. 004403007) or
T1: 9.75 N·m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 ft-lb) equivalent
T2: 20 N·m (2.0 kgf-m, 14.5 ft-lb)
(G)
(C) (L)
T1
T2
(E) (A) (K)
(F)
(B) (J)
T2
T1
(H) (D) (I)

ME-02379
(4) After tightening the camshaft cap, ensure

the camshaft rotates only slightly while holding
it at base circle.
3) Apply a coat of engine oil to the camshaft oil seal
periphery and oil seal lips, then install the oil seal
on the camshaft using ST1 and ST2.
NOTE:
Use a new oil seal.
ST1 499587600 OIL SEAL INSTALLER
ME-02771
ST2 499597200 OIL SEAL GUIDE
(3) Install the rocker cover on cylinder head.
Ensure the gasket is properly positioned during
installation.
(4) Temporarily tighten the rocker cover tight-
ening bolt in alphabetical sequence shown in
the figure, and then tighten to specified torque
in alphabetical order.
ST1 Tightening torque:
ST2
6.4 N·m (0.65 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
ME-00116
(C),(K) (H)
4) Install the rocker cover.
(1) Install the gasket on rocker cover. Install the (E)
peripheral gasket and ignition coil gasket.
(B),(J)
NOTE:
(A),(I)
Use a new gasket.
(2) Apply liquid gasket to the specified point of
the cylinder head. (G)
(D),(L) (F) ME-00777
ME(H4DOTC)-55
Camshaft
MECHANICAL
5) Install the oil pipe. 11) Install the timing belt cover No. 2 (RH).
CAUTION: Tightening torque:
Install to the position shown in the figure as the 5 N·m (0.5 kgf-m, 3.6 ft-lb)
head side and oil flow control solenoid valve
side of union screw are of different specifica-
tion.
Tightening torque:
29 N·m (3.0 kgf-m, 21.4 ft-lb)
(B)
ME-00107
12) Install the timing belt cover No. 2 (LH).

Tightening torque:
5 N·m (0.5 kgf-m, 3.6 ft-lb)
(A)
ME-03085

(B) Union screw without filter (without protrusion)
6) Connect the oil flow control solenoid valve con-

nector.
ME-00106
13) Install the cam sprocket.<Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-

14) Install the timing belt. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-
45, INSTALLATION, Timing Belt.>
15) Install the timing belt cover.<Ref. to
ME-03094 Cover.>
7) Connect the PCV hose to the rocker cover. 16) Install the crank pulley.<Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-
8) Tighten the ignition coil. 40, INSTALLATION, Crank Pulley.>
9) Similarly, install the parts on right-hand side. 17) Install the V-belts. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-38,
10) Install the tensioner bracket. INSTALLATION, V-belt.>
Tightening torque: C: INSPECTION
24.5 N·m (2.5 kgf-m, 18.1 ft-lb) 1) Measure the bend, and repair or replace if nec-
essary.
Service limit:
0.020 mm (0.00079 in)
ME-00105
ME-00118
ME(H4DOTC)-56
Camshaft
MECHANICAL
2) Check the journal for damage and wear. Re- (7) Completely remove the plastigauge.
place if faulty. 5) Check the cam face condition; remove the minor
3) Measure the outside diameter of camshaft jour- faults by grinding with oil stone. Measure the cam
nal. If the journal diameter is not within the standard height H. If it exceeds the standard or offset wear
value, check the oil clearance. occurs, replace it.
Camshaft journal Cam height H:
Front Center, rear
Standard
Standard 37.946 — 37.963 29.946 — 29.963 Intake
mm (in) (1.4939 — 1.4946) (1.1790 — 1.1796)
46.55 — 46.65 mm (1.833 — 1.837 in)
4) Measurement of the camshaft journal oil clear- Exhaust
ance 46.75 — 46.85 mm (1.841 — 1.844 in)
(1) Clean the bearing caps and camshaft jour- Cam base circle diameter A:
nals. 37.0 mm (1.457 in)
(2) Place the camshafts on cylinder head.
(Without installing the valve lifter)
(3) Place a plastigauge across each camshaft
journals.
(4) Gradually tighten the cap in at least two H
stages in alphabetical order shown in the figure,
and then tighten to specified torque. Do not turn
the camshaft.
Tightening torque:
T1: 9.75 N·m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 ft-lb) A
ME-00120
T2: 20 N·m (2.0 kgf-m, 14.5 ft-lb)
6) Measure the thrust clearance of camshaft with
(A)
T2 setting the dial gauge at end of camshaft. If the
(E) (C) thrust clearance exceeds the standard or there is
T1 offset wear, replace the caps and cylinder head as
a set. If necessary replace the camshaft.
(F) (D) Standard:
(B)
0.068 — 0.116 mm (0.0027 — 0.0047 in)
ME-00774
(5) Remove the bearing caps.

(6) Measure the widest point of the plastigauge
on each journal. If oil clearance exceeds the
standard, replace the camshaft. If necessary,
replace the camshaft caps and cylinder head as
a set.
ME-00121
Standard:
0.037 — 0.072 mm (0.0015 — 0.0028 in)
ME-00119
ME(H4DOTC)-57
Cylinder Head
MECHANICAL
19.Cylinder Head 12) Remove the cylinder head gasket.

CAUTION:
A: REMOVAL Be careful not to scratch the mating surface of
NOTE: cylinder head and cylinder block.
Perform the work with the engine installed to body 13) Similarly, remove the cylinder head (RH).
ance” for preparation. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-26,
B: INSTALLATION
INSPECTION, Valve Clearance.> 1) Install the cylinder head to the cylinder block.
1) Remove the V-belts. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-37, CAUTION:
REMOVAL, V-belt.> Be careful not to scratch the mating surface of
2) Remove the crank pulley.<Ref. to cylinder head and cylinder block.
3) Remove the timing belt cover.<Ref. to NOTE:
ME(H4DOTC)-42, REMOVAL, Timing Belt Cover.> Use a new cylinder head gasket.
4) Remove the timing belt.<Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)- (1) Clean the bolt threads and the bolt holes in
43, REMOVAL, Timing Belt.> the cylinder block.
5) Remove the cam sprocket.<Ref. to CAUTION:
ME(H4DOTC)-51, REMOVAL, Cam Sprocket.> To avoid erroneous tightening of the bolts,
6) Remove the intake manifold.<Ref. to clean out the bolt holes sufficiently by blowing
FU(H4DOTC)-13, REMOVAL, Intake Manifold.> with compressed air to eliminate engine cool-
7) Remove the secondary air combination valve. ant etc.
<Ref. to EC(H4DOTC)-21, REMOVAL, Secondary (2) Apply a sufficient coat of engine oil to the
Air Combi Valve.> washer and bolt thread.
8) Remove the bolt which installs the A/C compres- (3) Tighten all bolts to 40 N·m (4.1 kgf-m, 29.5
sor bracket on cylinder head. ft-lb) in alphabetical order.
9) Remove the camshaft. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)- (4) Retighten all bolts to 95 N·m (9.7 kgf-m,
53, REMOVAL, Camshaft.> 70.1 ft-lb) in alphabetical order.
10) Remove the cylinder head bolts in alphabetical CAUTION:
order shown in the figure. Leave the bolts (A) and
If the bolt makes stick-slip sound during tight-
(D) engaged by three or four threads to prevent the
ening, repeat the procedure from step (1). In
cylinder head from falling.
this case, the cylinder head gasket can be re-
used.
(D) (F) (A) (5) Loosen all the bolts by 180° in the reverse
order of installing, and loosen them further by
180°.
(6) Tighten all bolts to 10 N·m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.4 ft-
lb) in alphabetical order.
(B) (E) (C) 22.1 ft-lb) in alphabetical order.
ME-00122 51.6 ft-lb) in alphabetical order.
11) While tapping the cylinder head with a plastic (9) Retighten all bolts by 80 — 90° in alphabet-
hammer, separate it from cylinder block. Remove ical order.
the bolts (A) and (D) to remove cylinder head. (10) Retighten all bolts by 40 — 45° in alphabet-
ical order.
(D) (F) (A)
CAUTION:
The tightening angle of the bolt should not ex-
ceed 45°.
(B) (E) (C)
ME-00122
ME(H4DOTC)-58
Cylinder Head
MECHANICAL
(11) Retighten bolts (A) and (B) by 40 — 45°. C: DISASSEMBLY

CAUTION: 1) Remove the valve lifter.
Make sure the total “tightening angle” of steps 2) Compress the valve spring and remove the
(10) and (11) does not exceed 90°. valve spring retainer key. Remove each valve and
valve spring.
(C) (A) (F) ST1 498267600 CYLINDER HEAD TABLE
ST2 499718000 VALVE SPRING REMOVER
NOTE:
• Mark each valve to prevent confusion.
• Pay careful attention not to damage the lips of in-
take valve oil seals and exhaust valve oil seals.
(E) (B) (D) • Keep all the removed parts in order for re-install-
ing in their original positions.
ME-00123
2) Install the camshaft. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-54,

INSTALLATION, Camshaft.> ST2
3) Install the A/C compressor bracket on cylinder

head.
4) Install the secondary air combination valve.
<Ref. to EC(H4DOTC)-22, INSTALLATION, Sec-
ondary Air Combi Valve.> ST1
5) Install the intake manifold.<Ref. to
FU(H4DOTC)-16, INSTALLATION, Intake Mani- ME-00124
fold.>
6) Install the cam sprocket.<Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-
7) Install the timing belt.<Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-45,
8) Install the timing belt cover.<Ref. to
Cover.>
9) Install the crank pulley.<Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-
ME(H4DOTC)-59
Cylinder Head
MECHANICAL
D: ASSEMBLY
(1) (11) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)
(3)
(2)
(13)
(11) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)
(13)
(12)
(4)
(10)
(6)
(12) (7)
(4) (8)
(10) (9)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
ME-03157
(1) Exhaust valve (6) Valve spring (11) Intake valve guide
(2) Intake valve (7) Retainer (12) Exhaust valve guide
(3) Cylinder head (8) Retainer key (13) Plug
(4) Valve spring seat (9) Valve lifter
(5) Intake valve oil seal (10) Exhaust valve oil seal
ME(H4DOTC)-60
Cylinder Head
MECHANICAL
1) Install the valve spring and valve. NOTE:

(1) Coat the stem of each valve with engine oil Uneven torque for the cylinder head bolts can
and insert the valve into the valve guide. cause warping. When reinstalling, pay special at-
NOTE: tention to the torque so as to tighten evenly.
When inserting the valve into valve guide, use spe- (A)
cial care not to damage the oil seal lip.
(2) Set the cylinder head on ST1.
(3) Install the valve spring and retainer using
ST2.
ST1 498267600 CYLINDER HEAD TABLE
ST2 499718000 VALVE SPRING REMOVER
NOTE: (B)
Be sure to install the valve spring with its close-
ME-00126
coiled end facing the seat on cylinder head.
2. VALVE SEAT
Inspect the intake and exhaust valve seats, and
ST2
correct the contact surfaces with a valve seat cutter
if they are defective or when valve guides are re-
placed.
Valve seat width W:
ST1 Intake
Standard
ME-00124 0.6 — 1.4 mm (0.024 — 0.055 in)
(4) Compress the valve spring and fit the valve Exhaust
spring retainer key. Standard
(5) After installing, tap the valve spring retainers 1.2 — 1.8 mm (0.047 — 0.071 in)
lightly with a wooden hammer for better seating.
2) Apply oil to the surfaces of the valve lifter.
3) Install the valve lifter.
E: INSPECTION
1. CYLINDER HEAD
W
1) Check for cracks or damage. Use liquid pene-
trant tester on the important sections to check for
ing or water leaking on gasket installing surface. ME-00127
2) Measure the warping of the cylinder head sur-
face that mates with crankcase using a straight 3. VALVE GUIDE
edge (A) and thickness gauge (B). 1) Check the clearance between valve guide and
If the warping exceeds the limit, correct the surface valve stem. The clearance can be checked by mea-
by grinding it with a surface grinder. suring respectively the outer diameter of valve
Warping limit: stem with a micrometer and the inner diameter of
valve guide with a caliper gauge.
0.035 mm (0.0014 in)
Clearance between the valve guide and valve
Grinding limit:
stem:
0.3 mm (0.012 in)
Standard
Standard height of cylinder head:
Intake
127.5 mm (5.02 in)
0.030 — 0.057 mm (0.0012 — 0.0022 in)
Exhaust
0.040 — 0.067 mm (0.0016 — 0.0026 in)
ME(H4DOTC)-61
Cylinder Head
MECHANICAL
2) If the clearance between valve guide and valve (5) Put a new valve guide, coated with sufficient
stem exceeds the standard, replace the valve oil, in cylinder, and insert the ST1 into valve
guide or valve itself whichever shows greater guide. Press in until the valve guide upper end
amount of wear or damaged and etc. See the fol- is flush with the upper surface of ST2.
lowing procedure for valve guide replacement. ST1 499767200 VALVE GUIDE REMOVER
Valve guide inner diameter: ST2 18251AA020 VALVE GUIDE ADJUSTER
6.000 — 6.012 mm (0.2362 — 0.2367 in)
ST1
Valve stem outer diameters:
Intake
ST2
5.955 — 5.970 mm (0.2344 — 0.2350 in)
Exhaust
5.945 — 5.960 mm (0.2341 — 0.2346 in)
(1) Place the cylinder head on ST1 with the
combustion chamber upward so that valve
guides fit the holes in ST1.
ME-00130
(2) Insert the ST2 into valve guide and press it
down to remove the valve guide. (6) Check the valve guide protrusion.
ST1 498267600 CYLINDER HEAD TABLE Valve guide protrusion L:
ST2 499767200 VALVE GUIDE REMOVER 15.8 — 16.2 mm (0.622 — 0.638 in)
(7) Ream the inside of valve guide using ST.
ST2
Put the ST in valve guide, and rotate the ST
slowly clockwise while pushing it lightly. Bring
the ST back while rotating it clockwise.
NOTE:
• Apply engine oil to the ST when reaming.
• If the inner surface of valve guide is damaged,
ST1 the edge of ST should be slightly ground with oil
stone.
ME-00128 • If the inner surface of valve guide becomes lus-
(3) Turn the cylinder head upside down and trous and the ST does not chip, use a new ST or
place the ST as shown in the figure. remedy the ST.
ST 18251AA020 VALVE GUIDE ADJUSTER (8) After reaming, clean the valve guide to re-
move chips.
(9) Recheck the contact condition between
valve and valve seat after replacing the valve
ST guide.
ST 499767400 VALVE GUIDE REAMER
L
ME-00757
(4) Before installing a new valve guide, make

sure that neither scratches nor damages exist
on the inner surface of valve guide holes in cyl-
inder head.
ME-00294
ME(H4DOTC)-62
Cylinder Head
MECHANICAL
4. INTAKE AND EXHAUST VALVE 5. VALVE SPRING

1) Inspect the flange and stem of valve, and re- 1) Check the valve springs for damage, free length,
place the valve with a new part if damaged, worn, and tension. Replace the valve spring if it is not
deformed, or if “H” is outside of the specified limit. within the standard value presented in the table.
2) To measure the squareness of the valve spring,
Head edge thickness H:
stand the spring on a surface plate and measure its
Standard deflection at the top of spring using a try square.
Intake (A) Free length mm (in) 47.32 (1.863)
1.0 — 1.4 mm (0.039 — 0.055 in)
205 — 235 (20.9 — 24.0,
Exhaust (B) Tension/spring Set
46.1 — 52.8)/36.0 (1.417)
1.3 — 1.7 mm (0.051 — 0.067 in) height
N (kgf, lb)/mm (in) 426 — 490 (43.4 — 50.0,
Lift
95.8 — 110)/26.50 (1.041)
2.5°, 2.1 mm (0.083 in) or
Squareness
(A) less
(B)
ME-00132
ME-00758
2) Put a small amount of grinding compound on the

seat surface, and lap the valve and seat surface.
Install a new intake valve oil seal after lapping.
NOTE:
It is possible to differentiate between the intake
valve and the exhaust valve by their overall length.
Valve overall length:
Intake
104.4 mm (4.110 in)
Exhaust
104.65 mm (4.1201 in)
ME(H4DOTC)-63
Cylinder Head
MECHANICAL
6. INTAKE AND EXHAUST VALVE OIL 3) Measure the inner diameter of valve lifter mating
SEAL surface on cylinder head.
1) For the following, replace the oil seal with a new Inner diameter:
part. See the procedure 2) and subsequent for re- 34.994 — 35.016 mm (1.3777 — 1.3786 in)
placement procedures.
• When the lip is damaged.
• When the spring is out of the specified position.
• When readjusting the surfaces of valve and
valve seat.
• When replacing the valve guide.
2) Place the cylinder head on ST1.
3) Using the ST2, press in the oil seal.
ST1 498267600 CYLINDER HEAD TABLE
ST2 498857100 VALVE OIL SEAL GUIDE
ME-00135
NOTE:
NOTE:
• Apply engine oil to oil seal before press-fitting.
If difference between outer diameter of valve lifter
• When press-fitting the oil seal, do not use a ham-
and inner diameter of its mating surface is not with-
mer or strike in.
in the standard or there is uneven wear, replace the
• The intake valve oil seal and exhaust valve oil
cylinder head.
seal can be distinguished by colors.
Standard:
Color of rubber part:
0.019 — 0.057 mm (0.0007 — 0.0022 in)
Intake [Gray]
Exhaust [Green]
ST2
ME-00133
7. VALVE LIFTER
1) Check the valve lifter visually.
2) Measure the outer diameter of valve lifter.
Outer diameter:
34.959 — 34.975 mm (1.3763 — 1.3770 in)
ME-00134
ME(H4DOTC)-64
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
20.Cylinder Block 19) Remove the oil pump from cylinder block using
a flat tip screwdriver.
A: REMOVAL CAUTION:
NOTE: Be careful not to scratch the mating surface of
Before conducting this procedure, drain the engine cylinder block and oil pump.
oil completely.
REMOVAL, V-belt.>
5) Remove the timing belt.<Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)- ME-00138
6) Remove the cam sprocket.<Ref. to 20) Remove the oil pan.
ME(H4DOTC)-51, REMOVAL, Cam Sprocket.> (1) Set the part so that the cylinder block (LH) is
7) Remove the crank sprocket.<Ref. to on the upper side.
ME(H4DOTC)-52, REMOVAL, Crank Sprocket.> (2) Remove the bolts which secure oil pan to
8) Remove the generator and A/C compressor with cylinder block.
their brackets. (3) Insert an oil pan cutter blade between cylin-
9) Remove the cylinder head.<Ref. to der block-to-oil pan clearance and remove the
ME(H4DOTC)-58, REMOVAL, Cylinder Head.> oil pan.
10) Remove the clutch disc and cover. <Ref. to CL- CAUTION:
13, REMOVAL, Clutch Disc and Cover.> Do not use a screwdriver or similar tools in
11) Remove the flywheel. (MT model)<Ref. to CL- place of oil pan cutter.
16, REMOVAL, Flywheel.> 21) Remove the oil strainer stay.
12) Remove the drive plate. (AT model) <Ref. to 22) Remove the oil strainer.
5AT-65, REMOVAL, Drive Plate.> 23) Remove the baffle plate.
13) Remove the oil separator cover.
14) Remove the water by-pass pipe for heater.
15) Remove the oil filter. <Ref. to LU(H4DOTC)-26,
REMOVAL, Engine Oil Filter.>
16) Remove the oil cooler. <Ref. to LU(H4DOTC)-
26, REMOVAL, Engine Oil Filter.>
17) Remove the water pump. <Ref. to
CO(H4DOTC)-15, REMOVAL, Water Pump.>
cylinder block.
NOTE:
pump.
LU-00015
ME(H4DOTC)-65
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
24) Remove the water pipe.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(6)
(4)
(5)
(3)
(4)
(3)
(2)
(1)
(8)
(4)
(7)
(3)
(2)
(1)
ME-02889
(1) Service hole plug (4) Piston pin (7) Seal washer
(2) Gasket (5) Service hole cover (8) Washer
(3) Snap ring (6) O-ring
25) Remove the service hole plugs using a hexa- 27) Rotate the crankshaft to bring #1 and #2 pis-
gon wrench [14 mm]. tons to bottom dead center position, then remove
the piston snap ring through service hole of #1 and
#2 cylinders.
ME-00140

ME-00141
ME(H4DOTC)-66
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
28) Draw out the piston pin from #1 and #2 pistons 29) Similarly remove the piston pins from #3 and #4
using ST. pistons.
ST 499097700 PISTON PIN REMOVER 30) Remove the cylinder block connecting bolt on
NOTE: the RH side.
Be careful not to confuse the original combination 31) Loosen the cylinder block connecting bolt on
of piston, piston pin and cylinder. the LH side by 2-3 turns.
32) Set the part so that the cylinder block (LH) is on
the upper side, and remove the cylinder block con-
necting bolt.
ST 33) Separate the cylinder block (LH) and (RH).
NOTE:
When separating the cylinder block, do not allow
the connecting rod to fall and damage the cylinder
block.
ME-00142
(5)
(7)
(1)
(4)
(2)
(6) (4)
(3)
(1)
(5)
ME-02890
(1) Cylinder block (4) Crankshaft bearing (7) Washer

(2) Rear oil seal (5) Piston
(3) Crankshaft (6) Seal washer
34) Remove the rear oil seal. 37) Draw out each piston from cylinder block using
35) Remove the crankshaft together with connect- wooden bar or hammer handle.
ing rod. NOTE:
36) Remove the crankshaft bearings from cylinder Be careful not to confuse the original combination
block using a hammer handle. of piston and cylinder.
NOTE:
Be careful not to confuse the crankshaft bearing
combination. Press the bearing at the end opposite
to locking lip.
ME(H4DOTC)-67
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
B: INSTALLATION
(6)
(5)
(4) (7)
(1)
(3)
(2)
(7)
(3)
(6) (6)
ME-03021
(1) Crankshaft bearing (4) Rear oil seal (7) Washer

(2) Crankshaft (5) O-ring
(3) Cylinder block (6) Seal washer
1) Remove oil on the mating surface of cylinder 4) Apply a coat of engine oil to the washer and bolt
block before installation. Apply a coat of engine oil thread.
to the bearing and crankshaft journal. NOTE:
2) Position the crankshaft and O-ring on the cylin- Use a new seal washer.
der block (RH). 5) Tighten the 10 mm cylinder block connecting
3) Apply liquid gasket to the mating surfaces of cylin- bolts on LH side (A — D) in alphabetical sequence.
der block (RH), and position the cylinder block (LH).
Tightening torque:
Liquid gasket:
10 N·m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 ft-lb)
equivalent
NOTE:
Do not allow liquid gasket to jut into O-ring grooves, (A)
oil passages, bearing grooves, etc. (D)
(B)
(C)
ME-00779
ME-00145
ME(H4DOTC)-68
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
6) Tighten the 10 mm cylinder block connecting 9) Tighten the LH side cylinder block connecting
bolts on RH side (E — J) in alphabetical sequence. bolts (A — D) further in alphabetical order.
• (A), (C): Angle tightening
Tightening torque:
10 N·m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 ft-lb) Tightening angle:
90°
• (B), (D): Torque tightening
(E) Tightening torque:
(J)
40 N·m (4.1 kgf-m, 29.5 ft-lb)
(G)
(A)
(H)
(I) (F) (D)
ME-00780
7) Tighten the LH side cylinder block connecting

bolts (A — D) further in alphabetical order. (B)
(C)
Tightening torque:
18 N·m (1.8 kgf-m, 13.0 ft-lb) ME-00779
10) Tighten the RH side cylinder block connecting

bolts (E — J) further in alphabetical order.
(A) Tightening angle:
90°
(D)
(B) (E)
(J)
(C) (G)
ME-00779
8) Tighten the RH side cylinder block connecting

bolts (E — J) further in alphabetical order.
(H)
(I)
Tightening torque: (F)
18 N·m (1.8 kgf-m, 13.0 ft-lb) ME-00780
11) Tighten the 8 mm and 6 mm cylinder block con-

necting bolts on the LH side (A — H) in alphabetical
order.
(E)
(J) Tightening torque:
(G)
(A) — (G): 25 N·m (2.5 kgf-m, 18.1 ft-lb)
(H): 6.4 N·m (0.65 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
(G)
(H)
(I) (F) (C) (A) (B)
(E)
ME-00780
(D) (F)
(H) ME-00147
ME(H4DOTC)-69
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
12) Apply a coat of engine oil to the oil seal periph- 16) Align the upper rail spin stopper (E) to the side
ery, then install the rear oil seal using ST1 and ST2. hole (D) on the piston.
NOTE: (D) (E)
Use a new oil seal.
ST1 499597100 CRANKSHAFT OIL SEAL
GUIDE
ST2 499587200 CRANKSHAFT OIL SEAL IN-
STALLER
(B) (A)
ST2
ME-02471
17) Position the expander gap at (F) in the figure on

the 180° opposite direction of (C).
(F)
ST1
ME-00148
(A) Rear oil seal

(B) Flywheel attaching bolt
13) Position the top ring gap at (A) or (B) in the fig-
ure.
14) Position the second ring gap at 180° on the re- ME-02088
verse side the top ring gap. 18) Set the lower rail gap at position (G), located
120° clockwise from (C).
(A) (B)
(G) (C)
ME-00718
120
15) Position the upper rail gap at (C) in the figure. ME-02089
NOTE:
• Make sure ring gaps do not face the same direc-
tion.
• Make sure ring gaps are not within the piston
skirt area.
25
(C)
ME-02087
ME(H4DOTC)-70
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
19) Install the snap ring.

Install the snap rings in the piston holes located op-
posite to the service holes in cylinder block before
positioning pistons in cylinders.
NOTE:
Use new snap rings.
#3
#1
#4
(A) #2
ME-00154
(A) Front side
(5) T
(4) (5)
(1)
(3) (4)
(3)
(2)
(2)
(1)
ME-02442
(1) Piston (4) Gasket Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)

(2) Piston pin (5) Service hole plug T: 70 (7.1, 51.6)
(3) Snap ring
ME(H4DOTC)-71
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
20) Install pistion. (2) Apply a coat of engine oil to piston pin, and
(1) Set the parts so that the #1 and #2 cylinders insert the piston pin into piston and connecting
are on the upper side. rod through service hole.
(2) Using the ST1, turn the crankshaft so that (3) Install the snap ring.
#1 and #2 connecting rods are set at bottom NOTE:
dead center. Use new snap rings.
ST1 499987500 CRANKSHAFT SOCKET
(3) Apply a coat of engine oil to the pistons and
cylinders and insert pistons in their cylinders us-
ing ST2.
ST2 498747300 PISTON GUIDE
ST1
ME-00159
(4) Apply liquid gasket around the service hole

plug.
ST2
Liquid gasket:
ME-00157 THREE BOND 1105 (Part No. 004403010) or
NOTE: equivalent
Face the piston front mark towards the front of the
engine.
(A)
ME-00160
(5) Install the service hole plug and gasket.

ME-00722
NOTE:
(A) Front mark Use a new gasket.
21) Install pistion pin.

(1) Apply a coat of engine oil to ST3 before in-
sertion, and then insert it into the service hole to
align piston pin hole with connecting rod small
end.
ST3 499017100 PISTON PIN GUIDE
ST1
ST3
ME-00140
ME-00158
ME(H4DOTC)-72
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
(5) T2 T1
(6)
(3) (4)
(2) (7)
(1)
(3)
(2)
(1)
ME-02440
(1) Piston (5) Service hole plug Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(2) Piston pin (6) Service hole cover T1: 6.4 (0.65, 4.7)
(3) Snap ring (7) O-ring T2: 70 (7.1, 50.6)
(4) Gasket
(6) Set the parts so that the #3 and #4 cylinders 26) Apply liquid gasket to the mating surfaces, and
are on the upper side. Following the same pro- install the oil pan.
cedures as used for #1 and #2 cylinders, install NOTE:
the pistons and piston pins.
22) Install the water pipe.
23) Install the baffle plate. Liquid gasket:
Tightening torque: equivalent
6.4 N·m (0.65 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
24) Install the oil strainer to the cylinder block. Tightening torque:
5 N·m (0.5 kgf-m, 3.6 ft-lb)
NOTE:
Use new O-rings.
Tightening torque:
10 N·m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 ft-lb)
NOTE:
Tighten the oil strainer stay together with baffle
plate.
Tightening torque:
ME-00162
6.4 N·m (0.65 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
ME(H4DOTC)-73
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
27) Apply liquid gasket to the mating surfaces and (2) Apply liquid gasket to the matching surface
the threaded portion of bolt (A) shown in the figure of oil pump.
(when reusing the bolt), and then install the oil sep-
Liquid gasket:
arator cover.
NOTE: equivalent
Liquid gasket:
Mating surface
THREE BOND 1217G or equivalent
Bolt thread (A) (when reusing the bolt)
equivalent (A)
Tightening torque:
6.4 N·m (0.65 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
ME-00165
(A)
(A) O-ring
(3) Apply a coat of engine oil to the inside of oil

seal.
ME-02452
28) Install the flywheel. (MT model) <Ref. to CL-16,

INSTALLATION, Flywheel.>
29) Install the clutch disc and cover. (MT model)
<Ref. to CL-13, INSTALLATION, Clutch Disc and
Cover.> ME-00312
30) Install the drive plate. (AT model) <Ref. to 5AT- (4) Install the oil pump to cylinder block. Be
65, INSTALLATION, Drive Plate.> careful not to damage the oil seal during instal-
31) Install the oil pump. lation.
(1) Using the ST, install the front oil seal.
NOTE:
ST 499587100 OIL SEAL INSTALLER
• Make sure the oil seal lip is not folded.
NOTE: • Align the flat surface of oil pump’s inner rotor with
Use a new oil seal. crankshaft before installation.
• Use new O-rings and oil seals.
ME-00164
ME(H4DOTC)-74
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
(5) Apply liquid gasket to the three bolts thread 39) Install the oil level gauge guide and tighten the
shown in figure. (when reusing bolts) attachment bolts. (LH side)
Liquid gasket: Tightening torque:
THREE BOND 1324 (Part No. 004403042) or 6.4 N·m (0.65 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
equivalent 40) Install the rocker cover and rocker cover gas-
Tightening torque: ket.
6.4 N·m (0.65 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb) NOTE:
Use a new gasket.
41) Install the crank sprocket. <Ref. to
ME(H4DOTC)-52, INSTALLATION, Crank Sprock-
et.>
42) Install the cam sprocket.<Ref. to
ME(H4DOTC)-51, INSTALLATION, Cam Sprock-
et.>
43) Install the timing belt.<Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-
45, INSTALLATION, Timing Belt.>
T 44) Install the timing belt cover.<Ref. to
LU-02103
32) Install the water pump and gasket. Cover.>
Tightening torque: 45) Install the crank pulley.<Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-
First: 12 N·m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.9 ft-lb) 40, INSTALLATION, Crank Pulley.>
Second: 12 N·m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.9 ft-lb) 46) Install the generator and A/C compressor
brackets on cylinder head.
NOTE: 47) Install the V-belts. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-38,
• When installing the water pump, tighten bolts in INSTALLATION, V-belt.>
two stages in alphabetical sequence as shown in 48) Install the intake manifold.<Ref. to
the figure. FU(H4DOTC)-16, INSTALLATION, Intake Mani-
• Use a new gasket. fold.>
(B)
(C)
(A)
(D)
(E) (F)
ME-02463
33) Install the water by-pass pipe for heater.

34) Install the oil cooler. <Ref. to LU(H4DOTC)-25,
INSTALLATION, Engine Oil Cooler.>
35) Install the oil filter. <Ref. to LU(H4DOTC)-26,
INSTALLATION, Engine Oil Filter.>
36) Install the water by-pass pipe between oil cool-
er and water pump.
37) Install the water pipe.
NOTE:
Use new O-rings.
38) Install the cylinder head.<Ref. to
ME(H4DOTC)-58, INSTALLATION, Cylinder
Head.>
ME(H4DOTC)-75
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
C: DISASSEMBLY
(1)
(2)
(2)
(5)
(4)
(3)
(6)
ME-02741
(1) Connecting rod cap (3) Top ring (5) Oil ring
(2) Connecting rod bearing (4) Second ring (6) Snap ring
1) Remove the connecting rod cap. 3) Remove the piston rings using piston ring ex-
2) Remove the connecting rod bearing. pander.
NOTE: 4) Remove the oil ring by hand.
Keep the removed connecting rods, connecting rod NOTE:
caps and bearings in order so that they are kept in Arrange the removed piston rings in proper order,
their original combinations/groups, and not mixed to prevent confusion.
together. 5) Remove the snap ring.
D: ASSEMBLY
(3)
T
(1)
(1)
(2)
(4)
(5)
(8)
(6)
(7)
ME-02985
(1) Connecting rod bearing (5) Second ring Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(2) Connecting rod (6) Top ring T: 52 (5.3, 38.4)
(3) Connecting rod cap (7) Snap ring
(4) Oil ring (8) Side mark
ME(H4DOTC)-76
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
1) Apply oil to the surface of the connecting rod 2. CYLINDER AND PISTON
bearings, and install the connecting rod bearings 1) The cylinder bore size is stamped on the front
on connecting rods and connecting rod caps. upper face of the cylinder block.
2) Position each connecting rod with the marking
side facing forward. NOTE:
3) Tighten the connecting rod cap with connecting • Measurement should be performed at a temper-
rod bolt. Make sure the arrow mark on connecting ature of 20°C (68°F).
rod cap facing front during installation. • Standard sized pistons are classified into two
grades, “A” and “B”. These grades should be used
NOTE: as guide lines in selecting a standard piston.
• Each connecting rod has its own mating cap.
Make sure that they are assembled correctly by Standard diameter:
checking their matching number. A: 99.505 — 99.515 mm (3.9175 — 3.9179 in)
• When tightening the connecting rod nuts, apply B: 99.495 — 99.505 mm (3.9171 — 3.9175 in)
oil on the threads.
Tightening torque:
52 N·m (5.3 kgf-m, 38.4 ft-lb)
4) Install the oil ring upper rail, expander and lower
rail by hand.
5) Install the second ring and top ring using piston
ring expander.
E: INSPECTION
1. CYLINDER BLOCK (A) (B)
1) Check for cracks or damage. Use liquid pene-
trant tester on the important sections to check for
#5
4

#4
5
ing or water leaking on gasket installing surface.

#3
2) Check the oil passages for clogging.
#2 (F)
B
3) Inspect the crankcase surface that mates with

#1 (D)
cylinder head for warping by using a straight edge,
A
and correct by grinding if necessary.

Warping limit: (E) (C)
0.025 mm (0.00098 in) ME-00170
Grinding limit:
(A) Main journal size mark
0.1 mm (0.004 in)
(B) Cylinder block (RH) – (LH) combination mark
Standard height of cylinder block: (C) #1 cylinder bore size mark
201.0 mm (7.91 in) (D) #2 cylinder bore size mark
(E) #3 cylinder bore size mark
(F) #4 cylinder bore size mark
ME(H4DOTC)-77
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
2) Cylinder inner diameter measurement 4) Cylinder outer diameter measurement

Measure the inner diameter of each cylinder in both Measure the outer diameter of each piston at the
the thrust and piston pin directions at the heights as height as shown in the figure. (Thrust direction)
shown in the figure, using a cylinder bore gauge. NOTE:
NOTE: Measurement should be performed at a tempera-
Measurement should be performed at a temperature of 20°C (68°F).
Piston grade point H:
Taper: 38.2 mm (1.50 in)
Standard
Piston outer diameter:
0.015 mm (0.0006 in)
Standard
Out-of-roundness:
A: 99.505 — 99.515 mm (3.9175 — 3.9179 in)
Standard
B: 99.495 — 99.505 mm (3.9171 — 3.9175 in)
0.010 mm (0.0004 in)
0.25 mm (0.0098 in) oversize
99.745 — 99.765 mm (3.9270 — 3.9278 in)
(A) (B) 0.50 mm (0.0197 in) oversize
99.995 — 100.015 mm (3.9368 — 3.9376 in)
H1
ME-00172
H2
H3 5) Calculate the clearance between cylinder and
H4 piston.
NOTE:
Measurement should be performed at a tempera-
Cylinder to piston clearance at 20°C (68°F):
ME-00171
Standard
(A) Piston pin direction –0.010 — 0.010 mm (–0.00039 — 0.00039 in)
(B) Thrust direction
6) Boring and honing
(1) If any of the measured value of taper, out-of-
H1: 10 mm (0.39 in)
roundness or cylinder-to-piston clearance is out
H2: 45 mm (1.77 in)
of standard or if there is any damage on the cyl-
H3: 80 mm (3.15 in) inder wall, rebore it to replace with an oversize
H4: 115 mm (4.53 in) piston.
3) When the piston is to be replaced due to general CAUTION:
or cylinder wear, determine a suitable sized piston • When any of the cylinders needs reboring, all
by measuring the piston clearance. other cylinders must be bored at the same time,
and replaced with oversize pistons.
• Do not perform boring on one cylinder only.
Do not replace only a single cylinder for an
oversize piston.
ME(H4DOTC)-78
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
(2) If the cylinder inner diameter exceeds the 4) Check the snap ring installation groove (A) on
limit after boring and honing, replace the cylin- the piston for burr. If necessary, remove burr from
der block. the groove so that the piston pin can lightly move.
NOTE:
Immediately after reboring, the cylinder diameter
may differ from its real diameter due to temperature
rise. Thus, when measuring the cylinder diameter,
(A)
wait until it has cooled to room temperature.
Cylinder inner diameter boring limit (diameter):
100.015 mm (3.9376 in)
3. PISTON AND PISTON PIN
1) Check the piston and piston pin for breaks, ME-00175
cracks or wear. Replace if faulty. 5) Check the piston pin snap ring for distortion,
2) Check the piston ring groove for wear and dam- cracks and wear.
age. Replace if faulty.
3) Make sure that the piston pin can be inserted 4. PISTON RING
into the piston pin hole with a thumb at 20°C (68°F). 1) If the piston ring is broken, damaged or worn, or
Replace if faulty. if its tension is insufficient, or when the piston is re-
placed, replace the piston ring with a new part of
Standard clearance between piston pin and
the same size as piston.
hole in piston:
Standard NOTE:
0.004 — 0.008 mm (0.0002 — 0.0003 in) • The top ring and second ring have the mark to
determine the direction to install on them. When in-
stalling the ring to piston, face this mark to the top
side.
• Oil ring consists of the upper rail, expander and
lower rail. When installing oil ring on piston, be
careful of the direction of each rail.
(A)
ME-00173
(B)
(C)
(A)
(B)
ME-00174
(C)
ME-02480
(A) Upper rail

(B) Expander
(C) Lower rail
ME(H4DOTC)-79
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
2) Squarely place the piston ring and oil ring in cyl- 5. CONNECTING ROD
inder using the piston, and measure the piston ring 1) Replace the connecting rod, if the large or small
gap with a thickness gauge. end thrust surface is damaged.
Standard 2) Check for bend or twist using a connecting rod
mm (in) aligner. Replace the connecting rod if the bend or
0.20 — 0.25 twist exceeds the limit.
Top ring
(0.0079 — 0.0098)
Limit of bend or twist per 100 mm (3.94 in) in
0.37 — 0.52 length:
Piston ring gap Second ring
(0.015 — 0.020)
0.10 mm (0.0039 in)
0.20 — 0.50
Oil ring rail
(0.0079 — 0.0197)
(A)
NOTE:
Difference between outer and inner circumference
of top ring is within 0.05 mm (0.0020 in). (B)
(A)
ME-00177
3) Fit the piston ring straight into the piston ring

groove, then measure the clearance between pis- (B)
ton ring and piston ring groove with a thickness
gauge.
NOTE: ME-00179
Before measuring the clearance, clean the piston
ring groove and piston ring. (A) Thickness gauge
Standard (B) Connecting rod
mm (in)
0.040 — 0.080
3) Install the connecting rod fitted with bearing to
Clearance between Top ring
(0.0016 — 0.0031) the crankshaft, and measure the thrust clearance
piston ring and pis- using a thickness gauge. If the thrust clearance ex-
ton ring groove 0.030 — 0.070
Second ring
(0.0012 — 0.0028)
ceeds the standard or uneven wear is found, re-
place the connecting rod.
Connecting rod thrust clearance:
Standard
0.070 — 0.330 mm (0.0028 — 0.0130 in)
ME-00178
ME-00180
4) Inspect the connecting rod bearing for scar,

peeling, seizure, melting, wear, etc.
ME(H4DOTC)-80
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
5) Measure the oil clearance on each connecting 8) The replacement procedure for the connecting
rod bearing using plastigauge. If any oil clearance rod small end bushing is as follows.
is not within the standard, replace the defective (1) Remove the bushing from connecting rod
bearing with a new part of standard size or under- with ST and press.
size as necessary. (See the table below.) (2) Press the bushing with the ST after applying
Connecting rod oil clearance: oil on the periphery of new bushing.
Standard ST 499037100 CONNECTING ROD BUSH-
ING REMOVER AND IN-
0.017 — 0.045 mm (0.0007 — 0.0018 in)
STALLER
Unit: mm (in)
Bearing size
Outer diameter of
Bearing (Thickness at
crank pin
center) ST
1.490 — 1.502 51.984 — 52.000
Standard
(0.0587 — 0.0591) (2.0466 — 2.0472)
0.03 (0.0012) 1.504 — 1.512 51.954 — 51.970
undersize (0.0592 — 0.0595) (2.0454 — 2.0461)
0.05 (0.0020) 1.514 — 1.522 51.934 — 51.950
undersize (0.0596 — 0.0599) (2.0447 — 2.0453)
ME-00182
0.25 (0.0098) 1.614 — 1.622 51.734 — 51.750
undersize (0.0635 — 0.0639) (2.0368 — 2.0374) (3) Make two 3 mm (0.12 in) holes in the
pressed bushing by aligning with the pre-manu-
6) Inspect the bushing at connecting rod small end, factured holes on the connecting rod, and ream
and replace with a new part if worn or damaged. the inside of the bushing.
7) Measure the piston pin clearance at connecting (4) After completion of reaming, clean the bush-
rod small end. If the measured value is not within ing to remove chips.
the standard, replace it with a new part.
6. CRANKSHAFT AND CRANKSHAFT
Clearance between piston pin and bushing: BEARING
Standard
1) Clean the crankshaft completely, and check it for
0 — 0.022 mm (0 — 0.0009 in)
cracks through liquid penetrant testing, etc. If de-
fective, replace the crankshaft.
2) Measure warping of the crankshaft. If it exceeds
the limit, correct or replace it.
NOTE:
If a suitable V-block is not available, using just the
#1 and #5 crankshaft bearings on cylinder block,
position the crankshaft on cylinder block. Then,
measure the crankshaft bend using a dial gauge.
ME-00181 Crankshaft bend limit:
0.035 mm (0.0014 in)
ME-00174
ME-00183
ME(H4DOTC)-81
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
3) Inspect the crank journal and crank pin for wear. Crank journal:
If they are not within the specification, replace the Out-of-roundness
bearing with a suitable (undersize) one, and re- 0.005 mm (0.0002 in)
place or grind to correct the crankshaft as neces- Cylindricality
sary. When grinding the crank journal or crank pin, 0.006 mm (0.0002 in)
finish them to the specified dimensions according Grinding limit (dia.)
to the undersize bearing to be used. To 59.758 mm (2.3527 in)
Crank pin:
Out-of-roundness
0.003 mm (0.0001 in)
Cylindricality
0.004 mm (0.0002 in)
Grinding limit (dia.)
To 51.750 mm (2.0374 in)
ME-00184
Unit: mm (in)
Crank journal diameter
Crank pin outer diameter
#1, #3 #2, #4, #5
59.992 — 60.008 59.992 — 60.008 51.984 — 52.000
Journal O.D.
(2.3619 — 2.3625) (2.3619 — 2.3625) (2.0466 — 2.0472)
Standard
Bearing size 1.998 — 2.011 2.000 — 2.013 1.486 — 1.498
59.962 — 59.978 59.962 — 59.978 51.954 — 51.970
Journal O.D.
0.03 (0.0012) (2.3607 — 2.3613) (2.3607 — 2.3613) (2.0454 — 2.0461)
undersize Bearing size 2.017 — 2.020 2.019 — 2.022 1.504 — 1.512
59.942 — 59.958 59.942 — 59.958 51.934 — 51.950
Journal O.D.
0.05 (0.0020) (2.3599 — 2.3605) (2.3599 — 2.3605) (2.0447 — 2.0453)
59.742 — 59.758 59.742 — 59.758 51.734 — 51.750
Journal O.D.
0.25 (0.0098) (2.3520 — 2.3527) (2.3520 — 2.3527) (2.0368 — 2.0374)
4) Measure the thrust clearance of crankshaft at 5) Inspect individual crankshaft bearings for signs
center bearing by using thickness gauge. If clear- of flaking, seizure, melting and wear.
ance exceeds the standard, replace the bearing. 6) Measure the oil clearance on each crankshaft
bearing using plastigauge. If the measured value is
Crankshaft thrust clearance:
out of standard, replace the defective bearing with
Standard
an undersize one, and replace or grind to correct
0.030 — 0.115 mm (0.0012 — 0.0045 in) the crankshaft as necessary.
Crankshaft oil clearance:
Standard
0.010 — 0.030 mm (0.0004 — 0.0012 in)
ME-00313
ME(H4DOTC)-82
Intake and Exhaust Valve

MECHANICAL
21.Intake and Exhaust Valve

A: SPECIFICATION
Refer to “Cylinder Head” for removal and installa-
tion procedures of intake and exhaust valves. <Ref.
to ME(H4DOTC)-58, REMOVAL, Cylinder Head.>
<Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-58, INSTALLATION, Cylin-
der Head.>
ME(H4DOTC)-83
Piston
MECHANICAL
22.Piston
A: SPECIFICATION
tion procedures of pistons. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-
65, REMOVAL, Cylinder Block.> <Ref. to
ME(H4DOTC)-68, INSTALLATION, Cylinder
Block.>
ME(H4DOTC)-84
Connecting Rod
MECHANICAL
23.Connecting Rod
A: SPECIFICATION
tion procedures of connecting rod.<Ref. to
ME(H4DOTC)-65, REMOVAL, Cylinder Block.>
der Block.>
ME(H4DOTC)-85
Crankshaft
MECHANICAL
24.Crankshaft
A: SPECIFICATION
tion procedures of crankshaft. <Ref. to
ME(H4DOTC)-65, REMOVAL, Cylinder Block.>
der Block.>
ME(H4DOTC)-86

MECHANICAL
25.Engine Trouble in General

A: INSPECTION
NOTE:
The “RANK” shown in the chart shows the possibilities of the cause of trouble in order from “Very often” to
“Rarely”.
A — Very often
B — Sometimes
C — Rarely
Symptom Problem parts etc. Possible cause RANK
1. Engine does not start.
1) Starter does not turn. Starter Defective battery-to-starter harness B
Defective starter switch C
Defective inhibitor switch or neutral switch C
Defective starter B
Battery Improper connection of terminal A
Run-down battery A
Defective charging system B
Friction Seizure of crankshaft and connecting rod bearing C
Seized camshaft C
Seized or stuck piston and cylinder C
2) Initial combustion does Starter Defective starter C
not occur. Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
Fuel line Defective fuel pump and relay A
Clogged fuel line C
Defective timing B
ME(H4DOTC)-87

MECHANICAL

3) Initial combustion occurs. Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
Intake system Defective intake manifold gasket B
Clogged fuel line C
Defective timing B
4) Engine stalls after initial Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
combustion. Intake system Loosened or cracked intake duct B
Loosened or cracked vacuum hose C
Fuel line Clogged fuel line C
Defective timing B
ME(H4DOTC)-88

MECHANICAL

2. Rough idle and engine Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
stall Intake system Loosened or cracked intake duct A
Defective PCV valve C
Clogged fuel line C
Timing belt Defective timing C
Defective rocker cover gasket C
Stuck or damaged throttle valve B
ME(H4DOTC)-89

MECHANICAL

3. Low output, hesitation and Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
poor acceleration Intake system Loosened or cracked intake duct A
Dirty air cleaner element A
Clogged fuel line B
Over-cooling C
4. Surging Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
Intake system Loosened or cracked intake duct A
Dirty air cleaner element B
Clogged fuel line B
ME(H4DOTC)-90

MECHANICAL

5. Engine does not return to Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
idle. Intake system Loosened or cracked vacuum hose A
Others Stuck or damaged throttle valve A
6. Dieseling (Run-on) Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
Others Evaporative emission control system malfunction B
7. After burning in exhaust Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
system Intake system Loosened or cracked intake duct C
8. Knocking Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
Intake system Loosened oil filler cap B
Cooling system Overheating A
9. Excessive engine oil con- Intake system Loosened or cracked PCV hose A
sumption Defective PCV valve B
Compression Defective valve stem A
Worn or stuck piston rings, cylinder and piston A
Lubrication system Loosened oil pump attaching bolts and defective gas- B
ket
Defective oil filter O-ring B
Defective crankshaft oil seal B
Defective rocker cover gasket B
Loosened oil drain plug or defective gasket B
Loosened oil pan fitting bolts or defective oil pan B
ME(H4DOTC)-91

MECHANICAL

10. Excessive fuel consump- Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
tion Intake system Dirty air cleaner element A
ME(H4DOTC)-92
Engine Noise
MECHANICAL
26.Engine Noise
A: INSPECTION
Type of sound Condition Possible cause
• Valve mechanism is defective.
Sound increases as engine • Incorrect valve clearance
Regular clicking sound
speed increases. • Worn camshaft
• Broken valve spring
• Worn crankshaft main bearing
Oil pressure is low.
• Worn connecting rod bearing (large end)
Heavy and dull clank
• Loosened flywheel mounting bolt
Oil pressure is normal.
• Damaged engine mounting
• Ignition timing advanced
Sound is noticeable when
• Accumulation of carbon inside combustion chamber
High-pitched clank accelerating with an overload
• Wrong spark plug
condition.
• Improper gasoline
Sound is reduced when fuel
Clank when engine speed is injector connector of noisy cyl- • Worn crankshaft main bearing
between 1,000 and 2,000 rpm. inder is disconnected. • Worn connecting rod bearing (large end)
(NOTE*)
Sound is reduced when fuel
• Worn cylinder liner and piston ring
injector connector of noisy cyl-
• Broken or stuck piston ring
Knocking sound when engine inder is disconnected.
• Worn piston pin and hole at piston end of connecting rod
is operating under idling speed (NOTE*)
and engine is warm Sound is not reduced if each • Unusually worn valve lifter
fuel injector connector is dis- • Worn cam sprocket
connected in turn. (NOTE*) • Worn camshaft journal bore in cylinder head
Squeaky sound — Insufficient generator lubrication
Rubbing sound — Poor contact of generator brush and rotor
Gear scream when starting • Defective ignition starter switch
—
engine • Worn gear and starter pinion
Sound like polishing glass with • Loose drive belt
—
a dry cloth • Defective water pump shaft
• Insufficient compression
Hissing sound —
• Air leakage in air intake system, hose, connection or manifold
• Loose timing belt
Timing belt noise —
• Belt contacting with case/adjacent part
Valve noise — Incorrect valve clearance
NOTE*)
When disconnecting the fuel injector connector, the malfunction indicator light illuminates and DTC is stored in ECM memory.
Therefore, perform the Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-56, OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.> and Inspec-
tion Mode <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-45, PROCEDURE, Inspection Mode.> after connecting the fuel injector connector.
ME(H4DOTC)-93
Engine Noise
MECHANICAL
ME(H4DOTC)-94
EXHAUST
EX(H4DOTC)
Page
2. Front Exhaust Pipe .....................................................................................5
3. Center Exhaust Pipe ..................................................................................8
4. Joint Pipe .................................................................................................11
5. Rear Exhaust Pipe ...................................................................................12
6. Muffler ......................................................................................................14
General Description
EXHAUST
A: COMPONENT
1. FRONT EXHAUST PIPE
(16)
T1
T3
(1)
T1 T3
(2) A
(17) (3) (15)
(5)
A
(14)
T4 (11)
T5
(6) (12)
(4)
(18)
(8)
(7)
(7)
T1 (20)
T3
(13)
(9)
T3
(19)
(10)
T4
T1
T2 T2
T2
EX-02173
(1) Gasket (10) Front exhaust pipe lower cover (20) Exhaust manifold (LH)
(2) Exhaust manifold upper cover (RH) (11) Gasket
(3) Exhaust manifold (RH) (12) Exhaust manifold upper cover (LH) Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(4) Exhaust manifold lower cover (13) Exhaust manifold outer cover (LH) T1: 19 (1.9, 14.0)
(RH) (14) Gasket T2: 25 (2.5, 18.4)
(5) Front exhaust pipe upper cover (15) Turbocharger joint pipe T3: 35 (3.6, 26.0)
(6) Front exhaust pipe upper insulator (16) Gasket T4: 40 (4, 28.9)
(RH) (17) Front oxygen (A/F) sensor T5: <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-41,
(7) Gasket (18) Front exhaust pipe upper insulator INSTALLATION, Front Oxygen
(8) Front exhaust pipe (LH) (A/F) Sensor.>
(9) Front exhaust pipe lower insulator (19) Front exhaust pipe lower insulator
(RH) (LH)
EX(H4DOTC)-2
General Description
EXHAUST
2. CENTER AND REAR EXHAUST PIPE, AND MUFFLER
(13)
(13)
(17)
(16)
(13) (19)
(16)
(13) (13)
(15)
(11)
(14)
T5 (18)
(10)
(12)
(8)
T6
A
(5)
A
(1) (20)
T4
(3)
T2
T4 (9)
T4 (4)
T3
(6)
(2)
T1
(7)
T1
T4
(21) T3
EX-02058
(1) Gasket (11) Rear exhaust pipe Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(2) Front catalytic converter (12) Chamber T1: 13 (1.3, 9.6)
(3) Center exhaust pipe (Front) (13) Cushion rubber T2: 18 (1.8, 13.0)
(4) Gasket (14) Spring T3: 30 (3.1, 22.4)
(5) Center pipe upper cover (Rear) (15) Bolt T4: 35 (3.6, 26.0)
(6) Clamp (16) Gasket T5: 48 (4.9, 35.4)
(7) Rear catalytic converter lower (17) Muffler (RH) T6: <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-42, Sen-
cover (18) Self-locking nut INSTALLATION, Rear Oxygen
(8) Rear oxygen sensor (19) Muffler (LH) sor.>
(9) Rear catalytic converter (20) Center exhaust pipe (Rear)
(10) Gasket (21) Bracket
EX(H4DOTC)-3
General Description
EXHAUST
B: CAUTION
forming any work.
points.
the battery.
• If any fat adheres to the exhaust pipe, wipe it off.
Otherwise a fire may happen.
EX(H4DOTC)-4
Front Exhaust Pipe

EXHAUST
2. Front Exhaust Pipe 7) While holding the front exhaust pipe assembly
with one hand, remove the nuts which hold the front
A: REMOVAL exhaust pipe assembly to cylinder head exhaust
port.
CAUTION:
ning.
EX-00004
IN-00203
3) Remove the front oxygen (A/F) sensor.<Ref. to

FU(H4DOTC)-40, REMOVAL, Front Oxygen (A/F)
Sensor.>
5) Remove the exhaust manifold lower cover (RH) EX-00005
and the exhaust manifold cover (LH). 8) Remove the front exhaust pipe assembly.
9) Remove the covers from exhaust manifold and
front exhaust pipe.
10) Separate the front exhaust pipe from exhaust
manifolds.
EX-02059
6) Remove the bolts and nuts which hold front ex-

haust pipe assembly onto turbocharger joint pipe.
EX-00245
EX(H4DOTC)-5
Front Exhaust Pipe

EXHAUST
B: INSTALLATION 5) Connect the exhaust manifold (RH) to turbo-

charger joint pipe.
1) Install the front exhaust pipe and the exhaust
manifold. NOTE:
NOTE: Use a new gasket.
Use a new gasket. Tightening torque:
T1: 35 N·m (3.6 kgf-m, 26.0 ft-lb)
Tightening torque:
35 N·m (3.6 kgf-m, 26.0 ft-lb) T2: 40 N·m (4.0 kgf-m, 28.9 ft-lb)
T2
T1
EX-00070
EX-00245
2) Install the front exhaust pipe cover.

Tightening torque:
25 N·m (2.5 kgf-m, 18.4 ft-lb)
3) Install the exhaust manifold upper cover (RH).
Tightening torque:
19 N·m (1.9 kgf-m, 14.0 ft-lb) T2
4) Install the front exhaust pipe assembly.
T2
NOTE:
EX-00071
Use a new gasket.
6) Install the exhaust manifold lower cover (RH)
Tightening torque: and the exhaust manifold cover (LH).
35 N·m (3.6 kgf-m, 26.0 ft-lb)
Tightening torque:
19 N·m (1.9 kgf-m, 14.0 ft-lb)
EX-02059
EX(H4DOTC)-6
Front Exhaust Pipe

EXHAUST
7) Install the front oxygen (A/F) sensor.<Ref. to

FU(H4DOTC)-41, INSTALLATION, Front Oxygen
(A/F) Sensor.>
IN-00203
C: INSPECTION
leaks.
EX(H4DOTC)-7
Center Exhaust Pipe

EXHAUST
3. Center Exhaust Pipe 10) Remove the bolts which hold the turbocharger
lower cover and center exhaust pipe.
A: REMOVAL
CAUTION:
ning.
EX-00011
11) Separate the center exhaust pipe from turbo-

charger.
IN-00203

6) Remove the under cover. EX-00012
7) Remove the bolts which install the lower side of 12) Lift up the vehicle.
turbocharger lower cover. 13) Disconnect the connector from the rear oxygen
sensor.
EX-00009
8) Lower the vehicle. EX-00206

9) Remove the turbocharger upper cover. 14) Separate the center exhaust pipe from rear ex-
haust pipe.
EX-00010
EX-02065
EX(H4DOTC)-8
Center Exhaust Pipe

EXHAUST
15) Remove the bolt which holds center exhaust B: INSTALLATION

pipe bracket to transmission.
1) Install the center exhaust pipe and temporarily
tighten the bolt which holds center exhaust pipe to
hanger bracket.
2) Temporarily tighten the bolt which holds the cen-
ter pipe to transmission.
3) Connect the center exhaust pipe to turbocharg-
er.
NOTE:
Use a new gasket.
EX-00208 Tightening torque:
35 N·m (3.6 kgf-m, 26.0 ft-lb)
16) Remove the intercooler bracket.
17) Remove the bolt which holds center exhaust
pipe to hanger bracket.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to pull down the center exhaust
pipe.
EX-00012
4) Install the center exhaust pipe to rear exhaust

pipe.
NOTE:
Use a new gasket.
EX-00209
Tightening torque:
18) Remove the center exhaust pipe. 18 N·m (1.8 kgf-m, 13.0 ft-lb)
EX-00016 EX-02065
5) Connect the connector to rear oxygen sensor.
EX-00206
EX(H4DOTC)-9
Center Exhaust Pipe

EXHAUST
6) Tighten the bolt which holds center exhaust pipe 10) Position the turbocharger upper cover, and
bracket to transmission. tighten the bolts which install the upper side of up-
per cover.
Tightening torque:
7.5 N·m (0.8 kgf-m, 5.5 ft-lb)
EX-00208
EX-00017
7) Tighten the bolt which holds center exhaust pipe
to hanger bracket. 11) Lift up the vehicle.
12) Tighten the bolts which install the under side of
Tightening torque:
turbocharger lower cover.
35 N·m (3.6 kgf-m, 26.0 ft-lb)
Tightening torque:
7.5 N·m (0.8 kgf-m, 5.5 ft-lb)
EX-00209

EX-00009
9) Position the turbocharger lower cover, and tight-
en the bolts which hold the lower cover and center 13) Install the under cover.
exhaust pipe. 14) Lower the vehicle.
Tightening torque: 15) Install the intercooler. <Ref. to IN(H4DOTC)-
7.5 N·m (0.8 kgf-m, 5.5 ft-lb)
EX-00011
IN-00203
C: INSPECTION
leaks.
EX(H4DOTC)-10
Joint Pipe
EXHAUST
4. Joint Pipe B: INSTALLATION

A: REMOVAL
NOTE:
CAUTION:
Use a new gasket.
haust pipe becomes extremely hot after run- Tightening torque:
ning. T: 35 N·m (3.6 kgf-m, 26.0 ft-lb)
2) Remove the collector cover. T
EX-00019
Tightening torque:
19 N·m (1.9 kgf-m, 14.0 ft-lb)
IN-00203
4) Remove the front oxygen (A/F) sensor.<Ref. to

FU(H4DOTC)-40, REMOVAL, Front Oxygen (A/F)
Sensor.>
6) Remove the exhaust manifold lower cover (RH).
EX-02075
C: INSPECTION
leaks.
EX-02075
7) Remove the nuts which hold the front exhaust

manifold to joint pipe.
EX-00018

Pipe.>
9) Remove the turbocharger. <Ref. to
IN(H4DOTC)-14, REMOVAL, Turbocharger.>
10) Take off the joint pipe in the upward direction.
EX(H4DOTC)-11
Rear Exhaust Pipe

EXHAUST
5. Rear Exhaust Pipe B: INSTALLATION

A: REMOVAL area of cushion rubber.
CAUTION: 2) Install the rear exhaust pipe bracket to cushion
Be careful not to burn yourself, because the ex- rubber.
haust pipe becomes extremely hot after run- NOTE:
ning. After assembling, degrease the lubricant which
1) Set the vehicle on a lift. was applied to the cushion rubber while removing/
2) Lift up the vehicle. installing.
3) Separate the rear exhaust pipe from center ex-
haust pipe.
EX-00219
EX-02065 3) Install the rear exhaust pipe to both mufflers.

4) Separate the rear exhaust pipe from both muf- NOTE:
flers. Use a new gasket and self-locking nut.
CAUTION: Tightening torque:
Be careful not to pull down the rear exhaust 48 N·m (4.9 kgf-m, 35.4 ft-lb)
pipe.
EX-00210
EX-00210 4) Install the rear exhaust pipe to center exhaust
5) Apply a coat of spray type lubricant to the mating pipe.
area of cushion rubber. NOTE:
6) Remove the rear exhaust pipe bracket from Use a new gasket.
cushion rubber.
Tightening torque:
18 N·m (1.8 kgf-m, 13.3 ft-lb)
EX-00219
7) Remove the rear exhaust pipe.

EX-02065
EX(H4DOTC)-12
Rear Exhaust Pipe

EXHAUST
C: INSPECTION
leaks.
EX(H4DOTC)-13
Muffler
EXHAUST
6. Muffler B: INSTALLATION
A: REMOVAL
NOTE:
CAUTION:
• Use a new gasket and self-locking nut.
• After assembling, degrease the lubricant which
was applied to the cushion rubber while removing/
ning. installing.
2) Lift up the vehicle. Tightening torque:
3) Separate the muffler (RH) from the rear exhaust 48 N·m (4.9 kgf-m, 35.4 ft-lb)
pipe.
EX-00210
EX-00210
C: INSPECTION
leaks.
5) Remove the cushion rubber, and remove the
muffler.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to drop the muffler during remov-
al.
EX-00211
6) Perform the same procedures for the muffler

(LH).
EX(H4DOTC)-14
COOLING
CO(H4DOTC)
Page
2. Radiator Fan System .................................................................................8
3. Engine Coolant .........................................................................................13
4. Water Pump .............................................................................................15
5. Thermostat ...............................................................................................17
6. Radiator ....................................................................................................19
7. Radiator Cap ............................................................................................23
8. Radiator Main Fan and Fan Motor ...........................................................24
9. Radiator Sub Fan and Fan Motor .............................................................27
10. Reservoir Tank .........................................................................................30
11. Coolant Filler Tank ...................................................................................31
12. Engine Cooling System Trouble in General .............................................32
General Description
COOLING
A: SPECIFICATION
Electric fan + Forced engine coolant
Cooling system
circulation system
MT: approx. 7.3 (7.7, 6.4)
Total engine coolant capacity 2 (US qt, Imp qt)
AT: approx. 7.2 (7.6, 6.3)
Type Centrifugal impeller type
Discharge rate 2 (US gal, Imp gal) /min 20 (5.3, 4.4)
Discharge
Pump speed — Discharge pressure 760 rpm — 2.9 kPa (0.3 mAq)
performance I
Discharge rate 2 (US gal, Imp gal) /min 100 (26.4, 22.0)
Discharge
Pump speed — Discharge pressure 3,000 rpm — 49.0 kPa (5.0 mAq)
performance II
Water pump Discharge rate 2 (US gal, Imp gal) /min 200 (52.8, 44.0)
Discharge
Pump speed — Discharge pressure 6,000 rpm — 225.4 kPa (23.0 mAq)
performance III
Impeller diameter mm (in) 76 (2.99)
Number of impeller vanes 8
Pump pulley diameter mm (in) 60 (2.36)
Clearance between
Standard mm (in) 0.5 — 1.5 (0.020 — 0.059)
impeller and case
Type Wax pellet type
Starting temperature to open 76 — 80°C (169 — 176°F)
Thermostat Fully opens 91°C (196°F)
Valve lift mm (in) 9.0 (0.354) or more
Valve bore mm (in) 35 (1.38)
Main fan
120
W
Motor input
Sub fan
Radiator fan 120
W
Main fan 320 mm (12.6 in)/5
Fan diameter / Blade
Sub fan 320 mm (12.6 in)/7
Type Down flow
Width × Height ×
Core dimensions mm (in) 687.4 × 340 × 16 (27.06 × 13.39 × 0.63)
Thickness
Above: 108±15
Coolant filler 2, psi) (1.1±0.15, 16±2)
Radiator Pressure range in kPa (kg/cm
tank side Below: –1.0 to –4.9
which cap valve is (–0.01 — –0.05, –0.1 — –0.7)
open
Above only: 137±14.7
Radiator side kPa (kg/cm2, psi)
(1.40±0.15, 20±2.1)
Fins Corrugated fin type
Reservoir tank Capacity 2 (US qt, Imp qt) 0.45 (0.48, 0.40)

Coolant SUBARU coolant 000016218 Phosphoric acid (non-amine) type
Water for dilution Distilled water — Soft water or tap water
Cooling system protective agent Cooling system conditioner SOA345001 None
CO(H4DOTC)-2
General Description
COOLING
Engine coolant temperature

Increase: 94°C (201°F) Increase: 95 — 96°C Increase: 97°C (207°F)
or less (203 — 205°F) or more
Vehicle speed A/C compressor load
Decrease: 91°C (196°F) Decrease: 92 — 94°C Decrease: 95°C (203°F)
or less (198 — 201°F) or more
Radiator fan operation Radiator fan operation Radiator fan operation
19 km/h (12 MPH) Low Low-Speed Low-Speed High-Speed
or less
10 km/h (6 MPH) High High-Speed High-Speed High-Speed
or less
(12 — 43 MPH)
(7 — 40 MPH)
(43 — 65 MPH)
(40 — 64 MPH)
During acceleration: OFF OFF High-Speed High-Speed
106 km/h (66 MPH) Low High-Speed High-Speed High-Speed
or more
104 km/h (65 MPH) High High-Speed High-Speed High-Speed
or more
CO(H4DOTC)-3
General Description
COOLING
B: COMPONENT
1. WATER PUMP
(2)
(1)
T1
(7)
(3)
T1
(4)
T2 (5)
(6)
CO-02279
(1) Water pump ASSY (5) Gasket Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(2) Gasket (6) Thermostat cover T1: First 12 (1.2, 8.9)
(3) Heater by-pass hose (7) Coolant filler tank by-pass hose Second 12 (1.2, 8.9)
(4) Thermostat T2: 12 (1.2, 8.9)
CO(H4DOTC)-4
General Description
COOLING
2. RADIATOR AND RADIATOR FAN
(25)
(24)
(5)
(27)
(26)
(5)
T4
T4
(5)
(6) (10)
(8)
(7)
T3
(5)
(29)
(11) T3
T5
(9)
(13)
(12)
T2
(4)
T1
(3)
(2) (15)
(14)
(17)
T2 T4
(5)
B T4
(30) (16)
(15)
C
T4 (18)
(21)
(23) (15)
B
(22) (1)
(5)
(28) C (15)
(19)
(20)
CO-02299
CO(H4DOTC)-5
General Description
COOLING
(1) Radiator lower cushion (14) Radiator main fan ASSY (26) Coolant filler tank hose A
(2) Radiator (15) ATF hose clamp (AT model) (27) Coolant filler tank hose B
(3) Radiator upper cushion (16) ATF hose A (AT model) (28) Radiator lower bracket
(4) Radiator upper bracket (17) ATF hose B (AT model) (29) Over flow hose B
(5) Clamp (18) ATF pipe (AT model) (30) Heat shield cover (AT model)
(6) Radiator hose A (19) ATF hose C (AT model)
(7) Engine coolant reservoir tank cap (20) ATF hose D (AT model) Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(8) Over flow hose A (21) Radiator hose B T1: 3 (0.3, 2.2)
(9) Engine coolant reservoir tank (22) Radiator drain plug T2: 3.4 (0.35, 2.5)
(10) Over flow pipe (23) O-ring T3: 5 (0.5, 3.6)
(11) Radiator sub fan shroud (24) Engine coolant filler tank T4: 7.5 (0.76, 5.5)
(12) Radiator main fan shroud (25) Radiator cap (Engine coolant filler T5: 12 (1.2, 8.9)
(13) Radiator sub fan ASSY tank cap)
C: CAUTION
forming any work.
points.
the battery.
CO(H4DOTC)-6
General Description
COOLING
D: PREPARATION TOOL
499977100 CRANK PULLEY Used to stop rotation of the crank pulley when
WRENCH loosening or tightening crank pulley bolts.
ST-499977100
499977500 CAM SPROCKET Used for removing and installing intake cam
WRENCH sprocket.
ST-499977500
499207400 CAM SPROCKET Used for removing and installing exhaust cam
WRENCH sprocket.
ST-499207400
CO(H4DOTC)-7
Radiator Fan System

COOLING
2. Radiator Fan System

A: WIRING DIAGRAM
BATTERY
MAIN SBF SBF-6
No.3
IGNITION SWITCH
No.4
No.26
MAIN
FUSE BOX No.22
(M/B) MAIN FAN
RELAY
B: B143 1
C: F35
E: F36
C10
B7
E6
E5
THROUGH JOINT
CONNECTOR
10 1
F109 B360
20
21
10
13
MAIN RELAY
FAN SUB
HOLDER
1
RELAY FAN
2 RELAY F27
MAIN FAN
MOTOR
M
22
19
18
11
12
F17
2
THROUGH JOINT CONNECTOR
16 7
1
2
F16 F108 B361

18
29
E E
M B136
ECM
SUB FAN MOTOR
F16 B361 B360 F108 F109 F27
F17 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
1 2 1
3 4 5
6 2
B136 8 9 7
18
B: B143 C: F35 E: F36 1 2 3 4 5 6 12 16 19
10 11 14 15
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 13 17 20 21 22
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 4 5 6 7 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
CO-02317
CO(H4DOTC)-8
Radiator Fan System

COOLING
B: INSPECTION
DETECTING CONDITION:
• Engine coolant temperature is 96°C (205°F) or more.
• Vehicle speed is 19 km/h (12 MPH) or less.
TROUBLE SYMPTOMS:
Radiator main fan and sub fan do not rotate under the above conditions.
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK OPERATION OF RADIATOR FAN. Do the radiator main and sub Go to step 2. Go to step 3.
1) Connect the test mode connector. fans rotate at low speed?
NOTE:
Mode for detail procedures. <Ref. to
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-57, Compulsory Valve Op-
eration Check Mode.>
2 CHECK OPERATION OF RADIATOR FAN. Do the radiator main and sub Radiator main fan Go to step 27.
1) Connect the test mode connector. fans rotate at high speed? system is normal.
3) Perform the compulsory operation check for
the radiator fan relay using Subaru Select Mon-
itor.
NOTE:
Mode for detail procedures. <Ref. to
LAY.
2) Remove the sub fan relay from the relay
holder.
LAY.
CO(H4DOTC)-9
Radiator Fan System

COOLING
Step Check Yes No

7 CHECK SUB FAN RELAY. Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 8. Replace the sub
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. more? fan relay.
relay terminals.
Terminals
No. 10 — No. 11:
8 CHECK SUB FAN RELAY. Is resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 9. Replace the sub
1) Connect the battery to terminals No. 12 and fan relay.
No. 13 of the sub fan relay.
relay terminals.
Terminals
No. 10 — No. 11:
9 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN SUB FAN Is resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 10. Repair the open
RELAY TERMINAL AND SUB FAN MOTOR circuit of harness
CONNECTOR. between sub fan
1) Disconnect the connector from the sub fan relay terminal and
motor. sub fan motor con-
the sub fan relay terminal and sub fan motor
connector.
(F16) No. 1 — (F27) No. 11:
10 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN SUB FAN MO- Is resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 11. Repair the open
TOR CONNECTOR AND MAIN FAN RELAY 2 circuit of the har-
CONNECTOR. ness between sub
1) Remove the main fan relay 2 from the relay fan motor connec-
holder. tor and main fan
2) Measure the resistance of harness between relay 2 connector.
sub fan motor connector and main fan relay 2
connector.
(F16) No. 2 — (F27) No. 18:
11 CHECK POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact in the sub Repair the poor Go to step 12.
Check for poor contact of sub fan motor connec- fan motor connector? contact of sub fan
12 CHECK SUB FAN MOTOR. Does the sub fan rotate? Go to step 13. Replace the sub
minal No. 1 of the sub fan motor, and the ground
(–) terminal to terminal No. 2.
Measure the resistance of main fan relay 2. fan relay 2.
Terminals
No. 21 — No. 18:
CO(H4DOTC)-10
Radiator Fan System

COOLING
Step Check Yes No

14 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN MAIN FAN Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 15. Repair the open
RELAY 2 AND MAIN FAN MOTOR CONNEC- circuit of the har-
TOR. ness between
motor connector.
(F17) No. 1 — (F27) No. 2:
15 CHECK MAIN FAN MOTOR AND GROUND Is resistance less than 5 Ω? Go to step 16. Repair the open
CIRCUIT. circuit of the har-
Measure the resistance between main fan ness between
motor connector and chassis ground. main fan motor
Connector & terminal connector and
(F17) No. 2 — Chassis ground: chassis ground.
Check poor contact of main fan motor connec- main fan motor connector? contact of main fan
17 CHECK MAIN FAN MOTOR. Does the main fan rotate? Go to step 18. Replace the main
minal No. 1 of the main fan motor, and the
ground (–) terminal to terminal No. 2.
LAY AND ECM. circuit of harness
1) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM. between sub fan
2) Measure the resistance between the sub relay terminal and
fan relay terminal and ECM connector. ECM.
(B136) No. 18 — (F27) No. 12:
19 CHECK POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact in ECM Repair the poor Check the DTC.
Check for poor contact of the ECM connector. connector? contact of the ECM Repair the trouble
connector. cause. <Ref. to
EN(H4DOTC)(diag
)-44, Read Diag-
nostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
2) Remove main fan relay 1 from the main fuse
box.
3) Measure the resistance of terminal in main
fan relay 1 switch.
1) Connect the main fan relay 1 coil side termi- fan relay 1.
nal to the battery.
2) Measure the resistance between terminals
of main fan relay 1 switch.
RELAY 1 AND MAIN FAN MOTOR CONNEC- circuit of the har-
TOR. ness between
motor connector.
(F17) No. 1 — (F36) No. 6:
CO(H4DOTC)-11
Radiator Fan System

COOLING
Step Check Yes No

2) Measure the resistance between main fan main fan relay 1
relay 1 terminal and ECM connector. terminal and ECM.
(B136) No. 29 — (B143) No. 7:
Measure the resistance between main fan relay ness between
2 terminal and ECM connector. main fan relay 2
Connector & terminal terminal and ECM.
(B136) No. 29 — (F27) No. 22:
25 CHECK FUSE. Is the fuse blown out? Replace the fuse. Go to step 26.
2) Remove the fuse No. 4 and 26.
26 CHECK POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact in ECM Repair the poor Repair the power
Check for poor contact of the ECM connector. connector? contact of the ECM supply circuit to the
connector. main fuse box.
27 CHECK OPERATION OF RADIATOR FAN. Does the sub fan rotate? Go to step 20. Go to step 28.
If the both fans do not rotate at high speed in the
condition of step 2, check whether the sub fan is
rotating.
28 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT OF MAIN FAN Is resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 29. Repair the open
RELAY 2. circuit of harness
1) Remove the main fan relay 2 from the relay between main fan
holder. relay 2 and chassis
2) Measure the resistance between main fan ground.
29 CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO MAIN FAN RE- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 30. Repair the power
LAY 2. supply line.
2) Measure the voltage between main fan
2) Remove the main fan relay 2.
Terminals
(F27) No. 19 — (F27) No. 18:
1) Connect the battery to main fan relay 2 ter- fan relay 2.
minals No. 20 and No. 22.
Terminals
(F27) No. 19 — (F27) No. 18:
CO(H4DOTC)-12
Engine Coolant
COOLING
3. Engine Coolant 4) Fill engine coolant into the reservoir tank up to

“FULL” level.
A: REPLACEMENT 5) Close the coolant filler tank cap, and start the en-
gine. Race 5 to 6 times at 3,000 rpm or less, then
1. DRAINING OF ENGINE COOLANT stop the engine. (Complete this operation within 40
1) Set the vehicle on a lift. seconds.)
2) Lift up the vehicle. 6) Wait for one minute after the engine stops, then
3) Remove the under cover. open the coolant filler tank cap. If the engine cool-
4) Remove the drain plug to drain engine coolant ant level drops, add engine coolant into the coolant
into container. filler tank up to the filler neck position.
NOTE: 7) Perform the procedures 5) and 6) again.
Remove the coolant filler tank cap so that engine 8) Install the coolant filler tank cap and reservoir
coolant will drain faster. tank cap properly.
9) Start the engine and operate the heater at max-
imum hot position and the blower speed setting to
“LO”.
10) Run the engine at 2,000 rpm or less until radia-
tor fan starts and stops.
NOTE:
Be careful with the engine coolant temperature
gauge to prevent overheating.
11) Stop the engine and wait until the engine cool-
ant temperature lowers to 30°C (86°F) or less.
CO-00248
12) Open the coolant filler tank cap. If the engine
5) Install the drain plug. coolant level drops, add engine coolant into the
2. FILLING OF ENGINE COOLANT coolant filler tank up to the filler neck position and
the reservoir tank to “FULL” level.
1) Remove the collector cover. 13) Install the coolant filler tank cap and reservoir
2) Pour cooling system conditioner through the fill- tank cap properly.
er neck. 14) Set the heater setting to maximum hot position
Cooling system protective agent: and the blower speed setting to “LO” and start the
Refer to “SPECIFICATION” for the cooling engine. Perform racing at 3,000 rpm or less. If the
system protective agent. <Ref. to flowing sound is heard from heater core, repeat the
CO(H4DOTC)-2, SPECIFICATION, General procedures from step 10).
Description.> 15) Install the collector cover.
3) Fill the engine coolant into coolant filler tank up
to the filler neck position.
Recommended engine coolant:
mended engine coolant. <Ref. to
CO(H4DOTC)-2, SPECIFICATION, General
Description.>
Coolant level:
mended engine coolant. <Ref. to
CO(H4DOTC)-2, SPECIFICATION, General
Description.>
CAUTION:
Do not confuse the cap of coolant filler tank and
cap of radiator.
NOTE:
When pouring the engine coolant, the radiator side
cap must not be removed.
CO(H4DOTC)-13
Engine Coolant
COOLING
B: INSPECTION 2. PROCEDURE TO ADJUST THE CON-

CENTRATION OF THE COOLANT
1. RELATIONSHIP OF ENGINE COOLANT
To adjust the concentration of coolant according to
CONCENTRATION AND FREEZING TEM- temperature, find the proper engine coolant con-
PERATURE centration in the diagram 1 and replace the neces-
The concentration and safe operating temperature sary amount of coolant with an undiluted solution of
of engine coolant is shown in the diagram 1. Mea- engine coolant (concentration 50%).
suring the temperature and specific gravity of the The amount of engine coolant that should be re-
coolant will provide this information. placed can be determined using the diagram 2.
[Example] [Example]
If the coolant temperature is 25°C (77°F) and its Assume that the engine coolant concentration must
specific gravity is 1.054, the concentration is 35% be increased from 25% to 40%. Find point A, where
(point A), the safe operating temperature is –14°C the 25% line of engine coolant concentration inter-
(7°F) (point B), and the freezing temperature is – sects with the 40% curve of the necessary engine
20°C (–4°F) (point C). coolant concentration, and read the scale on the
• Diagram 1 vertical axis of the graph at height A. The quantity
of coolant to be drained is 2.1 2 (2.2 US qt, 1.8 Imp
Specific gravity
Safe operating temperature qt). Drain 2.1 2 (2.2 US qt, 1.8 Imp qt) of coolant
from the cooling system and add 2.1 2 (2.2 US qt,
of coolant
Concentration
of coolant 1.8 Imp qt) undiluted engine coolant solution.
If a coolant concentration of 50% is needed, drain
1.100 all the coolant and refill with the undiluted solution
1.090
only.
60% • Diagram 2
1.080
1.070 B
50%
C
1.060
(1.054)
A 40%
1.050
1.040 30%
Freezing Necessary Concentration
1.030 of coolant
temperature
20%
1.020
3
(77 F)
10%
25 C
1.010 (3.2, 45%

2.6) A
1.000 40%
-40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 2 35%
(-40) (-22) (-4) (14) (32) (50) (68) (86) (104) (2.1,
1.8) 30%
Coolant temperature C ( F) CO-02172
1 25%
(1.1, 20%
0.9)
10% 15%
0
10 20 30 40 50

CO-00012
CO(H4DOTC)-14
Water Pump
COOLING
4. Water Pump 13) Remove the water pump.
A: REMOVAL
2) Remove the radiator. <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-19,
REMOVAL, Radiator.>
REMOVAL, V-belt.>
4) Remove the crank pulley. <Ref. to
5) Remove the timing belt. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)- CO-00021
6) Remove the automatic belt tension adjuster (A). B: INSTALLATION
7) Remove the belt idler (B). 1) Install the water pump onto cylinder block (LH).
8) Remove the belt idler No. 2 (C).
NOTE:
• When installing the water pump, tighten the bolts
(A) in two stages in alphabetical sequence as shown in
(B) figure.
Tightening torque:
First:
12 N·m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.9 ft-lb)
(C) Second:
12 N·m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.9 ft-lb)
CO-00023
(B)
9) Remove the cam sprocket (LH) using ST. <Ref.
(C)
to ME(H4DOTC)-51, REMOVAL, Cam Sprocket.> (A)
10) Remove the belt cover (LH) No. 2. (D)
(E) (F)
ME-02463
2) Install the hose to water pump.

CO-00024 Tightening torque:
11) Remove the tensioner bracket. 24.5 N·m (2.5 kgf-m, 18.1 ft-lb)
CO-00025 CO-00025
12) Disconnect the hose from water pump.
CO(H4DOTC)-15
Water Pump
COOLING
4) Install the belt cover No. 2 (LH). C: INSPECTION

Tightening torque: 1) Check the water pump bearing for smooth rota-
5 N·m (0.5 kgf-m, 3.6 ft-lb) tion.
2) Check the water pump pulley for abnormalities.
3) Make sure the impeller is not deformed or dam-
aged.
4) Inspect the clearance between impeller and
pump case.
Clearance between impeller and pump case:
Standard
0.5 — 1.5 mm (0.020 — 0.059 in)
CO-00024
5) Install the cam sprocket (LH) using ST. <Ref. to

ME(H4DOTC)-51, INSTALLATION, Cam Sprock-
et.>
6) Install the belt idler No. 2 (C).
7) Install the belt idler (B).
8) Install the automatic belt tension adjuster (A)
which has a tension rod held by a pin. <Ref. to
ME(H4DOTC)-45, AUTOMATIC BELT TENSION CO-00293
ADJUSTER ASSEMBLY AND BELT IDLER, IN-
5) After water pump installation, check pulley shaft
STALLATION, Timing Belt.>
for engine coolant leaks or noise. If leaks or noise
Tightening torque: are noted, replace the water pump assembly.
39 N·m (4.0 kgf-m, 28.9 ft-lb)
(A)
(B)
(C)
CO-00023
9) Install the timing belt. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-46,

TIMING BELT, INSTALLATION, Timing Belt.>
12) Install the radiator. <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-20,
INSTALLATION, Radiator.>
CO(H4DOTC)-16
Thermostat
COOLING
5. Thermostat 6) Remove the thermostat cover, and then remove

the gasket and thermostat.
A: REMOVAL
4) Drain engine coolant completely.
<Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-13, DRAINING OF EN-
GINE COOLANT, REPLACEMENT, Engine Cool-
ant.>
(C)
(B)
CO-00248
5) Disconnect the radiator outlet hose from thermo- (A)

stat cover.
CO-00154

(B) Gasket
(C) Thermostat
CO-02124
CO(H4DOTC)-17
Thermostat
COOLING
1) Install a gasket to thermostat. Replace the thermostat if the valve does not close
NOTE: completely at an ambient temperature or if the fol-
lowing test shows unsatisfactory results.
Use a new gasket.
• Inspection method
2) Install the thermostat and thermostat cover.
Immerse the thermostat and a thermometer in wa-
NOTE: ter. Raise water temperature gradually, and mea-
The thermostat must be installed with the jiggle pin sure the temperature and valve lift when the valve
facing upward. begins to open and when the valve is fully opened.
Tightening torque: During the test, agitate the water for even temper-
12 N·m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.9 ft-lb) ature distribution. The measured value should
meet the specification.
NOTE:
• Leave the thermostat in the boiling water for
five minutes or more before measuring the valve
lift.
• Hold the thermostat with a wire or the like to
avoid contacting with container bottom.
Starting temperature to open:
76 — 80°C (169 — 176°F)
Fully opens:
(D) 91°C (196°F)
Valve lift:
9.0 mm (0.354 in) or more
T
(C)
(A)
(B)
(A)
(B)
CO-02153

(B) Gasket CO-00033
(C) Thermostat
(D) Jiggle pin (A) Thermometer
(B) Thermostat
3) Connect the radiator outlet hose to thermostat
cover.
CO(H4DOTC)-18
Radiator
COOLING
6. Radiator 8) Disconnect the connectors of radiator main fan

(A) and sub fan motor (B).
A: REMOVAL
CAUTION: (A)
Wait until engine cools down before working on
the radiator because the radiator is pressur-
ized.
CO-00251
(B)
IN-00203

5) Remove the under cover. CO-00252
6) Remove the heat shield cover from radiator. (AT 9) Disconnect the radiator outlet hose from thermo-
model) stat cover.
CO-02318 CO-02124
7) Drain engine coolant completely. 10) Disconnect the ATF cooler hoses from ATF
<Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-13, DRAINING OF EN- pipes.
GINE COOLANT, REPLACEMENT, Engine Cool- Plug the ATF pipe to prevent ATF from leaking. (AT
ant.> model)
CO-00253

IN(H4DOTC)-9, REMOVAL, Air Intake Duct.>
CO(H4DOTC)-19
Radiator
COOLING
14) Remove the reservoir tank. <Ref. to B: INSTALLATION

CO(H4DOTC)-30, REMOVAL, Reservoir Tank.>
1) Attach the radiator lower cushion to the hole on
15) Disconnect the radiator inlet hose (A) from the
the radiator lower bracket.
radiator.
16) Remove the hood stay holder (B).
(A)
(B)
CO-00041
CO-00255 2) Install the radiator to vehicle.

17) Disconnect the two coolant filler tank hoses NOTE:
from the radiator. Make pins on the lower side of radiator be fitted into
the radiator lower cushions on body side.
3) Install the radiator upper brackets and tighten
the bolts.
Tightening torque:
12 N·m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.9 ft-lb)
CO-00256
18) Remove the radiator upper brackets.
CO-00040
4) Connect the two coolant filler tank hoses to the

radiator.
CO-00040
19) Move the radiator to the left while lifting it up-

ward.
20) Lift the radiator up and away from vehicle.
CO-00256
CO(H4DOTC)-20
Radiator
COOLING
5) Connect the radiator inlet hose (A). 13) Connect the connectors to the radiator main
6) Install the hood stay holder (B). fan motor (A) and sub fan motor (B).
Tightening torque:
7.5 N·m (0.76 kgf-m, 5.5 ft-lb) (A)
(A)
CO-00251
(B)
CO-00255 (B)
7) Install the reservoir tank. <Ref. to

CO(H4DOTC)-30, INSTALLATION, Reservoir
Tank.>
9) Install the air intake duct.
<Ref. to IN(H4DOTC)-9, INSTALLATION, Air In-
take Duct.>
10) Lift up the vehicle. CO-00252
11) Connect the ATF cooler hoses. (AT model) 14) Install the heat shield cover to the radiator. (AT
model)
Tightening torque:
3 N·m (0.3 kgf-m, 2.2 ft-lb)
CO-00253
12) Connect the radiator outlet hose.
CO-02318

CO-02124
IN-00203
CO(H4DOTC)-21
Radiator
COOLING
18) Fill engine coolant.

<Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-13, FILLING OF ENGINE
COOLANT, REPLACEMENT, Engine Coolant.>
19) Check the ATF level. <Ref. to 5AT-28, IN-
SPECTION, Automatic Transmission Fluid.>
C: INSPECTION
1) Remove the coolant filler tank cap, fill the cool-
ant filler tank with engine coolant, then install the
tester to the installation position of the cap.
CO-02244
2) Apply a pressure of 122 kPa (1.2 kg/cm2, 18 psi)

to the radiator and check the following points:
• Leakage from the radiator or its vicinity
• Leakage from the hose or its connections
CAUTION:
• Inspection must be carried out at the side of
coolant filler tank, not at the side of radiator.
• Engine should be turned off.
• Wipe engine coolant from check points in ad-
vance.
• Be careful of the spurt of engine coolant
when removing the tester.
• Be careful not to deform the filler neck of the
coolant filler tank when installing and removing
the tester.
CO(H4DOTC)-22
Radiator Cap
COOLING
7. Radiator Cap
A: INSPECTION
1) Attach the radiator cap to tester.
CO-00044
2) Increase pressure until the tester gauge pointer

stops. Radiator cap is functioning properly if it holds
the service limit pressure for five to six seconds.
Coolant filler tank side
Specified pressure:
93 — 123 kPa
(0.95 — 1.25 kg/cm2, 14 — 18 psi)
83 kPa (0.85 kg/cm2, 12 psi)
Radiator side
Specified pressure:
122 — 152 kPa
(1.24 — 1.55 kg/cm2, 18 — 22 psi)
112 kPa (1.14 kg/cm2, 16 psi)
CAUTION:
• Be sure to remove foreign matter and rust
from the cap in advance. Otherwise, results of
pressure test will be incorrect.
• Do not confuse the cap of coolant filler tank
and cap of radiator.
CO(H4DOTC)-23

COOLING
8. Radiator Main Fan and Fan 9) Remove the ATF hose from the clip of the radia-
tor main fan motor assembly. (AT model)
Motor
A: REMOVAL
CO-00258

13) Remove the over flow pipe.
IN-00203 14) Remove the reservoir tank. <Ref. to
4) Lift up the vehicle. 15) Remove the mounting bolts from radiator main
5) Remove the under cover. fan motor assembly.
6) Disconnect the main fan motor connector (A).
(A)
CO-00259
CO-00251
7) Remove the heat shield cover from radiator. (AT radiator.
model) 17) Remove the hood stay holder (B).
(A)
(B)
CO-02318
CO-00255
8) Drain the coolant about 1 2 (1.06 US qt, 0.88 18) Remove the radiator main fan motor assembly
Imp qt). <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-13, DRAINING OF from vehicle.
ENGINE COOLANT, REPLACEMENT, Engine
Coolant.>
CO(H4DOTC)-24

COOLING
B: INSTALLATION 11) Install the heat shield cover to the radiator. (AT
model)
1) Install the radiator main fan motor assembly to
the vehicle. Tightening torque:
2) Connect the radiator inlet hose (A) to the radia- 3 N·m (0.3 kgf-m, 2.2 ft-lb)
tor.
3) Install the hood stay holder (B).
Tightening torque:
7.5 N·m (0.76 kgf-m, 5.5 ft-lb)
(A)
CO-02318
12) Connect the main fan motor connector (A).

(B)
(A)
CO-00255
4) Install the mounting bolts to radiator main fan

motor assembly.
Tightening torque:
7.5 N·m (0.76 kgf-m, 5.5 ft-lb)
CO-00251

CO-00259

CO(H4DOTC)-30, INSTALLATION, Reservoir
Tank.>
6) Install the over flow pipe.
IN-00203
8) Install the air intake duct.
9) Lift up the vehicle. 16) Fill engine coolant. <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-13,
10) Connect the ATF hose to the clip of the radiator FILLING OF ENGINE COOLANT, REPLACE-
main fan motor assembly. (AT model) MENT, Engine Coolant.>
CO(H4DOTC)-25

COOLING
1) Remove the clip which holds the fan motor con- Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.
nector onto the shroud.
Tightening torque:
5 N·m (0.5 kgf-m, 3.6 ft-lb)
motor.
CO-00050
CO-02142
CO-00050 CO-02142
CO(H4DOTC)-26

COOLING
9. Radiator Sub Fan and Fan 14) Remove the reservoir tank. <Ref. to
Motor 15) Remove the mounting bolts from the radiator
A: REMOVAL sub fan motor assembly.
CO-00292

radiator.
IN-00203
17) Remove the hood stay holder (B).
4) Lift up the vehicle. (A)
6) Disconnect the sub fan motor connector (B).
(B)
(B)
CO-00255
18) Remove the radiator sub fan motor assembly

from the vehicle.
CO-00252 B: INSTALLATION
7) Remove the heat shield cover from radiator. (AT 1) Install the radiator sub fan motor assembly to the
model) vehicle.
2) Connect the radiator inlet hose (A) to the radia-
tor.
3) Install the hood stay holder (B).
Tightening torque:
7.5 N·m (0.76 kgf-m, 5.5 ft-lb)
(A)
CO-02318
8) Drain the coolant about 1 2 (1.06 US qt, 0.88

Imp qt). <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-13, DRAINING OF
ENGINE COOLANT, REPLACEMENT, Engine (B)
Coolant.>
9) Remove the ATF hose from the clip of the radia- CO-00255
tor sub fan motor assembly. (AT model)
13) Remove the over flow pipe.
CO(H4DOTC)-27

COOLING
4) Install the mounting bolts to the radiator sub fan 15) Connect the battery ground cable to battery.
motor assembly.
Tightening torque:
7.5 N·m (0.76 kgf-m, 5.5 ft-lb)
IN-00203

CO-00292 MENT, Engine Coolant.>
CO(H4DOTC)-30, INSTALLATION, Reservoir C: DISASSEMBLY
Tank.> 1) Remove the clip which holds the fan motor con-
6) Install the over flow pipe. nector onto the shroud.
7) Connect the over flow hose. 2) Remove the nuts which hold the fan to the fan
8) Install the air intake duct. motor.
10) Connect the ATF hose to the clip of the radiator
sub fan motor assembly. (AT model)
11) Install the heat shield cover to the radiator. (AT
model)
Tightening torque:
3 N·m (0.3 kgf-m, 2.2 ft-lb)
CO-02143
3) Remove the bolts which hold fan motor onto

shroud.
CO-02318
12) Connect the sub fan motor connector (B).
(B)
CO-00050
CO-00252

CO(H4DOTC)-28

COOLING
D: ASSEMBLY
Tightening torque:
5 N·m (0.5 kgf-m, 3.6 ft-lb)
CO-00050
Tightening torque:
3.4 N·m (0.35 kgf-m, 2.5 ft-lb)
CO-02143
CO(H4DOTC)-29
Reservoir Tank
COOLING
10.Reservoir Tank
A: REMOVAL
2) Disconnect the over flow hose (A).
3) Pull out the reservoir tank to the arrow direction
while pushing the claw (B).
(B) (A)
CO-00263
B: INSTALLATION
C: INSPECTION
Make sure the engine coolant level is between
“FULL” and “LOW”.
CO(H4DOTC)-30
Coolant Filler Tank

COOLING
11.Coolant Filler Tank

A: REMOVAL
WARNING:
The radiator is pressurized. Wait until engine
cools down before working on the radiator.
2) Drain the coolant about 3.0 2 (3.2 US qt, 2.6
Imp qt). <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-13, DRAINING OF
ENGINE COOLANT, REPLACEMENT, Engine
Coolant.>
3) Disconnect the engine coolant hoses from cool-
ant filler tank.
4) Remove the bolts which install the coolant filler
tank.
5) Disconnect the engine coolant hose which con-
nects the under side of coolant filler tank.
6) Remove the coolant filler tank.
CO-00264
B: INSTALLATION
1) Install in the reverse order of removal.
Tightening torque:
16 N·m (1.6 kgf-m, 11.8 ft-lb)
CO-00264

CO(H4DOTC)-31

COOLING
12.Engine Cooling System Trouble in General

A: INSPECTION
Replenish engine coolant, inspect for leakage, and
a. Insufficient engine coolant
repair it if necessary.
b. Loose timing belt Repair or replace timing belt tensioner.
c. Oil on drive belt Replace.
d. Malfunction of thermostat Replace.
e. Malfunction of water pump Replace.
f. Clogged engine coolant passage Clean.
Inspect and repair ignition control system. <Ref. to
g. Improper ignition timing EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-2, PROCEDURE, Basic Diagnos-
tic Procedure.>
h. Clogged or leaking radiator Clean, repair or replace.
Over-heating Replace the engine coolant. If it is ineffective, inspect
i. Engine oil mixed in engine coolant
and repair the engine side.
Inspect and repair the fuel injection system. <Ref. to
j. Air/fuel mixture ratio too lean EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-2, PROCEDURE, Basic Diagnos-
tic Procedure.>
k. Excessive back pressure in exhaust system Clean or replace.
l. Insufficient clearance between piston and cylin-
Adjust or replace.
der
m. Slipping clutch Correct or replace.
n. Dragging brake Adjust.
Inspect the radiator fan relay, engine coolant tempera-
o. Defective radiator fan
ture sensor or fan motor and replace them.
a. Ambient temperature extremely low Partly cover radiator front area.
Over-cooling
b. Defective thermostat Replace.
a. Loosened or damaged connecting units on
Correct or replace.
hoses
b. Leakage from water pump Replace.
c. Leakage from water pipe Correct or replace.
Engine coolant
d. Leakage around cylinder head gasket Retighten cylinder head bolts or replace gasket.
leaks
e. Damaged or cracked cylinder head and cylinder
Correct or replace.
block
f. Damaged or cracked thermostat case Correct or replace.
g. Leakage from radiator Correct or replace.
a. Timing belt problem Replace.
b. Defective radiator fan Replace.
Noise
c. Defective water pump bearing Replace water pump.
d. Defective water pump mechanical seal Replace water pump.
CO(H4DOTC)-32
LUBRICATION
LU(H4DOTC)
Page
2. Oil Pressure System ..................................................................................7
3. Engine Oil ...................................................................................................9
4. Oil Pump ..................................................................................................11
5. Oil Pan and Strainer .................................................................................16
6. Oil Pressure Switch ..................................................................................20
7. Oil Pipe .....................................................................................................21
8. Engine Oil Cooler .....................................................................................25
10. Engine Lubrication System Trouble in General ........................................27
General Description
LUBRICATION
A: SPECIFICATION
Lubrication method Forced lubrication
Pump type Trochoid type
Inner rotor 9
Number of teeth
Outer rotor 10
Outer rotor diameter × thickness mm (in) 78 × 10 (3.07 × 0.47)
Tip clearance between inner and outer rotors mm (in) 0.04 — 0.14 (0.0016 — 0.0055)
Side clearance between inner rotor and pump case mm (in) 0.02 — 0.07 (0.0008 — 0.0028)
Case clearance between outer rotor
Standard mm (in) 0.10 — 0.175 (0.0039 — 0.0069)
and pump case
Oil pump Discharge
kPa (kg/cm2, psi) 98 (1.0, 14)
pressure
600 rpm
Discharge
Performance 2 (US qt, Imp qt)/min. 4.6 (4.9, 4.0) or more
rate
(Oil temperature 80°C
Discharge
(176°F)) kPa (kg/cm2, psi) 294 (3.0, 43)
pressure
5,000 rpm
Discharge
2 (US qt, Imp qt)/min. 47.0 (49.7, 41.4) or more
rate
Relief valve working pressure kPa (kg/cm2, psi) 588 (6.0, 85)
Filter type Full-flow filter type
Outer diameter:
800 (124)
68 mm (2.68 in)
Filtration area cm2 (sq in)
Outer diameter:
470 (72.9)
65 mm (2.56 in)
Oil filter By-pass valve opening pressure kPa (kg/cm2, psi) 160 (1.63, 23.2)
Outer diameter:
68 × 65 (2.68 × 2.56)
68 mm (2.68 in)
Outer diameter × width mm (in)
Outer diameter:
65 × 74.4 (2.56 × 2.93)
65 mm (2.56 in)
Installation screw specifications M 20 × 1.5
Type Immersed contact point type
Oil Operating voltage — power consumption 12 V — 3.4 W or less
pressure
switch Warning light operating pressure kPa (kg/cm2, psi) 14.7 (0.15, 2.1)
Proof pressure kPa (kg/cm2, psi) 981 (10, 142) or more
Total capacity (Overhaul) 2 (US qt, Imp qt) 5.0 (5.3, 4.4)
Engine oil When replacing engine oil and oil filter 2 (US qt, Imp qt) 4.3 (4.5, 3.8)
When replacing engine oil only 2 (US qt, Imp qt) 4.0 (4.2, 3.5)
LU(H4DOTC)-2
General Description
LUBRICATION
Recommended oil:
Those with an API standard SM “Energy Con-
serving” logo.
ILSAC standard GF-4 “Star burst mark” label
on the container
SAE (1)
( C) -30 -20 -15 0 15 30 40
( F) -22 -4 5 32 59 86 104
10W-30, 10W-40
5W-30 (2)
LU-02203
(1) SAE viscosity No. and applicable temperature

(2) Recommended
The proper viscosity oil helps the engine maintain

its ideal temperature, and cranking speed in-
creased by reducing viscosity friction in hot condi-
tion.
CAUTION:
NOTE:
If the vehicle is used in regions with high tempera-
tures or in other severe environments, use oil with
the viscosities shown below. API standard: SM or
SL
SAE Viscosity No.: 30, 40, 10W-50, 20W-40, 20W-
50
LU(H4DOTC)-3
General Description
LUBRICATION
B: COMPONENT
T5 (16)
(30) (17)
(33)
T3
(15) (18)
T3
(14) (31)
(19)
(29)
(20)
T3
T3
T2 T8
(9)
(26)
(21)
(8) (13)
T3
(22)
(7) (23)
(6) T3
T4
(12)
(34)
(11)
(5)
(25)
(4) (2) T7 (24)
T3 (32)
(3) T6 T1
(1) (27) (28)
(10)
T6
LU-02302
(1) Plug (16) Oil pressure switch (31) Seal

(2) Gasket (17) Oil filler duct (32) O-ring
(3) Relief valve spring (18) O-ring (33) Gasket
(4) Relief valve (19) Rocker cover (34) O-ring
(5) Oil seal (20) Baffle plate
(6) Oil pump case (21) O-ring Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(7) Inner rotor (22) Oil strainer T1: 5 (0.5, 3.6)
(8) Outer rotor (23) Gasket T2: 5.4 (0.55, 4.0)
(9) Oil pump cover (24) Oil level gauge guide T3: 6.4 (0.65, 4.7)
(10) Oil filter (25) Oil pan T4: 10 (1.0, 7.0)
(11) Oil cooler connector (26) Oil level gauge T5: 25 (2.5, 18.4)
(12) Water by-pass pipe (27) Metal gasket T6: 44 (4.5, 32.5)
(13) Oil cooler (28) Drain plug T7: 54 (5.5, 40)
(14) O-ring (29) Gasket T8: 69 (7.0, 50)
(15) Oil pump ASSY (30) Oil filler cap
LU(H4DOTC)-4
General Description
LUBRICATION
C: CAUTION
forming any work.
points.
the battery.
LU(H4DOTC)-5
General Description
LUBRICATION
D: PREPARATION TOOL
1. SPECIAL TOOL
WRENCH removing and tightening crank pulley bolt.
ST-499977100
499587100 OIL SEAL Used for installing oil seal into oil pump.
INSTALLER
ST-499587100
ST18332AA000
ST18332AA010
LU(H4DOTC)-6
Oil Pressure System

LUBRICATION
2. Oil Pressure System

A: WIRING DIAGRAM
IGNITION
B72 SWITCH BATTERY
No.5 SBF-6 MAIN SBF
6 3
A3
WARNING LIGHT
OIL PRESSURE
COMBINATION
METER
A: i10
A15
i3
17
B38
B21
31
E2
E11
E
OIL PRESSURE
SWITCH
B21
B72 A: i10 B38
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
4 5 6 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
LU-02327
LU(H4DOTC)-7
Oil Pressure System

LUBRICATION
B: INSPECTION
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK COMBINATION METER. Does the warning light illumi- Go to step 2. Repair or replace
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. (engine OFF) nate? the combination
2) Check the warning light in the combination meter. <Ref. to IDI-
meter. 4, INSPECTION,
Combination Meter
System.>
2 CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR BETWEEN Is the voltage 10 V or more? Replace the oil Go to step 3.
COMBINATION METER AND OIL PRES- pressure switch.
SURE SWITCH.
2) Disconnect the connector from oil pressure
switch.
4) Measure the voltage of harness between oil
pressure switch connector and chassis ground.
3 CHECK COMBINATION METER. Is the resistance less than 10 Ω? Repair the harness Repair or replace
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. and connector. the combination
2) Remove the combination meter. NOTE: meter. <Ref. to IDI-
3) Measure the resistance of combination In this case, repair 4, INSPECTION,
meter. the following item: Combination Meter
Terminals • Open circuit of System.>
combination meter
and oil pressure
switch
• Poor contact in
combination meter
connector
• Poor contact in
oil pressure switch
connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
LU(H4DOTC)-8
Engine Oil
LUBRICATION
3. Engine Oil B: REPLACEMENT

A: INSPECTION 2) Open the engine oil filler cap for quick draining of
1) Park the vehicle on a level surface. engine oil.
2) Remove the oil level gauge and wipe away the 3) Lift up the vehicle.
oil. 4) Drain engine oil by loosening the engine oil drain
3) Reinsert the level gauge all the way. Be sure that plug.
the level gauge is correctly inserted and properly
orientated. NOTE:
4) Remove it again and check the reading. If the Prepare the container for draining of engine oil.
engine oil level is below “L” line, add oil to bring the
level up to “F” line.
5) After turning off the engine, wait a few minutes
for the oil to return to the oil pan before checking
the level.
6) Just after driving or while the engine is warm, en-
gine oil level shows in the range between “F” line
and cutout portion. This is caused by thermal ex-
pansion of engine oil.
NOTE: LU-00219
To prevent overfilling of engine oil, do not add oil 5) Tighten the engine oil drain plug after draining
above “F” line when the engine is cold. engine oil.
(B) NOTE:
(A)
Use a new metal gasket.
(C)
Tightening torque:
44 N·m (4.5 kgf-m, 32.5 ft-lb)
(E)
(D)
LU-00213
(A) Oil level gauge

(C) Upper level
(D) Lower level LU-00219
(E) Approx. 1.0 2 (1.1 US qt, 0.9 Imp qt) 6) Using engine oil of proper quality and viscosity,
fill engine oil through the oil filler duct to the upper
level on level gauge. Make sure that the vehicle is
parked on a level surface when checking oil level.
Recommended oil:
mended oil. <Ref. to LU(H4DOTC)-2, SPECI-
FICATION, General Description.>
Engine oil capacity:
Refer to “SPECIFICATION” for the engine oil
capacity. <Ref. to LU(H4DOTC)-2, SPECIFI-
CATION, General Description.>
LU(H4DOTC)-9
Engine Oil
LUBRICATION

8) Start the engine and warm it up for a time.
9) After the engine stops, recheck the oil level. If
necessary, add engine oil up to the upper level on
level gauge.
(B)
(A)
(C)
(E)
(D)
LU-00213
(A) Oil level gauge

(C) Upper level
(D) Lower level
LU(H4DOTC)-10
Oil Pump
LUBRICATION
4. Oil Pump 10) Remove the crankshaft position sensor.
A: REMOVAL
LU-00046
11) Remove the V-belts. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-

37, REMOVAL, V-belt.>
IN-00203

6) Remove the bolts which install water pipe of oil
cooler to oil pump.
LU-00011
13) Remove the crank pulley using ST. <Ref. to

LU-00137
7) Remove the water pipe and hoses between oil

cooler and water pump.
LU-00012
14) Remove the water pump. <Ref. to

CO(H4DOTC)-15, REMOVAL, Water Pump.>
15) Remove the timing belt guide. (MT model)
LU-00010

9) Remove the radiator. <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-19,
REMOVAL, Radiator.>
LU-00013
LU(H4DOTC)-11
Oil Pump
LUBRICATION
16) Remove the crank sprocket. B: INSTALLATION

Perform the following.
1) Using the ST, install the front oil seal.
ST 499587100 OIL SEAL INSTALLER
NOTE:
Use a new oil seal.
LU-00014

cylinder block.
NOTE:
pump. ME-00164
2) Apply liquid gasket to the matching surface of oil

pump.
Liquid gasket:
equivalent
LU-00015
18) Remove the oil pump by using flat tip screw-

driver.
(A)
CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch mating surfaces of
cylinder block and oil pump. ME-00165
(A) O-ring
3) Apply a coat of engine oil to the inside of oil seal.
LU-00016
ME-00312
LU(H4DOTC)-12
Oil Pump
LUBRICATION
4) Install the oil pump to cylinder block. Be careful C: DISASSEMBLY

not to damage the oil seal during installation.
Remove the screw which secures oil pump cover
NOTE: and then disassemble oil pump. Inscribe alignment
• Make sure the oil seal lip is not folded. marks on the inner and outer rotors so that they can
• Align the flat surface of oil pump’s inner rotor with be replaced in their original positions during reas-
crankshaft before installation. sembly.
• Use a new O-ring and oil seal. NOTE:
5) Apply liquid gasket to the three bolts thread Before disassembling the oil pump, remove the re-
shown in figure. (when reuse the bolts) lief valve.
Liquid gasket:
equivalent (E)
Tightening torque: (D)

6.4 N·m (0.65 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
(C)
(B)
(A)
(F) (I)
T
LU-02102
(G)
(H)
LU-00020
(A) Oil seal

(B) Pump case
(C) Inner rotor
(D) Outer rotor
(E) Pump cover
(F) Relief valve
(H) Plug
(I) Gasket
LU(H4DOTC)-13
Oil Pump
LUBRICATION
D: ASSEMBLY 5) Install the oil pump cover.

1) Using the ST, install the front oil seal. Tightening torque:
ST 499587100 OIL SEAL INSTALLER T1: 5.4 N·m (0.55 kgf-m, 4.0 ft-lb)
NOTE: T2: 44 N·m (4.5 kgf-m, 32.5 ft-lb)
Use a new oil seal.
T1
(E)
(D)
(C)
(B)
ST
LU-00021 (A)
2) Apply a coat of engine oil to inner and outer ro- (F) (G) (I)
tors. (H)
3) Assemble the inner and outer rotors in their orig-
inal positions.
4) Assemble the oil relief valve and install relief
valve spring and plug.
T2
NOTE:
Use a new gasket.
LU-02134
(A) Oil seal

(B) Pump case
(C) Inner rotor
(D) Outer rotor
(E) Pump cover
(F) Relief valve
(H) Plug
(I) Gasket
LU(H4DOTC)-14
Oil Pump
LUBRICATION
E: INSPECTION 3. SIDE CLEARANCE

Measure the clearance between oil pump inner ro-
1. TIP CLEARANCE tor and pump cover. If the clearance is out of spec-
Measure the tip clearance of rotors. If the clearance ification, replace the rotors and the pump body.
is out of specification, replace the rotors as a set.
Side clearance:
Tip clearance: Standard
Standard 0.02 — 0.07 mm (0.0008 — 0.0028 in)
0.04 — 0.14 mm (0.0016 — 0.0055 in)
LU-00025
LU-00023
4. OIL RELIEF VALVE
2. CASE CLEARANCE Check the valve for assembly condition and dam-
Measure the clearance between the outer rotor and age, and the relief valve spring for damage and de-
the oil pump rotor housing. If clearance is out of terioration. Replace the parts if defective.
standard, replace the oil pump case.
Relief valve spring:
Case clearance: Free length
Standard 73.7 mm (2.902 in)
0.10 — 0.175 mm (0.0039 — 0.0069 in) Installed length
54.7 mm (2.154 in)
Load when installed
93.1 N (9.49 kgf, 20.88 lb)
5. OIL PUMP CASE
Check the oil pump case for worn shaft hole,
clogged oil passage, worn rotor chamber, cracks
and other faults.
6. OIL SEAL
LU-00024
Check the oil seal lips for deformation, hardening,
wear, etc. and replace if defective.
LU(H4DOTC)-15

LUBRICATION
5. Oil Pan and Strainer 9) Remove the radiator upper brackets.
A: REMOVAL
2) Remove the front wheels.
CO-00040
10) Support the engine with a lifting device and

wire ropes.
IN-00203
5) Disconnect the connectors from the mass air

flow and intake air temperature sensor.
6) Remove the air intake boot and air cleaner upper
cover.
LU-00222

CAUTION:
When lifting up the vehicle, raise up wire ropes
at the same time.
13) Drain the engine oil.
14) Remove the front exhaust pipe.
LU-00220
<Ref. to EX(H4DOTC)-5, REMOVAL, Front Ex-
7) Remove the intercooler. haust Pipe.>
<Ref. to IN(H4DOTC)-12, REMOVAL, Intercool- 15) Remove the nuts which install front cushion
er.> rubber onto front crossmember.
8) Remove the pitching stopper.
LU-02023
LU-00221
16) Remove the bolts which install oil pan on cylin-
der block with the engine raised up.
17) Insert the oil pan cutter blade into the gap be-
tween cylinder block and oil pan.
CAUTION:
Do not use a screwdriver or similar tool in place
of oil pan cutter.
18) Remove the oil strainer.
LU(H4DOTC)-16

LUBRICATION
19) Remove the baffle plate. B: INSTALLATION

NOTE:
(D) Before installing the oil pan, clean the mating sur-
face of oil pan and engine block.
1) Make sure that the seals (A) are installed se-
curely on the baffle plate in a direction as shown in
the figure below.
(A)
(C)
(B)
(A)
LU-00052
2) Install the baffle plate.

Tightening torque:
6.4 N·m (0.65 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
LU-02262 3) Install the oil strainer to the cylinder block.
(A) Oil pan NOTE:
(B) Oil strainer Use new O-rings.
(C) Baffle plate Tightening torque:
(D) Cylinder block 10 N·m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 ft-lb)
NOTE:
Tighten the oil strainer stay together with the baffle
plate.
Tightening torque:
6.4 N·m (0.65 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
5) Apply liquid gasket to the mating surfaces, and
install the oil pan.
NOTE:
Liquid gasket:
equivalent
LU-00034
LU(H4DOTC)-17

LUBRICATION
6) Tighten the bolts which install oil pan to engine 11) Lower the vehicle.
block. CAUTION:
Tightening torque: When lowering the vehicle, lower the lift-up de-
T1: 5 N·m (0.5 kgf-m, 3.6 ft-lb) vice and wire ropes at the same time.
T2: 6.4 N·m (0.65 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb) 12) Remove the lifting device and wire ropes.
T3: 10 N·m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 ft-lb)
(D)
LU-00222
(C)
13) Install the pitching stopper.
Tightening torque:
T2
(B) T1: 50 N·m (5.1 kgf-m, 36.9 ft-lb)
T2: 58 N·m (5.9 kgf-m, 42.8 ft-lb)
T2
T3
(A)
T1
T1
LU-02266 T2
(A) Oil pan T1
(B) Oil strainer LU-00224

(C) Baffle plate 14) Install the radiator upper brackets.
(D) Cylinder block
7) Lower the engine onto front crossmember.

8) Tighten the nuts which install front cushion rub-
ber onto front crossmember.
Tightening torque:
85 N·m (8.7 kgf-m, 63 ft-lb)
CO-00040

16) Install the air intake boot and air cleaner upper
cover.
LU-02023
9) Install the front exhaust pipe. <Ref. to

EX(H4DOTC)-6, INSTALLATION, Front Exhaust
Pipe.>
LU(H4DOTC)-18

LUBRICATION
17) Connect the connector to the mass air flow &

LU-00220
18) Install the front wheels.

Tightening torque:
120 N·m (12.2 kgf-m, 88.5 ft-lb)
IN-00203
21) Refill the engine oil. <Ref. to LU(H4DOTC)-9,

INSPECTION, Engine Oil.>
C: INSPECTION
Visually check that the oil pan, oil strainer, oil
strainer stay and baffle plate are not damaged.
LU(H4DOTC)-19
Oil Pressure Switch

LUBRICATION
6. Oil Pressure Switch 2) Install the oil pressure switch to the cylinder
block.
A: REMOVAL Tightening torque:
1) Remove the collector cover. 25 N·m (2.5 kgf-m, 18.4 ft-lb)
2) Remove the generator from the bracket. <Ref. to
SC(H4SO)-20, REMOVAL, Generator.>
3) Disconnect the terminal from oil pressure switch.
LU-00037
3) Connect the terminal to the oil pressure switch.

LU-00036
4) Remove the oil pressure switch.
LU-00036
4) Install the generator to the bracket. <Ref. to

SC(H4SO)-20, INSTALLATION, Generator.>
LU-00037
1) Apply liquid gasket to the oil pressure switch Check the oil pressure switch installation portion for
threads. oil leakage and oil seepage.
Liquid gasket:
equivalent
LU-00038
LU(H4DOTC)-20
Oil Pipe
LUBRICATION
7. Oil Pipe 6) Remove the oil inlet pipe from the turbocharger.
CAUTION:
A: REMOVAL In order to prevent damaging the oil pipe on the
1) Remove the collector cover. cylinder head side, fix the section (a) shown in
2) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. the figure when loosing the oil inlet pipe flare
nut, and avoid the part from rotating together
while loosening the nut.
(a)
IN-00203

12, REMOVAL, Intercooler.> LU-02549
4) Remove the intercooler bracket RH.

5) Remove the turbocharger upper cover.
LU-02521

EX-02507 FU(H4DOTC)-13, REMOVAL, Intake Manifold.>
8) Remove the secondary air pump. <Ref. to
EC(H4DOTC)-20, REMOVAL, Secondary Air
Pump.>
9) Remove the radiator main fan and radiator sub
fan. <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-24, REMOVAL, Radia-
tor Main Fan and Fan Motor.> <Ref. to
CO(H4DOTC)-27, REMOVAL, Radiator Sub Fan
and Fan Motor.>
10) Remove the V-belts. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-
37, REMOVAL, V-belt.>
11) Remove the crank pulley. <Ref. to
13) Remove the timing belt. <Ref. to
ME(H4DOTC)-43, TIMING BELT, REMOVAL, Tim-
ing Belt.>
14) Remove the cam sprocket LH. <Ref. to
ME(H4DOTC)-51, REMOVAL, Cam Sprocket.>
LU(H4DOTC)-21
Oil Pipe
LUBRICATION
15) Remove the belt cover No. 2 LH. B: INSTALLATION

1) Inspect the union screw with filter. <Ref. to
LU(H4DOTC)-24, INSPECTING UNION SCREW
WITH FILTER, INSPECTION, Oil Pipe.>
2) Install the oil pipe.
NOTE:
• Make sure not to mix up the union screws with fil-
ter and without filter as their installation positions
are different.
CO-00024
Tightening torque:
16) Remove the oil pipe.
T1: 8 N·m (0.8 kgf-m, 5.9 ft-lb)
(B) T2: 29 N·m (3.0 kgf-m, 21.4 ft-lb)
(D)
(B) T2
(C) (A) T1 (D)
T2
(D)
(C) (A)
(D)
(B)
(D) (B)
(C) T2
(D)
(C)
(A)
(D) (A)
LU-02517 (D)
T2
(A) Union screw with filter (with protrusion) LU-02519

(C) Oil pipe
(D) Gasket
(C) Oil pipe
(D) Gasket
3) Install the belt cover No. 2 LH.

Tightening torque:
5 N·m (0.5 kgf-m, 3.7 ft-lb)
CO-00024
LU(H4DOTC)-22
Oil Pipe
LUBRICATION
4) Install the cam sprocket LH. <Ref. to 13) Tighten the union screws and flare nuts which
ME(H4DOTC)-51, INSTALLATION, Cam Sprock- secure the oil inlet pipe to the turbocharger.
et.> CAUTION:
5) Install the timing belt. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-46, In order to prevent damaging the oil pipe on the
TIMING BELT, INSTALLATION, Timing Belt.> cylinder head side, fix the section (a) shown in
6) Install the timing belt cover. <Ref. to the figure when tightening the oil inlet pipe flare
ME(H4DOTC)-42, INSTALLATION, Timing Belt nut, and avoid the part from rotating together
Cover.> while tightening the nut.
9) Install the radiator main fan and the radiator sub
fan. <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-25, INSTALLATION,
(a)
Radiator Main Fan and Fan Motor.> <Ref. to
CO(H4DOTC)-27, INSTALLATION, Radiator Sub
Fan and Fan Motor.>
10) Install the secondary air pump. <Ref. to
EC(H4DOTC)-20, INSTALLATION, Secondary Air LU-02549
Pump.>
Tightening torque:
11) Install the intake manifold. <Ref. to
T1: 16 N·m (1.6 kgf-m, 11.8 ft-lb)
FU(H4DOTC)-16, INSTALLATION, Intake Mani-
T2: 20 N·m (2.0 kgf-m, 14.8 ft-lb)
fold.>
12) Temporarily tighten the bolts and flare nuts T1
which secure the oil inlet pipe to the turbocharger.
NOTE:
Use a new gasket.
T2
LU-02522
14) Tighten the bolts which hold the oil inlet pipe
stay to the turbocharger.
Tightening torque:
LU-02521 5 N·m (0.5 kgf-m, 3.7 ft-lb)
LU-02523
LU(H4DOTC)-23
Oil Pipe
LUBRICATION
15) Install the turbocharger upper cover. C: INSPECTION

Tightening torque: 1. INSPECTING UNION SCREW WITH
7.5 N·m (0.8 kgf-m, 5.5 ft-lb) FILTER
Check the filter part of union screw for clogging or
damage, and if defective, replace the union screw
with filter with a new part.
(B)
(D)
(C) (A)
(D)
EX-02507
16) Install the intercooler bracket RH.

18) Connect the ground cable to battery.
(B)
(D)
(C)
(A)
(D)
IN-00203 LU-02517

(C) Oil pipe
(D) Gasket
2. OTHER INSPECTIONS
1) Check that the oil pipe and union screw have no
deformation, cracks and other damages.
2) Check that there are no oil leaks or oil oozing
from the oil pipe attachment section.
LU(H4DOTC)-24
Engine Oil Cooler

LUBRICATION
8. Engine Oil Cooler B: INSTALLATION

A: REMOVAL
2) Lift up the vehicle. Use a new gasket.
3) Remove the under cover. Tightening torque:
4) Drain the engine oil. T: 54 N·m (5.5 kgf-m, 40 ft-lb)
5) Drain engine coolant.
6) Remove the water by-pass pipe between oil
cooler and water pump.
(A)
(B)
LU-00040
7) Remove the engine oil filter. <Ref. to

LU(H4DOTC)-26, REMOVAL, Engine Oil Filter.> T
8) Remove the oil cooler connector and remove the
oil cooler. (C)
LU-02305
(A) Gasket
(B) Oil cooler
(C) Oil cooler connector
(A)
C: INSPECTION
(B) 1) Check the coolant paths for clogs while spraying
compressed air.
2) Check the mating surfaces of cylinder block,
gasket groove and oil filter for damage.
(C)
LU-02304
(A) Gasket
(B) Oil cooler
(C) Oil cooler connector
LU(H4DOTC)-25
Engine Oil Filter

LUBRICATION
9. Engine Oil Filter C: INSPECTION

A: REMOVAL make sure that no oil is leaking around seal rubber.
NOTE:
3) Remove the under cover. The filter element and filter case are permanently
4) Remove the oil filter using ST.
sary.
2) Check the engine oil level. <Ref. to
LU(H4DOTC)-9, INSPECTION, Engine Oil.>
NOTE:
Standard oil filter outer diameter is 68 mm (2.68 in),
however Subaru oil filter with outer diameter of 65 mm
(2.56 in) is also available.
LU-00214
B: INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
1) Clean the oil filter installation surface on cylinder
block or oil cooler.
2) Obtain a new oil filter and apply a thin coat of en-
3) Install the oil filter turning it by hand, being care-
ful not to damage the seal rubber.
4) Tighten further after the seal rubber contacts the
oil cooler.
NOTE:
• In case of the filter of outer diameter 68 mm
(2.68 in), tighten by about one turn. When using
a torque wrench, tighten to 14 N·m (1.4 kgf-m,
10.3 ft-lb).
• In case of the filter of outer diameter 65 mm
(2.56 in), tighten by about 2/3 to 3/4 turns. When
using a torque wrench, tighten to 12 N·m (1.2 kgf-
m, 8.9 ft-lb).
LU(H4DOTC)-26

LUBRICATION
10.Engine Lubrication System Trouble in General

A: INSPECTION
Before performing diagnostics, make sure that the engine oil level is correct and no oil leakage exists.
Symptoms Possible cause Corrective action
1) Oil pressure switch Cracked diaphragm or oil leakage within switch Replace.
failure Broken spring or seized contacts Replace.
Clogging of oil filter Replace.
Malfunction of oil by-pass valve in oil filter Clean or replace.
Malfunction of oil relief valve in oil pump Clean or replace.
1. Warning light remains 2) Low oil pressure Clogged oil passage Clean.
ON. Excessive tip clearance and side clearance of oil
Replace.
pump rotor and gear
Clogged oil strainer or broken pipe Clean or replace.
Insufficient engine oil (degradation, etc.) Replace.
3) No oil pressure Broken pipe of oil strainer Replace.
Stuck oil pump rotor Replace.
1) Malfunction of combination meter Replace.
2. Warning light does
2) Poor contact of switch contact points Replace.
not turn on.
3) Disconnection of wiring Repair.
1) Poor contact of terminals Repair.
2) Defective wiring harness Repair.
3. Warning light flickers
momentarily. Check for the same
3) Low oil pressure possible causes as
listed 1) — 2).
LU(H4DOTC)-27

LUBRICATION
LU(H4DOTC)-28
SP(H4DOTC)
Page
General Description
A: SPECIFICATION
Specifications for the turbo model are the same as
the SOHC model. <Ref. to SP(H4SO)-2, General
Description.>
SP(H4DOTC)-2
IGNITION
IG(H4DOTC)
Page
2. Spark Plug ..................................................................................................4
3. Ignition Coil ................................................................................................6
General Description
IGNITION
A: SPECIFICATION
Item Specification
Type FK0186
Ignition coil Ignition system Independent ignition coil
Manufacturer Diamond Electric
Manufacturer and type NGK: SILFR6A
Thread size (diameter, pitch, length) mm 14, 1.25, 26.5
Spark plug
Spark plug gap mm (in) 0.7 — 0.8 (0.028 — 0.031)
Electrode Iridium
B: COMPONENT
T2
T1
(2)
(1)
T1
(1)
(2)
T2
IG-00098
(1) Spark plug Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)

(2) Ignition coil T1: 21 (2.1, 15.2)
T2: 16 (1.6, 11.7)
IG(H4DOTC)-2
General Description
IGNITION
C: CAUTION
forming any work.
points.
the battery.
IG(H4DOTC)-3
Spark Plug
IGNITION
2. Spark Plug 4) Remove the bolts that attach the secondary air
pump duct to the rocker cover (LH), and raise the
A: REMOVAL secondary air pump duct.
Spark plug:
Refer to “SPECIFICATION” for the spark
plug. <Ref. to IG(H4DOTC)-2, SPECIFICA-
TION, General Description.>
1. RH SIDE
IN-00203
3) Remove the air cleaner case.

<Ref. to IN(H4DOTC)-8, REMOVAL, Air Cleaner
IG-02067
Case.>
4) Disconnect the connector from ignition coil. 5) Disconnect the connector from ignition coil.
5) Remove the ignition coil. 6) Remove the ignition coil.
NOTE: NOTE:
Turn #3 ignition coil by 180 degrees to remove it. Turn #4 ignition coil by 180 degrees to remove it.
IG-00092 IG-02068
6) Remove the spark plug with a spark plug socket. 7) Remove the spark plug with a spark plug socket.
2. LH SIDE B: INSTALLATION
1) Remove the collector cover. 1. RH SIDE
2) Remove the battery and battery carrier.
3) Disconnect the secondary air pump duct from
the secondary air pump. <Ref. to EC(H4DOTC)-20, Tightening torque (Spark plug):
REMOVAL, Secondary Air Pump.> 21 N·m (2.1 kgf-m, 15.2 ft-lb)
Tightening torque (Ignition coil):
16 N·m (1.6 kgf-m, 11.7 ft-lb)
2. LH SIDE
Tightening torque (Spark plug):
21 N·m (2.1 kgf-m, 15.2 ft-lb)
IG(H4DOTC)-4
Spark Plug
IGNITION
Tightening torque (Ignition coil): 3) Oil fouled:

16 N·m (1.6 kgf-m, 11.7 ft-lb) Wet black deposits show oil entrance into the com-
bustion chamber through worn rings and excessive
Tightening torque (secondary air pump duct):
clearance between valve guides and stems.
6.4 N·m (0.65 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
C: INSPECTION
Check the electrodes and inner and outer ceramic
insulator of plugs, noting the type of deposits and
the degree of electrode erosion.
(E)
(C)
IG-00013
4) Overheating:
(B) (D) White or light gray insulator with black or brown
spots and bluish burnt electrodes indicate engine
(A) overheating, incorrect ignition timing, wrong selec-
IG-02010 tion of fuel, and loose spark plugs.
(A) Spark plug gap
(B) Carbon accumulation or wear
(C) Crack
(D) Damage
(E) Damaged gasket
1) Normal:
Brown to grayish-tan deposits and slight electrode
wear indicate correct spark plug heat range. IG-00014
D: ADJUSTMENT
Clean up the spark plug using nylon brush or equiv-
alent. Clean and remove the carbon or oxide de-
posits. If deposits are too stubborn, replace the
spark plugs. After cleaning the spark plugs, mea-
sure the spark plug gap using a gap gauge.
NOTE:
• Never use a plug cleaner.
IG-00011 • Never use a metal brush because it makes insu-
2) Carbon fouled: lator worn.
Dry fluffy carbon deposits on insulator and elec- Spark plug gap : L
trode are mostly caused by slow speed driving in 0.7 — 0.8 mm (0.028 — 0.031 in)
the city, weak ignition, too rich fuel mixture and dirty
air cleaner.
L
IG-02035
IG-00012
IG(H4DOTC)-5
Ignition Coil
IGNITION
3. Ignition Coil
A: REMOVAL
Direct ignition type has been adopted. Refer to
“Spark Plug” for removal procedure. <Ref. to
IG(H4DOTC)-4, REMOVAL, Spark Plug.>
B: INSTALLATION
Tightening torque:
16 N·m (1.6 kgf-m, 11.7 ft-lb)
C: INSPECTION
For inspection procedure, refer to “Diagnostics for
Engine Starting Failure”. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(di-
ag)-76, IGNITION CONTROL SYSTEM, Diagnos-
tics for Engine Starting Failure.>
IG(H4DOTC)-6
SC(H4DOTC)
Page
General Description
A: SPECIFICATION
Specifications for the turbo model are included in
the SC(H4SO) section. <Ref. to SC(H4SO)-2, Gen-
eral Description.>
SC(H4DOTC)-2
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)
Page
1. Basic Diagnostic Procedure .......................................................................2
2. Check List for Interview ..............................................................................3
4. Electrical Component Location ..................................................................8
5. Engine Control Module (ECM) I/O Signal ................................................18
6. Engine Condition Data .............................................................................28
7. Data Link Connector ................................................................................29
8. General Scan Tool ...................................................................................30
9. Subaru Select Monitor ..............................................................................35
10. Read Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) .....................................................44
11. Inspection Mode .......................................................................................45
12. Drive Cycle ...............................................................................................50
13. Clear Memory Mode .................................................................................56
14. Compulsory Valve Operation Check Mode ..............................................57
15. System Operation Check Mode ...............................................................58
16. Malfunction Indicator Light .......................................................................60
17. Diagnostics for Engine Starting Failure ....................................................69
18. List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) ....................................................81
19. Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) ....................89
20. Diagnostic Procedure without Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) .............376
21. General Diagnostic Table .......................................................................380
Basic Diagnostic Procedure

1. Basic Diagnostic Procedure

A: PROCEDURE
1. ENGINE
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK ENGINE START FAILURE. Does the engine start? Go to step 2. Inspection using
1) Ask the customer when and how the trouble “Diagnostics for
occurred using the interview check list. <Ref. to Engine Start Fail-
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-3, CHECK, Check List for ure”. <Ref. to
Interview.> EN(H4DOTC)(diag
2) Start the engine. )-69, Diagnostics
for Engine Starting
Failure.>
2 CHECK ILLUMINATION OF MALFUNCTION Does the malfunction indicator Go to step 3. Inspection using
INDICATOR LIGHT. light illuminate? “General Diagnos-
tic Table” <Ref. to
EN(H4DOTC)(diag
)-380, General
Diagnostic Table.>
3 CHECK INDICATION OF DTC ON SCREEN. Is DTC displayed on the Subaru Record the DTC. Repair the related
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. Select Monitor or general scan Repair the trouble parts.
2) Connect the Subaru Select Monitor or gen- tool? cause. <Ref. to NOTE:
eral scan tool to data link connector. EN(H4DOTC)(diag If DTC is not
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and run the )-81, List of Diag- shown on display
Subaru Select Monitor or general scan tool. nostic Trouble although the mal-
4) Read the DTC on Subaru Select Monitor or Code (DTC).> Go function indicator
general scan tool. to step 4. light illuminates,
perform the diag-
nosis of malfunc-
tion indicator light
circuit or combina-
tion meter. <Ref. to
EN(H4DOTC)(di-
ag)-60, Malfunc-
tion Indicator
Light.>
4 PERFORM DIAGNOSIS. Is DTC displayed on the Subaru Inspect using Finish the diagno-
1) Perform the Clear Memory Mode. <Ref. to Select Monitor or general scan “Diagnostic Proce- sis.
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-56, Clear Memory Mode.> tool? dure with Diagnos-
2) Perform the Inspection Mode. <Ref. to tic Trouble Code
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-45, Inspection Mode.> (DTC)”.
<Ref. to
EN(H4DOTC)(diag
)-89, Diagnostic
Procedure with
Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-2

2. Check List for Interview

A: CHECK
1. CHECK LIST NO. 1
Check the following item when problem has occurred.
NOTE:
Customer’s name Engine No.
Date of purchase Fuel brand
Date of repair km
Odometer reading
V.I.N. miles
Weather Fine
Cloudy
Rainy
Snowy
Various/Others:
Ambient air temperature °C ( °F)
Hot
Warm
Cool
Cold
Place Highway
Suburbs
Inner city
Uphill
Downhill
Rough road
Others:
Engine temperature Cold
Warming-up
After warming-up
Any temperature
Others:
Engine speed rpm
Driving conditions Not affected
At starting
While idling
At racing
While accelerating
While cruising
While decelerating
While turning (RH/LH)
Headlight ON/ OFF Rear defogger ON/ OFF
Blower ON/ OFF Audio ON/ OFF
A/C compressor ON/ OFF Car phone ON/ OFF
Radiator fan ON/ OFF
Front wiper ON/ OFF
Rear wiper ON/ OFF
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-3

2. CHECK LIST NO. 2

Check the following item about the vehicle’s state when malfunction indicator light illuminates.
NOTE:
a) Other warning lights or indicators illuminate. Yes / No
Low fuel warning light
Charge indicator light
AT diagnostic indicator light
ABS warning light
Oil pressure indicator light
b) Fuel level
• Lack of gasoline: Yes / No
• Indicator position of fuel gauge:
• Experienced running out of fuel: Yes / No
c) Intentional connecting or disconnecting of harness connectors or spark plug cords: Yes / No
• What:
d) Intentional connecting or disconnecting of hoses: Yes / No
• What:
e) Installing of parts other than genuine parts: Yes / No
• What:
• Where:
f) Occurrence of noise: Yes / No
• From where:
• What kind:
g) Occurrence of smell: Yes / No
• From where:
• What kind:
h) Intrusion of water into engine compartment or passenger compartment: Yes / No
i) Troubles occurred
Engine does not start.
Engine stalls during idling.
Engine stalls while driving.
Engine speed decreases.
Engine speed does not decrease.
Rough idling
Poor acceleration
Back fire
After fire
Does not shift.
Excessive shift shock
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-4
General Description
3. General Description 7) Use ECM mounting stud bolts at the body side
grounding point when measuring voltage and resis-
A: CAUTION tance inside the passenger compartment.
1) Airbag system wiring harness is routed near the
ECM, main relay and fuel pump relay.
(A)
CAUTION:
• All the airbag system wiring harnesses and
connectors are colored yellow. Do not use elec-
trical test equipment on these circuits.
• Be careful not to damage the airbag system
wiring harness when servicing the ECM, TCM,
main relay and fuel pump relay.
2) Never connect the battery in reverse polarity. EN-00069
Failure to do so will damage the ECM instantly, and
(A) Stud bolt
the fuel injector and other parts will also be dam-
aged.
8) Use the engine ground terminal or engine as-
3) Do not disconnect the battery terminals while the sembly as the grounding point to chassis when
engine is running. A large counter electromotive measuring the voltage and resistance in engine
force will be generated in the generator, and this compartment.
voltage may damage electronic parts such as ECM
etc.
4) Before disconnecting the connectors of each
sensor and ECM, be sure to turn the ignition switch
to OFF. Perform the Clear Memory Mode after con-
necting the connectors. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(di-
ag)-56, Clear Memory Mode.>
5) Measure the voltage or resistance of individual
sensor or all electrical control modules using a ta-
pered pin with a diameter of less than 0.6 mm
(0.024 in). Do not insert the pin 4 mm (0.16 in) or FU-01170
more into the part. 9) Every MFI-related part is a precision part. Do not
CAUTION: drop them.
When replacing the ECM, be careful not to use 10) Observe the following cautions when installing
the wrong spec. ECM to avoid any damage on a radio in MFI equipped models.
the fuel injection system. CAUTION:
NOTE: • The antenna must be placed as far apart as
When replacing the ECM of the models with Immo- possible from ECM.
bilizer, immobilizer system must be registered. To • The antenna feeder must be placed as far
do so, all ignition keys and ID cards need to be pre- apart as possible from the ECM and MFI har-
pared. Refer to the “IMMOBILIZER TEACHING ness.
OPERATION MANUAL”. • Carefully adjust the antenna for correct
6) Connectors of each sensor in the engine com- matching.
partment and the harness connectors on the en- • When mounting a large power type radio, pay
gine side and body side are all designed to be special attention to the three items mentioned
waterproof. Even if the connectors are waterproof, above.
take care not to allow water to get into them when • Incorrect installation of the radio may affect
washing the vehicle, or when servicing the vehicle the operation of ECM.
in rainy weather. 11) Before disconnecting the fuel hoses, discon-
nect the fuel pump connector and crank the engine
for 5 seconds or more to release the pressure of
fuel system. If engine starts during this operation,
run it until it stops.
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-5
General Description
12) For the model with ABS, the ABS warning light • When the system decides that a malfunction oc-
may illuminate when performing driving test with curs, malfunction indicator light illuminates. At the
jacked-up or lifted-up condition, but this is not a same time of the malfunction indicator light illumi-
system malfunction. The reason for this is the nation or blinking, a DTC and a freeze frame en-
speed difference between the front and rear gine conditions are stored into on-board computer.
wheels. After diagnosis of engine control system, • The OBD system stores freeze frame engine
perform the ABS memory clear procedure of self- condition data (engine load, engine coolant tem-
diagnosis function. perature, fuel trim, engine speed and vehicle
speed, etc.) into on-board computer first when it
B: INSPECTION detects a malfunction.
Before performing diagnostics, check the following • If the OBD system detects malfunctions such as
item which might affect engine problems. the fault of fuel trim or misfire, the OBD system first
1. BATTERY stores freeze frame engine conditions about the
fuel trim or misfire.
1) Measure the battery voltage and specific gravity • When the malfunction does not occur again for
of the electrolyte. three consecutive driving cycles, malfunction indi-
Standard voltage: 12 V cator light is turned off, but DTC remains at on-
board computer.
Specific gravity: 1.260 or more • When troubleshooting the vehicle which com-
2) Check the condition of the main and other fuses, plies with OBD-II regulations, connect the Subaru
and harnesses and connectors. Also check for Select Monitor or general scan tool to the vehicle.
proper grounding.
2. ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL SYS-
2. ENGINE GROUND TEM
Check if the engine ground terminal is properly • The Multipoint Fuel Injection (MFI) system is a
connected to engine. system that supplies the optimum air-fuel mixture
to the engine for all the various operating condi-
tions through the use of the latest electronic tech-
nology.
With this system fuel, which is pressurized at a con-
stant pressure, is injected into the intake air pas-
sage of the cylinder head. The injection quantity of
fuel is controlled by an intermittent injection system
where the electro-magnetic injection valve (fuel in-
jector) opens only for a short period of time, de-
FU-01170 pending on the quantity of air required for one cycle
of operation. In actual operation, the injection quan-
C: NOTE tity is determined by the duration of an electric
pulse applied to the fuel injector and this permits
1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION simple, yet highly precise metering of the fuel.
• The on-board diagnostic (OBD) system detects • Furthermore, all operating conditions of the en-
and indicates a fault in various inputs and outputs gine are converted into electronic signals, and this
of the complex electronic throttle control. Malfunc- enables additional system features with greatly im-
tion indicator light in the combination meter indi- proved adaptability, making it easier to add com-
cates occurrence of a fault or trouble. pensation features.
• Further, against such a failure or sensors as may The MFI system also has the following features:
disable the drive, the fail-safe function is provided • Reduced emission of harmful exhaust gases.
to ensure the minimal driveability. • Reduction in fuel consumption
• The OBD system incorporated with the vehicles • Increased engine output.
within this type of engine complies with OBD-II reg- • Superior acceleration and deceleration.
ulations. The OBD system monitors the compo- • Superior startability and warm-up perfor-
nents and the system malfunction listed in “Engine mance in cold weather since compensation is
Section” which affects on emissions. made for coolant and intake air temperature.
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-6
General Description
D: PREPARATION TOOL
MONITOR KIT
ST1B020XU0
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-7

4. Electrical Component Location

A: LOCATION
1. ENGINE
• Control module
(3) (1)
(4) (2)
EN-03145
(1) Engine control module (ECM) (3) Test mode connector (4) Data link connector
(2) Malfunction indicator light
(1)
EN-01147 (2) EN-05065
(4)
(3)
EN-02414 AT-01877
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-8

• Sensor
(7) (5) (1) (2) (3) (8) (5)
(8) (6) (4)
EN-05066
(1) Manifold absolute pressure (3) Electronic throttle control (7) Mass air flow and intake air
sensor (4) Knock sensor temperature sensor
(2) Engine coolant temperature (5) Intake camshaft position sensor (8) Tumble generator valve ASSY
sensor (6) Crankshaft position sensor
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-9

(1)
(2)
EN-01927 EN-00295
(4)
(3)
EN-01928 EN-02169
(6)
(5)
EN-01798 EN-02919
(8)
(7)
EN-02920 EN-05373
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-10

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5) (6)
EN-02922
(1) Front oxygen (A/F) sensor (3) Exhaust temperature sensor (5) Rear oxygen sensor
(2) Precatalytic converter (4) Front catalytic converter (6) Rear catalytic converter
(1)
(3)
(2)
EN-00303 EN-00304
(5)
(4)
EN-00305 EN-00306
(6)
EN-00307
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-11

(1) (2) (3)
(4)
EN-03146
(1) Fuel level sensor (3) Fuel tank pressure sensor (4) Fuel sub level sensor
(2) Fuel temperature sensor
(3)
(1)
(2)
EN-03147 EN-03003
(4)
EN-03132
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-12

• Solenoid valve, actuator, emission control system parts and ignition system parts
(4) (5) (1) (2) (3) (9) (8) (5) (4)
(7) (9) (6)
EN-05068
(1) Wastegate control solenoid valve (6) Secondary air pump (8) Secondary air combination valve
(2) Purge control solenoid valve 1 (7) Secondary air combination valve LH
(3) Purge control solenoid valve 2 RH (9) Tumble generator valve ASSY
(4) Ignition coil
(5) Intake oil flow control solenoid
valve
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-13

(3)
(1) (2)
EN-01935 EN-05069
(4)
(5)
EN-05070 EN-05071
(6)
(7)
EN-04936 EN-04990
(8) (9)
EN-04991 EN-04992
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-14

(1)
(2) (3) (4)

EN-03938
(1) Pressure control solenoid valve (3) Drain valve (4) Drain filter
(2) Canister
(4)
(3)
(2)
(1)
EN-02980 EN-02981
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-15

(5) (4) (3) (2)

(1)
(11) (10) (9) (8) (7) (6) (12)

EN-05072
(1) Inhibitor switch (6) Radiator main fan relay 1 (10) Secondary air combination valve
(2) Fuel pump (7) Radiator sub fan relay relay 2
(3) Main relay (8) Radiator main fan relay 2 (11) Secondary air pump relay
(4) Fuel pump relay (9) Secondary air combination valve (12) Starter
(5) Electronic throttle control relay relay 1
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-16

(2)
(1)
EN-00178 EN-02093
(4)
(8)
(3)
(7)
(5)
(6) (9) (10) (11)
EN-03150 EN-05073
(12)
EN-05074
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-17

5. Engine Control Module (ECM) I/O Signal

TO B134 TO B135 TO B136 TO B137
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18
34 33 32 31 30 29 28 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 31 30 29 28 27 26
EN-01812
Signal (V)
Connector Terminal
No. No.
Crankshaft Signal (+) B134 13 0 –7 — +7 Waveform
Signal B135 4 0 0 — 0.9 —
Rear oxygen
Shield B135 1 0 0 —
sensor
GND(sensor) B135 30 0 0 —
Front oxygen Signal 1 B136 3 — — Waveform
(A/F) sensor
heater Signal 2 B136 2 — — Waveform
Rear oxygen sensor heater
B136 4 0 — 13 12 — 14 Waveform
signal
Engine coolant Signal B134 34 1.0 — 1.4 1.0 — 1.4 After engine is warmed-up.
temperature
sensor GND (sensor) B134 29 0 0 After engine is warmed-up.
Signal B135 26 — 0.3 — 4.5 —
Air flow sensor Shield B135 35 0 0 —
GND B135 34 0 0 —
Intake air temperature
B135 18 0.3 — 4.6 0.3 — 4.6 —
sensor signal
Wastegate control solenoid
B137 27 0 or 10 — 13 0 or 12 — 14 Waveform
valve
Starter switch B136 32 0 0 Cranking: 8 — 14
ON: 10 — 13 ON: 12 — 14
A/C switch B136 24 —
OFF: 0 OFF: 0
Ignition switch B135 19 10 — 13 12 — 14 —
Neutral position switch ON: 0 ON: 0
B136 31 —
(AT / MT) OFF: 10 — 13 OFF: 12 — 14
Test mode connector B135 27 10 — 13 13 — 14 When connected: 0
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-18

Signal (V)
Connector Terminal
No. No.
Signal B134 15 2.8 2.8 —
Knock sensor
Shield B134 25 0 0 —
Ignition switch “OFF”:
Back-up power supply B135 5 10 — 13 12 — 14
10 — 13
Control module power B134 7 10 — 13 12 — 14 —
supply B135 2 10 — 13 12 — 14 —
Sensor power supply B134 19 5 5 —
#1 B137 18 0 12 — 14 Waveform
#2 B137 19 0 12 — 14 Waveform
Ignition control
#3 B137 20 0 12 — 14 Waveform
#4 B137 21 0 12 — 14 Waveform
#1 B137 8 10 — 13 1 — 14 Waveform
#2 B137 9 10 — 13 1 — 14 Waveform
Fuel injector
#3 B137 10 10 — 13 1 — 14 Waveform
#4 B137 11 10 — 13 1 — 14 Waveform
Fuel pump Signal 1 B135 33 10 — 13 12 — 14 —
control unit Signal 2 B136 12 0 or 5 0 or 5 Waveform
A/C relay control B136 9 —
OFF: 10 — 13 OFF: 12 — 14
OFF: 10 — 13 OFF: 12 — 14
Radiator fan relay 2 control B136 29 Model with A/C only
OFF: 10 — 13 OFF: 12 — 14
Light “ON”: 1 or less
Malfunction indicator light B136 11 — —
Light “OFF”: 10 — 14
Engine speed output B136 22 — 0 — 13 or more Waveform
Purge control solenoid valve 1 B137 29 Waveform
OFF: 10 — 13 OFF: 12 — 14
Purge control solenoid valve 2 B136 7 Waveform
OFF: 10 — 13 OFF: 12 — 14
Manifold Signal B134 6 1.7 — 2.4 1.1 — 1.6
absolute Power supply B134 19 5 5 —
pressure
sensor GND (sensor) B134 29 0 0
Power steering oil pressure ON: 0
B134 33 10 — 13 —
switch OFF: 12 — 14
B135 9 2.8 — 3.2 2.8 — 3.2 —
signal (+)
B135 8 2.4 — 2.7 2.4 — 2.7 —
signal (–)
B135 1 0 0 —
shield
SSM communication line B136 16 1 or less ←→ 4 or more 1 or less ←→ 4 or more —
Intake camshaft position
B134 21 0 or 5 0 or 5 Waveform
sensor (LH)
B134 11 0 or 5 0 or 5 Waveform
sensor (RH)
B134 22 0 0 —
sensor ground
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-19

Signal (V)
Connector Terminal
No. No.
0.64 — 0.72
0.64 — 0.72 Fully closed: 0.6
Main B134 18 (After engine is
warmed-up.)
Electric 1.51 — 1.58
1.51 — 1.58 Fully closed: 1.48
throttle control Sub B134 28 (After engine is
warmed-up.)
Power supply B134 19 5 5 —
GND (sensor) B134 29 0 0 —
Electronic throttle control motor
(+)
(–)
B136 1 10 — 13 12 — 14 —
power supply
Electronic throttle control motor ON: 0 ON: 0 When ignition switch is
B136 21
relay OFF: 10 — 13 OFF: 12 — 14 turned to ON: ON
ON: 10 — 13 ON: 12 — 14
Intake AVCS Signal (+) B137 15 —
OFF: 0 OFF: 0
solenoid (LH)
Signal (–) B137 14 0 0 —
ON: 10 — 13 ON: 12 — 14
Intake AVCS Signal (+) B137 17 —
OFF: 0 OFF: 0
solenoid (RH)
Signal (–) B137 16 0 0 —
Main sensor Fully closed: 1 Fully closed: 1
B135 23 —
Main power
B135 21 5 5 —
supply
GND
B135 29 0 0 —
Accelerator (main sensor)
pedal position Shield B136 6 0 0 —
sensor Sub sensor Fully closed: 1 Fully closed: 1
B135 31 —
Sub power
B135 22 5 5 —
supply
GND
B135 30 0 0 —
(sub sensor)
ON: 0 ON: 0
Starter relay B136 20 ON: cranking
OFF: 10 — 13 OFF: 12 — 14
ON: 0 ON: 0
A/C middle pressure switch B136 33 —
OFF: 10 — 13 OFF: 12 — 14
When clutch pedal is When clutch pedal is
Clutch switch B136 25 —
depressed: 10 — 13 depressed: 12 — 14
released: 0 released: 0
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-20

Signal (V)
Connector Terminal
No. No.
When operating When operating
nothing: 3.5 — 4.5 nothing: 3.5 — 4.5
RES/ACC: 2.5 — 3.5 RES/ACC: 2.5 — 3.5
Cruise control command
B135 24 When operating When operating —
switch
SET/COAST: SET/COAST:
0.5 — 1.5 0.5 — 1.5
cancel: 0 — 0.5 cancel: 0 — 0.5
ON: 0 ON: 0
Cruise control main switch B135 12 —
OFF: 5 OFF: 5
Fuel tank pressure sensor B135 32 2.3 — 2.7 2.3 — 2.7 —
Pressure control solenoid ON: 1 or less ON: 1 or less
B136 28 —
valve OFF: 10 — 13 OFF: 12 — 14
Drain valve B136 17 —
OFF: 10 — 13 OFF: 12 — 14
Ambient temperature:
Fuel temperature sensor B135 17 2.5 — 3.8 2.5 — 3.8
25°C (77°F)
Signal 1 B136 26 — — —
Immobilizer
Signal 2 B136 34 — — —
CAN communication (+) B136 27 — — —
CAN communication (–) B136 35 — — —
AT/MT identification B136 15 0 0 —
Blow-by leak diagnosis At the time of open
B134 30 0 0
signal circuit (fault): 5
Fully closed: Fully closed:
Tumble generator valve 0.4 — 1.2 0.4 — 1.2
B134 26 —
position sensor signal (RH) Fully opened: Fully opened:
2.8 — 4.6 2.8 — 4.6
Fully closed: Fully closed:
Tumble generator valve 0.4 — 1.2 0.4 — 1.2
B134 16 —
position sensor signal (LH) Fully opened: Fully opened:
2.8 — 4.6 2.8 — 4.6
Tumble generator valve RH
B137 23 0 or 10 — 13 0 or 12 — 14 —
(closed)
Tumble generator valve LH
B137 13 0 or 10 — 13 0 or 12 — 14 —
(closed)
Tumble generator valve RH
B137 22 0 or 10 — 13 0 or 12 — 14 —
(open)
Tumble generator valve LH
B137 12 0 or 10 — 13 0 or 12 — 14 —
(open)
When secondary air is
Secondary air Signal B134 27 2.2 — 2.8 2.2 — 2.8
inducted: 3.2 — 4.9
pipe pressure
Power supply B134 19 5.12 5.12 —
sensor
GND (sensor) B134 29 0 0 —
Secondary air combination ON: 0 ON: 0
B136 30 —
valve relay 1 OFF: 10 — 13 OFF: 12 — 14
Secondary air combination ON: 0 ON: 0
B136 19 —
valve relay 2 OFF: 10 — 13 OFF: 12 — 14
ON: 0 ON: 0
Secondary air pump relay B136 8 —
OFF: 10 — 13 OFF: 12 — 14
Self-shutoff control B136 23 10 — 13 12 — 14 —
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-21

Signal (V)
Connector Terminal
No. No.
B137 26 0 0 —
GND (ignition system)
B137 6 0 0 —
Ground (engine 1) B134 5 0 0 —
Ground (body) B136 6 0 0 —
Input/output name Measuring condition Waveform

1. Crankshaft position sensor During idling
10ms
5V
ONE CRANK ROTATION
EN-05322
2. Camshaft position sensor During idling
RH
0
ONE CAM ROTATION
LH
0
ONE CAM ROTATION 5V
50ms
EN-05359
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-22

F/B FUSE No. 4
DATA LINK
CONNECTOR
AT
MT
C25
MT
CLUTCH SWITCH
B5
F/B FUSE No. 13
C10 C16
GENERATOR
STARTER MOTOR
IGNITION SWITCH
CLUTCH SWITCH B27

MT
MT
C20 TEST MODE

F/B FUSE No. 21 CONNECTOR
AT
AT
STARTER
RELAY C6
JOINT
CONNECTOR
1 MT
C32
INHIBITOR B23
RELAY 1
NEUTRAL
MT
SWITCH
MT
B21
C31 ACCELERA
TCM AT B31 -TOR
PEDAL
B19
F/B FUSE No. 12 POSITION
SENSOR
FUEL
PUMP
RELAY
C12 B29
FUEL PUMP
M/B FUSE No. 11 B33
CONTROL UNIT B22
FUEL JOINT
TEMPE- CONNECTOR
RATURE
5 SENSOR
B30
12
12 11 4 2 3 13
EN-05075
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-23

SBF-5
SBF-7
ELECTRONIC
THROTTLE
F/B FUSE No. 7
CONTROL
RELAY F/B FUSE No. 5
C1
MAIN
C21
RELAY
D18
IGNITION COIL
No. 1
D19 IGNITION COIL

No. 2
C23
D20
IGNITION COIL
No. 3
D21
IGNITION COIL
No. 4
A7 D26
B2 D6
PURGE CONTROL D29

SOLENOID VALVE 1
COMBINATION METER
MALFUNCTION
INDICATOR LIGHT
C11
PURGE CONTROL C7
SOLENOID VALVE 2 I/F
TRANSCEIVER
& RECEIVER
BODY POWER
SUPPLY CIRCUIT
INTEGRATED
UNIT
MICRO COMPUTER
(CAN
TACHO-
CAN
COMMUNICATION)
METER
C22
I/F
SPEEDO-
METER
A21
INTAKE PURGE CONTROL ENGINE
SOLENOID VALVE LH COOLANT
TEMPE-
RATURE
GAUGE
A11
INTAKE PURGE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE RH A22
POWER STEERING
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
A33
6 7
EN-05076
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-24

7 3
FUEL INJECTOR D8
No. 1
A18
FUEL INJECTOR D9
No. 2
A28
ELECTRONIC
FUEL INJECTOR D10 THROTTLE
No. 3 CONTROL
D4
D5
FUEL INJECTOR D11

No. 4 A19
WASTEGATE CONTROL D27

SOLENOID VALVE
MANIFOLD
A6 ABSOLUTE
PRESSURE
SENSOR
A29
B18
MASS AIR A34
B34 ENGINE
FLOW
& INTAKE AIR COOLANT
TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE
SENSOR B26 SENSOR
B35
7 8 9
EN-05009
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-25

9 8
6
B9
FRONT
OXYGEN B8
(A/F)
SENSOR C2 TUMBLE
RH D12 GENERATOR
C3 VALVE
D13 ASSY LH
A16
B1
2
B4 TUMBLE
D22 GENERATOR
REAR
VALVE
OXYGEN D23 ASSY RH
SENSOR
RH A26
C4
D15
7 8 9 OIL FLOW CONTROL
D14 SOLENOID VALVE LH
SECONDARY A27
AIR COMBINATION D17
VALVE RH OIL FLOW CONTROL
D16 SOLENOID VALVE RH
SECONDARY
C19
AIR COMBINATION
VALVE RELAY 2
C30
RELAY HOLDER SECONDARY
FUSE 10A AIR COMBINATION A13
VALVE LH CRANKSHAFT
SECONDARY A14 POSITION SENSOR
AIR COMBINATION
VALVE RELAY 2 A24
C8
RELAY HOLDER
FUSE 60A KNOCK SENSOR
A16
SECONDARY A25
AIR PUMP
VALVE RELAY
SECONDARY
AIR PUMP
10
EN-05077
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-26

11 13 7
C24 AUTO A/C CONTROL MODULE
FUEL TANK PRESSURE

SENSOR B32
C28
PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE C33
A/C PRESSURE SWITCH
C9
A/C RELAY
C17
DRAIN VALVE
B28 C26
STOP LIGHT SWITCH
C34 (IMMOBILIZER)
B20
BRAKE SWITCH
C27
C35 (CAN COMMUNICATION)
D2
10
B12
D1
CRUISE CONTROL
D7
SWITCH
B24
D3
C18
SUB FAN RELAY
C15
MT
A5
C29
MAIN FAN RELAY
ENGINE GROUND
EN-05078
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-27
Engine Condition Data

6. Engine Condition Data

17.6 — 35.64 (%): Idling
Engine Load
13.2 — 26.73 (%): 2,500 rpm racing
Measuring condition:
• After engine is warmed-up.
• Gear position is in neutral.
• Turn the A/C to OFF.
• Turn all the accessory switches to OFF.
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-28
Data Link Connector

7. Data Link Connector

A: NOTE
This connector is used for Subaru Select Monitor.
CAUTION:
Do not connect any scan tools except Subaru Select Monitor or general scan tool because the circuit
for Subaru Select Monitor may be damaged.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
EN-04893
Terminal No. Contents Terminal No. Contents

1 Power supply 9 Blank
2 Blank 10 Blank
3 Blank 11 Blank
4 Ground 12 Blank
5 Ground 13 Blank
6 CAN communication (+) 14 CAN communication (–)
7 Subaru Select Monitor signal 15 Blank
8 Blank 16 Power supply
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-29
General Scan Tool

8. General Scan Tool

A: OPERATION
1. HOW TO USE GENERAL SCAN TOOL
1) Prepare a scan tool (general scan tool) required
by SAE J1978.
2) Open the cover and connect the general scan
tool to the data link connector located in the lower
portion of instrument panel (on the driver’s side).
EN-02533
3) Using the general scan tool, call up DTC and

freeze frame data.
General scan tool functions consist of:
(1) MODE $01: Current powertrain diagnostic
data
(2) MODE $02: Powertrain freeze frame data
(3) MODE $03: Emission-related powertrain
DTC
(4) MODE $04: Clear/Reset emission-related
diagnostic information
test results for intermittently monitored systems
test results for continuously monitored systems
(7) MODE $09: Request vehicle information
Read out the data according to repair procedures.
(For detailed operation procedure, refer to the gen-
eral scan tool instruction manual.)
NOTE:
For details concerning DTC, refer to “List of Diag-
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-81, List of Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-30
General Scan Tool

2. MODE $01 (CURRENT POWERTRAIN DIAGNOSTIC DATA)

Refer to data denoting the current operating condition of analog input/output, digital input/output or the pow-
ertrain system.
Number of emission-related powertrain DTC, and malfunction indicator light status and diag-
$01 —
nosis support information
$0D Vehicle speed MPH
$0F Intake air temperature °C
$10 Air flow rate from mass air flow sensor gm/s
$12 Secondary air control status —
$15 Oxygen sensor output voltage and short term fuel trim associated with oxygen sensor V and %
$21 Running distance after MIL turns on miles
$24 A/F value and A/F sensor output voltage — and V
$2F Fuel level %
$30 Number of warm ups after DTC clear —
$31 Travel distance after DTC clear km
$34 A/F sensor λ value, current —,A
$3C Catalyzer temperature °C
$41 Diagnostic monitor of each drive cycle —
$43 Absolute load %
$4D Engine operation time during MIL on min
$4E Elapsed time after DTC clear min
$51 Fuel used —
$5A Relative accelerator opening angle %
NOTE:
Refer to general scan tool manufacturer’s instruction manual to access generic OBD-II PIDs (MODE $01).
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-31
General Scan Tool

3. MODE $02 (POWERTRAIN FREEZE FRAME DATA)

Refer to data denoting the operating condition when trouble is detected by on-board diagnosis system.
$02 DTC that caused the freeze frame data storage required by CARB —
$0D Vehicle speed MPH
$0F Intake air temperature °C
$10 Air flow rate from mass air flow sensor gm/s
$12 Secondary air control status —
$13 Air fuel ratio sensor —
$15 Rear oxygen sensor voltage, compensation value V, —
$2F Fuel level %
$43 Absolute load %
NOTE:
Refer to general scan tool manufacturer’s instruction manual to access freeze frame data (MODE $02).
4. MODE $03 (EMISSION-RELATED POWERTRAIN DTC)
Refer to “List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)” for information about data denoting emission-related pow-
ertrain DTC. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-81, List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
5. MODE $04 (CLEAR/RESET EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION)
Refer to the mode used to clear or reset emission-related diagnostic information (OBD-II trouble diagnostic
information).
NOTE:
Refer to general scan tool manufacturer’s instruction manual to clear the emission-related diagnostic infor-
mation (MODE $04).
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-32
General Scan Tool

6. MODE $06
Refer to test value of troubleshooting and data of test limit indicated on the support data bit sequence table.
$81 $0A
$82 $8D A/F sensor conduction abnormal (B1S1)
$83 $14
$01
$84 $1E
A/F sensor range abnormal (B1S1)
$85 $1E
$86 $20 A/F sensor response abnormal (B1S1)
$87 $0B
Oxygen sensor circuit abnormal (B1S2)
$88 $0B
$07 $0B
$02 $08 $0B Oxygen sensor drop abnormal (B1S2)
$A5 $0B
$05 $10
Oxygen sensor response abnormal (B1S2)
$06 $10
$21 $89 $20 Catalyst degradation diagnosis (B1)
$39 $93 $FE Evaporative emission control system leak detected (Fuel filler cap off)
$94 $FE
$3B Evaporative emission control system (0.04 inch leak)
$95 $FE
$96 $FE
$3C Evaporative emission control system (0.02 inch leak)
$97 $FE
$3D $98 $FE Evaporative emission control system (Purge flow)
$99 $24
A/F sensor heater abnormal (B1S1)
$41 $9A $24
$9B $14 A/F sensor heater characteristic abnormal (B1S1)
$9C $24
$42 Oxygen sensor heater abnormal (B1S2)
$9D $24
$9E $17
$9F $0B Secondary air system (whole system)
$A0 $0B
$B0 $17
$B1 $0B
$B1 $17
$71 $B2 $0B
$B2 $17
Secondary air system (relay 2 — combination valve 2)
$B3 $0B
$B4 $0B
$B5 $0B
$B6 $31
$B7 $31
$0B $24
$A1 Misfire monitoring (All cylinders)
$0C $24
$0B $24
$0C $24
$0B $24
$0C $24
$0B $24
$0C $24
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-33
General Scan Tool


$0B $24
$0C $24
$E1 $A6 $FE Purge control solenoid valve 2 close seized
7. MODE $07
Refer to the data of DTC (pending code) for troubleshooting result about emission in the first time.
8. MODE $09
Refer to the data of vehicle specification (V.I.N., calibration ID, etc.).
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-34

9. Subaru Select Monitor

A: OPERATION
1. HOW TO USE THE SUBARU SELECT
MONITOR
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-7, PREPARATION TOOL,
General Description.>
2) Connect the diagnosis cable to the Subaru Se-
lect Monitor.
link connector.
(1) Data link connector is located in the lower
portion of instrument panel (on the driver’s
side).
EN-02533
(2) Connect the diagnosis cable to the data link

connector.
CAUTION:
Do not connect the scan tools except for Suba-
ru Select Monitor and general scan tool.
5) Using the Subaru Select Monitor, call up DTC
and data, then record them.
(DTC) FOR ENGINE (NORMAL MODE)
mation about how to display a DTC. <Ref. to
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-44, Read Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
(DTC) FOR ENGINE (OBD MODE)
mation about how to display a DTC. <Ref. to
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-44, Read Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-35

4. READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE (NORMAL MODE)

4) On the «Engine Diagnosis» display screen, select the {Current Data Display/Save}.
• A list of the support data is shown in the following table.
Unit of
measure
Engine coolant temperature signal Coolant Temp. °C or °F 80 — 100°C or 176 — 212°F
A/F correction 1 A/F Correction #1 % –10 — +10%
A/F learning 1 A/F Learning #1 % –15 — +15%
mmHg, kPa, 220 — 275 mmHg, 29.5 — 37 kPa,
Intake manifold absolute pressure Mani. Absolute Pressure
inHg or psig 8.7 — 10 inHg or 4.2 — 5.3 psig
630 — 770 rpm (Agree with the
tachometer indication)
km/h or
Meter vehicle speed signal Meter Vehicle Speed 0 km/h or 0 MPH (at parking)
MPH
Ignition timing signal Ignition Timing deg 10 — 15 deg
Intake air temperature signal Intake Air Temp. °C or °F 20 — 50°C or 68 — 122°F
Amount of intake air Mass Air Flow g/s or lb/m 2.1 — 3.1 g/s or 0.35 — 0.40 lb/m
Throttle opening angle signal Throttle Opening Angle % 2.0 — 2.4%
Rear oxygen sensor voltage Rear O2 Sensor V 0 — 1.0 V
Battery voltage Battery Voltage V 12 — 15 V
Mass air flow voltage Air Flow Sensor Voltage V 1.0 — 1.7 V
Injection 1 pulse width Fuel Injection #1 Pulse ms 1.2 — 2.2 ms
Knock sensor compensation Knock Correction deg 0.0 deg
Acceleration opening angle signal Accel. Opening Angle % 0.0%
Primary supercharged pressure control signal Primary Control % 0.0%
Purge control solenoid duty ratio CPC Valve Duty Ratio % 0 — 25%
Generator duty ratio ALT Duty % 0 — 100%
Fuel pump duty ratio Fuel Pump Duty % 30 — 40%
AVCS advance angle amount RH VVT Adv. Ang. Amount R deg 5 deg
AVCS advance angle amount LH VVT Adv. Ang. Amount L deg 5 deg
Oil flow control solenoid valve duty RH (AVCS) OCV Duty R % 0 — 20%
Oil flow control solenoid valve duty LH (AVCS) OCV Duty L % 0 — 20%
Oil flow control solenoid valve current RH OCV Current R mA 40 — 100 mA
Oil flow control solenoid valve current LH OCV Current L mA 40 — 100 mA
A/F sensor current value 1 A/F Sensor #1 Current mA –20 — 20 mA
A/F sensor resistance value 1 A/F Sensor #1 Resistance Ω 27 — 35 mA
A/F sensor output lambda 1 A/F Sensor #1 — 1.0
A/F correction 3 A/F Correction #3 % 0.00%
Throttle motor duty Throttle Motor Duty % –5%
Throttle power supply voltage Throttle Motor Voltage V 12 — 15 V
Sub throttle sensor voltage Sub-throttle Sensor V 1.5 V
Main throttle sensor voltage Main-throttle Sensor V 0.6 V
Sub accelerator sensor voltage Sub-accelerator Sensor V 1.1 V
mmHg, kPa, +8.8 mmHg, +1.2 kPa, +0.4 inHg or
inHg or psig +0.2 psig
Fuel temperature signal Fuel Temp. °C or °F +28°C or 82°F
Main accelerator sensor voltage Main-accelerator Sensor V 1.0 V
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-36

Unit of
measure
mmHg, kPa,
Atmospheric pressure Atmosphere Pressure —
inHg or psig
mmHg, kPa, (Intake manifold absolute pressure
Intake manifold relative pressure Mani. Relative Pressure
inHg or psig — atmosphere pressure)
km/h or
Memory vehicle speed Memorized Cruise Speed —
MPH
Estimated Cumulative
Odd Meter km —
Driving Distance
Fuel level signal Fuel Level V 5.10
Tumble generator valve RH opening signal TGV Position Sensor R V 0.81 V
Tumble generator valve LH opening signal TGV Position Sensor L V 0.81 V
Exhaust temperature signal Exhaust Gas Temperature °C or °F 385°C or 725°F
AT/MT identification terminal AT Vehicle ID Signal — AT/MT
Test mode terminal Test Mode Signal — U check
Neutral position switch signal Neutral Position Switch — Neutral
Soft idle switch signal Soft Idle Switch Signal — At idle
Ignition switch signal Ignition Switch — ON input
Power steering switch signal P/S Switch — OFF input (At OFF)
Air conditioning switch signal A/C Switch — OFF input (At OFF)
Starter switch signal Starter Switch — OFF input
Rear oxygen monitor Rear O2 Rich Signal — Rich/Lean
Knocking signal Knock Signal — None
Crankshaft position sensor signal Crankshaft Position Sig. — Provided
Camshaft position sensor signal Camshaft Position Sig. — Provided
Rear defogger switch signal Rear Defogger SW — OFF input (At OFF)
Blower fan switch signal Blower Fan SW — OFF input (At OFF)
Light switch signal Light Switch — OFF input (At OFF)
A/C middle pressure switch signal A/C Mid Pressure Switch — OFF input (At OFF)
Air conditioner compressor relay output signal A/C Compressor Signal — OFF output (At OFF)
Radiator fan relay 1 signal Radiator Fan Relay #1 — OFF output (At OFF)
Radiator fan relay 2 signal Radiator Fan Relay #2 — OFF output (At OFF)
PCV hose assembly diagnosis signal Blow-by Leak Connector — Connected
Pressure control solenoid valve signal PCV Solenoid — OFF output (At OFF)
Tumble generator valve output signal TGV Output — None
Tumble generator valve drive signal TGV Drive — Closing direction
Drain valve signal Vent Control Solenoid — OFF output (At OFF)
AT coordinate retard angle demand signal Retard Signal from AT — None
AT coordinate fuel cut demand signal Fuel Cut Signal from AT — None
AT coordinate permission signal Torque Permission Signal — ON/OFF
ETC motor relay signal ETC Motor Relay — ON
Clutch switch signal Clutch Switch — OFF (At OFF)
Stop light switch signal Stop Light Switch — OFF (At OFF)
SET/COAST switch signal SET/COAST Switch — OFF (At OFF)
RES/ACC switch signal RESUME/ACCEL Switch — OFF (At OFF)
Brake switch signal Brake Switch — OFF (At OFF)
Main switch signal Main Switch — OFF (At OFF)
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-37

Unit of
measure
Body int. unit data reception Body Int. Unit Data — Provided
Integrated unit data update Body Int. Unit Count — Provided
Cruise control cancel switch signal CC Cancel SW — OFF (At OFF)
NOTE:
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-38

5. READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE (OBD MODE)

5) On the «OBD Menu» display screen, select the {Current Data Display/Save}.
Unit of
measure
Number of diagnosis code Number of Diag. Code: — —
Condition of malfunction indicator light MI (MIL) — ON or OFF
Monitoring test of misfire Misfire monitoring — Supp YES
Monitoring test of misfire Misfire monitoring — Rdy YES/Rdy NO
Monitoring test of fuel system Fuel system monitoring — Supp YES
Monitoring test of fuel system Fuel system monitoring — Rdy YES/Rdy NO
Monitoring test of comprehensive component Component monitoring — Supp YES
Monitoring test of comprehensive component Component monitoring — Rdy YES/Rdy NO
Test of catalyst Catalyst Diagnosis — Supp YES
Test of catalyst Catalyst Diagnosis — Rdy YES/Rdy NO
Test of heating-type catalyst Heated catalyst — Supp NO
Test of heating-type catalyst Heated catalyst — Rdy N/A
Test of evaporative emission purge control Evaporative purge
— Supp YES
system system
Test of evaporative emission purge control Evaporative purge
— Rdy YES/Rdy NO
system system
Test of secondary air system Secondary air system — Supp YES
Test of secondary air system Secondary air system — Rdy YES/Rdy NO
Test of air conditioning system A/C system refrigerant — Supp NO
Test of air conditioning system A/C system refrigerant — Rdy N/A
Test of oxygen sensor Oxygen sensor — Supp YES
Test of oxygen sensor Oxygen sensor — Rdy YES/Rdy NO
Test of oxygen sensor heater O2 Heater Diagnosis — Supp YES
Test of oxygen sensor heater O2 Heater Diagnosis — Rdy YES/Rdy NO
Test of EGR system EGR system — Supp NO
Test of EGR system EGR system — Rdy N/A
Air fuel ratio control system for bank 1 Fuel System for Bank 1 — Normal CLOSE
Engine load data Calculated load value % 1.6%
Engine coolant temperature signal Coolant Temp. °C or °F +91°C or 196°F
Short term fuel trim by front oxygen (A/F) sensor Short term fuel trim B1 % +0.0 %
Long term fuel trim by front oxygen (A/F) sensor Long term fuel trim B1 % +1.6 %
mmHg, kPa,
Intake manifold absolute pressure signal Mani. Absolute Pressure 256 mmHg
inHg or psig
Engine speed signal Engine Speed rpm 693 rpm
km/h or
Vehicle speed signal Vehicle Speed 0 km/h
MPH
#1 Cylinder ignition timing Ignition timing adv. #1 ° +16.0°
Intake air temperature signal Intake Air Temp. °C or °F 54°C or 129°F
Amount of intake air Mass Air Flow g/s or lb/m 3.1 g/s
Throttle position signal Throttle Opening Angle % 13%
Oxygen sensor #12 Oxygen Sensor #12 V + 0.800 V
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-39

Unit of
measure
Air fuel ratio correction by rear oxygen sensor Short term fuel trim #12 % +0.8%
On-board diagnostic system OBD System — CARB-OBD2
Oxygen sensor #11 Oxygen Sensor #11 — Support
Rear oxygen sensor output signal Oxygen Sensor #12 — Support
A/F lambda signal A/F sensor #11 — 0.984
A/F sensor output signal A/F sensor #11 V 2.712 V
A/F lambda signal #11 A/F sensor #11 — 0.992
A/F sensor current #11 A/F sensor #11 mA –0.03 mA
Secondary air control status Secondary air system — —
Elapsed Time After
Time elapsed after engine start sec —
Starting Engine
Elapsed Time After MIL
Elapsed time after MIL illuminating km or miles —
Illuminates
Evaporative purge Evaporative purge % —
Fuel level Fuel level % —
Number Of Warm Ups
Number of warm ups after DTC clear — —
After DTC Clear
Travel distance after DTC
Travel distance after DTC clear km or miles —
clear
mmHg, kPa,
Fuel tank pressure Fuel Tank Pressure —
inHg or psig
mmHg, kPa,
Atmospheric pressure Atmospheric Pressure —
inHg or psig
Catalyst temperature #1 Catalyzer temperature #1 °C or °F —
Enable YES or NO
Misfire monitoring Misfire Monitoring
Comp YES or NO
Enable YES or NO
Fuel system diagnosis Fuel system monitoring
Comp YES or NO
Enable YES or NO
Component monitoring Component monitoring
Comp YES or NO
Enable YES or NO
Catalyst diagnosis Catalyst Diagnosis
Comp YES or NO
Enable N/A
Heated catalyst diagnosis Heated catalyst
Comp N/A
Evaporative purge Enable YES or NO
Evaporative purge system diagnosis
system Comp YES or NO
Enable YES or NO
Secondary air system Secondary air system
Comp YES or NO
Enable N/A
A/C system refrigerant diagnosis A/C system refrigerant
Comp N/A
Enable YES or NO
Oxygen sensor diagnosis Oxygen sensor
Comp YES or NO
Enable YES or NO
Oxygen heater diagnosis O2 Heater Diagnosis
Comp YES or NO
Enable N/A
EGR diagnosis EGR system
Comp N/A
ECM power voltage ECM power voltage V —
Absolute load Absolute load % —
A/F target lambda A/F target lambda — —
Relative throttle opening angle Relative throttle position % —
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-40

Unit of
measure
Ambient temperature Ambient temperature °C or °F —
Absolute throttle opening
Absolute throttle opening angle 2 % —
angle 2
Absolute accelerator
Absolute accelerator opening angle 1 % —
opening angle 1
Absolute accelerator
Absolute accelerator opening angle 2 % —
opening angle 2
Target throttle opening
Target throttle opening angle % —
angle
Engine operating time
Engine operation time during MIL on min —
during MIL illuminates
Elapsed time after DTC
Elapsed time after DTC clear min —
clear
Fuel used Fuel used — —
Relative accelerator
Relative accelerator opening angle % —
opening angle
NOTE:
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-41

6. READ FREEZE FRAME DATA FOR ENGINE (OBD MODE)

5) On the «OBD Menu» display screen, select {Freeze Frame Data}.
Contents Display Unit of measure
DTC of freeze frame data Freeze frame data Diagnostic code
Air fuel ratio control system for bank 1 Fuel system for Bank1 —
Engine load data Engine Load %
Short term fuel trim by front oxygen (A/F) sensor (Bank 1) Short term fuel trim B1 %
Long term fuel trim by front oxygen (A/F) sensor (Bank 1) Long term fuel trim B1 %
Intake manifold absolute pressure signal Mani.Absolute Pressure mmHg, kPa, inHg or psi
Vehicle speed signal Vehicle Speed km/h or MPH
Ignition timing #1 Ignition timing adv. #1 °
Intake air temperature Intake Air Temp. °C
Amount of intake air Mass Air Flow g/s
Throttle opening angle Throttle Opening Angle %
Secondary air control status Secondary air system —
O2 sensor #11 Oxygen sensor #11 —
O2 sensor #12 Oxygen sensor #12 —
A/F correction 12 A/F correction #12 —
OBD system OBD System —
Elapsed Time After Starting
Elapsed time after starting the engine sec
Engine
Evaporative purge Evaporative purge %
Fuel level Fuel level %
Fuel tank pressure Tank pressure mmHg, kPa, inHg or psig
Atmospheric pressure Atmospheric Pressure mmHg, kPa, inHg or psig
ECM power voltage ECM power voltage V
Absolute load Absolute load %
A/F target lambda A/F target lambda —
Relative throttle opening angle Relative throttle position %
Ambient temperature Ambient temperature °C or °F
Absolute throttle opening angle 2 Absolute throttle opening angle 2 %
Absolute accelerator opening
Absolute accelerator opening angle 1 %
angle 1
Absolute accelerator opening
Absolute accelerator opening angle 2 %
angle 2
Target throttle opening angle Target throttle opening angle %
NOTE:
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-42

7. V.I.N. REGISTRATION
4) On the «Engine Diagnosis» display screen, select {V.I.N. Registration}.
5) Perform the procedures shown on the display screen.
NOTE:
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-43
Read Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)

10.Read Diagnostic Trouble

Code (DTC)
A: OPERATION
1. SUBARU SELECT MONITOR (NORMAL
MODE)
4) On the «Engine Diagnosis» screen, select the
{DTC Display}.
5) On the «Diagnostic Code(s) Display» screen,
select the {Current Diagnostic Code(s)} or {History
Diagnostic Code(s)}.
NOTE:
MANUAL”.
Code (DTC).>
MODE)
5) On the «OBD Menu» display screen, select {Di-
agnostic Code(s) Display}.
6) Make sure DTC is shown on the screen.
NOTE:
MANUAL”.
Code (DTC).>
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-44
Inspection Mode
11.Inspection Mode
A: PROCEDURE
Perform the diagnosis shown in the following DTC table.
When performing the diagnosis not listed in “List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)”, refer to the item on the
drive cycle. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-50, Drive Cycle.>
DTC Item Condition
P0011 Intake Camshaft Position - Timing Over-Advanced or System Performance
—
(Bank 1)
P0016 Crankshaft Position - Camshaft Position Correlation (Bank1) —
P0018 Crankshaft Position - Camshaft Position Correlation (Bank2) —
P0021 Intake Camshaft Position - Timing Over-Advanced or System Performance
—
(Bank 2)
P0102 Mass or Volume Air Flow Circuit Low Input —
P0103 Mass or Volume Air Flow Circuit High Input —
P0107 Manifold Absolute Pressure/Barometric Pressure Circuit Low Input —
P0108 Manifold Absolute Pressure/Barometric Pressure Circuit High Input —
P0112 Intake Air Temperature Sensor 1 Circuit Low —
P0113 Intake Air Temperature Sensor 1 Circuit High —
P0117 Engine Coolant Temperature Circuit Low —
P0118 Engine Coolant Temperature Circuit High —
P0122 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch “A” Circuit Low —
P0123 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch “A” Circuit High —
P0140 O2 Sensor Circuit No Activity Detected (Bank1 Sensor2) —
P0182 Fuel Temperature Sensor “A” Circuit Low Input —
P0183 Fuel Temperature Sensor “A” Circuit High Input —
P0222 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch “B” Circuit Low —
P0223 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch “B” Circuit High —
P0230 Fuel Pump Primary Circuit —
P0245 Turbo/Super Charger Wastegate Solenoid “A” Low —
P0327 Knock Sensor 1 Circuit Low (Bank 1 or Single Sensor) —
P0328 Knock Sensor 1 Circuit High (Bank 1 or Single Sensor) —
P0335 Crankshaft Position Sensor “A” Circuit —
P0336 Crankshaft Position Sensor “A” Circuit Range/Performance —
P0340 Camshaft Position Sensor “A” Circuit (Bank 1 or Single Sensor) —
P0345 Camshaft Position Sensor “A” Circuit (Bank 2) —
P0413 Secondary Air Injection System Switching Valve “A” Circuit Open —
P0416 Secondary Air Injection System Switching Valve “B”Circuit Open —
P0418 Secondary Air Injection System Control “A” Circuit Open —
P0447 Evaporative Emission Control System Vent Control Circuit Open —
P0448 Evaporative Emission Control System Vent Control Circuit Shorted —
P0452 Evaporative Emission Control System Pressure Sensor Low Input —
P0453 Evaporative Emission Control System Pressure Sensor High Input —
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-45
Inspection Mode
DTC Item Condition

P0458 Evaporative Emission System Purge Control Valve Circuit Low —
P0462 Fuel Level Sensor “A” Circuit Low —
P0463 Fuel Level Sensor “A” Circuit High —
P0500 Vehicle Speed Sensor “A” —
P0512 Starter Request Circuit —
P0513 Incorrect Immobilizer Key —
P0519 Idle Air Control System Performance —
P0545 Exhaust Gas Temperature Sensor Circuit Low (Bank 1 Sensor 1) —
P0600 Serial Communication Link —
P0604 Internal Control Module Random Access Memory (RAM) Error —
P0605 Internal Control Module Read Only Memory (ROM) Error —
P0607 Control Module Performance —
P0638 Throttle Actuator Control Range/Performance (Bank 1) —
P0691 Fan 1 Control Circuit Low —
P0700 Transmission Control System (MIL Request) —
P0851 Neutral Switch Input Circuit Low —
P0852 Neutral Switch Input Circuit High —
P1152 O2 Sensor Circuit Range/Performance (Low) (Bank1 Sensor1) —
P1153 O2 Sensor Circuit Range/Performance (High) (Bank1 Sensor1) —
P1160 Return Spring Failure —
P1400 Fuel Tank Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Circuit Low —
P1410 Secondary Air Injection System Switching Valve Stuck Open —
P1420 Fuel Tank Pressure Control Sol. Valve Circuit High —
P1491 Positive Crankcase Ventilation (Blow-by) Function Problem —
P1518 Starter Switch Circuit Low Input —
P1560 Back-up Voltage Circuit Malfunction —
P1570 Antenna —
P1571 Reference Code Incompatibility —
P1572 IMM Circuit Failure (Except Antenna Circuit) —
P1574 Key Communication Failure —
P1576 EGI Control Module EEPROM —
P1577 IMM Control Module EEPROM —
P1578 Meter Failure —
P2006 Intake Manifold Runner Control Stuck Closed (Bank 1) —
P2007 Intake Manifold Runner Control Stuck Closed (Bank 2) —
P2008 Intake Manifold Runner Control Circuit / Open (Bank 1) —
P2009 Intake Manifold Runner Control Circuit Low (Bank 1) —
P2011 Intake Manifold Runner Control Circuit / Open (Bank 2) —
P2012 Intake Manifold Runner Control Circuit Low (Bank 2) —
P2016 Intake Manifold Runner Position Sensor / Switch Circuit Low (Bank 1) —
P2017 Intake Manifold Runner Position Sensor / Switch Circuit High (Bank 1) —
P2021 Intake Manifold Runner Position Sensor / Switch Circuit Low (Bank 2) —
P2022 Intake Manifold Runner Position Sensor / Switch Circuit High (Bank 2) —
P2088 Intake Camshaft Position Actuator Control Circuit Low (Bank 1) —
P2089 Intake Camshaft Position Actuator Control Circuit High (Bank 1) —
P2092 Intake Camshaft Position Actuator Control Circuit Low (Bank 2) —
P2093 Intake Camshaft Position Actuator Control Circuit High (Bank 2) —
P2101 Throttle Actuator Control Motor Circuit Range/Performance —
P2102 Throttle Actuator Control Motor Circuit Low —
P2103 Throttle Actuator Control Motor Circuit High —
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-46
Inspection Mode
DTC Item Condition

P2109 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor “A” Minimum Stop Performance —
P2419 Evaporative Emission System Switching Valve Control Circuit Low —
P2420 Evaporative Emission System Switching Valve Control Circuit High —
P2122 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch “D” Circuit Low Input —
P2123 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch “D” Circuit High Input —
P2127 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch “E” Circuit Low Input —
P2128 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch “E” Circuit High Input —
P2431 Secondary Air Injection System Air Flow /Pressure Sensor Circuit Range/
—
Performance
P2432 Secondary Air Injection System Air Flow /Pressure Sensor Circuit Low —
P2433 Secondary Air Injection System Air Flow /Pressure Sensor Circuit High —
P2135 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch “A”/“B” Voltage Correlation —
P2138 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch “D”/“E” Voltage Correlation —
P2444 Secondary Air Injection System Pump Stuck On —
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-47
Inspection Mode
1. PREPARATION FOR THE INSPECTION 2. SUBARU SELECT MONITOR

MODE 1) After clearing the memory, check for any remain-
1) Check that the battery voltage is 12 V or more ing unresolved trouble data. <Ref. to
and fuel remains approx. half [20 — 40 2 (5.3 — EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-56, Clear Memory Mode.>
10.6 US gal, 4.4 — 8.8 Imp gal)]. 2) Warm-up the engine.
2) Lift-up the vehicle using a garage jack and place 3) Prepare the Subaru Select Monitor kit. <Ref. to
it on rigid racks, or drive the vehicle onto free roll- EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-7, PREPARATION TOOL,
ers. General Description.>
WARNING: 4) Connect the diagnosis cable to the Subaru Se-
lect Monitor.
• Before raising the vehicle, ensure parking
brakes are applied. 5) Connect the test mode connector (A) located un-
der the glove box.
• Do not use a pantograph jack in place of a rig-
id rack.
• Secure a rope or wire to the front or rear tow-
ing hooks to prevent the lateral runout of front
wheels.
• Do not abruptly depress/release clutch pedal
or accelerator pedal during works even when
the engine is operating at low speeds since this
may cause vehicle to jump off free rollers. (A)
• In order to prevent the vehicle from slipping
due to vibration, do not place any wooden EN-02424
blocks or similar items between the rigid racks
and vehicle. (A) Test mode connector
• Since the rear wheels will also rotate, do not
place anything near them. Also, make sure that 6) Connect the Subaru Select Monitor to data link
nobody goes in front of the vehicle. connector located in the lower portion of the instru-
ment panel (on the driver’s side).
(A) EN-02533
CAUTION:
Do not connect any scan tools except the Sub-
aru Select Monitor or general scan tool.
(B) 10) Select the [OK] after the information of engine
EN-00041
(A) Rigid racks 11) On the «Engine Diagnosis» display screen, se-
(B) Free rollers lect {D Check}.
12) When the “Perform Inspection (Dealer Check)
Mode” is shown on the screen, select the [OK].
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-48
Inspection Mode
13) Perform subsequent procedures as instructed 5) Start the engine.

on the display screen. NOTE:
• If trouble still remains in the memory, the corre- • Make sure the select lever is placed in the “P” po-
sponding DTC appears on the display screen. sition before starting. (AT model)
NOTE: • Depress the clutch pedal when starting engine.
• For detailed operation procedure, refer to the (MT model)
“SUBARU SELECT MONITOR OPERATION 6) Using the select lever or shift lever, turn the “P”
MANUAL”. position switch and “N” position switch on.
• For details concerning DTC, refer to “List of Di- 7) Depress the brake pedal to turn the brake switch
agnostic Trouble Code (DTC)”. ON. (AT model)
<Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-81, List of Diagnos- 8) Keep the engine speed in 2,500 — 3,000 rpm
tic Trouble Code (DTC).> range for 40 seconds.
• Release the parking brake. 9) Place the selector lever or shift lever in D range
• The speed difference between front and rear (AT model) or 1st gear (MT model) and drive the
wheels may illuminate the ABS warning light, but vehicle at 5 to 10 km/h (3 to 6 MPH).
this does not indicate a malfunction. When en- NOTE:
gine control diagnosis is finished, perform the • For AWD model, release the parking brake.
ABS memory clearance procedure of the self-di-
• The speed difference between front and rear
agnosis system. <Ref. to ABS(diag)-24, Clear
wheels may illuminate the ABS warning light, but
Memory Mode.>
this indicates no malfunctions. When engine con-
3. GENERAL SCAN TOOL trol diagnosis is finished, perform the ABS memory
1) After clearing the memory, check for any remain- clearance procedure of the self-diagnosis system.
ing unresolved trouble data. <Ref. to <Ref. to ABS(diag)-24, Clear Memory Mode.>
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-56, Clear Memory Mode.> 10) Using the general scan tool, check DTC and
2) Warm-up the engine. record the result(s).
3) Connect the test mode connector (A) located un- NOTE:
der the glove box. • For detailed operation procedures, refer to the
nostic Trouble Code (DTC)”.
<Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-81, List of Diagnostic
(A)
EN-02424
4) Connect the general scan tool to data link con-

nector located in the lower portion of the instrument
panel (on the driver’s side).
CAUTION:
EN-02533
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-49
Drive Cycle
12.Drive Cycle
A: PROCEDURE
For the troubleshooting, there are five driving patterns of drive cycles A to E. Driving in the specified pattern
allows to diagnose malfunctioning items listed below. After the repair of the following trouble items, be sure
to drive the vehicle with the specified drive patterns to check whether the function is resumed correctly.
1. PREPARATION FOR DRIVE CYCLE
1) Check that the battery voltage is 12 V or more and fuel remains approx. half [20 — 40 2 (5.3 — 10.6 US
gal, 4.4 — 8.8 Imp gal)].
2) After performing the diagnostics and clearing the memory, check for any remaining unresolved trouble da-
ta. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-56, Clear Memory Mode.>
3) Disconnect the test mode connector.
NOTE:
• Perform the diagnosis after warming up the engine except when the engine coolant temperature at starting
is specified.
• Perform the diagnosis twice if the DTC marked with *. After completing the first diagnosis, stop the engine
and perform second diagnosis in same condition.
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-50
Drive Cycle
2. DRIVE CYCLE A — DRIVE THE VEHICLE WITH 80 KM/H (50 MPH) FOR 20 MINUTES, AND
THEN IDLE THE ENGINE FOR A MINUTE.)
DTC Item Condition
*P0125 Insufficient Coolant Temperature for Closed Loop Fuel Control Engine coolant temperature at
(68°F).
*P0126 Insufficient Engine Coolant Temperature for Stable Operation —
*P0128 Coolant Thermostat Engine coolant temperature at
(Engine Coolant Temperature Below Thermostat Regulating Temperature) engine start is less than 55°C
(131°F).
*P0420 Catalyst System Efficiency Below Threshold (Bank 1) —
*P0441 Evaporative Emission System Incorrect Purge Flow —
*P0442 Evaporative Emission Control System Leak Detected (Small Leak) Engine coolant temperature at
(77°F).
*P0451 Evaporative Emission Control System Pressure Sensor —
*P0456 Evaporative Emission Control System Leak Detected (Very Small Leak) Engine coolant temperature at
(77°F).
*P0457 Evaporative Emission Control System Leak Detected (Fuel Cap Loose/Off) Engine coolant temperature at
(77°F).
P0459 Evaporative Emission System Purge Control Valve Circuit High —
P0692 Fan 1 Control Circuit High —
P1443 Vent Control Solenoid Valve Function Problem —
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-51
Drive Cycle
3. DRIVE CYCLE B — 10 MINUTES IDLING

NOTE:
Drive the vehicle at 10 km/h (6 MPH) or faster before diagnosis.
DTC Item Condition
*P0464 Fuel Level Sensor Circuit Intermittent —
*P0483 Fan Rationality Check —
*P0506 Idle Air Control System RPM Lower Than Expected —
*P0507 Idle Air Control System RPM Higher Than Expected —
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-52
Drive Cycle
4. DRIVE CYCLE C — DRIVE THE VEHICLE WITH FOLLOWING DRIVE PATTERNS
(H)
(C)
97 (60)
(D) (F) (G)
64 (40)
(B) (E)
(A)
0
50 100 150 (I)
EN-00842
(A) Idle the engine for 10 seconds or (D) Decelerate with fully closed throt- (G) Stop the vehicle with throttle fully
more. tle to 64 km/h (40 MPH). closed.
(B) Accelerate to 97 km/h (60 MPH) (E) Drive the vehicle at 64 km/h (40 (H) Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)
within 20 seconds. MPH) for 20 seconds. (I) (sec.)
(C) Drive the vehicle at 97 km/h (F) Accelerate to 97 km/h (60 MPH)
(60 MPH) for 20 seconds. within 10 seconds.
DTC Item Condition

*P0030 HO2S Heater Control Circuit (Bank 1 Sensor 1) —
P0068 MAP/MAF - Throttle Position Correlation —
*P0101 Mass or Volume Air Flow Circuit Range/Performance —
P0134 O2 Sensor Circuit No Activity Detected (Bank 1 Sensor 1) —
*P0244 Turbo/Super Charger Wastegate Solenoid “A” Range/Performance —
P0246 Turbo/Super Charger Wastegate Solenoid “A” High —
P2004 Intake Manifold Runner Control Stuck Open (Bank 1) —
P2005 Intake Manifold Runner Control Stuck Open (Bank 2) —
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-53
Drive Cycle
5. DRIVE CYCLE D
DRIFT DIAGNOSIS
2) Make sure that fuel remains 9.6 2 (2.5 US gal, 2.1 Imp gal) or more and the battery voltage is 10.9 V or
more.
3) Start the engine, and check that the engine coolant temperature increases by 10°C (18°F) or more, and
reaches 75°C (167°F) or more, when the engine is warmed up.
4) Idle the engine for 120 seconds or more in the condition of step 3.
STUCK DIAGNOSIS
2) Perform the Clear Memory Mode. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-56, Clear Memory Mode.>
3) Drive the vehicle for the distance equal to the fuel of 50 2 (13.2 US gal, 11 Imp gal).
NOTE:
tery terminals.)
DTC Item Condition
P0181 Fuel Temperature Sensor “A” Circuit Range/Performance —
6. DRIVE CYCLE E
3) Drive the vehicle for the distance equal to the fuel of 30 2 (7.9 US gal, 6.6 Imp gal).
NOTE:
tery terminals.)
DTC Item Condition
P0461 Fuel Level Sensor “A” Circuit Range/Performance —
7. DRIVE CYCLE F
2) Start the engine, and warm it up until engine coolant temperature increases over 95°C (203°F).
3) After the engine has reached the state of procedure 2), idle the engine for 10 minutes or more.
NOTE:
Do not disconnect the battery terminals while diagnosing. (Data will be cleared by disconnecting the battery
terminals.)
DTC Item Condition
P0111 Intake Air Temperature Sensor 1 Circuit Range/Performance —
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-54
Drive Cycle
8. DRIVE CYCLE G
1) Remove the battery negative terminal, and reconnect after 10 seconds have passed.
2) Start the engine and warm-up engine until coolant temperature is 80°C (176°F).
3) Start the engine and warm-up engine until coolant temperature is 40°C (104°F) or less.
NOTE:
Do not let engine coolant temperature drop below 5°C (41°F).
4) Start the engine and warm-up engine until coolant temperature is 80°C (176°F).
5) Start the engine and warm-up engine until coolant temperature is 40°C (104°F) or less.
NOTE:
Do not let engine coolant temperature drop below 5°C (41°F).
6) Start and idle the engine.
DTC Item Condition
*P0410
Secondary Air Injection System —
*P0411
Secondary Air Injection System Incorrect Flow Detected —
P0414 Secondary Air Injection System Switching Valve “A” Circuit Shorted —
P0417 Secondary Air Injection System Switching Valve B Circuit Shorted —
P1418 Secondary Air Injection System Control “A” Circuit Shorted —
*P2440
Secondary Air Injection System Switching Valve Stuck Open (Bank 1) —
*P2441
Secondary Air Injection System Switching Valve Stuck Closed (Bank 1) —
*P2442
Secondary Air Injection System Switching Valve Stuck Open (Bank 2) —
*P2443
Secondary Air Injection System Switching Valve Stuck Closed (Bank 2) —
9. DRIVE CYCLE H
2) With the ignition switch ON, read the engine coolant temperature, intake air temperature and fuel temper-
ature. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-36, READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE (NORMAL MODE), OPER-
ATION, Subaru Select Monitor.>
3) If the values from step 2) satisfy the following two conditions, start the engine.
Condition:
|Engine coolant temperature — intake air temperature | ≤ 5°C (41°F)
|Engine coolant temperature — fuel temperature | ≤ 2°C (36°F)
NOTE:
• If the conditions are not satisfied, turn the ignition switch to OFF and wait until the parameters are satisfied.
• Start AT vehicles in the P range, and MT vehicles in the N position.
4) Idle the engine for 1 minute under the conditions in step 3).
DTC Item Condition
*P1602 Control Module Programming Error —
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-55
Clear Memory Mode

13.Clear Memory Mode

A: OPERATION
1. SUBARU SELECT MONITOR (NORMAL
MODE)
lect the {Clear Memory}.
5) When the “Done” and “Turn Ignition Switch OFF”
are shown on the display screen, turn the ignition
switch to OFF, and then close the Subaru Select
Monitor.
NOTE:
performed after memory clearance. Therefore,
start the engine 10 seconds or more after have
turning the ignition switch to ON.
MANUAL”.
MODE)
5) On the «OBD Menu» display screen, select
{DTC Clear}.
6) When the “Clear Diagnostic Code?” is shown on
the screen, select the [OK].
7) Turn the ignition switch to OFF and then close
the Subaru Select Monitor.
NOTE:
performed after memory clearance. Therefore,
start the engine 10 seconds or more after have
turning the ignition switch to ON.
MANUAL”.
3. GENERAL SCAN TOOL
For procedures clearing memory using the general
scan tool, refer to the general scan tool operation
manual.
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-56
Compulsory Valve Operation Check Mode

14.Compulsory Valve Operation 12) Selecting the [NO] completes the compulsory
valve operation check mode. The display will then
Check Mode return to the «Actuator ON/OFF Operation»
A: OPERATION screen.
• A list of the support data is shown in the following
1) Prepare the Subaru Select Monitor kit. <Ref. to table.
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-7, PREPARATION TOOL,
General Description.> Contents Display
2) Connect the diagnosis cable to the Subaru Se- Compulsory fuel pump relay operation Fuel Pump
lect Monitor. check
3) Connect the test mode connector (A) located un- Compulsory radiator fan relay operation Radiator Fan
der the glove box. check Relay
Compulsory air conditioning relay A/C Compressor
operation check Relay
Compulsory purge control solenoid CPC Solenoid
valve operation check
Compulsory wastegate control Wastegate
solenoid valve operation check control Solenoid
Compulsory pressure control solenoid PCV solenoid
valve operation check
(A) Compulsory drain valve operation Vent Control
check Solenoid
EN-02424
4) Connect the Subaru Select Monitor to data link NOTE:

connector located in the lower portion of the instru- • The following parts will be displayed but not
ment panel (on the driver’s side). functional.
Display
EGR Solenoid
ASV Solenoid
FICD Solenoid
AAI Solenoid
EXH. Bypass Control Permit Flag

EN-02533 MANUAL”.
CAUTION:
lect the {System Operation Check Mode}.
play screen, select the {Actuator ON/OFF Opera-
tion}.
11) Select the desired compulsory actuator on the
«Actuator ON/OFF Operation» display screen.
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-57

15.System Operation Check 3) On the «Start the Engine» display screen, start
Mode 4) Select the [NO] to end the OFF operation. The
A: OPERATION screen will return to the «Fuel Pump Control»
screen.
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-7, PREPARATION TOOL, 2. FUEL PUMP CONTROL (ON/OFF OPER-
General Description.> ATION)
2) Connect the diagnosis cable to the Subaru Se- CAUTION:
lect Monitor. After performing the Operation Check Mode,
3) Connect the Subaru Select Monitor to data link perform the Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to
connector located in the lower portion of the instru- EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-56, OPERATION, Clear
ment panel (on the driver’s side). Memory Mode.>.
play screen, select the {Fuel Pump Control}.
2) On the «Fuel Pump Control» display screen, se-
lect the {ON/OFF Operation}.
3) On the «Turn Ignition Switch ON with Engine
Stalled» display screen, select the [OK].
4) Select the [NO] to end the ON/OFF operation.
The screen will return to the «Fuel Pump Control»
screen.
EN-02533
3. IDLING IGNITION TIMING FIXED
CAUTION: CAUTION:
Do not connect any scan tools except the Sub- After performing the Operation Check Mode,
aru Select Monitor or general scan tool. perform the Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to
4) Turn the ignition switch to ON (engine OFF) and EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-56, OPERATION, Clear
run the Subaru Select Monitor. Memory Mode.>.
5) On the «Main Menu» display screen, select 1) On the «System Operation Check Mode» dis-
{Each System Check}. play screen, select {Idling Ignition Timing Fixed}.
6) On the «System Selection Menu» display 2) On the «Start the Engine» display screen, start
screen, select {Engine Control System}. the engine and select the [OK].
7) Select the [OK] after the information of engine 3) Select the [NO] to end the idle ignition timing
type has been displayed. fixed. The screen will return to the «System Opera-
8) On the «Engine Diagnosis» display screen, se- tion Check Mode» screen.
lect {System Operation Check Mode}.
9) The following items will be displayed on screen. 4. IDLE SPEED CONTROL
Display CAUTION:
Fuel Pump Control After performing the Operation Check Mode,
Idling Ignition Timing Fixed perform the Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to
Idle Speed Control
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-56, OPERATION, Clear
Memory Mode.>.
Injector Control
play screen, select {Idle Speed Control}.
1. FUEL PUMP CONTROL (OFF OPERA-
TION) the engine and select the [OK].
CAUTION: 3) In the «Idle Speed Control» screen, select the
After performing the Operation Check Mode, [ ] or the [ ] to change the setting values, then
perform the Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to select the [OK].
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-56, OPERATION, Clear Setting is possible in a range between 500 rpm —
Memory Mode.>. 2000 rpm, in increments of 50 rpm. However, the
1) On the «System Operation Check Mode» dis- engine speed that can actually be controlled will
play screen, select {Fuel Pump Control}. vary depending on the vehicle.
2) On the «Fuel Pump Control» display screen, se-
lect {OFF Operation}.
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-58

4) Select the [NO] to end the idle engine speed

control. The screen will return to the «System Op-
eration Check Mode» screen.
5. INJECTOR CONTROL (INJECTION STOP
MODE)
CAUTION:
Memory Mode.>.
{Injection Stop Mode}.
3) Select the desired injector number in the «Injec-
tion Stop Mode» screen, and select the [OK].
5) Select the [NO] to end the injection stop mode.
The screen will return to the «Injector Control»
screen.
6. INJECTOR CONTROL (INJECTION
QUANTITY CONTROL)
CAUTION:
Memory Mode.>.
{Injection Quantity Control}.
4) In the «Injection Quantity Control» screen, select
the [ ] or the [ ] to change the setting values,
then select the [OK].
Setting is possible in a range between 0 — 20%, in
increments of 1%.
5) Select the [NO] to end the injection quantity con-
trol. The screen will return to the «Injector Control»
screen.
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-59

16.Malfunction Indicator Light

A: PROCEDURE
1. Activation of malfunction indicator light. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-61, ACTIVATION OF MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT,
Malfunction Indicator Light.>
↓
2. Malfunction indicator light does not come on. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-62, MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT
COME ON, Malfunction Indicator Light.>
↓
3. Malfunction indicator light does not go off. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-64, MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT
GO OFF, Malfunction Indicator Light.>
↓
4. Malfunction indicator light does not blink. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-65, MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT
BLINK, Malfunction Indicator Light.>
↓
5. Malfunction indicator light keep blinking. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-67, MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT REMAINS
BLINKING, Malfunction Indicator Light.>
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-60

B: ACTIVATION OF MALFUNCTION 3) Turn the ignition switch to OFF and connect the
INDICATOR LIGHT test mode connector.
(1) When the ignition switch is turned to ON
1) When the ignition switch is turned to ON (engine (engine OFF), the malfunction indicator light il-
OFF), the malfunction indicator light (A) in the com- luminates.
bination meter illuminates. (2) After the engine starts, malfunction indicator
NOTE: light blinks in a cycle of 0.5 Hz. (During diagno-
If the malfunction indicator light does not illuminate, sis)
perform diagnostics of the CHECK ENGINE light (3) Malfunction indicator light blinks at a cycle of
circuit or the combination meter circuit. <Ref. to 3 Hz after diagnosis if there is no trouble. Mal-
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-62, MALFUNCTION INDICA- function indicator light illuminates if faulty.
TOR LIGHT DOES NOT COME ON, Malfunction
Indicator Light.> (1)
(2)
(4)
(3)
EN-01681
(A) EN-05079
(1) ON
(2) OFF
2) After starting the engine, the malfunction indica-
tor light goes out. If it does not go off, either the en-
gine or emission control system has malfunction. (4) 1 second
(1)
(3)
(4)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
EN-01679
(1) No DTC
(2) Trouble occurs
(3) ON
(4) OFF
(6) Engine start
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-61

C: MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT COME ON

DIAGNOSIS:
The malfunction indicator light circuit is open or shorted.
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
When the ignition switch is turned to ON (engine OFF), malfunction indicator light does not come on.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B72 IGNITION SWITCH BATTERY

No.5 SBF-6 MAIN SBF
6 3
E
3
16
COMBINATION METER
i10
i3
8
B38
11
ECM
B136
i10 B72 B38 B136
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 4 5 6 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-04937
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-62

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL OF ECM. Is the voltage less than 1 V? Go to step 4. Go to step 2.
chassis ground.
2 CHECK POOR CONTACT. Does the malfunction indicator Repair poor con- Go to step 3.
Check for poor connection by shaking or pulling light illuminate? tact of the ECM
ECM connector and harness. connector.
3 CHECK ECM CONNECTOR. Is the ECM connector correctly Replace the ECM. Repair the connec-
Check the connection of ECM connector. connected? <Ref. to tion of ECM con-
FU(H4DOTC)-44, nector.
Engine Control
Module (ECM).>
4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN COMBINA- Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 5. Repair the harness
TION METER AND ECM CONNECTOR. and connector.
2) Remove the combination meter. <Ref. to In this case, repair
IDI-19, Combination Meter.> the following item:
3) Disconnect the connector from the ECM • Open circuit of
and combination meter. harness between
4) Measure the resistance of harness between ECM and combi-
ECM and combination meter connector. nation meter con-
Connector & terminal nector
(B136) No. 11 — (i10) No. 16: • Poor contact of
coupling connector
5 CHECK POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact in combi- Repair the poor Go to step 6.
Check poor contact of combination meter con- nation meter connector? contact of combi-
nector. nation meter con-
nector.
6 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN COMBINA- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Replace the com- Check the follow-
TION METER AND IGNITION SWITCH CON- bination meter cir- ing item and repair
NECTOR. cuit board. <Ref. to if necessary.
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. IDI-19, Combina- NOTE:
2) Measure the voltage between combination tion Meter.> • Blown out of fuse
meter connector and chassis ground. • Open or short
Connector & terminal circuit of harness
(i10) No. 3 (+) — Chassis ground (–): between fuse and
battery terminal
• Poor contact of
ignition switch con-
nector
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-63

D: MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT GO OFF

DIAGNOSIS:
The malfunction indicator light circuit is shorted.
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Although malfunction indicator light illuminates when the engine runs, DTC is not shown on the Subaru Se-
lect Monitor display.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

No.5 SBF-6 MAIN SBF
6 3
E
3
16
COMBINATION METER
i10
i3
8
B38
11
ECM
B136
i10 B72 B38 B136
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 4 5 6 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-04937
Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN COMBINA- Does the malfunction indicator Repair the short Replace the ECM.
TION METER AND ECM. light illuminate? circuit of harness <Ref. to
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. between combina- FU(H4DOTC)-44,
2) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM. tion meter and Engine Control
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. ECM connector. Module (ECM).>
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-64

E: MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT BLINK

DIAGNOSIS:
• The malfunction indicator light circuit is open or shorted.
• Test mode connector circuit is open.
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Malfunction indicator light does not blink during Inspection Mode.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
IGNITION
B72 SWITCH BATTERY
No.5 SBF-6 MAIN SBF

6 3
3
16

COMBINATION * ARRANGEMENT
METER
i10 1 1
i3 *
B76 *
8
B75
B38 B122
B27
C11
C6
B: B135 C: B136 ECM
B75 B76 B72 B: B135 C: B136
1 1 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6
2 2 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
i10 B38 B122
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 5 6 7 8
EN-05080
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-65

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK STATUS OF MALFUNCTION INDI- Does the malfunction indicator Go to step 2. Repair the mal-
CATOR LIGHT. light illuminate? function indicator
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. light circuit. <Ref.
2) Disconnect the test mode connector. to
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. (engine OFF) EN(H4DOTC)(diag
)-62, MALFUNC-
TION INDICATOR
LIGHT DOES NOT
COME ON, Mal-
function Indicator
Light.>
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Does the malfunction indicator Repair the ground Go to step 3.
COMBINATION METER CONNECTOR. light illuminate? short circuit of har-
2) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM. ECM and combi-
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. nation meter con-
nector.
3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TEST MODE Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 4. Repair the harness
CONNECTOR AND CHASSIS GROUND. and connector.
test mode connector and chassis ground. • Open circuit of
(B76) No. 1 — Chassis ground: ECM and test
mode connector
• Poor contact of
joint connector
4 CHECK POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact in ECM Repair poor con- Go to step 5.
Check for poor contact of the ECM connector. connector? tact of the ECM
connector.
TEST MODE CONNECTOR. circuit of harness
1) Connect the test mode connector. between ECM and
2) Measure the resistance of harness between test mode connec-
ECM and chassis ground. tor.
6 CHECK POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact in ECM Repair poor con- Replace the ECM.
Check for poor contact of the ECM connector. connector? tact of the ECM <Ref. to
connector. FU(H4DOTC)-44,
Engine Control
Module (ECM).>
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-66

F: MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT REMAINS BLINKING

DIAGNOSIS:
Test mode connector circuit is shorted.
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Malfunction indicator light blinks when test mode connector is not connected.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
IGNITION
B72 SWITCH BATTERY
No.5 SBF-6 MAIN SBF

6 3
3
16

COMBINATION * ARRANGEMENT
METER
i10 1 1
i3 *
B76 *
8
B75
B38 B122
B27
C11
C6
B: B135 C: B136 ECM
B75 B76 B72 B: B135 C: B136
1 1 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6
2 2 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
i10 B38 B122
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 5 6 7 8
EN-05080
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-67

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK TEST MODE CONNECTOR. Does the malfunction indicator Go to step 2. System is normal.
1) Disconnect the test mode connector. light blink? NOTE:
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. Malfunction indica-
tor light blinks at a
cycle of 3 Hz when
test mode connec-
tor is connected.
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 5 Ω? Repair the short Replace the ECM.
CHASSIS GROUND TERMINAL. circuit of harness <Ref. to
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. between ECM and FU(H4DOTC)-44,
2) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM. test mode connec- Engine Control
3) Measure the resistance of harness between tor. Module (ECM).>
ECM and chassis ground.
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-68

17.Diagnostics for Engine Starting Failure

A: PROCEDURE
1. Check for fuel amount.
↓
2. Inspection of starter motor circuit. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-70, STARTER MOTOR CIRCUIT, Diagnostics for Engine Start-
ing Failure.>
↓
3. Inspection of ECM power supply and ground line. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-74, CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND
LINE OF ENGINE CONTROL MODULE (ECM), Diagnostics for Engine Starting Failure.>
↓
4. Inspection of ignition control system. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-76, IGNITION CONTROL SYSTEM, Diagnostics for Engine
Starting Failure.>
↓
5. Inspection of fuel pump circuit. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-78, FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT, Diagnostics for Engine Starting Fail-
ure.>
↓
6. Inspection of fuel injector circuit. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-79, FUEL INJECTOR CIRCUIT, Diagnostics for Engine Starting
Failure.>
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-69

B: STARTER MOTOR CIRCUIT

CAUTION:
After repairing or replacing the defective part, perform the Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-56, OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.> and Inspection Mode <Ref. to
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-45, PROCEDURE, Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
IGNITION
B72
SWITCH
BATTERY
SBF-6 MAIN SBF
3
2
No.21
MT
AT
E
15
13
4
2
INHIBITOR CLUTCH
RELAY SWITCH STARTER
B226 RELAY
B106 STARTER MOTOR
B225
2
16
14
1
3
AT
MT
M
B14
20
31
32
19
TCM ECM
B55 B136
B106 B72 B225 B136
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 1 2 3 1 2 9 13 17 21
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
2 4 5 6 3 4 10 14 18 22
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
11 12 15 16 19 20 23 24
5 6 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
B226 B55 7 8 25 29 33 37
26 30 34 38
1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 27 28 31 32 35 36 39 40
3 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
4 19 20 21 22 23 24
EN-05378
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-70

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK BATTERY. Is the voltage 12 V or more? Go to step 2. Charge or replace
Check the battery voltage. the battery.
2 CHECK OPERATION OF STARTER MOTOR. Does the starter motor oper- Go to step 3. Go to step 4.
ate?
3 CHECK DTC. Is DTC displayed? <Ref. to Check the appro- The circuit has
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-44, priate DTC using returned to a nor-
OPERATION, Read Diagnostic the List of Diagnos- mal condition at
Trouble Code (DTC).> tic Trouble Code this time. Repro-
(DTC). <Ref. to duce the failure,
EN(H4DOTC)(diag and then perform
)-81, List of Diag- the diagnosis
nostic Trouble again.
Code (DTC).> NOTE:
In this case, tem-
porary poor con-
tact of connector
may be the cause.
4 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL FOR STARTER MO- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Check the starter Go to step 5.
TOR. motor. <Ref. to
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. SC(H4SO)-6,
2) Disconnect the connector from starter Starter.>
motor.
3) On AT models, set the select lever to the “P”
or “N” range, and on MT models, depress the
clutch pedal.
5) Measure the voltage between the starter
motor connector and the engine ground.
(B14) No. 1 (+) — Engine ground (–):
5 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL FOR STARTER MO- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Repair the open Go to step 6.
TOR. circuit of the har-
1) On AT models, set the select lever to the “P” ness between
or “N” range, and on MT models, depress the starter relay con-
clutch pedal. nector and starter
2) Turn the ignition switch to START. motor.
3) Measure the voltage between starter relay
connector and chassis ground.
6 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN BATTERY Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 7. Check the follow-
AND IGNITION SWITCH CONNECTOR. ing item and repair
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. if necessary.
2) Disconnect the connector from ignition • Blown out of fuse
switch. • Open or ground
3) Measure the voltage between ignition short circuit of har-
switch connector and chassis ground. ness between igni-
Connector & terminal tion switch
(B72) No. 3 (+) — Chassis ground (–): connector and bat-
tery
7 CHECK IGNITION SWITCH. Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 8. Replace the igni-
Measure the resistance between ignition switch tion switch. <Ref.
terminals after turning the ignition switch to to SL-47,
START position. REPLACEMENT,
Terminals Ignition Key Lock.>
No. 2 — No. 3:
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-71

Step Check Yes No

8 CHECK INPUT VOLTAGE OF STARTER RE- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 9. Repair open circuit
LAY. of harness
1) Remove the starter relay. between starter
2) Connect the connector to ignition switch. relay connector
3) Turn the ignition switch to START. and ignition switch
4) Measure the voltage between starter relay connector.
9 CHECK STARTER RELAY. Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 10. Replace the starter
1) Connect the battery to starter relay termi- relay.
2) Measure the resistance between starter
relay terminals.
Terminals
No. 13 — No. 14:
STARTER RELAY CONNECTOR. circuit of harness
2) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM. starter relay con-
ECM and starter relay connector.
(B136) No. 20 — (B225) No. 16:
11 CHECK TRANSMISSION TYPE. Is the transmission type AT? Go to step 16. Go to step 12.
12 CHECK INPUT VOLTAGE OF STARTER RE- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 13. Go to step 14.
LAY.
1) Depress the clutch pedal.
13 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Check the ECM Repair the open
CLUTCH SWITCH CONNECTOR. power supply and circuit of harness
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ground line. <Ref. between ECM and
2) Disconnect the clutch switch connector. to clutch switch con-
3) Measure the resistance of harness between EN(H4DOTC)(diag nector.
ECM and clutch switch connector. )-74, CHECK
Connector & terminal POWER SUPPLY
(B136) No. 32 — (B106) No. 2: AND GROUND
LINE OF ENGINE
CONTROL MOD-
ULE (ECM), Diag-
nostics for Engine
Starting Failure.>
14 CHECK INPUT VOLTAGE OF CLUTCH Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 15. Check the follow-
SWITCH. ing item and repair
2) Disconnect the clutch switch connector. • Blown out of fuse
3) Turn the ignition switch to START. • Open or ground
4) Measure the voltage between the clutch short circuit of har-
switch connector and chassis ground. ness between igni-
(B106) No. 1 (+) — Chassis ground (–): connector and
clutch switch con-
nector
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-72

Step Check Yes No

15 CHECK CLUTCH SWITCH. Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Repair the open Replace the clutch
Measure the resistance between clutch switch circuit of harness switch. <Ref. to
terminals while depressing the clutch pedal. between clutch CL-35, Clutch
Terminals switch connector Switch.>
No. 1 — No. 2: and starter relay
connector.
16 CHECK INPUT VOLTAGE OF STARTER RE- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 17. Go to step 18.
LAY.
1) Place the select lever in the “P” or “N” range.
17 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND IN- Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Check the ECM Repair the open
HIBITOR RELAY CONNECTOR. power supply and circuit of harness
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ground line. <Ref. between ECM and
2) Disconnect the inhibitor relay connector. to inhibitor relay con-
3) Measure the resistance of harness between EN(H4DOTC)(diag nector.
ECM and inhibitor relay connector. )-74, CHECK
Connector & terminal POWER SUPPLY
(B136) No. 31 — (B226) No. 1: AND GROUND
(B136) No. 32 — (B226) No. 3: LINE OF ENGINE
CONTROL MOD-
ULE (ECM), Diag-
nostics for Engine
Starting Failure.>
18 CHECK INPUT VOLTAGE OF INHIBITOR RE- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 19. Check the follow-
LAY. ing item and repair
2) Disconnect the inhibitor relay connector. • Blown out of fuse
3) Turn the ignition switch to START. • Open or ground
4) Measure the voltage between inhibitor relay short circuit of har-
connector and chassis ground. ness between igni-
(B226) No. 2 (+) — Chassis ground (–): connector and
(B226) No. 4 (+) — Chassis ground (–): inhibitor relay con-
nector
19 CHECK INHIBITOR RELAY. Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 20. Replace the inhibi-
1) Connect the battery to inhibitor relay termi- tor relay.
2) Measure the resistance between inhibitor
relay terminals.
Terminals
No. 3 — No. 4:
20 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN INHIBITOR Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Repair the open Repair the open
RELAY CONNECTOR AND STARTER RE- circuit of harness circuit of harness
LAY CONNECTOR. between TCM and between inhibitor
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. inhibitor relay con- relay connector
2) Measure the resistance of harness between nector. and starter relay
inhibitor relay connector and starter relay con- connector.
nector.
(B226) No. 3 — (B225) No. 15:
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-73

C: CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND LINE OF ENGINE CONTROL

MODULE (ECM)
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY
3 TO OXYGEN SENSOR SBF-5

5
SBF-7
6
4
No.13
2
1
6 3
C23
B19
B5
B2
A7
A: B134
B: B135
ECM E
C: B136
D: B137
D1
D2
A5
D3
D7
B21
34
35
36
37
54
E2
B72 B47 B21 A: B134 B: B135
1 2 3 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
4 5 6 3 4 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
5 6 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54 C: B136 D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-04940
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-74

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK MAIN RELAY. Is the resistance less than 10 Go to step 2. Replace the main
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. Ω? relay. <Ref. to
2) Remove the main relay. EN(H4DOTC)(diag
3) Connect the battery to main relay terminals )-8, Electrical
No. 1 and No. 2. Component Loca-
4) Measure the resistance between main relay tion.>
terminals.
Terminals
No. 3 — No. 5:
No. 4 — No. 6:
2 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR ECM. Is the resistance less than 5 Ω? Go to step 3. Repair the open
1) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM. circuit of harness
2) Measure the resistance of harness between between the ECM
ECM and chassis ground. and engine ground
Connector & terminal terminal.
Measure the voltage between ECM and chassis ground short circuit
ground. of power supply
Connector & terminal circuit.
5 CHECK INPUT VOLTAGE OF MAIN RELAY. Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 6. Repair the open or
Measure the voltage between main relay con- ground short circuit
nector and chassis ground. of harness of
Connector & terminal power supply cir-
(B47) No. 2 (+) — Chassis ground (–): cuit.
6 CHECK INPUT VOLTAGE OF ECM. Is the voltage 10 V or more? Check ignition con- Repair the open or
1) Connect the main relay connector. trol system. <Ref. ground short circuit
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. to of harness
3) Measure the voltage between ECM and EN(H4DOTC)(diag between ECM and
chassis ground. )-76, IGNITION main relay connec-
Connector & terminal CONTROL SYS- tor.
(B134) No. 7 (+) — Chassis ground (–): TEM, Diagnostics
(B135) No. 2 (+) — Chassis ground (–): for Engine Starting
Failure.>
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-75

D: IGNITION CONTROL SYSTEM

CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B137 ECM
18
20
19
21
26
6
IGNITION
SWITCH
MAIN SBF SBF-6 No.12
3 6
B72
E
B21
49
16
17
18
19
53
E2
E31 E32 E33 E34

3
IGNITION IGNITION IGNITION IGNITION

COIL No.1 COIL No.2 COIL No.3 COIL No.4
E31 B21 B72 B137

E32
1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
E33 4 5 6
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
E34 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
26 27 28 29 30 31
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
1 42 43 44 45 46 47
2 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
3
EN-05082
Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK SPARK PLUG CONDITION. Is the spark plug condition nor- Go to step 2. Replace the spark
1) Remove the spark plug. <Ref. to mal? plug. <Ref. to
IG(H4DOTC)-4, REMOVAL, Spark Plug.> IG(H4DOTC)-4,
2) Check the spark plug condition. <Ref. to Spark Plug.>
IG(H4DOTC)-5, INSPECTION, Spark Plug.>
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-76

Step Check Yes No

2 CHECK IGNITION SYSTEM FOR SPARKS. Does spark occur at each cylin- Check fuel pump Go to step 3.
1) Connect the spark plug to ignition coil. der? system. <Ref. to
2) Release the fuel pressure. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag
FU(H4DOTC)-49, RELEASING OF FUEL )-78, FUEL PUMP
PRESSURE, PROCEDURE, Fuel.> CIRCUIT, Diag-
3) Contact the spark plug thread portion to nostics for Engine
engine. Starting Failure.>
4) While opening the throttle valve fully, crank
the engine to check that spark occurs at each
cylinder.
3 CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR IG- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 4. Repair the harness
NITION COIL. and connector.
2) Disconnect the connector from ignition coil. In this case, repair
ignition coil connector and engine ground. harness between
Connector & terminal ignition coil and ig-
(E31) No. 3 (+) — Engine ground (–): nition switch con-
(E32) No. 3 (+) — Engine ground (–): nector
(E33) No. 3 (+) — Engine ground (–): • Poor contact of
(E34) No. 3 (+) — Engine ground (–): coupling connector
4 CHECK HARNESS OF IGNITION COIL Is the resistance less than 5 Ω? Go to step 5. Repair the harness
GROUND CIRCUIT. and connector.
2) Measure the resistance between ECM and In this case, repair
ignition coil connector. the following item:
Connector & terminal Open circuit of har-
(E31) No. 2 — (B137) No. 6: ness between the
(E32) No. 2 — (B137) No. 6: ECM and ignition
(E33) No. 2 — (B137) No. 6: coil connector
(E34) No. 2 — (B137) No. 6:
(E31) No. 2 — (B137) No. 26:
(E32) No. 2 — (B137) No. 26:
(E33) No. 2 — (B137) No. 26:
(E34) No. 2 — (B137) No. 26:
5 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND IG- Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 6. Repair the harness
NITION COIL CONNECTOR. and connector.
2) Disconnect the connector from ECM and In this case, repair
ignition coil. the following item:
the ECM and ignition coil connector. harness between
Connector & terminal the ECM and igni-
(B137) No. 18 — (E31) No. 1: tion coil connector
(B137) No. 20 — (E33) No. 1: coupling connector
(B137) No. 21 — (E34) No. 1:
6 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND IG- Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 7. Repair the ground
NITION COIL CONNECTOR. more? short circuit of har-
Measure the resistance of harness between ness between the
ECM and engine ground. ECM and ignition
Connector & terminal coil connector.
7 CHECK POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact in ECM Repair poor con- Replace the igni-
Check for poor contact of the ECM connector. connector? tact of the ECM tion coil.
connector.
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-77

E: FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT

CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
BATTERY
No.11
2 1
FUEL PUMP
RELAY B362
B97
20
7
R1
10
FUEL PUMP
CONTROL UNIT
R122
5
9
8
7
R46 R1
19
3
R67 B97
B33
C12
5
FUEL
ECM
PUMP E
R58 M B: B135
C: B136
B362 R58 R122 B: B135 C: B136
3 1 2 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
4
5 6 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
5 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
7 8
6
R67 B97
1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
3 4 5 6 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
EN-05083
Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK OPERATING SOUND OF FUEL Does the fuel pump emit oper- Check the fuel Display the DTC.
PUMP. ating sound? injector circuit. <Ref. to
Make sure that the fuel pump operates for two <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag
seconds when turning the ignition switch to ON. EN(H4DOTC)(diag )-44, OPERA-
NOTE: )-79, FUEL INJEC- TION, Read Diag-
Fuel pump operation can be executed using the TOR CIRCUIT, nostic Trouble
Subaru Select Monitor. Diagnostics for Code (DTC).>
Regarding the procedures, refer to “Compulso- Engine Starting
ry Valve Operation Check Mode”. <Ref. to Failure.>
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-78

F: FUEL INJECTOR CIRCUIT

CAUTION:
• Check or repair only faulty parts.
• After repairing or replacing the defective part, perform the Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY
5
BATTERY
3
SBF-7
6
4
2
1
B47 B137 ECM
11
10
8
B21
45
44
48
42
43
E2
E5 E16 E6 E17
2
2
1
2
#1 #2 #3 #4
FUEL INJECTOR
E5 E6 B21 B47 B137
E16 E17 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 3 4 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
1 2 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
5 6 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
26 27 28 29 30 31
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
EN-04943
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-79

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK OPERATION OF EACH FUEL INJEC- Does the fuel injector emit Check the fuel Go to step 2.
TOR. operating sound? pressure. <Ref. to
While cranking the engine, check each fuel ME(H4DOTC)-25,
injector emits operating sound. Use a sound INSPECTION,
scope or attach a screwdriver to the injector for Fuel Pressure.>
this check.
2 CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO EACH FUEL IN- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 3. Repair the harness
JECTOR. and connector.
2) Disconnect the connector from fuel injector. In this case, repair
fuel injector terminal and engine ground. harness between
Connector & terminal main relay and fuel
#1 (E5) No. 2 (+) — Engine ground (–): injector connector
#2 (E16) No. 2 (+) — Engine ground (–): • Poor contact of
#3 (E6) No. 2 (+) — Engine ground (–): main relay connec-
#4 (E17) No. 2 (+) — Engine ground (–): tor
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
• Poor contact of
fuel injector con-
nector
FUEL INJECTOR CONNECTOR. and connector.
ECM and fuel injector connector. the following item:
(B137) No. 9 — (E16) No. 1: ECM and fuel in-
(B137) No. 10 — (E6) No. 1: jector connector
coupling connector
FUEL INJECTOR CONNECTOR. more? short circuit of har-
Measure the resistance of harness between ness between
ECM and chassis ground. ECM and fuel
Connector & terminal injector connector.
5 CHECK EACH FUEL INJECTOR. Is the resistance between 5 — Go to step 6. Replace the faulty
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 20 Ω? fuel injector.
2) Measure the resistance between each fuel
injector terminals.
Terminals
No. 1 — No. 2:
6 CHECK POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact in ECM Repair poor con- Inspection using
Check for poor contact of the ECM connector. connector? tact of the ECM “General Diagnos-
connector. tic Table” <Ref. to
EN(H4DOTC)(diag
)-380, INSPEC-
TION, General
Diagnostic Table.>
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-80

18.List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)

A: LIST
DTC Item Reference
P0011 Intake Camshaft Position - Timing <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-89, DTC P0011 INTAKE CAMSHAFT POSI-
Over-Advanced Or System TION - TIMING OVER-ADVANCED OR SYSTEM PERFORMANCE (BANK
Performance (Bank 1) 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0016 Crankshaft Position - Camshaft <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-90, DTC P0016 CRANKSHAFT POSITION —
Position Correlation (Bank 1) CAMSHAFT POSITION CORRELATION (BANK 1), Diagnostic Procedure
P0018 Crankshaft Position - Camshaft <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-91, DTC P0018 CRANKSHAFT POSITION —
Position Correlation (Bank 2) CAMSHAFT POSITION CORRELATION (BANK 2), Diagnostic Procedure
P0021 Intake Camshaft Position - Timing <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-92, DTC P0021 INTAKE CAMSHAFT POSI-
Over-Advanced or System TION - TIMING OVER-ADVANCED OR SYSTEM PERFORMANCE (BANK
Performance (Bank 2) 2), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0030 HO2S Heater Control Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-93, DTC P0030 HO2S HEATER CONTROL
(Bank 1 Sensor 1) CIRCUIT (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
P0031 HO2S Heater Control Circuit Low <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-95, DTC P0031 HO2S HEATER CONTROL
(Bank 1 Sensor 1) CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
P0032 HO2S Heater Control Circuit High <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-97, DTC P0032 HO2S HEATER CONTROL
(Bank 1 Sensor 1) CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
P0037 HO2S Heater Control Circuit Low <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-99, DTC P0037 HO2S HEATER CONTROL
(Bank 1 Sensor 2) CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1 SENSOR 2), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
P0038 HO2S Heater Control Circuit High <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-101, DTC P0038 HO2S HEATER CONTROL
(Bank 1 Sensor 2) CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 1 SENSOR 2), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
P0068 MAP/MAF - Throttle Position <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-103, DTC P0068 MAP/MAF - THROTTLE
Correlation POSITION CORRELATION, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P0101 Mass or Volume Air Flow Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-105, DTC P0101 MASS OR VOLUME AIR
Range/Performance FLOW CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with
Low Input FLOW CIRCUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
High Input FLOW CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P0107 Manifold Absolute Pressure/ <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-111, DTC P0107 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE
Barometric Pressure Circuit Low PRESSURE/BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic
Input Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0108 Manifold Absolute Pressure/ <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-113, DTC P0108 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE
Barometric Pressure Circuit High PRESSURE/BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic
Input Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0111 Intake Air Temperature Sensor 1 <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-115, DTC P0111 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE
Circuit Range/Performance SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with
Circuit Low SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-81

DTC Item Reference

Circuit High SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P0117 Engine Coolant Temperature <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-121, DTC P0117 ENGINE COOLANT TEM-
Circuit Low PERATURE CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P0118 Engine Coolant Temperature <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-123, DTC P0118 ENGINE COOLANT TEM-
Circuit High PERATURE CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P0122 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/ <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-125, DTC P0122 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSI-
Switch “A” Circuit Low TION SENSOR/SWITCH “A” CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Procedure with
Switch “A” Circuit High TION SENSOR/SWITCH “A” CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Procedure with
P0125 Insufficient Coolant Temperature <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-129, DTC P0125 INSUFFICIENT COOLANT
for Closed Loop Fuel Control TEMPERATURE FOR CLOSED LOOP FUEL CONTROL, Diagnostic Proce-
P0126 Insufficient Engine Coolant <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-130, DTC P0126 INSUFFICIENT ENGINE
Temperature for Stable Operation COOLANT TEMPERATURE FOR STABLE OPERATION, Diagnostic Proce-
P0128 Coolant Thermostat <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-131, DTC P0128 COOLANT THERMOSTAT
(Engine Coolant Temperature (ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE BELOW THERMOSTAT REGULAT-
Below Thermostat Regulating ING TEMPERATURE), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
Temperature) (DTC).>
P0131 O2 Sensor Circuit Low Voltage <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-132, DTC P0131 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW
ble Code (DTC).>
P0132 O2 Sensor Circuit High Voltage <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-134, DTC P0132 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH
ble Code (DTC).>
P0133 O2 Sensor Circuit Slow Response <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-136, DTC P0133 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT SLOW
P0134 O2 Sensor Circuit No Activity <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-138, DTC P0134 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT NO
Detected (Bank 1 Sensor 1) ACTIVITY DETECTED (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Procedure with
P0137 O2 Sensor Circuit Low Voltage <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-140, DTC P0137 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW
ble Code (DTC).>
P0138 O2 Sensor Circuit High Voltage <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-142, DTC P0138 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH
ble Code (DTC).>
P0139 O2 Sensor Circuit Slow Response <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-144, DTC P0139 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT SLOW
P0140 O2 Sensor Circuit No Activity <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-146, DTC P0140 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT NO
Detected (Bank1 Sensor2) ACTIVITY DETECTED (BANK 1 SENSOR 2), Diagnostic Procedure with
P0171 System Too Lean (Bank 1) <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-148, DTC P0171 SYSTEM TOO LEAN (BANK
1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0172 System Too Rich (Bank 1) <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-149, DTC P0172 SYSTEM TOO RICH (BANK
1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0181 Fuel Temperature Sensor “A” <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-152, DTC P0181 FUEL TEMPERATURE SEN-
Circuit Range/Performance SOR “A” CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-82

DTC Item Reference

Circuit Low Input SOR “A” CIRCUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
Circuit High Input SOR “A” CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
Switch “B” Circuit Low TION SENSOR/SWITCH “B” CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Procedure with
Switch “B” Circuit High TION SENSOR/SWITCH “B” CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Procedure with
P0230 Fuel Pump Primary Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-162, DTC P0230 FUEL PUMP PRIMARY CIR-
CUIT, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0244 Turbo/Super Charger Wastegate <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-165, DTC P0244 TURBO/SUPER CHARGER
Solenoid “A” Range/Performance WASTEGATE SOLENOID “A” RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Proce-
Solenoid “A” Low WASTEGATE SOLENOID “A” LOW, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
Solenoid “A” High WASTEGATE SOLENOID “A” HIGH, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
P0301 Cylinder 1 Misfire Detected <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-170, DTC P0301 CYLINDER 1 MISFIRE
P0327 Knock Sensor 1 Circuit Low <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-177, DTC P0327 KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT
(Bank 1 or Single Sensor) LOW (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnos-
P0328 Knock Sensor 1 Circuit High <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-179, DTC P0328 KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT
(Bank 1 or Single Sensor) HIGH (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnos-
P0335 Crankshaft Position Sensor “A” <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-181, DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION
Circuit SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
P0336 Crankshaft Position Sensor “A” <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-183, DTC P0336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION
Circuit Range/Performance SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure
P0340 Camshaft Position Sensor “A” <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-185, DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SEN-
Circuit (Bank 1 or Single Sensor) SOR “A” CIRCUIT (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR), Diagnostic Procedure
P0345 Camshaft Position Sensor “A” <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-187, DTC P0345 CAMSHAFT POSITION SEN-
Circuit (Bank 2) SOR “A” CIRCUIT (BANK 2), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P0410 Secondary Air Injection System <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-189, DTC P0410 SECONDARY AIR INJEC-
TION SYSTEM, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
Incorrect Flow Detected TION SYSTEM INCORRECT FLOW DETECTED, Diagnostic Procedure with
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-83

DTC Item Reference

Switching Valve “A” Circuit Open TION SYSTEM SWITCHING VALVE “A” CIRCUIT OPEN, Diagnostic Proce-
Switching Valve “A” Circuit Shorted TION SYSTEM SWITCHING VALVE “A” CIRCUIT SHORTED, Diagnostic
Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
Switching Valve “B”Circuit Open TION SYSTEM SWITCHING VALVE “B” CIRCUIT OPEN, Diagnostic Proce-
Switching Valve “B”Circuit Shorted TION SYSTEM SWITCHING VALVE “B” CIRCUIT SHORTED, Diagnostic
Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
Control “A” Circuit Open TION SYSTEM CONTROL “A” CIRCUIT OPEN, Diagnostic Procedure with
P0420 Catalyst System Efficiency Below <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-211, DTC P0420 CATALYST SYSTEM EFFI-
Threshold (Bank 1) CIENCY BELOW THRESHOLD (BANK 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diag-
P0441 Evaporative Emission System <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-215, DTC P0441 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION
Incorrect Purge Flow SYSTEM INCORRECT PURGE FLOW, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnos-
P0442 Evaporative Emission Control <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-216, DTC P0442 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION
System Leak Detected CONTROL SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED (SMALL LEAK), Diagnostic Proce-
(Small Leak) dure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
System Vent Control Circuit Open CONTROL SYSTEM VENT CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN, Diagnostic Proce-
System Vent Control Circuit CONTROL SYSTEM VENT CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED, Diagnostic
Shorted Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
System Pressure Sensor CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR, Diagnostic Procedure with
System Pressure Sensor Low CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Proce-
System Pressure Sensor High CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Proce-
System Leak Detected (Very Small CONTROL SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED (VERY SMALL LEAK), Diagnostic
Leak) Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
System Leak Detected (Fuel Cap CONTROL SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED (FUEL CAP LOOSE/OFF), Diag-
Loose/Off) nostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
Purge Control Valve Circuit Low SYSTEM PURGE CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Procedure
Purge Control Valve Circuit High SYSTEM PURGE CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Procedure
P0461 Fuel Level Sensor “A” Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-238, DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR “A”
Range/Performance CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
P0462 Fuel Level Sensor “A” Circuit Low <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-238, DTC P0462 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR “A”
CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-84

DTC Item Reference

P0463 Fuel Level Sensor “A” Circuit High <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-239, DTC P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR “A”
CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
P0464 Fuel Level Sensor Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-239, DTC P0464 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIR-
Intermittent CUIT INTERMITTENT, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
P0483 Fan Rationality Check <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-240, DTC P0483 FAN RATIONALITY CHECK,
P0500 Vehicle Speed Sensor “A” <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-240, DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
“A”, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0506 Idle Air Control System RPM <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-241, DTC P0506 IDLE AIR CONTROL SYS-
Lower Than Expected TEM RPM LOWER THAN EXPECTED, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnos-
P0507 Idle Air Control System RPM <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-243, DTC P0507 IDLE AIR CONTROL SYS-
Higher Than Expected TEM RPM HIGHER THAN EXPECTED, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnos-
P0512 Starter Request Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-245, DTC P0512 STARTER REQUEST CIR-
CUIT, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0513 Incorrect Immobilizer Key <Ref. to IM(diag)-16, DTC P0513 INCORRECT IMMOBILIZER KEY, Diag-
P0519 Idle Air Control System <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-247, DTC P0519 IDLE AIR CONTROL SYS-
Performance TEM PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
P0600 Serial Communication Link <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-247, DTC P0600 SERIAL COMMUNICATION
LINK, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0604 Internal Control Module Random <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-248, DTC P0604 INTERNAL CONTROL MOD-
Access Memory (RAM) Error ULE RANDOM ACCESS MEMORY (RAM) ERROR, Diagnostic Procedure
P0605 Internal Control Module Read Only <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-249, DTC P0605 INTERNAL CONTROL MOD-
Memory (ROM) Error ULE READ ONLY MEMORY (ROM) ERROR, Diagnostic Procedure with
P0607 Control Module Performance <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-250, DTC P0607 CONTROL MODULE PER-
FORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0638 Throttle Actuator Control Range/ <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-251, DTC P0638 THROTTLE ACTUATOR
Performance (Bank 1) CONTROL RANGE/PERFORMANCE (BANK 1), Diagnostic Procedure with
P0691 Fan 1 Control Circuit Low <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-252, DTC P0691 FAN 1 CONTROL CIRCUIT
LOW, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0692 Fan 1 Control Circuit High <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-252, DTC P0692 FAN 1 CONTROL CIRCUIT
HIGH, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0700 Transmission Control System <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-252, DTC P0700 TRANSMISSION CONTROL
(MIL Request) SYSTEM (MIL REQUEST), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P0851 Park/Neutral Switch Input Circuit <Ref. to 5AT(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.>
Low (AT Model)
P0851 Neutral Switch Input Circuit Low <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-253, DTC P0851 NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT
(MT Model) CIRCUIT LOW (MT MODEL), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P0852 Park/Neutral Switch Input Circuit <Ref. to 5AT(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.>
High (AT Model)
P0852 Neutral Switch Input Circuit High <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-255, DTC P0852 NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT
(MT Model) CIRCUIT HIGH (MT MODEL), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P1152 O2 Sensor Circuit Range/ <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-257, DTC P1152 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT
Performance (Low) RANGE/PERFORMANCE (LOW) (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Proce-
(Bank1 Sensor1) dure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-85

DTC Item Reference

P1153 O2 Sensor Circuit Range/ <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-259, DTC P1153 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT
Performance (High) RANGE/PERFORMANCE (HIGH) (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Proce-
(Bank1 Sensor1) dure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P1160 Return Spring Failure <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-260, DTC P1160 RETURN SPRING FAILURE,
P1400 Fuel Tank Pressure Control <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-261, DTC P1400 FUEL TANK PRESSURE
Solenoid Valve Circuit Low CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Procedure with
Switching Valve Stuck Open TION SYSTEM SWITCHING VALVE STUCK OPEN, Diagnostic Procedure
Control “A” Circuit Shorted TION SYSTEM CONTROL “A” CIRCUIT SHORTED, Diagnostic Procedure
P1420 Fuel Tank Pressure Control Sol. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-269, DTC P1420 FUEL TANK PRESSURE
Valve Circuit High CONTROL SOL. VALVE CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Procedure with Diag-
P1443 Vent Control Solenoid Valve <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-271, DTC P1443 VENT CONTROL SOLENOID
Function Problem VALVE FUNCTION PROBLEM, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
P1491 Positive Crankcase Ventilation <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-273, DTC P1491 POSITIVE CRANKCASE
(Blow-by) Function Problem VENTILATION (BLOW-BY) FUNCTION PROBLEM, Diagnostic Procedure
P1518 Starter Switch Circuit Low Input <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-275, DTC P1518 STARTER SWITCH CIRCUIT
LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P1560 Back-up Voltage Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-277, DTC P1560 BACK-UP VOLTAGE CIR-
Malfunction CUIT MALFUNCTION, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
P1570 Antenna <Ref. to IM(diag)-17, DTC P1570 ANTENNA, Diagnostic Procedure with
P1571 Reference Code Incompatibility <Ref. to IM(diag)-19, DTC P1571 REFERENCE CODE INCOMPATIBILITY,
P1572 IMM Circuit Failure <Ref. to IM(diag)-20, DTC P1572 IMM CIRCUIT FAILURE (EXCEPT
(Except Antenna Circuit) ANTENNA CIRCUIT), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
P1574 Key Communication Failure <Ref. to IM(diag)-22, DTC P1574 KEY COMMUNICATION FAILURE, Diag-
P1576 EGI Control Module EEPROM <Ref. to IM(diag)-23, DTC P1576 EGI CONTROL MODULE EEPROM, Diag-
P1577 IMM Control Module EEPROM <Ref. to IM(diag)-23, DTC P1577 IMM CONTROL MODULE EEPROM,
P1578 Meter Failure <Ref. to IM(diag)-24, DTC P1578 METER FAILURE, Diagnostic Procedure
P1602 Control Module Programming Error <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-279, DTC P1602 CONTROL MODULE PRO-
GRAMMING ERROR, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
P2004 Intake Manifold Runner Control <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-288, DTC P2004 INTAKE MANIFOLD RUN-
Stuck Open (Bank 1) NER CONTROL STUCK OPEN (BANK 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diag-
Stuck Open (Bank 2) NER CONTROL STUCK OPEN (BANK 2), Diagnostic Procedure with Diag-
Stuck Closed (Bank 1) NER CONTROL STUCK CLOSED (BANK 1), Diagnostic Procedure with
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-86

DTC Item Reference

Stuck Closed (Bank 2) NER CONTROL STUCK CLOSED (BANK 2), Diagnostic Procedure with
Circuit / Open (Bank 1) NER CONTROL CIRCUIT / OPEN (BANK 1), Diagnostic Procedure with
Circuit Low (Bank 1) NER CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diag-
Circuit / Open (Bank 2) NER CONTROL CIRCUIT / OPEN (BANK 2), Diagnostic Procedure with
Circuit Low (Bank 2) NER CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 2), Diagnostic Procedure with Diag-
P2016 Intake Manifold Runner Position <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-298, DTC P2016 INTAKE MANIFOLD RUN-
Sensor / Switch Circuit Low NER POSITION SENSOR / SWITCH CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1), Diagnostic
(Bank 1) Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
Sensor / Switch Circuit High NER POSITION SENSOR / SWITCH CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 1), Diagnostic
Sensor / Switch Circuit Low NER POSITION SENSOR / SWITCH CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 2), Diagnostic
Sensor / Switch Circuit High NER POSITION SENSOR / SWITCH CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 2), Diagnostic
P2088 Intake Camshaft Position Actuator <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-306, DTC P2088 INTAKE CAMSHAFT POSI-
Control Circuit Low (Bank 1) TION ACTUATOR CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1), Diagnostic Proce-
Control Circuit High (Bank 1) TION ACTUATOR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 1), Diagnostic Proce-
Control Circuit Low (Bank 2) TION ACTUATOR CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 2), Diagnostic Proce-
Control Circuit High (Bank 2) TION ACTUATOR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 2), Diagnostic Proce-
P2096 Post Catalyst Fuel Trim System <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-314, DTC P2096 POST CATALYST FUEL TRIM
Too Lean Bank 1 SYSTEM TOO LEAN BANK 1, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P2097 Post Catalyst Fuel Trim System <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-321, DTC P2097 POST CATALYST FUEL TRIM
Too Rich Bank 1 SYSTEM TOO RICH BANK 1, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P2101 Throttle Actuator Control Motor <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-328, DTC P2101 THROTTLE ACTUATOR
Circuit Range/Performance CONTROL MOTOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Proce-
Circuit Low CONTROL MOTOR CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
Circuit High CONTROL MOTOR CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
P2109 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor “A” <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-336, DTC P2109 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSI-
Minimum Stop Performance TION SENSOR “A” MINIMUM STOP PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Proce-
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-87

DTC Item Reference

Switch “D” Circuit Low Input TION SENSOR/SWITCH “D” CIRCUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Procedure
Switch “D” Circuit High Input TION SENSOR/SWITCH “D” CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Procedure
Switch “E” Circuit Low Input TION SENSOR/SWITCH “E” CIRCUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Procedure
Switch “E” Circuit High Input TION SENSOR/SWITCH “E” CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Procedure
Switch “A”/“B” Voltage Correlation TION SENSOR/SWITCH “A”/“B” VOLTAGE CORRELATION, Diagnostic Pro-
cedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
Switch “D”/“E” Voltage Correlation TION SENSOR/SWITCH “D”/“E” VOLTAGE CORRELATION, Diagnostic Pro-
cedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
Switching Valve Control Circuit SYSTEM SWITCHING VALVE CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Proce-
Low dure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
Switching Valve Control Circuit SYSTEM SWITCHING VALVE CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Pro-
High cedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P2431 Secondary Air Injection System Air <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-354, DTC P2431 SECONDARY AIR INJEC-
Flow /Pressure Sensor Circuit TION SYSTEM AIR FLOW /PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PER-
Range/Performance FORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
Flow /Pressure Sensor Circuit Low TION SYSTEM AIR FLOW /PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnos-
tic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
Flow /Pressure Sensor Circuit High TION SYSTEM AIR FLOW /PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH, Diag-
Switching Valve Stuck Open TION SYSTEM SWITCHING VALVE STUCK OPEN (BANK1), Diagnostic
(Bank1) Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
Switching Valve Stuck Closed TION SYSTEM SWITCHING VALVE STUCK CLOSED (BANK1), Diagnostic
Switching Valve Stuck Open TION SYSTEM SWITCHING VALVE STUCK OPEN (BANK2), Diagnostic
Switching Valve Stuck Closed TION SYSTEM SWITCHING VALVE STUCK CLOSED (BANK2), Diagnostic
Pump Stuck On TION SYSTEM PUMP STUCK ON, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-88

19.Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)

A: DTC P0011 INTAKE CAMSHAFT POSITION - TIMING OVER-ADVANCED OR
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE (BANK 1)
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-10, DTC P0011 INTAKE CAMSHAFT POSITION -
TIMING OVER-ADVANCED OR SYSTEM PERFORMANCE (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) De-
tecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Engine stalls.
• Erroneous idling
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the AVCS system operating Go to step 2. Check the follow-
1) Start the engine and let it idle. angle approx. 0°? ing item and repair
2) Measure the AVCS system operating angle or replace if neces-
using the Subaru Select Monitor or general sary.
scan tool. • Oil pipe (clog)
NOTE: • Oil flow control
• Subaru Select Monitor solenoid valve
For detailed operation procedures, refer to (clog or dirt of oil
“READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE”. <Ref. routing, setting of
to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-35, Subaru Select Moni- spring)
tor.> • Intake camshaft
• General scan tool (dirt, damage of
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the camshaft)
2 CHECK CURRENT DATA. When the oil flow control sole- Check the follow- Perform the follow-
1) Drive (accelerate or decelerate) the vehicle noid valve duty output exceeds ing item and repair ing procedures,
at 80 km/h (50 MPH) or less. 10%, is the AVCS system oper- or replace if neces- and clean the oil
NOTE: ating angle approx. 0°? sary. routing.
Drive the vehicle so that duty output of the oil • Oil pipe (clog) Replace the
flow control solenoid valve increases. • Oil flow control engine oil and idle
2) Measure the AVCS system operating angle solenoid valve the engine for 5
and oil flow control solenoid valve duty output (clog or dirt of oil minutes, then
using Subaru Select Monitor or general scan routing, setting of replace the oil filter
tool. spring) and engine oil.
NOTE: • Intake camshaft <Ref. to
• Subaru Select Monitor (dirt, damage of LU(H4DOTC)-9,
For detailed operation procedures, refer to camshaft) REPLACEMENT,
“READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE”. <Ref. Engine Oil.> <Ref.
to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-35, Subaru Select Moni- to LU(H4DOTC)-
tor.> 26, Engine Oil Fil-
• General scan tool ter.>
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-89

B: DTC P0016 CRANKSHAFT POSITION — CAMSHAFT POSITION

CORRELATION (BANK 1)
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-12, DTC P0016 CRANKSHAFT POSITION — CAM-
SHAFT POSITION CORRELATION (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the AVCS system operating Perform the follow- Check the follow-
1) Start the engine and let it idle. angle approx. 0°, and oil flow ing procedures, ing item and repair
2) Measure the AVCS system operating angle control solenoid valve duty out- and clean the oil or replace if neces-
and oil flow control solenoid valve duty output put approx. 10%? routing. sary.
using Subaru Select Monitor or general scan Replace the • Oil pipe (clog)
tool. engine oil and idle • Oil flow control
NOTE: the engine for 5 solenoid valve
• Subaru Select Monitor minutes, then (clog or dirt of oil
For detailed operation procedures, refer to replace the oil filter routing, setting of
“READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE”. <Ref. and engine oil. spring)
to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-35, Subaru Select Moni- <Ref. to • Intake camshaft
tor.> LU(H4DOTC)-9, (dirt, damage of
• General scan tool REPLACEMENT, camshaft)
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the Engine Oil.> <Ref. • Timing belt
general scan tool operation manual. to LU(H4DOTC)- (matching of timing
26, Engine Oil Fil- mark)
ter.>
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-90

C: DTC P0018 CRANKSHAFT POSITION — CAMSHAFT POSITION

CORRELATION (BANK 2)
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-12, DTC P0018 CRANKSHAFT POSITION — CAM-
SHAFT POSITION CORRELATION (BANK 2), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the AVCS system operating Perform the follow- Check the follow-
1) Start the engine and let it idle. angle approx. 0°, and oil flow ing procedures, ing item and repair
2) Measure the AVCS system operating angle control solenoid valve duty out- and clean the oil or replace if neces-
and oil flow control solenoid valve duty output put approx. 10%? routing. sary.
using Subaru Select Monitor or general scan Replace the • Oil pipe (clog)
tool. engine oil and idle • Oil flow control
NOTE: the engine for 5 solenoid valve
• Subaru Select Monitor minutes, then (clog or dirt of oil
For detailed operation procedures, refer to replace the oil filter routing, setting of
“READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE”. <Ref. and engine oil. spring)
to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-35, Subaru Select Moni- <Ref. to • Intake camshaft
tor.> LU(H4DOTC)-9, (dirt, damage of
• General scan tool REPLACEMENT, camshaft)
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the Engine Oil.> <Ref. • Timing belt
general scan tool operation manual. to LU(H4DOTC)- (matching of timing
26, Engine Oil Fil- mark)
ter.>
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-91

D: DTC P0021 INTAKE CAMSHAFT POSITION - TIMING OVER-ADVANCED OR

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE (BANK 2)
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-12, DTC P0021 INTAKE CAMSHAFT POSITION -
TIMING OVER-ADVANCED OR SYSTEM PERFORMANCE (BANK 2), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) De-
tecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the AVCS system operating Go to step 2. Check the follow-
1) Start the engine and let it idle. angle approx. 0°? ing item and repair
2) Measure the AVCS system operating angle or replace if neces-
using the Subaru Select Monitor or general sary.
scan tool. • Oil pipe (clog)
NOTE: • Oil flow control
• Subaru Select Monitor solenoid valve
For detailed operation procedures, refer to (clog or dirt of oil
“READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE”. <Ref. routing, setting of
to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-35, Subaru Select Moni- spring)
tor.> • Intake camshaft
• General scan tool (dirt, damage of
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the camshaft)
2 CHECK CURRENT DATA. When the oil flow control sole- Check the follow- Perform the follow-
1) Drive (accelerate or decelerate) the vehicle noid valve duty output exceeds ing item and repair ing procedures,
at 80 km/h (50 MPH) or less. 10%, is the AVCS system oper- or replace if neces- and clean the oil
NOTE: ating angle approx. 0°? sary. routing.
Drive the vehicle so that duty output of the oil • Oil pipe (clog) Replace the
flow control solenoid valve increases. • Oil flow control engine oil and idle
2) Measure the AVCS system operating angle solenoid valve the engine for 5
and oil flow control solenoid valve duty output (clog or dirt of oil minutes, then
using Subaru Select Monitor or general scan routing, setting of replace the oil filter
tool. spring) and engine oil.
NOTE: • Intake camshaft <Ref. to
• Subaru Select Monitor (dirt, damage of LU(H4DOTC)-9,
For detailed operation procedures, refer to camshaft) REPLACEMENT,
“READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE”. <Ref. Engine Oil.> <Ref.
to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-35, Subaru Select Moni- to LU(H4DOTC)-
tor.> 26, Engine Oil Fil-
• General scan tool ter.>
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-92

E: DTC P0030 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-13, DTC P0030 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B18
1 2
BATTERY 3 4
MAIN RELAY
SBF-5 B47
5
3 1 2
3 4
6 5 6
4
2
2 B21
1
FRONT
OXYGEN (A/F)
E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
B47 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
SENSOR
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
B18
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
1
4
3
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
*
* A: B134
B138 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
B8
B9
B1
C2
C3
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
A: B134 B: B135
B: B135
ECM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
C: B136
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
D: B137 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
D1
D2
A5
D3
D7
C: B136
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
B21 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
34
35
36
37
54
E2
: TERMINAL No. OPTIONAL D: B137
* ARRANGEMENT AMONG
1, 2, 5 AND 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
E 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
B138
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
EN-05084
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-93

Step Check Yes No

1) Start and warm-up the engine. front oxygen (A/F)
2) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. sensor connector.
3) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM
and front oxygen (A/F) sensor.
ECM and front oxygen (A/F) sensor connector.
(B136) No. 3 — (B18) No. 1:
(B136) No. 2 — (B18) No. 1:
Measure the resistance of harness between front oxygen (A/F)
ECM and front oxygen (A/F) sensor connector. sensor connector.
(B135) No. 9 — (B18) No. 3:
(B135) No. 8 — (B18) No. 4:
3 CHECK FRONT OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR. Is the resistance less than 2 — Go to step 4. Replace the front
Measure the resistance between front oxygen 3 Ω? oxygen (A/F) sen-
(A/F) sensor connector terminals. sor. <Ref. to
Terminals FU(H4DOTC)-40,
Sensor.>
sensor connector. FU(H4DOTC)-40,
Front Oxygen (A/F)
Sensor.>
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-94


CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B18
1 2
BATTERY 3 4
MAIN RELAY
SBF-5 B47
5
3 1 2
3 4
6 5 6
4
2
2 B21
1
FRONT
OXYGEN (A/F)
E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
B47 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
SENSOR
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
B18
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
1
4
3
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
*
* A: B134
B138 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
B8
B9
B1
C2
C3
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
A: B134 B: B135
B: B135
ECM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
C: B136
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
D: B137 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
D1
D2
A5
D3
D7
C: B136
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
B21 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
34
35
36
37
54
E2
* ARRANGEMENT AMONG
1, 2, 5 AND 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
E 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
B138
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
EN-05084
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-95

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO FRONT OXY- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 2. Repair the power
GEN (A/F) SENSOR. supply line.
2) Disconnect the connector from front oxygen In this case, repair
(A/F) sensor. the following item:
4) Measure the voltage between front oxygen harness between
(A/F) sensor connector and engine ground. main relay and
Connector & terminal front oxygen (A/F)
(B18) No. 2 (+) — Engine ground (–): sensor connector
• Poor contact of
main relay connec-
tor
• Malfunction in
main relay
FRONT OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR. circuit of harness
2) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM. front oxygen (A/F)
3) Measure the resistance between ECM and sensor.
front oxygen (A/F) sensor connector.
(B136) No. 3 — (B18) No. 1:
(B136) No. 2 — (B18) No. 1:
• Poor contact in
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
4 CHECK FRONT OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR. Is the resistance between 2 — Repair poor con- Replace the front
Measure the resistance between front oxygen 3 Ω? tact of the ECM oxygen (A/F) sen-
(A/F) sensor connector terminals. connector. sor. <Ref. to
Sensor.>
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-96


CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B18
1 2
BATTERY 3 4
MAIN RELAY
SBF-5 B47
5
3 1 2
3 4
6 5 6
4
2
2 B21
1
FRONT
OXYGEN (A/F)
E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
B47 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
SENSOR
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
B18
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
1
4
3
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
*
* A: B134
B138 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
B8
B9
B1
C2
C3
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
A: B134 B: B135
B: B135
ECM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
C: B136
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
D: B137 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
D1
D2
A5
D3
D7
C: B136
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
B21 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
34
35
36
37
54
E2
* ARRANGEMENT AMONG
1, 2, 5 AND 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
E 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
B138
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
EN-05084
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-97

Step Check Yes No

FRONT OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR. circuit to power in
2) Measure the voltage between ECM and between the ECM
chassis ground. and front oxygen
Connector & terminal (A/F) sensor con-
(B136) No. 3 (+) — Chassis ground (–): nector.
2 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR ECM. Is the resistance less than 5 Ω? Repair the poor Repair the harness
1) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM. contact in ECM and connector.
2) Measure the resistance between ECM and connector. NOTE:
coupling connector
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-98

H: DTC P0037 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1 SENSOR 2)

CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY BATTERY B19
B47
SBF-5
5 T6
1 2
3
1 2 3 4
6 B19 3 4 5 6
2
4
T5 B83
2
1 B138
1
B47 1 2 3 4
REAR
E 5 6 7 8
OXYGEN SENSOR
B21
T6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
1
3
4
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
T5 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
1
3
4
42 43 44 45 46 47
B19 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
* 11 B83
* A: B134
* 2
2
B138 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
* 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
B30
B1
C4
B4
A: B134 B: B135
B: B135 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
ECM 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
C: B136 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
D: B137
D1
D2
A5
D3
D7
C: B136
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
B21 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
34
35
36
37
54
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
E2
: TERMINAL No.
*1 OPTIONAL ARRANGEMENT D: B137
: TERMINAL No.
*2 OPTIONAL ARRANGEMENT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
AMONG 1, 2, 5 AND 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
E 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-05085
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-99

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO REAR OXY- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 2. Repair the power
GEN SENSOR. supply line.
2) Disconnect the connector from the rear oxy- In this case, repair
gen sensor. the following item:
sensor connector and engine ground. main relay and rear
(T6) No. 2 (+) — Engine ground (–): • Poor contact of
main relay connec-
tor
• Poor contact in
coupling connector
• Malfunction in
main relay
REAR OXYGEN SENSOR. circuit of the har-
2) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM. ECM and rear oxy-
3) Measure the resistance between ECM and gen sensor.
oxygen sensor connector.
(B136) No. 4 — (T6) No. 1:
• Poor contact in
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
4 CHECK REAR OXYGEN SENSOR. Is the resistance between 5 — Repair poor con- Replace the rear
Measure the resistance between rear oxygen 7 Ω? tact of the ECM oxygen sensor.
sensor connector terminals. connector. <Ref. to
No. 1 — No. 2: Rear Oxygen Sen-
sor.>
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-100

I: DTC P0038 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 1 SENSOR 2)

CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B47
SBF-5
5 T6
1 2
3
1 2 3 4
6 B19 3 4 5 6
2
4
T5 B83
2
1 B138
1
B47 1 2 3 4
REAR
E 5 6 7 8
OXYGEN SENSOR
B21
T6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
1
3
4
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
T5 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
1
3
4
42 43 44 45 46 47
B19 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
* 11 B83
* A: B134
* 2
2
B138 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
* 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
B30
B1
C4
B4
A: B134 B: B135
B: B135 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
ECM 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
C: B136 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
D: B137
D1
D2
A5
D3
D7
C: B136
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
B21 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
34
35
36
37
54
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
E2
: TERMINAL No.
: TERMINAL No.
AMONG 1, 2, 5 AND 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
E 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-05085

Step Check Yes No

REAR OXYGEN SENSOR. circuit to power in
2) Measure the voltage between ECM and between ECM and
chassis ground. rear oxygen sensor
2 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR ECM. Is the resistance less than 5 Ω? Repair the poor Repair the harness
1) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM. contact in ECM and connector.
2) Measure the resistance between ECM and connector. NOTE:
coupling connector

J: DTC P0068 MAP/MAF - THROTTLE POSITION CORRELATION

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-23, DTC P0068 MAP/MAF - THROTTLE POSITION
CORRELATION, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MANIFOLD E21
ABSOLUTE
PRESSURE 1 2 3
SENSOR
2
1
3
E21 B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B134
E2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
21
22
9
B21 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
29
19
6
B134 ECM
EN-05086

Step Check Yes No

intake system?
2 CHECK MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE Is the measured value 73.3 — Go to step 3. Replace the mani-
SENSOR. 106.6 kPa (550 — 800 mmHg, fold absolute pres-
1) Start the engine and warm-up engine until 21.65 — 31.50 inHg) when the sure sensor. <Ref.
coolant temperature is higher than 70°C ignition is turned ON, and 20.0 to FU(H4DOTC)-
(158°F). — 46.7 kPa (150 — 350 mmHg, 32, Manifold Abso-
2) For AT models, set the select lever to the “P” 5.91 — 13.78 inHg) during lute Pressure Sen-
or “N” range, and for MT models, place the shift idling? sor.>
lever in the neutral position.
5) Read the data of intake manifold pressure
sensor signal using Subaru Select Monitor or
general scan tool.
NOTE:
to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-35, Subaru Select Moni-
tor.>
3 CHECK THROTTLE OPENING ANGLE. Is the measured value less than Go to step 4. Replace the elec-
Read the data of throttle position signal using 5% when throttle is fully tronic throttle con-
Subaru Select Monitor or general scan tool. closed? trol. <Ref. to
NOTE: FU(H4DOTC)-12,
• Subaru Select Monitor Throttle Body.>
tor.>
4 CHECK THROTTLE OPENING ANGLE. Is the measured value 85% or Replace the mani- Replace the elec-
more when throttle is fully fold absolute pres- tronic throttle con-
open? sure sensor. <Ref. trol. <Ref. to
to FU(H4DOTC)- FU(H4DOTC)-12,
32, Manifold Abso- Throttle Body.>
lute Pressure Sen-
sor.>

K: DTC P0101 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIRCUIT RANGE/

PERFORMANCE
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-25, DTC P0101 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIR-
CUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY
5 BATTERY
3
SBF-7
6
4
2
1
1
B47
MASS AIR FLOW &
INTAKE AIR
TEMPERATURE
E
SENSOR
B3
5
*
*
B83
35
26
34
30
18

* ARRANGEMENT
B135 ECM
B3 B47 B135 B83
1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5 3 4 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
5 6 7 8
5 6 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-05087

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK FOR ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY. Is any other DTC displayed? Check the appro- Replace the mass
priate DTC using air flow and intake
the “List of Diag- air temperature
nostic Trouble sensor. <Ref. to
Code (DTC)”. FU(H4DOTC)-31,
<Ref. to Mass Air Flow and
EN(H4DOTC)(diag Intake Air Temper-
)-81, List of Diag- ature Sensor.>
nostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>

L: DTC P0102 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIRCUIT LOW INPUT

CUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY
5 BATTERY
3
SBF-7
6
4
2
1
1
B47
MASS AIR FLOW &
INTAKE AIR
TEMPERATURE
E
SENSOR
B3
5
*
*
B83
35
26
34
30
18

* ARRANGEMENT
B135 ECM
B3 B47 B135 B83
1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5 3 4 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
5 6 7 8
5 6 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-05087

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the voltage less than 0.2 V? Go to step 2. Even if the mal-
to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-35, Subaru Select Moni- and then perform
tor.> the diagnosis
porary poor con-
tact of connector
may be the cause.
2 CHECK POWER SUPPLY OF MASS AIR Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 3. Repair the harness
FLOW AND INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE and connector.
SENSOR. NOTE:
2) Disconnect the connector from the mass air the following item:
flow and intake air temperature sensor. • Open circuit of
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. harness between
4) Measure the voltage between mass air flow ECM and the mass
and intake air temperature sensor connector air flow and intake
and engine ground. air temperature
(B3) No. 1 (+) — Engine ground (–): • Poor contact in
ECM connector
ECM and the mass air flow and intake air tem- harness between
perature sensor connector. ECM and the mass
Connector & terminal air flow and intake
(B135) No. 26 — (B3) No. 3: air temperature
sensor connector.
MASS AIR FLOW AND INTAKE AIR TEM- more? short circuit of har-
PERATURE SENSOR CONNECTOR. ness between the
Measure the resistance between ECM and ECM and the mass
chassis ground. air flow and intake
Connector & terminal air temperature
(B135) No. 26 — Chassis ground: sensor connector.
Check for any poor contact in the ECM or the ECM or the mass air flow and contact in the ECM air flow and intake
mass air flow and intake air temperature sensor intake air temperature sensor or the mass air flow air temperature
connector. connector? and intake air tem- sensor. <Ref. to
perature sensor FU(H4DOTC)-31,
connector. Mass Air Flow and
Intake Air Temper-
ature Sensor.>

M: DTC P0103 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT

CUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY
5 BATTERY
3
SBF-7
6
4
2
1
1
B47
MASS AIR FLOW &
INTAKE AIR
TEMPERATURE
E
SENSOR
B3
5
*
*
B83
35
26
34
30
18

* ARRANGEMENT
B135 ECM
B3 B47 B135 B83
1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5 3 4 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
5 6 7 8
5 6 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-05087

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the voltage 5 V or more? Go to step 2. Even if the mal-
to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-35, Subaru Select Moni- and then perform
tor.> the diagnosis
porary poor con-
tact of connector
may be the cause.
MASS AIR FLOW AND INTAKE AIR TEM- circuit to power in
PERATURE SENSOR CONNECTOR. the harness
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. between the ECM
2) Disconnect the connector from the mass air and the mass air
flow and intake air temperature sensor. flow and intake air
3) Start the engine. temperature sen-
4) Read the data of air flow sensor signal using sor connector.
the Subaru Select Monitor or general scan tool.
NOTE:
tor.>
3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 5 Ω? Go to step 4.Repair the harness
the mass air flow and intake air temperature • Open circuit of
sensor connector and engine ground. harness between
Connector & terminal ECM and the mass
(B3) No. 2 — Engine ground: air flow and intake
air temperature
sensor connector.
• Poor contact in
ECM connector
Check for any poor contact in the mass air flow mass air flow and intake air contact of the air flow and intake
and intake air temperature sensor connector. temperature sensor connector? mass air flow and air temperature
intake air tempera- sensor. <Ref. to
ture sensor con- FU(H4DOTC)-31,
nector. Mass Air Flow and
Intake Air Temper-
ature Sensor.>

N: DTC P0107 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE/BAROMETRIC PRESSURE

CIRCUIT LOW INPUT
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-32, DTC P0107 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE/
BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MANIFOLD E21
ABSOLUTE
PRESSURE 1 2 3
SENSOR
2
1
3
E21 B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B134
E2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
21
22
9
B21 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
29
19
6
B134 ECM
EN-05086

Step Check Yes No

1) Start the engine. 13.3 kPa (100 mmHg, 3.94 function indicator
2) Read the data of intake manifold absolute inHg) ? light illuminates,
to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-35, Subaru Select Moni- the diagnosis
tor.> again.
tact of connector
may be the cause.
2 CHECK POWER SUPPLY OF THE MANI- Is the voltage 4.5 V or more? Go to step 3. Repair the harness
FOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR. and connector.
2) Disconnect the connector from manifold In this case, repair
absolute pressure sensor. the following item:
4) Measure the voltage between manifold harness between
absolute pressure sensor connector and ECM and manifold
engine ground. absolute pressure
(E21) No. 3 (+) — Engine ground (–): • Poor contact in
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
ECM and manifold absolute pressure sensor harness between
connector. ECM and manifold
Connector & terminal absolute pressure
(B134) No. 6 — (E21) No. 2: sensor connector.
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SEN- more? short circuit of har-
SOR CONNECTOR. ness between
Measure the resistance between ECM and ECM and manifold
chassis ground. absolute pressure
5 CHECK POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact in the Repair the poor Replace the mani-
Check for poor contact between the ECM and ECM or manifold absolute pres- contact in the ECM fold absolute pres-
manifold pressure sensor connector. sure sensor connector? or manifold abso- sure sensor. <Ref.
lute pressure sen- to FU(H4DOTC)-
sor connector. 32, Manifold Abso-
lute Pressure Sen-
sor.>

O: DTC P0108 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE/BAROMETRIC PRESSURE

CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-34, DTC P0108 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE/
BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MANIFOLD E21
ABSOLUTE
PRESSURE 1 2 3
SENSOR
2
1
3
E21 B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B134
E2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
21
22
9
B21 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
29
19
6
B134 ECM
EN-05086

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the measured value 119.5 Go to step 2. Even if the mal-
1) Start the engine. kPa (896.5 mmHg, 35.29 inHg) function indicator
2) Read the data of intake manifold absolute or more? light illuminates,
tor.> again.
tact of connector
may be the cause.
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the measured value 119.5 Repair the short Go to step 3.
MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SEN- kPa (896.5 mmHg, 35.29 inHg) circuit to power in
SOR CONNECTOR. or more? the harness
2) Disconnect the connector from manifold manifold absolute
absolute pressure sensor. pressure sensor
3) Start the engine. connector.
4) Read the data of intake manifold absolute
pressure signal using Subaru Select Monitor or
general scan tool.
NOTE:
tor.>
manifold absolute pressure sensor connector • Open circuit of
and engine ground. harness between
Connector & terminal ECM and manifold
(E21) No. 1 — Engine ground: absolute pressure
sensor connector.
• Poor contact in
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
4 CHECK POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact in mani- Repair the poor Replace the mani-
Check for poor contact of the manifold absolute fold absolute pressure sensor contact of manifold absolute pres-
pressure sensor connector. connector? fold absolute pressure sensor. <Ref.
sure sensor to FU(H4DOTC)-
connector. 32, Manifold Abso-
lute Pressure Sen-
sor.>

P: DTC P0111 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT RANGE/

PERFORMANCE
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-36, DTC P0111 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SEN-
SOR 1 CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY
5 BATTERY
3
SBF-7
6
4
2
1
1
B47
MASS AIR FLOW &
INTAKE AIR
TEMPERATURE
E
SENSOR
B3
5
*
*
B83
35
26
34
30
18

* ARRANGEMENT
B135 ECM
B3 B47 B135 B83
1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5 3 4 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
5 6 7 8
5 6 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-05087

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERA- Is the engine coolant tempera- Replace the mass Check DTC P0125
TURE. ture 70°C (158°F) or higher? air flow and intake using “List of Diag-
1) Start the engine and warm-up completely. air temperature nostic Trouble
2) Measure the engine coolant temperature sensor. <Ref. to Code (DTC)”.
using the Subaru Select Monitor or general FU(H4DOTC)-31, <Ref. to
scan tool. Mass Air Flow and EN(H4DOTC)(diag
NOTE: Intake Air Temper- )-81, List of Diag-
• Subaru Select Monitor ature Sensor.> nostic Trouble
For detailed operation procedures, refer to Code (DTC).>
tor.>

Q: DTC P0112 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT LOW

SOR 1 CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY
5 BATTERY
3
SBF-7
6
4
2
1
1
B47
MASS AIR FLOW &
INTAKE AIR
TEMPERATURE
E
SENSOR
B3
5
*
*
B83
35
26
34
30
18

* ARRANGEMENT
B135 ECM
B3 B47 B135 B83
1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5 3 4 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
5 6 7 8
5 6 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-05087

Step Check Yes No

1) Start the engine. 120°C (248°F) or more? function indicator
tor.> again.
tact of connector
may be the cause.
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Replace the mass Repair the ground
MASS AIR FLOW AND INTAKE AIR TEM- more? air flow and intake short circuit of har-
PERATURE SENSOR CONNECTOR. air temperature ness between the
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. sensor. <Ref. to ECM and the mass
2) Disconnect the connector from the ECM FU(H4DOTC)-31, air flow and intake
and the mass air flow and intake air temperature Mass Air Flow and air temperature
sensor. Intake Air Temper- sensor connector.
3) Measure the resistance between ECM and ature Sensor.>
chassis ground.

R: DTC P0113 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT HIGH

SOR 1 CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY
5 BATTERY
3
SBF-7
6
4
2
1
1
B47
MASS AIR FLOW &
INTAKE AIR
TEMPERATURE
E
SENSOR
B3
5
*
*
B83
35
26
34
30
18

* ARRANGEMENT
B135 ECM
B3 B47 B135 B83
1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5 3 4 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
5 6 7 8
5 6 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-05087

Step Check Yes No

1) Start the engine. less than –40°C (–40°F) ? function indicator
tor.> again.
tact of connector
may be the cause.
Check for poor contact in the ECM or the mass ECM or the mass air flow and contact of the ECM
air flow and intake air temperature sensor con- intake air temperature sensor or the mass air flow
nector. connector? and intake air tem-
perature sensor
connector.
MASS AIR FLOW AND INTAKE AIR TEM- circuit of harness
PERATURE SENSOR CONNECTOR. between the ECM
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. and the mass air
2) Disconnect the connector from the ECM flow and intake air
and the mass air flow and intake air temperature temperature sen-
sensor. sor connector.
ECM and the mass air flow and intake air tem-
perature sensor connector.
(B135) No. 18 — (B3) No. 4:
(B135) No. 34 — (B3) No. 2:
(B135) No. 30 — (B3) No. 5:
4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the voltage 5 V or more? Repair the short Replace the mass
MASS AIR FLOW AND INTAKE AIR TEM- circuit to power in air flow and intake
PERATURE SENSOR CONNECTOR. the harness air temperature
1) Connect all connectors. between the ECM sensor. <Ref. to
2) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. and the mass air FU(H4DOTC)-31,
3) Measure the voltage between ECM and flow and intake air Mass Air Flow and
chassis ground. temperature sen- Intake Air Temper-
Connector & terminal sor connector. ature Sensor.>

S: DTC P0117 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE CIRCUIT LOW

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-42, DTC P0117 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Hard to start
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
E8
ENGINE
COOLANT
TEMPERATURE 1 2
SENSOR
E8
2
1
B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
B21
E2
21
10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
B21
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
34
29
B134 ECM
EN-05088

Step Check Yes No

1) Start the engine. ture 150°C (302°F) or higher? function indicator
tor.> again.
tact of connector
may be the cause.
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND EN- Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Replace the Repair the ground
GINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR more? engine coolant short circuit of the
CONNECTOR. temperature sen- harness between
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. sor. <Ref. to the ECM and
2) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM FU(H4DOTC)-26, engine coolant
and engine coolant temperature sensor. Engine Coolant temperature sen-
3) Measure the resistance between ECM and Temperature Sen- sor.
chassis ground. sor.>

T: DTC P0118 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE CIRCUIT HIGH

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-44, DTC P0118 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Hard to start
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
E8
ENGINE
COOLANT
TEMPERATURE 1 2
SENSOR
E8
2
1
B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
B21
E2
21
10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
B21
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
34
29
B134 ECM
EN-05088

Step Check Yes No

1) Start the engine. ture less than –40°C (–40°F) ? function indicator
tor.> again.
tact of connector
may be the cause.
Repair any poor contact between the ECM and ECM or engine coolant temper- contact between
engine coolant temperature sensor connectors. ature sensor connectors? the ECM and
engine coolant
temperature sen-
sor connectors.
3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND EN- Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 4. Repair the open
GINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR circuit of the har-
CONNECTOR. ness between the
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ECM and engine
2) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM coolant tempera-
and engine coolant temperature sensor. ture sensor con-
3) Measure the resistance of the harness nector.
between the ECM and engine coolant tempera-
ture sensor connector.
(B134) No. 34 — (E8) No. 2:
(B134) No. 29 — (E8) No. 1:
4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND EN- Is the voltage 5 V or more? Repair the short Replace the
GINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR circuit to power in engine coolant
CONNECTOR. the harness temperature sen-
1) Connect all connectors. between the ECM sor. <Ref. to
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. and engine coolant FU(H4DOTC)-26,
3) Measure the voltage between ECM and temperature sen- Engine Coolant
chassis ground. sor connector. Temperature Sen-
Connector & terminal sor.>

U: DTC P0122 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH “A” CIRCUIT

LOW
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-46, DTC P0122 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SEN-
SOR/SWITCH “A” CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
BATTERY
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE B362 SBF-7
CONTROL RELAY
7
5 4 6
6
8 MAIN RELAY
B47
C21
C1
ECM
A: B134 C: B136 D: B137 E

A19
A29
A28
A18
D3
D2
D1
D7
A5
D4
D5
C6
B122
*
B21
*
21
37
35
34
54
36
22
39
38
E2
:TERMINAL No.
* OPTIONAL ARRANGEMENT
5
1
2
3
E
ELECTRONIC
THROTTLE CONTROL
E
E57
B362 B122 B21 E57 B47
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2
3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1 2 5 6 7 8 3 4
4 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 5 6
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
5
7 8
6
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
A: B134 C: B136 D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-05089

Step Check Yes No

chassis ground.
(B134) No. 18 — (B136) No. 6:
1) Connect the connector to ECM. more? tronic throttle con- short circuit of har-
throttle control connector and engine ground. FU(H4DOTC)-12, ECM and elec-
Replace the ECM if
defective. <Ref. to
FU(H4DOTC)-44,
Engine Control
Module (ECM).>

V: DTC P0123 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH “A” CIRCUIT

HIGH
SOR/SWITCH “A” CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
BATTERY
CONTROL RELAY
7
5 4 6
6
8 MAIN RELAY
B47
C21
C1
ECM
A: B134 C: B136 D: B137 E

A19
A29
A28
A18
D3
D2
D1
D7
A5
D4
D5
C6
B122
*
B21
*
21
37
35
34
54
36
22
39
38
E2
:TERMINAL No.
5
1
2
3
E
ELECTRONIC
THROTTLE CONTROL
E
E57
B362 B122 B21 E57 B47
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2
3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1 2 5 6 7 8 3 4
4 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 5 6
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
5
7 8
6
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
A: B134 C: B136 D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-05089

Step Check Yes No

(B134) No. 18 — (E57) No. 6:
(B134) No. 29 — (E57) No. 3:
1) Connect the connector to ECM. NOTE:
ECM and engine
ground
• Poor contact in
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
(B134) No. 19 — (E57) No. 5: <Ref. to
FU(H4DOTC)-12,
Throttle Body.>

W: DTC P0125 INSUFFICIENT COOLANT TEMPERATURE FOR CLOSED LOOP

FUEL CONTROL
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-50, DTC P0125 INSUFFICIENT COOLANT TEMPER-
ATURE FOR CLOSED LOOP FUEL CONTROL, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Engine does not return to idle.
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK TIRE SIZE. Is the tire size as specified? and Go to step 2. Replace the tire.
the same size as other three
wheels?
2 CHECK ENGINE COOLANT. Is the engine coolant normal? Go to step 3. Fill or replace the
Check the following items: engine coolant.
• Amount of engine coolant <Ref. to
• Engine coolant freeze CO(H4DOTC)-14,
• Contamination of engine coolant INSPECTION,
Engine Coolant.>
3 CHECK THERMOSTAT. Does the thermostat remain Replace the ther- Replace the
opened? mostat. <Ref. to engine coolant
CO(H4DOTC)-17, temperature sen-
Thermostat.> sor. <Ref. to
FU(H4DOTC)-26,
Engine Coolant
Temperature Sen-
sor.>

X: DTC P0126 INSUFFICIENT ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE FOR

STABLE OPERATION
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-52, DTC P0126 INSUFFICIENT ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE FOR STABLE OPERATION, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Hard to start
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
E8
ENGINE
COOLANT
TEMPERATURE 1 2
SENSOR
E8
2
1
B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
B21
E2
21
10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
B21
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
34
29
B134 ECM
EN-05088

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Is the resistance of engine cool- Repair the poor Replace the
SENSOR. ant temperature sensor differ- contact in ECM engine coolant
Measure the resistance between engine cool- ent between when engine connector. temperature sen-
ant temperature sensor terminals when the coolant is cold and after sor. <Ref. to
engine coolant is cold and after warmed-up. warmed-up? FU(H4DOTC)-26,
Terminals Engine Coolant
No. 1 — No. 2: Temperature Sen-
sor.>
Y: DTC P0128 COOLANT THERMOSTAT (ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-54, DTC P0128 COOLANT THERMOSTAT (ENGINE
COOLANT TEMPERATURE BELOW THERMOSTAT REGULATING TEMPERATURE), Diagnostic Trouble
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Thermostat remains open.
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK ENGINE COOLANT. Are the coolant level and mix- Go to step 2. Replace the
ture ratio of engine coolant to engine coolant.
anti-freeze solution correct? <Ref. to
CO(H4DOTC)-13,
REPLACEMENT,
Engine Coolant.>
2 CHECK RADIATOR FAN. Does the radiator fan continu- Repair radiator fan Replace the ther-
1) Start the engine. ously rotate for 3 minutes or circuit. <Ref. to mostat. <Ref. to
2) Check the radiator fan operation. more during idling? CO(H4DOTC)-24, CO(H4DOTC)-17,
Radiator Main Fan Thermostat.>
and Fan Motor.>
and <Ref. to
CO(H4DOTC)-27,
Radiator Sub Fan
and Fan Motor.>

Z: DTC P0131 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-56, DTC P0131 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLT-
AGE (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B18
1 2
BATTERY 3 4
MAIN RELAY
SBF-5 B47
5
3 1 2
3 4
6 5 6
4
2
2 B21
1
FRONT
OXYGEN (A/F)
E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
B47 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
SENSOR
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
B18
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
1
4
3
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
*
* A: B134
B138 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
B8
B9
B1
C2
C3
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
A: B134 B: B135
B: B135
ECM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
C: B136
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
D: B137 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
D1
D2
A5
D3
D7
C: B136
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
B21 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
34
35
36
37
54
E2
* ARRANGEMENT AMONG
1, 2, 5 AND 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
E 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
B138
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
EN-05084

Step Check Yes No

TOR. inside.
TOR. ness between
2) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM gen (A/F) sensor
and front oxygen (A/F) sensor. connector.
chassis ground.
sor connector. FU(H4DOTC)-40,
Front Oxygen (A/F)
Sensor.>

AA:DTC P0132 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-58, DTC P0132 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLT-
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B18
1 2
BATTERY 3 4
MAIN RELAY
SBF-5 B47
5
3 1 2
3 4
6 5 6
4
2
2 B21
1
FRONT
OXYGEN (A/F)
E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
B47 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
SENSOR
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
B18
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
1
4
3
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
*
* A: B134
B138 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
B8
B9
B1
C2
C3
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
A: B134 B: B135
B: B135
ECM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
C: B136
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
D: B137 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
D1
D2
A5
D3
D7
C: B136
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
B21 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
34
35
36
37
54
E2
* ARRANGEMENT AMONG
1, 2, 5 AND 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
E 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
B138
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
EN-05084

Step Check Yes No

TOR. inside.
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the voltage 8 V or more? Repair the short Replace the front
FRONT OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR CONNEC- circuit to power in oxygen (A/F) sen-
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. between the ECM FU(H4DOTC)-40,
2) Disconnect the connector from front oxygen and front oxygen Front Oxygen (A/F)
(A/F) sensor. (A/F) sensor con- Sensor.>
chassis ground.

AB:DTC P0133 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT SLOW RESPONSE (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-60, DTC P0133 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT SLOW RE-
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B18
1 2
BATTERY 3 4
MAIN RELAY
SBF-5 B47
5
3 1 2
3 4
6 5 6
4
2
2 B21
1
FRONT
OXYGEN (A/F)
E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
B47 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
SENSOR
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
B18
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
1
4
3
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
*
* A: B134
B138 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
B8
B9
B1
C2
C3
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
A: B134 B: B135
B: B135
ECM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
C: B136
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
D: B137 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
D1
D2
A5
D3
D7
C: B136
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
B21 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
34
35
36
37
54
E2
* ARRANGEMENT AMONG
1, 2, 5 AND 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
E 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
B138
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
EN-05084

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM. Is there any fault in exhaust Repair the exhaust Replace the front
NOTE: system? system. oxygen (A/F) sen-
Check the following items. sor. <Ref. to
• Loose installation of front portion of exhaust FU(H4DOTC)-40,
pipe onto cylinder heads Front Oxygen (A/F)
• Loose connection between front exhaust pipe Sensor.>
and front catalytic converter
• Damage of exhaust pipe resulting in a hole

AC:DTC P0134 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT NO ACTIVITY DETECTED

(BANK 1 SENSOR 1)
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-63, DTC P0134 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT NO ACTIVITY
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B18
1 2
BATTERY 3 4
MAIN RELAY
SBF-5 B47
5
3 1 2
3 4
6 5 6
4
2
2 B21
1
FRONT
OXYGEN (A/F)
E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
B47 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
SENSOR
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
B18
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
1
4
3
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
*
* A: B134
B138 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
B8
B9
B1
C2
C3
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
A: B134 B: B135
B: B135
ECM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
C: B136
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
D: B137 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
D1
D2
A5
D3
D7
C: B136
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
B21 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
34
35
36
37
54
E2
* ARRANGEMENT AMONG
1, 2, 5 AND 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
E 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
B138
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
EN-05084

Step Check Yes No

TOR. NOTE:
and front oxygen (A/F) sensor. • Open circuit of
(B135) No. 9 — (B18) No. 3: connector
(B135) No. 8 — (B18) No. 4: • Poor contact of
coupling connector
sensor connector. FU(H4DOTC)-40,
Front Oxygen (A/F)
Sensor.>

AD:DTC P0137 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE (BANK 1 SENSOR 2)

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-65, DTC P0137 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLT-
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B47
SBF-5
5 T6
1 2
3
1 2 3 4
6 B19 3 4 5 6
2
4
T5 B83
2
1 B138
1
B47 1 2 3 4
REAR
E 5 6 7 8
OXYGEN SENSOR
B21
T6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
1
3
4
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
T5 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
1
3
4
42 43 44 45 46 47
B19 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
* 11 B83
* A: B134
* 2
2
B138 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
* 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
B30
B1
C4
B4
A: B134 B: B135
B: B135 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
ECM 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
C: B136 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
D: B137
D1
D2
A5
D3
D7
C: B136
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
B21 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
34
35
36
37
54
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
E2
: TERMINAL No.
: TERMINAL No.
AMONG 1, 2, 5 AND 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
E 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-05085

Step Check Yes No

maximum)
tool.
NOTE:
tor.>
inside.
(B135) No. 4 — (T6) No. 3:
(B135) No. 30 — (T6) No. 4:
2) Disconnect the connector from the rear oxy- FU(H4DOTC)-42, In this case, repair
(T6) No. 3 (+) — Chassis ground (–): • Poor contact of
the rear oxygen
sensor connector
• Poor contact in
ECM connector
NOTE: <Ref. to
Check the following items. FU(H4DOTC)-42,
haust system sor.>
sor

AE:DTC P0138 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE (BANK 1 SENSOR 2)

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-67, DTC P0138 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLT-
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B47
SBF-5
5 T6
1 2
3
1 2 3 4
6 B19 3 4 5 6
2
4
T5 B83
2
1 B138
1
B47 1 2 3 4
REAR
E 5 6 7 8
OXYGEN SENSOR
B21
T6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
1
3
4
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
T5 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
1
3
4
42 43 44 45 46 47
B19 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
* 11 B83
* A: B134
* 2
2
B138 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
* 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
B30
B1
C4
B4
A: B134 B: B135
B: B135 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
ECM 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
C: B136 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
D: B137
D1
D2
A5
D3
D7
C: B136
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
B21 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
34
35
36
37
54
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
E2
: TERMINAL No.
: TERMINAL No.
AMONG 1, 2, 5 AND 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
E 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-05085

Step Check Yes No

rpm.
tool.
NOTE:
tor.>
inside.
(B135) No. 4 — (T6) No. 3:
(B135) No. 30 — (T6) No. 4:
the rear oxygen
sensor connector
• Poor contact in
ECM connector
NOTE: <Ref. to
haust system sor.>
sor

AF:DTC P0139 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT SLOW RESPONSE (BANK 1 SENSOR 2)

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-68, DTC P0139 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT SLOW RE-
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B47
SBF-5
5 T6
1 2
3
1 2 3 4
6 B19 3 4 5 6
2
4
T5 B83
2
1 B138
1
B47 1 2 3 4
REAR
E 5 6 7 8
OXYGEN SENSOR
B21
T6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
1
3
4
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
T5 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
1
3
4
42 43 44 45 46 47
B19 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
* 11 B83
* A: B134
* 2
2
B138 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
* 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
B30
B1
C4
B4
A: B134 B: B135
B: B135 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
ECM 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
C: B136 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
D: B137
D1
D2
A5
D3
D7
C: B136
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
B21 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
34
35
36
37
54
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
E2
: TERMINAL No.
: TERMINAL No.
AMONG 1, 2, 5 AND 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
E 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-05085

Step Check Yes No

(B135) No. 4 — (T6) No. 3:
REAR OXYGEN SENSOR CONNECTOR. more? short circuit of har-
Measure the resistance between rear oxygen ness between
sensor connector and chassis ground. ECM and rear oxy-
Connector & terminal gen sensor con-
(T6) No. 3 — Chassis ground: nector.
3 CHECK REAR OXYGEN SENSOR. Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Replace the rear Even if the mal-
Measure the resistance between rear oxygen oxygen sensor. function indicator
sensor terminals. <Ref. to light illuminates,
Terminals FU(H4DOTC)-42, the circuit has
No. 3 — No. 4 Rear Oxygen Sen- returned to a nor-
sor.> mal condition at
this time. Repro-
duce the failure,
and then perform
the diagnosis
again.
NOTE:
In this case, tem-
porary poor con-
tact of connector
may be the cause.

AG:DTC P0140 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT NO ACTIVITY DETECTED

(BANK 1 SENSOR 2)
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-74, DTC P0140 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT NO ACTIVITY
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY BATTERY B19 B47
SBF-5
5 T6
1 2
3
1 2 3 4
6 B19 3 4 5 6
2
4
T5 B83
2
1 B138
1
B47 1 2 3 4
REAR
E 5 6 7 8
OXYGEN SENSOR
B21
T6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
1
3
4
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
T5 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
1
3
4
42 43 44 45 46 47
B19 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
* 11 B83
* A: B134
* 2
2
B138 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
* 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
B30
B1
C4
B4
A: B134 B: B135
B: B135 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
ECM 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
C: B136 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
D: B137
D1
D2
A5
D3
D7
C: B136
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
B21 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
34
35
36
37
54
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
E2
: TERMINAL No.
: TERMINAL No.
AMONG 1, 2, 5 AND 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
E 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-05085

Step Check Yes No

maximum)
tool.
NOTE:
tor.>
rpm.
tool.
NOTE:
tor.>
inside.
(B135) No. 4 — (T6) No. 3:
(B135) No. 30 — (T6) No. 4:

Step Check Yes No

the rear oxygen
sensor connector
• Poor contact in
ECM connector
NOTE: <Ref. to
haust system sor.>
sor
AH:DTC P0171 SYSTEM TOO LEAN (BANK 1)

Refer to DTC P0175 for diagnostic procedure. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-149, DTC P0172 SYSTEM TOO
RICH (BANK 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>

AI: DTC P0172 SYSTEM TOO RICH (BANK 1)

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-78, DTC P0172 SYSTEM TOO RICH (BANK 1), Diag-
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
intake system?
3 CHECK FUEL PRESSURE. Is the measured value 284 — Go to step 4. Repair the follow-
WARNING: 314 kPa (2.9 — 3.2 kg/cm2, 41 ing item.
Place “NO OPEN FLAMES” signs near the — 46 psi)? Fuel pressure is
CAUTION: • Clogged fuel
Be careful not to spill fuel. return line or bent
Measure the fuel pressure while disconnecting hose
pressure regulator vacuum hose from intake Fuel pressure is
manifold. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-25, INSPEC- too low:
TION, Fuel Pressure.> • Improper fuel
CAUTION: pump discharge
Release fuel pressure before removing the • Clogged fuel
fuel pressure gauge. supply line
NOTE:
If fuel pressure does not increase, squeeze the
fuel return hose 2 to 3 times, then measure fuel
pressure again.
After connecting the pressure regulator vacuum 260 kPa (2.35 — 2.65 kg/cm2, ing item.
hose, measure fuel pressure. <Ref. to 33 — 38 psi)? Fuel pressure is
ME(H4DOTC)-25, INSPECTION, Fuel Pres- too high:
sure.> • Faulty pressure
CAUTION: regulator
fuel pressure gauge. return line or bent
NOTE: hose
• If fuel pressure does not increase, squeeze Fuel pressure is
fuel return hose 2 to 3 times, then measure fuel too low:
pressure again. • Faulty pressure
• If the measured value at this step is out of regulator
specification, check or replace pressure regula- • Improper fuel
tor and pressure regulator vacuum hose. pump discharge
• Clogged fuel
supply line

Step Check Yes No

SENSOR. ture 70°C (158°F) or higher? engine coolant
ture sensor signal using Subaru Select Monitor FU(H4DOTC)-26,
tor.>
(158°F). FU(H4DOTC)-31,
NOTE:
tor.>

Step Check Yes No

7 CHECK MASS AIR FLOW AND INTAKE AIR Subtract ambient temperature Repair the poor Check the mass air
TEMPERATURE SENSOR. from intake air temperature. Is contact in ECM flow and intake air
1) Start the engine and warm-up engine until the obtained value –10 — 50°C connector . temperature sen-
coolant temperature is higher than 70°C (–18 — 90°F)? sor.
(158°F). <Ref. to
2) For AT models, set the select lever to the “P” FU(H4DOTC)-31,
or “N” range, and for MT models, place the shift Mass Air Flow and
lever in the neutral position. Intake Air Temper-
3) Turn the A/C switch to OFF. ature Sensor.>
NOTE:
tor.>

AJ:DTC P0181 FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT RANGE/

PERFORMANCE
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-80, DTC P0181 FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR “A”
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
FUEL TANK
FUEL TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
3
2
R58
R67
1
4
R46
R1
18
4
B97
*
*
B83
30
17
:TERMINAL No. OPTIONAL

B135 ECM
* ARRANGEMENT
R67 R58 B97 B135 B83
1 2 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4
3 4 5 6 3 4 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 5 6 7 8
5 6 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-03923

Step Check Yes No

nostic Trouble EC(H4DOTC)-12,
Code (DTC)”. Fuel Temperature
<Ref. to Sensor.>
EN(H4DOTC)(diag
)-81, List of Diag-
nostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>

AK:DTC P0182 FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT LOW INPUT

CIRCUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
FUEL TANK
FUEL TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
3
2
R58
R67
1
4
R46
R1
18
4
B97
*
*
B83
30
17

B135 ECM
* ARRANGEMENT
R67 R58 B97 B135 B83
1 2 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4
3 4 5 6 3 4 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 5 6 7 8
5 6 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-03923

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the temperature 120°C Go to step 2. Even if the mal-
1) Start the engine. (248°F) or higher? function indicator
to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-35, Subaru Select Moni- duce the failure,
the diagnosis
again.
NOTE:
In this case, tem-
porary poor con-
tact of connector
may be the cause.
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Replace the fuel Repair the ground
FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR CONNEC- more? temperature sen- short circuit of har-
TOR. sor. <Ref. to ness between
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. EC(H4DOTC)-12, ECM and fuel
2) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM Fuel Temperature pump.
and fuel temperature sensor. Sensor.>
chassis ground.

AL:DTC P0183 FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT

CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
FUEL TANK
FUEL TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
3
2
R58
R67
1
4
R46
R1
18
4
B97
*
*
B83
30
17

B135 ECM
* ARRANGEMENT
R67 R58 B97 B135 B83
1 2 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4
3 4 5 6 3 4 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 5 6 7 8
5 6 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-03923

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the temperature less than – Go to step 2. Even if the mal-
1) Start the engine. 40°C (–40°F)? function indicator
to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-35, Subaru Select Moni- duce the failure,
the diagnosis
again.
NOTE:
In this case, tem-
porary poor con-
tact of connector
may be the cause.
Repair any poor contact between the ECM and ECM or fuel temperature sen- contact between
fuel temperature sensor connectors. sor connectors? the ECM and fuel
temperature sen-
sor connectors.
FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR CONNEC- circuit of the har-
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ECM and fuel tem-
2) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM perature sensor
and fuel temperature sensor. connector.
between the ECM and fuel temperature sensor
connector.
(B135) No. 17 — (R58) No. 2:
(B135) No. 30 — (R58) No. 3:
4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the voltage 5 V or more? Repair the short Replace the fuel
FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR CONNEC- circuit to power in temperature sen-
1) Connect all connectors. between the ECM EC(H4DOTC)-12,
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. and fuel tempera- Fuel Temperature
3) Measure the voltage between ECM and ture sensor con- Sensor.>
chassis ground. nector.

AM:DTC P0222 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH “B” CIRCUIT

LOW
SOR/SWITCH “B” CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
BATTERY
CONTROL RELAY
7
5 4 6
6
8 MAIN RELAY
B47
C21
C1
ECM
A: B134 C: B136 D: B137 E

A19
A29
A28
A18
D3
D2
D1
D7
A5
D4
D5
C6
B122
*
B21
*
21
37
35
34
54
36
22
39
38
E2
:TERMINAL No.
5
1
2
3
E
ELECTRONIC
THROTTLE CONTROL
E
E57
B362 B122 B21 E57 B47
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2
3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1 2 5 6 7 8 3 4
4 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 5 6
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
5
7 8
6
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
A: B134 C: B136 D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-05089

Step Check Yes No

chassis ground.
1) Connect the connector to ECM. more? tronic throttle con- short circuit of har-
throttle control connector and engine ground. FU(H4DOTC)-12, ECM and elec-
Replace the ECM if
defective. <Ref. to
FU(H4DOTC)-44,
Engine Control
Module (ECM).>

AN:DTC P0223 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH “B” CIRCUIT

HIGH
SOR/SWITCH “B” CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
BATTERY
CONTROL RELAY
7
5 4 6
6
8 MAIN RELAY
B47
C21
C1
ECM
A: B134 C: B136 D: B137 E

A19
A29
A28
A18
D3
D2
D1
D7
A5
D4
D5
C6
B122
*
B21
*
21
37
35
34
54
36
22
39
38
E2
:TERMINAL No.
5
1
2
3
E
ELECTRONIC
THROTTLE CONTROL
E
E57
B362 B122 B21 E57 B47
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2
3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1 2 5 6 7 8 3 4
4 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 5 6
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
5
7 8
6
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
A: B134 C: B136 D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-05089

Step Check Yes No

(B134) No. 28 — (E57) No. 4:
(B134) No. 29 — (E57) No. 3:
ECM and engine
ground
• Poor contact in
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
(B134) No. 19 — (B134) No. 28: <Ref. to
FU(H4DOTC)-12,
Throttle Body.>

AO:DTC P0230 FUEL PUMP PRIMARY CIRCUIT

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-91, DTC P0230 FUEL PUMP PRIMARY CIRCUIT, Di-
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
BATTERY
No.11
2 1
FUEL PUMP
RELAY B362
B97
20
7
R1
10
FUEL PUMP
CONTROL UNIT
R122
5
9
8
7
R46 R1
19
3
R67 B97
B33
C12
5
FUEL
ECM
PUMP E
R58 M B: B135
C: B136
B362 R58 R122 B: B135 C: B136
3 1 2 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
4
5 6 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
5 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
7 8
6
R67 B97
1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
3 4 5 6 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
EN-05083

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT TO FUEL Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 2. Repair the power
PUMP CONTROL UNIT. supply circuit.
2) Disconnect the connector from fuel pump In this case, repair
control unit. the following item:
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. • Open or ground
4) Measure the voltage between fuel pump short circuit of har-
control unit and chassis ground. ness between fuel
Connector & terminal pump relay and
(R122) No. 10 (+) — Chassis ground (–): fuel pump control
unit
• Poor contact of
fuel pump control
unit connector
• Poor contact of
fuel pump relay
connector
2 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT OF FUEL PUMP Is the resistance less than 5 Ω? Go to step 3. Repair the harness
CONTROL UNIT. and connector.
fuel pump control unit and chassis ground. the following item:
Connector & terminal • Open circuit be-
(R122) No. 5 — Chassis ground: tween fuel pump
control unit and
chassis ground
• Poor contact of
fuel pump control
unit connector
3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN FUEL PUMP Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 4. Repair the open
CONTROL UNIT AND FUEL PUMP CONNEC- circuit between fuel
TOR. pump control unit
1) Disconnect the connector from fuel pump. and fuel pump.
fuel pump control unit and fuel pump connector.
(R122) No. 7 — (R58) No. 5:
(R122) No. 6 — (R58) No. 6:
4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN FUEL PUMP Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 5. Repair the ground
CONTROL UNIT AND FUEL PUMP CONNEC- more? short circuit of har-
TOR. ness between fuel
Measure the resistance between fuel pump pump control unit
control unit and chassis ground. and fuel pump.
FUEL PUMP CONTROL UNIT. and connector.
2) Measure the resistance of the harness In this case, repair
between the ECM and fuel pump control unit. the following item:
Connector & terminal • Open circuit be-
(B135) No. 33 — (R122) No. 9: tween the ECM
(B136) No. 12 — (R122) No. 8: and fuel pump con-
trol unit
• Poor contact be-
tween ECM and
fuel pump control
unit

Step Check Yes No

FUEL PUMP CONTROL UNIT. more? short circuit of har-
Measure the resistance between fuel pump ness between
control unit and chassis ground. ECM and fuel
Connector & terminal pump control unit.
7 CHECK POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of ECM Repair the poor Go to step 8.
Check poor contact of ECM and fuel pump con-
and fuel pump control unit con- contact of ECM
trol unit connector. nector? and fuel pump con-
trol unit connector.
8 CHECK EXPERIENCE OF RUNNING OUT OF Has the vehicle experienced Finish the diagno- Replace the fuel
FUEL. running out of fuel? sis. pump control unit.
NOTE: <Ref. to
DTC may be re- FU(H4DOTC)-48,
corded as a result Fuel Pump Control
of fuel pump idling Unit.>
while running out
of fuel.

AP:DTC P0244 TURBO/SUPER CHARGER WASTEGATE SOLENOID “A”

RANGE/PERFORMANCE
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-93, DTC P0244 TURBO/SUPER CHARGER WASTE-
GATE SOLENOID “A” RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Poor driving performance
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY
5 BATTERY
3
SBF-7
B47
6
4
1 2
3 4
2
5 6
1
B47
B137
E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
B137 ECM
E64
27
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
B21
42 43 44 45 46 47
48
40
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
E2
E64
1
2
WASTEGATE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
EN-04949

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK FOR ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY. Is any other DTC displayed? Check the appro- Replace the waste-
priate DTC using gate control sole-
the “List of Diag- noid valve. <Ref. to
nostic Trouble FU(H4DOTC)-39,
Code (DTC)”. Wastegate Control
<Ref. to Solenoid Valve.>
EN(H4DOTC)(diag
)-81, List of Diag-
nostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>

AQ:DTC P0245 TURBO/SUPER CHARGER WASTEGATE SOLENOID “A” LOW

GATE SOLENOID “A” LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY
5 BATTERY
3
SBF-7
B47
6
4
1 2
3 4
2
5 6
1
B47
B137
E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
B137 ECM
E64
27
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
B21
42 43 44 45 46 47
48
40
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
E2
E64
1
2
EN-04949

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL OF ECM. Is the voltage 10 V or more? Repair the poor Go to step 2.
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. contact in ECM
2) Measure the voltage between ECM and connector.
chassis ground.
WASTEGATE CONTROL SOLENOID more? short circuit of har-
VALVE. ness between
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ECM and waste-
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and gate control sole-
wastegate control solenoid valve. noid valve
3) Measure the resistance between wastegate connector.
control solenoid valve connector and engine
ground.
WASTEGATE CONTROL SOLENOID and connector.
VALVE. NOTE:
Measure the resistance of harness between In this case, repair
ECM and wastegate control solenoid valve con- the following item:
(B137) No. 27 — (E64) No. 2: ECM and waste-
gate control sole-
noid valve
connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
4 CHECK WASTEGATE CONTROL SOLE- Is the resistance between 10 — Go to step 5. Replace the waste-
NOID VALVE. 100 Ω? gate control sole-
1) Remove the wastegate control solenoid noid valve. <Ref. to
valve. FU(H4DOTC)-39,
2) Measure the resistance between wastegate Wastegate Control
control solenoid valve terminals. Solenoid Valve.>
Terminals
No. 1 — No. 2:
5 CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO WASTEGATE Is the voltage 10 V or more? Repair poor con- Repair the harness
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE. tact in wastegate and connector.
2) Measure the voltage between wastegate valve connector. In this case, repair
control solenoid valve and engine ground. the following item:
main relay and
wastegate control
solenoid valve
connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
• Poor contact of
main relay connec-
tor

AR:DTC P0246 TURBO/SUPER CHARGER WASTEGATE SOLENOID “A” HIGH

GATE SOLENOID “A” HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY
5 BATTERY
3
SBF-7
B47
6
4
1 2
3 4
2
5 6
1
B47
B137
E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
B137 ECM
E64
27
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
B21
42 43 44 45 46 47
48
40
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
E2
E64
1
2
EN-04949

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the voltage 10 V or more? Repair short cir- Go to step 2.
WASTEGATE CONTROL SOLENOID cuit to power in the
VALVE. harness between
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ECM and waste-
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and gate control sole-
wastegate control solenoid valve. noid valve
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. connector.
chassis ground.
2 CHECK WASTEGATE CONTROL SOLE- Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Replace the waste- Repair the poor
NOID VALVE. gate control sole- contact in ECM
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. noid valve. <Ref. to connector.
2) Measure the resistance between wastegate FU(H4DOTC)-39,
control solenoid valve terminals. Wastegate Control
No. 1 — No. 2:
AS:DTC P0301 CYLINDER 1 MISFIRE DETECTED

NOTE:
For the diagnostic procedure, refer to DTC P0306. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-171, DTC P0304 CYLIN-
DER 4 MISFIRE DETECTED, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
NOTE:
NOTE:


• Immediately at fault recognition (A misfire which could damage catalyst occurs.)
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-105, DTC P0304 CYLINDER 4 MISFIRE DETECTED,
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Engine stalls.
• Rough driving
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY
5
BATTERY
3
SBF-7
6
4
2
1
B47 B137 ECM
E
11
10
8
B21
45
44
48
42
43
E2
E5 E16 E6 E17
2
2
1
2
#1 #2 #3 #4
FUEL INJECTOR
E5 E6 B21 B47 B137
E16 E17 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 3 4 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
1 2 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
5 6 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
26 27 28 29 30 31
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
EN-04943

Step Check Yes No

cylinders.
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
terminals on faulty cylinder. to FU(H4DOTC)-
Terminals 33, Fuel Injector.>
No. 1 — No. 2:
nector on faulty
cylinders
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
• Poor contact of
main relay connec-
tor
• Poor contact of
fuel injector con-
nector on faulty
cylinders

Step Check Yes No

2) Measure the resistance between fuel injec- to FU(H4DOTC)-
tor terminals on faulty cylinder. 33, Fuel Injector.>
Terminals
No. 1 — No. 2:
8 CHECK INSTALLATION OF CAMSHAFT PO- Is the camshaft position sensor Tighten the cam- Go to step 9.
SITION SENSOR/CRANKSHAFT POSITION or crankshaft position sensor shaft position sen-
SENSOR. loosely installed? sor or crankshaft
position sensor.
Remove the timing belt cover. does it have damaged teeth? sprocket. <Ref. to
ME(H4DOTC)-52,
Crank Sprocket.>
Turn the crankshaft, and align alignment mark timing belt. <Ref.
on crank sprocket with alignment mark on cylin- to ME(H4DOTC)-
der block. 43, Timing Belt.>
11 CHECK FUEL LEVEL. Is the fuel meter indication Go to step 12. Replenish fuel so
higher than the “Lower” level? that fuel meter indi-
cation is higher
than the “Lower”
level. After refuel-
ing, Go to step 12.
12 CHECK STATUS OF MALFUNCTION INDI- Does the malfunction indicator Go to step 14. Go to step 13.
CATOR LIGHT. light illuminate or blink?
1) Clear the memory using the Subaru Select
<Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-56, Clear Memory
Mode.>
NOTE:
<Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-35, Subaru Select
Monitor.>
Refer to operating manuals for the general scan
tool.
2) Start the engine, and drive the vehicle 10
minutes or more.

Step Check Yes No

13 CHECK CAUSE OF MISFIRE. Was the cause of misfire identi- Finish diagnostics Repair the poor
fied when the engine is run- operation, if the contact of connec-
ning? engine has no tor.
abnormality. NOTE:
the following item:
• Poor contact of
ignition coil con-
nector
• Poor contact of
fuel injector con-
nector on faulty
cylinders
• Poor contact in
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
14 CHECK AIR INTAKE SYSTEM. Is there any fault in air intake Repair the air Go to step 15.
system? intake system.
NOTE:
Check the follow-
ing items.
• Are there air
leaks or air suction
caused by loose or
dislocated nuts
and bolts?
• Are there cracks
or any disconnec-
tion of hoses?
15 CHECK MISFIRE SYMPTOM. Does the Subaru Select Moni- Go to step 20. Go to step 16.
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. tor or general scan tool indicate
2) Read the DTC. only one DTC?
NOTE:
tor.>

Step Check Yes No

20 ONLY ONE CYLINDER. Is there any fault in the cylin- Repair or replace Go to DTC P0171.
der? faulty parts. <Ref. to
NOTE: EN(H4DOTC)(diag
Check the follow- )-148, DTC P0171
• Spark plug cord Diagnostic Proce-
• Fuel injector dure with Diagnos-
• Compression ra- tic Trouble Code
tio (DTC).>
• Check the fol- )-148, DTC P0171
ratio (DTC).>
not found, check
the “IGNITION
CONTROL SYS-
TEM” of #1 and #2
cylinders side.
<Ref. to
EN(H4DOTC)(di-
ag)-76, IGNITION
CONTROL SYS-
TEM, Diagnostics
for Engine Starting
Failure.>
• Check the fol- )-148, DTC P0171
ratio (DTC).>
not found, check
the “IGNITION
CONTROL SYS-
TEM” of #3 and #4
cylinders side.
<Ref. to
EN(H4DOTC)(di-
ag)-76, IGNITION
CONTROL SYS-
TEM, Diagnostics
for Engine Starting
Failure.>

Step Check Yes No

belt teeth
belt teeth
25 CYLINDER AT RANDOM. Is the engine idle rough? Go to DTC P0171. Repair or replace
<Ref. to faulty parts.
EN(H4DOTC)(diag NOTE:
)-148, DTC P0171 Check the follow-
SYSTEM TOO ing items.
LEAN (BANK 1), • Spark plug
Diagnostic Proce- • Fuel injector
dure with Diagnos- • Compression ra-
tic Trouble Code tio
(DTC).>

AW:DTC P0327 KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT LOW

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-106, DTC P0327 KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT LOW
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
KNOCK SENSOR
E14
1 2
2
E14
B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
B21
E2
21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
5
B21 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
E 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
29
15
25
B134 ECM
EN-05090

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 600 kΩ or Go to step 2. Repair poor con-
KNOCK SENSOR. more? tact of the ECM
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. connector.
nectors.
(B134) No. 15 — (B134) No. 29:
2 CHECK KNOCK SENSOR. Is the resistance 600 kΩ or Replace the knock Repair the harness
1) Disconnect the connector from knock sen- more? sensor. <Ref. to and connector.
sor. FU(H4DOTC)-29, NOTE:
2) Measure the resistance between knock Knock Sensor.> In this case, repair
sensor terminals. the following item:
Terminals • Open circuit of
ECM and knock
sensor
• Poor contact of
knock sensor con-
nector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector

AX:DTC P0328 KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT HIGH

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-108, DTC P0328 KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT HIGH
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
KNOCK SENSOR
E14
1 2
2
E14
B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
B21
E2
21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
5
B21 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
E 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
29
15
25
B134 ECM
EN-05090

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 500 Go to step 2. Go to step 3.
KNOCK SENSOR. kΩ?
nectors.
(B134) No. 15 — (B134) No. 29:
2 CHECK KNOCK SENSOR. Is the resistance less than 500 Replace the knock Repair the ground
1) Disconnect the connector from knock sen- kΩ? sensor. <Ref. to short circuit of har-
sor. FU(H4DOTC)-29, ness between the
2) Measure the resistance between knock Knock Sensor.> ECM and knock
sensor connectors. sensor connector.
Terminals NOTE:
No. 1 — No. 2: The harness be-
tween both con-
nectors are
shielded. Remove
the shield and re-
pair the short cir-
cuit of harness.
3 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF ECM. Is the voltage 2 V or more? Even if the mal- Repair poor con-
1) Connect the connector to ECM. function indicator tact of the ECM
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. light illuminates, connector.
3) Measure the voltage between ECM and the circuit has
chassis ground. returned to a nor-
Connector & terminal mal condition at
(B134) No. 15 (+) — Chassis ground (–): this time. Repro-
duce the failure,
and then perform
the diagnosis
again.
NOTE:
In this case, tem-
porary poor con-
tact of connector
may be the cause.

AY:DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-110, DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
“A” CIRCUIT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
CRANKSHAFT
POSITION SENSOR
E10
1 2
2
E10
B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
E2
4
B21
B21
E
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
14
13
24
B134 ECM
EN-05091

Step Check Yes No

securely.
2 CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR. Is the resistance between 1 — Go to step 3. Replace the crank-
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 4 kΩ? shaft position sen-
2) Remove the crankshaft position sensor. sor. <Ref. to
3) Measure the resistance between connector FU(H4DOTC)-27,
terminals of crankshaft position sensor. Crankshaft Posi-
Terminals tion Sensor.>
No. 1 — No. 2:
3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Repair the poor Repair the harness
CRANK SHAFT POSITION SENSOR. contact of the ECM and connector.
1) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM. and crankshaft NOTE:
2) Measure the resistance of harness between position sensor In this case, repair
the ECM and crankshaft position sensor con- connector. the following item:
(B134) No. 13 — (E10) No. 1: ECM and crank-
(B134) No. 14 — (E10) No. 2: shaft position sen-
sor connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector

AZ:DTC P0336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT RANGE/

PERFORMANCE
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-112, DTC P0336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
“A” CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
CRANKSHAFT
POSITION SENSOR
E10
1 2
2
E10
B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
E2
4
B21
B21
E
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
14
13
24
B134 ECM
EN-05091

Step Check Yes No

Turn the ignition switch to OFF. securely? sor installation bolt
securely.
2 CHECK CRANK SPROCKET. Are crank sprocket teeth Replace the crank Go to step 3.
Remove the timing belt cover. cracked or damaged? sprocket. <Ref. to
ME(H4DOTC)-52,
Crank Sprocket.>
3 CHECK INSTALLATION CONDITION OF Is the timing belt dislocated Repair the installa- Replace the crank-
Turn the crankshaft, and align alignment mark timing belt. <Ref. sor. <Ref. to
on crank sprocket with alignment mark on cylin- to ME(H4DOTC)- FU(H4DOTC)-27,
der block. 43, Timing Belt.> Crankshaft Posi-
tion Sensor.>

BA:DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-114, DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
“A” CIRCUIT (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY
5 BATTERY
3
SBF-7
6
4
2
1 INTAKE INTAKE
CAMSHAFT CAMSHAFT
B47 POSITION POSITION
SENSOR LH SENSOR RH
E
2
3
1
2
3
E35 E36
E2
48
20
2
1
B21
21
11
22
B134 ECM
E35 B47 B134 B21
E36 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
3 4 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
1 2 3 5 6 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
EN-05092

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK POWER SUPPLY OF CAMSHAFT Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 2. Repair the open or
POSITION SENSOR. ground short circuit
2) Disconnect the connector from the cam- between main
shaft position sensor. relay connector
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. and camshaft posi-
4) Measure the voltage between camshaft tion sensor con-
position sensor connector and engine ground. nector.
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR CONNEC- circuit of harness
TOR. between the ECM
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. and camshaft posi-
2) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM. tion sensor.
3) Measure the resistance between the ECM
and camshaft position sensor connector.
(B134) No. 11 — (E36) No. 2:
(B134) No. 22 — (E36) No. 3:
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR CONNEC- more? circuit to ground of
TOR. harness between
Measure the resistance between camshaft the ECM and cam-
position sensor connector and engine ground. shaft position sen-
Connector & terminal sor.
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR CONNEC- circuit to power in
TOR. the harness
Measure the voltage between camshaft posi- between the ECM
tion sensor connector and engine ground. and camshaft posi-
Connector & terminal tion sensor.
5 CHECK CONDITION OF CAMSHAFT POSI- Is the camshaft position sensor Go to step 6. Tighten the cam-
TION SENSOR. installation bolt tightened shaft position sen-
securely.
6 CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR. Is there any abnormality in Replace the cam- Repair the follow-
Check waveform of camshaft position sensor. waveform? shaft position sen- ing item:
<Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-18, Engine Con- sor. <Ref. to • Poor contact in
trol Module (ECM) I/O Signal.> FU(H4DOTC)-28, ECM connector
Camshaft Position • Poor contact in
Sensor.> camshaft position
sensor connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
.

BB:DTC P0345 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT (BANK 2)

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-116, DTC P0345 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
“A” CIRCUIT (BANK 2), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY
5 BATTERY
3
SBF-7
6
4
2
1 INTAKE INTAKE
CAMSHAFT CAMSHAFT
B47 POSITION POSITION
SENSOR LH SENSOR RH
E
2
3
1
2
3
E35 E36
E2
48
20
2
1
B21
21
11
22
B134 ECM
E35 B47 B134 B21
E36 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
3 4 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
1 2 3 5 6 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
EN-05092

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK POWER SUPPLY OF CAMSHAFT Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 2. Repair the open or
POSITION SENSOR. ground short circuit
2) Disconnect the connector from the cam- between main
shaft position sensor. relay connector
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. and camshaft posi-
4) Measure the voltage between camshaft tion sensor con-
position sensor connector and engine ground. nector.
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR CONNEC- circuit of harness
TOR. between the ECM
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. and camshaft posi-
2) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM. tion sensor.
3) Measure the resistance between the ECM
and camshaft position sensor connector.
(B134) No. 21 — (E35) No. 2:
(B134) No. 22 — (E35) No. 3:
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR CONNEC- more? circuit to ground of
TOR. harness between
Measure the resistance between camshaft the ECM and cam-
position sensor connector and engine ground. shaft position sen-
Connector & terminal sor.
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR CONNEC- circuit to power in
TOR. the harness
Measure the voltage between camshaft posi- between the ECM
tion sensor connector and engine ground. and camshaft posi-
Connector & terminal tion sensor.
5 CHECK CONDITION OF CAMSHAFT POSI- Is the camshaft position sensor Go to step 6. Tighten the cam-
TION SENSOR. installation bolt tightened shaft position sen-
securely.
6 CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR. Is there any abnormality in Replace the cam- Repair the follow-
Check waveform of camshaft position sensor. waveform? shaft position sen- ing item:
<Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-18, Engine Con- sor. <Ref. to • Poor contact in
trol Module (ECM) I/O Signal.> FU(H4DOTC)-28, ECM connector
Camshaft Position • Poor contact in
Sensor.> camshaft position
sensor connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector

BC:DTC P0410 SECONDARY AIR INJECTION SYSTEM

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-117, DTC P0410 SECONDARY AIR INJECTION SYS-
TEM, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:

WIRING DIAGRAM:
B47
MAIN RELAY
5
3
SBF-7
6
4 BATTERY
MAIN
2 SBF
1
E
F9 RELAY HOLDER
6
10A
5
15
60A
MAIN FUSE 16
BOX(M/B) SECONDARY
B143 F37 4 AIR
3 COMBINATION
9 11 1 VALVE
2 5 2 RELAY1
C30
C19 14 16
A: B134 12 18 SECONDARY
C8
7 AIR
A19 10 20
C: B136 8 COMBINATION
A27 4 8
A29 10 VALVE
9 RELAY2
ECM 4 14
14 SECONDARY
B144 F37 11 AIR PUMP
B21
RELAY
21
22
46
47
8
12
E2 13
F11
3
2
1
6
4
1
2
E41 E40 2 SECONDARY

1 AIR PUMP
E
SECONDARY AIR SECONDARY AIR E
COMBINATION VALVE RH COMBINATION
(WITH BUILT-IN PRESSURE SENSOR) VALVE LH
E40 B47 E41 B134 B136 B21
F11 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
3 4 4 5 6 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
1 2 5 6 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B144 F9 B143 F37
1 2 3 4 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
5 6 7 8 9 5 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
12 13
1 9 14
3 4 6 7 8
2 10
15 16
EN-05093

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK SECONDARY AIR PUMP FUSE. Is the fuse blown out? Go to step 2. Go to step 3.
Check if the secondary air pump fuse (60 A) is
blown out.
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN FUSE BOX Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Replace the fuse Repair ground
AND SECONDARY AIR PUMP. more? with a new part, short of the har-
1) Remove the secondary air pump fuse from and connect the ness between the
the fuse box. secondary air fuse box and the
2) Disconnect the secondary air pump con- pump connector. secondary air
nector. Go to step 3. pump.
3) Measure the resistance between the sec-
ondary air pump fuse and secondary air pump
connector, and chassis ground.
3 CHECK SECONDARY AIR PUMP OPERA- Does the secondary air pump Go to step 4. Go to step 5.
TION. operate?
1) Connect the test mode connector.
3) Perform the Clear Memory Mode.
4) Perform operation check for the secondary
air pump using the Subaru Select Monitor.
NOTE:
Refer to “Clear Memory Mode” <Ref. to
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-56, Clear Memory Mode.>
and “Compulsory Valve Operation Check
Mode” <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-57, Com-
pulsory Valve Operation Check Mode.> for
more operation procedures.
• The compulsory operation using the Subaru
Select Monitor is performed only for 5 seconds
in order to protect the secondary air pump.
When operating again, perform the Clear Mem-
ory Mode.
4 CHECK DUCT BETWEEN SECONDARY AIR Is there damage, clog or dis- Replace, clean or Replace the sec-
PUMP AND COMBINATION VALVE. connection of the duct? connect the duct. ondary air combi-
Check the duct between the secondary air nation valve LH.
pump and combination valve. <Ref. to
EC(H4DOTC)-21,
Secondary Air
Combi Valve.>
5 CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO SECONDARY Is the voltage 10 V or more? Replace the sec- Go to step 6.
AIR PUMP. ondary air pump.
1) Perform the Clear Memory Mode. <Ref. to
2) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. EC(H4DOTC)-20,
3) Disconnect the secondary air pump con- Secondary Air
nector. Pump.>
4) In the condition of step 3, measure the volt-
age between the secondary air pump connector
and the chassis ground.
NOTE:
Mode”. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-56, Clear
Memory Mode.>

Step Check Yes No

6 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN SECONDARY Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 7. Repair the open
AIR PUMP RELAY AND SECONDARY AIR circuit of harness
PUMP CONNECTOR. between second-
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ary air pump relay
2) Remove the secondary air pump relay. and secondary air
3) Measure the resistance of harness between pump connector.
secondary air pump relay and secondary air
pump connector.
(F9) No. 11 — (F11) No. 2:
7 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN SECONDARY Is the resistance less than 5 Ω? Go to step 8. Repair the open
AIR PUMP CONNECTOR AND CHASSIS circuit of the har-
GROUND. ness between sec-
Measure the resistance of the harness between ondary air pump
secondary air pump connector and chassis connector and
ground. chassis ground.
8 CHECK SECONDARY AIR PUMP RELAY. Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 9. Replace the sec-
1) Connect the battery to terminals No. 12 and ondary air pump
No. 13 of the secondary air pump relay. relay. <Ref. to
2) Measure the resistance between secondary EN(H4DOTC)(diag
air pump relay terminals. )-8, Electrical
Terminals Component Loca-
No. 14 — No. 11: tion.>
9 CHECK SECONDARY AIR PUMP RELAY Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 10. Repair the open or
POWER SOURCE. ground short circuit
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. of power supply
2) Measure the voltage between the second- circuit.
ary air pump relay connector and chassis
ground.
10 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Repair the poor Repair the open
SECONDARY AIR PUMP RELAY CONNEC- contact in ECM circuit of harness
TOR. connector. between ECM and
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. secondary air
2) Disconnect the connector of ECM. pump relay con-
ECM and secondary air pump relay connector.
(B136) No. 8 — (F9) No. 13:

BD:DTC P0411 SECONDARY AIR INJECTION SYSTEM INCORRECT FLOW

DETECTED
TEM INCORRECT FLOW DETECTED, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:

WIRING DIAGRAM:
B47
MAIN RELAY
5
3
SBF-7
6
4 BATTERY
MAIN
2 SBF
1
E
F9 RELAY HOLDER
6
10A
5
15
60A
MAIN FUSE 16
BOX(M/B) SECONDARY
B143 F37 4 AIR
3 COMBINATION
9 11 1 VALVE
2 5 2 RELAY1
C30
C19 14 16
C8
7 AIR
A19 10 20
A27 4 8
A29 10 VALVE
9 RELAY2
ECM 4 14
14 SECONDARY
B21
RELAY
21
22
46
47
8
12
E2 13
F11
3
2
1
6
4
1
2
E41 E40 2 SECONDARY

1 AIR PUMP
E
E40 B47 E41 B134 B136 B21
F11 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
3 4 4 5 6 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
1 2 5 6 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B144 F9 B143 F37
1 2 3 4 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
5 6 7 8 9 5 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
12 13
1 9 14
3 4 6 7 8
2 10
15 16
EN-05093

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK SECONDARY AIR COMBINATION Is there damage or disconnec- Replace the pipe Go to step 2.
VALVE. tion of the pipe? between second-
Inspection of the pipe between the secondary ary air combination
air combination valve and cylinder head. valve and cylinder
head.
2 CHECK SECONDARY AIR COMBINATION Is there any exhaust leak? Replace the pipe Repair the poor
VALVE. between second- contact in ECM
Race the engine at 2,000 rpm to check whether ary air combination connector.
or not the exhaust leak is heard. valve and cylinder
head.

BE:DTC P0413 SECONDARY AIR INJECTION SYSTEM SWITCHING VALVE “A”

CIRCUIT OPEN
TEM SWITCHING VALVE “A” CIRCUIT OPEN, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:

WIRING DIAGRAM:
B47
MAIN RELAY
5
3
SBF-7
6
4 BATTERY
MAIN
2 SBF
1
E
F9 RELAY HOLDER
6
10A
5
15
60A
MAIN FUSE 16
BOX(M/B) SECONDARY
B143 F37 4 AIR
3 COMBINATION
9 11 1 VALVE
2 5 2 RELAY1
C30
C19 14 16
C8
7 AIR
A19 10 20
A27 4 8
A29 10 VALVE
9 RELAY2
ECM 4 14
14 SECONDARY
B21
RELAY
21
22
46
47
8
12
E2 13
F11
3
2
1
6
4
1
2
E41 E40 2 SECONDARY

1 AIR PUMP
E
E40 B47 E41 B134 B136 B21
F11 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
3 4 4 5 6 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
1 2 5 6 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B144 F9 B143 F37
1 2 3 4 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
5 6 7 8 9 5 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
12 13
1 9 14
3 4 6 7 8
2 10
15 16
EN-05093

Step Check Yes No

SECONDARY AIR COMBINATION VALVE circuit of harness
RELAY 1. between ECM and
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. secondary air com-
2) Disconnect the connector from ECM and bination valve relay
secondary air combination valve relay 1. 1.
ECM and secondary air combination valve relay
1.
(B136) No. 30 — (F9) No. 2:
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Even if the mal- Repair the ground
SECONDARY AIR COMBINATION VALVE more? function indicator short circuit of har-
RELAY 1. light illuminates, ness between
Measure the resistance between ECM and the circuit has ECM and second-
chassis ground. returned to a nor- ary air combination
Connector & terminal mal condition at valve relay 1.
(B136) No. 30 — Chassis ground: this time. Repro-
duce the failure,
and then perform
the diagnosis
again.
NOTE:
In this case, tem-
porary poor con-
tact of connector
may be the cause.

BF:DTC P0414 SECONDARY AIR INJECTION SYSTEM SWITCHING VALVE “A”

CIRCUIT SHORTED
TEM SWITCHING VALVE “A” CIRCUIT SHORTED, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:

WIRING DIAGRAM:
B47
MAIN RELAY
5
3
SBF-7
6
4 BATTERY
MAIN
2 SBF
1
E
F9 RELAY HOLDER
6
10A
5
15
60A
MAIN FUSE 16
BOX(M/B) SECONDARY
B143 F37 4 AIR
3 COMBINATION
9 11 1 VALVE
2 5 2 RELAY1
C30
C19 14 16
C8
7 AIR
A19 10 20
A27 4 8
A29 10 VALVE
9 RELAY2
ECM 4 14
14 SECONDARY
B21
RELAY
21
22
46
47
8
12
E2 13
F11
3
2
1
6
4
1
2
E41 E40 2 SECONDARY

1 AIR PUMP
E
E40 B47 E41 B134 B136 B21
F11 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
3 4 4 5 6 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
1 2 5 6 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B144 F9 B143 F37
1 2 3 4 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
5 6 7 8 9 5 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
12 13
1 9 14
3 4 6 7 8
2 10
15 16
EN-05093

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the voltage 10 V or more? Repair the short Repair the poor
SECONDARY AIR COMBINATION VALVE circuit to power in contact in ECM
RELAY 1. the harness connector.
2) Disconnect the connector from ECM and secondary air com-
secondary air combination valve relay 1. bination valve relay
3) Measure the voltage between ECM and 1.
chassis ground.

BG:DTC P0416 SECONDARY AIR INJECTION SYSTEM SWITCHING VALVE “B”

CIRCUIT OPEN
TEM SWITCHING VALVE “B” CIRCUIT OPEN, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:

WIRING DIAGRAM:
B47
MAIN RELAY
5
3
SBF-7
6
4 BATTERY
MAIN
2 SBF
1
E
F9 RELAY HOLDER
6
10A
5
15
60A
MAIN FUSE 16
BOX(M/B) SECONDARY
B143 F37 4 AIR
3 COMBINATION
9 11 1 VALVE
2 5 2 RELAY1
C30
C19 14 16
C8
7 AIR
A19 10 20
A27 4 8
A29 10 VALVE
9 RELAY2
ECM 4 14
14 SECONDARY
B21
RELAY
21
22
46
47
8
12
E2 13
F11
3
2
1
6
4
1
2
E41 E40 2 SECONDARY

1 AIR PUMP
E
E40 B47 E41 B134 B136 B21
F11 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
3 4 4 5 6 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
1 2 5 6 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B144 F9 B143 F37
1 2 3 4 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
5 6 7 8 9 5 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
12 13
1 9 14
3 4 6 7 8
2 10
15 16
EN-05093

Step Check Yes No

SECONDARY AIR COMBINATION VALVE circuit of harness
RELAY 2. between ECM and
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. secondary air com-
2) Disconnect the connector from ECM and bination valve relay
secondary air combination valve relay 2. 2.
ECM and secondary air combination valve relay
2.
(B136) No. 19 — (F9) No. 9:
SECONDARY AIR COMBINATION VALVE more? function indicator short circuit of har-
RELAY 2. light illuminates, ness between
Measure the resistance between ECM and the circuit has ECM and second-
chassis ground. returned to a nor- ary air combination
Connector & terminal mal condition at valve relay 2.
(B136) No. 19 — Chassis ground: this time. Repro-
duce the failure,
and then perform
the diagnosis
again.
NOTE:
In this case, tem-
porary poor con-
tact of connector
may be the cause.

BH:DTC P0417 SECONDARY AIR INJECTION SYSTEM SWITCHING VALVE “B”

CIRCUIT SHORTED
TEM SWITCHING VALVE “B” CIRCUIT SHORTED, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:

WIRING DIAGRAM:
B47
MAIN RELAY
5
3
SBF-7
6
4 BATTERY
MAIN
2 SBF
1
E
F9 RELAY HOLDER
6
10A
5
15
60A
MAIN FUSE 16
BOX(M/B) SECONDARY
B143 F37 4 AIR
3 COMBINATION
9 11 1 VALVE
2 5 2 RELAY1
C30
C19 14 16
C8
7 AIR
A19 10 20
A27 4 8
A29 10 VALVE
9 RELAY2
ECM 4 14
14 SECONDARY
B21
RELAY
21
22
46
47
8
12
E2 13
F11
3
2
1
6
4
1
2
E41 E40 2 SECONDARY

1 AIR PUMP
E
E40 B47 E41 B134 B136 B21
F11 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
3 4 4 5 6 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
1 2 5 6 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B144 F9 B143 F37
1 2 3 4 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
5 6 7 8 9 5 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
12 13
1 9 14
3 4 6 7 8
2 10
15 16
EN-05093

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the voltage 10 V or more? Repair the short Repair the poor
SECONDARY AIR COMBINATION VALVE circuit to power in contact in ECM
RELAY 2. the harness connector.
2) Disconnect the connector from ECM and secondary air com-
secondary air combination valve relay 2. bination valve relay
3) Measure the voltage between ECM and 2.
chassis ground.

BI: DTC P0418 SECONDARY AIR INJECTION SYSTEM CONTROL “A” CIRCUIT
OPEN
TEM CONTROL “A” CIRCUIT OPEN, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:

WIRING DIAGRAM:
B47
MAIN RELAY
5
3
SBF-7
6
4 BATTERY
MAIN
2 SBF
1
E
F9 RELAY HOLDER
6
10A
5
15
60A
MAIN FUSE 16
BOX(M/B) SECONDARY
B143 F37 4 AIR
3 COMBINATION
9 11 1 VALVE
2 5 2 RELAY1
C30
C19 14 16
C8
7 AIR
A19 10 20
A27 4 8
A29 10 VALVE
9 RELAY2
ECM 4 14
14 SECONDARY
B21
RELAY
21
22
46
47
8
12
E2 13
F11
3
2
1
6
4
1
2
E41 E40 2 SECONDARY

1 AIR PUMP
E
E40 B47 E41 B134 B136 B21
F11 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
3 4 4 5 6 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
1 2 5 6 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B144 F9 B143 F37
1 2 3 4 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
5 6 7 8 9 5 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
12 13
1 9 14
3 4 6 7 8
2 10
15 16
EN-05093

Step Check Yes No

SECONDARY AIR PUMP RELAY. circuit of harness
2) Disconnect the connector from the ECM secondary air
and secondary air pump relay. pump relay.
ECM and secondary air pump relay.
(B136) No. 8 — (F9) No. 13:
SECONDARY AIR PUMP RELAY. more? function indicator short circuit of har-
Measure the resistance between ECM and light illuminates, ness between
chassis ground. the circuit has ECM and second-
Connector & terminal returned to a nor- ary air pump relay.
(B136) No. 8 — Chassis ground: mal condition at
this time. Repro-
duce the failure,
and then perform
the diagnosis
again.
NOTE:
In this case, tem-
porary poor con-
tact of connector
may be the cause.

BJ:DTC P0420 CATALYST SYSTEM EFFICIENCY BELOW THRESHOLD

(BANK 1)
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-129, DTC P0420 CATALYST SYSTEM EFFICIENCY
BELOW THRESHOLD (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Engine stalls.
• Idle mixture is out of specifications.
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY BATTERY B19 B47
SBF-5
5 T6
1 2
3
1 2 3 4
6 B19 3 4 5 6
2
4
T5 B83
2
1 B138
1
B47 1 2 3 4
REAR
E 5 6 7 8
OXYGEN SENSOR
B21
T6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
1
3
4
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
T5 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
1
3
4
42 43 44 45 46 47
B19 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
* 11 B83
* A: B134
* 2
2
B138 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
* 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
B30
B1
C4
B4
A: B134 B: B135
B: B135 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
ECM 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
C: B136 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
D: B137
D1
D2
A5
D3
D7
C: B136
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
B21 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
34
35
36
37
54
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
E2
: TERMINAL No.
: TERMINAL No.
AMONG 1, 2, 5 AND 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
E 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-05085

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM. Is there any fault in exhaust Repair or replace Go to step 2.
Check for gas leaks or air suction caused by system? the exhaust sys-
loose or dislocated nuts and bolts, and open tem. <Ref. to
hole at exhaust pipes. EX(H4DOTC)-2,
NOTE: General Descrip-
Check the following positions. tion.>
• Between cylinder head and front exhaust
pipe
• Between front exhaust pipe and front catalytic
converter
• Between front catalytic converter and rear
catalytic converter
• Loose or improperly attached front oxygen
(A/F) sensor or rear oxygen sensor
2 CHECK WAVEFORM DATA ON THE SUBA- Is a normal waveform dis- Even if the mul- Go to step 3.
RU SELECT MONITOR (WHILE DRIVING). played? function indicator
1) Drive at a constant speed between 80 — light illuminates,
112 km/h (50 — 70 MPH). the circuit has
2) After 5 minutes have elapsed in the condi- returned to a nor-
tion of step 1), use the Subaru Select Monitor mal condition at
while still driving to read the waveform data. this time.Repro-
duce the failure,
and then perform
the diagnosis
RrO2 SENSOR again.
NOTE:
In this case, tem-
porary poor con-
tact of connector
A/F LAMBDA 1 may be the cause.
RrO2 SENSOR
A/F LAMBDA 1
EN-04895

Step Check Yes No

3 CHECK WAVEFORM DATA ON THE SUBA- Is a normal waveform dis- Go to step 4. Go to step 5.
RU SELECT MONITOR (WHILE IDLING). played?
1) Run the engine at idle.
2) In the condition of step 1), use the Subaru
Select Monitor to read the waveform data.
RrO2 SENSOR
RrO2 SENSOR
EN-04896
4 CHECK CATALYTIC CONVERTER. Is the catalytic converter dam- Replace the cata- Go to step 5.
aged? lytic converter.
<Ref. to
EC(H4DOTC)-5,
Front Catalytic
Converter.>
inside.
(B135) No. 4 — (T6) No. 3:
(B135) No. 30 — (T6) No. 4:

Step Check Yes No

7 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the voltage 0.2 — 0.5 V? Go to step 8. Repair the harness
REAR OXYGEN SENSOR CONNECTOR. and connector.
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. NOTE:
2) Measure the voltage between rear oxygen Repair the follow-
sensor connector and chassis ground. ing locations.
(T6) No. 3 (+) — Chassis ground (–): harness between
the ECM and rear
oxygen sensor
• Poor contact of
the ECM and rear
oxygen sensor
• Poor contact in
ECM connector
8 CHECK REAR OXYGEN SENSOR SHIELD. Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Replace the rear Repair the open
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. oxygen sensor. circuit in the rear
2) Expose the rear oxygen sensor connector <Ref. to oxygen sensor har-
body side harness sensor shield. FU(H4DOTC)-42, ness.
3) Measure the resistance between the sensor Rear Oxygen Sen-
shield and chassis ground. sor.>

BK:DTC P0441 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM INCORRECT PURGE FLOW

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-131, DTC P0441 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYS-
TEM INCORRECT PURGE FLOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
priate DTC using
nostic Trouble
Code (DTC)”.
<Ref. to
EN(H4DOTC)(diag
)-81, List of Diag-
nostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
2 CHECK PURGE LINE OF THE PURGE CON- Is there any clogging, flattened Repair or replace Go to step 3.
TROL SOLENOID VALVE 2. part or bent in the purge line of the purge line of
purge control solenoid valve 2? purge control sole-
noid valve 2.
3 CHECK PURGE CONTROL SOLENOID Does the purge control sole- Repair the poor Replace the purge
VALVE 2. noid valve 2 operate? contact in ECM control solenoid
1) Connect the test mode connector. connector. valve 2. <Ref. to
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. EC(H4DOTC)-8,
3) Operate the purge control solenoid valve 2 Purge Control
using the Subaru Select Monitor. Solenoid Valve.>
NOTE:
Purge control solenoid valve 2 can be operated
using the Subaru Select Monitor. Regarding the
procedures, refer to “Compulsory Valve Opera-
tion Check Mode”. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(di-
ag)-57, Compulsory Valve Operation Check
Mode.>

BL:DTC P0442 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM LEAK

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-132, DTC P0442 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CON-
TROL SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED (SMALL LEAK), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Fuel odor
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY BATTERY
SBF-7
5
3
6
4
2
1 C: B136 D: B137 ECM E
B47
D29
C17
C28
C7
B97
15
14
B21
R1 50
41
48
E2
R15 R46
1
R213 R67
R144 R68 E4 E52

2
2
1
1
2
2
1
DRAIN VALVE PRESSURE PURGE CONTROL PURGE CONTROL

CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE 1 SOLENOID VALVE 2
SOLENOID VALVE
E4 R144 R213 B97 R67 B21
E52 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2
1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
4 5 6 7 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 3 4 5 6
R68 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
1 2 B47 C: B136 D: B137
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 42 43 44 45 46 47
1 2
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
3 4
5 6 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-05094

Step Check Yes No

NOTE:
tightening.
genuine fuel filler
cap.
<Ref. to
FU(H4DOTC)-57,
Fuel Filler Pipe.>
Select Monitor.
NOTE:
Subaru Select Monitor. Regarding the proce-
dures, refer to “Compulsory Valve Operation
Check Mode”. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-57,
the Subaru Select Monitor. EC(H4DOTC)-8,
NOTE: Purge Control
using the Subaru Select Monitor. EC(H4DOTC)-15,
TROL SYSTEM LINE. 1.0 mm (0.04 in) dia. on evapo- the evaporation
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ration line? line. <Ref. to
2) Disconnect the test mode connector. FU(H4DOTC)-67,
Fuel Delivery,
Return and Evapo-
ration Lines.>

Step Check Yes No

mm (0.04 in) dia. in it? to EC(H4DOTC)-7,
Canister.>
Remove the fuel tank. <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)- there any hole of more than 1.0 the fuel tank. <Ref.
51, Fuel Tank.> mm (0.04 in) dia. in it? to FU(H4DOTC)-
51, Fuel Tank.>
10 CHECK ANY OTHER MECHANICAL TROU- Is there any hole of more than Repair or replace Repair the poor
BLE IN EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CON- 1.0 mm (0.04 in) dia., crack, the hoses or pipes. contact in ECM
TROL SYSTEM. clogging, or disconnections, connector.

BM:DTC P0447 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM VENT CONTROL

CIRCUIT OPEN
TROL SYSTEM VENT CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY BATTERY
SBF-7
5
3
6
4
2
1 C: B136 D: B137 ECM E
B47
D29
C17
C28
C7
B97
15
14
B21
R1
50
41
48
E2
R15 R46
1
R213 R67
R144 R68 E4 E52

2
2
1
1
2
2
1

SOLENOID VALVE
E4 R144 R213 B97 R67 B21
E52 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2
1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
4 5 6 7 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 3 4 5 6
R68 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
1 2 B47 C: B136 D: B137
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 42 43 44 45 46 47
1 2
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
3 4
5 6 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-05094

Step Check Yes No

chassis ground.
DRAIN VALVE. more? short circuit of har-
2) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM ECM and drain
and drain valve. valve connector.
3) Measure the resistance between the drain
valve connector and chassis ground.
DRAIN VALVE. and connector.
ECM and drain valve connector. In this case, repair
(B136) No. 17 — (R144) No. 2: • Open circuit of
harness between
ECM and drain
valve connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
4 CHECK DRAIN VALVE. Is the resistance between 10 — Go to step 5. Replace the drain
Measure the resistance between drain valve 100 Ω? valve. <Ref. to
terminals. EC(H4DOTC)-18,
Terminals Drain Valve.>
No. 1 — No. 2:
5 CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO DRAIN VALVE. Is the voltage 10 V or more? Repair the poor Repair the harness
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. contact of drain and connector.
2) Measure the voltage between drain valve valve connector. NOTE:
and chassis ground. In this case, repair
(R144) No. 1 (+) — Chassis ground (–): • Open circuit of
harness between
main relay and
drain valve
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
• Poor contact of
main relay connec-
tor

BN:DTC P0448 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM VENT CONTROL

CIRCUIT SHORTED
TROL SYSTEM VENT CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Crite-
ria.>
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY BATTERY
SBF-7
5
3
6
4
2
1 C: B136 D: B137 ECM E
B47
D29
C17
C28
C7
B97
15
14
B21
R1
50
41
48
E2
R15 R46
1
R213 R67
R144 R68 E4 E52

2
2
1
1
2
2
1

SOLENOID VALVE
E4 R144 R213 B97 R67 B21
E52 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2
1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
4 5 6 7 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 3 4 5 6
R68 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
1 2 B47 C: B136 D: B137
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 42 43 44 45 46 47
1 2
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
3 4
5 6 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-05094

Step Check Yes No

DRAIN VALVE. circuit to power in
and drain valve. drain valve con-
chassis ground.
2 CHECK DRAIN VALVE. Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Replace the drain Repair the poor
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. valve. <Ref. to contact in ECM
2) Measure the resistance between drain valve EC(H4DOTC)-18, connector.
terminals. Drain Valve.>
Terminals
No. 1 — No. 2:

BO:DTC P0451 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE

SENSOR
TROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
FUEL
TANK
PRESSURE
SENSOR
2
1
3
R47
R213
7
R15
R1
13
17
6
B97
* ARRANGEMENT
*
*
B83
22
32
30
B135 ECM
B135
R47 R213 B83 B97
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
4 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-05095

Step Check Yes No

2) Open the fuel flap.
2 CHECK PRESSURE VACUUM LINE. Is there any fault in pressure/ Repair or replace Replace the fuel
NOTE: vacuum line? the hoses and tank pressure sen-
Check the following items. pipes. sor. <Ref. to
• Disconnection, leakage and clogging of the EC(H4DOTC)-14,
vacuum hoses and pipes between fuel tank Fuel Tank Pres-
pressure sensor and fuel tank sure Sensor.>
• Disconnection, leakage and clogging of air
ventilation hoses and pipes between fuel filler
pipe and fuel tank

BP:DTC P0452 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE

SENSOR LOW INPUT
TROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
FUEL
TANK
PRESSURE
SENSOR
2
1
3
R47
R213
7
R15
R1
13
17
6
B97
* ARRANGEMENT
*
*
B83
22
32
30
B135 ECM
B135
R47 R213 B83 B97
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
4 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-05095

Step Check Yes No

1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. –7.45 kPa (–55.85 mmHg, –2.2 function indicator
2) Read the data of fuel tank pressure sensor inHg)? light illuminates,
tor.> again.
tact of connector
may be the cause.
2 CHECK FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR Is the voltage 4.5 V or more? Go to step 3. Repair the harness
POWER SOURCE. and connector.
2) Disconnect the connector from the fuel tank In this case, repair
pressure sensor. the following item:
4) Measure the voltage between the fuel tank harness between
pressure sensor connector and chassis ground. ECM and fuel tank
(R47) No. 3 (+) — Chassis ground (–): connector
• Poor contact in
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
TOR. NOTE:
the ECM and fuel tank pressure sensor connec- harness between
tor. ECM and fuel tank
(B135) No. 32 — (R47) No. 2: connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR CONNEC- more? short circuit of har-
TOR. ness between
Measure the resistance between ECM and ECM and fuel tank
chassis ground. pressure sensor
5 CHECK POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact in the Repair the poor Replace the fuel
Check for poor contact between the ECM and ECM or fuel tank pressure sen- contact in the ECM tank pressure sen-
fuel tank pressure sensor connector. sor connector? or fuel tank pres- sor. <Ref. to
sure sensor con- EC(H4DOTC)-14,
nector. Fuel Tank Pres-
sure Sensor.>

BQ:DTC P0453 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE

SENSOR HIGH INPUT
TROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
FUEL
TANK
PRESSURE
SENSOR
2
1
3
R47
R213
7
R15
R1
13
17
6
B97
* ARRANGEMENT
*
*
B83
22
32
30
B135 ECM
B135
R47 R213 B83 B97
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
4 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-05095

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the measured value 7.98 kPa Go to step 2. Even if the mal-
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. (59.85 mmHg, 2.36 inHg) or function indicator
2) Read the data of fuel tank pressure sensor more? light illuminates,
tor.> again.
tact of connector
may be the cause.
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the measured value 7.98 kPa Repair the short Go to step 3.
FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR CONNEC- (59.85 mmHg, 2.36 inHg) or circuit to power in
TOR. more? the harness
2) Disconnect the connector from the fuel tank fuel tank pressure
pressure sensor. sensor connector.
4) Read the data of fuel tank pressure sensor
signal using the Subaru Select Monitor or gen-
eral scan tool.
NOTE:
tor.>
TOR. NOTE:
fuel tank pressure sensor connector and engine • Open circuit of
ground. harness between
Connector & terminal ECM and fuel tank
(R47) No. 1 — Engine ground: pressure sensor
connector
• Poor contact in
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
4 CHECK POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact in fuel tank Repair the poor Replace the fuel
Check for poor contact of the fuel tank pressure pressure sensor connector? contact in fuel tank tank pressure sen-
sensor connector. pressure sensor sor. <Ref. to
connector. EC(H4DOTC)-14,
Fuel Tank Pres-
sure Sensor.>

BR:DTC P0456 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM LEAK

DETECTED (VERY SMALL LEAK)
TROL SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED (VERY SMALL LEAK), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Crite-
ria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Fuel odor
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY BATTERY
SBF-7
5
3
6
4
2
1 C: B136 D: B137 ECM E
B47
D29
C17
C28
C7
B97
15
14
B21
R1
50
41
48
E2
R15 R46
1
R213 R67
R144 R68 E4 E52

2
2
1
1
2
2
1

SOLENOID VALVE
E4 R144 R213 B97 R67 B21
E52 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2
1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
4 5 6 7 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 3 4 5 6
R68 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
1 2 B47 C: B136 D: B137
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 42 43 44 45 46 47
1 2
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
3 4
5 6 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-05094

Step Check Yes No

NOTE:
or was loose or if the cap chain was caught
while tightening.
genuine fuel filler
cap.
<Ref. to
FU(H4DOTC)-57,
Fuel Filler Pipe.>
Select Monitor.
NOTE:
Drain valve can be operated using the Subaru
Select Monitor. Regarding the procedures, re-
fer to “Compulsory Valve Operation Check
Mode”. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-57, Com-
pulsory Valve Operation Check Mode.>
NOTE: Purge Control
TROL SYSTEM LINE. 0.5 mm (0.020 in) dia. on evap- the evaporation
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. oration line? line. <Ref. to
Fuel Delivery,
Return and Evapo-
ration Lines.>

Step Check Yes No

mm (0.020 in) dia. in it? to EC(H4DOTC)-7,
Canister.>
Remove the fuel tank. <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)- there any hole of more than 0.5 the fuel tank. <Ref.
51, Fuel Tank.> mm (0.020 in) dia. in it? to FU(H4DOTC)-
51, Fuel Tank.>
10 CHECK ANY OTHER MECHANICAL TROU- Is there any hole of more than Repair or replace Repair the poor
BLE IN EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CON- 0.5 mm (0.020 in) dia., crack, the hoses or pipes. contact in ECM
TROL SYSTEM. clogging, or disconnections, connector.

BS:DTC P0457 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM LEAK

DETECTED (FUEL CAP LOOSE/OFF)
TROL SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED (FUEL CAP LOOSE/OFF), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting
Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Fuel odor
• Fuel filler cap loose or lost
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY BATTERY
SBF-7
5
3
6
4
2
1 C: B136 D: B137 ECM E
B47
D29
C17
C28
C7
B97
15
14
B21
R1
50
41
48
E2
R15 R46
1
R213 R67
R144 R68 E4 E52

2
2
1
1
2
2
1

SOLENOID VALVE
E4 R144 R213 B97 R67 B21
E52 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2
1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
4 5 6 7 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 3 4 5 6
R68 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
1 2 B47 C: B136 D: B137
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 42 43 44 45 46 47
1 2
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
3 4
5 6 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-05094

Step Check Yes No

NOTE:
tightening.
genuine fuel filler
cap.
<Ref. to
FU(H4DOTC)-57,
Fuel Filler Pipe.>
Select Monitor.
NOTE:
NOTE: Purge Control
7 CHECK EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CON- Is there any disconnection, Repair or replace Go to step 8.
TROL SYSTEM LINE. damage or clogging on the the evaporation
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. evaporation line? line. <Ref. to
Fuel Delivery,
Return and Evapo-
ration Lines.>

Step Check Yes No

8 CHECK CANISTER. Is the canister damaged? Repair or replace Go to step 9.
the canister. <Ref.
to EC(H4DOTC)-7,
Canister.>
9 CHECK FUEL TANK. Is the fuel tank damaged? Repair or replace Go to step 10.
Remove the fuel tank. <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)- the fuel tank. <Ref.
51, Fuel Tank.> to FU(H4DOTC)-
51, Fuel Tank.>
10 CHECK ANY OTHER MECHANICAL TROU- Are there holes, cracks, clog- Repair or replace Repair the poor
BLE IN EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CON- ging, or disconnections, mis- the hoses or pipes. contact in ECM
TROL SYSTEM. connection of hoses or pipes in connector.
evaporative emission control
system?

BT:DTC P0458 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM PURGE CONTROL VALVE

CIRCUIT LOW
TEM PURGE CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Erroneous idling
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY BATTERY
SBF-7
5
3
6
4
2
1 C: B136 D: B137 ECM E
B47
D29
C17
C28
C7
B97
15
14
B21
R1
50
41
48
E2
R15 R46
1
R213 R67
R144 R68 E4 E52

2
2
1
1
2
2
1

SOLENOID VALVE
E4 R144 R213 B97 R67 B21
E52 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2
1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
4 5 6 7 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 3 4 5 6
R68 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
1 2 B47 C: B136 D: B137
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 42 43 44 45 46 47
1 2
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
3 4
5 6 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-05094

Step Check Yes No

chassis ground.
PURGE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE. more? short circuit of har-
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and ECM and purge
purge control solenoid valve. control solenoid
3) Measure the resistance between the purge valve connector.
control solenoid valve connector and engine
ground.
PURGE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE. and connector.
ECM and purge control solenoid valve. In this case, repair
harness between
ECM and purge
control solenoid
valve connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
4 CHECK PURGE CONTROL SOLENOID Is the resistance between 10 — Go to step 5. Replace the purge
VALVE. 100 Ω? control solenoid
1) Remove the purge control solenoid valve. valve. <Ref. to
2) Measure the resistance between purge con- EC(H4DOTC)-8,
No. 1 — No. 2:
5 CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO PURGE CON- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Repair the poor Repair the harness
TROL SOLENOID VALVE. contact of purge and connector.
2) Measure the voltage between purge control valve connector. In this case, repair
solenoid valve and engine ground. the following item:
the main relay and
purge control sole-
noid valve
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
• Poor contact of
main relay connec-
tor

BU:DTC P0459 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM PURGE CONTROL VALVE

CIRCUIT HIGH
TEM PURGE CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Erroneous idling
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY BATTERY
SBF-7
5
3
6
4
2
1 C: B136 D: B137 ECM E
B47
D29
C17
C28
C7
B97
15
14
B21
R1
50
41
48
E2
R15 R46
1
R213 R67
R144 R68 E4 E52

2
2
1
1
2
2
1

SOLENOID VALVE
E4 R144 R213 B97 R67 B21
E52 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2
1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
4 5 6 7 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 3 4 5 6
R68 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
1 2 B47 C: B136 D: B137
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 42 43 44 45 46 47
1 2
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
3 4
5 6 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-05094

Step Check Yes No

PURGE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE. circuit to power in
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and between the ECM
purge control solenoid valve. and purge control
chassis ground.
2 CHECK PURGE CONTROL SOLENOID Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Replace the purge Repair the poor
VALVE. control solenoid contact in ECM
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. valve. <Ref. to connector.
2) Measure the resistance between purge con- EC(H4DOTC)-8,
No. 1 — No. 2:
BV:DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-161, DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
priate DTC using level sensor and
the “List of Diag- fuel sub level sen-
nostic Trouble sor. <Ref. to
Code (DTC)”. FU(H4DOTC)-62,
<Ref. to Fuel Level Sen-
EN(H4DOTC)(diag sor.> <Ref. to
)-81, List of Diag- FU(H4DOTC)-63,
nostic Trouble Fuel Sub Level
Code (DTC).> Sensor.>
BW:DTC P0462 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT LOW

NOTE:
For the diagnostic procedure, refer to DTC P0463. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-239, DTC P0463 FUEL LEV-
EL SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>

BX:DTC P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT HIGH

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-165, DTC P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK FOR ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY. Is DTC P0462 or P0463 dis- Check the combi- Even if the mal-
played on the Subaru Select nation meter. <Ref. function indicator
Monitor? to IDI-13, CHECK light illuminates,
and then perform
the diagnosis
again.
NOTE:
In this case, tem-
porary poor con-
tact of connector
may be the cause.
BY:DTC P0464 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT INTERMITTENT

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-167, DTC P0464 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT IN-
TERMITTENT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK FOR ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY. Is DTC P0464 displayed on the Check the combi- Even if the mal-
display? nation meter. <Ref. function indicator
to IDI-13, CHECK light illuminates,
and then perform
the diagnosis
again.
NOTE:
In this case, tem-
porary poor con-
tact of connector
may be the cause.

BZ:DTC P0483 FAN RATIONALITY CHECK

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-170, DTC P0483 FAN RATIONALITY CHECK, Diag-
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Occurrence of noise
• Overheating
CAUTION:
NOTE:
If the vehicle, with the engine idling, is placed very close to a wall or another vehicle, preventing normal cool-
ing function, the OBD system may detect malfunction.
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK FOR ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY. Is any other DTC displayed? Check the appro- Check radiator fan,
priate DTC using fan motor and ther-
the “List of Diag- mostat and if ther-
nostic Trouble mostat is stuck,
Code (DTC)”. replace thermo-
<Ref. to stat. <Ref. to
EN(H4DOTC)(diag CO(H4DOTC)-24,
)-81, List of Diag- Radiator Main Fan
nostic Trouble and Fan Motor.>
Code (DTC).> <Ref. to
CO(H4DOTC)-27,
Radiator Sub Fan
and Fan Motor.>
CA:DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR “A”

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-171, DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR “A”, Di-
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK DTC OF ABS. Is DTC of ABS displayed? Perform the diag- Repair poor con-
Check DTC of ABS. nosis according to tact of the ECM
DTC. <Ref. to connector.
ABS(diag)-33, List
of Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>

CB:DTC P0506 IDLE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM RPM LOWER THAN EXPECTED
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-173, DTC P0506 IDLE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM RPM
LOWER THAN EXPECTED, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Hard to start the engine.
• Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
BATTERY
CONTROL RELAY
7
5 4 6
6
8 MAIN RELAY
B47
C21
C1
ECM
A: B134 C: B136 D: B137 E

A19
A29
A28
A18
D3
D2
D1
D7
A5
D4
D5
C6
B122
*
B21
*
21
37
35
34
54
36
22
39
38
E2
:TERMINAL No.
5
1
2
3
E
ELECTRONIC
THROTTLE CONTROL
E
E57
B362 B122 B21 E57 B47
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2
3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1 2 5 6 7 8 3 4
4 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 5 6
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
5
7 8
6
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
A: B134 C: B136 D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-05089

Step Check Yes No

priate DTC using
nostic Trouble
Code (DTC)”.
<Ref. to
EN(H4DOTC)(diag
)-81, List of Diag-
nostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
2 CHECK AIR CLEANER ELEMENT. Is there excessive clogging on Replace the air Go to step 3.
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. air cleaner element? cleaner element.
2) Check the air cleaner element. <Ref. to
IN(H4DOTC)-7, Air
Cleaner Element.>
1) Remove the electronic throttle control. <Ref. tronic throttle con- P2101. <Ref. to
to FU(H4DOTC)-12, REMOVAL, Throttle trol. EN(H4DOTC)(diag
Body.> )-328, DTC P2101
2) Check the electronic throttle control. THROTTLE
ACTUATOR CON-
TROL MOTOR
CIRCUIT RANGE/
PERFORMANCE,
Diagnostic Proce-
dure with Diagnos-
tic Trouble Code
(DTC).>

CC:DTC P0507 IDLE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM RPM HIGHER THAN EXPECTED
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-175, DTC P0507 IDLE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM RPM
HIGHER THAN EXPECTED, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
BATTERY
CONTROL RELAY
7
5 4 6
6
8 MAIN RELAY
B47
C21
C1
ECM
A: B134 C: B136 D: B137 E

A19
A29
A28
A18
D3
D2
D1
D7
A5
D4
D5
C6
B122
*
B21
*
21
37
35
34
54
36
22
39
38
E2
:TERMINAL No.
5
1
2
3
E
ELECTRONIC
THROTTLE CONTROL
E
E57
B362 B122 B21 E57 B47
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2
3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1 2 5 6 7 8 3 4
4 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 5 6
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
5
7 8
6
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
A: B134 C: B136 D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-05089

Step Check Yes No

priate DTC using
nostic Trouble
Code (DTC)”.
<Ref. to
EN(H4DOTC)(diag
)-81, List of Diag-
nostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
throttle body
body gasket
2) Remove the electronic throttle control. <Ref. trol. EN(H4DOTC)(diag
to FU(H4DOTC)-12, REMOVAL, Throttle )-328, DTC P2101
Body.> THROTTLE
3) Check the electronic throttle control. ACTUATOR CON-
TROL MOTOR
CIRCUIT RANGE/
PERFORMANCE,
Diagnostic Proce-
dure with Diagnos-
tic Trouble Code
(DTC).>

CD:DTC P0512 STARTER REQUEST CIRCUIT

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-177, DTC P0512 STARTER REQUEST CIRCUIT, Di-
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
BATTERY
2 3
B72 IGNITION
AT MT SWITCH
4
INHIBITOR CLUTCH
RELAY SWITCH
B226 B106 E
3
AT MT
STARTER
RELAY
15
13
B225
STARTER MOTOR
16
14
M AT : AT MODEL
B14
MT : MT MODEL
32
20
B136 ECM
B225 B106 B136 B72 B226
1 2 9 13 17 21 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 1 2
10 14 18 22 2 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 4 5 6 3
3 4
11 12 15 16 19 20 23 24 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 4
5 6 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
7 8 25 29 33 37
26 30 34 38
27 28 31 32 35 36 39 40
EN-05081

Step Check Yes No

priate DTC using
nostic Trouble
Code (DTC)”.
<Ref. to
EN(H4DOTC)(diag
)-81, List of Diag-
nostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND IG- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Repair the short Repair the poor
NITION SWITCH. circuit to power in contact in ECM
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. the harness connector.
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. ignition switch.
chassis ground.

CE:DTC P0519 IDLE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-179, DTC P0519 IDLE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM PER-
FORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
priate DTC using
nostic Trouble
Code (DTC)”.
<Ref. to
EN(H4DOTC)(diag
)-81, List of Diag-
nostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
throttle body
body gasket
2) Remove the electronic throttle control. <Ref. trol. EN(H4DOTC)(diag
to FU(H4DOTC)-12, REMOVAL, Throttle )-328, DTC P2101
Body.> THROTTLE
3) Check the electronic throttle control. ACTUATOR CON-
TROL MOTOR
CIRCUIT RANGE/
PERFORMANCE,
Diagnostic Proce-
dure with Diagnos-
tic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
CF:DTC P0600 SERIAL COMMUNICATION LINK

NOTE:
For the diagnostic procedure, refer to LAN section. <Ref. to LAN(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.>

CG:DTC P0604 INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE RANDOM ACCESS MEMORY

(RAM) ERROR
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-181, DTC P0604 INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE
RANDOM ACCESS MEMORY (RAM) ERROR, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY

5
SBF-7
6
4
No.13
2
1
6 3
C23
B19
B5
B2
A7
A: B134
B: B135
ECM E
C: B136
D: B137
D1
D2
A5
D3
D7
B21
34
35
36
37
54
E2
B72 B47 B21 A: B134 B: B135
1 2 3 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
4 5 6 3 4 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
5 6 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54 C: B136 D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-04940

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK FOR ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY. Is any other DTC displayed? Check the appro- Even if the mal-
priate DTC using function indicator
the “List of Diag- light illuminates,
nostic Trouble the circuit has
Code (DTC)”. returned to a nor-
<Ref. to mal condition at
EN(H4DOTC)(diag this time. Repro-
)-81, List of Diag- duce the failure,
nostic Trouble and then perform
Code (DTC).> the diagnosis
again.
NOTE:
In this case, tem-
porary poor con-
tact of connector
may be the cause.
CH:DTC P0605 INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE READ ONLY MEMORY (ROM)

ERROR
NOTE:
For the diagnostic procedure, refer to DTC P0607. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-250, DTC P0607 CONTROL
MODULE PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>

CI: DTC P0607 CONTROL MODULE PERFORMANCE

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-184, DTC P0607 CONTROL MODULE PERFOR-
MANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY

5
SBF-7
6
4
No.13
2
IGNITION
1 B72 BATTERY
SWITCH

6 3
C23
B19
B5
B2
A7
ECM
A: B134 B: B135 C: B136 D: B137

A29
A19
A18
A28
D3
D2
D7
D4
D5
D1
A5
E
C6
B122
*
*
B21
37
35
54
21
34
36
22
39
38
E2

* ARRANGEMENT
5
1
2
3
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE
E CONTROL E
E57
B72 B47 B122 B21 E57
1 2
1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6
3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
4 5 6 5 6 7 8
5 6 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
A: B134 B: B135 C: B136 D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-05096

Step Check Yes No

1) Start the engine. ground short circuit
(B134) No. 19 — (E57) No. 5:
(B134) No. 29 — (E57) No. 3:
4 CHECK ECM GROUND HARNESS. Is the voltage less than 1 V? Repair the poor Repair the follow-
1) Connect all the connectors. contact in ECM ing item.
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. connector. • Further tighten-
3) Measure the voltage between ECM and ing of the engine
chassis ground. ground terminal
Connector & terminal • Poor contact of
(B134) No. 5 (+) — Chassis ground (–): coupling connector
CJ:DTC P0638 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL RANGE/PERFORMANCE

(BANK 1)
NOTE:
For the diagnostic procedure, refer to DTC P2101. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-328, DTC P2101 THROT-
TLE ACTUATOR CONTROL MOTOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with Di-
agnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>

CK:DTC P0691 FAN 1 CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-189, DTC P0691 FAN 1 CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW,
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Overheating
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
Trouble Code to CO(H4DOTC)-
(DTC)”. <Ref. to 8, Radiator Fan
EN(H4DOTC)(diag System.>
)-81, List of Diag-
nostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
CL:DTC P0692 FAN 1 CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-190, DTC P0692 FAN 1 CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH,
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Overheating
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
Trouble Code to CO(H4DOTC)-
(DTC)”. <Ref. to 8, Radiator Fan
EN(H4DOTC)(diag System.>
)-81, List of Diag-
nostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
CM:DTC P0700 TRANSMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM (MIL REQUEST)

NOTE:
CN:DTC P0851 PARK/NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT LOW (AT MODEL)
NOTE:

CO:DTC P0851 NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT LOW (MT MODEL)

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-193, DTC P0851 NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT
LOW (MT MODEL), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Erroneous idling
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B55
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
B136 ECM 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
19 20 21 22 23 24
31
6
MT
B136
1 2 3 4 5 6
AT 19 TCM B55
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
MT
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
*
B128
B122
1 2
3 4
*
B128
B122
3
T9
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
6M
5M
5M : T12
6M
1 2
5M

* ARRANGEMENT
AT : AT MODEL
2
T12 T12
1
MT : MT MODEL
6M : T12
5M : 5MT MODEL
6M : 6MT MODEL
2 1
NEUTRAL NEUTRAL
POSITION POSITION
SWITCH SWITCH
EN-05097

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF ECM. Is the voltage 10 V or more? Repair the poor Go to step 2.
2) Place the shift lever in a position except for connector.
neutral.
chassis ground.
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Repair the short Repair the ground
NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH CONNEC- more? circuit of transmis- short circuit of har-
TOR. sion harness, or ness between
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. replace the neutral ECM and transmis-
2) Disconnect connectors from the ECM and position switch. sion harness con-
transmission harness connector. nector.
chassis ground.
CP:DTC P0852 PARK/NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH (AT MODEL)

NOTE:

CQ:DTC P0852 NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH (MT MODEL)

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-195, DTC P0852 NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT
HIGH (MT MODEL), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Erroneous idling
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B55
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
B136 ECM 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
19 20 21 22 23 24
31
6
MT
B136
1 2 3 4 5 6
AT 19 TCM B55
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
MT
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
*
B128
B122
1 2
3 4
*
B128
B122
3
T9
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
6M
5M
5M : T12
6M
1 2
5M

* ARRANGEMENT
AT : AT MODEL
2
T12 T12
1
MT : MT MODEL
6M : T12
5M : 5MT MODEL
6M : 6MT MODEL
2 1
NEUTRAL NEUTRAL
POSITION POSITION
SWITCH SWITCH
EN-05097

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF ECM. Is the voltage less than 1 V? Repair the poor Go to step 2.
2) Place the shift lever in neutral. connector.
chassis ground.
NEUTRAL SWITCH CONNECTOR. circuit of harness
2) Disconnect connectors from the ECM and transmission har-
transmission harness. ness connector.
ECM and transmission harness connector.
5MT model:
(B136) No. 31 — (T12) No. 1:
6MT model:
(B136) No. 31 — (T12) No. 2:
NEUTRAL SWITCH CONNECTOR. and connector.
transmission harness connector and engine In this case, repair
ground. the following item:
5MT model: harness between
(T12) No. 2 — Engine ground: transmission har-
6MT model: ness connector
(T12) No. 1 — Engine ground: and engine ground
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
4 CHECK NEUTRAL SWITCH. Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Repair the poor Repair the open
1) Place the shift lever in neutral. contact of trans- circuit of transmis-
2) Measure the resistance between transmis- mission harness sion harness, or
sion harness connector terminals. connector. replace the neutral
Connector & terminal switch.
(T12) No. 1 — No. 2:

CR:DTC P1152 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE (LOW)

(BANK 1 SENSOR 1)
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-196, DTC P1152 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/
PERFORMANCE (LOW) (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B18
1 2
BATTERY 3 4
MAIN RELAY
SBF-5 B47
5
3 1 2
3 4
6 5 6
4
2
2 B21
1
FRONT
OXYGEN (A/F)
E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
B47 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
SENSOR
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
B18
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
1
4
3
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
*
* A: B134
B138 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
B8
B9
B1
C2
C3
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
A: B134 B: B135
B: B135
ECM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
C: B136
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
D: B137 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
D1
D2
A5
D3
D7
C: B136
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
B21 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
34
35
36
37
54
E2
* ARRANGEMENT AMONG
1, 2, 5 AND 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
E 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
B138
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
EN-05084

Step Check Yes No

TOR. inside.
TOR. NOTE:
(B135) No. 9 — (B18) No. 3: connector
(B135) No. 8 — (B18) No. 4: • Poor contact in
front oxygen (A/F)
sensor connector
• Poor contact in
ECM connector
sor connector. FU(H4DOTC)-40,
Front Oxygen (A/F)
Sensor.>

CS:DTC P1153 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE (HIGH)

(BANK 1 SENSOR 1)
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-198, DTC P1153 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/
PERFORMANCE (HIGH) (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B18
1 2
BATTERY 3 4
MAIN RELAY
SBF-5 B47
5
3 1 2
3 4
6 5 6
4
2
2 B21
1
FRONT
OXYGEN (A/F)
E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
B47 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
SENSOR
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
B18
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
1
4
3
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
*
* A: B134
B138 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
B8
B9
B1
C2
C3
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
A: B134 B: B135
B: B135
ECM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
C: B136
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
D: B137 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
D1
D2
A5
D3
D7
C: B136
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
B21 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
34
35
36
37
54
E2
* ARRANGEMENT AMONG
1, 2, 5 AND 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
E 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
B138
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
EN-05084

Step Check Yes No

TOR. inside.
TOR. ness between
2) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM. gen (A/F) sensor
3) Measure the resistance between ECM and connector.
chassis ground.
1) Connect the connector to ECM.
chassis ground.
4 CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL FOR ECM. Is the voltage 4.95 V or more? Go to step 5. Replace the front
Measure the voltage between ECM and chassis oxygen (A/F) sen-
ground. sor. <Ref. to
Connector & terminal FU(H4DOTC)-40,
(B135) No. 8 (+) — Chassis ground (–): Front Oxygen (A/F)
Sensor.>
Measure the voltage between ECM and chassis circuit to power in tact of the ECM
ground. the harness connector.
(B135) No. 9 (+) — Chassis ground (–): and front oxygen
(B135) No. 8 (+) — Chassis ground (–): (A/F) sensor con-
replace the ECM.
<Ref. to
FU(H4DOTC)-44,
Engine Control
Module (ECM).>
CT:DTC P1160 RETURN SPRING FAILURE

NOTE:
For the diagnostic procedure, refer to DTC P2101. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-328, DTC P2101 THROT-
TLE ACTUATOR CONTROL MOTOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with Di-
agnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>

CU:DTC P1400 FUEL TANK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT

LOW
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-202, DTC P1400 FUEL TANK PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY BATTERY
SBF-7
5
3
6
4
2
1 C: B136 D: B137 ECM E
B47
D29
C17
C28
C7
B97
15
14
B21
R1
50
41
48
E2
R15 R46
1
R213 R67
R144 R68 E4 E52

2
2
1
1
2
2
1

SOLENOID VALVE
E4 R144 R213 B97 R67 B21
E52 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2
1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
4 5 6 7 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 3 4 5 6
R68 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
1 2 B47 C: B136 D: B137
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 42 43 44 45 46 47
1 2
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
3 4
5 6 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-05094

Step Check Yes No

chassis ground.
PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE. more? short circuit of har-
2) Disconnect the connector from the ECM ECM and pressure
and pressure control solenoid valve. control solenoid
3) Measure the resistance between pressure valve connector.
control solenoid valve and chassis ground.
PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE. and connector.
ECM and pressure control solenoid valve con- In this case, repair
nector. the following item:
(B136) No. 28 — (R68) No. 2: harness between
ECM and pressure
control solenoid
valve connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
4 CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID Is the resistance between 10 — Go to step 5. Replace the pres-
VALVE. 100 Ω? sure control sole-
Measure the resistance between pressure con- noid valve. <Ref. to
trol solenoid valve terminals. EC(H4DOTC)-15,
Terminals Pressure Control
No. 1 — No. 2: Solenoid Valve.>
5 CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO THE PRES- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Repair the poor Repair the harness
SURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE. contact of pressure and connector.
2) Measure the voltage between pressure con- valve connector. In this case, repair
trol solenoid valve and chassis ground. the following item:
(R68) No. 1 (+) — Chassis ground (–): harness between
main relay and
pressure control
solenoid valve
connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
• Poor contact of
main relay connec-
tor

CV:DTC P1410 SECONDARY AIR INJECTION SYSTEM SWITCHING VALVE

STUCK OPEN
TEM SWITCHING VALVE STUCK OPEN, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:

WIRING DIAGRAM:
B47
MAIN RELAY
5
3
SBF-7
6
4 BATTERY
MAIN
2 SBF
1
E
F9 RELAY HOLDER
6
10A
5
15
60A
MAIN FUSE 16
BOX(M/B) SECONDARY
B143 F37 4 AIR
3 COMBINATION
9 11 1 VALVE
2 5 2 RELAY1
C30
C19 14 16
C8
7 AIR
A19 10 20
A27 4 8
A29 10 VALVE
9 RELAY2
ECM 4 14
14 SECONDARY
B21
RELAY
21
22
46
47
8
12
E2 13
F11
3
2
1
6
4
1
2
E41 E40 2 SECONDARY

1 AIR PUMP
E
E40 B47 E41 B134 B136 B21
F11 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
3 4 4 5 6 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
1 2 5 6 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B144 F9 B143 F37
1 2 3 4 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
5 6 7 8 9 5 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
12 13
1 9 14
3 4 6 7 8
2 10
15 16
EN-05093

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK SECONDARY AIR COMBINATION Are there air leaks from the pipe Replace the sec- Even if the mal-
VALVE. connections? ondary air combi- function indicator
1) Remove the secondary air combination nation valve on the light illuminates,
valve. <Ref. to EC(H4DOTC)-21, Secondary Air side with the air the circuit has
Combi Valve.> leak. <Ref. to returned to a nor-
2) Blow in air from the secondary air combina- EC(H4DOTC)-21, mal condition at
tion valve air inlet, and check whether there are Secondary Air this time. Repro-
leaks at the pipe connections. Combi Valve.> duce the failure,
and then perform
the diagnosis
again.
NOTE:
In this case, tem-
porary poor con-
tact of connector
may be the cause.

CW:DTC P1418 SECONDARY AIR INJECTION SYSTEM CONTROL “A” CIRCUIT

SHORTED
TEM CONTROL “A” CIRCUIT SHORTED, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:

WIRING DIAGRAM:
B47
MAIN RELAY
5
3
SBF-7
6
4 BATTERY
MAIN
2 SBF
1
E
F9 RELAY HOLDER
6
10A
5
15
60A
MAIN FUSE 16
BOX(M/B) SECONDARY
B143 F37 4 AIR
3 COMBINATION
9 11 1 VALVE
2 5 2 RELAY1
C30
C19 14 16
C8
7 AIR
A19 10 20
A27 4 8
A29 10 VALVE
9 RELAY2
ECM 4 14
14 SECONDARY
B21
RELAY
21
22
46
47
8
12
E2 13
F11
3
2
1
6
4
1
2
E41 E40 2 SECONDARY

1 AIR PUMP
E
E40 B47 E41 B134 B136 B21
F11 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
3 4 4 5 6 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
1 2 5 6 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B144 F9 B143 F37
1 2 3 4 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
5 6 7 8 9 5 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
12 13
1 9 14
3 4 6 7 8
2 10
15 16
EN-05093

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the voltage 10 V or more? Repair the short Even if the mal-
SECONDARY AIR PUMP RELAY. circuit to power in function indicator
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. the harness light illuminates,
2) Disconnect the connector from the ECM between ECM and the circuit has
and secondary air pump relay. secondary air returned to a nor-
3) Measure the voltage between ECM and pump relay. mal condition at
chassis ground. this time. Repro-
Connector & terminal duce the failure,
(B136) No. 8 (+) — Chassis ground (–): and then perform
the diagnosis
again.
NOTE:
In this case, tem-
porary poor con-
tact of connector
may be the cause.

CX:DTC P1420 FUEL TANK PRESSURE CONTROL SOL. VALVE CIRCUIT HIGH
DC DETECTING CONDITION:
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-207, DTC P1420 FUEL TANK PRESSURE CONTROL
SOL. VALVE CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY BATTERY
SBF-7
5
3
6
4
2
1 C: B136 D: B137 ECM E
B47
D29
C17
C28
C7
B97
15
14
B21
R1
50
41
48
E2
R15 R46
1
R213 R67
R144 R68 E4 E52

2
2
1
1
2
2
1

SOLENOID VALVE
E4 R144 R213 B97 R67 B21
E52 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2
1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
4 5 6 7 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 3 4 5 6
R68 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
1 2 B47 C: B136 D: B137
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 42 43 44 45 46 47
1 2
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
3 4
5 6 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-05094

Step Check Yes No

PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE. circuit to power in
2) Disconnect the connector from the ECM between ECM and
and pressure control solenoid valve. pressure control
chassis ground.
2 CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Replace the pres- Repair the poor
VALVE. sure control sole- contact in ECM
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. noid valve. <Ref. to connector.
2) Measure the resistance between pressure EC(H4DOTC)-15,
control solenoid valve terminals. Pressure Control
No. 1 — No. 2:

CY:DTC P1443 VENT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION PROBLEM

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-209, DTC P1443 VENT CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE FUNCTION PROBLEM, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper fuel supply
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY BATTERY
SBF-7
5
3
6
4
2
1 C: B136 D: B137 ECM E
B47
D29
C17
C28
C7
B97
15
14
B21
R1
50
41
48
E2
R15 R46
1
R213 R67
R144 R68 E4 E52

2
2
1
1
2
2
1

SOLENOID VALVE
E4 R144 R213 B97 R67 B21
E52 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2
1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
4 5 6 7 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 3 4 5 6
R68 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
1 2 B47 C: B136 D: B137
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 42 43 44 45 46 47
1 2
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
3 4
5 6 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-05094

Step Check Yes No

priate DTC using
nostic Trouble
Code (DTC)”.
<Ref. to
EN(H4DOTC)(diag
)-81, List of Diag-
nostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
2 CHECK DRAIN HOSE. Is there clogging in the drain Replace the drain Go to step 3.
Check the drain hose for clogging. hose? hose.
3 CHECK DRAIN VALVE OPERATION. Does the drain valve operate? Repair the poor Replace the drain
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. contact in ECM valve. <Ref. to
2) Connect the test mode connector at the connector. EC(H4DOTC)-18,
lower portion of instrument panel (on the Drain Valve.>
driver’s side).
4) Operate the drain valve.
NOTE:

CZ:DTC P1491 POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION (BLOW-BY) FUNCTION

PROBLEM
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-211, DTC P1491 POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILA-
TION (BLOW-BY) FUNCTION PROBLEM, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Erroneous idling
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B21
A: B134 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
ECM 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
D: B137 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
D26
A30
D6
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
D: B137
B21 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
14
53
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
E2 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
E80
1 2
1
2
E80
PCV HOSE
ASSY
EN-05098

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK BLOW-BY HOSE. Is there any disconnection or Repair or replace Go to step 2.
Check the blow-by hose condition. crack in blow-by hose? the blow-by hose.
PCV HOSE ASSEMBLY. circuit of harness
2) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM PCV hose assem-
and PCV hose assembly. bly.
ECM and PCV hose assembly.
(B134) No. 30 — (E80) No. 2:
PCV HOSE ASSEMBLY. more? short circuit of har-
Measure the resistance between PCV hose ness between
assembly and chassis ground. ECM and PCV
Connector & terminal hose assembly.
4 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT OF PCV HOSE Is the resistance less than 5 Ω? Go to step 5. Repair the open
ASSEMBLY. circuit of harness
Measure the resistance of harness between between PCV hose
PCV hose assembly and engine ground. assembly and
Connector & terminal engine ground.
5 CHECK THE PCV HOSE ASSEMBLY. Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Repair the poor Replace the PCV
Measure the resistance between the PCV hose contact in ECM hose assembly.
assembly terminals. and PCV hose
Terminals assembly connec-
No. 1 — No. 2: tor.

DA:DTC P1518 STARTER SWITCH CIRCUIT LOW INPUT

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-213, DTC P1518 STARTER SWITCH CIRCUIT LOW
INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
BATTERY
2 3
B72 IGNITION
AT MT SWITCH
4
INHIBITOR CLUTCH
RELAY SWITCH
B226 B106 E
3
AT MT
STARTER
RELAY
15
13
B225
STARTER MOTOR
16
14
M AT : AT MODEL
B14
MT : MT MODEL
32
20
B136 ECM
B225 B106 B136 B72 B226
1 2 9 13 17 21 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 1 2
10 14 18 22 2 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 4 5 6 3
3 4
11 12 15 16 19 20 23 24 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 4
5 6 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
7 8 25 29 33 37
26 30 34 38
27 28 31 32 35 36 39 40
EN-05081

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK FOR ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY. Is any other DTC displayed? Check DTC using Repair the poor
“List of Diagnostic contact in ECM
Trouble Code connector.
(DTC)”. <Ref. to
EN(H4DOTC)(diag
)-81, List of Diag-
nostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>

DB:DTC P1560 BACK-UP VOLTAGE CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-214, DTC P1560 BACK-UP VOLTAGE CIRCUIT MAL-
FUNCTION, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY

5
SBF-7
6
4
No.13
2
1
6 3
C23
B19
B5
B2
A7
A: B134
B: B135
ECM E
C: B136
D: B137
D1
D2
A5
D3
D7
B21
34
35
36
37
54
E2
B72 B47 B21 A: B134 B: B135
1 2 3 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
4 5 6 3 4 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
5 6 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54 C: B136 D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-04940

Step Check Yes No

1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. tact of the ECM
chassis ground.
MAIN FUSE BOX CONNECTOR. more? short circuit of har-
2) Measure the resistance between ECM and ECM and battery
chassis ground. terminal.
3 CHECK FUSE NO. 13. Is the fuse blown out? Replace the fuse. Repair the harness
and connector.
NOTE:
the following item:
• Open circuit of
harness between
ECM and battery
• Poor contact in
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
battery terminal

DC:DTC P1602 CONTROL MODULE PROGRAMMING ERROR

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-216, DTC P1602 CONTROL MODULE PROGRAM-
MING ERROR, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Engine keeps running at higher speed than specified idle speed.
• Engine keeps running at a lower speed than the specified idle speed.
• Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY
5
BATTERY
3
SBF-7
6
4
2
1
B47 B137 ECM
E
11
10
8
B21
45
44
48
42
43
E2
E5 E16 E6 E17
2
2
1
2
#1 #2 #3 #4
FUEL INJECTOR
E5 E6 B21 B47 B137
E16 E17 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 3 4 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
1 2 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
5 6 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
26 27 28 29 30 31
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
EN-04943

BATTERY
CONTROL RELAY
7
5 4 6
6
8 MAIN RELAY
B47
C21
C1
ECM
A: B134 C: B136
A19 D: B137 E
A29
A28
A18
D3
D2
D1
D7
A5
D4
D5
C6
B122
*
B21
*
21
37
35
34
54
36
22
39
38
6
E2
:TERMINAL No.
5
1
2
3
E
ELECTRONIC
THROTTLE CONTROL
E
E57
B362 B122 B21 E57 B47
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2
3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1 2 5 6 7 8 3 4
4 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 5 6
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
5
7 8
6
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
A: B134 C: B136 D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-05089
Step Check Yes No

priate DTC using
nostic Trouble
Code (DTC)”.
<Ref. to
EN(H4DOTC)(diag
)-81, List of Diag-
nostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
2 CHECK ENGINE OIL. Is there a proper amount of Go to step 3. Replace engine oil.
engine oil? <Ref. to
LU(H4SO)-9,
REPLACEMENT,
Engine Oil.>

Step Check Yes No

intake system?
WARNING: 314 kPa (2.9 — 3.2 kg/cm2, 41 ing item.
Place “NO OPEN FLAMES” signs near the — 46 psi)? Fuel pressure is
CAUTION: • Clogged fuel
Be careful not to spill fuel. return line or bent
Measure the fuel pressure while disconnecting hose
pressure regulator vacuum hose from intake Fuel pressure is
manifold. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-25, INSPEC- too low:
TION, Fuel Pressure.> • Improper fuel
CAUTION: pump discharge
fuel pressure gauge. supply line
NOTE:
If fuel pressure does not increase, squeeze the
fuel return hose 2 to 3 times, then measure fuel
pressure again.
After connecting the pressure regulator vacuum 260 kPa (2.35 — 2.65 kg/cm2, ing item.
hose, measure fuel pressure. <Ref. to 33 — 38 psi)? Fuel pressure is
ME(H4DOTC)-25, INSPECTION, Fuel Pres- too high:
sure.> • Faulty pressure
CAUTION: regulator
fuel pressure gauge. return line or bent
NOTE: hose
• If fuel pressure does not increase, squeeze Fuel pressure is
fuel return hose 2 to 3 times, then measure fuel too low:
pressure again. • Faulty pressure
• If the measured value at this step is out of regulator
specification, check or replace pressure regula- • Improper fuel
tor and pressure regulator vacuum hose. pump discharge
• Clogged fuel
supply line
ture sensor signal using Subaru Select Monitor FU(H4DOTC)-26,
tor.>

Step Check Yes No

(158°F). FU(H4DOTC)-31,
NOTE:
tor.>
(158°F). FU(H4DOTC)-31,
NOTE:
tor.>

Step Check Yes No

cylinders.
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
terminals on faulty cylinder. to FU(H4DOTC)-
Terminals 33, Fuel Injector.>
No. 1 — No. 2:
nector on faulty
cylinders
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
• Poor contact of
main relay connec-
tor
• Poor contact of
fuel injector con-
nector on faulty
cylinders

Step Check Yes No

2) Measure the resistance between fuel injec- to FU(H4DOTC)-
tor terminals on faulty cylinder. 33, Fuel Injector.>
Terminals
No. 1 — No. 2:
17 CHECK INSTALLATION OF CAMSHAFT PO- Is the camshaft position sensor Tighten the cam- Go to step 18.
SITION SENSOR/CRANKSHAFT POSITION or crankshaft position sensor shaft position sen-
SENSOR. loosely installed? sor or crankshaft
position sensor.
Remove the timing belt cover. does it have damaged teeth? sprocket. <Ref. to
ME(H4DOTC)-52,
Crank Sprocket.>
Turn the crankshaft, and align alignment mark timing belt. <Ref.
on crank sprocket with alignment mark on cylin- to ME(H4DOTC)-
der block. 43, Timing Belt.>
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. trol relay. <Ref. to
2) Remove the electronic throttle control relay. FU(H4DOTC)-47,
3) Connect the battery to terminals No. 5 and Electronic Throttle
No. 6 of electronic throttle control relay. Control Relay.>
Terminals
No. 7 — No. 8:
LAY. the harness
ground.

Step Check Yes No

LAY. ness between
ground.
(B136) No. 21 — (B362) No. 6:
(B136) No. 8 — (B362) No. 1:
chassis ground.
(B134) No. 18 — (B136) No. 6:
1) Connect the connector to ECM. more? short circuit of har-
(B57) No. 4 — Engine ground: Replace the ECM if
defective. <Ref. to
FU(H4DOTC)-44,
Engine Control
Module (ECM).>
(B134) No. 18 — (E57) No. 6:
(B134) No. 28 — (E57) No. 4:
(B134) No. 29 — (E57) No. 3:

Step Check Yes No

ECM and engine
ground
• Poor contact in
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connec-
tor

Outback 2007 2.5, 2,5t 3.0

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Outback 2007 2.5, 2,5t 3.0

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Outback 2007 2.5, 2,5t 3.0

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

asieps_tobira.

book 1 ページ ２０２０年９月２９日 火曜日 午前１１時３５分

2007 LEGACY SERVICE MANUAL QUICK REFERENCE INDEX

HOW TO USE THIS MANUALS HU

All information, illustration and specifi-

FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD. G2420BE1

The manuals contain the latest information at the

HOW TO USE THIS MANUALS

How to Use This Manuals

1. How to Use This Manuals

How to Use This Manuals

: Should be lubricated with oil.

(20) : Should be lubricated with grease.

How to Use This Manuals

15.Main Shaft Assembly for Sin- (A)

11) Tighten the lock nuts to the specified torque us-

(A) Component (D) Cautions (G) Tightening torque

How to Use This Manuals

How to Use This Manuals

5MT: 5-forward speeds with synchromesh and 1-reverse

5MT: 5-forward speeds with synchromesh and 1-reverse

12.OIL 2. Hose Removal/Installation Procedures and

• Inspect the following points in continuous

(1) Contacting the spool. (Do not excessively insert

1. Note 7. LIFT AND JACK

(A) Front (B) Rear

(1) Front crossmember (2) Rear differential

(1) Hook for tie-down

• CHAIN PULLING RANGE AT TIE-DOWN CON- • VEHICLE SINKING VOLUME AT TIE-DOWN

(3) (3) (3) (3)

(1) Chain pulling range at tie-down condition

(F) Front side

(1) Tightening direction of chain

Raising the front wheels Prohibited for full-time AWD model.

Marked : OK, Marked : Prohibited, Marked : Conditionally OK.

• WHEN WIDER HOOD OPENING IS NECESSARY

(A) FWD fuse holder (A) Rigid rack

14.BRAKE TEST (2) When the brake dragging force is large.

• When measurement is difficult to carry out

(A) 15.ON THE CAR WHEEL BALANCING

(A) Balancer body

• ENGINE • AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

5AT • REAR DIFFERENTIAL

• MANUAL TRANSMISSION VA1-TYPE

(1) Type (label)

(1) Transmission serial No.

• Model number label

3. MODEL NUMBER PLATE

The engine and transmission type are as follows.

SAE viscosity No. and applicable temperature

(˚C) –30 –20 –10 0 10 20 30 40

(˚F) –22 –4 14 32 50 68 86 104

(˚C) –30 –20 –10 0 10 20 30 40

(˚F) –22 –4 14 32 50 68 86 104

Procedure Check point

DYNAMIC TEST WITH THE VEHICLE RUNNING

CHECKS AFTER DYNAMIC TEST

1. APPEARANCE CHECK 4. LOCK/UNLOCK AND OPEN/CLOSE OP-

(A) Door lock knob

book 1 ページ２０２０年９月２９日　火曜日　午前１１時３５分